NOS_2_Reference_Set_Vol_3_System_Commands_60459680H_Apr87 NOS 2 Reference Set Vol 3 System Commands 60459680H Apr87

User Manual: Pdf NOS_2_Reference_Set_Vol_3_System_Commands_60459680H_Apr87

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 818

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

60459680

CONTRpL DATA

NOS VERSION 2
REFERENCE SET

Volume 3

SYSTEM COMMANDS

CDC® COMPUTER SYSTEMS:
CYBER 180
CYBER 170
CYBER 70
MODELS 71, 72, 73, 74
6000

REVISION RECORD

REVISION
(04-26-82)
B
(01-27-83)

(10-11-83)

(10-05-84)

DESCRIPTION
Manual released. This manual reflects NOS Version 2 at PSR level 562. This manual documents
parameter-prompting procedures and the following new commands: ALTER, CFO, DELETE, Detach, DMB,
DROP, DUP, GO, LIBTASK, MOVE, PAUSE, QGET, READ, SC0PY, SETFS, SETJ0B, UPR0C, WHATJSN, WRITE, WRITEN.
This manual reflects NOS 2.1 at PSR level 580. This revision Incorporates the MFLINK, MFQUEUE,
SHELL, and new terminal definition commands; menu-generating procedures and new procedure
directives; support of 885-42 disk drives; as well as numerous usability changes. Because of
extensive changes to this manual, change bars and dots are not used. This manual obsoletes all
previous editions.
T h i s m a n u a l r e fl e c t s N O S 2 . 2 a t P S R l e v e l 5 9 6 . T h i s r e v i s i o n i n c o r p o r a t e s t h e f o l l o w i n g f e a t u r e s :
enhanced system security; service class assignment by users; a multihost network; full screen
editing; screen mode input for procedures and other applications; an expansion of online help,
including online manuals; equipment status table expansion; project prologues and epilogues; SCOPE 2
s t a t i o n ; a n d t h e I n t e r a c t i v e Tr a n s f e r F a c i l i t y ( I T F ) . B e c a u s e o f e x t e n s i v e c h a n g e s t o t h i s m a n u a l ,
change bars and dots are not used. This revision obsoletes all previous editions.
T h i s m a n u a l r e fl e c t s N O S 2 . 3 a t P S R l e v e l 6 1 7 . T h i s r e v i s i o n i n c o r p o r a t e s t h e f o l l o w i n g f e a t u r e s :
834 disk subsystem support; 639 magnetic tape unit support; PSU printer support; FSE enhancements;
NOS procedure enhancements, and the following new system commands: BLOCK, EFFECT, ERRMSG, LISTLID,
RECLAIM, REDO, SHOW, and TDU. This manual obsoletes all previous editions.
This manual reflects NOS 2.4.1 at PSR level 630. This revision documents the KEY command and the

(03-28-85)

(12-16-85)

(09-30-86)
H
(04-23-87)

following new features: support of CYBER 180 Models 840, 850, and 860; 895 disk subsystem support;
5870 Non-Impact Printer support; NOS/VE dual-state support; and NOS procedure enhancements.
This manual reflects NOS 2.4.3 at PSR level 647. This revision documents the APPSW command, the RC
t e r m i n a l d e fi n i t i o n c o m m a n d , a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g f e a t u r e s : s u p p o r t o f C Y B E R 1 8 0 m o d e l 9 9 0 ; s u p p o r t o f
836 disk subsystem; enhancements to 533/536 printer support; support of CDCNET version 1; disk error
recovery enhancements (ENQUIRE output); AUTO command internal 0003 byte processing.
This manual reflects NOS 2.5.1 at PSR level 664. This revision documents the XMODEM and DROPDS
command and the following features: support of print train Images, security enhancements, and
miscellaneous technical corrections.
T h i s m a n u a l r e fl e c t s N O S 2 . 5 . 2 a t P S R l e v e l 6 7 8 . T h i s r e v i s i o n d o c u m e n t s s u p p o r t f o r t h e Te l e v i d e o
terminal and the 585 printer, new user messages related to enhancements to tape error recovery,
changes to several procedure directives, and the addition of the .SET directive and the STR, STRB,
and STRD functions.

Publication No.
60459680

REVISION LETTERS I. O, Q, S, X AND Z ARE NOT USED.
Address comments concerning this
manual to:

© 1982, 1983, 1984, 1985, 1986, 1987
by Control Data Corporation
All rights reserved
Printed in the United States of America

Control Data Corporation
Te c h n o l o g y a n d P u b l i c a t i o n s D i v i s i o n
4201 North Lexington Avenue
Saint Paul, MN 55126-6198
or use Comment Sheet in the back of
this manual.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

New features, as well as changes, deletions, and additions to information in this manual, are indicated by bars in the margins or by a dot
near the page number if the entire page is affected. A bar by the page number indicates pagination rather than content has changed.

PAGE

REV

Front Cover
Inside Front
Cover
Title Page

2
3
4
5/6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17

3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-6.1
3-6.2

3-7
3-8
3-9

60459680 H

HH
HH
H
H
H-

PAGE

3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5

H.
H-

4-6
4-7
4-8

HEHG'
H-

4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16

HH-

4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22.1
4-22.2
4-23
4-24
4-24.1/4-24.2
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28

4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-34.1
4-34.2
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38

4-39
4-40
4-40.1/4-40.2
4-41
4-42

REV

PAGE

4-43
4-44
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-53
4-54
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
6-1
6-2

6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7

6-8
6-8.1/6-8.2
6-9
6-10
6-10.1
6-10.2

6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14

6-15
6-16
6-16.1
6-16.2
6-16.3
6-16.4
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
7-1

REV

G
H
H
D
E
H
D
D
E
H
D
H
D
E
E
E
E
C
E
D
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
G
G
G
G
H
H
E
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
D
E
H
F
D
D
D
H
D
D
D
H
D
D
H

PA G E

7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-12.1/7-12.2
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-16.1/7-16.2
7-17
7-18

7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-22.1/7-22.2
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-37
7-38
7-39
7-40
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-50

7-51
7-52
7-53
7-54
7-55
7-56

REV

H
H
H
H
D
D
D
H
D
E
E
E
D
D
G
D
H
H
D
D
D
D
E
E
F
E
H
D
D
D
D
D
G
D
D
D
F
E
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
D
D
D
F
F
D
D
D
D
D

PAGE

7-57
7-58
7-59
7-60
7-61
7-62
7-63
7-64
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-68
7-69
7-70
7-71
7-72
7-73
7-74
7-75
7-76

8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-6.1
8-6.2

8-7
8-8

8-8.1/8-8.2

8-9

8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-20.1/8-20.2
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-33
8-34

REV

PAGE
8-35
8-36
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-42
8-43
8-44
8-45
8-46
8-47
8-48
8-49
8-50
8-51
8-52
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9 - 11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-25
9-26
9-27
9-28
9-29
9-30
9-31
9-32
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-36
9-37
9-38
9-39
9-40
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-44
9-45
9-46
9-47
9-48
9-48.1
9-48.2
9-49
9-50
9-51

REV

F.

PAGE
9-52
9-53
9-54
9-55
9-56
9-57
9-58
9-59
9-60
9-61
9-62
9-63
9-64
9-65
9-66
9-67
9-68
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-4.1/10-4.2
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-8.1/10-8.2
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-22.1/
10-22.2
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-30
10-31
10-32
10-33
10-34
10-35
10-36
10-37
10-38
10-38.1
10-38.2
10-39
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-43
10-44
10-44.1/
10-44.2
10-45
10-46

REV

D.
H.

H-

HH-

D.
H'
H-

H-

H-

H•

PAGE
10-47
10-48
10-49
11-1
11 - 2
11 - 3
11 - 4
11 - 5
11 - 6
11 - 6 . 1 / 11 - 6 . 2
11 - 7
11 - 8
11 - 9
11 - 1 0
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
12-10
12-10.1/
12-10.2
1 2 - 11
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-15
12-16
12-16.1/
12-16.2
12-17
12-18
12-19
12-20
12-21
12-22
12-23
12-24
12-25
12-26
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-9
14-10
14-11
14-12
14-13
14-14
14-15
14-16
14-17
14-18
14-19
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4

REV

H-

PAGE
15-5
15-6
15-7
15-8
15-9
15-10
1 5 - 11
15-12
15-13
15-14
15-15
15-16
15-17
15-18
15-19
15-20
15-20.1/
15-20.2
15-21
15-22
15-23
15-24
15-25
15-26
15-27
15-28
15-29
15-30
15-31
15-32
15-33
15-34
15-35
15-36
15-37
15-38
15-39
15-40
15-41
15-42
15-43
15-44
15-45
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-6
16-7
16-8
16-9
A-l
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-ll
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
B-l
B-2
B-3
B-4

REV

PAGE

REV

B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
B-10
B-ll
B-12
B-13
B-14
B-15
B-16
B-17
B-18
B-19
B-20
B-21
B-22
B-23
B-24
B-25
B-26
B-27
B-28
B-29
B-30
B-31
B-32
B-33
B-34
B-35
B-36
B-37
B-38
B-39
B-40
B-41
B-42
B-43
B-44
B-45
B-46
B-47
B-48
B-49
B-50
B-51
B-52
B-5 3
B-54
B-55
B-56
B-57
B-58
B-5 9
B-60
B-61
B-62
B-63
B-64
B-65
B-66
B-67
B-68
B-69
B-70
B-71
B-7 2
B-73
B-7 4
B-75

.^T^osX

-■^^^v
60459680 H

PAGE
B-76
C-l
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-8
C-9
C-10
C-ll
C-12
C-13
C-14
C-15
D-l
D-2
D-3
D-4
E-l
E-2
F-l
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-7
G-l
G-2
G-3
G-4
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-9
G-10
G-ll
H-l
H-2
H-3
H-4
H-4.1
H-4.2
H-5
H-6
H-7
H-8
H-9
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
J-l
J-2
J-3
J-4
J-5
J-6
J-7
J-8
J-9
J-10
J-ll
J-12
J-13
J-14
J-15
J-16

REV

PAGE
J-17
J-18
J-19
J-20
J-21
J-22
J-23
J-24
J-25
J-26
J-27
J-28
J-29
J-30
K-l
K-2
L-l
L-2
L-3
L-4
L-5
L-6
L-7
L-8
L-9
M-l
M-2
M-3
M-4
M-5
M-6
M-7
M-8
M-9
N-l
N-2
0-1
0-2
0-3
P-l
P-2
P-3
P-4
P-5
P-6
P-7
P-8
Index-1
Index-2
Index-3
Index-4
Index-5
Index-6
Index-7
Index-8
Index-9
Index-10
Index-11
Index-12
Index-13
Index-14
Index-15
Index-16
Comment Sheet
Inside Back
Cover
Back Cover

REV

PAGE

REV

PAGE

REV

PAGE

HHH-

HH-

J$$0&\

60459680 H

5/6

/^%

PREFACE

This manual describes the Network Operating System (NOS) Version 2. NOS can operate on the
following computer systems:
CDC CYBER 180 Computer Systems
Models 810, 830, 835, 840, 845, 850, 855, 860, 870, 990, and 995

^^s

CDC CYBER 170 Computer Systems
Models 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 720, 730, 740, 750, 760, 815, 825, 835, 845, 855,
865, and 875
CDC CYBER 70 Computer Systems
Models 71, 72, 73 and 74
6000 Computer Systems

AUDIENCE
Volume 1, Introduction to Interactive Usage (60459660), is written for the novice.
Volume 2, Guide to System Usage (60459670), is written for the applications or systems
programmer who is unfamiliar with NOS.
Volume 3, System Commands (60459680), is written for all NOS users.
Volume 4, Program Interface (60459690), is written for the experienced COMPASS applications
programmer or systems programmer.
4$$$!\

The reader of each volume should have a knowledge of the material contained in the previous
volumes.

ORGANIZATION
The NOS reference set describes the external features of NOS 2. This reference set
comprises four separate volumes.
Volume 1, Introduction to Interactive Usage, shows a user at an interactive terminal how to
enter, run, and correct programs, and how to create, retrieve, and maintain permanent
fi l e s . O t h e r t o p i c s c o v e r e d i n c l u d e p h y s i c a l t e r m i n a l c o n n e c t i o n , a n d l o g i n / l o g o u t
procedures.
Volume 2, Guide to System Usage, describes the general concepts of NOS and some of the
u t i l i t i e s u s e d w i t h N O S . To p i c s included are job processing, file concepts, procedures,
magnetic tape processing, Modify, and file loading. This volume is a learning tool and does
not contain comprehensive descriptions of all NOS commands.
Volume 3, System Commands, describes the system commands that form the user interface to NOS,

60459680 H

Volume 4, Program Interface, describes the COMPASS program interface to NOS. Detailed
descriptions of function processors and macros available to COMPASS user programs are
included.

SUBMITTING COMMENTS
The last page of this manual is a comment sheet. Please use it to give your opinion on the
manual's usability, to suggest specific improvements, and to report any errors. If the
comment sheet has already been used, you can mail your comments to:
Control Data Corporation
Publications and Graphics Division ARH219
4201
Lexington
St.
Paul,

Avenue
MN

North
5 5 11 2

Additionally, if you have access to SOLVER, an online facility for reporting problems, you
can use it to submit comments about the manual. Declare your problem type as DOC and use
NS2 as the product identifier.

IN CASE OF TROUBLE
Control Data's Central Software > ipport maintains a hotline to assist you if you have
trouble using our products. If you need help beyond that provided in the documentation or
find that the product does not perform as described, call us at one of the following numbers
and a support analyst will work with you.
From USA and Canada: (800) 345-9903
From other countries: (612) 851-4131
The preceding numbers are for help on product usage. Address questions about physical
pac k a g i n g a n d /o r d i s tr i b u ti o n o f p r i n te d materials to Literature and Distribution Services
at the following address:
Control Data Corporation
Literature and Distribution Services
308 North Dale Street
St. Paul, Minnesota 55103
or you can call (612) 292-2101. If you are a Control Data employee, call (612) 292-2100.

CONVENTIONS
REFERENCES TO OTHER MANUALS IN THE NOS REFERENCE SET
Throughout this manual, references to Volumes 1, 2, and 4 of the NOS Reference Set are in
the form: refer to section n, (volume name). If a volume number is not specified, the
reference is to Volume 3.

60459680 H

^^
"^

/pifev

180-CLASS MAINFRAMES
Some of the CYBER 170 Computer Systems share many of the functional and architectural
attributes of the CYBER 180 Computer Systems. Specifically, CYBER 170 Models 815, 825, 835
845, and 855 fall into this category. It is sometimes convenient to refer to the'cYBER 180'
models and these CYBER 170 models collectively. This manual uses the term 180-class
mainframes to refer to this collection.

EXTENDED MEMORY

/p*V

Extended memory for model 176 is large central memory extended (LCME). Extended memory for
the 180-class mainframes and the models 865 and 875 is unified extended memory (UEM) and may
also include extended core storage (ECS) or extended semiconductor memory (ESM). Extended
memory for all other NOS computer systems is either ECS or ESM. ECS and ESM are the only
forms of extended memory that can be shared in a linked shared device multimainframe complex
and can be accessed by a distributive data path (DDP).
In this manual, ECS refers to both ECS and ESM, and extended memory refers to all forms of
extended memory unless otherwise noted.
Programming information for the various forms of extended memory can be found in the COMPASS
Version 3 Reference Manual and in the appropriate computer system hardware reference manual.

60459680 H

CYBER 70 COMPUTER SYSTEMS REFERENCES
References to the CYBER 70 Computer Systems pertain only to models 71, 72, 73, and 74.

CONTROL STATEMENT
The manuals of many NOS products use the term control statement instead of the term command.
This manual uses the term command almost exclusively. You can consider the two synonymous.

EXAMPLES
The following conventions apply to examples that appear in this manual:
• Examples of actual terminal sessions that appear in this manual were produced on a
display terminal in NORMAL character mode unless otherwise specified. Uppercase
characters represent terminal output; lowercase characters represent user input
unless otherwise noted. (However, user input that is displayed within the text of
this manual is shown in uppercase characters). The vertical spacing in examples
does not necessarily coincide with the spacing that appears on your terminal.
• Program examples are written either in FORTRAN 5 or BASIC 3 (hereafter referred to
as just BASIC).
• This manual uses commas to delimit command parameters and periods to terminate y
commands. For clarity, however, commands that appear in text use an opening
parenthesis for their initial delimiter and a closing parenthesis for their
t e r m i n a t o r.
COMMAND FORMAT
Interpret uppercase characters within command formats literally. Lowercase characters are
variables and are described immediately following the line that shows the command format.

SPECIAL KEYBOARD ENTRIES
This manual uses special notation to represent certain keyboard entries:
• @ denotes the message transmission key on the keyboard. Depending on the terminal
class, this key may be the RETURN, CR, CARRIAGE RETURN, NEW LINE, SEND, or ETX key.
For some terminal classes, the RETURN or NEW LINE key also denotes a message
terminator, but the message is kept in the terminal buffer until the corresponding
SEND or ETX key is pressed, sending all messages in the buffer to IAF. Appendix K
supplies more information. IAF and the network respond to the @) by positioning the
c a r r i a g e t o t h e fi r s t c h a r a c t e r p o si ti o n o n th e n e xt l i n e .

• ■•—designates the backspace character.
• The notation CTRL/x directs you to press the control key (which is labeled CTRL,
CNTL, CNTRL, or similar characters) on the terminal and, while holding this key
down, press the key specified by x. For example, CTRL/H means press and hold the
control key while you press the H key.

10

60459680

H

RELATED PUBLICATIONS
The following is a list of NOS operating system manuals and NOS product set reference
manuals.
You might also want to consult the NOS System Information manual. This is an online manual
that includes brief descriptions of all NOS operating system and NOS product set manuals.
You can access this manual by logging into NOS and entering the command EXPLAIN.
These manuals are available through Control Data sales offices or Control Data Literature
Distribution Services (308 North Dale, St. Paul, Minnesota 55103).
If you need a brief description of the product commands and their parameters, you should
refer to the NOS 2 Applications Programmer's Instant.
Control Data Publication

Publication Number

APEX IV Reference Manual

84002550

APL Version 2 Reference Manual

60454000

APT IV Version 2 Reference Manual

17326900

BASIC Version 3 Reference Manual

19983900

CDCNET Conceptual Overview

60461540

CDCNET Terminal Interface Usage Manual

60463850

COBOL Version 5 Reference Manual

60497100

Common Memory Manager Version 1 Reference Manual

60499200

COMPASS Version 3 Reference Manual

60492600

Conversion Aids System Version 2 Reference Manual

19265358

CYBER Database Control System 2 Database Administrator
Reference Manual

60485200

CYBER Database Control System Version 2 Application
Programming Reference Manual

60485300

CYBER Interactive Debug Version 1 Reference Manual

60481400

CYBER Loader Version 1 Reference Manual

60429800

60459680 H

11 I

Control Data Publication

I 12

Publication Number

CYBER Record Manager Advanced Access Methods Version 2
Reference Manual

60499300

CYBER Record Manager Basic Access Methods Version 1.5
Reference Manual

60495700

CYBER 70 Model 71 Computer System Hardware Reference Manual

60453300

CYBER 70 Model 72 Computer System Hardware Reference Manual

60347000

CYBER 70 Model 73 Computer System Hardware Reference Manual

60347200

CYBER 70 Model 74 Computer System Hardware Reference Manual

60347400

CYBER 170 Computer Systems Models 171 through 175
(Levels A, B, C) Model 176 (Level A) Hardware Reference Manual

60420000

CYBER 170 Computer Systems Models 720, 730, 740, 750, and 760,
Model 176 (Level B/C) Hardware Reference Manual

60456100

CYBER 170 Computer System Model 825
Hardware Reference Manual

60469350

CYBER 170 Computer Systems Models 835, 845, and 855
Hardware Reference Manual

60469290

CYBER 170 Computer Systems Models 865 and 875
Hardware Reference Manual

60458920

Data Base Utilities Version 1 Reference Manual

60498800

Data Catalogue 2 Reference Manual

60483200

DDL Version 3 Reference Manual, Volume 1

60481900

DDL Version 3 Reference Manual, Volume 2

60482000

DDL Version 3 Reference Manual, Volume 3

60482100

FORM Version 1 Reference Manual

60496200

FORTRAN Common Library Mathematical Routines Reference Manual

60498200

FORTRAN Data Base Facility Version 1 Reference Manual

60482200

FORTRAN Extended Version 4 Reference Manual

60497800

FORTRAN Extended Version 4 to FORTRAN Version 5 Conversion
Aids Program Version 1 Reference Manual

60483000

FORTRAN Version 5 Common Library Mathematical Routines
Reference Manual

60483100

FORTRAN Version 5 Reference Manual

60481300

General Purpose Simulation System V (GPSS)
General Information Manual

84003900
60459680 H

Control Data Publication

Publication Number

Information Management Facility Version 1 Application
Programming Reference Manual

60484500

Message Control System Version 1 Reference Manual

60480300

Modify Version 1 Reference Manual

60450100

Network Access Method Version 1/Communications Control
Program Version 3 Terminal Interfaces Reference Manual

60480600

Network Access Method Version 1
Host Application Programming Reference Manual

60499500

Network Access Method Version 1 Network
Definition Language Reference Manual

60480000

NOS Full Screen Editor User's Guide

60460420

NOS Version 2 Administration Handbook

60459840

NOS Version 2 Application Installation Handbook

84002760

NOS Version 2 Applications Programmer's Instant

60459360

NOS Version 2 Diagnostic Index

60459390

NOS Version 2 Installation Handbook

60459320

NOS Version 2 Network Terminal User's Instant

60459380

NOS Version 2 Operator/Analyst Handbook

60459310

NOS Version 2 Reference Set, Volume 1,
Introduction to Interactive Usage

60459660

NOS Version 2 Reference Set, Volume 2, Guide to System Usage

60459670

NOS Version 2 Reference Set, Volume 4, Program Interface

60459690

NOS Version 2 Security Administrator's Handbook

60460410

NOS Version 2 System Maintenance Reference Manual

60459300

NOS Version 2 System Overview

60459270

NOS Version 2 Systems Programmer's Instant

60459370

NOS Version 2 Tape Management System (TMS) User Reference Manual

60463110

On-Line Maintenance Software Reference Manual

60454200

Pascal Version 1.1 Reference Manual

60497700

PERT/Time Version 2 Reference Manual

60456030

Query Update Version 3 Reference Manual

60498300

60459680 H

13

Control Data Publication

Publication Number

Remote Batch Facility Version 1 Reference Manual

60499600

Remote Host Facility Access Method Reference Manual

60459990

Remote Host Facility Usage

60460620

SORT/MERGE Version 5 Reference Manual

60484800

SYMPL Version 1 Reference Manual

60496400

TAF/CRM Data Manager Version 1 Reference Manual

60459510

TAF Version 1 Reference Manual

60459500

TAF Version 1 User's Guide

60459520

Text Editor Version 1 Reference Manual

60436100

TOTAL-CDC Version 2 Reference Manual

76070300

Update Version 1 Reference Manual

60449900

XEDIT Version 3 Reference Manual

60455730

5870 Printer User's Reference Manual

60462720

6000 Series Computer Systems Hardware Reference Manual

60100000

8-Bit Subroutines Reference Manual

60495500

DISCLAIMER
This product is intended for use only as
described in this document. Control Data
cannot be responsible for the proper
functioning of undescribed features or
undefined parameters.

I "

60459680 H

CONTENTS

/0$£\

0l^f\

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1-1

System Hardware
Central Processor Unit
Central Memory
Job Field Length
Central Memory Resident
Extended Memory
Peripheral Processors
Peripheral Equipment
System Software
User Programs
Operating System
CYBER Loader
CYBER Record Manager

1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6

2. FILES

2-1

File Names
File Structure
CYBER Record Manager File Structure
NOS File Structure
Physical File Structure
Card Files
Mass Storage Files
Magnetic Tape Files
File Types
Input Files
Queued Files
Local Files
Primary Files
Direct Access Files
Library Files
Permanent Files
Indirect Access Permanent Files
Direct Access Permanent Files
Mass Storage File Residence
Family Devices
Au xi l i a ry D e vi ce s
Alternate Storage Subsystems
Libraries
User Name Library
Program Libraries
User Libraries

2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-6
2-6
2-7

3. JOB FLOW AND EXECUTION

3-1

J o b I n i t i a t i o n a n d Te r m i n a t i o n

3-1

60459680 H

2-11
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17

Batch
Jobs
3-1
Interactive
Jobs
3-2
Login
3-2
Logout and Application
Switching
Procedure
3-4
Submitting Jobs to Remote Hosts 3-6
Job
Origin
Types
3-6.2
Job
Service
Classes
3-6.2
Job
Names
3-7
Job Sequence Name (JSN) 3-7
User
Job
Name
(UJN)
3-8
Va l i d a t i o n
3-8
Accounting
3-8
Job
Scheduling
3-9
Job
Control
3-9
Field
Length
Control
3-9
Input
File
Control
3 - 11
Time
Limit
Control
3 - 11
SRU
Limit
Control
3 - 11
Command
Limit
Control
3 - 11
Rollout
Control
3-12
Error
Control
3-12
Security
Features
3-13
Memory
Protection
3-13
System and File Access Controls 3-13
Security
Access
Levels
3-14
Security Access Catagories 3-16
Responsibilities for Data Security 3-16
S e c u r i t y C o n fl i c t P r o c e s s i n g 3 - 1 7
Job
Completion
3-17
4.

PROCEDURES

4-1

Procedure File Residence and Search
Order
4-2
Procedure
Structure
4-2
Procedure
Processing
4-3
Interactive Parameter Entry 4-4
Procedure
Expansion
4-4
. E X PA N D
Directive
4-6
Inhibit
Character
4-6
Concatenation Character 4-8
.EX
Directive
4-9
Execution of the Command Record 4-9
Procedure
Directives
4-9
Procedure Header (.PROC) Directive 4-11
Interactive
Format
4 - 11
Checklist
Entries
4-13
Special
Va l u e s
4-14

15 |

Checklist
Patterns
4-16
Menu
Format
4-22
Formatting and Help Directives 4-23
.CORRECT
Directive
4-23
.ENDHELP
Directive
4-24
.ENTER
Directive
4-24
.Fn
Directive
4-24.1
.HELP
Directive
4-25
.NOCLR
Directive
4-31
.NOTE
Directive
4-31
. PA G E
Directive
4-32
.PROMPT
Directive
4-32
Expansion Control Directives 4-33
.CC
Directive
4-33
. E X PA N D
Directive
4-33
.IC
Directive
4-33
.SET
Directive
4-34
File
Directives
4-34.1
. D ATA
Directive
4-34.1
.EOF (or .EOP) Directive 4-38
.EOR (or .EOS) Directive 4-38
Branching
Directives
4-38
.ELSE
Directive
4-38
.ENDIF
Directive
4-39
.EX
Directive
4-39
.IF (or .IFE) Directive 4-40
.COMMENT (.*) Directive 4-40.1
Calling a Procedure (BEGIN Command) 4-41
Requesting Help on Procedure Calls 4-46
Ending a Procedure (REVERT Command) 4-51
Parameter Matching Modes 4-53
Order-Dependent
Mode
4-53
Order-Independent Mode 4-53
5.

COMMAND

Command
Command
Exit

PROCESSING

5-1

Format
Processing
Flow
Processing

5-2
5-5
5-7

6. FLOW CONTROL COMMANDS 6-1
Command
Syntax
Operators
Arithmetic
Operators
Relational
Operators
Logical
Operators
String
Operators
Order
of
Evaluation
Operands
Constants
Numeric
Strings
Literals
Symbolic
Names
Functions

6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-12

FILE
Function
DT
Function
LEN
Function
NUM
Function
STR
Function
STRB
Function
STRD
Function
Command
Descriptions
BEGIN
Command
D I S P L AY
Command
ELSE
Command
ENDIF
Command
ENDW
Command
EXIT
Command
IF
(or
IFE)
Command
MODE
Command
NOEXIT
Command
ONEXIT
Command
REVERT
Command
SET
Command
SKIP
Command
WHILE
Command

6-12
6-14
6-16
6-16
6-16.1
6-16.2
6-16.3
6-16.3
6-16.3
6-16.4
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-19
6-20
6-22
6-24
6-24
6-24
6-25
6-30
6-31

7. JOB CONTROL COMMANDS 7-1
BLOCK
Command
7-2
CFO
Command
7-3
CHARGE
Command
7-4
C H VA L
Command
7-5
CLASS
Command
7-7
COMMENT
Command
7-9
CTIME
Command
7-10
D AY F I L E
Command
7-10
DROP
Command
7-12.1
ENQUIRE
Command
7-13
ENTER
Command
7-21
ERRMSG
Command
7-22
GO
Command
7-22
HTIME
Command
7-22.1
Job
Command
7-23
LDI
Command
7-26
LENGTH
Command
7-27
LIMITS
Command
7-28
Resource
Limits
7-29
Other
Characteristics
7-30
User
Permissions
7-31
Network
Applications
7-32
Local
Applications
7-32
Privileged Network Applications 7-32
Shell
Permissions
7-32
Security
Permissions
7-33
Security Access Categories 7-33
Security Access
Levels
7-33
Service
Classes
7-33
Default Service Classes 7-33
LISTLID
7-36

/*^^\

16

60459680 H

MACHINE
Command
MFL
Command
NORERUN
Command
NOTE
Command
OFFSW
Command
ONSW
Command
PA S S W O R
Command
PA U S E
Command
PROTECT
Command
QGET
Command
QUEUE7
Command
RERUN
Command
RESOURC
Command
Deadlock
Prevention
Single
Resource
Use
Ta p e
Units
Resource Overcommitment
Altering Resource Requirements
Unit
Assignment
RFL
Command
ROLLOUT
Command
RTIME
Command
S E TA S L
Command
SETCORE
Command
SETJAL
Command
SETJOB
Command
SETJSL
Command
SETPR
Command
SETTL
Command
SHELL
Command
STIME
Command
SUBMIT
Command
SWITCH
Command
UPROC
Command
USECPU
Command
USER
Command

7-39
7-39
7-40
7-40
7-41
7-42
7-42
7-44
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-50
7-50
7-52
7-54
7-54
7-55
7-56
7-57
7-57
7-58
7-58
7-59
7-60
7-61
7-62
7-63
7-64
7-64
7-66
7-67
7-68
7-73
7-73
7-74
7-74

8. COMMANDS FOR INTERACTIVE JOBS 8-1
Te r m i n a l
Control
Commands
8-2
ASCII
Command
8-2
AUTO
Command
8-3
BRIEF
Command
8-4
CSET
Command
8-4
EFFECT
Command
8-4
KEY
Command
8-5
LINE
Command
8-6.1
NORMAL
Command
8-7
SCREEN
Command
8-7
TDU
Command
8-8.1
TIMEOUT
Command
8-9
TRMDEF
Command
8-9
Using TRMDEF with NAM/CDCNET 8-10
Examples
8 - 11
S u b s y s t e m S e l e c t i o n C o m m a n d s 8 - 11
ACCESS
Command
8-12

60459680 H

BASIC Command
BATCH Command
EXECUTE Command
FORTRAN Command
FTNTS Command
NULL Command
Interactive Status Commands
Detach Command (ctD)
Immediate Job Status
Command (ctE)
Abbreviated Job Status
Command (ctS)
Job Processing Commands
APPSW Command
BYE Command
DIAL Command
EXPLAIN Command
GOODBYE Command
HELLO Command
HELL07 Command
HELL07 Directives
HELP Command
HELPME Command
LIB Command
LIST Command
LOGIN Command
LOGOUT Command
NOSORT Command
RECOVER Command
REDO Command
RUN Command
Secure Login Command
SHOW Command
TEXT Command
WHATJSN Command
X Command
XMODEM Command
Primary File Editing Commands
Parameter Format
Suppressing Editing Responses
Line Number Overlap
Inserting Lines
ALTER Command
DELETE Command
DUP Command
LIST Command
MOVE Command
READ Command
RESEQ Command
WRITE Command
WRITEN Command

8-12
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16

8-17
8-18
8-18
8-19
8-20.1
8-20.1
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-26
8-26
8-26
8-28
8-28
8-29
8-29
8-30
8-34
8-35
8-36
8-36
8-37
8-37
8-38
8-38
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-41
8-42
8-42
8-44
8-45
8-46
8-48
8-49
8-51
8-51
8-52

9. FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

9-1

ASSIGN Command
BKSP Command

9-2
9-4

8-17

17

CLEAR Command
COPY Command
Copy Termination
Block Sizes
Processing Options
COPYBF Command
COPYBR Command
COPYCF Command
COPYCR Command
COPYEI Command
COPYSBF Command
COPYX Command
DOCMENT Command
EVICT Command
FCOPY Command
LIST80 Command
LOCK Command
L072 Command
MFQUEUE Command
Parameter Descriptions
The Routing Directive
NEW Command
OUT Command
OVWRITE Command
PACK Command
PRIMARY Command
RENAME Command
REQUEST Command
RESEQ Command
RETURN Command
REWIND Command
ROUTE Command
Parameter Descriptions
Implicit Routing
SCOPY Command
SECHDR Command
SETFAL Command
SETFS Command
SKIPEI Command
SKIPF Command
SKIPFB Command
SKIPR Command
SORT Command
TCOPY Command
TDUMP Command
UNLOAD Command
UNLOCK Command
VERIFY Command
WRITEF Command
WRITER Command
10. PERMANENT FILE COMMANDS
Common Parameters
APPEND Command
ATTACH Command
CATLIST Command
CHANGE Command
COMMON Command

18

9-5
9-5
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-20
9-22
9-23
9-26
9-26
9-27
9-31
9-31
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-35
9-36
9-37
9-37
9-38
9-40
9-42
9-43
9-44
9-44
9-50
9-51
9-54
9-55
9-56
9-56
9-57
9-57
9-58
9-58
9-59
9-62
9-64
9-65
9-65
9-68
9-68

DEFINE Command
GET Command
DROPDS Command
MFLINK Command
MFLINK Directives
APPEND Directive
ATTACH Directive
CHANGE Directive
CHARGE Directive
DEFINE Directive
DROPDS Directive
GET Directive
PACKNAM Directive
PERMIT Directive
PURGE Directive
REPLACE Directive
SAVE Directive
USER Directive
Interactive Use of MFLINK
OLD Command
PACKNAM Command
PERMIT Command
PURGALL Command
PURGE Command
RECLAIM Command
Magnetic Tapes
Command Format
RECLAIM Output
REPLACE Command
SAVE Command
SETPFAC Command
SETPFAL Command

10-17
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-24
10-24
10-25
10-25
10-25
10-25
10-25
10-26
10-26
10-26
10-26
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-30
10-31
10-32
10-33
10-34
10-35
10-44
10-45
10-46
10-48
10-49

11. LOAD/DUMP MEMORY COMMANDS

11-1

DMB Command
DMD Command
DMDECS Command
DMP Command
DMPECS Command
LBC Command
LOC Command
PBC Command
RBR Command
WBR Command

11-1
11-5
11-6
11-6.1
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-9
11-9
11-10

12. TAPE MANAGEMENT

12-1

Tape Assignment
10-1 Command Rules
Processing Options
10-2 ASSIGN Command
10-7 BLANK Command
10-7 LABEL Command
10-10 LISTLB Command
10-15 REQUEST Command
10-16 VSN Command

12-1
12-2
12-3
12-5
12-9
12-11
12-19
12-21
12-25
60459680 H

13.

C H E C K P O I N T / R E S TA RT

CKP
R E S TA RT

Command
Command

13-1
13-1
13-2

14. SYSTEM UTILITY COMMANDS 14-1
EDIT
FSE
KRONREF
MODIFY
OPLEDIT
PDU
PROFILE
U P D AT E
XEDIT
15.

Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command

LIBRARY

MAINTENANCE

14-1
14-2
14-4
14-5
14-8
14-10
1 4 - 11
14-14
14-18
15-1

Library File Access Methods 15-1
Library
Record
Types
15-2
C ATA L O G
Command
15-5
COPYL and COPYLM Commands 15-7
GTR
Command
1 5 - 11
ITEMIZE
Command
15-14
LIBEDIT
Command
15-17
Command
Format
15-18
LIBEDIT
Directives
15-20
ADD
Directive
15-23
BEFORE
Directive
15-24
BUILD
Directive
15-24
COMMENT
Directive
15-25
COPY
Directive
15-25
D AT E
Directive
15-25
DELETE
Directive
15-26
FILE
Directive
15-26
IGNORE
Directive
15-27
INSERT or AFTER Directive 15-27
LIBGEN
Directive
15-28

LIST
Directive
NEW
Directive
NOINS
Directive
NOREP
Directive
NOREW
Directive
OLD
Directive
RENAME
Directive
REPLACE
Directive
REWIND
Directive
TYPE or NAME Directive
VFYLIB
Directive
LIBEDIT
Output
LIBGEN
Command
ULIB
Command
VFYLIB
Command
Library Processing Examples
LIBRARY
Command
Maximum Size of Global Library
Set
Library
Search
Order
Examples

15-28
15-28
15-28
15-29
15-29
15-29
15-29
15-30
15-30
15-31
15-31
15-31
15-32
15-34
15-35
15-37
15-43
15-43
15-44
15-44

16. TERMINAL INPUT/OUTPUT 16-1
Te r m i n a l s
16-1
Input/Output
Conventions
16-2
Input
From
Te r m i n a l
16-2
Length of Output/Input Lines 16-3
Te r m i n a t i n g
Input
Line
16-3
Correcting
Input
Line
16-3
Deleting
Input
Line
16-4
Entering Input Before Prompts 16-4
Page
Wait
16-5
Suspending
Output
16-5
Aborting
Output
Block
16-5
Interrupting
Job
Step
16-6
Te r m i n a t i n g
Job
Step
16-6
Continuing a Suspended Job 16-7
Using ATTN on IBM 2741 Terminals 16-8
Control
Bytes
16-9

APPENDIXES
A. CHARACTER SETS

A-l

Character Set Anomalies
Character Set Tables
Interactive Jobs
Batch Jobs
Jobs Using Line Printers
Jobs Using Magnetic Tape:

A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-l 2

B. DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

B-l

C. GLOSSARY
60459680 E

C-l

D. SAMPLE JOB OUTPUT
TERMINAL CHARACTER CONVERSION

D-l
E-l

Data Input
Data Output

E-l
E-2

F. CARD FILE DATA CONVERSION

F-l

Input Card File Formats
Coded Cards
Conversion Modes

F-2
F-3
F-3

19

/^s^\

Literal Input
Binary Cards
Summary
Punch File Formats
Coded Cards (Punch)
Binary Cards (Punch B)
Absolute Binary Cards (P8)

F-3
F-5
F-5
F-5
F-6
F-6
F-7

(AR) - Automatic Character
(AR)
R
e
Recognition
(BF) - Blocking Factor
(BF)
Break Key as User Break 1
(BR)
(BS)
Backspace Character
(Bl)
Interruption or
User Break 1 Character
(B2) - Termination or
User Break 2 Character
(CH) - Display Terminal
Characteristics
(CI) - Carriage Return Idle Count
(CN) - Cancel Character
(CP) - Cursor Positioning after
Input
(CT) - Network Control Character
(DL) - Delimiters for SingleMessage Transparent Input Mode
(EB) - End-of-Block Character
(EL) - End-of-Line Character
(EP) - Echoplex Mode
(FA) - Full-ASCII Input Mode
(HC) - Host Connection
(HD) - Display of Host Nodes
(HN) - Host Node Selection
(HS) - Host Selection
(IC) - Flow Control for Input
Devices
(IN) - Input Device and
Transmission Mode
(LI) - Line Feed Idle Count
(LK) - Lockout of Unsolicited
Messages
(MS) - Message to Network
Operator
(OC) - Flow Control for Output
Devices
(OP) - Output Device Selection
(PA) - Parity Processing
(PG) - Page Waiting
(PL) - Page Length
(PW) - Page Width
(RC) - Reset Terminal
Characteristics
(SE) - Special Editing Mode
(TC) - Terminal Class Command
(TM) - Terminating a TerminalHost Connection
(XL) - Multimessage Transparent
Mode

G . A N S I TA P E L A B E L F O R M AT S G - l
Required
Labels
G-l
V O L 1 - Vo l u m e H e a d e r L a b e l G - 2
HDR1 - First File Header Label G-4
E0F1 - First End-Of-File Label G-8
E0V1 - First End-Of-Volume Label G-9
Optional
Labels
G-10
HDR2 through HDR9 - Additional
File
Header
Labels
G-10
E0F2 through E0F9 - Additional
End-Of-File
Labels
G-10
E0V2 through E0V9 - Additional
End-Of-Volume
Labels
G-10
User Labels G-ll
H. LINE PRINTER CARRIAGE CONTROL H-l

|
I
|

I

Printed
Data
Paper
Length
580
Line
Printers
533/536
and
585
Printers
Carriage
Control
Format Channel Selection on
Non-PFC
Printers
Format Channel Selection on
533/536
Printers
Carriage
Control
Arrays
Array
Syntax

H-4.2
H-7
H-7

e rp vl e d
ER xeas m

H-9

I.

Format

O B S O L E T E TA P E

Channels
F O R M AT S

B
(Blocked)
Format
E
(Line
Image)
Format
X
(External)
Format
E n d - o f - Ta p e / E n d - o f - R e e l C o n d i t i o n s
J. NAM/CCP TERMINAL DEFINITION
COMMANDS
Introduction
Te r m i n a l D e fi n i t i o n C o m m a n d F o r m a t
Restrictions
T e r m i n a l D e fi n i t i o n C o m m a n d s
(AB) - Abort Output Block
Character

20

H-l
H-l
H-l
H-2
H-2
H-4.2

1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-3

J-l
J-l
J-3
J-4
J-4

K.

DELIMITING AND TRANSMITTING
TERMINAL INPUT

J-5
J-6
J-6
J-7
J-7
J-8
J-8
J-9
J-9
J-10
J-10
J-ll
J-l 2
J-13
J-14
J-14
J-15
J-15
J-17
J-17
J-18
J-18
J-20
J-20
J-21
J-21
J-21
J-2 2
J-23
J-23
J-24
J-24
J-24
J-25
J-26
J-27

K-l

Physical End-of-Line (Line Feed)
Logical End-of-Line (Carriage Return)
Message Transmission

K-l
K-l
K-l

J-5
60459680 H

jgg^N.

L. PASSIVE PROCEDURES
.PROC
Directive
Procedure and Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Matching
Order-Dependent Parameter
Matching
Mode
Order-Independent Parameter
Matching
Mode

L-l

0. INTERACTIVE TRANSFER FACILITY (ITF) 0-1

L-l
L-2
L-2
L-2
L-6

0-2
0-2

P. FILE TRANSFERS USING XMODEM

P-l

General Description
Te l e t y p e w r i t e r
Control Characters
Input Lines
Punching Tape Off-Line
Tape Mode
Punching a Tape On-Line
Cor r ec t io n s

M-l XMODEM Command
Using XMODEM in Prompting Mode
M-l Sending a File from a CYBER
M-l Receiving a File from a Micro
M - 2 C o n fi g u r a t i o n F i l e
M-2 File Transfer Notes
M-3
Te x t
Files
M-3
CYBER
Binary
M-4
Micro
Binary
M-4 Limitations and Considerations

N. MASS STORAGE DEVICE STATISTICS

N-l

M. PAPER TAPE OPERATIONS

0-1
0-1

Selecting the ITF Application
Selecting a Remote CYBER 200 System
Processing Your Job on the
Remote CYBER 200
Terminating Your ITF Session

P-l
P-3
P-3
P-4
P-4
P-6
P-6
P-6
P-6
P-7

INDEX
FIGURES
1-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
3-1
3-2
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
5-1
7-1

Central Memory Allocation
Logical Structure of Files
NOS and CRM File Terminology
Sample Card File Structure
Use of ANSI Labels
FORTRAN Compile and Execute Deck
Submitting Jobs to Remote Hosts
Procedure File Structure
TESTPN with Valid Entry
TESTPN with Invalid Entry
Summary of Checklist Entries
Calling a Procedure
Command Processing Flow
QUEUE7 Execute Queue Sample
Listing
7-2 QUEUE7 Input Queue Sample Listing
7-3 QUEUE7 Output Queue Sample Listing

1-3
2-2
2-3
2-6
2-8
3-2

3-6.1
4-3
4-5
4-5

4-15
4-41

7-4

15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
F-l
H-l
H-2

5-6
L-l

7-47
7-48
7-49

L-2

Resource Commitment Processing
( S i m p l i fi e d )
7-53
Random Access File Structure 15-2
LIBEDIT Input and Output 15-18
User Library Structure 15-33
Maximum Size of Global Library
Set
15-43
Examples of Coded Card
Conversion
F-4
Carriage Control Tape Format
(Standard Paper Length; 6LPI) H-5
Carriage Control Tape Format
(Short Paper Length; 8LPI) H-6
Keyword Substitution in Two
Procedures
L-5
Keyword Substitution in
Nested
Procedures
L-9

0^\
V

60459680 G

21

TABLES
2-1 Physical File Structure on
D i ff e r e n t D e v i c e s
2-2 Data Representation on
Magnetic Tape
3-1 User Job Access Levels
4-1 Procedure Directives
4 - 2 Programmable Function Keys for
Procedures
4 - 3 Help on Procedure Calls
9-1 Range of Permissible Formats
for the COPY Command
9-2 Code Set-Line Terminator
Reference Chart
9-3 Compatible File Structures for
the VERIFY Command
10-1 Access Mode Granted When
Attaching a Currently Attached
Direct Access File
A - l Character Sets for Interactive
Jobs
A-2 Character Sets for Batch Jobs

A-3
2-5
A-4
2-7
3-15
4-10

A-5
A-6

4-25
4-48

H-l

9-6

H-2

9-24

J-l
J-2

9-67
K-l
10-10

L-l

A-5
A-7

L-2

ASCII to 6/12-Bit Display Code
Conversion
Nine-Track ASCII Coded Tape
Conversion
Nine-Track EBCDIC Coded Tape
Conversion
Seven-Track Coded Tape
Conversions
Carriage Control Characters for
512/580 and 5870 Printers
Carriage Control Characters for
585
Printers
D e f a u l t T e r m i n a l D e fi n i t i o n s
Parameter Ranges for Terminal
D e fi n i t i o n
Commands
Default Message Delimiters
and Transmission Keys
Parameter Substitution in
Order-Dependent Mode
Parameter Substitution in
Order-Independent Mode

A-10
A-l3
A-l4
A-l5
H-3
H-4
J-28
J-29
K-2
L-4
L-8

'*^^S\

22

60459680 H

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

NOS is capable of several concurrent processing modes. The following are the processing
modes available.
• Local batch.
• Remote batch.
• Transaction.

/ff^x

• Interactive.
The network processing modes (remote batch, transaction, and interactive) operate through
the Network Access Method (NAM) communications software. These processing modes are
implemented, respectively, by the following NAM applications: Remote Batch Facility (RBF),
Tr a n s a c t i o n F a c i l i t y ( TA F ) , a n d I n t e r a c t i v e F a c i l i t y ( I A F ) .
The primary emphasis of this manual is interactive and local batch processing. For the
other processing modes, consult the appropriate manuals listed in the preface.
NOS, like all operating systems, is the interface between you and the capabilities of system
hardware components. The remainder of this section describes the hardware and software that
make up a NOS-controlled computer system. In most cases, you need not understand the
operation of system hardware or the internal operation of system software. This manual
describes these topics only as general background for understanding NOS commands.

SYSTEM HARDWARE
NOS can operate within the CYBER 180, CYBER 170, CYBER 70, and 6000 Computer Systems (refer I
to the preface for an exhaustive list of model numbers). The primary hardware components of ■
each system are the following.
Central processor unit(s).
Central memory.
Extended memory (optional).
Pe ri p h e ra l p ro ce sso rs.
Peripheral equipment.

0^^.
60459680

E

1-1

CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT
The central processor unit (CPU) executes instructions and manipulates and stores data
retrieved from central memory. The number and type of CPUs within a mainframe vary with the
machine model. As a result, some models can execute additional instructions. These model
differences do not affect applications written in higher level languages.

CENTRAL MEMORY
The primary functions of central memory (CM) are:
• To buffer data to and from the peripheral processors.
•

To

transfer

instructions

and

data

to

and

from

the

CPU.

^*^v

Job Field Length
The job field length is the portion of central memory that is assigned to your job. Several
jobs can reside in CM simultaneously. Each job is assigned a starting CM address (its
reference address or RA) and is allocated an initial field length (the CM words in which the
job resides and executes). The field length is adjusted during job execution as described
in section 3. Figure 1-1 shows a job field length within CM.
A r e f e r e n c e t o a n a d d r e s s o u t s i d e t h e j o b ' s fi e l d l e n g t h r a n g e c a u s e s a h a r d w a r e e r r o r /
condition and job termination.
The maximum field length depends on the CM size and installation parameters used to control
memory usage. The system assigns the CPU to jobs requiring CPU activity. Rapid switching
of CPU control between jobs enables them to execute concurrently. The exact amount of time
allowed for each job depends on system activity and system parameter settings. Thus, the
time required to complete a job may vary from run to run, although the actual CPU execution
t i m e i s s i m i l a r.
When a job completes, aborts, or rolls out (that is, its execution is suspended), the field
length is released, cleared, and made available to another job.

1-2

60459680

C

CENTRAL
MEMORY
CENTRAL
MEMORY
RESIDENT
ABSOLUTE
ADDRESS

REFERENCE
ADDRESS (p)

RA
RA + p

0*£p\

t This manual assumes that your system does not require the entry of a personal identifier.
For more information about the personal identifier refer to Volume 2 of the NOS 2
Reference Set.

60459680

H

3-3

The following example shows a login sequence where you have recoverable jobs.t Again, your
entries appear in lowercase characters.
I WELCOME TO THE NOS SOFTWARE SYSTEM.
COPYRIGHT CONTROL DATA 1978, 198X.
YY/MM/DD. HH.MM.SS T01A75
N E T W O R K O P E R AT I N G S Y S T E M N O S 2
FAMILY: ,usernam,passwrd,iaf
YOUR PASSWORD WILL BE EXPIRED YY/MM/DD
JSN: ADYE, NAMIAF
RECOVERABLE JOBCS)
JSN

UJN

S TAT U S

TIMEOUT

AARQ AN2A SUSPENDED 26 MIN.
AASF AN2A SUSPENDED 28 MIN.
ENTER GO TO CONTINUE CURRENT JOB,
RELIST TO LIST RECOVERABLE JOBS,
OR DESIRED JSN: go
READY.
Additionally, some sites may require you to enter charge information during login (refer to
CHARGE command in section 7).

Logout and Application Switching Procedure
When you have finished using IAF, you can either log out or switch to another application.
The logout procedure disconnects you from the host. Application switching ends your session
with IAF but allows you to continue processing under the control of another application
(such as RBF).
To terminate your terminal session, enter one of the following:
GOODBYE or BYE or LOGOUT
The system responds by printing:
UN=username LOG OFF hh.mm.ss.
JSN=jsn
SRU-S
s.sss
CHARACTERS=xxxxxKCHS
IAF CONNECT TIME hh.mm.ss.
LOGGED OUT.
This display is followed by additional logout information provided by network software.

t This manual assumes that your system does not require the entry of a personal identifier.
For more information about the personal identifier refer to Volume 2 of the NOS 2
Reference Set.

3-4

60459680

H

The following is a description of the variable items in the logout display:
Item

Description

username User name you entered during login.
h h . m m . s s . T h e fi r s t o c c u r r e n c e o f h h . m m . s s . i n d i c a t e s t h e t i m e o f
logout. The second occurrence indicates the length of time
your terminal was connected to IAF.
jsn

Yo u r

job

sequence

name.

s . s s s A m e a s u r e o f t h e s y s t e m r e s o u r c e s u s e d w h i l e c o n n e c t e d t o I A F.
xxxxxxxx A count of the total number of input and output characters read
from, or written to, your terminal.
ct

The

had

The

network

host

control character for your terminal. (The network
c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r s p e c i fi c t e r m i n a l m o d e l s a r e l i s t e d i n
Ta b l e J - l . )

availability display (HAD). The HAD appears if you
have enabled it with the HD terminal definition command (refer
to appendix J) or if you are operating in a multihost
environment.

jpffiv
IAF automatically logs out the terminal if no activity has been registered in a site-defined
timeout period (the default is 10 minutes), unless you have a no-timeout terminal status.
Refer to the discussion of the LIMITS command for further information.
When IAF logs out a dial-up terminal to the system, the system automatically disconnects the
terminal after a site-determined period of time (2 minutes is the default). You may wish to
log out without disconnecting the terminal. To log out of the system and reinitialize the
login sequence, enter:
HELLO

LOGIN
IAF logs out the current job, issues the normal logout messages, and then causes the network
to initiate a new login sequence. Any terminal characteristics, such as page width or
terminal class set in the previous job, remain in effect.

/^*v
60459680 H

3-5

If you wish to leave the IAF application but remain connected to the network and use another
application, you can enter one of the following:
BYE,application
GOODBYE.application
HELLO,application
LOGIN,application
LOGOUT,application
In these commands, the term application means a product that uses the network for terminal
communications. Other applications include TAF, MCS, TVF, PNI, and RBF (refer to the BYE ^p^
command in section 8). Other site-provided applications may also be available. All 1
terminal characteristics in effect under IAF remain in effect under the new application.
After you enter one of the above commands, the system prints the logout message and
disconnects the terminal from IAF. If the site has authorized you to access the
application, the system connects the terminal to the named application. If the named
application is not present or if the site has not granted you access to this application,
the system issues an error message and the prompt:
terminalname - APPLICATION:
where terminalname is the name the network has given your terminal. -^^s
You can again enter the name of an application, or you can enter BYE or LOGOUT to log out or
HELLO or LOGIN to reinitiate the login sequence.

SUBMITTING JOBS TO REMOTE HOSTS
Some sites use multiple host network configurations in which you can log in to a host
mainframe and then submit jobs to other mainframes (remote hosts) in that computer system.
There are various ways in which sites can configure these computer systems, and the means by ""^s
w h i c h y o u s u b m i t j o b s t o a r e m o t e h o s t d e p e n d o n y o u r s y s t e m c o n fi g u r a t i o n , t h e t y p e o f >
remote host, and the nature of the jobs. In all cases, however, you must have special
authorization to submit such jobs (refer to the LIMITS command in section 7).
In general, you can submit a batch job to a remote host by specifying the remote host with
the ST=lid parameter of the Job command or the ROUTE command. If the remote host is a
SCOPE 2 system and the batch job requires interactive input or output, use the HELL07
command. If the remote host is connected through the Queued File Transfer Facility (QTF)
and the batch job has special routing requirements (requirements not provided by ROUTE
parameters), use the MFQUEUE command. If you want to retrieve or change the attributes of
permanent files on such a remote host, you need not submit a complete batch job. You can
use the MFLINK command from a job on your host mainframe.
If you want to connect your interactive terminal to a Virtual Storage Operating System
(operable on a CYBER 200 computer system), select the Interactive Transfer Facility (ITF)
during login or with the BYE, GOODBYE, HELLO, LOGIN, or LOGOUT command.
In a dual-state system, you can submit a batch job from the NOS system to the NOS/VE system
using the ROUTE command. The ROUTE ST=lid parameter routes a NOS file to the NOS/VE batch '*S\
input
queue.
The
fi l e
must
be
written
in
6/12-bit
display
code.
/

3-6

60459680 G

JOB ORIGIN TYPES
When a job enters the system, the system determines the job origin type according to the
m e a n s u s e d f o r j o b i n i t i a t i o n . I t s o r i g i n i d e n t i fi c a t i o n r e m a i n s w i t h t h e j o b t h r o u g h o u t
job processing. The job origin type determines how the job is handled and how it exits from
the system.
The four origin types and their system symbols are as follows (system symbols are described
in section 6):
Origin

Type

System

Symbol
SYO

Interactive
Local

batch

Remote

batch

IAO
BCO
RBO

System origin jobs originate at the system console, interactive jobs all enter through IAF,
local batch jobs enter through central site batch devices, and remote batch jobs enter
through RBF.
If you are so authorized (refer to the LIMITS command), you can also initiate jobs using the
HELL07, MFQUEUE, LDI, ROUTE, or SUBMIT commands. Depending on how you specify the
parameters of these commands, the resulting jobs can either be local batch or remote batch
in origin type.

JOB SERVICE CLASSES
Every
job's
class
job's

job in the
scheduling
assignment
origin type

system is assigned a service class. This service class determines the
priority as the job flows through the system. You can make this service
or you can let the system assign it a default service class based on the
and your validation limits (the privileges your site has granted you).

Unless changed by your site, the system has the following 14 service classes:
Service Class

60459680 F

Two-character
Mnemonic

Deadstart

DS

System

SY

Local batch

BC

Remote batch

RB

Interactive

TS

Detached interactive

DI

Network supervisor

NS

Subsystem

SS

Maintenance

MA

One-character
Mnemonic
A

3-6.1/3-6.2

Figure 3-2 summarizes the methods of submitting jobs to remote hosts.

Type of Job Being Submitted

Command/Application

Special Host Type/
Connection Type

Job Command
(ST=lid parameter)
ROUTE Command
(ST=lid parameter)

Batch

No special
requirements.

HELL07 Command

Batch (with interactive I/O)

SCOPE 2 system.

MFQUEUE Command

Batch (with special routing requirements)

RHF (LCN, CDCNET,
or CCP).

ITF Application

Interactive

VSOS system
(CYBER 200).

MFLINK Command

Part of a batch or interactive job
(permanent file manipulations)

RHF (LCN, CDCNET,
or CCP).

Figure 3-2. Submitting Jobs to Remote Hosts

60459680 G

3-6.1

JOB ORIGIN TYPES
When a job enters the system, the system determines the job origin type according to the
m e a n s u s e d f o r j o b i n i t i a t i o n . I t s o r i g i n i d e n t i fi c a t i o n r e m a i n s w i t h t h e j o b t h r o u g h o u t
job processing. The job origin type determines how the job is handled and how it exits from
the system.
The four origin types and their system symbols are as follows (system symbols are described
in se c t i o n 6 ) :
Origin Type

Symbol

System

SYO

Interactive

IAO

Local batch

BCO

Remote batch

RBO

System origin jobs originate at the system console, interactive jobs all enter through IAF,
local batch jobs enter through central site batch devices, and remote batch jobs enter
through RBF.
If you are so authorized (refer to the LIMITS command), you can also initiate jobs using the
HELL07, MFQUEUE, LDI, ROUTE, or SUBMIT commands. Depending on how you specify the
parameters of these commands, the resulting jobs can either be local batch or remote batch
in origin type.

>e^%\

JOB SERVICE CLASSES
Every
job's
class
job's

job in the system is assigned a service class. This service class determines the
scheduling priority as the job flows through the system. You can make this service
assignment or you can let the system assign it a default service class based on the
origin type and your validation limits (the privileges your site has granted you).
,/**«^\

Unless changed by your site, the system has the following 14 service classes:
Two-character
Mnemonic

One-- c h a r a c t e r
Mnemonic

Deadstart

DS

A

System

SY

Local batch

BC

Remote batch

RB

Interactive

TS

Detached interactive

DI

Network supervisor

NS

Subsystem

SS

Maintenance

MA

Service Class

| 3-6.2

60459680

#R*^

Service

Class

Communication

Two-character
Mnemonic
task

One-character
Mnemonic

CT

C

Installation

class

0

10

0

Installation

class

1

II

1

Installation

class

2

12

2

Installation

class

3

13

3

The scheduling priority associated with each service class
ascertain how your site has prioritized the service classes
each origin type by using the CLASS command. To determine
the ENQUIRE command. The system denotes the service class
the SC field of the ENQUIRE output.

is site-determined. You can
you are authorized to use for
the service class of a job, use
with a one-character mnemonic in

Your site allows you to use only a subset of the service classes. The LIMITS command shows
you which service classes you can use. Further, your site can restrict the use of certain
service classes to jobs of certain origin types. The CLASS command displays this
information.
You can assign a service class to a job in the following ways:
• Use the CHVAL command to specify default assignments for your jobs according to
origin type. The system uses one of these default assignments if you do not
otherwise make a service class assignment in a job. The LIMITS command shows what
your default service class assignments are for each origin type.
• Use the SC=class or P=priority parameter of the Job command for batch jobs.
• Use the CLASS command to change the service class of your current job.
• Use the SCL=scl parameter of the ROUTE command for jobs to be initiated by that
command.

JOB NAMES
Every job in the system receives a job sequence name (JSN) and a user job name (UJN). This
i n c l u d e s n o t o n l y y o u r j o b fi l e , b u t fi l e s y o u e x p l i c i t l y r o u t e f o r d i s p o s a l d u r i n g y o u r
job, such as files routed to a line printer. These job names are the primary job
identifiers for both the system and you. Many system commands use the JSN and UJN as
parameters. You can get a list of the JSN and UJN of all your active jobs by using the
ENQUIRE command.
JOB SEQUENCE NAME (JSN)
The system
characters.
appears as
appendix D

assigns every job a unique JSN. Each JSN consists of four alphabetic
The banner page of batch output prominently displays the job's JSN: the JSN
the last four characters of the eight characters in block letters (refer to
for a sample banner page).

y ^ V

#^N
60459680

D

3-7

, / fl S s ^ V

1

USER JOB NAME (UJN)
The UJN is for your convenience. You can select a meaningful name (a maximum of seven
characters) by which to identify your jobs. For batch jobs, you can set the UJN with the
SETJOB or ROUTE command. If not otherwise specified, the UJN for batch jobs defaults to the
UJN specified on the Job command. For interactive jobs, you can specify the UJN with the
SETJOB command. The UJN for interactive jobs defaults to the user index hash (refer to the
ENQUIRE command).

VALIDATION
In batch jobs, the USER command follows the Job command and is used to identify you as an
authorized user. If you are an authorized user, a set of control values associated with
your user name is used by the system to control all system requests from your job. If you
are not permitted to perform specific functions (such as access nonallocatable devices) and
you attempt to use them, your job will be terminated.
To get a listing of resources at your disposal and of special permissions you possess, enter
the LIMITS command. To change your resource allocation or to get additional permissions,
contact installation personnel.

ACCOUNTING
The unit of accounting for the system is the system resource unit (SRU). The SRU is a
composite value of central processor time, I/O activity, and memory usage. SRU operations
are initiated at the beginning of a job and reinitiated whenever another CHARGE command is
encountered. SRU information includes:
• Central processor time
• Mass storage activity
• Adder activity (fixed charges for some system requests whose resource requirements
are highly variable and beyond your control)
• Magnetic tape activity
• Permanent file activity
• Central memory and extended memory usage
• SRU value
• Matrix Array Processor (MAP) activity
• Application account chargest
This information is written to the job's dayfile at the end of the job or whenever this
job's service class changes. You may request SRU information to be written to your output
file at any time during the job by issuing the ENQUIRE command. The format of SRU
information written in the dayfile is given under Job Completion in this section.
tNot currently supported by the system but reserved for future

3-8

60459680

C

*

*

^

^

0eas,

JOB SCHEDULING
When a job enters the system, it is queued for input and waits for the required system
resources to become available or its priority to grow. The job's priority depends on its
service class. The system priorities are system-defined and can be altered only by the
system operator. The scheduling priority of the job is advanced as the job waits. The
priority ages to a system-defined limit. The job scheduler periodically scans the queued
jobs and active jobs to determine whether action is necessary to ensure that the highest
priority jobs are being serviced. This action may include rolling out low priority jobs or
rolling in higher priority jobs. The job scheduler is also activated to analyze the system
status whenever there are changes (for example, when the field length of a job is released,
a job is queued, or a job completes).
Once a job is scheduled for execution, normal command processing begins. The general flow
of the command processing is illustrated in figure 5-1.

JOB CONTROL
While the job is executing, the system exercises the following controls over the job.

FIELD LENGTH CONTROL
The system controls the field length (central memory) assigned to a job, adjusting it
according to the requirements of each job step. CYBER Loader further adjusts the field
length during both program loading and program execution. Memory may be added or removed as
the needs of the program change. Refer to the description of the REDUCE command in the
CYBER Loader Reference Manual. You can further influence the field length assigned to your
job by using the CM parameter of the Job command and the MFL and RFL commands.
The maximum field length for a job (MAXFL) is set at the smallest of the following values.
• The value of the CM parameter of the Job command if specified
• Maximum field length you are authorized to use
• Maximum field length available for user jobs (dependent on machine size)
For any job step, the maximum field length is the smaller of MAXFL or the value you
specified with the MFL command.
T h e r u n n i n g fi e l d l e n g t h ( R F L ) i s i n i t i a l l y s e t t o z e r o , i n d i c a t i n g s y s t e m c o n t r o l o f fi e l d
length. The RFL command changes RFL. RFL cannot exceed the current MFL.
To set the initial field length for a job step, the system uses the first value set by one
of the following.
• Predefined initial field length for a system routine or on a global library set
(RFL = special entry point).

•

Highest high address (HHA) from EACP loader table (54 table) (refer to the CYBER
Loader Reference Manual).

I
60459680 C

3-9

RFL value, if nonzero.
The smaller of the MFL or the installation-defined default value (release value
50000B).

NOTE
The system automatically assigns a field
l e n g t h f o r C M o n l y. To s e t t h e i n i t i a l
field length for a job step in extended
memory, use the RFL command or the MEMORY
macro (refer to Volume 4, Program
Interface).

The following example shows a command record, the MAXFL, MFL, and RFL settings, and the
actual field length (expressed in octal) used to process each command.
MAXFL

MFL

RFL

Field
Length

JOB,CM60000.
USER,USERABC,1234.

60000
60000

60000
60000

0
0

3200
3200

The CM parameter sets
the MAXFL and MFL
values. The system
s e t s t h e fi e l d l e n g t h
as required for pro
cessing the command.

GET,ABSPROG,RELPROG.

60000

60000

2500

GET command retrieves
copies of an absolute
program and a relocat
able program.

RFL,40000.

60000

60000

2300 The user issues an
RFL command to set
t h e fi e l d l e n g t h f o r
execution of the abso
lute program that
follows.

ABSPROG.

60000

60000 40000

40000 The absolute program
on file ABSPROG is
executed within a
40000-word field
length.

MFL,50000.

60000

60000 40000

2300 The user issues an
MFL command to set
the maximum field
length for the follow
ing relocatable load.

RELPROG.

60000

50000

50000 If more than a 50000w o r d fi e l d l e n g t h i s
required, the job
aborts.

Command

3-10

Explanation

60459680 C

INPUT RLE CONTROL
B a t c h j o b s , w h e n i n i t i a t e d , h a v e a fi l e n a m e d I N P U T ( i n p u t fi l e t y p e ) . T h i s fi l e c o n t a i n s
the commands and other input records required for job execution. INPUT is a locked file.
As a result, you may read from it and reposition it, but the system does not allow you to
write on it. If for some special reason you need to write on a file named INPUT, you should
first issue a RETURN(INPUT) command. This command changes the name of the file from INPUT
to INPUT* and leaves it assigned to your job. You may then write on file INPUT. The change
of name caused by the RETURN command applies only if the file has an input file type (refer
to
File
Types
in
section
2).
/K
For interactive jobs, file INPUT* is present at the beginning of the session and cannot be
returned with a RETURN command. You can create and manipulate a file called INPUT at any
time, although various products, such as the Full Screen Editor, require special processing
in order to handle files named INPUT or OUTPUT as data files.

TIME LIMIT CONTROL
The system sets a default time limit for each job step unless the Job command or the SETTL
command specifies a job step time limit. This time limit is the amount of central processor
time that any one job step is allowed. You cannot increase the limit beyond that for which
you are authorized.
While a job is using the central processor, the CPU time is accumulated and checked against
the time limit for each job step. If the job's origin type is not interactive, the job in
e x e c u t i o n t e r m i n a t e s o r e n t e r s exit processing when the time limit is reached. Interactive
jobs are suspended, after which you can increment the time limit and resume execution from
the point of suspension (refer to SETTL Command for an example). In the case of a detached
S ^ rthe
S ™ SETJOB
* t h e / y scommand.
5 e m s u s PYou
e n d cannot
s o r t eresume
r m i n a t ejobs
s t h suspended
e j o b a c c oinr dthis
i n g fashion
t o t h e from
param
e t epoint
r v a lof
ues
ot
the
suspension; they enter exit processing.

SRU LIMIT CONTROL
The system sets a limit on the number of system resource units (SRU) that a job step or an
account block can accumulate. An SRU includes central processor time, central memory usage
permanent file activity, and mass storage and tape I/O. An account block is that portion of
a job from one CHARGE command to the end of the job or to another CHARGE command. You may
alter these limits through the SETJSL and SETASL commands or macros; however, you may not
set either limit beyond that for which you are validated.
While a job is in the system, SRUs are accumulated and checked against the SRU step and
account block limits. If either limit is reached, the system treats the job as if it
exceeded its time limit for a job step, which is described in the preceding subsection.

COMMAND LIMIT CONTROL
The system sets a limit on the number of commands you can enter in a job. You can ascertain
this limit by entering the LIMITS command. If your job exceeds this limit, the system so
informs you and allows you seven additional commands before terminating your job. The
ENQUIRE,U command gives the number of commands you have entered in your job.

60459680 E

ROLLOUT CONTROL
Each executing program is allowed to reside in CM for a certain amount of time before
relinquishing its space to another program. When this CM time slice is exceeded, the
program may be rolled out. This means that the contents of the job field length (both CM
and extended memory), the job control area, and the control registers (exchange package) are
written to mass storage. The program remains on mass storage until it is rolled back into
memory. Execution resumes from the point where rollout occurred. The amount of time the
job is allowed to occupy CM is called the central memory time slice. The central memory
time slice is a system parameter that can be changed only by the system operator; time
slices vary for each origin type. Whether a job is rolled out when its time slice expires
depends on several factors.
• Whether there are jobs waiting for execution.
• Whether the jobs that are waiting have a higher priority.
• Whether jobs that are waiting require more field length than would be available if
all jobs of lower priority were rolled out.
When a job is rolled out, it is assigned a priority. The priority assigned is a system
parameter that depends on a job's service class and can be changed only by the system
o p e r a t o r. T h e j o b ' s p r i o r i t y i n c r e a s e s w h i l e t h e j o b w a i t s . N o r m a l l y, a l l o t h e r f a c t o r s
being equal, the job with the highest priority is selected to be rolled in.

ERROR CONTROL
When job step activity ceases, the system must determine the next command to process. If
activity ceased due to normal termination, the next command processed is the next command in
sequence. If an error caused activity to cease, the system issues the appropriate dayfile
message and exits from the job.
Errors may be detected by system software or hardware. When the system hardware detects an
error condition, NOS issues two or more dayfile messages. The first message gives the
address where the error was detected; the second and following messages give the types of
errors that occurred. NOS then dumps the exchange package for the job either to OUTPUT, for
local batch and remote batch origin jobs, or to local mass storage file ZZZDUMP, for
interactive jobs (refer to section 14). ZZZDUMP is not rewound before or after the dump.
After issuing the appropriate dayfile message(s) for the error(s), the system searches for
an EXIT command. If an EXIT command is found, processing continues with the command
following EXIT. If an EXIT command is not encountered, the system terminates the job.
(Exit processing is further described in section 5.) If a NOEXIT command is in effect, the
system does not search for an EXIT command on subsequent errors, and processing continues
with the next command.
You can specify the error exit mode on which the system is to abort a job step with the MODE
command. For example, you can specify that address out of range,t operand out of range,
and/or indefinite operand)'errors are allowed and program execution continues (refer to
secti o n 6 ) . Th e d e fa u l t e r r o r e x i t m o d e specifies that all errors terminate the job.
The EREXIT, RECOVR, REPRIEVE, and MODE macros control error processing in COMPASS programs..
The SETLOF macro specifies file completion procedures when a job step abort occurs. These
macros are described in Volume 4, Program Interface.
TNot applicable to model 176.
T*&&!\

3-12

60459680 C

0^^\

SECURITY FEATURES
A NOS computer system provides extensive protection of information contained in your jobs
and files. Most notably, it protects the central memory associated with your active jobs
and it enforces job and file access controls.

MEMORY PROTECTION
A job cannot dump or directly change the contents of the job field length immediately after
a protected command or a user program. The following is a list of protected commands and a
list of load/dump memory commands:
Protected Commands

APL
APPEND
ASSIGN
ATTACH
BEGIN
BLANK
CATALOG
CATLIST
CHANGE
CHARGE
CHVAL
CLASS
CLEAR
COPY
COPYBF
COPYBR

COPYCF
COPYCR
COPYEI
COPYSBF
COPYX
DAYFILE
DEFINE
DISPLAY
EDIT
ELSE
ENDIF
ENDW
ENQUIRE
EXECUTEt

IF or (IFE)
LABEL
LDSET
LIBEDIT
LIBLOAD
LIBTASK
LIMITS
LOAD

FSE
GET

OVWRITE
PACKNAM

MAP
MFLINK
MFQUEUE

NEW
OLD
OUT

SECHDR

PASSWOR
PERMIT
PROFILE
PURGE
RECOVER
REDUCE
REPLACE
REQUEST
RESOURC
RESTART
RETURN
REVERT
REWIND
SATISFY
SAVE
SCOPY

SET
SETFS
SKIP
SORT
SUBMIT
TCOPY
UNLOAD
UPROC
USER
VERIFY
VFYLIB

VSN
WHILE

Load/Dump Memory Commands
CKP
DMB

DMD
DMDECS

DMP
DMPECS

LBC
LOC

PBC
RBR

WBR

In an interactive job, you cannot enter a load/dump memory command individually or as the
first command of a procedure. If you attempt to change or dump protected memory, the system
issues an informative message to the dayfile and terminates the job step.
This form of memory protection does not apply if the job is of system origin or if you have
system origin privileges and debug mode has been set at the system console.

SYSTEM AND FILE ACCESS CONTROLS
NOS operates in either secured or unsecured mode, depending on the option selected by your
site. On an unsecured system, the primary control of system access is based on user names
and user passwords. NOS may also require certain users to enter a personal identifier in
addition to their user name and password to gain system access. Additionally certain users
may also be restricted to a single terminal session at a time.
tThis applies to EXECUTE when used as a loader command. It does not apply to EXECUTE when
used to select the execute subsystem in an interactive job.

60459680 G

3-13

The system further restricts the use of certain system resources (for example, applications
and special commands) to those explicitly granted that privilege by your site. NOS enforces
file access controls based on user names, file passwords, and permissions granted by the
owner of the file. The controls based on file passwords and permissions are discretionary;
they are set at the discretion of the file owner.
In a secured system, NOS enforces an additional set of access controls based on security
access levels and categories. These controls limit access to information based on the
user's validated clearance level and need-to-know categories versus the security access
level and category markings associated with each file. These mandatory controls take
precedence over the discretionary controls, which also remain available.
You must be validated to use one or more security access levels and zero or more security
access categories. Every file on a secured system has a single security access level and
may have one or more access categories associated with it. To access a file, the user job
m u s t b e v a l i d a t e d f o r t h e f i l e ' s s e c u r i t y a c c e s s l e v e l a n d f o r a l l o f t h e f i l e ' s a c c e s s ■a S ^ \
categories.

SECURITY ACCESS LEVELS
A security access level limits the disclosure of sensitive information to persons who are
authorized to access information at the level of sensitivity indicated by that access
level. A secured system supports up to eight security access levels. The number of access
levels to be used, the names of those levels, and the degree of sensitivity associated with
each level are selected by your site. The access levels are ordered so that the most
sensitive information is associated with higher access levels. (The access levels have
numerical values of 0 through 7; the corresponding released default names are LVLO through
LVL7.) You are validated for a set of security access levels (normally a contiguous range
of levels, such as LVLO through LVL4).
The system associates a set of access levels with each job. This set is the intersection of
your validated set of access levels, the range of levels currently valid for the system, the
range of access levels allowed for your job's origin type, and, if specified by the system,
the range of access levels allowed over your communication line to the computer. For
interactive jobs, your job's initial access level is the lowest level in the set of access
levels for your job. For batch jobs, the initial access level is the access level of the
local file that initiated the job.
Example 1: You are validated to use levels LVLO through LVL5, the system is currently
validated for levels LVLO through LVL7, your job origin type has an access level range
of LVL1 through LVL4, and your communication line has an access level range of LVLO
through LVL3. As shown in table 3-1, your job will have an access level set of LVLl
through LVL3 and the job's initial access level will be LVLl. If this job is initiated
via a ROUTE or SUBMIT of a local file with access level LVL2, that will be the job's
initial access level.

3-14

60459680

G

Table 3-1. User Job Access Levels
LVLO

LVLl

LVL2

LVL3

LVL4

LVL5

LVL6

LVL7

User
System
Job Origin
Communication
Line

User Job

/SpS^N

Each file has a security access level. Unless you specify otherwise, each file you create
will have the same access level as your job at the time you create the file. You can always
raise the access level of your files (refer to the SETFAL and SETPFAL commands) to any level
for which your job is validated, but you must have special permission to lower the access
l e v e l o f y o u r fi l e s . H o w e v e r, t h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e s o r t a p e fi l e s c a n n o t
be changed while they are assigned to your job. If the access level of such a file is lower
than that of your job, you can always read information from the file but can only write
i n f o r m a t i o n t o i t i f y o u h a v e s p e c i a l a u t h o r i z a t i o n . T h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f a l o c a l fi l e i s
automatically raised to the current job access level whenever an operation is performed on
t h e fi l e ( t h i s i n c l u d e s y o u r p r i m a r y fi l e ) .
Your job's access level is automatically raised whenever you read information from a file
that has a higher access level than your job's current access level (within your job's
validated set of access levels). You can always raise your job's access level using the
SETJAL command to any level for which your job is validated, but you must have special
permission to lower the access level of your job.
Example 2: In the job referred to in example 1, you attach a file that has access level
LVL3 and read information from that file. The access level of your job is immediately
raised from LVLl to LVL3.
Example 3: In the same job, you attempt to set your job's access level to LVL5 using
the SETJAL command. This attempt fails because LVL5 is not in your job's validated set
of access levels.
Unless you are specifically validated, a secured system does not allow you to write
information from a file with a higher access level into a file with a lower access level.
Example 4: You attempt to copy a portion of a file whose access level is LVL2 to a file
whose access level is LVL3. A secured system allows this operation.
Example 5: You attempt to copy a portion of a file whose access level is LVL3 to a file
whose access level is LVL2. A secured system does not allow this operation (unless you
possess special validation).

60459680 G

3-15

On an unsecured system, you may set access levels on your files (for informational purposes),
but the system does not use those levels to restrict access to the files, nor does it
propagate those levels to your job or to other files. No job has an access level on an
unsecured system.

SECURITY ACCESS CATEGORIES
A secured system supports up to 32 security access categories. The number of categories to
be used and the names of those categories are selected by your site. The access categories
have numerical values of 0 through 31; the corresponding released default names are CATOO
through CAT31. Each user is validated for subset of the site-defined access categories.
Your job's access category set is the intersection of this subset and the set of categories
currently valid for the system.
When you create a permanent file (using the SAVE or DEFINE command), the file is automati
cally assigned all of the access categories in your job's access category set. You have the
choice to explicitly assign all, any, or none of these categories to each of your permanent
files (refer to the SETPFAC command). Access categories restrict the access of your
permanent files to those users who are validated for all of the categories you have set for
t h e fi l e s .
Example 6: You are validated for the categories CAT01, CAT06, CAT18, and CAT22. Using
the SETPFAC command, you assign the categories CAT06 and CAT22 to permanent file ABC,
which has an access level of LVL3. You then make file ABC public. Any user in your
family who is validated for access level LVL3 and the categories CAT06 and CAT22 can
then access file ABC.
On an unsecured system, you may assign access categories to your permanent files for
informational purposes, but the system does not use those categories to restrict access to
t h e fi l e s .

RESPONSIBILITIES FOR DATA SECURITY
In a secured system, security access levels and
accesses a file, begins a job, or attempts to
job. This ensures that only those persons who
categories you have assigned to your files can
continuous protection of your data.

categories are checked whenever a user
alter the security parameters of a file or
are validated for the access levels and
access them. A secured system thus provides

Although the system will automatically assign an access level and an access category set to
each file you create, you are responsible for ensuring that the access level and access
category set assigned to each of your files is appropriate. Your site should provide
guidelines for the use of the different access levels and categories it has established.
All of the NOS security mechanisms depend on the protection of your user password. NOS
provides the following mechanisms to help protect your password during interactive login:
• You should always use the secure login procedure (described in section 8) to ensure
that you are communicating with the system-supplied login mechanism.

/^^v

|

3_i6

60459680

G

• If possible, you should set your terminal to full duplex and enable echoplex mode
(refer to the EP terminal definition command). The network temporarily disables
echoplex when you enter your password during login. If you use the abbreviated
login sequence, all fields in the line containing your password will be masked.
This NOS security feature prevents display of your user password at your terminal.
e A warning message stating when your user password is going to expire is displayed at
your terminal and is issued to the job dayfile.
Although NOS encrypts your user password after login, the programs you execute can affect
the security of your files and validation information. When you execute a program, it can
access the command record of your job. It is possible that a program belonging to another
user can obtain privileged information like your user name and charge numbers.

SECURITY CONFLICT PROCESSING
When your job attempts to perform an operation that could violate system security, the
system identifies the operation as a security conflict and issues a SECURITY CONFLICT
message. A security conflict causes the job step to be aborted and decrements your security
count (you are given a specific security count by the site security administrator). If your
security count is decremented to zero, your current job or interactive session is terminated
without EXIT processing. You are not allowed any additional jobs or logins until the
security administrator resets your security count.
f^* On an unsecured system, a security conflict occurs in the following cases:
• An incorrect secondary USER command.
• A job file submitted with a SUBMIT or ROUTE command has an incorrect USER command.
On a secured system, a security conflict arises in the following cases in addition to those
listed above:
• An attempt to set an invalid access level on a file or job.
r e A n a t t e m p t t o for
a c cthe
e s saccess
o n e olevel
f you
p e r m a ncategory
e n t fi l e ssetf r of
o m the
a jfile.
ob that is not validated
orr access
• An attempt to write data on a tape file or an attached direct access file when the
access level of your job is higher than the access level of the file.
• An attempt to set an access level for a file or job which is lower than the current
access level of the file or job.t

JOB COMPLETION
When there is no more activity at a control point, no outstanding central processor
requests, and no commands to process, the job is completed in the following manner.
1. All CM assigned to the job is released.
2. Extended memory assigned to the job is released.
tThis action does not constitute a security conflict if you have special authorization to
do so (refer to the LIMITS command).
60459680 G

3-17

3. All equipment assigned to the job is released.
4 . A l l l i b r a r y fi l e s a t t a c h e d t o t h e j o b a r e r e l e a s e d .
5 . A l l s c r a t c h ( l o c a l ) fi l e s p a c e u s e d b y t h e j o b i s r e l e a s e d .
6. All direct access permanent files attached to the job are released; the status
i n f o r m a t i o n f o r t h e s e fi l e s i s u p d a t e d .
7. The following summations of job activity are added to the end of the job dayfile.
This information is also issued to the associated account dayfile for site usage.
o Adder activity in kilounits (incremented by USER commands, CHARGE commands,
and resource assignments).
hh.mm.ss.UEAD, xxxxxx.xxxKUNS.
• Permanent file activity in kilounits:
hh.mm.ss.UEPF, xxxxxx.xxxKUNS.
• Mass storage activity in kilounits:
hh.mm.ss.UEMS, xxxxxx.xxxKUNS.
• Magnetic tape activity in kilounits:
hh.mm.ss.UEMT, xxxxxx.xxxKUNS.
• Accumulated central processor time in seconds:t
hh.mm.ss.UECP, xxxxxx.xxxSECS.
e SRU value in units for total job usage including CPU time, I/O activity, and
memory usage:
hh.mm.ss.AESR, xxxxxx.xxxUNTS.
• Matrix Array Processor (MAP) HI accumulator:
hh.mm.ss.AEMP, xxxxxx.xxxUNTS.
• Application activity:
hh.mm.ss.UEAC, xxxxxx.xxxUNTS.

tIf the installation defines a CPU multiplier value, the value given is the product of the
actual CPU seconds and the multiplier. The installation may assign a different CPU
multiplier value to each CPU within a dual-processor machine (refer to the NOS 2
Administration Handbook).

I

3-18

60459680

G

8. The following information is printed at the end of files queued for printing.
• Lines printed in kilolines:
hh.mm.ss.UCLP, mi,es, xxxxxx.xxxKLNS.
or
hh.mm.ss.UCLV, mi,es, xxxxxx.xxxKLNS.
m i M a c h i n e i d e n t i fi e r .
es Equipment status table (EST) ordinal of the output device.
^ ^ T h e U C LV s u m m a t i o n i s i s s u e d i f t h e V c a r r i a g e c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r w a s u s e d
0^
(refer
to
appendix
H).
9. The following information is issued to the account dayfile only.
• Cards punched in kilocards:
hh.mm.ss.jsn. UCPC, mi,es, xxxxxx.xxxKCDS.
10. For batch jobs, the job dayfile is copied to the end of file OUTPUT. If OUTPUT does
not exist or if it is a deferred routed file with EC=A9 specified, the dayfile is
copied to another file that the system queues for printing.
11. All deferred routed files are queued for disposal. The files named OUTPUT, PUNCH,
PUNCHB, and P8 are also queued for disposal in batch jobs. The system does not
automatically queue files OUTPUT, PUNCH, PUNCHB, and P8 in interactive jobs.t

tThis step is done only if job output is to be queued. You can prevent the queueing of job
output by specifying the appropriate parameter on the SETJOB, ROUTE, SUBMIT, or LDI
command•

60459680

G

3"19

0X*\

0^*\

PROCEDURES

A NOS procedure is
performs a specific
file as a procedure
additional procedure

a sequence of NOS commands, residing in a separate record or file, that
task or sequence of tasks. A procedure header directive identifies the
file, and a number of other procedure directives allow you to control
processing options.

Once you have created a procedure and stored it in a permanent file, the procedure is
available to you at any future time. To execute the procedure, you must call the procedure
using an appropriate form of the BEGIN command, which we describe later in this section.
Procedures that you create yourself can be called from a local file, a permanent file
( d i r e c t o r i n d i r e c t a c c e s s ) , o r f r o m a l o c a l o r g l o b a l l i b r a r y s e t . Yo u r s i t e m a y a l s o
provide procedures of general use that you can call from system libraries or from user name
LIBRARY. A procedure can be called from another procedure up to a maximum of 50 nested
procedures.
A procedure called from a batch job functions much like a program subroutine. You can pass
parameters to the procedure on the procedure call (BEGIN command). The procedure accepts
any data passed to it, performs its processing functions, and returns control to the calling
job or procedure.
When called from an interactive job, a NOS procedure functions like a user-defined system
command. Once you have made the procedure file local to your job, you can execute the
procedure simply by entering the procedure or file name, followed by any parameters you may
have defined for the procedure.
Although NOS supports both interactive and noninteractive procedure formats (noninteractlve
procedures are also called passive procedures), any NOS procedure can be called from either
a batch or interactive job. The interactive procedure formats described in this section
d i ff e r fr o m t h e n o n i n t e r a c t i v e f o rma t (d e scri b e d i n Ap p e n d i x L ) i n th a t th e i n te r a cti ve
formats provide the end user with various types of interactive help and parameter prompts.
The major features of NOS interactive parameter formats are:

Two Interactive Formats
As the procedure writer, you can choose between the parameter-prompting (*I) or the menu
(*M) interactive formats. The parameter-prompting format prompts the user to enter
required parameter values. The menu format displays a list of possible parameter values
and prompts the user to select one of the values by number.

Procedure Prompting
If the user fails to enter a required parameter value, or enters an invalid value, the
system prompts the user to enter a correct value.

r*
60459680

D

4-i

Interactive Help
Both interactive formats give the user easy access to system-generated, as well as
procedure-defined help for a procedure and its parameters.

Parameter Validation
The interactive formats provide an easy way of defining the types of parameter values
that can be entered for any particular parameter. The system will not execute an
interactive procedure until the user has entered a valid value for each required
parameter.

PROCEDURE FILE RESIDENCE AND SEARCH ORDER
A procedure is stored as a separate record on a file. Several procedures, or a collection
of procedures and programs, can exist on the same file. Procedures can be stored on local
files, indirect access or direct access permanent files, system libraries, or user name
LIBRARY. Procedures can also reside on magnetic tape as well as mass storage.
The procedure search order is dependent on the form of the BEGIN command used to call the
procedure. For more information on the search order, refer to the BEGIN command description
in this section.

PROCEDURE STRUCTURE
A procedure file can be divided into five sections, as shown by the example in Figure 4-1.
The first four sections comprise the procedure itself (the procedure begins with the
procedure header (.PROC) directive and ends with a REVERT command at the end of the command
section). The fifth (Data) section may contain programs, procedures, or other data to be
referenced by the procedure.
T h e fi r s t l i n e o r l i n e s o f a p r o c e d u r e i s t h e p r o c e d u r e h e a d e r , w h i c h c o n s i s t s o f a s i n g l e " c a ^ \
procedure header (.PROC) directive. The procedure header names the procedure, indicates .'
whether the system will prompt for required parameter values, defines what the prompts will
consist of, and defines any restrictions on the types of values that can be entered for each
parameter. The .PROC directive and all other procedure directives are listed in summary
form in Table 4-1 and are described in detail under Procedure Directives in this section.
Procedure directives are identified by the period (.) before the directive name.
The formatting section contains directives which alter the default text and format of user
prompts. This section of the procedure body is optional, as the system does provide default
text and format for all prompts. If you do specify directives in this section, the
formatting directives must immediately follow the procedure header directive.
The help section contains directives and text which define the help to be provided for
procedure parameters and for the procedure itself. This section of the procedure is
optional, as the system can generate help from the information in the procedure header. If
you do specify any directives in this section, you must include a .ENDHELP directive to end
the section.

4-2

60459680 D

,PROC,TESTPN*I
,PN"Enter project number"=
(*S10(ABCDEFGHIJ KLMN0PQRSTUVWXYZ$/$1234567890)).
.NOCLR,Executing - Please wait.
.HELP
TESTPN requests that you enter a valid
project number for this application.
.HELP,PN
Enter a project number
(Maximum of 10 characters)
.ENDHELP.
.IF,$PN$.NE.$PRJ/2201$,LABEL1.
NOTE./INVALID PROJECT NUMBER/
REVERT,N0LIST.
.ENDIF,LABEL1.
RETURN,LISTFIL,LGO.
FTN5,I-APPL,L=LISTFIL,B=LG0.
LGO.
REVERT,NOLIST.
EXIT.
REVERT,ABORT.TESTPN
.DATA,APPL.
PROGRAM APPL
PRINT*,'APPL COMPLETE'
END

Procedure Header
Formatting Section

Help Section

Command Section

Data Section

Figure 4-1. Procedure File Structure

The command section consists of procedure directives and system commands you want to be
executed. Most system commands are allowed within a procedure. The exceptions are
p ri ma ri l y th e co mma n d s re stri cte d to entry from interactive terminals (refer to se ction 8).
yf^*N

The data section consists of information you want written to a local file or files so that
you can reference it while the procedure executes. You can also reference the data section
in the procedure header. A separate .DATA directive identifies each local file to be
created.

PROCEDURE PROCESSING
The system performs interactive procedure processing in three stages:
• Interactive parameter entry
• Procedure expansion
• Execution of the command record

60459680 H

4-3

INTERACTIVE PARAMETER ENTRY
During interactive parameter entry, the system processes the procedure header directive and
all directives in the formatting and help sections.
The system prompts the user for all required parameter values as specified in the procedure
header. Each value the user enters is verified against the validation requirements
specified in the procedure header. If any value fails to meet the validation requirements
the system prompts the user to enter a corrected value.
The correction prompt and other interactive prompts can be modified by directives in the
formatting section.
If the user requests help for the procedure or for a parameter (by entering a ? following
the procedure call or following a parameter prompt), the system displays the applicable /r*^K
s y s t e m d e f a u l t h e l p t e x t , i f a n y , f o l l o w e d b y p r o c e d u r e - d e fi n e d h e l p t e x t . ]
The interactive parameter entry portion of procedure processing is completed when the user
enters a carriage return after having correctly entered all required parameter values. If
the user correctly enters all required values on the procedure call, no formatting or help
directives (except .NOTE and .NOCLR) are processed, and procedure expansion begins
immediately.

PROCEDURE EXPANSION
Procedure expansion is performed only on the procedure command and data sections. During
procedure expansion, the system:
• Processes all directives in the command and data section.
• Substitutes parameter values specified by the user, or by the .PROC directive, for
each occurrence of the corresponding parameter keyword in the command and data
sections.
• Creates a scratch file, called the procedure command record, which contains the NOS
commands from the procedure command section as modified by directive processing and
parameter substitution.
•

Creates a separate local file for each .DATA directive processed during expansion of
the procedure.

At completion of expansion processing, the calling user's job has assigned to it a scratch
file (the procedure command record), containing NOS commands ready to be executed, and a
local file for each .DATA file referenced in the command record.
The procedure command record created during expansion processing is simply the sequence of
NOS commands to be executed. Although procedure directives are used to define and create
the command record, directives themselves do not appear in the command record since they are
not executable system commands.
The procedure command record may not include all system commands from the procedure command
section. This is determined by processing of the .IF, .ELSE, and .ENDIF directives. The
.IF directive functions similarly to the IF command. In the same way that the IF command
determines whether the following sequence of commands will be executed, the .IF directive
determines whether the following sequence of commands is written to the procedure command
record. In other words, if the expression in the .IF directive is true, the commands placed
between .IF and .ELSE or .ENDIF are written to the command record; if the expression is
4-4

60459680

H

false, these same commands are not written to the command record. To see the results of the
.IF directive, look at figures 4-2 and 4-3. These figures show the command records
resulting from valid and invalid entries for the procedure in figure 4-1.
Note that at the end of processing in either figure 4-2 or 4-3, a listing of the user's
local jobs would show a file called APPL. This file is created as a result of the .DATA
directive in procedure TESTPN from figure 4-1.

Procedure Command record:
RETURN,LISTFIL,LG0.
FTN5,I=APPL,L=LISTFIL,B=LG0.
LGO.
REVERT,N0LIST.
Dayfile:
testpn,prj/2201
APPL COMPLETE
/dayfi Le,fr=testpn,op=m

10.18.53.TESTPN,PRJ/2201.
10.18.54.RETURN,LISTFIL,LG0.
10.18.55.FTN5,I=APPL,L=LISTFIL,B=LG0.

10.18.55. 62700 CM STORAGE USED.
10.18.55. 0.009 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME.
10.18.55.LGO.
10.18.56. END APPL

/0^^\

10.18.56. 14300 MAXIMUM EXECUTION FL.
10.18.56. 0.007 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME.
10.19.21.DAYFILE,FR=TESTPN,0P=M
USER DAYFILE PROCESSED.
/

Figure 4-2. TESTPN with Valid Entry
Procedure Command record:
NOTE./INVALID PROJECT NUMBER/
R E V E RT, N 0 L I S T.
D a y fi L e :

testpn,888
INVALID PROJECT NUMBER
/ d a y fi L e , f r = t e s t p n , o p = m
10.19.51.TESTPN,888.
10.19.51.NOTE./INVALID PROJECT NUMBER/
10.20.03.DAY FILE,FR=TESTPN,0P=M

/

USER DAYFILE PROCESSED.

Figure 4-3. TESTPN with Invalid Entry

60459680 E

4-5

Following are some tools you can use to further control procedure expansion:
• .EXPAND Directive
• Inhibit Character
• Concatenation Character
• .EX Directive

.EXPAND Directive
The .EXPAND directive allows you to suspend expansion processing for one or more lines of a
p ro ce d u re . In se rti n g a .EXPAN D ,OFF d i re cti ve su sp e n d s d i re cti ve p ro ce ssi n g a n d p a ra me te r ^ ^
substitution for subsequent lines of the procedure until the end of the procedure or until a )
.EXPAND,ON directive appears.
An especially useful application of the .EXPAND directive is to inhibit expansion of a
procedure in a .DATA file. Normally, calling a procedure file initiates expansion of the
entire file, including the data section. However, if the data section contains another
procedure file, you may not want the .DATA file to be expanded until it is called by a BEGIN
command. Inserting a .EXPAND,OFF directive before the .DATA directive prevents the creation
of the .DATA file. Inserting a .EXPAND,OFF directive immediately after the .DATA directive
causes the .DATA file to remain unchanged by expansion of the original procedure.

Inhibit Character
Like the EXPAND directive, the inhibit character also inhibits parameter substitution or
directive processing during procedure expansion. In general, the scope of the inhibit
character is more limited than that of the EXPAND directive. The default inhibit character
is xi (or = if you are using a CDC graphic character set). You can define a different
inhibit character using the .IC directive.
Usage rules for the inhibit character are:
• The inhibit character placed before a parameter keyword in the command or data
section inhibits substitution of that keyword.
• The inhibit character placed before a procedure directive (including a .DATA
directive) in the command or data section inhibits expansion processing of that
directive.

4_6

60459680

G

The inhibit character placed before a concatenation character InhibLts processing of
the concatenation operatLon; the concatenation character remains Intact. In this
case, the inhibit character does not prevent parameter substitution of a keyword
following the concatenation character.
Expansion processing strips all Inhibit characters from the procedure command record
with two exceptions:
those appearing in a $-dellralted literal string.
those appearing In a sequence of two or more Inhibit characters. When they
appear in sequence, only the first Inhibit character is omitted from the
procedure command record.
The inhibit character Is often used to allow use of the same character string for both a
parameter keyword and value. For example, If an Input file parameter Is written as #1=1,
procedure expansion will remove the #, leave the first I Intact, and perform normal
substitution on the second I.
If a keyword or directive is subject to expansion processing more than once, you can control
when it will be processed by inserting one or more inhibit characters before the keyword or
directive. In the following example, expansion of procedure PR0C1 creates one local file
caLled DATA1 and strips the # from the second .DATA directive. Since the # character is no
longer present when PR0C2 is executed, PR0C2 expansion creates local file DATA2.
-PR0C,PR0C1*I.

REVERT.
.DATA,DATA1.
.PR0C,PR0C2*I.

REVERT.
#.DATA,DATA2

Following is an example of inhibit character usage.
In this example, procedure INHIBIT resides on file PROCFIL.
.PROC,INHIBIT*I,I=(*N=TEST).
GET,I.
FTN5,#I=I,L=0
LGO.

COMMENT. I, Ul, Ul, UUU

i^SN

60459680

D

4-7

If procedure INHIBIT is called by the command:
begin,inhibit
The resulting dayfile segment is:
10.31.00.BEGIN,INHIBIT.
10.31.00.GET,TEST.
10.31.OO.FTN5,I=TEST,L=0
10.31.00. 56000 CM STORAGE USED.
10.31.00. 0.011 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME.
10.31.00.LGO.
10.31.01. STOP
10.31.01. 5600 FINAL EXECUTION FL.
10.31.01 0.000 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME.
10.31.01.
C O M M E N T.
T E S T,
1 0 . 3 1 . 0 1 . S R E V E R T. C C L

I,

TESTI,

II.

"^
'

Concatenation Character
The concatenation character allows parameter substitution for a substring of a character
string. The default concatenation character is _ (or r-*" if you are using a CDC graphic
character set).
Usage

rules

for

the

concatenation

character

are:

• Expansion processing removes all concatenation characters from the procedure file
except those included in a $-deliraited literal string and those preceded by a #
c h a r a c t e r.
• After removal of a concatenation character, the preceding and following character
strings are concatenated by shifting the remainder of the line one character to the
left. For example, if PROG is a parameter keyword for which the user enters a value
of NEW, the string PR0G_B becomes NEWB after expansion processing.
Following is an example of concatenation character usage.
Procedure LINK resides on file FILE1.
.PR0C,LINK*I,SUFFIX"F0R C0PY"=(*N=,BF,BR,CF,CR,EI,SBF,X),LFN1=(*F),LFN2=(*F).
REWIND,LFN1.
C0PY_SUFFIX,LFN1,LFN2.
In the following example, the first BEGIN command does a COPYSBF of file PLAN to file
SCHEME. The next BEGIN command does a C0PYEI of file MAZE to file TAXES. Each resulting
dayfile follows the BEGIN command.
b e g i n , l i n k , fi l e l , s u f fi x = s b f , l f n l = p l a n , l f n 2 = s c h e m e .
08.00.17.$BEGIN,LINK,FILE1,SUFFIX=SBF,LFN1=PLAN,LFN2=SCHEME.
08.00.18.REWIND,PLAN.
08.00.18.C0PYSBF,PLAN,SCHEME.
08.00.18. EOI ENCOUNTERED.
08.00.18.$REVERT.CCL

4-8

60459680

G

>*s«^k

b e g i n , l i n k , fi l e l , s u f fi x = e i , l f n l = m a z e , I f n 2 = t a x e s .
08.03.23.$BEGIN,LINK,FILE1,SUFFIX=EI,LFN1=MAZE,LFN2=TAXES.
08.03.23.REWIND,MAZE.
08.03.24.C0PYEI,MAZE,TAXES.
08.03.24. EOI ENCOUNTERED.
08.03.24.SREVERT.CCL
.EX Directive
The .EX directive immediately terminates expansion processing and executes the command
included in the directive. No further expansion processing is performed, and the procedure
command record is not executed.
The most common use of .EX is to initiate immediate processing of a menu procedure option as
shown in the following example:
.PR0C,APR0C*M
,PARM=
(1-0PT1",
2"0PT2",
3"0PT3").
.EX.BEGIN,PARM,LIBFILE.
EXECUTION OF THE COMMAND RECORD
At completion of expansion processing, the system increments the procedure nesting level
count and begins execution of the procedure command record.
When all commands in the procedure command record have been processed, the system executes a
system- or user-supplied REVERT command, decrements the procedure nesting count, and returns
control to the calling job or procedure.

PROCEDURE DIRECTIVES
Procedure directives have these general syntax features:
• They all have a period as a prefix character.
• You can use a comma or an opening parenthesis as a separator within directives.
• You can use a period or a closing parenthesis as a terminator. You must use a
period or closing parenthesis as a terminator if you append comments to the
directive.
• A procedure directive can span more than one line. No line can contain more than
150 6-bit characterst and each line to be continued must either end with a nonblank
separator or the succeeding line must begin with a nonblank separator.

jst^\.

• Unless otherwise stated, the system reads the characters you enter in directives as
6-bit display code (uppercase characters only). You can enter the text for help
information and prompts in uppercase and lowercase characters (6/12-bit display
code).
tThis value can be changed during installation.
60459680

F

4-9

/*5fi&»i

The detailed descriptions of the procedure directives later in this section include any
exceptions to the general syntax features just cited.
Procedure directives can be grouped by function into six basic types. The directives are
listed by type in table 4-1.

Table 4-1. Procedure Directives
Directive Type

Directive

Procedure header

.PROC

Specifies the procedure name, defines parameters, and
enables parameter prompting.

Formatting

.CORRECT

.PROMPT

Specifies the prompt to follow an incorrect parameter
e n t r y.
Specifies the prompt to appear before a parameter entry
is made.
Specifies a label for programmable function key Fn.
Inhibits the automatic clearing of the screen while the
procedure executes.
Specifies a message to appear on the screen while the
procedure executes.
Specifies the string to precede the page number on the
screen.
Specifies the text for the general request for input.

Help

.ENDHELP
.HELP

Marks the end of the help section of the procedure.
Specifies help text for the procedure or a parameter.

Expansion
Control

.CC

Specifies the concatenation character to be used in the
procedure body.
Terminates skipping initiated by a matching .IF or
initiates skipping until a matching .ENDIF is found.
Terminates skipping initiated by a matching .IF or
.ELSE.
Submits a single command to the system for immediate
execution.
Terminates or restores procedure expansion for
subsequent lines of the procedure.
Allows conditional expansion of the procedure body.
Specifies the inhibit character to be used in the
procedure body.

.ENTER

.Fn
.NOCLR
.NOTE
.PAGE

.ELSE
.ENDIF

.EX
.EXPAND

.IF
.IC
File

.DATA
.EOF
.EOR

Comment

4-10

Function

.*

C r e a t e s a l o c a l fi l e .
Inserts an end-of-file mark in a (.DATA) file created
by the procedure or in the procedure command record.
Inserts an end-of-record mark in a (.DATA) file created
by the procedure or in the procedure command record.
Identifies comments in the procedure.

60459680 F

PROCEDURE HEADER (.PROC) Directive
Every procedure begins with a procedure header (.PROC) directive. The .PROC directive names
the procedure, controls parameter prompting, and defines any restrictions on values that can
be entered for the parameters.
The
can
the
with

.PROC directive must be the first line of the procedure and must begin in column 1. It
be continued on one or more succeeding lines by ending the continued line, or beginning
continuation line, with a non-blank separator character. The .PROC directive must end
a period (.).

In this section we describe the interactive and menu formats of the .PROC directive,
noninteractive format is described in Appendix L.

The

Interactive Format
This directive enables the interactive processing of a procedure call (refer to Requesting
Help on Procedure Calls later in this section). The directive:
• Designates procedure parameters as optional or required.
• Designates permissible values and correct syntax for each parameter through a
checklist.
/jP^N

• Supplies descriptions for each parameter to be used in prompting the procedure
c a l l e r.
Format:
.PROC,pname*I"title",pi,p2,...,pn.ck.
Parameter

Description

pname

Specifies the procedure name; pname can be one to seven alphanumeric
characters. The procedure name should begin with an alphabetic
character. You must append *I to the procedure name to enable
parameter prompting.

title

Specifies the procedure title. The system assumes that your title is
in 6/12-bit display code, which supports uppercase and lowercase
characters. The title string can be a maximum of 40 lowercase
(12-bit) characters, 80 uppercase (6-bit) characters, or any
combination of lowercase and uppercase characters that does not exceed
4 8 0 b i t s . T h e t i t l e fi e l d c a n b e n u l l ( " " ) o r o m i t t e d . I f o m i t t e d ,
the default title used in the screen mode parameter display is the
procedure name pname.
The system displays the title whenever the procedure is called and
required parameters are not supplied.

60459680 E

4-11

Parameter

Description

P i S p e c i fi e s o p t i o n a l p a r a m e t e r s . T h e m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f p a r a m e t e r s i s
50. Each parameter p^^ has the following form:
keywrd"descriptionl,=( checklist)
or
keywrd'description'=(checklist)
k e y w r d S p e c i fi e s t h e k e y w o r d o f t h e p a r a m e t e r, k e y w r d
can be a string of 1 to 10 alphanumeric
characters. The occurrences of keywrd in the
procedure body are replaced by a value that
conforms to the specifications made in the
c h e c k l i s t . T h i s v a l u e i s s p e c i fi e d b y a
parameter on the procedure call or by default
a c c o r d i n g t o c h e c k l i s t s p e c i fi c a t i o n s . t
If keywrd is surrounded by dollar symbols
($keywrd$), any dollar symbols which surround or
are contained within the parameter value will be
retained as a part of the value. Note that when
the user is prompted for the value in screen
mode, the value entered will be treated as a
literal value even if it is not surrounded by
dollar symbols.
d e s c r i p t i o n S p e c i fi e s a n o p t i o n a l t e x t s t r i n g t h a t t h e s y s t e m
displays when prompting for a parameter. The
title string can be a maximum of 40 lowercase
(12-bit) characters, 80 uppercase (6-bit)
characters, or any combination of lowercase and
uppercase characters that does not exceed 480
bits. In screen mode, the system will display a
maximum of 40 characters. The description field
may be null or omitted.
You must enclose the text string in quotation
marks or apostrophes. If you use quotation
marks, the default prompt for the parameter p^
has the following format:
Enter keywrd description?
If you use apostrophes, the system uses only your
description string in the prompt:
description?
Two examples which show these prompting formats
appear under the description of the .HELP
directive.

t There is a seven-character restriction on the length of the keyword if the name call
format of the BEGIN command is to be used, the keyword is to be specified on the call, or
t h e p r o c e d u r e i s a l o c a l fi l e .

4-12

60459680 H

Parameter

Description
c h e c k l i s t S p e c i fi e s a l i s t o f t h e a c c e p t a b l e v a l u e s a n d
syntax for p±. The checklist must be enclosed
in parentheses. The value specified for a
parameter in a procedure call is compared to each
of the entries in the checklist in left to right
order and a match must occur for a value to be
acceptable. If more than one match occurs, the
fi r s t m a t c h d e t e r m i n e s t h e s u b s t i t u t i o n .
If the checklist is omitted, the system assumes
that any uppercase 1- to 40-character value is
valid. The detailed description of acceptable
checklist entries is in the following paragraphs.

c k S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 1 0 - c h a r a c t e r c o m m e n t k e y w o r d . T h e k e y w o r d m u s t b e
immediately preceded and followed by periods with no intervening
spaces. This is an optional parameter. The system substitutes
comments specified on the procedure call for the comment keyword in
the procedure body. The system substitutes a null value for the
comment keyword if no comments are on the procedure call. If you do
not specify a comment keyword, the system ignores comments made on the
procedure call.
Note that the system treats the comment keyword ck as a contiguous
string upon substitution. If ck is concatenated to another long
string in the procedure body, this substitution could produce a line
that exceeds the line length limit (150 6-bit characters).
A comma must separate .PROC and the procedure name. The separator between the procedure
name and the procedure parameters can be a comma, reverse slant (\), or slant (/). Reverse
slants and slants have special significance as described under Parameter Matching Modes
later in this section.

CHECKUST ENTRIES
Entries in the parameter checklist are of three types: simple values, equivalenced values,
and checklist patterns. A single checklist can contain any combination of entry types and
multiple entries of the same type.
A simple value is an entry of the form:
pstring
where pstring is any 1- to 40-character string. If pstring contains nonalphanumeric
characters other than asterisks (*), it must be enclosed in literal delimiters ($). |
A simple value specifies that if the user enters a value of pstring on the BEGIN command,
pstring is substituted for the parameter keyword in the procedure body.

60459680

H

4-13

An equivalenced value is an entry of the form:
pstring=pvalue
where pstring and pvalue are 1- to 40-character strings. If either pstring or
pvalue contains nonalphanumeric characters other than asterisks (*), it must be
enclosed in literal delimiters ($).
An equivalenced value specifies that if the user enters a value of pstring on the BEGIN
command, pvalue is substituted for the parameter keyword in the procedure body.
There are five checklist patterns that can be used in the checklist. Each pattern defines a
set of restrictions to be placed on values entered by the user. The five checklist patterns
are summarized in figure 4-4 and are described in detail on the following pages.
Each checklist pattern has three forms:
*p=
*p=pvalue
where p is a character identifying the checklist pattern and pvalue is any 1- to
40-character string. If pvalue contains nonalphanumeric characters other than
asterisks (*), it must be enclosed in literal delimiters ($).
The *p form specifies that a parameter value entered by the user will be substituted for the
parameter keyword if the value meets the requirements defined by *p.
The *p= form specifies that a null substitution will occur if the value entered by the user
meets *p requirements. In other words, all occurrences of the parameter keyword will be
omitted from the procedure command record.
The *p=pvalue form specifies that pvalue is to be substituted for the parameter keyword if
the value entered by the user meets the requirements of the *p pattern.

Special Values
There are three special values which can be specified in an equivalenced value entry in a
*p=pvalue checklist pattern. These special values are:
Special Value

4-14

S i g n i fi c a n c e

#DATA

Specifies the name of the local file created by an unlabeled .DATA
directive (that is, a .DATA directive on which the lfn parameter was
omitted). Note that there can be no more than one unlabeled .DATA
directive in a procedure. The actual file name used will be ZZCCLAA,
ZZCCLAB, ZZCCLAC, or so on depending on the nesting level of the
procedure.

#FILE

S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e c o n t a i n i n g t h i s p r o c e d u r e .

//PRIMARY

S p e c i fi e s t h e p r i m a r y fi l e .

60459680 H

Checklist Pattern
*Am..nt
*Am..n= t
*Am..n=valuet
*Fm..nt
*Fm..n=t
*Fm..n=valuet
*K
*K=
*K=value
*N or *D
*N= or *D
*N=value
or
*D=value
*Sm..n(chars)t
or
*Sm..n/kt

Description
Allows entry of any character string up to 40 characters. The
string replaces keyword.
Entry of character string causes a null substitution.
Entry of character string replaces keyword with value.
Allows entry of a valid NOS file name. The file name replaces
keyword.
Entry of a file name causes a null substitution.
Entry of a file name replaces keyword with value.
Allows the keyword to be entered as a value. No substitution
results.
Entry of the keyword causes a null substitution.
Entry of the keyword replaces keyword with value.
S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e p a r a m e t e r i s o p t i o n a l . N o s u b s t i t u t i o n
results.
Specifies that omission of the parameter causes null
substitution.
Specifies a default value for the parameter. Omission of
parameter replaces keyword with value.
Allows entry of any characters selected from chars or from the
set represented by k. The characters selected replace
keyword, chars defines all allowable alphanumeric or special
characters, k can be any of the following mnemonic
abbreviations:
A Any alphabetic characters
B Any octal characters
D Any decimal characters
AB Any alphabetic and octal characters
AD Any alphabetic and decimal characters
To include an asterisk (*) as a member of the set, append an
asterisk to the mnemonic. For example, D* specifies any
decimal character and * as allowable characters.

*Sm..n(chars )=t

or

Entry of allowable characters causes a null substitution.

*Sm..n/k=t
*Sm..n(chars)=valuet Entry of allowable characters replaces keyword with value.
or
*Sm..n/k=value
pstring
pstring=
pstring=pvalue

Entry of string pstring replaces keyword with pstring.
Entry of string pstring causes a null substitution
Entry of string pstring causes pvalue to replace
keyword.

t The specification m..n is optional and defines the minimum and maximum length of the
character string or file name that can be entered for the parameter value. Valid ranges
are 0 to 40 for *A, 1 to 7 for *F, and 1 to 40 for *S. If only a single length value is
specified, it is assumed to be the maximum; for example, *A10 allows entry of any string
from 0 to 10 characters long.
Figure 4-4. Summary of Checklist Entries
60459680 H

4-15

Checklist Patterns

Checklist Pattern
*Am..n=value
*Am..n=
*Am..n

Description
S p e c i fi e s t h e s u b s t i t u t i o n f o r k e y w r d r e g a r d l e s s o f t h e s p e c i fi c a
tions for p± on the procedure call. m..n specifies the minimum
and maximum values for the length of the entry on the procedure
call. The default value for m is 0 and for n is 40. The maximum
value for n is 40. If *Am..n=value is in the checklist, value
replaces keywrd in the procedure body regardless of what is
specified on the procedure call.
You can specify any string of 0 to 40 uppercase characters for
value. You must delimit special characters, other than asterisks
(*), with dollar signs.
If value is //DATA, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body
are replaced by the name of the data file created by the .DATA
d i r e c t i v e ( r e f e r t o . D ATA D i r e c t i v e f o r t h e n a m e o f t h i s fi l e ) . I f
value is //FILE, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are
replaced by the name of the file that contains the procedure. Any
data read from this file begins with the record immediately
following the record that houses the procedure. If the procedure
resides on a library and is called by a name call form of the BEGIN
command, keywrd is replaced by a null value. If value is //PRIMARY,
all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are replaced by the
c u r r e n t p r i m a r y fi l e .
If *Am..n= is in the checklist, a null value replaces keywrd. If
*Am..n is specified, whatever is specified on the procedure call
replaces keywrd.
If you specify some form of the *A entry more than once in a single
checklist, the system uses the leftmost entry.
Example:
.PR0C,EB0C*I,P1=(*A5),P2=(*A10..15),P3=(*A20..) .
In this procedure header directive, PI allows entry of a character
string 0 to 5 characters long, P2 allows a string 10 to 15
characters long, and P3 allows a string 20 to 40 characters long.

*Fm..n=value
*Fm..n=
*Fm..n

4-16

Specifies that the parameter entry for p£ on the procedure call be
a file name that conforms to the operating system format for a local
file name. m..n specifies the minimum and maximum length of the
file name. The default value for m is 1 and for n is 7. If
*Fm..n=value is in the checklist, value replaces keywrd in the
procedure body when a file name is specified on the procedure
call. You can specify any 0- to 40-character string for value.
You must delimit special characters, other than asterisks (*), with
dollar signs.

60459680 H

/ffSN.

Checklist Pattern

Description
If value is //DATA, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body
are replaced by the name of the data file created by the .DATA
d i r e c t i v e ( r e f e r t o . D ATA D i r e c t i v e f o r t h e n a m e o f t h i s fi l e ) . I f
value is //FILE, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are
replaced by the name of the file that contains the procedure. Any
data read from this file begins with the record immediately
following the record that houses the procedure. If the procedure
resides on a library and is called by a name call form of the BEGIN
command, keywrd is replaced by a null value. If value is //PRIMARY,
all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are replaced by the
c u r r e n t p r i m a r y fi l e .
If *Fm..n= is in the checklist, a null value replaces keywrd. If
*Fm..n is specified, the file name specified on the procedure call
replaces keywrd.
If you specify some form of the *F entry more than once in a single
checklist, the system uses the leftmost entry.
Example:
Procedure EXEC is on local file EXEC:
.PR0C,EXEC*I,I=(*F4..7),B=(*N=LG0,*F),
L=(*F=0UTPUT).
FTN5,#I=I,#B=B,#L=L.
EXEC is called:
EXEC,I=CARDS,L=PRINT.
The procedure body becomes:
FTN5,I=CARDS,B=LG0,L=0UTPUT.

*K=value
*K=
*K

Specifies the substitution for keywrd when the parameter entry for
pj on the procedure call is only the keyword keywrd or if the
keyword is entered in response to an interactive prompt. If
*K=value is in the checklist, value replaces keywrd in the
procedure body. You can specify any string of 0 to 40 uppercase
c h a r a c t e r s f o r v a l u e . Yo u m u s t d e l i m i t s p e c i a l c h a r a c t e r s , o t h e r
than asterisks (*), with dollar signs.
If value is //DATA, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body
are replaced by the name of the data file created by the .DATA
d i r e c t i v e ( r e f e r t o . D ATA D i r e c t i v e f o r t h e n a m e o f t h i s fi l e ) . I f
value is //FILE, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are
replaced by the name of the file that contains the procedure. Any
data read from this file begins with the record immediately
following the record that houses the procedure. If the procedure
resides on a library and is called by a name call form of the BEGIN
command, keyword is replaced by a null value. If value is
//PRIMARY, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are
replaced by the current primary file.

/p8?s
60459680 H

4-17

Checklist

Pattern

Description

If *K= is in the checklist, a null value replaces keywrd. If *K is
in the checklist, no substitution occurs.
Specifying some form of the *K entry more than once in a single
checklist is an error. However, you can specify another pattern
that is equivalent. Refer to procedures SUBN1 and SUBN2 in the
following examples.
Examples:
Procedure KEY is on local file PROCFIL.
.PROC,KEY*I,P1
=
C O M M E N T.
#P1=P1,

(*K),P2=(*K=X),P3=(*K=0.
#P2=P2,
#P3=P3

_.

^

KEY is called:
BEGIN,KEY„P1,P2,P3.
The procedure body becomes:
COMMENT. P1=P1, P2=X, P3=
The following calls to procedures SUBN1 and SUBN2 illustrate the y=^
left-to-right checking of the checklist and the use of equivalent '=^
patterns. Procedures SUBN1 and SUBN2 are on local files by those
same names and have the following lines, respectively:
.PR0C,SUBN1*I,P1=(*K=KEYW0RD,P1=STRING,*N=DEFAULT).
N0TE.+#P1=P1
.PR0C,SUBN2*I,P1=(*N=DEFAULT,P1=STRING,*K=KEYW0RD).
N0TE.+#P1=P1
Procedure SUBN1 is called:
subn1,p1
The system writes:
P1=KEYW0RD
Procedure SUBN2 is called:
subn2,p1
The system writes:
P1=STRING

^Ssgv

4-18

60459680 F

/^p^\

Checklist Pattern

Description
A *K checklist pattern applies only when the keyword is entered by
itself, or in response to an interactive prompt. It does not apply
when an equivalenced value matching the keyword is entered as shown
in the following call to procedure SUBN1:
subn1,P1=p1
The system writes:
P1-STRING

*N=value
*N=
*N
*D=value
*D=
*N

Specifies the substitution for keywrd when there is no parameter
entry for p^ on the procedure call. If *Ns=value or *D=value is
in the checklist, value replaces keywrd in the procedure body. You
can specify any string of 0 to 40 uppercase characters for value.
Yo u m u s t d e l i m i t s p e c i a l c h a r a c t e r s , o t h e r t h a n a s t e r i s k s ( * ) , w i t h
dollar
signs.

|
I
I
I

If value is #DATA, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body
are replaced by the name of the data file created by the .DATA
d i r e c t i v e ( r e f e r t o . D ATA D i r e c t i v e f o r t h e n a m e o f t h i s fi l e ) . I f
value is //FILE, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are
replaced by the name of the file that contains the procedure. Any
data read from this file begins with the record immediately
following the record that houses the procedure. If the procedure
resides on a library and is called by a name call form of the BEGIN
command, keywrd is replaced by a null value. If value is //PRIMARY,
all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are replaced by the
c u r r e n t p r i m a r y fi l e .
If *N= or *D= is in the checklist, a null value replaces keywrd. I
If *N or *D is in the checklist, no substitution occurs. I
If no format of the *N or *D entry is in the checklist, p. is a |
required parameter and interactive prompting occurs when it is
omitted from the procedure call. Specifying some form of the *N or ■
* D e n t r y m o r e t h a n o n c e i n a s i n g l e c h e c k l i s t i s a n e r r o r. |
Example:
Procedure SUB is on local file PROCFIL.
.PR0C,SUB*I,P1=(*N),P2=(*N=X),P3=(*N=).
COMMENT. #P1=P1, UP2-P2, #P3=P3, P4
SUB is called:
BEGIN,SUB.
The procedure body becomes:
COMMENT. P1=P1, P2=X, P3=, P4

60459680 H

4-19

Checklist

Pattern

Description

*N and *D values are displayed under different conditions. *D
values are always displayed when screen mode interactive prompting
is required and a non-null value has not been entered for the
parameter. *D values are always accepted if entered. *N values
are displayed in screen mode only when they are valid according to
another checklist pattern which has no replacement value. If an *N
value matches more than one checklist pattern, the first checklist
pattern determines whether the value is displayed.
*Sm..n(chars)=value Specifies that the parameter entry for pA on the procedure call
*Sm..n(chars)= may consist of a string of characters selected (in any order) from
*Sm..n(chars) the set of characters represented by chars or from the set of
o r c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t e d b y k . m . . n s p e c i fi e s t h e m i n i m u m a n d
*Sm..n/k=value maximum values for the length of the string entered on the
*Sm..n/k= procedure call. The default for m is 1 and for n is 40. The
*Sm..n/k maximum value for n is 40. chars represents a set of up to 40
uppercase alphanumeric and/or special characters. Special
characters other than asterisks must be $-delimited. k selects one
of the following sets:
k
A
B
D
AB
AD

Characters
All alphabetic characters
All
octal
characters
All decimal characters
All alphabetic and octal characters
All alphabetic and decimal characters

To include one or more asterisks as members of the set, append an
asterisk to the mnemonic. For example, AB* specifies all
alphabetic and octal characters and asterisks are allowed.
If *Sm..n(chars)=value or *Sm..n/k=value is in the checklist, value
replaces keywrd in the procedure body when 1 to n characters from
chars are specified on the procedure call. You can specify any
s t r i n g o f 0 t o 4 0 u p p e r c a s e c h a r a c t e r s f o r v a l u e . Yo u m u s t d e l i m i t < > ^ \
special characters, other than an asterisk (*), with dollar signs. '
If value is //DATA, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body
are replaced by the name of the data file created by the .DATA
d i r e c t i v e ( r e f e r t o . D ATA D i r e c t i v e f o r t h e n a m e o f t h i s fi l e ) . I f
value is //FILE, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are
replaced by the name of the file that contains the procedure. Any
data read from this file begins with the record immediately
following the record that houses the procedure. If the procedure
resides on a library and is called by a name call form of the BEGIN
command, keywrd is replaced by a null value. If value is //PRIMARY,
all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are replaced by the
c u r r e n t p r i m a r y fi l e .

■■^*K
4-20

60459680 H

Procedure COPIL will accept one to four letters for the F parameter.
More than one set may be specified for a parameter. For example,
p r o c e d u r e S E T h a s t w o s e t s s p e c i fi e d f o r t h e P p a r a m e t e r . I
.PR0C,SET*I,P1=(*S,*SO,*S3).

|

Parameter entries could include P=BB or P=XZY but not P=AZ or P.
Null sets are not allowed. For example, all the set entries for PI
in the following procedure header are in error.
.PROC,SET*I,P=(*S3(ABC),*S3/D>.

60459680

E

4-20.1/4-20.2

0*%

Checklist

Pattern

Description

I f * S m . . n ( chars)= or *Sm..n/k= is in the checklist, a null value is
substituted for keywrd. If *Sm..n(chars) or *Sm..n/k is in the
checklist, the parameter entry for pi on the procedure call
replaces keywrd.
Example:
Procedure COPIL is on local file COPI:
.PR0C,C0PIL*I,0"0LD FILE NAMEH=(*F,*N=OLD),
R"REPLACEMENT FILE NAME"=(*F,*N=LG0),
NMNEW FILE NAME"=(*F,*N=NEW),
L"LAST REC0RD"=(*F,*N=O,
F,,FLAG"=(*S4( ARTE) ,*N=).
COPYL,0,R,N,L,F.
REVERT.
COPIL is called:
BEGIN,COPIL,COPI,0=OLD,R=MODIFID,
N-NEW,F=AE.
The procedure body becomes:

r

COPYL,OLD,MODIFID,NEW„AE.
Procedure COPIL will accept one to four letters for the F parameter.
More than one set may be specified for a parameter. For example,
procedure SET has two sets specified for the P parameter.
.PR0C,SET*I,P=(*S3(ABC),*S3/D).
Parameter entries could include P=BB, P=BCA, or P=901 but not
P=XZY, P=AZ, P=P or P=A2.

jt$$bz\

Null sets are not allowed. For example, all the set entries for PI
in the following procedure header are in error.
.PROC,ERROR*I,P1 = (*S,*SO,*S3).

60459680

H

4-21

Checklist Pattern
pstring=pvalue
pstring=
pstring

Description
Specifies the substitution for keywrd when the parameter entry for
p.^ on the procedure call matches pstring. pstring must be 0 to 40
uppercase characters. Special characters must be $-delimited. If
pstring=pvalue is in the checklist, pvalue replaces keywrd in the
procedure body when pstring is specified on the procedure call.
You can specify any string of 0 to 40 uppercase characters for
pvalue. You must delimit special characters, other than asterisks (*)
with dollar signs.
If pvalue is //DATA, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body
are replaced by the name of the data file created by the .DATA
d i r e c t i v e ( r e f e r t o . D ATA D i r e c t i v e f o r t h e n a m e o f t h i s fi l e ) . I f
pvalue is //FILE, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body
are replaced by the name of the file that contains the procedure.
Any data read from this file begins with the record immediately
following the record that contains the procedure. If the procedure
resides on a library and is called by a name call form of the BEGIN
command, keywrd is replaced by a null value. If pvalue is
//PRIMARY, all occurrences of keywrd in the procedure body are
replaced by the current primary file.
If pstring= is in the checklist, a null value replaces keywrd.
pstring is in the checklist, pstring replaces keywrd.

If

Example:
Procedure LABL on a global library file:
.PR0C,LABL*I,FN"FILE NAME"=C*F),
VSN "VSN OF TAPE"=(*A),
WRITE "YES OR N0"=(YES=W,N0=R).
LABEL,FN,#VSN=VSN,#PO=WRITE,WRITE.
REVERT.
Procedure LABL is called:
LABL,FN=STATS,VSN=TAPE24,WRITE=N0.
Procedure body becomes:
LABEL,STATS,VSN=TAPE24,P0=R,R.

Menu Format
This format of the .PROC directive generates a menu when you call the procedure and make no
menu selection, when you make an incorrect selection, or when you request help information
(refer to Requesting Help on Procedure Calls). The presence of the NOLIST parameter on the
.HELP directive suppresses the menu display when you request .HELP information.

.^ssffix

4-22

60459680 H

Format:
.PROC,pname*M"title",keywrd=(selections).ck.
Parameter

Description

pname

Specifies the procedure name, pname must be a 1- to 7-character
string of alphanumeric characters. Make the first character of pname
an alphabetic character to avoid inadvertent editing of the primary
file on name calls to procedures. You must append *M to pname to
enable menu generation.

title

Specifies the menu title. The title string can be a maximum of 40
lowercase (12-bit) characters, 80 uppercase (6-bit) characters, or any
combination of lowercase and uppercase characters that does not exceed
4 8 0 b i t s . T h e t i t l e fi e l d c a n b e n u l l ( " " ) o r c o m p l e t e l y o m i t t e d . I f
you omit title, the system uses the procedure name pname as the title
when the procedure is called in screen mode. The title appears
whenever the system displays the menu.

keywrd

Specifies the keyword in the procedure body for which the system
substitutes one of the selections, keywrd can be a string of 1 to 10
alphanumeric characters.

selections

Defines the menu selections. A maximum of 50 selections can be
defined for a menu. The definitions must have the following format:

0^U\

num^Hdescript|",...,numn"descriptn"
n u m * D e fi n e s a n i n t e g e r n u m b e r t h a t i d e n t i fi e s t h e m e n u
selection in the screen display, num^ can be any
integer up to 10 digits in length. Menu selections
appear in the screen display in the order they are
defined in the .PROC directive, not necessarily in the
order defined by the selection numbers.
descript. Describes the menu selection. The description can be
a maximum of 40 lowercase (12-bit) characters, 80
uppercase (6-bit) characters, or any combination of
lowercase and uppercase characters that does not
exceed 480 bits. In screen mode, the system will
display a maximum of 40 characters. You can also
s p e c i f y a n u l l d e s c r i p t i o n ( " " ) o r o m i t t h i s fi e l d .
This description appears whenever the system displays
the menu.

ck

Specifies a 1- to 10-character comment keyword. This is an optional
parameter. A period must follow the comment keyword. The system
substitutes comments specified on the procedure call for the comment
keyword in the procedure body. The system substitutes a null value
for the comment keyword if no comments are on the procedure call. If
you do not specify a comment keyword, the system ignores comments made
on the procedure call.
Note that the system treats the comment keyword ck as a contiguous
string upon substitution. If ck is concatenated to another long
string in the procedure body, this substitution may produce a line
that exceeds the line length limit (150 6-bit characters).

60459680 H

4-22.1

A menu has the following format:
title
num-j. descript.j
nun^. descript2

numn. descriptn
SELECT BY NUMBER OR TYPE Q TO QUIT?
where title, nun^, and descriptj conform to the descriptions given them previously. You
can specify the prompt for a selection using the .PROMPT directive. If you do not, the ^s y s t e m u s e s a d e f a u l t p r o m p t a s j u s t s h o w n . A d d i t i o n a l l y, t h e s y s t e m c e n t e r s a l l l i n e s w h e n ^ 1
in screen mode.
The Q option aborts the procedure call and initiates a search for an EXIT command in the
procedure. If the procedure was called from another procedure, the EXIT commands in the
calling procedure or procedures are also processed.

r ^ ^ K

4~22*2

60459680

G

FORMATTING AND HELP DIRECTIVES
Along with the procedure header, the formatting and help directives further define the
parameter prompts and help information that appears at the terminal. The formatting
directives, if present, must follow the procedure header. Comment directives (beginning
with .*) may be interspersed among the formatting directives. Help directives and help text
follow the formatting directives. Comment directives placed in the help section are
considered a part of the help text.

.CORRECT Directive
The .CORRECT directive specifies the first field of the prompt that follows a set of
incorrect parameter entries. When the system prompts the procedure caller for corrections
to an incorrect entry, the prompt has the following three fields:
text parameter descriptiont
T h i s d i r e c t i v e s p e c i fi e s t h e t e x t fi e l d .
Format:
.CORRECT,text.
.CORRECT=text.
Parameter
text

Description
Specifies a 1- to 80-character text string that appears on the
screen. The system interprets your string in 6/12-bit display code,
which supports uppercase and lowercase characters.
In the first format, any alphanumeric or special characters may be
used except a period or right parenthesis (. or )). Special
characters need not be enclosed in $ signs.
In the second format, any characters may be used (including a period
or right parenthesis), but special characters must be enclosed in
$ signs.
In screen mode, the default text string is:
Please correct
In line mode, the default string is:
Correct

In screen mode, if the prompt is too long, the system truncates the prompt and indicates the
t r u n c a t i o n w i t h a n e l l i p s i s ( n o t r u n c a t i o n o c c u r s i n l i n e m o d e ) . Yo u c a n s u p p r e s s d i s p l a y |
of the parameter field of the prompt by using apostrophes rather than quotation marks around
the description in the procedure header. In screen mode, the prompt appears left-justified
on the top line of the screen.
This directive does not apply to menu procedures.
tThe description field does not appear in screen mode.
60459680 H

4-23

■*"«S^V

.ENDHELP Directive
The .ENDHELP directive specifies the end of the help section of the procedure body. You
must include an .ENDHELP directive if there are any help directives in the procedure. Only
one .ENDHELP directive is allowed in a procedure.
Format:
.ENDHELP.
.ENTER Directive
The .ENTER directive specifies the text for the initial prompt for a parameter. When the
system initially prompts the user for a parameter, the prompt has the following three fields:
text

parameter description

T h i s d i r e c t i v e s p e c i fi e s t h e t e x t fi e l d .
Format:
.ENTER,text.
,ENTER=text.
Parameter

Description

t e x t S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 8 0 - c h a r a c t e r t e x t s t r i n g t h a t a p p e a r s o n t h e
screen. In the first format, any alphanumeric or special characters
may be used except a period or right parenthesis (. or )). Special
characters need not be enclosed in $ signs.
In the second format, any characters may be used (including a period
or right parenthesis), but special characters must be enclosed in
$ signs.
The system interprets your string in 6/12-bit display code, which
supports uppercase and lowercase characters. The default for the
screen mode is:
Please enter
The default for line mode is:
Enter
In screen mode, if the prompt is too long, the system truncates the prompt and indicates the
truncation with an ellipsis (no truncation occurs in line mode). You can suppress display
of the text and parameter fields of the prompt by using apostrophes around the description
in the procedure header. In screen mode, the prompt appears left-justified on the top line
of the screen.
This directive does not apply to menu procedures.

'*^S\

4-24

60459680 H

.Fn Directive
The .Fn directive specifies a label for one of the six programmable function keys you can
use with screen mode parameter displays.
Format:
.Fn,text.
,Fn=text.
where n is one of the integers 1 through 6.
Parameter

Description

t e x t S p e c i fi e s a l a b e l s t r i n g o f n o t m o r e t h a n 8 c h a r a c t e r s . Yo u c a n
specify lowercase and uppercase characters.
In the first format, any alphanumeric or special characters may be
used except a period or right parenthesis (. or )). Special
characters need not be enclosed in $ signs.
In the second format, any characters may be used (including a period
or right parenthesis), but special characters must be enclosed in
$ signs.
The function and default label of each of the programmable function keys are given in the
table 4-2.

60459680

H

4-24.1/4-24.2

Table 4-2. Programmable Function Keys for Procedures
Default Label

Key

Function

Fl

FWD

Pages forward through screens of parameters or menu
selections.

F2

BKW

Pages backward through screens of parameters or menu
selections.

F3

HELP FWD

Pages forward through screens of .HELP text.

F4

HELP BKW

Pages backward through screens of .HELP text.

F5

HELP

Displays .HELP text at the bottom of the screen.

F6

QUIT

Aborts the procedure call and initiates search for an
EXIT command in the current procedure and (if nested) in
the calling procedure(s).

.HELP Directive
The .HELP directive indicates that the text that follows it is information about the
procedure itself or its parameters. The procedure caller can access this information by
entering a question mark as a parameter in a procedure call or by appending a question mark
to the procedure name or a parameter name. When the system encounters a question mark in a
procedure call, it stops processing the call and starts help processing. Therefore,
anything entered after the question mark will not be read. Refer to Requesting Help on
P r o c e d u r e C a l l s l a t e r i n t h i s s e c t i o n . I f s p e c i fi e d , . H E L P d i r e c t i v e s m u s t i m m e d i a t e l y
precede the .ENDHELP directive.
Formats:

0&>\

.HELP.
.HELP,,NOLIST.
.HELP,parm.
.HELP,parm,NOLIST.
Parameter

Description

NOLIST

Suppresses the display of some of the .HELP text during help
p ro c e s s i n g .

parm

Specifies one of the parameter keywords in an interactive procedure
(*I) or specifies one of the menu selections (choice^) in a menu
procedure (*M).

The first and second formats indicate that the text that follows the directive describes the
procedure itself. For interactive procedures in line mode, the NOLIST parameter suppresses I
the display of a parameter list when the caller requests information about the procedure
itself. For menu procedures, the NOLIST parameter suppresses the display of the menu in
line mode.

■g^S\

For interactive procedures, the third, and fourth formats indicate that the text that follows
the directive describes the parameter associated with the keyword parm. The NOLIST
parameter suppresses the display of acceptable parameter values as given in the parameter's
checklist.
60459680 H

4-25

>*^\

For menu procedures, the third and fourth formats indicate that the text following the
directive describes the specified menu selection. The NOLIST parameter suppresses the
display of the menu after the display of the .HELP text.
The text information starts on the line following the .HELP directive. The text can span
multiple lines and must end with either another .HELP directive or an .ENDHELP directive.
Parameter substitution does not occur within the .HELP text.
The system assumes that your .HELP text is in 6/12-bit display code, which supports
uppercase and lowercase characters. In batch jobs, the system displays .HELP text in
uppercase only.
Interactive (*I) Help
When you request help information about an interactive procedure, the system displays the ^^1
following:
'
• The text following the procedure's .HELP directive.
• The parameters that follow the procedure name on the .PROC directive unless
suppressed by the NOLIST parameter of the .HELP directive (.HELP,,NOLIST).
• A p ro mpt fo r a va l u e . Th e p ro mpt includes the descriptive string specified with the
parameter in the .PROC directive.
When you request information about a particular parameter of an interactive procedure, the ^%
system
displays
the
following:
/
• Parameter values that are acceptable according to the parameter's checklist (the
presence of NOLIST on the parameter's .HELP directive suppresses the display of
these values).
• The text that follows the parameter's .HELP directive.
• T h e c u r r e n t v a l u e , i f a n y, o f t h e p a r a m e t e r.

•

A prompt for a value. The prompt includes the descriptive string specified with the /*®\
parameter
on
the
.PROC
directive.
)

Menu (*M) Help
When you request help information about a menu procedure, the system displays the following:
• The text following the procedure's .HELP directive.
• The menu unless suppressed by the NOLIST parameter of the .HELP directive
(.HELP,,NOLIST).
• A prompt for a menu selection.
When you request information about a particular menu selection, the system displays the
following:
• The text following the .HELP directive for that menu selection.
• The menu unless suppressed by the NOLIST parameter of the .HELP directive.
• A prompt for a menu selection.
4-26

^***!\
60459680

G

/^**

Line Mode Example:
Procedure PRINT (on file PRINT) verifies that the selected file is local before it routes
t h e fi l e t o a p r i n t e r.

| NOTE
The .HELP text uses lowercase and uppercase
characters.

,PROC,PRINT*I,F"FILE NAME"=(*F),
r D C ' D I S P O S I T.HELP.
I O N C O D E " = ( * N = L P, L P, P R , L R , L S , L T ) .
This procedure routes a permanent file to the selected line printer.
.HELP,F.
The name of the permanent file to be routed.
.HELP,DC.
The disposition code. DC accepts only the line printer options.
.ENDHELP.
. I F, F I L E ( F, . N O T. L O ) , P F.
GET,F.
.ELSE,PF.
r

R E W.ENDIF,PF.
I N D , F.
COPYSBF,F,Z.
ROUTE,Z,#DC=DC.
REVERT,NOLIST.
To get a description of procedure PRINT, either append a question mark to the file name or
enter a question mark as the first parameter. If PRINT is a local file, you can get such a
description by entering any of the following:
PRINT?

r

P RBEGIN,PRINT,PRINT?
I N T, ?
BEGIN,PRINT,PRINT,?
If PRINT is not local, enter any of the following:
BEGIN,PRINT,PRINT?
or
BEGIN,PRINT,PRINT,?
or
GET,PRINT
PRINT,?
or
GET,PRINT
PRINT?

r

60459680

H

4~27

The following is a sample of the dialogue generated by the .PROC and .HELP directives:
/begin,pri nt,print?
T h i s p r o c e d u r e r o u t e s a p e r m a n e n t fi l e t o t h e s e l e c t e d l i n e p r i n t e r .
PARAMETERS FOR PRINT ARE F, DC
ENTER F FILE NAME? ?
ALLOWABLE VALUE(S)
MUST BE A FILE NAME
T h e n a m e o f t h e p e r m a n e n t fi l e t o b e r o u t e d .
E N T E R F F I L E N A M E ? d a t a fi l
ENTER DC DISPOSITION CODE? ?
ALLOWABLE VALUE(S)
LP
PR
LR
LS
LT
PARAMETER MAY BE OMITTED
The disposition code. DC accepts only the line printer options.
ENTER DC DISPOSITION CODE? pr
To illustrate the effect of enclosing the description string for a parameter in apostrophes
instead of quotation marks, we use the same procedure as in the previous example and replace
the quotation marks with apostrophes:
.PROC,PRINT*I,F'FILE NAME'=(*F),
DC DISPOSITION CODE' = (*N = LP,LP,PR,LR,LS,LT).
Note the difference in the prompts.
/begin,print,print?
T h i s p r o c e d u r e r o u t e s a p e r m a n e n t fi l e t o t h e s e l e c t e d l i n e p r i n t e r .
PARAMETERS FOR PRINT ARE F, DC
FILE NAME? ?
ALLOWABLE VALUE(S)
MUST BE A FILE NAME
T h e n a m e o f t h e p e r m a n e n t fi l e t o b e r o u t e d .
F I L E N A M E ? d a t a fi l
DISPOSITION CODE? ?
ALLOWABLE VALUE(S)
LP
PR
LR
LS
LT
PARAMETER MAY BE OMITTED
The disposition code. DC accepts only the line printer options.
DISPOSITION CODE? pr

4-28

60459680

E

Screen Mode Example:
If you are at a terminal supported by the full-screen display products and your terminal is
in screen mode, the system can use full-screen displays to prompt you for parameters and to
provide you with help information.
The following screen results if you call procedure PRINT (as defined in the previous
example):

PRINT

F FILE NAME:
DC DISPOSITION CODE:
yjpfet.

LP

Specify values and press NEXT when ready

/$fj^s

F5 | HELP| F6 | QUIT|

If you press the HELP key while the cursor is positioned in the input field for first
parameter, you get the following screen:

PRINT
F FILE NAME:
DC DISPOSITION CODE: LP
Specify values and press NEXT when ready
F FILE NAME
ALLOWABLE VALUE (S)
MUST BE A FILE NAME
The name of the permanent file to be routed.

F5 |HELP 1 F6 JQUIT

JsPN

60459680 H

4-29

If you press the HELP key while the cursor is positioned in the input field for the second
parameter, you get the following screen:

PRINT
F FILE NAME:
DC DISPOSITION CODE: LP_
Specify values and press NEXT when ready
DC DISPOSITION CODE
ALLOWABLE VALUE(S)
PR
LR
LS
LT
PARAMETER MAY BE OMITTED
The disposition code. DC accepts only the line printer options,

F5 HELP

F6 QUIT

To get help information about the procedure itself, you can append a question mark to the
name of procedure on the call or press the HELP key again after you get help for any of the
parameters.

PRINT
F FILE NAME:
DC DISPOSITION CODE: _kP_
Specify values and press NEXT when ready
PRINT
This procedure routes a permanent file to the selected line printer.

F5 |HELPJ F6 |QUITJ

Refer to Volume 2 for a detailed description of calling procedures in screen mode.

4-30

60459680 H

.NOCLR Directive
The .NOCLR directive inhibits the system from automatically clearing the screen at the end
of the procedure call (once all required parameters are supplied). You can also specify a
message to appear on the top line of the screen. Unless specified to do otherwise, the
system clears the screen at the end of the call, and the screen is blank until the procedure
completes execution or sends output to the terminal.
The .NOCLR directive must be placed before any .HELP directives in the procedure.
Format:
.NOCLR,message.
.N0CLR=message.
Parameter

Description

m e s s a g e S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 4 0 - c h a r a c t e r t e x t s t r i n g t h a t a p p e a r s o n t h e
screen. You can use uppercase and lowercase characters in the string.
In the first format, any alphanumeric or special characters may be
used except a period or right parenthesis (. or )). Special
characters need not be enclosed in $ signs.
In the second format, any characters may be used (including a period
or right parenthesis), but special characters must be enclosed in
$ signs.
This directive applies only if the procedure is executed in screen mode.
.NOTE Directive
The .NOTE directive specifies the message that appears on the screen and in your dayfile at
the end of the procedure call (once all required parameters are supplied). Unless specified
to do otherwise, the system clears the screen at the end of the call (refer to the .NOCLR
Directive), and the screen is blank until the procedure completes execution or sends output
to the terminal.
Format:
.NOTE,message.
,NOTE=message.
Parameter

Description

m e s s a g e S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 4 0 - c h a r a c t e r t e x t s t r i n g t h a t a p p e a r s o n t h e s c r e e n
and in your dayfile. You can use uppercase and lowercase characters
in the string.
In the first format, any alphanumeric or special characters may be
used except a period or right parenthesis (. or )). Special
characters need not be enclosed in $ signs.
In the second format, any characters may be used (including a period
or right parenthesis), but special characters must be enclosed in
$ signs.
This directive applies only if the procedure is executed in screen mode.
60459680 H

4-31

.PAGE Directive
The .PAGE directive specifies the string that precedes the page number for procedure
displays that require more than one screen.
Format:
.PAGE,text.
.PAGE=text.
Parameter
text

Description
Specifies a 0- to 40-character text string. You can use uppercase and
lowercase characters in the string. The default is:
Page
In the first format, any alphanumeric or special characters may be
used except a period or right parenthesis (. or )). Special
characters need not be enclosed in $ signs.
In the second format, any characters may be used (including a period
or right parenthesis), but special characters must be enclosed in
$ signs.

.PROMPT Directive
When a procedure is called in screen mode, the .PROMPT directive defines the last line of
the screen, assuming no .HELP text is being shown. By default, this line tells the
procedure caller how to proceed. For menu procedures, the input field immediately follows
this prompt. In line mode, this directive applies only to menu procedures, where the system
produces a screen-like display.
Format:
.PROMPT,text.
.PR0MPT=text.
Parameter
text

Description
Specifies a 0- to 40-character text string that appears as the prompt
on the screen. The text string can be a maximum of 40 lowercase
(12-bit) characters, 80 uppercase (6-bit) characters, or any
combination of lowercase and uppercase characters that does not exceed
480 bits.
In the first format, any alphanumeric or special characters may be
used except a period or right parenthesis (. or )). Special
characters need not be enclosed in $ signs.
In the second format, any.characters may be used (including a period
or right parenthesis), but special characters must be enclosed in
$ signs.

4-32

60459680 H

^|P®\

Parameter

Description
In screen mode, the default for menu procedures is:
Select from the list above and press NEXT,
and for interactive procedures the default is:
Specify values and press NEXT when ready.
In line mode, the default for menu procedures is:
SELECT BY NUMBER OR TYPE Q TO QUIT.

( EXPANSION CONTROL DIRECTIVES
The expansion control directives allow you to control certain aspects of procedure
expansion. These directives allow you to inhibit expansion of portions of a procedure, to I
change the inhibit and concatenation characters, and to skip portions of the procedure when
writing lines to the procedure command record.

.CC Directive
\ The .CC directive specifies the character used to concatenate character strings during
procedure expansion. The new concatenation character remains in effect until the procedure
terminates or until you enter another .CC directive. The default concatenation character is
the ASCII character _ or the CDC graphics character 1+ . The .CC directive can be placed
anywhere in the procedure.
Format:
.CC(n)
0m>\

Parameter

Description

n S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w c o n c a t e n a t i o n c h a r a c t e r.

.EXPAND Directive
The .EXPAND directive terminates or restores procedure expansion for subsequent lines of the
procedure. The .EXPAND directive can be used anywhere in the procedure following the
formatting and help directives.
Format:
EXPAND,option

60459680

H

4-33

-

Parameter

^

Description

ON

Specifies that subsequent lines of the procedure will be expanded
n o r m a l l y. T h i s i s t h e d e f a u l t v a l u e .

OFF

S p e c i fi e s t h a t n o p a r a m e t e r s u b s t i t u t i o n s o r d i r e c t i v e p r o c e s s i n g w i l l
be performed on subsequent lines. In other words, any subsequent
commands or procedure directives will be written to the command record
just as they appear in the procedure file.

.IC Directive
The .IC directive specifies the character used to inhibit parameter substitution or
directive processing during procedure expansion. The new inhibit character remains in
e ff e c t u n t i l t h e p r o c e d u r e t e r m i n a t e s o r u n t i l y o u e n t e r a n o t h e r . I C d i r e c t i v e . T h e d e f a u l t
inhibit character is the ASCII character // or the CDC graphics character = . The .IC
directive can be placed anywhere in the procedure.
Format:
.IC(n)
Parameter

Description
S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w i n h i b i t c h a r a c t e r.

.SET Directive
The .SET directive allows you to build new parameters using strings and substrings created
by the STR, STRB, and STRD functions and concatenation operations, which are described in
section 6.
Format:
• SETjkeywd^strexpj,... ,keywdi=strexpi,
Parameter

Description

keywd^

Defines a new keyword or references an existing keyword, either
from the .PROC header or from an earlier .SET directive. Keywd^
can be used for substitution in subsequent statements just as if
it had been a formal parameter contained in the .PROC header.

s t rexp^

May be any valid CCL expression, usually but not necessarily an
expression which produces a string result. If the result of
s t r e x p j ^ i s n o t a s t r i n g b u t a v a l u e , t h e v a l u e i s l e f t - j u s t i fi e d
and considered a string. The resulting string in either case is
substituted for any occurrences of keywd^ in subsequent
statements of the procedure.

.'J-S5!Ni

4-34

60459680 H

Example 1:
.PR0C,CATTER*I,P1=(*A),P2=(*S3/D).
.SET,K9=STR($P1$,1,4)//STRD(P2,-1).
.IF,$K9$.EQ.$G00D1$,G0.

NOTE./THE 1ST 4 CHAR OF P1 AND THE LAST OF P2 = K9.
,ELSE,GO.

REVERT,EX.DISPLAY,STR($SORRY, K9 IS NOT G00D1$).
.ENDIF,60.
In this example, two substrings were concatenated to produce one string in the .SET
expression. Every occurrence of keyword K9 in the lines following the .SET directive is
replaced by the string resulting from the concatenation of substrings PI and P2. If GOODY
and 101 were supplied as values for PI and P2, the value of K9 would be set to G00D1. (For
a detailed explanation of how the STR and STRD functions operate, refer to section 6.) The
subsequent .IF statement would be true, causing the NOTE command to be included and
executed. If BADNEWS were substituted for PI, the .IF statement would be false, resulting
in the execution of the REVERT command and then of the DISPLAY command.
Example 2:
.PR0C,VALUES*I,P1=(*S/D),P2=(*S/D).
.SET,V1=STRD(P1+P2),V2=STRD(P1*P2),V3=STRD(P1**P2).
-IF,V1=V2=V3.NOTE./SUM, PRODUCT AND POWER ARE EQUAL.
NOTE./THE SUM OF P1 AND P2 IS V1.
NOTE./THE PRODUCT OF P1 AND P2 IS V2.
N0TE./P1 TO THE POWER OF P2 IS V3.
As this example demonstrates, the .SET directive along with the STRD function can create new
keywords which make it possible to include arithmetic values as strings in subsequent
commands and directives.

FILE DIRECTIVES
T h e fi l e d i r e c t i v e s e i t h e r c r e a t e l o c a l fi l e s d u r i n g p r o c e d u r e e x p a n s i o n t i m e o r p l a c e fi l e
marks in the procedure command record.

.DATA Directive
A .DATA directive in a procedure marks the beginning of a sequence of data lines to be
written to a separate file when the procedure is called. The data file can contain program
source code, other NOS procedures, or any other type of data.
Format:
. D ATA , l f n .

j0JHfeS

60459680

H

4-34.Ii

Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e o n w h i c h t h e d a t a l i n e s a r e t o b e
w r i t t e n . I f a fi l e n a m e d l f n i s a l r e a d y a s s i g n e d t o t h e j o b , i t i s
returned, and new local file lfn is created. You cannot specify INPUT
f o r l f n . I f l f n i s n o t s p e c i fi e d , t h e . D ATA fi l e c a n b e r e f e r e n c e d i n
the procedure header using the special symbol //DATA.
The default for lfn depends on the nesting level of the procedure. At
the first procedure level, the system calls this file ZZCCLAA; at the
second procedure level, it is ZZCCLAB; and so on.
You can use the .IF, .ELSE, and .ENDIF directives within the data lines following the .DATA
d i r e c t i v e t o c o n d i t i o n a l l y i n c l u d e l i n e s i n t h e d a t a fi l e .
File marks generated by .EOR and .EOF directives can subdivide the lines written to the data ^^
file into records or files. The sequence of data lines is terminated by one of the
following:
• A n o t h e r . D ATA d i r e c t i v e .
• A n e n d - o f - r e c o r d ( n o t a n . E O R d irective) in the procedure file.
• An end-of-file (not an .EOF directive) in the procedure file.
• An end-of-information in the procedure file.
The data file created does not include the .DATA directive. Keyword substitution continues
within the data file unless you insert a .EXPAND directive to suspend expansion processing.
A f t e r t h e d a t a fi l e i s w r i t t e n , i t i s r e w o u n d .

4-34.2

60459680

H

The following examples show three different ways of inserting a FORTRAN 5 program into a
procedure.
Example 1: Procedure accesses program data with .DATA directive
The following procedure is on an indirect access permanent file named DATAFIL.
.PROC,ALPHA*I,
P1 = (*F,*N=#DATA),
LSTFILE=(*F,*N=FTNOUT).
FTN5,I=P1,L=LSTFILE.
LGO.
REPLACE,LSTFILE.
.DATA
PROGRAM APROG
statements
END
The following BEGIN command in a command record of the job accesses procedure ALPHA on file
DATAFIL.
BEGIN,ALPHA,DATAFIL.
A sample of a resulting dayfile is:
11.07.59.BEGIN,ALPHA,DATAFIL.
11.07.59.FTN5,I=ZZCCLAA,L=FTN0UT.
11.08.00. 61000 CM STORAGE USED.
11.08.00. 0.015 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME.
11.08.00.LGO.
11 . 0 8 . 0 0 . S T O P
11 . 0 8 . 0 0 . 5 6 0 0 F I N A L E X E C U T I O N F L .
11.08.00. 0.000 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME.
11.08.00.REPLACE,FTNOUT.
11.08.01.$REVERT.CCL
All input after the .DATA directive (the FORTRAN 5 source program) is written onto the
default temporary file ZZCCLAA. Parameter substitution is performed on the FORTRAN program
prior to its being written to ZZCCLAA.

60459680

E

4_35

Example 2: Procedure accesses program data with //FILE
The following procedure is on an indirect access permanent file named PFILE. The record
immediately following procedure BETA contains the program data. The //FILE default tells the
FTN5 compiler to search for input from the next record on file PFILE.
.PR0C,BETA*I,
P1 = (*F,*N=#FILE),
LSTFILE=(*F,*N=FTNOUT).
FTN5,I=P1,L=LSTFILE.
LGO.
REPLACE,LSTFILE.
-EORPROGRAM BPROG

statements
■
END
The following call accesses procedure BETA on file PFILE.
BEGIN,BETA,PFILE.
The following is a segment of the resulting dayfile. Parameter substitution occurred within
the procedure but not within the FORTRAN 5 program.
11.08.35.BEGIN,BETA,PFILE.
11.08.36.FTN5,I=PFILE,L=FTN0UT.
11.08.36. 61000 CM STORAGE USED.
11.08.36. 0.013 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME.
11.08.36. LGO.
11 . 0 8 . 3 7 . S T O P
11 . 0 8 . 3 7 . 5 6 0 0 F I N A L E X E C U T I O N F L .
11.08.37. 0.000 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME.
11.08.37.REPLACE,FTN0UT
11.08.37.$REVERT.CCL

4-36

60459680 E

Example 3: Procedure accesses program data from another file
A procedure may access data outside of the procedure file. The following procedure is in
the default file PROCFIL. It uses a GET command to access the program data on file TEST and
writes the binary output.
.PR0C,GAMMA*I,P1=(*F),X=(*N=FTN0UT).
GET,P1.
FTN5,I=P1,L=X.
LGO.
REPLACE,X=LISTFIL.

The following call accesses procedure file GAMMA.
BEGIN,GAMMA„P1 =TEST.

Parameter substitution occurred within the procedure but not within the FORTRAN 5 program,
as shown in the following dayfile segment.
11.06.48. BEGIN, GAMMA,, P1=TEST.
11.06.48.GET,TEST.
11.06.49.FTN5,I=TEST,L=FTN0UT.
11.06.50. 61000 CM STORAGE USED.
11.06.50. 0.013 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME.
11.06.50.LGO.
11 . 0 6 . 5 1 . S T O P
11 . 0 6 . 5 1 . 5 6 0 0 F I N A L E X E C U T I O N F L .
11.06.51. 0.000 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME.
11.06.51.REPLACE,FTN0UT=LISTFIL.
11.06. 51.SREVERT.CCL

60459680

D

4-37

I .EOF (or .EOP) Directive
| The .EOF (or.EOP) directive generates an end-of-file on the data file created with a .DATA
directive. Wherever an .EOF appears, an actual end-of-file is recorded when the data file
is written on the file specified in the .DATA directive. The system always writes an
end-of-record at the end of a data file. If you want an end-of-file also, you must end the
file with an .EOF directive. The .EOF directive is valid only after a .DATA directive. The
.EOP directive may be used interchangeably with the .EOF directive.
Format:
I

.EOF.
. E O P.

|

.EOR

(or

.EOS)

■* % ,

Directive

The .EOR (or .EOS) directive is used to separate records in a data file created with a .DATA
directive. Wherever an .EOR is placed, an actual end-of-record is recorded when the data
file is written on the file specified in the .DATA directive. The system always writes at
least one end-of-record at the end of a data file, whether or not you specify an .EOR
I directive.
The interchangeably
.EOR directive with
is valid
only directive.
after a .DATA directive. The .EOS directive
may be used
the .EOR
Format:
.EOR.
|

/*^\
)

.EOS.
BRANCHING DIRECTIVES
The branching directives provide conditional inclusion of commands, other directives, or
data lines in the procedure. The function of the .ELSE, .ENDIF, and .IF directives is much
like that of their command equivalents. The branching can appear in any of the four
sections of the procedure body.
.ELSE Directive

The .ELSE directive in conjunction with the .IF directive either terminates or initiates the
skipping of lines in the procedure body.
Format:
•ELSE.label.
Parameter

Description

label Specifies a 1- to 10-character,alphanumeric string. The string must
begin with an alphabetic character.
If the condition in the matching .IF directive is true, the .ELSE directive initiates the
skipping of the lines between itself and the next matching .ENDIF directive (two directives
match only if their label parameters are identical). If the condition in the matching .IF
directive is false, the .ELSE directive terminates the skipping that the .IF directive
initiated. An .ELSE directive cannot terminate the skipping initiated by another .ELSE
directive.

4-38

60459680

H

.ENDIF Directive
The .ENDIF directive terminates skipping initiated by a matching .IF or .ELSE directive
(directives match only if their label parameters are identical).
Format:
.ENDIF,label.
Parameter

Description

l a b e l S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 1 0 - c h a r a c t e r , a l p h a n u m e r i c s t r i n g . T h e s t r i n g
must begin with an alphabetic character.

.EX Directive
The .EX directive submits a single command to the system for immediate execution. The
system performs keyword substitutions in the command before executing the command. No
further procedure directives are normally processed. Although .DATA files are created, the
command record is never executed. Since the command record is not executed, the procedure
nesting level of your job is not incremented.
Format:
0^

60459680

H

4-40.1/4-40.2

|

*%
*%

CALLING A PROCEDURE (BEGIN COMMAND)
The BEGIN command initiates execution of a procedure. When a BEGIN command is entered, the
system begins executing the specified procedure and continues until a REVERT command is
entered. The REVERT command causes the system to return to the command record of the calling
job or procedure. The system then continues execution with the first command following the
BEGIN command. Procedures can be nested up to a level of 50 nested procedures.
Figure 4-5 shows a diagram of a procedure call from a batch job and from an interactive job.
The interactive example also diagrams a first level nested procedure call.

Batch Job File
AJOB.
USER,USERNAME,PASSWORD.
Procedure
.PR0C,APR0C*I,
BEGIN, APROC'
REVERT.

Interactive Command
Procedure
.PR0C,BPR0C*I.

Procedure
.PR0C,CPR0C*I.

BEGIN,BPROC

BEGIN, CPROC
REVERT.
REVERT.

Figure 4-5. Calling a Procedure

60459680 D

4-41

You can alter the contents of a procedure by passing parameters to the procedure through the
BEGIN command. The system substitutes the parameter values into the procedure body according
to the rules specified in the procedure header (refer to .PROC Directive earlier in this
section).
The system allows you to input the parameters from a full-screen format if the following
conditions are true:
• Your terminal supports full-screen input for procedures (currently, only a CDC 721).
• Your terminal is in screen mode (refer to the SCREEN command).
• The procedure is interactive; that is, the .PROC directive contains a *M or *I.
• You do not supply required parameters on the procedure call.
Formats:
B E G I N , p n a m e , p fi l e , p j , p 2 , . . . , p n . c o m m e n t
or
- p n a m e , p fi l e , p i , p 2 , . . . , p n . c o m m e n t
or
pname,pj,p2,...,pn.comment
or
p fi l e , p i , p 2 , . . . , p n . c o m m e n t
The first format is the full BEGIN command format that can be used in either batch or
a t t e m p t i njobs.
g t o When
l o c a t e you
fi l e use
p fi l ethis
:
(interactive
format, the system uses the following search order when
• local files
• indirect access files in your permanent file catalog
• direct access files in your permanent file catalog
• indirect access files under user name LIBRARY
• direct access files under user name LIBRARY
The second format can be used only from an interactive job. It uses the same search order
a s t h e fi r s t f o r m a t .
The third and fourth formats are the name call formats in which the command name BEGIN can
be omitted.

4

42

60459680

E

The third format can be used from a batch or interactive job if one of the following is true:
• pname is a procedure within a record in a file called pname. The system locates
this procedure record and executes it.
• pname is a procedure in a global library set.
• pname is a procedure in the system library.
The fourth format can be used from a batch or interactive job.
fi l e . T h e s y s t e m e x e c u t e s t h e fi r s t p r o c e d u r e o n p fi l e .
Parameter

pfile is the name of a local

Description

p n a m e S p e c i fi e s t h e p r o c e d u r e n a m e f r o m t h e p r o c e d u r e h e a d e r d i r e c t i v e . I f p n a m e
is omitted from the first format, two consecutive commas must be specified.
T h e d e f a u l t p r o c e d u r e i s t h e r e c o r d a t t h e c u r r e n t p o s i t i o n o f p fi l e . I f
pfile is at its end-of-information, the system rewinds pfile and uses the
fi r s t p r o c e d u r e o n p fi l e . I f p fi l e i s I N P U T, t h e fi l e i s n o t r e w o u n d .
p fi l e S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e c o n t a i n i n g t h e p r o c e d u r e . T h e fi l e n a m e
pfile must be inserted as the second parameter in the first format. Its
omission is indicated by two consecutive commas following pname. To get a
description of the procedure pname, you can append a question mark to pfile
(refer to Requesting Help on Procedure Calls later in this section). File
pfile is not automatically returned after the procedure executes.

00^\

I f p fi l e i s o m i t t e d f r o m t h e fi r s t f o r m a t , t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t
file name is used (PROCFIL is the default).
P i S p e c i fi e s a n o p t i o n a l p a r a m e t e r t h a t m a y a f f e c t t h e s u b s t i t u t i o n t o b e m a d e
for a keyword used in the procedure. The value you specify is compared to
the appropriate checklist specified for this parameter in the procedure
h e a d e r. T h e c h e c k l i s t e n t r i e s a r e c h e c k e d i n a l e f t - t o - r i g h t f a s h i o n a n d
the first match determines the substitution. Refer to the .PROC Directive
i n t h i s s e c t i o n f o r m o r e d e t a i l s o n p a r a m e t e r s u b s t i t u t i o n . T h e s p e c i fi c
formats for p^ are described later in this subsection.

/j^N

If you are using the third or fourth format of the BEGIN command as
previously shown, there is a 7-character restriction on both the keyword
portion and the value portion of the parameter p^.
comment Specifies the value associated with the comment keyword (ck) on the
procedure header. The value consists of any characters you specify
following the terminator. If the ck keyword appears on the procedure
header, the system substitutes your comment for the comment keyword ck in
the procedure body. Otherwise, the system ignores this comment.

60459680 G

4-43

For interactive procedures (*I), optional parameters p^ can have the following formats:
Pi

Description

k e y w r d S p e c i fi e s a p a r a m e t e r i d e n tical to a keyword on the procedure header.
Substitution is controlled by the *K entry in the checklist for the
parameter.
k e y w r d ? S p e c i fi e s i n t e r a c t i v e B E G I N p r o c e s s i n g ( r e f e r t o R e q u e s t i n g H e l p o n
or Procedure Calls later in this section).

1
keywrd= Removes keywrd in the procedure body (null substitution) unless overridden
b y a c h e c k l i s t s p e c i fi c a t i o n .
keywrd=val Allows order-independent substitution (refer to Parameter Matching Modes in
this section), val replaces keywrd in the procedure body unless the
associated checklist specifies otherwise, val can be a 1- to 40-character
symbolic name or value. Section 6 describes symbolic names, val can
contain special characters (nonalphanumeric) if they are delimited by dollar
signs. Asterisks are the exception; they can appear without dollar sign
delimiters.
This parameter format has the following valid variations:
Format

Meaning

keywrd=val Substitutes the string val for keywrd.
keywrd=val+ Substitutes the decimal value of val for keywrd.
keywrd=val+D Same as keywrd=val+.
keywrd=val+B Substitutes the octal value of val for keywrd.
When calling a procedure, a keyword can be named more than once if the
keywrd=val parameter format is used each time. The system issues a message
informing you that a keyword is named more than once on the command. It
uses the value specified with the last occurrence of the keyword.

4-44

60459680

H

/0SS*\

Pi

Description

v a l U n l e s s o v e r r i d d e n b y a c h e c k l i s t s p e c i fi c a t i o n , a s s i g n s t h i s 0 - t o
40-character (uppercase only) symbolic name or value to the keyword whose
position in the procedure header parameter list matches the position of this
parameter in the BEGIN command parameter list (refer to Parameter Matching
Modes in this section). Special characters (nonalphanumeric), other than
asterisks (*), must be delimited by dollar signs. This parameter format has
the following variations:
Format

Meaning

val

Substitutes the string val itself.

val+

Substitutes the decimal value associated with val.

val+D

Substitutes the decimal value associated with val,

val+B

Substitutes the octal value associated with val.

NOTE
If you specify a parameter p^ on a name
c a l l t o a l o c a l fi l e , n e i t h e r t h e k e y w o r d
keywrd or the value val can exceed seven
characters.

For menu procedures (*M), the procedure call can contain only one substitution parameter
p^. On such calls, p^ can have one of the following formats:

Pi

Description

c h o i c e S p e c i fi e s a m e n u s e l e ction that appears on the procedure header. The menu
selection must be an unsigned integer.
c h o i c e ? S p e c i fi e s i n t e r a c t i v e h e l p p r o c e s s i n g ( r e f e r t o R e q u e s t i n g H e l p o n P r o c e d u r e
or Calls later in this section).
1
If you omit p^, the system displays the menu and prompts for a menu selection.
Example:
The following procedure is accessed by a sequence of BEGIN commands in the command record of
the job.
.PR0C,TEST1*I,FK.
COMMENT. FK

60459680 H

4-45

The resulting dayfile shows each BEGIN command and the substitutions made. The relevant
segment of the dayfile is as follows:
10.15.26.BEGIN,TEST1,FKTEST,20.
10.15.27.COMMENT. 20
10.15.27. RE VERT. CCL
10.15.27.SET,R2=100.
10.15.27.BEGIN,TEST1,FKTEST,FK=R2+.
10.15.28. COMMENT. 100
10.15.28. REVERT.CCL
10.15.28.BE6IN,TEST1,FKTEST,FK=R2+D.
10.15.29.C0MMENT. 100
10.15.29.REVERT.CCL
10.15.29.BEGIN,TEST1,FKTEST,FK=R2+B.
10.15.30.COMMENT. 144
10.15.30. RE VERT. CCL
10.15.30.BE6IN,TEST1,FKTEST,FK.
10.15.31 .COMMENT. FK
10.15.31.RE VERT.CCL
10.15.31.BEGIN,TEST1,FKTEST,FK=.
10.15.32.COMMENT.
10.15.32. REVERT. CCL
10.15.32.BE6IN,TEST1,FKTEST,VALUE.
10.15.33.C0MMENT. VALUE
10.15.33.REVERT.CCL
10.15.34.BEGIN,TEST1,FKTEST,$VALUE-2$.
10.15.34.COMMENT. VALUE-2
10.15.34. REVERT.CCL
10.15.35.BE6IN,TEST1,FKTEST,*.
1 0 . 1 5 . 3 5 . C O M M E N T. *
10.15.35.REVERT.CCL

REQUESTING HELP ON PROCEDURE CALLS
After you call a procedure interactively but before the system executes the specified
procedure, you can have a dialogue with the system about the procedure. This is possible
only if the procedure writer appended the *I or *M to the procedure name in the procedure
header (refer to the .PROC directive described in this section). You can do any of the
following:
• R e q u e s t h e l p i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t the procedure itself.
• Request help information about a procedure parameter.
• Supply omitted parameters.
• Reenter parameter values that are in error.
If the parameter specifications in the procedure call are incorrect or incomplete, the
system initiates the dialogue. You can also initiate the dialogue by requesting a
description of the procedure or parameters in one of the following ways:
• Append a question mark to the procedure file name.
• Append a question mark to the name of a procedure parameter for *I procedures or to
a menu selection for *M procedures.

4-46

60459680

D

• Enter a question mark as a parameter on the procedure call.
• Enter a question mark in response to an interactive prompt.
• Press the HELP key any time after you call the procedure if your terminal is in
screen mode.
If you omit required parameters or if any parameter is in error on the procedure call, the
system prompts you for the required parameters and those in error. If the system prompts
you for a parameter that need not be specified and you want to use the default for that
parameter, enter a carriage return. If the format of a parameter entry is not correct or
the parameter entry is not specified on the procedure header directive, you are reprompted
for the parameter. Prompting for parameters terminates when:
• You satisfy all parameter requirements.
• You enter a parameter followed by a terminator (a period or a right parenthesis), or
enter just a terminator. If all required parameters have been entered, the system
executes the procedure. Otherwise, the system continues prompting until all
required parameters are satisfied.
• It is a menu procedure executing in line mode and you enter Q. The system does not
execute the menu. For nested menu procedures, entering Q causes the system to
discontinue expansion of the current procedure and begin searching for an EXIT
command in the calling procedure.
0 ^ " • Yo u r t e r m i n a l i s i n l i n e m o d e a n d y o u e n t e r t h e t e r m i n a t i o n o r i n t e r r u p t i o n
character for your terminal (refer to appendix J). The BEGIN command processing
ends and the system does not execute the procedure. For nested procedures,
terminating the dialogue in this way causes the system to search for an EXIT command
in the calling procedure.
• Your terminal is in screen mode and you press the QUIT key. The system does not
execute the procedure. For nested procedures, terminating the dialogue in this way
causes the system to search for an EXIT command in the calling procedure.

r

As with all commands, you can always append a comment after the terminator on the call.
Additionally, you can append a comment to a parameter entry made during a parameterprompting dialogue. Still, the comment must follow a terminator (refer to the last example
in this subsection).

0$^>\
60459680

E

4-47

The procedure calls in table 4-3 illustrate the various methods of requesting help on
procedure calls. For convenience, we show the name call format of the BEGIN command.

Table 4-3. Help on Procedure Calls

Re s u i t
Procedure Call

Interactive
Procedure (*I)

Menu
Procedure (*M)

pname

The system prompts for
required parameters or
parameter values in error.

The system displays the
menu and prompts for a
selection.

pname ?

The system provides any
.HELP text about the pro
cedure itself and then
prompts for parameters.

The system provides any
.HELP text about the proce
dure itself, displays the
menu, and prompts for a
selection.

pname,?

Same as pname? .

Same as pname,? .

pname,keywrd?

The system provides any
.HELP text for the
parameter associated
with keywrd and then
prompts for parameters.

Not applicable.

pname,choice?

Not applicable.

The system provides any
.HELP text for that menu
selection, displays the
menu, and prompts for a
selection.

' ^ \
4-48

60459680 H

If your job is a batch job and you request a description of the procedure or its parameters,
the system writes the description in the job dayfile. If any of the required parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s a r e i n e r r o r, e r r o r m e s s a g e s a p p e a r i n t h e d a y fi l e . I n e i t h e r c a s e , t h e
system does not execute the procedure.
The following example shows the interactive entry of parameters.
Example:
Procedure F5 resides on local file F5.
.PR0C,F5*I,I"INPUT,^(*F,*N=INPUT),
B"BINARIES"= (*F,*N=LGO),
L"OUT PUT'<= (* F,*N=OUT PUT) ,
LO"LIST OPT IONS "= (*N=O,0,0,R,A,M,S).
FTN5,M=I,#B=B,#L=L,#L0=L0.
REVERT.

To elicit prompts for the parameters on the procedure, the user enters
f5,?
The following dialogue ensues:
PARAMETERS FOR F5 ARE I, B, L, LO
ENTER I INPUT? test
ENTER B BINARIES ? bfile
ENTER L OUTPUT ? Listing
ENTER LO LIST OPTIONS? s
REVERT.

The following example is the same as the previous example, except that apostrophes replace
the quotation marks in the procedure header:
.PROC, F5*I, I 'INPUT »= (*F,*N=INPUT ),
B 'BINARIES '= (*F,*N=LGO) ,
L'OUT PUT'= (*F,*N=0UT PUT),
LO'LIST OPTIONS '= (*N=0,0,0,R,A,M,S) .
FTN5, #1 =1, ffB =8, #L =L , #L0 =L0.
REVERT.
To elicit prompts for the parameters on the procedure, the user enters
f5,?
The following dialogue ensues:
PARAMETERS FOR F5 ARE I, B, L, LO
INPUT? test
BINARIES ? bfile
OUTPUT ? Listing
LIST OPTIONS? s
REVERT.

60459680

D

4-49

^r^^s

The following example shows help processing with a menu procedure:

NOTE
The .HELP text uses lowercase and uppercase
characters.

/List,f=menu
.PR0C,MENU*M"SAMPLE MENU",0PTI0N=
(1 "OPTION 1",2"0PTI0N 2", 3"0PTI0N 3") .COMMENT.

.KELP
This procedure shows the structure of a menu procedure.
.HELP,1
This is HELP text for option 1.
.HELP, 2
This is HELP text for option 2.
.HELP, 3
This is HELP text for option 3.
.ENDHELP.
.IF,0PTI0N.EQ.1.N0TE.+Y0U CHOSE #0PTION 1 COMMENT.
.IF,0PTI0N.EQ.2.N0TE.+Y0U CHOSE ^OPTION 2 COMMENT.
.IF,0PTI0N.EQ.3.N0TE.+Y0U CHOSE flOPTION 3 COMMENT.
REVERT,NOLIST.
/menu?
This procedure shows the structure of a menu procedure.
SAMPLE MENU
1. OPTION 1
2. OPTION 2
3. OPTION 3

SELECT BY NUMBER OR TYPE Q TO QUIT ? 1 ?
This is HELP text for option 1.
SAMPLE MENU
1. OPTION 1
2. OPTION 2
3. OPTION 3

SELECT BY NUMBER OR TYPE Q TO QUIT ? 2?
This is HELP text for option 2.
SAMPLE MENU
1. OPTION 1
2. OPTION 2
3. OPTION 3

SELECT BY NUMBER OR TYPE Q TO QUIT ? 3?
This is HELP text for option 3.

4-50

60459680 D

SAMPLE MENU

1. OPTION 1
2. OPTION 2
3. OPTION 3
SELECT BY NUMBER OR TYPE Q TO QUIT ? 1. finally
YOU CHOSE OPTION 1 FINALLY.
/menu,2
YOU CHOSE OPTION 2.

ENDING A PROCEDURE (REVERT COMMAND)
The REVERT command terminates procedure processing.
Format:
REVERT,opt.com
opt

Controls the revert options and whether the REVERT command appears at
the terminal and in the job dayfile.
opt

Meaning

ABORT Returns control to the next EXIT command in the command
record unless a NOEXIT command has been processed.
This parameter sets EF=CPE (CPU abort). It returns
control to the command following the calling BEGIN
command if a NOEXIT command has been processed. This
parameter causes the REVERT command to appear at the
terminal and in the job dayfile.
EX Returns control to
procedure and
command had
procedure. The
to appear in

the command record of the calling
executes the command com as if the
actually appeared in the calling
EX parameter causes the REVERT command
the job dayfile but not at the terminal.

NOLIST Returns control to the command following the calling
BEGIN command and suppresses the display of the REVERT
command at the terminal and in the dayfile.
If you omit opt, control returns to the command following the calling
BEGIN command. The REVERT command appears in the job dayfile but not
at a terminal unless you are under the batch subsystem and the REVERT
is not within a nested procedure call.
Specifies a comment unless used with the EX parameter. In this case,
com must be a command.
The system always appends the following commands to a procedure record.
$RE VERT. CCL
SEXIT.CCL
SREVERT, ABORT. CCL

These commands terminate procedure processing if no user-supplied REVERT commands are
processed.
/0^°\,

60459680 E

4-51

Example:
The following procedure (REVTST) is on a file called PROCFL. It reverts to the job calling
it if the named file has no read permission and aborts (causing control to be transferred to
the job EXIT command) if the named file has no read modify permission.
.PR0C,REVTST*I,LFN1,LFN2.
.IF,FILE(LFN1,RD),LABELL
TDUMP,I=LFN1.
.ELSE, LABELL
REVERT.NO READ PERMISSION
,ENDIF,LABEL1.
.IF,FILE(LFN1,RM),LABEL2.
C0PY,LFN2,LFN1.
,ELSE,LABEL2.
REVERT,ABORT. NO READ/MODIFY PERMISSION
.ENDIF,LABEL2.
The following two jobs (REVJOB1 and REVJ0B2) call the REVTST procedure,
execute-only file; REVJ0B2 attaches a read or execute file.
REVJ0B1.
USER,USERNAM,PASSWRD,FAMNAME.
ATTACH,FILE1/UN=ALTUSER,PW=PW1,M=E.
BEGIN,REVTST,PR0CFL,FILE1,XFIL.
COMMENT. RETURNS HERE
EXIT.
COMMENT. EXIT ON ERROR

REVJOB1 attaches an

REVJ0B2.
USER,USERNAM,PASSWRD,FAMNAME.
ATTACH,FILE2/UN=ALTUSER,PW=PW2,M=R.
BEGIN,REVTST,PR0CFL,FILE2,XFIL.
COMMENT. RETURNS HERE
EXIT.
COMMENT. EXIT ON ERROR

The following are the dayfile segments produced by REVJOB1 and REVJOB2. REVJOB1
processes the REVERT command and terminates normally. REVJ0B2 processes the
REVERT,ABORT command and terminates by error processing.
17.03.53.REVJ0B1.
17.03.53.USER,USERNAM„FAMNAME.
17.03.53.CHARGE,*.
17.03.53.* CHARGE(1514,5612PAY)
17.03.56.ATTACH,FILE1/UN=ALTUSER,M=E.
17.03.56.BEGIN,REVTST,PR0CFL,FILE1,XFIL.
17.03.56.REVERT.N0 READ PERMISSION
17.03.56.COMMENT. RETURNS HERE
17.03.56.EXIT.

4-52

17.05.05.REVJ0B2.
17.05.05.USER,USERNAM„FAMNAME
17.05.05.CHARGE,*.
17.05.05.* CHARGE(1514,5612PAY)
17.05.13.ATTACH,FILE2/UN=ALTUSER,M=R.
17.05.13.BEGIN,REVTST,PR0CFL,FILE2,XFIL.
17.05.13.TDUMP,I=FILE2.
17.05.13. TDUMP COMPLETE.
17.05.13.REVERT,AB0RT. NO READ/MODIFY
PERMISSION
17.05.13.EXIT.
17.05.13.COMMENT. EXIT ON ERROR

60459680 H

PARAMETER MATCHING MODES
When you call a procedure, the system must match each parameter on the BEGIN command with a
parameter on the procedure header. The system uses two methods of parameter matching,
order-dependent and order-independent.

ORDER-DEPENDENT MODE
In order-dependent mode, the system compares in order each parameter on the procedure call
with the parameter in that position on the procedure header. If any parameter entries do
not conform to the restrictions in the parameter checklist or required parameters are
omitted on the procedure call, the system prompts you for them. After all required
parameters are entered, the system substitutes the selected keywords into the procedure body
according to the checklists in the .PROC directive.
Example:
Procedure ITEM is on a global library file:
.PROC, ITEM*I,F"LOCAL FILE NAME"= (*N=LG0,*F),
L"NAME OF LIST OUTPUT FILE"= (*N=OUTPUT,*F),
BL"EACH FILE START ON NEW PAGE? YES OR N0'^= (YES=$,BL$,N0=,*N=),
NR"REWIND BEFORE & AFTER? YES OR N0"= (YES=,N0=$,NR$,*N = ).
IT EM IZ E, F, #L =L_BL_N R.
REVERT.

The procedure is called:
ITEM,LIST,,NO,NO.
The parameters are matched in order-dependent mode and the procedure body becomes:
ITEM IZE,LIST,L=OUT PUT, NR.
REVERT.
In order-dependent mode, the system treats excess parameters on the BEGIN command as a
n o n f a t a l e r r o r.

ORDER-INDEPENDENT MODE
For each BEGIN command, parameter matching always starts in order-dependent mode. The
system switches to order-independent mode if, in the comparison of a BEGIN command parameter
and a procedure header parameter, one of the following occurs.
• A parameter on the procedure call is in the format keyword=value.
• A reverse slant (\) precedes the parameter on the .PROC directive or the BEGIN
command.
• A slant (/) precedes the parameter on the .PROC directive.
• A slant precedes the parameter on the procedure call and a slant separates any two
parameters on the .PROC directive.

60459680

D

4-53

However, if a slant is specified on the procedure call and not on the .PROC directive, the
slant is not treated as a separator, but as part of the parameter value.
Parameter matching mode cannot switch back from order-independent to order-dependent mode.
Once in order-independent mode, the system matches each successive keyword on the procedure
call or interactive entry to the identical keyword in the procedure header directive,
regardless of the order of the procedure header parameters or the order of specification on
the procedure call.
To show order-independent parameter matching, the preceding example is slightly modified.
An *K entry has been added to the BL parameter checklist to make BL a valid parameter
entry. A reverse slant is used as a separator before the NR parameter to ensure
order-independent mode.
.PR0C,ITEM1*I,F"L0CAL
FILE
NAME"=(*N=LGO,*F),
L"NAME
OF
LIST
OUTPUT
FILE"=
C * N = O U T P U T, * F ) ,
\NR"REWIND BEFORE & AFTER? YES OR NO"=(YES=,NO=$,NR$,*N=),
BL"EACH FILE START ON NEW PAGE? YES OR N0"=(YES=$,BL$,N0=,*N=,*K=$,$8L).
ITEMIZE,F,#L=L_BL_NR.
REVERT.

"^
•

The procedure call (ITEM1 is on a global library file):
ITEM1,LIST„BL,NR=N0.
starts parameter matching in order-dependent mode. The reverse slant in the procedure "cS^\
header switches parameter matching to order-independent mode. BL and NR are matched in
order-independent mode. In order-independent mode you must specify all parameters in the
form keyword=value, unless there is an *K entry in the parameter checklist. Then you can
specify just the keyword as the parameter entry. Since *K is specified in the BL parameter
checklist, the system accepts BL as a parameter entry. The NR parameter must be specified
as NR=value or omitted.
After the substitution, the procedure body becomes
ITEMIZE,LIST,L=OUTPUT,BL,NR.
REVERT.

Ar€Stj^>^

4-54

60459680

H

COMMAND PROCESSING

Jobs entering the system consist of one or more logical records. The first logical record
contains system directives (commands) which describe the processing that is to occur in the
j o b fi l e . I n i n t e r a c t i v e j o b s , y o u e n t e r t h e c o m m a n d s d i r e c t l y a t t h e t e r m i n a l . T h i s
section describes command processing and how the commands affect other aspects of job
pr oc es s in g .
The operating system recognizes four types of commands.
• Local File Commands These commands call programs or procedures on
files that are assigned to the job. The name of
the command is simply the name of the file. LGO
is an example. It is the system default local
file used for retaining object code generated by
one of the language processors.
Global Library File Commands

These commands call programs or procedures on
files that have been specified in a LIBRARY
command.

System Commands

These commands are divided into 10 categories.
Flow control commands
Job control commands
Special commands for interactive jobs
File management commands
Permanent file commands
Load and dump central memory commands
Tape management commands
System utility commands
Library utility commands
Loader commands*

Product Set Commands

The product set commands call the various products
available under NOS. Their formats are given in
the applicable product reference manual and in the
NOS 2 Applications Programmer's Instant.

Since your executing programs can access the command record of your job, it is possible that
they might manipulate items like user names and passwords. Hence, your executing programs
can affect system security.
tRefer to the CYBER Loader Reference Manual.

60459680 D

5-1

COMMAND FORMAT
All commands consist of from one to four fields. The first field is optional. It is a $ or
/ prefix character which precedes the program name. If a $ is present, it indicates that
the specified program to be executed must be loaded from the system library. Therefore,
even if a local file of the same name is present or a program or procedure of the same name
resides on one of your global library files, the system program, not the local program or
global library program, is executed. In all interactive subsystems except the batch
subsystem, the system places a $ in the first field of all commands. Even in the batch
subsystem, the system places a $ in front of the file editing commands ALTER, DELETE, DUP
L I S T,
MOVE,
READ,
WRITE,
and
WRITEN.
'
If you use a slant in the first field of local file or global library file commands, the
system processes the parameters in operating system format. For global library file
commands, the presence of an NPC= entry point in the specified library also forces the /ss^
system to process the parameters in operating system format (refer to Volume 4, Program J
Interface). Otherwise, the system processes local file and global library file commands in
product set format.
The slant option is ignored for command calls to programs residing on the system library.
For those types of calls, parameters are processed in the operating system format unless the
SC directive of SYSEDIT has been entered. Refer to the SYSEDIT command in the NOS 2 System
Maintenance Reference Manual for a description of the SC directive.
Example:
If

fi l e

EXTRACT

is

a

local

fi l e

and

you

enter

/*^\

/EXTRACT, A,B, 10.
the system treats the file as a local file command. The parameters are processed in
operating system format because of the leading slant.
The second field contains the name of the program to be executed. The command name can be
any valid file name.
T h e t h i r d fi e l d
performed. The
valid terminator
are present). In

(optional)
parameter
character
interactive

c o n t a i n s p a r a m e t e r s w h i c h f u r t h e r d e fi n e t h e o p e r a t i o n t o b e ^ .
field is set off from the name field by a separator character. A "*^\
must follow the third field (or the second field if no parameters '
jobs, the terminator is optional.

The fourth field consists of a comments field. The comments field follows the terminator.
In general, the system ignores this field. However, some commands (MODIFY, FSE, GTR
L I B E D I T , a n d t h e l i k e ) r e a d t h i s c o m m e n t s fi e l d f o r d i r e c t i v e s . '
In general, commands may not be continued beyond a single line. Exceptions are the
execution control commands (described in section 6) and tape management commands (described
in section 12).
Global library file commands containing an ARG= entry point (ARG= is described in Volume 4,
Program Interface) are not required to follow either the operating system or product set
format. The only syntax requirements enforced by the system for these commands is that the
command name must be a valid file name followed by a separator. The command itself may have
additional syntax requirements.
The following is a comparison of the operating system and product set formats (refer to the >d5s.
NOS 2 Applications Programmer's Instant for commands using the product set format). /^\

5-2

60459680

E

Operating System Format
1 . Va l i d s e p a r a t o r s a r e
+

-"/

=

,(

Product Set Format
1. Same as for the operating system
format.

and any other character with a display
code value greater than 44g except
* ) $ . and blank.
2 . Va l i d t e r m i n a t o r s a r e
. )

0^\

2. Same as for the operating system
format.

3. Letters, numbers, and the * are
the only characters allowed in the
p a r a m e t e r fi e l d . T h e o n e e x c e p t i o n
to this rule is the use of literals
(that is, character strings delimited
by dollar signs). Characters other
than letters, numbers, and the * can
be included in literals. No char
acters within a literal have special
meanings; the system merely checks
the syntax of the literal. The
called program must do its own
processing of the literal.

3. Same as for the operating system
format.

4. All embedded blanks within a command
e x c e p t t h o s e a p p e a r i n g i n l i te ra l s
are ignored.

4. Same as for the operating system
format.

5. Comments may appear on the command
but they must follow the terminator.
They may contain any character.
Comments are not printed for some
commands.

5. Same as for the operating system
format.

6. Parameters, separators, and termi
n a t o r s a r e s t o r e d i n t h e j o b ' s fi e l d
length beginning at RA+2. The char
acters , . and ) are stored as binary
zero. For all parameters and all valid
separators except the comma, their dis
play code equivalent is stored. Refer
to section 10 of Volume 4, Program
Interface, for more information.

6. Parameters are stored in their dis
play code equivalent beginning at
RA+2. Separators and terminators are
stored as follows:
Character

Code (Octal)
1
2
3
4
5
6

>((SWSy

60459680 E

5-3

Operating System Format

Product Set Format
Character

Code (Octal)

»

10

) or .

17

Other valid
separators

16

Refer to section 10 of Volume 4,
Program Interface, for more
information.
7. File names are one to seven alpha
numeric characters.

7. File names are one to seven alpha
numeric characters. In some products,
file names beginning with a numeric
character are invalid.

8. Not NOS/BE compatible.

8. NOS/BE compatible.

In general, no parameter can contain more than seven characters. The exceptions include
procedure calls, flow control commands, some tape management commands and system or global
library file commands with an ARG= entry point.
Depending on the program, the parameters can appear in either order-dependent or orderindependent format. Order-dependent parameters are required when the parameters must be
passed in a specific order. An example of order-dependent parameters is:
RESEQ,MYFILE,B,,20.
In this example, the system expects the resequencing increment to be passed as the fourth
parameter; therefore, a separator must be present for the parameter not specified.
Order-independent parameters may be passed in any order. This is made possible by the use
of keywords. A keyword is an identifier which* has meaning either by itself or when used in
conjunction with an option. Usually, keywords are passed with an option and a separator.
The separator must not be a comma. When the list of parameters is passed to the called
program, all separators except commas are also passed.
Some programs require specific separators (usually =), and others merely require that a
separator be present. Examples of keyword notation are:
1. C0B0L5,I=SFILE,B=BFILE.
2. C0B0L5,B=BFILE,I=SFILE.
3. C0B0L5,L=0,E,EL.
4. J0BX,T10,CM45000.
In examples 1 and 2, both parameters and separators are passed to the COBOL 5 compiler.
Since these parameters are order independent, both commands produce the same result.
In example 3, two keywords are passed with no separator character. In example 4, the
keyword is the first character of the first parameter and the first two characters of the
second parameter.

5-4

60459680 E

,^s>!\

The parameters and an image of the command being processed are written in the iob
communication area (refer to section 10 of volume 4). The job communication area is the
first J008 words of your job's field length, from RA through RA+77r. Section 1 and
appendix E in Volume 4, Program Interface, describe the fi?st lOOgwords of ?his area.
The following commands produce the same image in the job communication area,
are processed using operating system format.

Both commands

PERMIT,FILEABC,USERAAA=R,USERBBB=W.
$PERMIT,FILEABC,USERAAA=R,USERBBB=W.

COMMAND PROCESSING FLOW
The system translates a command by:
1. Reading the command from the job's command record.
2. Verifying the format of the command as described in Command Format.
3. Comparing special command names with the name of the command being processed. If
the command name is CTIME, HTIME, RTIME, *, or STIME, the system processes the
command.
r

4.

Searching the file name table for a file assigned to the job with a name identical
to the name of the command. However, if a $ precedes the program name, this step is
skipped. If an identical name is found, the program is loaded into memory. The
arguments are extracted from the command and stored in RA+2 through RA+n+1 (n is the
number of parameters) unless the command is a system or global library file command
with an ARG= entry point. The CPU is requested to begin execution unless special
loader commands follow.

5.

Searching the global library directory for a program name that matches the command
name. If a $ precedes the command name, this step is skipped. If the program is
found, the system proceeds as in step 4; otherwise, the system searches further.

6.

Searching the central library directory for a program name that matches the command
name. If the name is found, the system proceeds as in step 4; otherwise, the system
s e a r c h e s f u r t h e r.

7.

Searching the peripheral processor library directory for a program name that matches
the command name if the command name is a three-character name with the first
character alphabetic. If found, the name is placed, with a maximum of two
arguments, as a peripheral processor request, and the system exits to the program.

8.

If the command name is not found during any of the above searches, the command is
declared invalid and the job is aborted.

9.

A command is normally echoed to the dayfile except for system commands or global
library commands containing an SDM= entry point in the entry point list.

Figure 5-1 illustrates the flow of command processing.

60459680 E

5-5

PROCESS FIELD
LENGTH CONTROL
(SEE SECTION 3)

KD

SEARCH GLOBAL
LIBRARY SET FOR
COMMAND NAME

READ A
COMMAND

COMMAND PROCESSOR
SEARCHES ITS LIST OF
COMMAND NAMES FOR
SPECIAL COMMAND

LOAD PROGRAM
TO CENTRAL
MEMORY

STORE COMMAND
AND COMMAND
ARGUMENTS IN
JOB'S FIELD
LENGTH

PROCESS
SPECIAL
REQUEST

EXECUTE
PROGRAM

SEARCH PP LIBRARV
FOR NAME. IF NAME
IS VALID PP
PROGRAM NAME

USE NOS FORMAT
FOR PROCESSING
PARAMETERS

_J

USE NOS FORMAT
FOR PROCESSING
PARAMETERS

SEARCH FNT FOR
FILE ASSIGNED TO
THIS JOB

PLACE NAME WITH
UP TO TWO OCTAL
ARGUMENTS AS A
PP REQUEST

EXIT TO PROGRAM \
(NO FL CHANGE) J

Figure 5-1. Command Processing Flow

5-6

60459680 C

EXIT PROCESSING
When an error condition occurs during a job, the system searches the command record for an
EXIT command.* If the record does not contain an EXIT command, the system terminates the
job if the job is not interactive or returns control to the terminal if the job is
interactive. If the system finds an EXIT command, it clears the error condition and
processes the commands that follow the EXIT command. If the error was a time limit error,
the limit is reset to the time used plus eight seconds. This gives you time for post-error
cleanup operations. If the error was an SRU limit error, the limit is reset to the SRUs
used plus eight SRUs.
If a NOEXIT command has been processed, normal error processing is not performed. That is,
if the no exit flag has been set by the NOEXIT command prior to the error, the error flag is
cleared, no search is made for an EXIT command, and processing continues with the next
command. An ONEXIT command can be used to return to error processing mode; it clears the no
e x i t fl a g .
The following sequence of commands illustrates this exit processing.
JOBCCC.
USER,SMITH22,SMAL
NOEXIT.
GET,A,B.
ONEXIT.
ATTACH,MASTER/M=W.
SKIPEI,MASTER.
COPYBF,A,MASTER.
COPYBF,B,MASTER.
PACK,MASTER.
COPYSBF,MASTER.
EXIT.
ENQUIRE,F.
-EOR-EOI-

/ ^ X

This job attempts to make local copies of two indirect access permanent files and adds them
to a direct access file. The NOEXIT command suspends error processing, and the job
continues even if file A or B is not found. The ONEXIT command turns error processing back
on. If any error occurs thereafter, processing skips to the EXIT command and continues with
the ENQUIRE command. If no error occurs after the ONEXIT command, processing continues
until reaching the EXIT command and then the job terminates (ENQUIRE command is not
processed).

r * A f t e r a s e cSecurity
u r i t y c oFeatures
n fl i c t , t hine section
s y s t e m 3.d o e s n o t a l w a y s a l l o w E X I T p r o c e s s i n g . R e f e r t o
/fSN
60459680

E

5-7

/^%

FLOW CONTROL COMMANDS

Flow control commands control the processing sequence of commands within the command record
of a job. They can insert commands from a procedure file, conditionally or unconditionally
skip commands, and control error processing. To determine the conditions for transfer of
c o n t r o l , y o u c a n u s e e r r o r fl a g s , fi l e a t t r i b u t e s , o r o t h e r j o b a t t r i b u t e s . T h e fl o w
control commands and a brief description of each appear in the following list:
Command

Description

BEGIN Initiates processing of a procedure.t
D I S P L AY E v a l u a t e s a n e x p r e s s i o n a n d d i s p l a y s t h e r e s u l t i n t h e d a y fi l e o f t h e
job.
E L S E Te r m i n a t e s s k i p p i n g i n i t i a t e d b y a f a l s e e x p r e s s i o n w i t h i n a n I F c o m m a n d
or initiates skipping to a matching ENDIF command.
E N D I F Te r m i n a t e s s k i p p i n g i n i t i a t e d b y a m a t c h i n g I F, S K I P, o r E L S E c o m m a n d .
ENDW Establishes the end of the loop.
E X I T C o n t r o l s t h e c o m m a n d fl o w i n t h e e v e n t o f e r r o r s .
IF(or IFE) Conditionally skips one or more commands.
M O D E S p e c i fi e s t h e t y p e o f e r r o r s t h e s y s t e m r e c o g n i z e s f o r E X I T p r o c e s s i n g .
NOEXIT Disables EXIT error processing.
ONEXIT Enables EXIT error processing.
0$®$*\

R E V E RT R e t u r n s p r o c e s s i n g f r o m a p r o c e d u r e t o t h e c o m m a n d r e c o r d o f p r o c e d u r e
that called it.
SET Assigns values to special symbolic names.
S K I P S k i p s t o t h e fi r s t m a t c h i n g E N D I F c o m m a n d .
WHILE Establishes the beginning of a loop. If the associated expression is
true, the loop is processed; if it is false, the loop is not processed.

T Section 4 contains a detailed description of this command.

60459680 D

6-1

COMMAND SYNTAX
The syntax for these commands is similar to the syntax of all other commands as described in
section 5. However, these are some significant differences.
• Functions, arithmetic expressions, relational expressions, and logical expressions
can appear in parameters of certain commands.
• A right parenthesis ending an expression within a command cannot also serve as the
command terminator. You must include an additional right parenthesis or period to
terminate the command.
• Parentheses can nest expressions within expressions.
• A parameter can consist of more than seven characters.
• A command can be longer than 80 characters if its parameter specifications require
such. It can extend over more than one line if each line to be continued contains
no more than 80 characters and ends with a separator.
The following subsections describe the command syntax, including the operators, operands,
and functions which make up valid expressions. Following that is a discussion of each
command.

OPERATORS
Operators separate operands in a expression. There are four types of operators:
arithmetic, relational, logical, and string. Operators are used in the expressions within
the IF, WHILE, DISPLAY, and SET commands and the FILE, STR, STRB, and STRD functions.

ARITHMETIC OPERATORS
Integer arithmetic is used in each step of the evaulation of an expression. Division,
multiplication, and exponentiation produce a zero result if the absolute value exceeds ^^k
2 -1. The accuracy of computations depends on whether the operands are binary or /
decimal. Binary operands (specified using a postradix of B) are restriced to 9 digits not
including the postradix; results involving binary operands are restricted to 16 digits.
Decimal operands and displayed decimal results are restricted to 10 digits (the system
interprets each digit as a 6-bit quantity). For both binary and decimal operands, overflow
is ignored.t

tlf an operand is one of the symbolic names Rl, R2, R3, or RIG; there are further y^a3^\
restrictions.
Refer
to
the
SET
command
in
this
section.
)

6-2

60459680

H

The following are t h e a r i t h m e t i c o p e r a t o r s .
Operator

Operation

+

Addition.

-

Subtraction.

*

Multiplication.

/

Division.

**

Exponentiation.

Leading -

Negation. This operato

Leading +

Ignored.

RELATIONAL OPERATORS
A relational operator produces a value of 1 if the relationship is true, and 0 if it is
false. The following are the relational operators (either form may be used).
Operator
.EQ.

Operation
Equal to.

^

.NE.

Not equal to.

<

. LT.

Less than.

>

. G T.

Greater than.

_< .LE.

Less than or equal to.

> .GE.

Greater than or equal to.

60459680 H

6-3

LOGICAL OPERATORS
When an expression contains a logical operator, the system evaluates all bits of each
operand. Each bit of the first operand is compared to the corresponding bit of the second
operand. If the comparison is true, the corresponding bit in the result is set to 1. If
the comparison is false, the corresponding bit in the result is set to 0. The operator
.NOT. is a special case, operating on a single operand, if the operand is nonzero, the
corresponding bit is set to 0. If the operand is 0, the corresponding bit is set to 1.
If neither of the operands in a logical operation is a string operand, the result of a
logical operation is a 60 bit quantity. If one or both is a string operand, the result of
the logical operation is a string whose length depends upon the result of the operation.
The shorter of the two strings is logically extended with binary zero-fill to the length of
the longer string for the logical operation, and trailing binary zero characters are
truncated from the result string.
Operator

Operation

• E Q V. E q u i v a l e n c e ( c o m p l e m e n t o f t h e l o g i c a l s u m ) .
.OR.
.AND.

Inclusive
AND

OR

(logical

(logical

sum).

product).

•XOR. Exclusive OR (logical difference).
. N O T.

N O T.

STRING OPERATORS
String operators operate on string operands. A string operand is the result of one of the
functions STR, STRB, STRD, or of a logical operation involving one or more string operands.
Operator

Operation

/ / . C AT. C o n c a t e n a t i o n o f t w o s t r i n g s i n t o o n e s t r i n g . ( E i t h e r / / o r . C AT. m a y
be used.)
Example:
.PR0C,CATTER*I,P1=(*A),P2=(*S3/D).
,IF,STR($P1$,1,4)//STRD(P2,-1).EQ.$G00D1$,G0.
NOTE./THE 1ST 4 CHAR OF P1 ARE GOOD AND P2 ENDS IN 1
.ELSE,G0.
REVERT,EX.DISPLAY,STR($SORRY, P1 IS NOT GOODS).
.ENDIF,GO.
In this example, two substrings were concatenated to produce one
expression. If GOODY and 101 were supplied as values for PI and
be true, and the NOTE command would be included and executed. If
for PI, the .IF statement would be false, resulting in the execution
and then of the DISPLAY command.

string in the .IF
P2, the .IF statement would
BADNEWS were substituted
of the REVERT command

^
6-4

60459680

H

^

ORDER OF EVALUATION
The order in which operators in an expression are evaluated is:
1. Exponentiation.
2. Multiplication, division.
3. Addition, subtraction, negation, concatenation.
4. Relations.
5. NOT.
6. AND.
7. Inclusive OR.
8. Exclusive OR, equivalence.
Operators of equal order are evaluated from left to right.

OPERANDS
One or more operands separated by operators make up an expression. Expressions are used
within the IF, WHILE, DISPLAY, and SET commands. An expression within an expression must
begin with a left parenthesis and end with a right parenthesis. There is no limit on the
length of an expression, except that a period or a right parenthesis (not acting as a
command terminator) must appear within the first 50 operands. Expressions can contain
operands of one or more types. There are three types of operands: constants, symbolic
names, and functions.

CONSTANTS
A constant is a string of 1 to 10 characters that the system processes as an integer. The
constant can be a numeric string or a literal.

Numeric Strings
Each character in the string must be a digit (0 through 9), except the final character. The
final character can be a postradix of D or B to indicate the number base of the constant. A
postradix of B denotes an octal integer. D or an omitted postradix denotes a decimal
i n t e g e r.
Literals
A literal is a $-delimited string of characters or a string containing a $-delimited
string. The literal can be a null string ($$). The maximum length for a literal is 10
characters, unless it appears within the STR function, in which case it may be any length up I
to
the
maximum
length
of
the
line.
I

60459680 H

6-5

Special characters can appear in literals but they must appear in the $-delimited portion of
the string. To represent a dollar sign within a literal, you must use double dollar signs.
Va l i d

Literal

Invalid

Literals

$LITERAL1$

LITERAL1

$5LITERAL$

$LITERAL2

$*LITERAL$

LITERAL3$

$$$LITERAL$

*$LITERAL$

$$$$

$$*LITERAL$
$$LITERAL$

1

$$$
When a literal appears as an operand in a command, a function, or an expression, the system
processes it as an integer whose value is equal to the display code representation of the
literal value rather than as a character string.
A non-numeric string that appears in an expression to be evaluated must be entered as a
literal; otherwise, the system treats it as an erroneous symbolic name.
Example:

"s^.

/IF,AFILE.EQ.AFILE,LABEL.
CCL157- UNKNOWN NAME - AFILE
The above command will execute successfully if the file names are entered as literals
(that is, as integer values):
/IF,$AFILE$.EQ.$AFILE$,LABEL.
When you instruct the system to display the value of a literal string, the system
r i g h t - j u s t i fi e s t h e d i s p l a y c o d e v a l u e o f t h e s t r i n g . I f t h e s t r i n g i s t h e r e s u l t o f t h e ^ \
S T R , S T R B , o r S T R D f u n c t i o n , i t i s l e f t - j u s t i fi e d a n d d i s p l a y e d a s a c h a r a c t e r s t r i n g . '
Example:
/display,$Lit$
49748 141124B
/display,$a$
1 1B
/display,1
1 1B
/display,$1$
28 34B
/display,$$$$
43 53B
/ d i s p l a y, l i t e r a l
CCL157- UNKNOWN NAME - LITERAL
/display,STR(SREALLY A STRINGS).
REALLY A STRING
/

6

-^^Sv

6

60459680

H

Name

Description

PW Page width (default=136 characters, minimum=40, maximum=255).
PD Page density (default=6 lines per inch; allowable values are 6 or 8),
SC

Yo u r

job's

service

class.

S L Te r m i n a l d i s p l a y m o d e ( 0 = l i n e , l = s c r e e n ) .
S S Yo u r c u r r e n t s u b s y s t e m f o r i n t e r a c t i v e j o b s .
TIME Current time of day in the form hhmm.
VER Operating system version number (6-bit display code).
y f fl S ? ^

WEEKDAY The day of the week returned as a numerical value.
MON Monday (numerical value =1).
TUE Tuesday (numerical value =2).
WED Wednesday (numerical value - 3).
THU Thursday (numerical value =4).
FRI Friday (numerical value =5).
S AT S a t u r d a y ( n u m e r i c a l v a l u e = 6 ) .
SUN Sunday (numerical value =7).

60459680 E

6-6.1/6-6.2

As noted in the previous example (DISPLAY,LITERAL), nonnumeric strings that are not
$-delimited cannot appear as operands. If they appear as such, the system treats them as
erroneous symbolic names. You can, however, use such strings as parameter values for
procedures.

SYMBOLIC NAMES
A symbolic name is a system-defined string of characters to which the system or you can
assign a value. The symbolic names represent job or system attributes. You can ascertain
and sometimes change these attributes by using these symbolic names (refer to the various
commands and functions described later in this section).

r

Most symbolic names have an initial value of zero. The exceptions are shown in the
following list:
Name

Description

C S E T Te r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r s e t m o d e ( N O R M A L = 0 o r A S C I I = 1 ) .
CS

Connection

status.

D AT E T h e d a t e i n t h e f o r m y y m m d d .
D AY T h e d a y o f t h e m o n t h .
D AY S N u m b e r o f d a y s s i n c e J a n u a r y 1 , 1 9 7 7 .
H I D T w o - c h a r a c t e r m a c h i n e i d e n t i fi e r ( 6 - b i t d i s p l a y c o d e ) .
M O N T H T h e m o n t h o f t h e y e a r.
N W K Te r m i n a l n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n .
OT

Yo u r

job's

origin

type.

PD Page density (default=6 lines per inch; allowable values are 6 or 8).
PL Page length (default=60 lines, minimum=!16, maximum=255).
PS Page size (same as page length).
PW Page width (default=136 characters, minimum=40, maximum=255).
SC

Yo u r

job's

SL

Te r m i n a l

service

display

class.

mode.

S S Yo u r c u r r e n t s u b s y s t e m f o r i n t e r a c t i v e j o b s .
TIME Current time of day in the form hhmm.
VER Operating system version number (6-bit display code).
/gpN

VERCCL CYBER control language release level displayed as a numeric value.
WEEKDAY The day of the week returned as a numerical value.

60459680 H

6-7

The following lists contain the valid symbolic names and a brief description of each. The
lists do not contain the symbolic names you can use with the FILE and DT functions. Those
symbolic names appear with the descriptions of the functions.
• Symbolic names whose values are passed to, but not from, a procedure (refer to
section 4). When a procedure reverts, they are restored to the values they held
when the procedure was called.
Name

Description

DSC Flag determining whether skipped commands are entered in the
dayfile (refer to SET Command in this section).
EF

Previous

error

fl a g .

Rl

Control

register

1

contents.

R2

Control

register

2

contents.

R3

Control

register

3

contents.

• Symbolic names whose values you can set with SET command or the SETJCI macro (refer
to Volume 4, Program Interface).
Name

Description

DSC Flag determining whether skipped commands are entered in the
d a y fi l e .
EF

Previous

EFG

Global

error
error

fl a g .
fl a g .

EM Current exit mode (refer to MODE Command, later in this section).
Rl

Control

register

1

contents.

RIG Global control register 1 contents.
R2

Control

register

2

contents.

R3

Control

register

3

contents.

SS Subsystem for an Interactive job.

/^^V

6-8

60459680

H

Symbolic names whose values are set by the operating system.
Name

0^\

Description

CMN

Central memory RFL setting divided by 100g (refer to RFL Command
in section 7).

CS

Connection status.

CSET

Terminal character set mode (NORMAL=0 or ASCII=1).

DATE

The date in the form yymmdd.

DAY

The day of the month.

DAYS

Number of days since January 1, 1977.

DSC

Flag indicating that skipped commands are to be entered in the
d a y fi l e .

ECN

Extended memory RFL setting divided by IOOO3 (refer to RFL
Command in section 7).

EF

P r e v i o u s e r r o r fl a g .

FAMILY

Current family name.

FL

Current CM field length.

HID

Tw o - c h a r a c t e r m a c h i n e i d e n t i fi e r ( 6 - b i t d i s p l a y c o d e ) .

MFL

Maximum CM field length.

MFLL

Maximum extended memory field length.

MONTH

The month of the year. (January = 1, February = 2, etc.)

NWK

Network type; possible values for NWK are:
0 = Terminal not connected to NAM.
1 = Terminal connected to NAM/CCP.
2 = Terminal connected to NAM/CDCNET.

n
60459680 H

OT

Job origin type.

SC

Service class of the job.

SL

Terminal display mode (LINE or SCREEN).

SPS

System page size (in lines).

SPW

System page width (in characters).

SPD

System page density (in lines per inch).

6-8.1/6-8.2

Name

SSM

Description
Operating system security mode (0 means unsecured. 1 means
secured).

SYS Host operating system.
TIME Current time of day (hhmm).
VER Operating system version number (6-bit display code).
WEEKDAY The day of the week (Monday = 1, Tuesday = 2, etc.).
• Symbolic name whose value is set by the calling or termination of a procedure.
Name

PNL

Description
Procedure nesting level (0 when processing the original command
record, 1 when processing a first level procedure, and so forth).
Its maximum value is 50.

Symbolic name whose value can be set by the termination of a procedure (refer to SET
Command in this section).
Name

Description

EFG

G l o b a l e r r o r fl a g .

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the error flag value (EF
or EFG) within an expression. These values correspond to error code values. In an
expression, you can check the error flag (EF) for a nonzero value; a nonzero value
i n d i c a t e s a n e r r o r, a n d a z e r o v a l u e i n d i c a t e s n o e r r o r. F o r d e t a i l e d e r r o r
examination, you can compare EF with a particular symbolic name or its error code
value. You are encouraged to use the symbolic name, because the numeric values can
change in future releases of NOS. The following list contains the errors that allow
exit processing.
N a m e Va l u e ( O c t a l )

60459680 H

Description

TIE

User break 1.

TAE

User break 2.

ARE

A r i t h m e t i c e r r o r.

ITE

SCP invalid transfer address.

PSE

Program stop error.

PPE

PPU abort.

6-9

/^tf&w£$V

Name

Value (Octal)

CPE
PCE

Description
CPU abort.

10

PPU call error.

11

Reserved for installation.

MLE

14

Message limit.

TLE

15

Ti m e l i m i t e r r o r.

FLE

16

F i l e l i m i t e r r o r.

TKE

17

Tr a c k l i m i t e r r o r.

SRE

20

SRU limit error.

FSE

22

Forced error; set by operator entry of ERR. under
D I S u t i l i t y.

RCE

23

Job hung in auto recall.

ODE

24

Operator drop.

IDE

25

Idledown.

SPE

26

Reserved for your site.

STE

27

Suspension timeout.

ECE

30

Extended memory parity error.

RSE

31

Recovered system (level 3).

SSE

32

Subsystem aborted.

RRE

34

Operator rerun.

OKE

35

Operator kill.

DRE

37

Deadstart rerun.

RAE

40

Recovery abort.

JSE

41

Job step abort.

SVE

42

S e c u r i t y c o n fl i c t .

SYE

43

System abort.

PEE

44

CPU parity error.

SWE

45

Software error.

^*ES\
6-10

60459680 G

N a m e Va l u e ( O c t a l )

Description

ORE

46

Override error condition.

MXE

47

Maximum number of error flags.

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the job's connection
status (CS) value within an expression.
Name

Value

Description

NICS

Not interactive.

DTCS

Detached.

OLCS

Online.

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the terminal character
set-mode (CSET) value within an expression.
Name

Value

Description

NORMAL

0

Uppercase characters only.

ASCII

1

Uppercase and lowercase characters.

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the month of the year
(MONTH) value within an expression.
Name

60459680 G

Value

Description

JAN

January.

FEB

February.

MAR

March.

APR

April.

MAY

May.

JUN

June.

JUL

J u l y.

AUG

August.

SEP

September.

OCT

10

October.

NOV

11

November.

DEC

12

December.

6-10.1

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared to the terminal's network
connection (NWK) value within an expression.
Name

Value

Description

NONE

Terminal has no NAM connection.

CCP

Terminal is connected using NAM/CCP.

CDCNET

Terminal is connected using NAM/CDCNET.

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the origin type (OT)
value within an expression.
Name

Va l u e

Description

BCO

Local batch origin.

IAO

Interactive origin.

RBO

Remote batch origin

SYO

System origin.

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the service class (SC)
value within an expression:
Name

6-10.2

Value

Description

SYSC

System service class.

BCSC

Local batch service class.

RBSC

Remote batch service class.

TSSC

Interactive service class.

DISC

Detached interactive service class.

NSSC

Network supervisor service class.

SSSC

Subsystem service class.

MASC

10

Maintenance service class.

CTSC

11

Communication task service class.

IOSC

12

Installation service class 0.

use

13

Installation service class 1.

I2SC

14

Installation service class 2.

I3SC

15

Installation service class 3.

DSSC

77

Deadstart service class.

60459680 G

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the terminal display mode
(SL) value within an expression.
Name

Va l u e

LINE

0

Line mode.

SCREEN

1

Screen mode.

Description

Symbolic name with a fixed value that can be compared with the host operating system
(SYS) value within an expression.
Name

0^\

Value

Description

NOS

Network Operating System.

NOSB

Network Operating System/Batch Environment.

SC2

SCOPE 2 Operating System.

Symbolic names with a fixed value that you can compare with the subsystem for an
interactive job (SS).
Name

Value

Description

ACCESS

The access subsystem.

BASIC

The BASIC subsystem.

BATCH

The batch subsystem.

EXECUTE

The execute subsystem.

FORTRAN

The FORTRAN 5 subsystem.

FTNTS

The FORTRAN Extended 4 subsystem,

NULL

The null subsystem.

0^\
60459680 G

6-11

Symbolic names with true or false values. True is 1; false is 0.
Name

Description

F

Fixed value of 0 (false).

FALSE

Fixed value of 0 (false).

SWn

One of six sense switches (n can be from 1 to 6). Their values
are set by the OFFSW, ONSW, and SWITCH commands (refer to section
/) •

T

Fixed value of 1 (true).

TRUE

Fixed value of 1 (true).

Symbolic names with fixed values that can be compared with the day of the week
(WEEKDAY) value within an expression.
Name

Value

Description

MON

Monday.

TUE

Tuesday.

WED

Wednesday.

THU

Thursday.

FRI

F r i d a y.

SAT

Saturday.

SUN

Sunday.

FUNCTIONS
Functions are used as expressions or operands within expressions in commands. Functions are
| not commands. The functions are FILE, DT, LEN, NUM, STR, STRB, and STRD.

FILE Function
| The FILE function determines whether a local file has a specified attribute. The system
returns a value of 1 (true) or 0 (false) depending upon whether the file has or does not
have the specified attribute(s). Only the equipment number (EQ) attribute can return values
o t h e r t h a n 1 o r 0 . T h e l i s t o f fi l e a t t r i b u t e s f o l l o w s t h e d e s c r i p t i o n o f t h e F I L E f u n c t i o n
format.
The FILE function must be used as an expression or as a part of an expression in a command.
A left parenthesis must appear before the file name, a comma must appear between the file
name and the expression, and a right parenthesis must appear after the expression.

/*S%v

6-12

60459680 H

Format:
FILE(Ifn,expression)
Parameter

Description

lfn

Name of the local file for which attributes are being determined.

expression

E i t h e r a s p e c i a l FIL E fu n c ti o n a ttr i b u te o r a n e x p r e s s i o n , c o n s i s ti n g
of logical operators and special FILE function attributes. The
expression must be appropriate for the command in which the FILE
function appears. If the FILE function is part of an IF command or
.IF directive, the expression should be one that can be evaluated as
true or false. If the FILE function is part of the DISPLAY command,
the expression could have a numeric value other than a true or false
value.

/gptev

The expression within a FILE function cannot include the NUM function,
the symbolic name SS, or another FILE function; the DT function or the
following symbolic names can be used within the expression. Any other
symbolic name within the expression is treated either as an implicit
DT function (refer to DT Function which follows) or as an unidentified
variable.
Parameter

Description

AP File has append permission.
AS File is assigned or attached to your job.
BOI File is positioned at BOI. This is effective only for
a file on mass storage.
EOF Last operation was a forward operation, which
encountered an EOF and is now positioned at that EOF.
This is effective only for a file on mass storage.
EOI Last operation was a forward operation, which
encountered an EOI and is now positioned at that EOI.
This is effective only for a file on mass storage.

/S^^N

E Q E S T o r d i n a l o f t h e e q u i p m e n t o n w h i c h t h e fi l e
r e s i d e s . I f t h e fi l e i s n o t a s s i g n e d t o a d e v i c e , i t
has an EST ordinal of zero.
EX File has execute permission.
FS File size in PRUs.
GL File

is

IN

type

File

a

global
is

l i b r a r y.

input.

LB File is on a labeled tape.
LI

60459680 H

File

is

a

system

library

fi l e .

6-13

Parameter

Description

LO File type is local.
MD File has modify permission.
MS File is on mass storage.
OP File is opened.
PM File is an attached direct access permanent file.
P T F i l e t y p e i s p r i m a r y.
QF File type is queued.
RA File has read append permission.
RD File has read permission.
RM File has read modify permission.
RU File has read update permission.
TP File is on magnetic tape.
TT

File

is

assigned

to

a

terminal.

/B^t

UP File has update permission.
WR File has write permission.
ZL File has zero length.
Example:
The following job segment shows the FILE function being used inside an IF command. The FILE
function determines if file ACCT is not at the beginning-of-information (BOI). If ACCT is
not at BOI, the IF command is true and the system rewinds ACCT before copying it onto ITEM.
If ACCT is at BOI, the IF command is false and the system skips to the ENDIF command and
copies ACCT onto ITEM. In both cases, ACCT is copied to ITEM and is replaced.
IF,FILE( ACCT,.NOT.BOI),LABELL
REWIND,ACCT.
ENDIF, LABELL
COPY,ACCT,ITEM.
RE PLACE,ITEM.

DT Function
The DT function determines the device type on which a file resides. DT can be used only
within a FILE function. The value of the DT function is true if the two-character mnemonic
included in the function is equal to the two-character device type. The operating system
defines the mnemonics.
>*s^\

6-14

60459680

E

Format:
FILE(lfn,DT(dt))
Parameter

Description

l f n N a m e o f t h e fi l e f o r w h i c h d e v i c e r e s i d e n c e i s b e i n g d e t e r m i n e d .
dt A two-character mnemonic identifying the device, which may be any one
of the following:
Type

Equipment

DB 885-42 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
DC 895-1/2 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
DD 834 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
D E E x t e n d e d m e m o r y.
DF 887 Disk Storage Subsystem (4K sector; full track). |
DG 836 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
DH 887 Disk Storage Subsystem (16K sector; full track). I
DI 844-21 Disk Storage Subsystem (half-track).
DJ 844-41/44 Disk Storage Subsystem (half-track).
DK 844-21 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
DL 844-41/44 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
D M 8 8 5 - 11 / 1 2 D i s k S t o r a g e S u b s y s t e m ( h a l f - t r a c k ) .
D P D i s t r i b u t i v e d a t a p a t h t o e x t e n d e d m e m o r y.
D Q 8 8 5 - 11 / 1 2 D i s k S t o r a g e S u b s y s t e m ( f u l l - t r a c k ) .
DV 819 Disk Storage Subsystem (single-density).
DW 819 Disk Storage Subsystem (double-density).
MT Magnetic tape drive (seven-track).
NE

Null

equipment.

NT Magnetic tape drive (nine-track).
TT

60459680

Interactive

terminal.

H

6-15

0*&$$\

Example:
The following dayfile segment shows that TAXES is on a nine-track magnetic tape, so it is
copied to output and then unloaded. If the DT function was false, TAXES would be unloaded
without being copied.
14.00.45.IF,FILE(TAXES,DT(NT)),LABL1.
14.00.46.COPY,TAXES,OUTPUT.
14.00.46.EOI ENCOUNTERED.
14.00.46.ENDIF,LABLL
14.00.46.UNLOAD,TAXES.

LEN Function
The LEN function returns the length of a specified string,
Format:
LEN(string)
Parameter

Description

string

A string of any length up to the maximum length of a CCL line. If the
string is a literal, the length returned is the length of the string
after the removal of the surrounding dollar signs ($) and of any extra
dollar signs within the string.

NUM Function
The NUM function determines whether a character string is numeric. It evaluates the
character string as true (1) if it is numeric or false (0) if it is not. NUM must be used
as an expression or as part of an expression.
Format:
NUM(string)
Parameter
string

Description
A string of 1 to 40 characters. If the string contains one or more
special characters, it must be delimited by dollar signs (for example,
$***$). if delimited by dollar signs, the string is always evaluated
as non-numeric.

Example:
The following procedure uses the NUM function to ensure that the passed parameter, NUMBER,
is numeric. If a non-numeric value is passed, the procedure terminates with an appropriate
message.

/^^\
6-16

60459680 H

.PROC,PR0C1*I,NUMBER.
.IF,NUM(NUMBER),QUIT.
WHILE,R1.LE.NUMBER,LOOP.
SET,R1=R1+1.

ENDW,LOOP.
REVERT. PROCESSING COMPLETED
.ENDIF,QUIT.
REVERT,ABORT. NONNUMERIC PASSED

STR Function
The STR function produces a left-justified string of any length up to the maximum CCL line
length. The STR function makes it possible to manipulate character strings greater than 10
characters in length. An STR function result may be compared or combined with the results
of STRB, STRD or other STR functions in a variety of ways.
Format:
STR(strexp,lc,rc)
Parameter

Description

strexp

May be any legal CCL expression, usually but not necessarily a
l i t e r a l . L i t e r a l s a r e l e f t - j u s t i fi e d , a n d m a y b e a n y l e n g t h u p t o t h e
maximum line length. Nonliteral values are treated normally during
evaluation of the expression. However, a numeric result will be
l e f t - j u s t i fi e d a n d t r e a t e d a s a s t r i n g .

lc

Must be an expression producing a numeric result, either positive or
negative, lc indicates which character of strexp is to be the
leftmost character of the string produced by STR, counting from the
left if lc is positive or from the right if negative. A value of zero
or a negative value which exceeds the length of strexp is treated as
e q u i v a l e n t t o 1 . A p o s i ti v e v a l u e g r e a te r th a n th e l e n g th o f s tr e x p
produces a null string, lc may be omitted if it would reference the
leftmost character of strexp and if re is also omitted. (The
preceding comma must also be omitted when lc is omitted.)
Must be an expression producing a numeric result, either positive or
negative, re indicates which character of strexp is to be the
rightmost character of the string produced by STR, counting from the
left if re is positive or from the right if negative. A positive
value greater than the length of strexp is considered equal to the
length. A value of zero or a negative value which exceeds the length
of strexp produces a null string, re may be omitted if it would
reference the rightmost character of strexp. (The preceding comma
must also be omitted when re is omitted.)
In summary, lc and re both reference the string strexp in the same
way: a positive value of n indicates the nth character of strexp
counting from the leftmost character, 1 meaning the first character.
A negative value of -n indicates the nth character of strexp counting
from the rightmost character, -1 meaning the last character.

60459680 H

6-16.1

Example:
The following expressions all produce the same result, the string $ABET$.
STR(SALPHABETAGS,5,-3)
STR($ALPHABETAG$,-6,8)
STR($ALPHABET$,5)

STRB Function
The STRB function produces a left-justified string of 1 to 17 characters
representing the octal value of a specified expression.
Format:
STRB(numexp,lc,rc)
Parameter

Description

numexp

May be any legal CCL expression, usually but not necessarily numeric.
If numexp is or contains a literal, the literal is limited to no more
t h a n 1 0 c h a r a c t e r s a n d w i l l b e r i g h t - j u s t i fi e d a n d b i n a r y - z e r o fi l l e d
for evaluation.
The result produced by numexp is treated as a one-word signed value
and is converted to a character string in octal. For example, the
decimal value 25 for numexp would result in the string $31$.

lc

Specifies which character of numexp is to be the leftmost in the
r e s u l t i n g s t r i n g . F o r f u r t h e r e x p l a n a t i o n o f t h i s p a r a m e t e r, r e f e r t o
the description of the STR function.
Specifies which character of numexp is to be the rightmost in the
r e s u l t i n g s t r i n g . F o r f u r t h e r e x p l a n a t i o n o f t h i s p a r a m e t e r, r e f e r t o
the description of the STR function.

Example:
Each of the following expressions will produce the string $102$.
STRB($ABC$,-5,-3).
STRB(10203B,-5,-3).

• 6-16.2

60459680 H

/*^%K

STRD Function
The STRD function produces a left-justified string of 1 to 16 characters representing the
decimal value of a specified expression.
Format
STRD(numexp,lc,re)
Parameter

Description

numexp

May be any legal CCL expression, usually but not necessarily numeric.
If numexp is or contains a literal, the literal is limited to no more
t h a n 1 0 c h a r a c t e r s a n d w i l l b e r i g h t - j u s t i fi e d a n d b i n a r y - z e r o fi l l e d
for evaluation. The result produced by numexp is treated as a
one-word signed value, and is converted to a character string in
decimal. For example, the decimal value 25 for numexp would result in
the string $25$.

lc

Specifies which character of numexp is to be the leftmost in the
r e s u l t i n g s t r i n g . F o r f u r t h e r e x p l a n a t i o n o f t h i s p a r a m e t e r, r e f e r t o
the description of the STR function.
Specifies which character of numexp is to be the rightmost in the
r e s u l t i n g s t r i n g . F o r f u r t h e r e x p l a n a t i o n o f t h i s p a r a m e t e r, r e f e r t o
the description of the STR function.

Example:
The following expression produces a string of $0012$.
STRD(10000+36/3,-4).

COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
Individual descriptions of the commands follow in alphabetic order,

BEGIN COMMAND
Refer to Calling a Procedure in section 4.

60459680 H

6-16.3 •

DISPLAY COMMAND
The DISPLAY command evaluates an expression and sends the result to the job dayfile in both
decimal and octal integer form or in character string form, depending on the expression.
(If the expression is an STR, STRB, or STRD function or a concatenation thereof, the
resulting string is displayed as a character string; otherwise, the decimal and octal
integer format is used.) The largest decimal value which can be displayed is 10 digits. If
the value is larger than 10 digits, GT followed by 9999999999 is displayed. If the value is
negative and larger than 10 digits, LT followed by a minus and 9999999999 is displayed. In
octal code, numbers as large as 16 digits can be displayed. For an expression
larger than 2*8-1, zeros are displayed.
Format:
DISPLAY,expression^,expression, • • • ,expressionn.
Parameter

Description

expression Specifies any valid symbolic name or expression described earlier in
this section.
Example:
The following sample dayfile shows several display operations.
12.53.18.DISPLAY/TIME.
12.53.18. 1253 2345B.
12.53.27.SET,R1,=99.
12.53.40.SET,R2,=901.
12.54.05.DISPLAY,R1.
12.54.05. 99 143B.
12.54.16.DISPLAY,R1+R2.
12.54.16. 1000 1750B.
12.55.09.DISPLAY,STR($N0W IS THE TIMES).
12.55.09.NOW IS THE TIME.
12.56.10.DISPLAY,STRB(R1+R2) .
12.56.10.1750.
1 2 . 5 6 . 2 6 . D I S P L A Y, S T R D ( R 1 + R 2 ) .
12.56.26.1000.
12.58.26.DISPLAY,STRB(R1+R2)/STR($B IS EQUAL TO S)//STRD(R1+R2).
12.58.26.1750B IS EQUAL TO 1000.
13.01.32.DISPLAY,STR($FIRSTRATE$,4,6)//STR($RINGER$,2,4).
13.0L32.STRING.
13.01.53.DISPLAY,3/2.
13.01.53.
1
1B
13.02.07.DISPLAY 2**47.
13!o2!07! GT 9999999999 4000000000000000B.
13.02.24.DISPLAY,-2**47.
13.02.24. LT -9999999999 -4000000000000000B.
13.02.38.DISPLAY,2**48.
13.02.38.
0
0B.
13.03.28.DISPLAY,99999999999.
13.03.28. CCL156- STRING TOO LONG - 99999999999

"^
/

y*^\

6-16.4

60459680

H

The first DISPLAY command displays the value of the symbolic name TIME. The current time
given is in the form hhmm. The next six lines demonstrate the use of the Rl and R2 symbolic
names. The next 10 lines illustrate the use of the STR, STRB, and STRD functions for ■
g e n e r a t i n g d i s p l a y c h a r a c t e r s t r i n g s . T h e o t h e r D I S P L AY c o m m a n d s s p e c i f y n u m e r i c I
expressions. The integer constant in the final DISPLAY command has more than 10 digits,
resulting in an error message.

ELSE COMMAND
The ELSE command performs one of the following functions.
• It terminates skipping initiated by a false IF command whose label string matches
that of the ELSE command. If the label string does not match, the ELSE command is
skipped.

•

It initiates skipping from the ELSE command to the ENDIF command whose label string
matches that of the ELSE command. This happens for a true IF command.

Neither a SKIP nor an ELSE command terminates skipping initiated by another SKIP or ELSE
command.
Format:
ELSE,label.
Parameter

Description

l a b e l S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 1 0 - c h a r a c t e r a l p h a n u m e r i c s t r i n g . T h e s t r i n g m u s t
begin with an alphabetic character.
Example:
The following commands use the FILE function to determine if a file named TEST1 is local to
t h e j o b . I f t h e fi l e i s l o c a l , i t i s c o p i e d t o t h e O U T P U T fi l e ; i f i t i s n o t , i t i s a s s u m e d
to be an indirect access permanent file, and a local copy is obtained and copied to OUTPUT.

60459680

H

6-17

If the file is local, each succeeding command, up to the ELSE command, is processed, and the
ELSE command initiates a skip to the ENDIF command. If the file is not local, control skips
to the ELSE command, and each command succeeding the ELSE command is processed.
I F,FILE(TEST1,L0),LABELL
C0PYSBF,TEST1,OUTPUT.
ELSE,LABEL1.
GET,TEST1.
C0PYSBF,TEST1,OUTPUT.
ENDIF,LABEL1.
The following dayfile segment results when the preceding commands are processed and TESTI is
n o t i n i t i a l l y a l o c a l fi l e .
11.33.00.1 F,FILE(TEST1,L0),LABELL
11.33.00. ELSE,LAB ELL
11.33.00.GET,TESTL
11.33.00.C0PYSBF,TEST1,OUTPUT.
11.33.01.END OF INFORMATION ENCOUNTERED.
11.33.01.ENDIF,LABEL1.
The following dayfile segment results when the preceding commands are processed and TESTI is
i n i t i a l l y a l o c a l fi l e .
15.40.19.IF,FILE(TEST1,LO),LABEL1.
1 5 . 4 0 . 1 9 . C 0 P Y S B F, T E S T 1 , 0 U T P U T.
15.40.21.
END
OF
15.40.21.ELSE,LABEL1.
15.40.21 .ENDIF,LABELL

I N F O R M AT I O N

ENCOUNTERED.

tttmr
y

ENDIF COMMAND
The ENDIF command terminates skipping initiated by a SKIP, IF, or ELSE command. In all
cases, the label string on the ENDIF command must match the label string on the command that
initiates the skipping. If the system encounters an ENDIF command with a nonmatching label
string, it ignores that command.
Format:
E N D I F, l a b e l .
Parameter

Description

l a b e l S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 1 0 - c h a r a c t e r a l p h a n u m e r i c s t r i n g . T h e s t r i n g m u s t
begin with an alphabetic character.

^

\

y^&Sk

6-18

60459680

D

Example:
When the SKIP command in the following sequence of commands is processed, control skips to
ENDIF, and none of the commands between SKIP and ENDIF are processed.
SKIP,LABEL1.
commands

ENDIF,LABEL1.

ENDW COMMAND
The ENDW command identifies the end of the WHILE command loop. A command loop is a sequence
of commands that may be repeatedly processed. The number of times the loop is processed
depends on the evaluation of the expression specified in the WHILE command that begins the
loop.
The ENDW command must have a label string that matches the label string specified in the
WHILE command that begins the loop.
Format:
ENDW,label.
Parameter

Description

l a b e l S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 1 0 - c h a r a c t e r a l p h a n u m e r i c s t r i n g . T h e s t r i n g m u s t
begin with an alphabetic character.
Refer to WHILE Command in this section for an example of ENDW command use.
0ftoi\

EXIT COMMAND
The EXIT command indicates the position in the command record where processing will resume
if an error is encountered prior to the EXIT command. If no error is encountered, the EXIT
command indicates where to terminate normal command processing.
When used in procedures, we recommend that
command to prevent execution of the EXIT
command executed in this way terminates
procedures if nesting has occurred, but
values.

the EXIT command be preceded by a SKIP or REVERT
command in the case where no error occurs. An EXIT
the executing procedure as well as all calling
does not restore control registers to their previous

Format:
EXIT.
For additional information, refer to the description of the NOEXIT and ONEXIT commands later
in this section and to the description of exit processing in section 5.

j$^&\

60459680

E

6-19

IF (OR IFE) COMMAND
The IF command conditionally skips one or more commands.
Formats:
IF,condition.command.
I F, c o n d i t i o n , l a b e l .
Parameter

Description

c o n d i t i o n S p e c i fi e s a n e x p r e s s i o n t h a t i s e i t h e r t r u e o r f a l s e . T h e s e p a r a t o r
following condition in the first format must be a terminator.
command Specifies a valid command.
l a b e l S p e c i fi e s a 1 - t o 1 0 - c h a r a c t e r a l p h a n u m e r i c s t r i n g . T h e s t r i n g m u s t
begin with an alphabetic character. An identical string must appear in
a subsequent ELSE or ENDIF command.
The first format conditionally skips only the command specified within the IF command. If
condition is true, the system executes the specified command. If condition is false, the
system skips the command.
NOTE
When using the first format (IF,expression,
command.), values for .command, that match a
CCL relational, logical, or string operator
(such as .EQ. or .OR.) are interpreted as
operators, causing the procedure to abort.
To write a valid IF command when .command,
matches an operator, terminate the expression
or command with a right parenthesis instead
of a period.
The second format conditionally skips all commands between the IF command and the first
matching ELSE or ENDIF command (two commands match if their label parameters are
identical). If condition is true, the system executes all commands between the IF and the
matching ELSE or ENDIF. If condition is false, the system skips all intervening commands.
Example 1:
The following commands initiate the compilation and execution of a FORTRAN program and then
test for any errors during execution. If an error was made, the error code is displayed.
FTN5,I=IFTEST.
SET,EF=0. INITIALIZE ERROR FLAG
NOEXIT.
LGO.
ONEXIT.
IF,EF.NE.O.DISPLAY,EF.
If the job step executes without error, the error flag (EF) is 0. In this case, the DISPLAY
command is not executed. If an error occurs, the error flag is not 0, the condition is
true, and control passes to the DISPLAY command; the system then displays the error code in
the error flag register. (The NOEXIT and ONEXIT commands are described later in this
section.)
6-20

60459680

H

In the following example, the FORTRAN program FTNPROG attempts to call a subroutine BETA
which does not exist (outside the field length of the job).' The commands that are used
appear first and the dayfile segment follows.
FTN5,I=FTNPR0G.
SET,EF=0. INITIALIZE ERROR FLAG
NOEXIT.
LGO.
ONEXIT.
IF,EF.NE.O.DISPLAY,EF.

z^PN
T

12.57.02.FTN5,I=FTNPROG.
12.57.02. 61000 CM STORAGE USED.
12.57.02. 0.009 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME.
12.57.02.SET,EF=0. INITIALIZE ERROR FLAG
12.57.02.NOEXIT.
12.57.02.LGO.
12.57.03. NON-FATAL LOADER ERRORS 12.57.03. UNSATISFIED EXTERNAL REF — BETA
12.57.03. MODE ERROR.
12.57.03. JOB REPRIEVED.
12.57.03. UNSATISFIED EXT IN FLAG NEAR LINE 2
12.57.03. 7500 MAXIMUM EXECUTION FL.
12.57.03. 0.000 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME.
12.57.03. RPV - PREVIOUS ERROR CONDITIONS RESET.
12.57.03. CPU ERROR EXIT AT 400121.
12.57.03. CM OUT OF RANGE.
1 2 . 5 7 . 0 3 . O N E X I T.
12.57.04.IF,EF.NE.0.DISPLAY,EF.
12.57.04.DISPLAY,EF.
12.57.04.
3
3B

Example 2:
The following procedure file is an indirect access file called COLORPR. It
command to determine if the color the BEGIN command substituted for COLOR
Different processing is done for the colors red and blue. Any other color
# character in the comment line inhibits substitution for the word (COLOR)
(refer to Parameters and the Procedure Body in section 4).

uses the IF
is red or blue.
is ignored. The
it precedes

.PR0C,A*I,C0L0R.
IF,$C0L0R$.EQ.$RED$,L1.
COMMENT. PROCESSING DONE FOR #COLOR OF COLOR
REVERT.
ENDIF, LL
IF,$C0L0R$.EQ.$BLUE$,L2.
COMMENT. PROCESSING DONE FOR 0COLOR OF COLOR
REVERT.
ENDIF,L2.
COMMENT. NO PROCESSING FOR #C0L0R OF COLOR

60459680

F

6-21

/*^v

The following commands call procedure A.
BEGIN,A,C OLORPR,BLUE.
BEGIN,A,COLORPR,RED.
BEGIN,A,COLORPR,PINK.
The following dayfile segment results when the preceding commands are processed. It shows
the effect of the # character.
08.34.30.BEGIN,A,C0L0RPR,BLUE.
08.34.32.IF,$BLUE$.EQ.$RED$,L1.

08.34.32.ENDIF,L1.
08.34.32.IF,$BLUE$.EQ.$BLUE$,L2.
08.34.32.COMMENT. PROCESSING DONE FOR COLOR OF BLUE

08.34.32.
R E V E R T.
08.34.33.BEGIN,A,C0L0RPR,RED.
08.34.34.IF,$RED$.EQ.$RED$,L1.
08.34.34.COMMENT. PROCESSING DONE FOR COLOR OF RED
08.34.34.REVERT.
08.34.34.BEGIN,A,C0L0RPR,PINK.
08.34.35.IF,$PINK$.EQ.$RED$,L1.
08.34.35.ENDIF,L1.
08.34.35.IF,$PINK$.EQ.$BLUE$,L2.
08.34.35.ENDIF,L2.
08.34.36.COMMENT. NO PROCESSING FOR COLOR OF PINK
08.34.36.SREVERT.CCL

/eS^
^)

MODE COMMAND

The MODE command defines the error conditions that cause the system to exit from normal
processing. When the error that you specified occurs, the system sets the appropriate error
flag and exits from normal processing to perform any error processing required. If an error
occurs for which you did not select the exit mode processing, the system ignores the error
and continues normal processing.
Format:
MODE,m,n.
Parameter

Description

m CPU program error exit mode (0\

SECONDS
JOB STEP SRU
ACCOUNT BLK SRU
DAYFILE MESSAGES
COMMANDS
MASS STORAGE

n

60459680 H

64
31808
31808

993

NO LIMIT
59008

7-17

Parameter

Description

UJN=ujn Returns a one-line report of each of your jobs with the specified user
job name (UJN). The report for each job has the following fields:
jsn sc cs ds lid ujn status executing message
The fields have the following descriptions:
Field

Description

jsn The job sequence name (JSN). It is a four-character,
system-defined name.
sc The service class of the job. One of the following
mnemonics
appears
in
this
sc

fi e l d :

Service Class

S

System

B

Batch

R

Remote batch

T

Interactive

D

Detached interactive

N

Network supervisor

C

Communication task

M

Maintenance

0

Installation class

1

Installation class

2

Installation class

3

Installation class

The connection status (CS) of your job; that is, whether
your job is online and interactive, detached and
interactive, not interactive or queued. The following
values can appear:
cs

Description

ON Online and interactive
DT Detached and interactive
NI Not interactive
blank Queued

7-18

60459680

D

/e^\

Parameter

Description
Field

Description

ds The default destination of batch output. It indicates
whether batch output will be routed to the central site
(BC) or to a remote batch terminal (RB).
l i d T h e l o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r ( L I D ) o f t h e m a i n f r a m e t h a t i s t o
p r o c e s s t h e j o b . T h i s i s a t h r e e - c h a r a c t e r,
site-defined mnemonic.
ujn The user job name (UJN) of the job. It is either the
name you assigned the job or it is your user index hash
if you did not assign the job a name.
/fP*N

status The overall job status. It indicates whether the job is
executing, whether it has been rolled out, or the queue
in which it now resides.
executing The command that the system is now executing,
message
Example:
/enqui re,uj n= Idi j ob
JSN SC CS DS LID UJN

STATUS

A B C F. B . . B C . . L D I J O B

WAIT QUEUE

EXECUTING MESSAGE

If you specify only the keyword UJN, the system returns a one-line
report for each job associated with your user name.
Example:
/enqui re,ujn
/sP^S

JSN SC CS DS LID UJN

STATUS

ABCH.B. .BC.M42.LEVEL
ABCB.T.ON.BC. .AJLA
ABCI.B. .BC.M42.LDIJ0B
A B C F. B . . B C . . L D I J O B

INPUT QUEUE
EXECUTING
PRINT QUEUE
WAIT QUEUE

EXECUTING MESSAGE

Do not specify the UJN=ujn parameter with any parameter other than
0=lfn2.

r

J S N = j s n R e t u r n s a d e t a i l e d r e p o r t o f t h e j o b w i t h t h e s p e c i fi e d j o b s e q u e n c e
name (JSN). The format of the report varies with the status of the
job. If the job is executing, the report includes the JSN, the job's
service class, its connection status, the default destination of its
batch output, the current status of the job, the user job name (UJN),
the job access level (on a secured system only), job resource
information, the executing command, a dayfile extract (maximum of 10
messages), and a list of the next commands to be executed (maximum of
10 commands).
60459680 D

7-19

Parameter

Description
Example:
/en quire,j sn=abcb
A B C B . T. O N . B C . . E X E C U T I N G U J N = A J L A L E V E L = LV L O
S R U S = 2 . 5 7 3 . S R U L I M I T = N 0 L I M I T. C M F L = 5 0 0 0 . E C S F L = 0 .
DAYFILE=
17.26.55. SUBMIT COMPLETE. JSN IS ABCE.
17.27.07. GET,0PLJ0B.
17.27.21. RE PLACE, CATEGOR.
17.27.32.SUBMIT,OPLJOB,TO.
17.27.32. SUBMIT COMPLETE. JSN IS ABCF.
17.28.04.ROUTE,CATEGOR,DC=IN.
17.28.04. ROUTE COMPLETE. JSN IS ABCH.
17.28.13.ENQUIRE,UJN.
17.28.26. ENQUIRE, JSN.
17.29.04. ENQUIRE, JSN=ABCB.
If the job is a queued file, the report includes the job's JSN, its
service class, the default destination of its batch output, the
logical identifier (LID) of the mainframe that is to process the job,
its queue residence, its UJN, length in PRUs, and output
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
Example:
/enqui re,j sn=abcf
A B C F. B . . B C . . W A I T Q U E U E U J N = L D I J O B L E V E L = LV L 0
P R U L E N G T H * 3 2 . D C = T T. F C = . I D = 0 . E C =
If you specify the keyword JSN, the system returns a one-line report
on each job associated with your user name. The fields in the display
are identical to those you get when you specify only the keyword UJN,
except that the UJN field and the EXECUTING MESSAGE fields are omitted.
Example:
/enquire,jsn
J S N S C C S D S L I D S TAT U S J S N S C C S D S L I D S TAT U S
A B C H . B . . B C . M 4 2 . I N P U T Q U E U E A B C B . T. O N . B C . . E X E C U T I N G
A B C I . B . . B C . M 4 2 . P R I N T Q U E U E A B C F. B . . B C . . W A I T Q U E U E
Do not specify the JSN=jsn parameter with any parameter other than
0=1fn2.

F N = l f n j R e t u r n s t h e s t a t u s o f l o c a l fi l e l f n l ( r e f e r t o t h e O P = F p a r a m e t e r ) .
0 = l f n 2 W r i t e s t h e o u t p u t o n f i l e l f n 2 » T h e d e f a u l t i s O U T P U T. I f y o u
specify only the 0=lfn2 parameter in a batch job, the
0P=pjp2...pn parameter defaults to 0P=A.

7-20

60459680

D

'

/**^\

If you enter the ENQUIRE command with no parameters from an interactive job, the system
gives a two-line report of the current job.
Example:
/enqui re
JSN: AAFA SYSTEM: BATCH SRU: 2.055 FILE NAME: SAMPOUT
STATUS: IDLE
It always returns the status IDLE. To get a report on the current job while the system is
executing another command, enter the ctE or ctS command (refer to Interactive Status
Commands in section 8).
If you enter the ENQUIRE command with no parameters in a batch job, the command defaults to
ENQUIRE,0P=A.

ENTER COMMAND
The ENTER command enters a series of commands on one line. This is especially useful for
interactive users operating in the batch subsystem.
Format:
ENTER./commandj/command2/.../commandn
/ Delimiting character used to separate the individual commands on one
line. It can be any character not used within the commands and must
immediately follow a period or right parenthesis.
commandi Any NOS command you are authorized to use. Interactive commands for
which there are no batch counterparts are not acceptable.
The system supplies a terminator (period or right parenthesis) if it is missing from any
command•
Example:
From a terminal, you enter the batch subsystem and type in an ENTER command on one line as
follows:
batch
RFL,0.
/enter.#get,fprog#ftn5,i=fprog#map,part#1go#exit#dtnp#rewind,zzzdump#copy,zzzdump
This is the sequence of commands used in section 14 to illustrate the reading of CM dumps.
Assuming that a FORTRAN 5 program is on the indirect access file FPROG, output like that
shown in the figures in section 14 is produced when this command is processed.

0BS\

60459680

D

7_21

ERRMSG COMMAND
The ERRMSG command controls the display of error messages generated by commands executed
within a NOS procedure. An ERRMSG,OFF command inhibits the display of error messages at the
terminal, although all messages are still listed in the dayfile. This command has no effect
when issued from a batch job.
The ERRMSG command must be executed from within a procedure. The error message off status
remains in effect until an ERRMSG,ON command is issued, or until your job returns to
interactive command status. The error message off status is not affected by the entry of
subsequent BEGIN or REVERT commands (that is, nested procedures).
Format:
ERRMSG,status
Parameter

Description

s t a t u s S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r e r r o r m e s s a g e s g e n e r a t e d b y c o m m a n d s w i t h i n a
procedure are displayed at the terminal. Values that can be specified
for status are OFF (messages are not displayed) and ON (messages are
displayed). The default value is ON.

GO COMMAND
The GO command clears the pause bit of one of your executing jobs. The system may have set
the pause bit because of an error or a request for user input. You can set the pause bit
with one of your programs or with the PAUSE command.
Format:
GO,jsn.
J s n S p e c i fi e s t h e j o b s e q u e n c e n a m e ( J S N ) o f t h e j o b w h o s e p a u s e b i t y o u
w a n t to c l e a r.
You must check the status of the pause bit to effectively use this command. The program does
not pause just because the pause bit is set. Similarly, the program does not proceed just
because the pause bit has been cleared. You can write a program that checks the status of
the pause bit and waits for that bit to be cleared (refer to the RECALL macro in Volume 4,
Program Interface).
If you want to determine whether a PAUSE or GO command has been entered, write a program to
set bit 13 of word RA and then status it. The system unconditionally clears bit 13 of word
RA whenever the PAUSE/GO command sets/clears the pause flag (bit 12 of word RA). Hence,
when the system clears it, you can check the pause flag. CPU programs that check the pause
flag on NOS 1 continue to work properly on NOS 2, but these programs cannot determine when a
PAUSE or GO command has been entered.

7-22

60459680

E

HTIME COMMAND
The HTIME command issues a dayfile message
count for the job. A clock cycle on the model
instructions require a certain number of clock
Reference Manual. This command can be used

giving the model 176 accumulated clock cycle
176 is 27.5 nanoseconds. COMPASS
cycles to execute as described in the COMPASS
for performance comparisons.

Format:
HTIME.
The resulting dayfile message has the following format. The cycle count is in kilocycle
units.
HTIME nnnnnnnnnnnn.nnn KCYCLES.
An HTIME command processed on a machine other than the model 176 produces the following
dayfile message.
HTIME NOT AVAILABLE.

r
y$^N

60459680 E

7-22.1/7-22.2 |

JOB COMMAND
The Job command, also known as the job card, specifies the user job name (UJN) and may
specify job processing parameters. Refer to Job Names in section 3 for the significance of
the user job name. The first command of a batch job must be a Job command.
Format:
ujn,P=priority,T=timelimit,CM=memory,EC=xmemory,ST=lid,AL=level.punchmode
or
uj n,Ppriori ty,Ttimelimi t,CMmemory,ECxmemory,STlid,ALlevel.punchmode
or
ujn,SC=class,T=timelimit,CM=memory,EC=xmemory,ST=lid,AL=level.punchmode
or
ujn,SCclas s,Ttimelimi t,CMmemory,ECxmemory,STlid,ALlevel.punchmode
or
u j n , p r i o r i t y, t i m e l i m i t , m e m o r y, x m e m o r y, l i d , l e v e l . p u n c h m o d e
or
uj n,class,t imelimit,memory,xmemory,lid,level.punchmode
All parameters except the parameter ujn are optional. If you include keywords when you
specify optional parameters, they are order-independent. Otherwise, they are
order-dependent.
Parameter

Description

ujn

Alphanumeric user job name (UJN) of one to seven characters. This
name identifies the individual jobs being run under the same user
name.

P=priority

Specifies the priority level at which the job enters the system.
Using this priority level, the system assigns the job a service
class according to a site-defined algorithm. The value you specify
must be an integer in the range of 0 through 7. The default for
P=priority depends on your default service class assignments and
your site-defined algorithm for mapping priority levels and service
classes (refer to Job Service Classes in section 3).
To assign a service class to your job directly, use the SC=class
parameter.

SC=class

Specifies the service class to be assigned to the job. The value
class must be one of the following values:
class Description
SY

60459680 F

System

7-23

Parameter

Description
class

Description

BC

Local batch

RB

Remote batch

TS

Interactive

DI

Detached interactive

NS

Network supervisor

SS

Subsystem

MA

Maintenance

CT

Communication task

In

Installation-defined class n (0 < n < 3)

The default for SC=class depends on your default service class
assignments (refer to Job Service Classes in section 3).
A L = l e v e l S p e c i fi e s t h e m a x i m u m s e c u r i t y a c c e s s l e v e l y o u r j o b c a n a t t a i n .
Unless changed by your site, the value level can be any one of the
following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
You may not be authorized to use all of these access levels (refer
to the LIMITS command). The default is the lowest access level you
are authorized to use. On an unsecured system, this parameter has
no effect, but the system does ensure that you specify a valid level
name.
T = t i m e l i m i t S p e c i fi e s t h e c e n t r a l p r o c e s s o r j o b s t e p t i m e l i m i t i n s e c o n d s .
Values can range from 1 to 77777. Decimal is the default base.
Octal values from 1 to 77777s (* t0 32767) can be entered if
f o l l o w e d b y a B s u f fi x . T h e d e f a u l t l i m i t i s 6 4 ( 1 0 0 g ) . f D e c i m a l
values from 32767 to 77777 set the time limit at its maximum. The
time limit set by this parameter must be sufficient for completion
of each of the steps in the job (refer to Time Limit Control in
section 3).
C M = m e m o r y S p e c i fi e s t h e m a x i m u m o c t a l fi e l d l e n g t h f o r t h e j o b ( r e f e r t o F i e l d
Length Control in section 3). The system rounds the value to the
next highest multiple of 100g. The default value is the maximum
field length for which you are authorized (refer to the LIMITS
command) or the maximum field length available for user jobs
(dependent on machine size), whichever is smaller. The field length
cannot exceed 3765008- This is the absolute upper limit; however,
your site may choose a lower limit.

TYour site can change this default.

7-24

60459680 E

Parameter

Description
A value containing an 8 or 9 or the suffix D is interpreted as
decimal.

>ff\

EC=xmemory

Specifies the maximum octal number of 1000Q, 2000g, or 40008
word extended memory blocks required by the job. The extended
memory block size is site dependent; the default block size is
lOOOg words.t This extended memory field length cannot exceed the
amount of user extended memory allowed by the installation (refer to
the LIMITS command). Your job must request the extended memory
(refer to the RFL command in section 7) before it can be used. A
value containing an 8 or 9 or the suffix D is interpreted as decimal,

ST=lid

S p e c i fi e s t h e l o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r ( L I D ) o f t h e h o s t t o w h i c h y o u a r e
routing the specified job. The LID must be a three-character
alphanumeric string defined by site personnel. The local host is
the default.
You must have special authorization to use this parameter (refer to
the LIMITS command).

p u n c h m o d e S p e c i fi e s t h e c o n v e r s i o n m o d e f o r c a r d d e c k s . T h i s p a r a m e t e r m u s t
be entered in columns 79 and 80. A 26 indicates that coded cards
are to be converted in 026 mode; 29 indicates cards are converted in
029 mode. This initial keypunch mode can be changed within the job
by a conversion change card (refer to Coded Cards in appendix F)
when reading cards or a ROUTE command when punching cards. If this
parameter is omitted, the installation default keypunch mode is
used. This conversion mode indicator is ineffective for remote
batch jobs entered with mode 4 card readers; it is effective for
remote batch jobs entered with HASP, 2780, and 3780 card readers.
The system issues error messages when parameter specifications exceed validation limits. It
also issues an error message if an extended memory field length is specified when your
central memory validation limit is less than lOOOOg words. Consult installation personnel
for further installation restrictions based on the machine configuration and subsystems used.
Example:
J0BAAA,,1,50000,20.
has the same effect as;
JOBAAA,CM=50000,EC=20,T=1.

tRefer to the UEBS parameter in common deck PPCOM under Installation Parameters in the
NOS 2 Installation Handbook.

60459680 H

7-25

LDI COMMAND
The LDI routine queues one or more jobs for input and optionally enters the job sequence
name (JSN) of each job in the dayfile of the job that entered the LDI command. LDI
initiates a new job each time it encounters an EOF. LDI starts processing at the current
position of the file and continues until an EOI, double EOF, or EOF followed by an empty
record is encountered. The jobs submitted are batch origin type jobs. LDI does no
reformatting of the job file. Therefore, SUBMIT directives (/JOB,/USER,/NOSEQ, and so
forth) are not allowed.
Format:
LDI,FN=lfn,ID=id,OP=OP,DC=dc,UN=un,FM=fm.
or
L D I , l f n , i d , O P, d c , u n , f m .
The parameters in the first format are order-independent. Those in the second format are
order-dependent.
Parameter

Description

FN=lfn

Specifies the name of the file containing the job(s) to be submitted.
LOAD is the default.

ID=id

S p e c i fi e s t h e i d e n t i fi e r o f t h e l o c a l d e v i c e w h i c h w i l l r e c e i v e j o b
output. The identifier id must be octal and in the range 0 through
67B. If you omit this parameter or specify only the keyword ID,
implicit central site routing occurs (refer to Implicit Routing under
the description of the ROUTE command, section 9).
You may not specify ID=id parameter if you specify the UN=un or FM=fm
parameter.

OP=OP

Directs the system to enter the job sequence name (JSN) of each job in
the dayfile of the job that issued the LDI command.

DOdc

Specifies the disposition of output for each job that is queued for
input•
dc

Description

IN Disposes of job output according to the default option for
the job's origin type (refer to Job Origin Types and Service
Classes in section 3).
NO Discards all output.
TO Queues the output with a wait disposition.
UN=un

Specifies the user name of the remote batch user to whom the system
routes each job's output. If you omit this parameter or specify only
the keyword UN, implicit remote routing occurs (refer to Implicit
Routing under the description of the ROUTE command, section 9).
You may not specify this parameter if you specify the ID=id parameter.

7-26

60459680 D

.^^S\

Parameter

Description

F M - f m S p e c i fi e s t h e f a m i l y n a m e o f t h e r e m o t e b a t c h u s e r t o w h o m t h e s y s t e m
routes each job's output. You must have special authorization to
specify an alternate family name (refer to the LIMITS command). If
you omit this parameter or specify only the keyword FM, implicit
remote routing occurs (refer to Implicit Routing under the description
of the ROUTE command, section 9).
You may not specify this parameter if you specify the ID=id parameter.
The number of executing jobs and output files you have within the system cannot exceed your
deferred batch job validation limit (refer to the LIMITS command in this section). If this
limit is reached, no further jobs can be loaded until an existing job completes.
If any of the submitted jobs contain an invalid USER command, the job entering the LDI
command is aborted with no exit processing. If you entered the command interactively, you
are immediately logged off with no dayfile message. The security count for the user name
that entered the LDI command is decremented accordingly.

LENGTH COMMAND
The LENGTH command gives you the current status of one of your local files.
Format:
LENGTH,lfn.
Parameter

Description

l f n N a m e o f a fi l e a s s i g n e d t o t h e j o b .
The information given for the local file includes its length in PRUs, type, and current
status. The same information can be obtained with the ENQUIRE command.

60459680

D

7-27

LIMITS COMMAND
The LIMITS command directs the system to list your validation limits. The LIMITS command
always lists the validation limits associated with the job's current user name. However, if
a job contains more than one USER command, the actual limits associated with the job are a
combination of the limits of the first user name and those of the current user name. You
can use the ENQUIRE(OP=U) command to determine what your actual limits would be in such a
case.
Format:
LIMITS,L=lfn.
Parameter
L=lfn

Description
S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e w h i c h r e c e i v e s t h e v a l i d a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n . T h e
default is OUTPUT.

The validation limits show the extent to which you can use various system resources. The
LIMITS output falls into the following categories:
Resource Limits.
Other Characteristics.
User Permissions.
Network Applications.
Privileged Network Applications.
Local Applications.
Shell Permissions.
Security Permissions.
Security Access Categories.
Security Access Levels.
Service Classes.
Default Service Classes.
If there are no entries for a category, the system suppresses the header for that category.

7-28

60459680 D

/P^N

RESOURCE LIMITS
The system indicates the maximum number of specific system resources you can use. The
following list shows the resources that appear in this category:
Magnetic tape units that may be assigned.
Removable auxiliary devices that may be assigned.
CPU seconds allowed for each job step.
Central memory words allowed.
Extended memory words allowed.
Jobs that can be detached.
Deferred batch files allowed.
Permanent files allowed in your catalog.T
PRUs available for any one indirect file.
PRUs available for any one direct file.
P R U s a v a i l a b l e f o r a l l i n d i r e c t fi l e s .
PRUs available per job.
Messages that may be issued to the dayfiles.
Batch commands that may be processed.
Cards that may be punched per file.
Lines that may be plotted per file.
Lines that may be printed per file.
SRUs allowed per job.
The maximum number of deferred batch jobs does not apply to you if you have system
privileges and debug mode is set on the system display console or if your jobs are of the
system origin type.

tThe value SYSTEM denotes that you do not have a static limit for the number of permanent
fi l e s a l l o w e d i n y o u r c a t a l o g . Whenever you initiate a permanent file operation, the
system assigns a limit, which can vary with the service class of your job.

r

60459680 D

7-29

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
This category lists some general characteristics associated with your user name and your
jobs. The list may include any of the following:
User index.
Default charge number.
Default project number.
User prologue.
System prologue.
Default subsystem for interactive jobs.
Default character set mode for interactive jobs.
Expiration dates for your user passwords.

/piP*N

60459680 D

7-37

y<:*«\

Attributes listed in the ATTRIBUTE column can be listed by name or by mnemonic.
Attribute Name

Mnemonic

Description

HOST

H Indicates that this is the local host (that is, the host
you are logged into).

LINKED

L Indicates that this host is linked to your local host.

STORE FORWARD

S I n d i c a t e s t h a t y d u c a n t r a n s f e r q u e u e d fi l e s t o t h i s
host through an intermediate linked host.

VALIDATION

V Indicates that user validation is performed by the local
host as well as by the destination host. If this
attribute is not listed for your local host, user
validation is performed only by the destination host.

LOOPBACK

B Indicates that the LID is a loopback LID (used for test
purposes).

Entries that can be listed in the RHF, NAM, and SSF columns are as follows:
Entry

S i g n i fi c a n c e

IN

Indicates that the link to the PID is in service. Note that for RHF
networks and NAM X.25 public data networks, an in service (IN) status is
returned whenever the network is in service, without regard to whether the
remote host itself is available. To determine if the remote host is
available, you can attempt a file transfer to that host.

NA

Indicates that the subsystem is not available or that no link exists to this
PID throught this subsystem.

OUT

Indicates that the link to the PID is out of service due to a network fault
condition.

DISABLED

Indicates that the link to the PID has been disabled by the console operator.

7-38

60459680 D

MACHINE COMMAND
Some programs that ran on mainframes other
run on the models 815, 825, 835, 845, and
most likely to run incorrectly on models 815,
with tight instruction-modification loops. The
programs to run correctly on these models.

than models 815, 825, 835, 845, and 855 will not
855 until changes are made in your job. Programs
825, 835, 845, and 855 are COMPASS programs
MACHINE command will enable some of these

Format:
MACHINE,EP=state.
Parameter

Description

E P = s t a t e S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r e x t e n d e d s t a c k p u r g i n g i s s e l e c t e d . E P = O N s e l e c t s
it and EP=OFF disables it.

/H^v

Instruction stack purging is extended by specifying ON and is made normal by specifying OFF
and remains in effect until a subsequent MACHINE command or MODE macro alters it. The
initial status of stack purging is site-selectable. For more information on stack purging,
refer to the MODE macro in Volume 4, Program Interface.
To determine if a program will run correctly on models 815, 825, 835, 845, and 855, run the
job with extended stack purging disabled (EP=OFF). If unexpected results occur, do another
run with stack purging extended (EP=ON). When stack purging is extended, the execution time
of the program may be increased. If unexpected results still occur, recode COMPASS programs
or recompile high-level language programs on models 815, 825, 835, 845, and 855.

MFL COMMAND
The MFL command resets the maximum field length for each subsequent job step.
Format:
MFL,CM=nnnnnn,EC=mmmm.
or
MFL, nnnnnn, mimum.
Parameter

Description

CM=nnnnnn Specifies the maximum central memory field length (octal is assumed
unless decimal is specified by a D suffix or use of the digits 8 or 9).
EC=mmmm Specifies the maximum extended memory field length. The value of nrnimm
is the actual extended core field length divided by lOOOg.
The first format is the order-independent form and the second format is the order-dependent
form.

60459680

D

7-39

The parameter nnnnnn sets an upper boundary for the field length of subsequent job steps.
The value cannot exceed the maximum field length for the job nor can it be less than 1500,
the field length required for the utility (CONTROL) that processes MFL. If extended memory
is assigned for the job, the CM field length cannot be less than 10000. Likewise, the
parameter mmmm sets an upper boundary for the extended memory field length of subsequent job
steps and cannot exceed the maximum field length for the job. If the value 0 (zero) is
entered for CM or extended memory field length, the MFL is set to either the maximum field
length for which you are authorized or the field length specified on the Job command,
whichever is smaller.
The MFL command clears any initial running field length previously established with the RFL
command or the SETRFL macro and allows the system to determine the field length for each
succeeding job step. The system continues to determine field lengths until another RFL
command or SETRFL macro is encountered.

NORERUN COMMAND
The NORERUN command clears the job rerun status.
Format:
NORERUN.
If the NORERUN command has been issued, the job may not be rerun. This may be desirable to
prevent updating of a data base when the job would otherwise be rerun by the operator.
This command is ignored from an interactive origin job.

NOTE COMMAND
The NOTE command creates a file containing lines of data entered as a character string on
the same line as the command.
Format:
NOTE,lfn,NR./linei/iine2/.../linen
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e w h i c h c o n t a i n s t h e s p e c i fi e d l i n e s .
Default is OUTPUT.
N R I n h i b i t s r e w i n d o f l f n . D e f a u l t i s t o r e w i n d t h e fi l e a t t h e
beginning and end of NOTE command execution.
/ S p e c i fi e s t h e d e l i m i t i n g c h a r a c t e r u s e d t o s e p a r a t e t h e i n d i v i d u a l
e n t r i e s t h a t b e c o m e l i n e s i n t h e fi l e . I t c a n b e a n y c h a r a c t e r. I t
m u s t i m m e d i a t e l y follow a period or right parenthesis. Multiple
delimiters generate blank lines.
l i n e i S p e c i fi e s t h e c h a r a c t e r s t r i n g w h i c h c o n s t i t u t e s o n e l i n e o f d a t a i n
lfn.
I f a fi l e c o n t a i n s m o r e l i n e s t h a n c a n b e e n t e r e d w i t h a s i n g l e N O T E c o m m a n d , a s e r i e s o f - ^ ^ v
N O T E c o m m a n d s , e a c h w i t h a n N R , c a n b e u s e d . T h i s s e r i e s s h o u l d b e f o l l o w e d w i t h a PA C K '
command since each NOTE command writes an EOR.
7-40

60459680

D

igpWN,

Example:
The following sequence of commands creates a procedure file (PFILE) that can insert an input
record after any record in an existing master file (LISTFIL).
NOTE/PFILE,NR.+.PROC,INSERT*I,N.+GET,LISTFIL.+COPYBR,LISTFIL,NEWLIST,N.
NOTE/PFILE/NR.+COPYBR,INPUT,NEWLIST.+COPYEI,LISTFIL,NEWLIST.
NOTE,PFILE,NR.+REPLACE,NEWLIST=LISTFIL.
PACK,PFILE.
SAVE,PFILE.
To insert an input record after the second record in LISTFIL, the user includes the
following command in the job that contains the new input record.
BEGIN,INSERT,PFILE,2.

OFFSW COMMAND
The OFFSW command clears the sense switches for reference by one of your jobs.
Format:
O F F S W, s w i t c h ! , s w i t c h 2 s w i t c h ^ j s n .
Parameter

Description

s w i t c h i S p e c i fi e s t h e s w i t c h ( e s ) t o b e c l e a r e d . Yo u m u s t d e n o t e e a c h s w i t c h
switchi by an integer in the range of 1 through 6. If you specify 0
for this parameter, the system clears all sense switches.
j s n S p e c i fi e s t h e j o b s e q u e n c e n a m e ( J S N ) o f t h e j o b w h o s e s e n s e s w i t c h ( e s )
will be changed, jsn is an optional parameter; its default is the JSN
of the current job. The system recognizes the jsn parameter by its
alphabetic characters; therefore, jsn can appear anywhere in the
parameter list and can be omitted without leaving a blank parameter
fi e l d .
Refer to the description of the ONSW command for further information on sense switch
settings.

60459680

D

7-41

•

ONSW COMMAND
The ONSW command sets the sense switches for reference by one of your jobs. The system
stores the sense switch settings in your control point area and copies them to RA at the
beginning of each job step for use by the central program. The sense switch field in the
control point area and the one in RA are updated separately.
Format:
O N S W, s w i t c h ! , s w i t c h 2 , . . . ^ w i t c h n , j s n .
Parameter

Description

s w i t c h . ^ S p e c i fi e s t h e s w i t c h ( e s ) t o b e s e t . Yo u m u s t d e n o t e e a c h s w i t c h
switch^ by an integer in the range of 1 through 6. If you specify 0
for this parameter, the system sets all sense switches.
j s n S p e c i fi e s t h e j o b s e q u e n c e n a m e ( J S N ) o f t h e j o b w h o s e s e n s e s w i t c h e s
will be changed, jsn is an optional parameter, its default is the JSN
of the current job. The system recognizes the jsn parameter by its
alphabetic characters; therefore, jsn can appear anywhere in the
parameter list and can be omitted without leaving a blank parameter
fi e l d .
You can also use the SWITCH command to set the sense switches.

PASSWOR COMMAND
The PASSWOR command changes the passwords associated with your user name. To use PASSWOR,
you must be authorized to change your password. (Refer to the LIMITS command to determine
if you are authorized to change your password.) Your site has the option of using the
password randomization feature. This feature appends a site-determined number (from two to
five) of randomly generated characters to the end of a new password that you select.
If your site uses password randomization, you can enter the PASSWOR command only from an
interactive job. If your site does not use password randomization, the origin type of your ^^
job must match the type of password you want to change. In other words, an interactive ^)
password must be changed from an interactive job, and a batch password must be changed from
a batch or remote batch job.
Format:
PASSWOR,oldpassword,newpassword,XD-expiredate.
or
PASSWOR,oldpassword,newpassword,XT=expireterm.

PASSWOR.

•*5^v

7-42

60459680

D

Parameter

Description

oldpassword

Specifies the old password. This is a required parameter if
password randomization is used.

newpassword

Specifies the new password. The new password must be not more than
seven characters long. Your site determines the minimum length of
p a s s w o rds (4 is the default). This is a required parameter if
password randomization is used.

XD=expiredate

Specifies the expiration date for the
expiredate must be a 6-digit string of
mm, dd are 2-digit year, month, and
The latest date you can specify and
site-determined.

password. The value
the form yymmdd, where yy,
day designators, respectively.
the default expiration date are

You must have special authorization to specify an expiration date
for password (refer to the LIMITS command).
XT=expireterm

S p e c i fi e s t h e l i f e o f t h e p a s s w o r d i n d a y s . I f y o u s p e c i f y 0 , t h e
password expires immediately. If you specify 4095 or *, the
password does not expire. The default expiration term and the
maximum expiration term are site-determined (no site can choose a
value greater than 4095).
You must have special authorization to specify an expiration term
for a password (refer to the LIMITS command).

You cannot specify a new expiration date (using either XD or XT) without also specifying the
oldpassword and newpassword parameters. Also, if you omit both the XD and XT parameters
when you enter the PASSWOR command, the default expiration date is the current date plus the
site-determined expiration term.
The first and second formats can be entered either from batch or interactive jobs. These
formats cannot be used if the password randomization feature is used.
The use of the third format is dependent on whether or not your site uses the password
randomization feature.
For sites that do not use password randomization, the third format can be used for added
security and can be entered from either an interactive or batch job. When entered from an
interactive job, the system prompts you to enter each parameter in an overprinted input
field. When entered from a batch job, the system reads the parameters from a record in file
input. This record must be a single line of the format:
oldpassword,newpassword
For sites using password randomization, the third format is the only valid format, and it
must be entered from an interactive job. In this case, the system prompts you to enter
values and also prompts you to specify whether it is a batch or interactive password.

60459680 D

7-43

PAUSE COMMAND
The PAUSE command sets the pause bit of one of your executing jobs.
Format:
PAUSE,jsn.
Parameter
jsn

Description
Specifies the job sequence name (JSN) of the job whose pause bit you
want
to
set.
*

You must check the status of the pause bit to effectively use this command. The program
tust because
becaZ8^the
b6C^SVhe.PaUSe
bU cleared.
±S Set'You
Similarly,
doeschecks
not proceed
just
pause bit has been
can writethea program
program that
the status

4 ° ! P ^ g ^ r i n t e r f ^ e ) : 3 1 ' 8 * " " " ^ t 0 ^ ^ ^ ( r e f e r C ° ^ « < * "■ - c ^ n ^ l u m ^ 8
sft^i/ffnf0 def^ine/hfher a PAUSE °r G0 command has bee* entered, write a program to
ka w
H
whenever
h e n e v e rthef l T
PAUSE/GO
J j j £ / S ? f command
" " V ? " * "sets/clears
8 y S t e m the
u npause
c o n d i tflag
i ^ a l(bit
l y c12
l e aofr sword
b i t RA)
1 * 3 Henrp
If word

nZ on^T^r8 I'' y°,U ^ Ch6Ck the PaUSe flag' CP" ""«"" ^ Sick "because

ss.«™ com^hL^rL^d:17 on N0S 2*but these programs —det— — *
PROTECT COMMAND
I=!^R°^T COnma?d is used to activate or deactivate preservation of the extended memory
y o u r ^ b i s z ^ r o V d l t t h " ^ T * ? * * " • ' - W a r i l y, t h e e x t e n d e d m e m o r y a s s i g ' d L
steps. completion of a job step. With EC=ON, it is preserved between job
section)/6 aUth°rlZed C° USe the PR0TECT command (refer to the LIMITS command in this

NOTE

For mainframes using unified extended memory (UEM),
the execution of absolute programs or program
overlays always resets UEM to zero regardless of
PROTECT command status.

Format:
PROTECT,EC=state.
or
PROTECT,state.

--^^s.
7-44
60459680 E

Parameter

Description

EC=state Activates or deactivates extended memory preservation. You can specify
two values for state:
state

Description

ON Activates the preservation of memory.
OFF Deactivates the preservation of memory. OFF is the default.

QGET COMMAND
_^ The QGET command assigns a queued file to your job. You must specify the job sequence name
( (JSN) or the user job name (UJN) associated with the queued file. Unless explicitly routed
elsewhere, the file remains with your current job. If a local file already exists with the
same name as the queued file, the QGET operation will be aborted.
Format:
QGET,JSN=j sn,DC=q,UJN=uj n,FN=1fn.
or
QGET,jsn,q,ujn,lfn.
Parameter

Description

JSN=jsn Specifies the four-character, system-generated JSN associated with the
queued file.
DC=q Specifies the disposition of the queued file. WT is the default.
q
PR
PU
PL
WT

Description
Print
Punch
Plot
Wait

UJN=ujn Specifies the UJN associated with the queued file.
FN=lfn Specifies the local file name for the queued file. If specified, the
JSN is the default local file name. Otherwise, the default is the UJN.
If you specify neither a JSN nor a UJN or specify a UJN associated with two queued files
with the same disposition, a fatal system error occurs.

0%B>i.

60459680

E

7_45

QUEUE7 COMMAND
The QUEUE7 command allows you to examine the system batch queues in linked SCOPE 2 systems.
The QUEUE7 command has two formats:
QUEUE7,ID=pid,L=lfn,p1,P2,p3,p4.
or
QUEUE7,help.
Parameter

Description

ID=pid

Specifies the physical identifier (PID) of the SCOPE 2 mainframe to be
searched. If no PID is specified, all mainframes are searched. This
parameter may be specified with the parameter name (ID) and equal sien
omitted.
n
6

L=lfn

Specifies the name of the file to receive the QUEUE7 output. The
default is OUTPUT.

Pi

Specifies the SCOPE 2 queues (input, output, execute, or punch) to be
d i s p l a y e d . Va l i d o p t i o n s f o r P l a r e l i s t e d b e l o w. F r o m o n e t o f o u r
options can be specified. The default is E.

Ei

Description

A

Lists jobs found in all queues (E, I, 0, and P).

E

Execute queue; lists the SCOPE 2 R display. Figure 7-1
provides an example of an execute queue listing.
Input queue; lists the SCOPE 2 R display for input. Figure
7-2 provides an example of an input queue listing.
Output queue; lists the SCOPE 2 H display for output.
Figure 7-3 provides an example of an output queue listing.
Punch queue; lists the SCOPE 2 H display for punch output.
Punch queue listings are the same as output queue listings,
as shown in figure 7-3.

7-46

60459680 D

JIP^Ny

Parameter
help

Description
Displays the command format or the physical identifiers for all
available SCOPE 2 mainframes. The following are valid entries for the
help parameter.
Description

help

I D D i s p l a y s p h y s i c a l i d e n t i fi e r s f o r a l l S C O P E 2 m a i n f r a m e s i n
the network.
SYNTAX Displays the QUEUE7 command format,
or
S

/queue7,e
JOBS
6/

52/

70

R(Z),1.

ORD ACTION
ID
TYPE

JOB BG
JOBNAME PRTY JOB TIME TIME LCM
O R I G I N U S E D L E F T I N U S E STAT
FIRST ACTION MESSAGE/LAST DAYFILE MESSAGE

3 M06/**
REPONSE

0
7
26
JOBXXXZ 4000 M06/**
PAUSE. DO NOT GIVE A GO. TESTING ON 606

PA US

4 M06/**
RESPONSE

0
7
26
JOBXXXZ 4000 M06/**
PAUSE. DO NOT GIVE A GO. TESTING ON 606

PA US

5 M06/**
RESPONSE

0
7
26
JOBXXXZ 4000 M06/**
TESTING ON 606
PAUSE. DO NOT GIVE A GO.

PA US

QUEUE7 COMPLETE

Figure 7-1. QUEUE7 Execute Queue Sample Listing
Column headers for the QUEUE7 execute queue listing have the following meanings:
Header

Description

ORD

The job ordinal.

ACTION ID

T h e s t a t i o n / t e r m i n a l i d e n t i fi e r o f t h e t e r m i n a l f r o m w h i c h t h e j o b e x p e c t s
a response; present only when the job requires a response.

JOBNAME

Job name of the executing job.

PRTY

Priority of the job; must be in the range of 0 to 7777g.

JOB ORIGIN

S t a t i o n / t e r m i n a l i d e n t i fi e r o f t h e t e r m i n a l f r o m w h i c h t h e j o b w a s
submitted.

TIME USED

CPU seconds used by the job.

TIME LEFT

CPU seconds remaining for execution.

LCM IN USE

Number of LCM buffers in use by the job.

JOB STAT

Current processing state of the job.

BG

Indicates that the job will be scheduled as a background priority job.

60459680 D

7-47 |

FIRST ACTION MESSAGE/
LAST DAYFILE MESSAGE
If there are action messages for the job, the message is the first action
message; otherwise, the message is the last dayfile message.
ACTION Indicates that the above message requests an operator
action such as a tape mount.
CFO RESP Indicates that the above message requests the operator to
respond with a CFO type entry.
RESPONSE Indicates that the above message requests the operator to
respond with a command such as GO or DROP.

/queue7,i
SFTS 10/ 172/

172 H(Z),I,103.

ORD FILENAME

FILE PRTY DEVICE -REQUIREMENTS TIME DEPEND BG
O R I G I N M T N T YD YL SM SN SP LIMIT

107Z JOBXXXZ
110Z JOBXXXZ

M06/** 1002 0 0
M06/** 1002 0 0

STAT ION M06
INPUT
2
OUTPUT
1
PUNCH
0

M02 MFF M05 MSD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0

10
10

MFU UKWN TOT
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
0

QUEUE7 COMPLETE

Figure 7-2. QUEUE7 Input Queue Sample Listing

7-48

60459680 D

J$$!0?\

Column headers for the QUEUE7 input queue listing have the following meanings:
O R D I n p u t q u e u e s u f fi x e d w i t h t h e l a s t l e t t e r o f t h e S C O P E 2 p h y s i c a l
i d e n t i fi e r .
FILENAME File name of the input job as specified on the job card.
FILE ORIGIN Identifier of the station/terminal from which the job was submitted.
PRTY File priority; must be in the range from 0 to 7777g.
DEVICE- The number of magnetic tape or disk devices assigned to the job.
REQUIREMENTS
TIME LIMIT Job time limit as specified on the job card.
D E P E N D A t w o - c h a r a c t e r d e p e n d e n c y i d e n t i fi e r a s s p e c i fi e d o n t h e j o b c a r d .
BG Indicates that the job will be scheduled as a background priority job,

/queue7,o
SFTS 10/ 172/
ORD FILENAME
/fPN.

111Z JOBXXXZ
STATION M06
INPUT
2
OUTPUT 1
PUNCH
0

172 H(Z) ,0,103
FILE PRTY
DESTIN
M06/** 4003
M02 MFF M05
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

DISP FORM
CODE CODE

FILE
SIZE

FILE IN
TRANSFER

PR
MSD MFU UKWN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

TOT
2
1
0

QUEUE7 COMPLETE

Figure 7-3. QUEUE7 Output Queue Sample Listing

60459680 D

7-49

Column headers for the QUEUE7 output queue listing have the following meanings:
O R D O u t p u t q u e u e o r d i n a l s u f fi x e d w i t h t h e l a s t l e t t e r o f t h e S C O P E 2 p h y s i c a l
i d e n t i fi e r .
FILENAME File name of the output file as specified on the job card.
F I L E D E S T I N S t a t i o n / t e r m i n a l i d e n t i fi e r o f t h e t e r m i n a l t o w h i c h t h e o u t p u t fi l e i s t o
be routed.
PRTY File priority; must be in the range from 0 to 7777g.
DISP CODE File disposition code.
FORM CODE Forms code of the file.
FILE SIZE File length in PRUs.
F I L E I N I n d i c a t e s w h e t h e r o r n o t t h e fi l e i s c u r r e n t l y b e i n g t r a n s f e r r e d t o a
TRANSFER station; possible values are Y for yes, and N for no.

RERUN COMMAND
The RERUN command sets job rerun status.
Format:
RERUN.
If the RERUN command has been issued, the operator can rerun the job if necessary. This
command is ignored from a interactive origin job.

RESOURC COMMAND
I The RESOURC command is required in any job that uses more than one tape or removable
auxiliary pack concurrently; it prevents deadlocks with other jobs which may need the same
resources. You do not need to use a RESOURC command if you have only one multivolume tape
file or multipack disk file because the system treats each as only one resource unit.
packs are always available to all users.
I Nonremovable auxiliary packs should not be specified on the RESOURC command; non removable

/<^^\
7-50

60459680

F

Format:
RESOURC,rt1=u1/levelx,rt 2=u2/level2 rtn=u=n/leveln.
Parameter
rt^

Description

Resource

type:

LO 200-cpi, seven-track magnetic tape unit
HI 556-cpi, seven-track magnetic tape unit
HY 800-cpi, seven-track magnetic tape unit
HD 800-cpi, nine-track magnetic tape unit
PE 1600-cpi, nine-track magnetic tape unit
GE 6250-cpi, nine-track magnetic tape unit
MT t Seven-track magnetic tape unit
NTt Nine-track magnetic tape unit (800/1600-cpi)
DBm 885-42 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track; Km<3)
DCm 895 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track; lv

7-60

60459680 F

SETJAL COMMAND
The SETJAL command changes the security access level of the current job. Initially, your
job has the lowest possible access level that is valid for your job (ENQUIRE,B returns this
information). Refer to Security Features in Section 3 for a detailed discussion of access
levels•
Format:
SETJAL,AL=level.
Parameter

Description

A L = l e v e l S p e c i fi e s t h e s e c u r i t y a c c e s s l e v e l y o u w a n t a s s i g n e d t o t h e j o b .
Unless changed by your site, level can be one of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
On a secured system, the access level you specify must be valid for the job. In addition,
to lower the access level of your job, you must be authorized to do so (refer to the LIMITS
command).
On an unsecured system, the command has no effect. The system does, however, check for
v a l i d p a r a m e t e r s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .

60459680 D

7-61 |

SETJOB COMMAND
The SETJOB command changes some of the current job's attributes. You can change the user
job name (UJN), can redirect the disposition of output if the job is not interactive or
becomes a detached interactive job, and can change the job processing option for job
termination or job suspension.
The SETJOB command does not take effect until the job terminates or is suspended. If you
specify more than one SETJOB command, the last one takes precedence.
Format:
SETJOB,UJN=ujn,DC=dc,OP=op.
or
SETJOB,ujn ,dc ,op,
Parameter

Description

UJN=ujn

Changes the job's default UJN to ujn. A UJN must be seven or less
alphanumeric characters. For interactive jobs, the default is the
user index hash (refer to the ENQUIRE command). Otherwise, the
default is the UJN specified on the Job command.

DC=dc

Specifies the disposition for output upon job termination. The
default for all jobs is DF. You cannot change the output disposition
for an interactive job unless the job terminates as a detached
interactive job.
dc

Description

TO Queues output with a wait disposition.
NO Discards output.
DF Specifies default output processing. The output disposition
depends on the job's origin type (refer to File Types in
section 2). No output is queued for interactive jobs.
OP=op

Specifies the job processing option the system exercises upon detached
interactive job when it is no longer executing. Not applicable to
noninteractive jobs. The default is SU.
op

Description

SU The job remains in a suspended state until recovered or
timed out (refer to the RECOVER command).
TJ The system terminates the job.
Job attributes associated with omitted parameters remain unchanged.

7-62

60459680 D

SETJSL COMMAND
The SETJSL command sets the system resource unit (SRU) limit for each subsequent job step
(refer to SRU Limit Control in section 3). Except for interactive jobs, the default job
step SRU limit (set during CHARGE or USER command processing) is the smaller of the user
name and the account validation limits (refer to the LIMITS and ENQUIRE commands). For
interactive jobs, the default job step limit is 64 SRUs. From an interactive job, you can
increment your job step SRU limit to complete job step execution as described in the
following paragraphs.
Format:
SETJSL,s.
Parameter

Description

s Maximum number of SRUs allowed for job step execution. Although the
default base is decimal, octal values can be specified by a B suffix on
the value. The value s must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to
the current account block SRU limit, and the SRU limit associated with
your user name. Exceptions to this rule are the asterisk (*) and values
greater than 32760 (77770B). These values set the job step SRU limit at
the validation limit if the account block SRU limit is set at the
validation limit.
The system issues an error message when the job step SRU limit is reached. A job step
w i t h i n a b a t c h j o b i s t h e n t e r m i n a te d (re fe r to Exi t Pro ce ssi n g i n se cti o n 5 ). In
interactive jobs, you can increment the SRU limit after receiving the SRU limit message or
terminate the job. If the job is suspended because a job step or the job itself exceeded
its SRU limit, the message
*SRU LIMIT*
ENTER S TO CONTINUE OR STOP TO END JOB STEP.
TYPED AHEAD INPUT MUST BE REENTERED.
is issued. You can enter one of the following:
Entry

Description
Increases the SRU limit by 64 units. Job execution continues. The
64-unit increment can be changed by your site.

S,nnnnn

Increases the SRU limit by nnnnn decimal units. Job execution
continues. You can enter octal units by specifying a B after the octal
number.

S,;

Increases the SRU limit to your maximum. Job execution continues.

STOP

Terminates the job step. Subsequent commands, if any, are not processed,

Any increase to the SRU limit through either S or S,nnnn is in effect only for the current
job step. When the job step terminates, the account block SRU limit and job step SRU limit
revert to their original values, set by default or by the SETASL and SETJSL commands,
respectively. Entering S,* in response to an SRU LIMIT message could cause the interactive
session in progress to exceed the account block SRU limit set by the SETASL command or by
default. The system then issues an SRU LIMIT message after a job step has begun. To remedy
this situation, use the SETASL command to raise the account block SRU limit above the
current number of accumulated SRUs for the interactive session.

60459680 H

7-63

^%\

The account block SRU limit must be raised before the job step SRU limit can be raised.
Refer to the SETASL command in this section. When a limit occurs, any typed ahead input
will be discarded since it would be processed as a response to the limit message.

SETPR COMMAND
The SETPR command decreases the CPU priority of a job. A user job cannot increase its
p r i o r i t y.
SETPR,p.
Parameter
p

Description

S p e c i fi e s

the

p r i o r i t y,

1

<

p

<

70g.

"^)

Upon job initiation, a job is assigned the maximum priority allowed for its service class.
( T h e i n s t a l l a t i o n d e fi n e s t h e s e p r i o r i t y v a l u e s . ) I f a j o b ' s C P U p r i o r i t y i s l o w e r t h a n
that of other jobs, the job is assigned control of the CPU only when jobs of a higher
priority do not need it.

SETTL COMMAND
The SETTL command sets the CPU time limit for each subsequent job step. Each user name is ^*^\
validated for a maximum job step time limit (refer to the LIMITS and ENQUIRE commands).
When you do not specify a time limit, the system sets the limit at 64 CPU seconds.t
Interactive jobs can increment their job step time limit to complete job step execution
(refer to Section 8).
Format:
SETTL,t.
Parameter

Description

t Maximum number of CPU seconds allowed for job step execution. Although
the default base is decimal, octal values can be specified by a B suffix
on the value.
t must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to your validated time
limit. Exceptions to this rule are the asterisk (*) and values greater
than 32760 (77770B). These values set the job step time limit at your
validated time limit.
To set a time limit for job step execution on one CPU of a dual-processor machine, you must
include a USECPU command in the job. Otherwise, the time limit is set for the cumulative
job step execution time on both CPUs.
The system issues an error message when the job step time limit is reached. A job step
within a batch job is then terminated (refer to Exit Processing in section 5). In
interactive jobs, you can increment the time limit after receiving the time limit message or
terminate job.
TYour site can change this default.

I

7-64

60459680

H

If the job is suspended because a job step exceeded its time limit, the message:
♦TIME LIMIT*
ENTER T TO CONTINUE OR STOP TO END JOB STEP.
TYPED AHEAD INPUT MUST BE REENTERED.
is issued and you can enter one of the following:
Entry

Description

T Increases the central processor time limit by 64 CPU seconds. Job
execution continues. The 64 CPU second increment can be changed by your
site.
T, n n n n n I n c r e a s e s t h e c e n t r a l p r o c e s s o r t i m e l i m i t b y n n n n n d e c i m a l s e c o n d s .
Job execution continues. You can enter octal seconds by specifying a B
after the number.
T»* Increases the central processor time limit to your maximum. Job
execution continues.
Causes the job to go through normal abort procedures (for example, EXIT
processing which can be useful when using procedure files).
STOP

Terminates the job step. Subsequent commands, if any, are not processed.

Any increase to the central processor time limit through either T or T,nnnn is in effect
only for the current job step. When the job step terminates, the central processor time
limit reverts to its original value, previously set by default or by the SETTL command.
When a limit occurs, any typed ahead input will be discarded since it would be processed as
a response to the limit message.
In the following example, a program exceeds its allocated time limit. The user enters T to
increase the time limit and the program then runs to completion.
List

00100
00110
00120
00130
00140
00150

PROGRAM T
DO 6 1=1,2500
DO 6 J=1,4000

A=1

6 CONTINUE

END

READY.
s e t t l ,,10
READY.

run

*TIME LIMIT*
ENTER T TO CONTINUE OR STOP TO END JOB STEP.
TYPED AHEAD INPUT MUST BE REENTERED.
t
SRU 66.835 UNTS.
RUN COMPLETE.
60459680

H

7-65

SHELL COMMAND
The SHELL command enables or disables shell program processing of system commands.
A shell program is a user-written program (usually in COMPASS) which redefines the set of
commands that can be entered by a user. A shell program can:
• Limit a user to a subset of NOS commands; the shell program can define which NOS
commands the user can or cannot enter.
• Redefine the effects of a NOS command. A shell program redefines a particular
command by defining an alternate command or series of commands to be executed
whenever the user enters the original command. For example, you could redefine a
user's ATTACH command to execute both an ATTACH and a LIBRARY command for the
specified file, thus making the file a global library.
• Define user-written commands that are not a part of the standard NOS command set.
In effect, a shell program creates a user-defined subsystem that can be imposed on
application users by user name. To enable a shell program for a user name, you can place
the SHELL command in the user's prologue. You can also associate a shell program with a
user name using the MODVAL utility. (MODVAL is described in the N0S2 Administration
Handbook.)
For more information on how to write a shell program, refer to the NOS Reference Set,
Volume 4, Program Interface.
Format:
SHELL.
or
SHELL,spn.
or
SHELL,spn,Pl,...,p7.
Parameter

^
Description

spn Specifies the shell program name to be executed.
Pi Specifies parameters to control the loading and execution of the shell
program.
pl

Description

E Clears controls if there are errors during the loading of
the shell program. If you do not specify E and such errors
occur, your job is aborted with no EXIT processing.
A Clears controls if the shell program aborts.
L Allows local file loading of the shell program. When
l o a d i n g t h e p r o g r a m f r o m a l o c a l fi l e , t h e p r o g r a m m u s t b e ^
stored in ABS-type records. (Refer to section 15 for a ^^%
description of record types.)
7-66

60459680 D

/i|f«£-\

G Allows global library load of the shell program.
S Allows system library load of the shell program.
T S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e s y s t e m m o n i t o r c o m m a n d s d i r e c t l y f r o m t h e
terminal.
B S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e s y s t e m m o n i t o r c o m m a n d s o u t s i d e
procedures.
C S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e s y s t e m m o n i t o r c o m m a n d s i n s i d e p r o c e d u r e s .
T h e fi r s t f o r m a t d i s a b l e s s h e l l c o n t r o l .
The second format, specifying only the shell program name, sets the default for pi as A,
S, and B.
The last format specifies the extent of shell program control. To get your shell program
loaded, you must specify at least one of the parameters L, G, or S. To enable any type of
command monitoring, you must specify at least one of the parameters T, B, or C.
Example:
/sheLL,rmsheLl
SHELL,RMSHELL.
/rewind,*
9 FILES PROCESSED,
/ascii
UNAUTHORIZED COMMAND.
In this example, RMSHELL is a shell program that allows execution of REWIND but not ASCII.
The SHELL command causes the system to perform a system library load of RMSHELL, to enable
shell control, to clear controls if the shell program aborts, and to monitor commands
outside procedures.
The system passes REWIND,* to RMSHELL for examination. Since it is part of the subset of
allowed system commands, RMSHELL passes control to the system to process that command
exactly as it is. However, when the system passes the ASCII command to RMSHELL, an
UNAUTHORIZED COMMAND message is issued, and the command is not passed back to the system.

STIME COMMAND
The STIME command requests that the accumulated SRU value for the job be Issued to the job's
d a y fi l e .
Format:
STIME.
Dayfile message format:
STIME nnnnnn.nnn UNTS.

60459680

D

7-67

SUBMIT COMMAND
The SUBMIT command places a user-supplied job file into the input queue as a separate job.
SUBMIT can reformat the file according to directives within the file. Refer to Job Names in
section 3 for a description of the names associated with the submitted job.
Format:
SUBMIT,Ifn,q,NR.c
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e s u b m i t t e d t o t h e s y s t e m f o r
processing as a batch job. The first record of the file must be in
6 - b i t d i s p l a y c o d e . T h e d e f a u l t i s t h e j o b ' s p r i m a r y fi l e .
q Specifies disposition of job output (OUTPUT, PUNCH, PUNCHB, and P8) as
follows:
BC or B Use the default processing for local batch jobs to
dispose of job output at the central site.
N O o r N D i s c a r d j o b o u t p u t a t j o b t e r m i n a t i o n u n l e s s t h e fi l e s
have been explicitly routed (default value for
i n t e r a c t i v e o r i g i n j o b s ) . T h e d a y fi l e i s n o t w r i t t e n t o
file OUTPUT.
RB=un or Route job output to the remote batch or interactive
E = u n u s e r s p e c i fi e d b y t h e u s e r n a m e u n . T h e d e f a u l t f o r u n
is the user name associated with the submitting job.
T O J o b o u t p u t ( i n c l u d i n g t h e d a y fi l e ) i s q u e u e d w i t h a w a i t
disposition.
N R N o r e w i n d o p t i o n ; t h e s u b m i t fi l e a n d t h e fi l e s p e c i fi e d o n a c R E A D
r e fo r m a tti n g d i r e c ti v e are not rewound before or after processing. If
NR is omitted, the files are rewound before, but not after processing.
c P r e fi x c h a r a c t e r u s e d t o i d e n t i f y r e f o r m a t t i n g d i r e c t i v e s i n t h e fi l e t o
be submitted (lfn). If omitted, the system assumes c is /.
The number of deferred batch (LDI, SUBMIT, and ROUTE) jobs that you can have in the system
concurrently depends on your validation (refer to the LIMITS command in this section). If
this limit is exceeded, an error message is issued to the dayfile, and the SUBMIT command is
not processed.
For SUBMIT to process reformatting directives, the first line of the submit file must be a
cJOB directive. Each line preceded by a prefix character is recognized as a reformatting
directive. The prefix character is specified on the SUBMIT command (/ by default).
Throughout this description, the letter c, preceding a directive, denotes the prefix
character. Reformatting directives may be interspersed throughout the submit file as long
as transparent submit mode is not in effect. Transparent submit mode is selected by the
cTRANS directive and requires you to observe special rules when inserting subsequent
directives into the file (refer to description of TRANS and NOTRANS directives).

7"68

60459680

E

The system does not process reformatting directives unless the first line of the submit file
contains the cJOB directive. Other directives can follow the cJOB directive (that is, they
can precede the job and/or USER commands), but the first two commands following the cJOB
directive must be a Job command and a USER command, respectively. The USER command can be
inserted in the form of a cUSER directive. For example, the following sequences of lines
are both valid:
lnj

cJOB

ln2

ujn,parameters.

ln^ USER,username,password, (or cUSER)
or
lnj

cJOB

ln2

cNOSEQ

ln3

ujn,parameters.

ln4

USER,username,password, (or cUSER)

lnj, ln2, ln3, and ln^ are optional line numbers.
You can include line numbers on the submit file and specify which line numbers are to be
removed during reformatting with the cSEQ and cNOSEQ directives. This is especially useful
if the submit file contains a BASIC program where line numbers are a requirement of the
language. If line numbers are included in a submit file, the file must begin with a cJOB
directive.
The reformatting directives available are described as follows:
Directive
cJOB

Description
Indicates that the submit file is to be reformatted and selects the
following default reformatting directives. The default directives
r e m a i n i n e ff e c t u n t i l s p e c i fi e d o t h e r w i s e .
cNOTRANS (disabled by cTRANS)
cSEQ (disabled by cNOSEQ)
c PA C K ( d i s a b l e d b y c N O PA C K )
T h e c J O B d i r e c t i v e m u s t b e t h e fi r s t l i n e o f t h e s u b m i t fi l e . I f
o m i t t e d , t h e fi l e i s n o t r e f o r m a t t e d . I f l i n e n u m b e r s a r e i n c l u d e d i n a
submit file, the file must begin with a cJOB directive.

cUSER

Inserts a USER command identical to that of the submitting job during
reformatting. SUBMIT does not insert a password in the new USER
command. Hence, you cannot use the cUSER directive when routing jobs to
remote hosts (ST=lid parameter of the Job command) that do not support
NOS 2 security features. Further, you can only use this directive to
create the first USER command in a job.

cCHARGE

Inserts a CHARGE command that is identical to the CHARGE command
currently in effect for the submitting job. If no CHARGE command is in
e ff e c t f o r t h e s u b m i t t i n g j o b , t h i s d i r e c t i v e h a s n o e ff e c t o n t h e
SUBMIT file.

60459680 E

7-69

Directive

Description

cEOR Indicates that an end-of-record mark is to be placed at this point in
t h e s u b m i t fi l e d u r i n g r e f o r m a t t i n g .
c E O F I n d i c a t e s t h a t a n e n d - o f - fi l e m a r k i s t o b e p l a c e d a t t h i s p o i n t i n
t h e s u b m i t fi l e d u r i n g r e f o r m a t t i n g .
cSEQ Indicates that the following lines may be preceded by line numbers and
requests that they be removed (default value).
cNOSEQ Reverses the effect of the cSEQ directive. No attempt is made to
remove leading line numbers from subsequent lines. This is especially
useful when line numbers are required (such as in a BASIC program).
c P A C K R e q u e s t s t h a t a l l s u c c e e d i n g e n d - o f - r e c o r d a n d e n d - o f - fi l e m a r k s b e ^
removed (default value). This directive applies only to internal EOR
and EOF marks that currently exist. The cEOR and cEOF reformatting
d i r e c t i v e s a r e n o t a ff e c t e d .
c N O PA C K R e v e r s e s t h e e f f e c t o f t h e c PA C K d i r e c t i v e . R e q u e s t s t h e s y s t e m n o t
to discard succeeding internal end-of-record and end-of-file marks
that currently exist.
cTRANS Requests transparent submit mode. In transparent
ignores reformatting directives until an EOR or
encountered. The EOR or EOF mark cannot
cEOR or cEOF directive. SUBMIT performs the
transparent submit mode processing.

submit mode, SUBMIT
EOF mark is
be a mark to be created by a ^^^
following procedure for

1. Read cTRANS directive.
2. Check if the next line is a reformatting directive. If it is not,
skip steps 3 and 4.
3. Process reformatting directive. If it is a cNOTRANS directive,
end transparent submit mode processing.
4.

Return

to

step

2.

)

5. Select transparent submit mode and read lines until an internal
EOR or EOF mark is encountered.
6. If the cPACK directive is in effect, remove the EOR or EOF mark.
7. Return to step 2.

7-70

60459680

G

Directive

Description
The cTRANS directive is typically used in conjunction with the cREAD
directive. The cREAD directive copies the contents of an existing
fi l e i n t o t h e s u b m i t fi l e a t t h e l o c a t i o n o f t h e c R E A D d i r e c t i v e .
Because the file is read in transparent submit mode, no check for
reformatting directives is attempted until an internal EOR or EOF is
encountered. The cREAD directive must follow the cTRANS directive and
must be located before the first succeeding line that is not a
reformatting directive. If not, transparent submit mode is selected
before the cREAD directive is encountered and the cREAD is ignored.
The cSEQ or cNOSEQ directive in effect before transparent submit mode
was selected has no effect upon the submit file or the file being read
(cREAD) while transparent submit mode is in effect. However, the
cPACK or cNOPACK directive in effect before transparent submit mode
w a s s e l e c t e d r e m a i n s i n e ff e c t a f t e r i t i s s e l e c t e d .

cNOTRANS

Reverses the effect of the cTRANS directive and informs the system
t h a t t h e s u b m i t fi l e i s t o b e e x a m i n e d o n a l i n e - b y - l i n e b a s i s . A l l
directives encountered in the submit file while the cNOTRANS directive
is in effect are processed. This directive is initially selected by
default and remains in effect until a cTRANS directive is encountered
i n t h e s u b m i t fi l e .
B e c a r e f u l i n p l a c i n g t h i s d i r e c t i v e i n t h e s u b m i t fi l e . I f
transparent submit mode is selected, this directive can possibly be
ignored unless it immediately follows either a cREAD directive or an
internal EOR or EOF mark.

/SP^N

cREAD.lfn

Requests that the system read the contents of the specified file, lfn,
and insert that file in place of the cREAD directive in the submit
file, during reformatting. Reading terminates when an EOF or EOI is
e n c o u n t e r e d o n l f n . I f t h e fi l e t o b e r e a d i s n o t c u r r e n t l y l o c a l t o
the job, the system automatically attempts a GET and then an ATTACH on
t h e fi l e . I f l f n i s n o t s p e c i fi e d i n t h e d i r e c t i v e , TA P E 1 i s
a s s u m e d . I f t h e fi l e s p e c i fi e d c a n n o t b e f o u n d o r t h e r e a d fi l e i s
found to be busy (direct access files only), the job is terminated.
The file specified by lfn in the cREAD directive is automatically
rewound before the read operation unless the NR parameter is specified
on the SUBMIT command. In this case, the rewind directive must
precede the cREAD directive in the submit file if it is desired to
rewind file lfn before the read operation begins. The system returns
all files specified in cREAD directives before completion of the job.
I f t h e c PA C K d i r e c t i v e
internal EOR marks are
effect, all internal EOR
proper position during

60459680 D

i s i n e ff e c t w h e n t h e fi l e l f n i s r e a d , a l l
removed. If the cNOPACK directive is in
marks are read into the submit file in the
reformatting.

7-71 |

Directive

Description
Unless transparent submit mode is in effect when file lfn is read,
e a c h l i n e o f t h a t fi l e i s a l s o c h e c k e d f o r a r e f o r m a t t i n g d i r e c t i v e .
Any directives contained in the file, except another cREAD, are
processed. The cREAD directive cannot be nested. In addition, any
directives in effect before the cREAD directive is processed remain in
effect for the file being read, unless transparent submit mode is
selected. Then, only the cPACK or cNOPACK directive remains in effect
f o r t h e fi l e b e i n g r e a d . M o r e o v e r, o n l y t h o s e d i r e c t i v e s t h a t
immediately follow an internal EOR in the file being read are
processed.
If the file to be read is a binary file, it is recommended that the
cTRANS directive be used to ensure that binary data is not mistaken
for a reformatting directive. The cTRANS directive should immediately
precede the cREAD directive in the submit file, if used.

c R E W I N D , l f n R e q u e s t s t h a t t h e s y s t e m r e w i n d fi l e l f n t o t h e b e g i n n i n g - o f i n f o r m a t i o n ( B O I ) . I f l f n i s n o t s u p p l i e d , TA P E 1 i s a s s u m e d . T h i s
directive is required only if the NR parameter is included in the
SUBMIT command. Otherwise, file lfn is automatically rewound.
This directive is used in conjunction with the cREAD directive. Thus,
if it is desired to rewind a file before the read operation begins,
this directive must precede the cREAD directive in the submit file.
cjEC=c2

I n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r i s t o b e c h a n g e d f r o m
(current prefix character) to c2 (new prefix character). The new
prefix character code is used to recognize all subsequent reformatting
directives until further changed.

c^

j

Input lines must not exceed 150 6-bit characters. SUBMIT processes the first 80 characters
as the command. The remaining 70 characters are discarded and may contain a sequence number
or comments. If a line exceeds 150 characters, the results are unpredictable.
If the submitted job contains an invalid USER command, the job entering the SUBMIT command
i s a b o r t e d . T h i s c o n s t i t u t e s a s e c u r i t y c o n fl i c t ( r e f e r t o t h e U S E R c o m m a n d l a t e r i n t h i s . ^ s s v
section). The security count for the user name that entered the SUBMIT command is ^^)
decremented. If this results in a security count of zero, the job is immediately terminated
with no EXIT processing (you are logged out if the job is interactive). For further
information concerning use of the SUBMIT command from an interactive terminal, refer to
Volume 2, Guide to System Usage.
Consult your job's dayfile to determine the cause of any errors that occurred during job
processing. The dayfile for the submitted job is disposed according to the disposition
parameter on the SUBMIT command.
When you submit a batch job from an interactive job, all output is dropped (unless requested
oth e r w i s e b y th e d i s p o s i ti o n p a r a m e te r ). This includes the dayfile output. Therefore, ma ke
provisions within your job to save the contents of the dayfile if a processing error
occurs. You can do this by including the following commands at the end of the command
record.
EXIT.
- D AY F I L E , l f n .
REPLACE,lfn.

7-72

60459680

D

SWITCH COMMAND
The SWITCH command sets the sense switches for reference by one of your programs.
Format:
SWITCH,switchj,switch2,...,switchn,jsn.
Parameter

Description

s w i t c h ^ S p e c i fi e s t h e s w i t c h ( e s ) t o b e s e t . Yo u m u s t d e n o t e e a c h s w i t c h
switch^ by an integer in the range of 1 through 6. If you specify 0
for this parameter, the system sets all sense switches.
j s n S p e c i fi e s t h e j o b s e q u e n c e n a m e ( J S N ) o f t h e j o b w h o s e s e n s e s w i t c h e s
w i l l b e c h a n g e d , j s n i s a n o p t i o n a l p a r a m e t e r, i t s d e f a u l t i s t h e
current job. The system recognizes the jsn parameter by its alphabetic
characters; therefore, jsn can appear anywhere in the parameter list and
can be omitted without leaving a blank parameter field.

UPROC COMMAND
The UPROC command specifies a user prologue, a program the system executes each time you
start a job.
Format:
UPROC,FN=pfile.

UPROC,pfile.
Parameter

Description

p fi l e O n e o f y o u r p e r m a n e n t fi l e s t h a t c o n t a i n s t h e d e s i r e d p r o l o g u e . I f
pfile contains more than one procedure, the system executes only the
fi r s t o n e . I f y o u o m i t t h e F N = p fi l e p a r a m e t e r o r g i v e p fi l e t h e v a l u e
of zero, the system will no longer execute a user prologue.
The system executes your user prologue only after it processes your user validation and
charge information but before it initiates job recovery processing. Depending on the length
and nature of your user prologue, you may want to initiate recovery processing before your
user prologue ends. For example, if your user prologue aborts, the system does not initiate
recovery processing. To do this, place the RECOVER command within your user prologue (refer
to section 8 for the RECOVER command and section 4 for the writing of procedures).

60459680 H

7-73

USECPU COMMAND
The USECPU command specifies which central processor is to be used when more than one is
available for processing.
Format:
USECPU,n.
Parameter

Description

n Specifies which central processor to use.
Jft

Description

0 U s e e i t h e r c e n t r a l p r o c e s s o r.
1 Use CPU 0.
2 Use CPU 1.
The USECPU command may be used only when the system is running on a model 72-2x, 73-2x,
74-2x, 174, 720-2, 730-2, 6500, 6700, 830-2, 865-2, or 875-2. On a model 74-2x or 6700, CPU
0 is the parallel processor, and CPU 1 is the serial processor. On the other systems, both
CPUs are serial processors. This command is ignored on single CPU machines.

USER COMMAND
The system uses the parameters on the USER command to determine if you are an authorized
user, which resources you are validated to.use, and the extent (limits) to which you may use
those resources.
No commands are allowed between the Job and USER commands in noninteractive jobs. If this
is attempted, the first command is interpreted as an invalid USER command, and the submitting
job is aborted with appropriate messages to the dayfile. The submitted job is dropped.
Format:
USER,username,password,familyname.
Parameter

Description

username Specifies a one- to seven-character alphanumeric user name.
password

Specifies an alphanumeric password. Its maximum length is seven
characters; its minimum length is defined by the installation.

familyname

Specifies an optional parameter identifying the familytof permanent file
devices on which your permanent files reside. Specify a family name
when the system can access more than one permanent file device family.
If this is not the first USER command of the job or it is the first USER
command from a job submitted from another job, you must not specify a
family name different from the current one unless you are so authorized
(refer to the LIMITS command).

t Refer to section 2 for a description of permanent file device families,
'-^\
| 7-74

60459680 H

This command also defines controls and validation limits for the job and defines your
permanent file base. An installation may operate with secondary USER commands either
enabled or disabled. If the system is a secured system, secondary user commands cannot be
enabled. Only if secondary USER commands are enabled, may you specify a different permanent
file catalog or family during job processing by issuing another USER command. The system
only associates permanent file validation limits with this new user name. The remaining
v a l i d a t i o n l i m i t s s t i l l r e fl e c t t h o s e o f t h e u s e r n a m e s p e c i fi e d a t j o b i n i t i a t i o n ( r e f e r t o
the LIMITS command earlier in this section).
On a secured system or on an unsecured system with secondary USER commands enabled, an
invalid USER command is processed as a security conflict. Your job aborts and your security
count is decremented. If this results in your security count being set to zero, batch jobs
will terminate without EXIT processing. At a terminal, you will be immediately logged out
with no dayfile messages issued to the terminal. If the security count is not zero, the job
p lgi ceist l yt od i st ha e
b l etde)r.m i n a l a n d t h e d a y fi l e a n d w i t h E X I T
rstep is abp
o rrot ec e
d s swi ni tgh eanpapbrl e
o dp r i(autnel e smse sesx a
On an unsecured system with secondary USER commands disabled, any secondary USER command
w i l l b e i n v a l i d a n d a b o r t s t h e j o b . T h i s i s n o t a s e c u r i t y c o n fl i c t a n d t h e s e c u r i t y c o u n t
is not decremented.
The password is deleted from the USER command before this command is issued to the dayfile.
Normally, the familyname parameter need not be included on the USER command. However, if
you make a practice of specifying your family name each time you submit a job, you can be
sure that your job will be processed even if your normal system is not available and your
permanent file family is moved to a backup system. If, after the first USER command, you do
not specify a familyname on the USER command, your permanent file family remains the same.
If you specify the 0 (zero) familyname, your permanent file family becomes the system
d e f a u l t f a m i l y.
Example:
An installation has two systems, A and B. System B provides backup service for system A.
The system default family name for system A is AFAM, and the system default family name for
system B is BFAM.
During normal operations, system A user CWJONES with password JPWD could enter either of the
following USER commands.
USER,CWJONES,JPWD.
USER,CWJONES,JPWD,AFAM.
System B user JDSMITH with password SPWD could enter either of the following commands.
USER,JDSMITH,SPWD.
USER,JDSMITH,SPWD,BFAM.
If system A failed, user CWJONES would be required to enter
USER, CWJONES, JPWD, AFAM .
to identify his family of permanent file devices. User JDSMITH could enter either of the
USER commands as before because the default family name would still be valid.

60459680

H

7-75

|

Normally, the familyname parameter need not be included on the USER command. However, if
you make a practice of specifying your family name each time you submit a job, you can be
sure that your job will be processed even if your normal system is not available and your
permanent file family is moved to a backup system. If, after the first USER command, you do
not specify a familyname on the USER command, your permanent file family remains the same.
If you specify the 0 (zero) familyname, your permanent file family becomes the system
d e f a u l t f a m i l y.
Example:
An installation has two systems, A and B. System B provides backup service for system A.
The system default family name for system A is AFAM, and the system default family name for
system B is BFAM.
During normal operations, system A user CWJONES with password JPWD could enter either of the
following USER commands.
USER,CWJONES,JPWD.
USER,CWJONES,JPWD,AFAM.
System B user JDSMITH with password SPWD could enter either of the following commands.
USER,JDSMITH,SPWD.
USER, JDSMITH, SPWD, BFAM.
If system A failed, user CWJONES would be required to enter
USER,CWJONES,JPWD,AFAM.
to identify his family of permanent file devices. User JDSMITH could enter either of the
USER commands as before because the default family name would still be valid.

■^5v
7-76

60459680

D

COMMANDS FOR INTERACTIVE JOBS

There are many system commands that you can use only in interactive jobs or that were
designed primarily for interactive use. Unless specified otherwise, these commands cannot
be used in procedures. This section describes these commands under the following headings:
Terminal Control Commands
ASCII
AUTO
BRIEF
CSET
EFFECT

KEY

LINE
NORMAL
SCREEN

TDU
TIMEOUT
TRMDEF

• Subsystem Selection Commands
ACCESS
BASIC
BATCH
EXECUTE

FORTRAN
FTNTS
NULL

• Interactive Status Commands
ctD
ctE
ctS
• Job Processing Commands
APPSW

BYE

0^\

DIAL
EXPLAIN
GOODBYE
HELLO
HELL07
HELP
HELPME

LOGOUT
NOSORT
RECOVER
REDO

RUN
Secure Login
SHOW
TEXT
WHATJSN

LIB
LIST
LOGIN

XMODEM

Primary File Editing Commands
ALTER
DELETE
DUP
LIST
MOVE
READ
RESEQ
WRITE
WRITEN
60459680 G

8-1

TERMINAL CONTROL COMMANDS
The terminal control commands change the characteristics of the terminal and vary the source
and format of information given to and received from the system. You can enter these
commands at any time after you successfully log in.

ASCII COMMAND
If you are at an ASCII terminal, this command allows you to use the ASCII 128-character set
and to place the terminal in ASCII mode. On non-ASCII terminals, this command allows the use
of up to 128 of the characters defined for the terminal. The ASCII command allows you to
enter lowercase letters that are interpreted by the system rather than translated to upper
case as is done in normal mode.
Format:
ASCII
In ASCII mode, characters entered from the terminal are translated into 6/12-bit display
code. On an ASCII terminal, 6/12-bit display code consists of 95 graphic characters and 33
control characters (the 128-character set). The standard ASCII graphic 64-character set con
tains only the first 64 (or 63 depending on an installation option) of these 95 characters.
In normal mode, you are restricted to these 64 (or 63) characters. Characters of the ASCII
graphic 64-character set are processed internally as 6-bit display code characters. The
additional characters that make up the ASCII 128-character set are processed internally as
12-bit display code characters. Refer to appendix A for further information on display codes
and character sets.
The system normally receives all ASCII characters except line feed, carriage return, NUL,
EOT, DEL, and the logical backspace character. Control characters (line feed, cancel line,
and backspace) are not received unless in full-ASCII or special editing mode. Commands can
be entered in either uppercase or lowercase regardless of ASCII mode.
NOTE
If a correspondence code terminal is being
used, you must be in ASCII mode in order to
use the full correspondence code set.

You can include this command in a procedure.

8-2

60459680

F

y*$^m5v

AUTO COMMAND
The AUTO command automatically generates five-digit line numbers.
Format:
A U TO , n n n n n , i i i i
Parameter

Description
Specifies the beginning line number; default value is 00100.

i i i i

Specifies the increment value added for each succeeding line number;
default value is 10.

To exit from auto mode, you press the cancel line character followed by @, thus deleting
the current line. You can also exit from auto mode by entering the termination sequence.
You can then enter a new command on the next line.
You can alter the line numbering sequence by deleting the line with the cancel line
character and then entering a new beginning line number. You should exercise caution when
doing this since the AUTO command is still in effect and continues generating line numbers
using the original increment value. Thus, if a line number is generated that already exists
in the file, the original contents of that line are lost and must be reentered. The
increment value cannot be altered unless a new AUTO command is entered.
yfl^Stey

In the following example of the AUTO command, the user deletes a line number to change the
numbering sequence and then deletes another line number in order to place a character in
column 6.
READY,
auto
00100 program header
00110 write 1000
00120
•DEL*
00230 1000 format(15x,' headings')
00240 write 2000
00250 2000 formatd5x,'author',9x,'title',15x,
00260
*DEL*
00260+ 'publisher'^,'cost')
00270 stop
00280 end
00290
•DEL*
List

User enters cancel line character.
User enters entire line.
User enters cancel line character.
User completes the line.
User enters cancel line character.

00100 PROGRAM HEADER
00110 WRITE 1000
00230 1000 FORMAT(15X,'HEADINGS')
00240 WRITE 2000
00250 2000 FORMAT (15X,'AlfTH0R',9X,'TITLE',15X,
0 0 2 6 0 + ' P U B L I S H E R ' , 6 X , ' C 0 S T')
00270 STOP
00280 END
READY.

60459680 C

8-3

BRIEF COMMAND

The BRIEF command suppresses all full and partial headers produced by certain commands (for
example, LIBEDIT). It also prevents the system from echoing editing changes you make to the
primary file when using the primary file editing commands described later in this section.
Format:
BRIEF
To clear the effect of the BRIEF command, use the NORMAL command.

CSET COMMAND

The CSET command sets the character set mode of the terminal.
Format:
CSET,mode
Parameter

Description

mode Specifies terminal character set mode.
ASCII Selects ASCII mode (ASCII 128-character set). ^^\
NORMAL Selects normal mode (ASCII graphic 63/64-character set).
The CSET command may also appear in a procedure file.

NOTE
The CSET command sets only the terminal
character set. If you specify the NORMAL
parameter, you do not affect auto or brief
mode.

EFFECT COMMAND
The EFFECT command enables or disables the output format effectors supplied by IAF. With
the IAF effectors disabled, you control terminal output by supplying an appropriate effector
as the first character of each output line; the system interprets the first character of
each line as an effector and inhibits printing of the character.
Format effectors control carriage positioning on output operations. The effectors for
specific terminal classes are described in the Network Access Method Version 1/Communications
Control Program Version 3 Terminal Interfaces Reference Manual. This command is valid for
all terminals connected through NAM.

8-4

60459680

F

NOTE
Control bytes 0001, 0002, 0003, 0005, 0013,
0014, and 0015 should not be used with IAF
effectors disabled.

Format:
EFFECT,mode.
Parameter
mode

Description
Specifies whether or not IAF automatically supplies format effectors.
Values that can be entered for mode are as follows:
Va l u e

Description

SYSTEM Format effectors are supplied by IAF. This is the default |
value.
U S E R F o r m a t e f f e c t o r s a r e u s e r - s u p p l i e d a s t h e fi r s t c h a r a c t e r |
of each output line.
When format effectors are user-supplied (i.e., EFFECT,USER |
i s s p e c i fi e d ) , a l l f o r m a t e ff e c t o r s a r e s u p p o r t e d e x c e p t
those that specify carriage positioning after output.
S p e c i fi c a l l y, t h e s l a n t ( / ) a n d p e r i o d ( . ) e f f e c t o r s a r e
not supported.
You can include this command in a procedure.

KEY COMMAND
The KEY command maintains key definition files which define the function keys for a CDC 721
t e r m i n a l . K E Y i s u s e d t o c r e a t e , e d i t , d i s p l a y, o r l o a d a d e fi n i t i o n fi l e .
The KEY command is valid only for a CDC 721 terminal operating in screen mode. To use this
command, select the appropriate option from those listed below and enter the command with
that option. The KEY command provides you with interactive help to assist you in creating,
e d i t i n g , o r l o a d i n g t h e d e fi n i t i o n fi l e .
Format:
K E Y, o p t i o n , fi l e n a m e .
or
KEY?

/jfp&V,

60459680 H

8-5

Parameter
option

Description
Any of the following options.
Op ti o n

Description

HELP Gives a brief description of each option available. The
filename parameter is ignored.
C H E C K C h e c k s t o s e e i f f u n c t i o n k e y d e fi n i t i o n s a r e a l r e a d y
l o a d e d i n t o t h e t e r m i n a l . I f n o t , t h e d e fi n i t i o n s i n fi l e
filename are loaded.
DEFAULT Sets key definitions to the NOS system default keys. The
filename parameter is ignored. The default keys are:
HELP key = HELP
EDIT key = FSE
STOP key = CTRL-T followed by carriage return
DISPLAY Displays the key labels for function keys Fl through F16.
E D I T I n i t i a t e s c r e a t i o n o r e d i t i n g o f a k e y d e fi n i t i o n fi l e .
KEY first searches for a local file by the specified name,
t h e n f o r a n i n d i r e c t a c c e s s p e r m a n e n t fi l e . I f fi l e n a m e
d o e s n o t e x i s t , i t i s c r e a t e d . T h e e d i t e d fi l e i s s a v e d
or replaced at completion of editing.
L O A D L o a d s k e y d e fi n i t i o n s i n t o t h e t e r m i n a l f r o m t h e s p e c i fi e d
fi l e .
P R I N T C r e a t e s a l o c a l fi l e c a l l e d K E Y P R N T o n w h i c h t h e k e y
d e fi n i t i o n s a r e l i s t e d f r o m t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e n a m e .
fi l e n a m e T h e n a m e o f t h e k e y d e fi n i t i o n fi l e . D e f a u l t i s K E Y D E F S .
? L i s t s t h e o p t i o n s a n d p r o m p t s y o u f o r a n o p t i o n a n d fi l e n a m e .
The KEY command may appear in a procedure file.

/*^^\

8-6

60459680 F

LINE COMMAND
The LINE command specifies that your terminal is to be operated in line (or scrolling) mode,
as opposed to screen mode. Commands and features affected by the LINE command include
CATLIST, FSE, screen formatting, and the display of NOS procedure parameters.
The LINE command also identifies the terminal model to the system and initiates a search for
the terminal definition file for that model (unless the CDC 721 terminal was specified;
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h i s t e r m i n a l a r e p r e l o a d e d i n t o t h e s y s t e m s o t h a t n o d e fi n i t i o n fi l e i s
required). The system uses the following search order in attempting to find the definition
fi l e :
• A local file called TERMLIB (created using the TDU utility).
• An indirect access permanent file called TERMLIB under your user name.
• An indirect access permanent file called TERMLIB under user name LIBRARY
(UN=LIBRARY). Your site may maintain a system file containing common terminal
d e fi n i t i o n s .
If TERMLIB is found under your user name or under user name LIBRARY, the system copies the
terminal definition to a local file called ZZZZTRM for later use by NOS full screen display
features. The terminal files listed below for the TM parameter are released with the system
and are always available once you have identified your terminal in a LINE or SCREEN command.
Format:
LINE,TM=model.

LINE,model.

Jf^N
60459680

F

8-6.1

Parameter

Description

T M = m o d e l S p e c i fi e s t h e t e r m i n a l m o d e l . T h e v a l u e s p e c i fi e d f o r m o d e l i s t h e
terminal mnemonic defined in the terminal definition file or the
terminal mnemonic for one of the following preloaded terminal
d e fi n i t i o n s :
model

Description

721 CDC 721 terminal.
721V3 CDC 721 terminal version 3.
722 CDC 722 terminal.
72230 CDC 722-30 terminal.
VT100 DEC VT100 terminal.t
Z19 Zenith Z19 or Z29 terminal or Heathkit H19 terminal.tt
ADM3A Lear Siegler ADM3A terminal.ttt
ADM5 Lear Siegler ADM5 terminal.ttt
T V 9 2 4 Te l e V i d e o 9 2 4 t e r m i n a l . t t t t t t
T V 9 5 0 Te l e V i d e o 9 5 0 t e r m i n a l . t t t t t t
T V 9 5 5 Te l e V i d e o 9 5 5 t e r m i n a l . t t t t t t
T 4 1 1 5 Te k t r o n i x 4 1 1 5 t e r m i n a l . t t t t
3270 IBM 3270 terminal.ttttt
PCONxx IBM PC using CDC CONNECT, xx is the current level of
CONNECT.
If you want your terminal to have the type-ahead capability, append T
to the model name you are using in the LINE command. Type-ahead
allows you to press a function key two or more times in quick
succession, rather than pressing it once and waiting for the system to
execute it before pressing it a second time.
If this parameter is omitted, the terminal model is left unchanged.
You can include this command in a procedure.

tDEC is a registered trademark of the Digital Equipment Corporation,
tt Zenith Z19 and Z29 are products of the Zenith Corporation. Heathkit H19 is a product
of the Heath Corporation,
ttt Lear Siegler ADM3A and ADM5 are products of the Lear Siegler Corporation,
tttt Tektronix 4115 is a product of the Tektronix Corporation.
tttttlBM 3270 is a product of the IBM Corporation.
| tttttt TeleVideo 924, 950, and 955 are products of TeleVideo Systems, Inc.

8-6.2

60459680 H

^SS^.

NORMAL COMMAND
The NORMAL command reverses the effect of the ASCII; AUTO; BRIEF; CSET,ASCII; and NOSORT
commands on both input and output. The system initially assumes that this command has been
entered. Normal mode uses the ASCII graphic 63/64-character set. All lowercase letters are
converted to uppercase (refer to ASCII command) and all command headers are printed (refer
to BRIEF command).
Format:
NORMAL

SCREEN COMMAND
The SCREEN command specifies that your terminal is to be operated in screen mode, as opposed
to line (or scrolling) mode. Commands and features affected by the SCREEN command include
CATLIST, FSE, screen formatting, and the display of NOS procedure parameters. The SCREEN
command also identifies the terminal model to the system and initiates a search for the
terminal definition file for that model (unless the CDC 721 terminal was specified;
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h i s t e r m i n a l a r e p r e l o a d e d i n t o t h e s y s t e m s o t h a t n o d e fi n i t i o n fi l e i s
required). The system uses the following search order in attempting to find the definition
fi l e :
• A local file called TERMLIB (created using the TDU utility).
• An indirect access permanent file called TERMLIB under your user name.
• An indirect access permanent file called TERMLIB under user name LIBRARY
(UN=LIBRARY). Your site may maintain a system file containing common terminal
d e fi n i t i o n s .
If TERMLIB is found under your user name or under user name LIBRARY, the system copies the
terminal definition to a local file called ZZZZTRM for later use by NOS full screen display
features. The terminal files are always available once you have identified your terminal in
a SCREEN or LINE command.
Format:
SCREEN,TM=model.

SCREEN,model.

60459680

G

8-7

|

Parameter

Description

T M = m o d e l S p e c i fi e s t h e t e r m i n a l m o d e l . T h e v a l u e s p e c i fi e d f o r m o d e l i s t h e
terminal mnemonic defined in the terminal definition file or the
terminal mnemonic for one of the following preloaded terminal
d e fi n i t i o n s :
model

Description

721 CDC 721 terminal.
721V3 CDC 721 terminal version 3.
722 CDC 722 terminal.
72230 CDC 722-30 terminal.
VT100 DEC VT100 terminal.t
Z19 Zenith Z19 or Z29 terminal or Heathkit H19 terminal.tt
ADM3A Lear Siegler ADM3A terminal.ttt
ADM5 Lear Siegler ADM5 terminal.ttt
T 4 1 1 5 Te k t r o n i x 4 1 1 5 t e r m i n a l . t t t t
3270 IBM 3270 terminal, ttttt
PCONxx IBM PC using CDC CONNECT, xx is the current level of
CONNECT.
If you want your terminal to have the type-ahead capability, append T
to the model name you are using in the SCREEN command. Type-ahead
allows you to press a function key two or more times in quick
succession, rather than pressing it once and waiting for the system to
execute it before pressing it a second time.
If this parameter is omitted, the terminal model is left unchanged.
You can include this command in a procedure.

tDEC is a registered trademark of the Digital Equipment Corporation,
ttZenith Z19 and Z29 are products of the Zenith Corporation. Heathkit H19 is a product of
the Heath Corporation,
tttLear Siegler ADM3A and ADM5 are products of the Lear Siegler Corporation.
ttttTektronix 4115 is a product of the Tektronix Corporation,
ttttt IBM 3270 is a product of the IBM Corporation.

8-8

60459680 G

TDU COMMAND
The TDU command calls an interactive procedure to compile a terminal definition file and
s t o r e t h e c o m p i l e d d e fi n i t i o n ( i n l o a d c a p s u l e f o r m ) i n a u s e r l i b r a r y. T h e u s e r l i b r a r y
can later be accessed by a SCREEN or LINE command to define terminal characteristics to the
system.
T h e u s e r l i b r a r y t o r e c e i v e t h e l o a d c a p s u l e m u s t b e a l o c a l fi l e . I f t h e l i b r a r y fi l e y o u
specify does not exist as a local file, TDU creates it. If you do not specify a library
file, TDU uses a local file with the name TERMLIB. If no file TERMLIB exists, TDU creates
it.
Format:
T D U , I = d e fi n i t i o n , L = l i s t i n g , L I B = l i b r a r y
Parameter

Description

I = d e fi n i t i o n S p e c i fi e s t h e t e r m i n a l d e fi n i t i o n fi l e . T h e fi l e m u s t b e i n 6 / 1 2 - b i t
display code. For information on how to create a terminal definition
file, refer to the Screen Formatting Reference manual.
L = l i s t i n g S p e c i fi e s t h e l i s t i n g fi l e . T h e l i s t i n g fi l e i s a c o p y o f t h e i n p u t
file with error messages, if any, interspersed. The default name is
OUTPUT.
L I B = l i b r a r y S p e c i fi e s t h e l i b r a r y fi l e t o r e c e i v e t h e l o a d c a p s u l e . T h e d e f a u l t
name is TERMLIB. To be used by the SCREEN and LINE commands, the
l i b r a r y fi l e m u s t b e a l o c a l fi l e o r a n i n d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e c a l l e d
TERMLIB.
The TDU command may appear in a procedure file.

0S^*,

60459680 F

8-8.1/8-8.2

TIMEOUT COMMAND
The TIMEOUT command can change your status from the no-timeout status to the standard
timeout status. In standard timeout status, you are automatically logged out after 10
minutes of inactivity. If you have a no-timeout status (refer to the LIMITS command), the
terminal remains connected until you log out. The TIMEOUT command changes your status for
the session in progress.
Format:
TIMEOUT

TRMDEF COMMAND
The TRMDEF command changes one or more of the characteristics of your terminal (for example,
the page length or the page-wait attribute). You can also use terminal definition commands
(also called network commands) for this purpose. Typically, you would use TRMDEF in a
prologue to set your terminal attributes for each login—especially if you tend to log in at
the same type of terminal each time. You would use network commands to make on-the-fly
changes during a given terminal session.
The network commands for a NAM/CCP network are in appendix J. The CDCNET Terminal Interface
Usage manual describes network commands for a NAM/CDCNET network.
Format:
T R M D E F, L = l f n , t C l = v i , . . . , t c n = v n
Parameter

Description

L=lfn

S p e c i fi e s a n o p t i o n a l fi l e o n w h i c h t h e t e r m i n a l r e d e fi n i t i o n
i n f o r m a t i o n i s w r i t t e n . I f l f n i s o m i t t e d , fi l e O U T P U T i s a s s u m e d ,
If another file is specified, the changes are implemented when the
fi l e i s l i s t e d o r c o p i e d t o t h e t e r m i n a l .

tCi=Vi

S p e c i fi e s t h e t e r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c t o b e c h a n g e d , t c i i s s p e c i
fied by a two-character mnemonic listed in table J-l in appendix J.
The NUL and DEL characters can be specified on the TRMDEF command
although they cannot be used with the terminal definition commands
(refer to table J-l). You may not use the mnemonics AR, CH, HN, HS,
MS, and TM for tCi.
The new option, Vi, is any value in the range given for that termi
n a l c h a r a c t e r i sti c i n ta b l e J-l . It ca n b e a d e ci ma l va l u e , a co d e d
value with a special meaning (such as PR for printer), or a single
character. You can specify multiple values for DL, EB, EL, and XL if
you separate the values with slants (/), but only as specified in
appendix J. If the new option is a single character, it can be given
in any of the following formats.
Description
Any alphanumeric character (a character with a display
code in the range from 0 through 44g).

>^P^V

60459680 G

8-9

Parameter

Description
Vj

Description

$v$ Any character, including special characters, delimited by
dollar signs (for example, $*$). If the character is a
dollar sign ($), it must be specified using two dollar
signs (for example, $$$$).
vvvB Octal value of an ASCII character (for example, 52B, which
would be equivalent to an entry of $*$).
vvD Decimal value of an ASCII character (for example, 42D,
which would be equivalent to an entry of $*$).
Xvv Hexadecimal value of an ASCII character (for example,
X2A, which would be equivalent to an entry of $*$).

NOTE
If a numeric value for a single ASCII
character is specified without a pre- or
post-radix, the value is assumed to be octal
unless it contains an 8 or 9. In this case,
it is translated as decimal.

Using TRMDEF with NAM/CDCNET
The CDCNET network defines a larger set of terminal attributes than does the CCP network.
This gives you a greater degree of control of your terminal and its connections. For
example, associated with the page wait attribute under CCP are two attributes under CDCNET:
HOLD_PAGE (HP) and HOLD_PAGE_OVER (HPO). To avail yourself of this added control, you must
use the CDCNET mnemonics for the attributes when using TRMDEF. The CDCNET Terminal ^^^
Interface Usage manual describes the CDCNET mnemonics along with any restrictions for y4^%
parameter specifications with TRMDEF.
If you do choose to use the CCP mnemonics for terminal attributes even though you are using
a CDCNET network, the system maps the CCP attributes into the corresponding CDCNET
attributes. But again, it will not be a one-to-one mapping. The CDCNET Terminal Interface
Usage manual shows how the two sets of attributes interrelate.

8-10

60459680

G

Examples
T R M D E F, I N = P T T h i s c o m m a n d c h a n g e s t h e i n p u t d e v i c e t o a p a p e r t a p e r e a d e r, t h u s
allowing you to read data and commands from a tape. It has the
same effect as the corresponding terminal definition command (that
is, entry of the control character followed by IN^PT).
TRMDEF,DL=C20/X03/TO This command defines three different transparent input delimiters.
• the transmission of 20 characters
• the entry of an ETX character code
• a timeout
The first delimiter encountered terminates transparent input mode.
The operating system and the network check the validity of the parameter values you enter.
The operating system does the preliminary check (syntax and general range checking) and the
network does the specialized parameter checking. If you specify an invalid parameter value,
the system informs you and the terminal characteristics in effect before you entered the
command remain in effect. In general, the system informs you immediately of the error. The
only case where you do not receive immediate notification of the error is where you have
specified the L=lfn parameter and the system does not detect the error in its preliminary
check. However, the network notifies you of the error as soon as you try to actualize the
changes (copy file lfn to the terminal). Also, in this case, the system does not resort to
EXIT processing if you entered the command from a procedure.

SUBSYSTEM SELECTION COMMANDS
A subsystem creates an environment that facilitates the execution of certain classes of jobs.
For instance, the FORTRAN subsystem provides a framework in which you can conveniently enter,
compile, and execute FORTRAN 5 programs.
The access, execute, BASIC, FORTRAN, FTNTS, and null subsystems greatly restrict your job
capabilities. Under them, you cannot enter many of the commands described in this manual un
less you use the X,ccc command format (described later in this section). To have the largest
set of system commands at your disposal, use the batch subsystem. If you want to use the RUN
command, however, you must select either the BASIC, execute, FORTRAN, or FTNTS subsystem.
The following commands select a specific subsystem. You should always be aware of the sub
system that is currently active. For example, attempting to execute a FORTRAN program while
operating under the BASIC subsystem causes meaningless diagnostic messages to be issued. To
determine which subsystem is currently active, enter the ENQUIRE command.

NOTE
The subsystem may be automatically selected
by the system at login if this has been set
i n t h e v a l i d a t i o n fi l e ( r e f e r t o t h e L I M I T S
command). You can also set the subsystem in
your prologue with the SET command.

60459680

G

8 - 11

|

Use the execute subsystem whenever possible to conserve system resources. Efficiency can be
achieved when certain programs are used frequently. For example, a source code program
created under the FORTRAN subsystem must first be compiled before it can be executed (this
process is automatic; you need only enter the RUN command). The program automatically goes
through a compilation phase, which produces an executable object code program, and the
object code program is then executed. Thus, greater efficiency can be achieved by retaining

INTERACTIVE STATUS COMMANDS
The system executes interactive status commands immediately. You may enter them while the
system is executing another command. The system queues other commands that are typed prior
to prompts (refer to section 17).
Format:
ct x
Parameter

Description

c t c t i s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r d e fi n e d f o r t h e t e r m i n a l ( r e f e r t o
the CT command in appendix J). Do not include a space between ct and
x. We show one here only for clarity.
x x can be the letter D, E, or S.
With the exception of the Detach command (ctD), the system generates only a line feed if you
enter an interactive status command during one of the following states:
Text mode
Auto mode
Input mode (a program is waiting for input)
During login
During the processing of the interruption or termination sequence

DETACH COMMAND (ctD)
The Detach command detaches a terminal job from the terminal. You can detach a job at any
time during a terminal session. To detach the job during output, first enter the interrup
tion sequence and then enter the Detach command. Otherwise, ctD alone is sufficient.
When you detach a job, the following message appears at the terminal:
JOB DETACHED, JSN=jsn
All files assigned to the detached job remain assigned to it.

0H^\

Examples
T R M D E F, I N = P T T h i s c o m m a n d c h a n g e s t h e i n p u t d e v i c e t o a p a p e r t a p e r e a d e r, t h u s
allowing you to read data and commands from a tape. It has the
same effect as the corresponding terminal definition command (that
is, entry of the control character followed by IN=PT).
TRMDEF,DL=C20/X03/TO This command defines three different transparent input delimiters.
• the transmission of 20 characters
• the entry of an ETX character code
• a timeout
The first delimiter encountered terminates transparent input mode.
The operating system and the network check the validity of the parameter values you enter.
The operating system does the preliminary check (syntax and general range checking) and the
network does the specialized parameter checking. If you specify an invalid parameter value,
the system informs you and the terminal characteristics in effect before you entered the
command remain in effect. In general, the system informs you immediately of the error. The
only case where you do not receive immediate notification of the error is where you have
specified the L=lfn parameter and the system does not detect the error in its preliminary
check. However, the network notifies you of the error as soon as you try to actualize the
changes (copy file lfn to the terminal). Also, in this case, the system does not resort to
EXIT processing if you entered the command from a procedure.

SUBSYSTEM SELECTION COMMANDS
A subsystem creates an environment that facilitates the execution of certain classes of jobs.
For instance, the FORTRAN subsystem provides a framework in which you can conveniently enter,
compile, and execute FORTRAN 5 programs.

yf^N

The access, execute, BASIC, FORTRAN, FTNTS, and null subsystems greatly restrict your job
capabilities. Under them, you cannot enter many of the commands described in this manual un
less you use the X,ccc command format (described later in this section). To have the largest
set of system commands at your disposal, use the batch subsystem. If you want to use the RUN
command, however, you must select either the BASIC, execute, FORTRAN, or FTNTS subsystem.
The following commands select a specific subsystem. You should always be aware of the sub
system that is currently active. For example, attempting to execute a FORTRAN program while
operating under the BASIC subsystem causes meaningless diagnostic messages to be issued. To
determine which subsystem is currently active, enter the ENQUIRE command.

NOTE
The subsystem may be automatically selected
by the system at login if this has been set
i n t h e v a l i d a t i o n fi l e ( r e f e r t o t h e L I M I T S
command). You can also set the subsystem in
your prologue with the SET command.
J $ < f fi s < \

60459680 G

8 - 11 |

A specific subsystem can be associated with an indirect access file so that whenever you
specify that file as the primary file, the associated subsystem is selected automatically.
A subsystem flag can be set when you save the file. If you include the SS=subsystem
parameter on the SAVE command, you can specify any of the valid subsystems. If you enter
SAVE without SS=subsystem and the file is the primary file, the subsystem flag for the
current subsystem with the file is set. To save the primary file with no subsystem
association, you can either enter the null subsystem before saving the file, or enter the
command:
SAVE,lfn/SS=NULL

Automatic subsystem association is made only when the primary file is saved. To associate a
subsystem with a temporary file other than the primary file, it must be saved with the
SS-subsystem parameter specified.

ACCESS COMMAND
The ACCESS command selects the access subsystem. You cannot enter a RUN command under the
access subsystem. While in the access subsystem, you can communicate with another
interactive terminal using the DIAL and WHATJSN commands. You must be authorized to use the
access subsystem (refer to LIMITS command).
Format:
ACCESS
The DIAL and WHATJSN commands can be entered only when the access subsystem is active.

BASIC COMMAND
The BASIC command selects the BASIC subsystem. A RUN command under the BASIC subsystem uses
the BASIC compiler.
Format:
BASIC,ccc
Parameter

Description

c c c S p e c i fi e s a c o m m a n d t o b e e x e c u t e d a f t e r t h e s y s t e m e x e c u t e s t h e B A S I C
command. Any valid command is permitted, as well as all valid
parameters for that command.
The following example illustrates the use of the ccc parameter.
BASIC, OLD,PRIME
In this example, the user selects the BASIC subsystem and makes a copy of permanent file
PRIME the primary file. The file name (PRIME) is a valid parameter with the OLD command.

8-12

60459680

D

BATCH COMMAND
The BATCH command selects the batch subsystem,
batch subsystem.

You cannot use the RUN command under the

Format:
BATCH,fl
Parameter

fl

Description
S p e c i fi e s t h e i n i t i a l r u n n i n g fi e l d l e n g t h f o r s u b s e q u e n t j o b s t e p s .
Entering this value is equivalent to entering the RFL.fl command
( r e f e r t o s e c t i o n 7 ) . I f fl i s o m i t t e d , 0 i s a s s u m e d . I f y o u
implicitly selected the batch subsystem by retrieving an indirect
access permanent file with the OLD command, the field length is either
0 or that entered with the last RFL command.

Unless you have a reason to do otherwise, choose the batch subsystem for normal job proces
sing. The batch subsystem allows you to enter essentially all commands allowed in batch
jobs. Some file management commands and nearly all execution control processing commands are
available in the other subsystems only through the X,ccc command.
Although you can enter any system command from an interactive job, the output produced by
several of these commands is formatted for transmission to a line printer (137 characters per
line). Through use of the L072 command, you can format the output for transmission to a ter
minal (72 to 160 characters per line) but some data may be lost. Refer to the description of
the L072 command in section 9.

EXECUTE COMMAND
The EXECUTE command selects the execute subsystem. A RUN command under this subsystem
executes a previously compiled (object code) program. The RUN command must be entered to
initiate execution.
Format:
EXECUTE,ccc
Parameter

Description

c c c S p e c i fi e s o n e c o m m a n d t o b e e x e c u t e d a f t e r t h e s y s t e m e x e c u t e s t h e
EXECUTE command. Any valid command is permitted, as well as all valid
parameters for that command.
In the following example, you select the execute subsystem and make a copy of permanent file
OBJFILE the primary file. The file name (OBJFILE) is a valid parameter with the OLD command.
EXECUTE , OLD, OB JF ILE
NOTE
Source language programs cannot be executed
under the execute subsystem.

60459680 D

8-13

Use the execute subsystem whenever possible to conserve system resources. Efficiency can be
achieved when certain programs are used frequently. For example, a source code program
created under the FORTRAN subsystem must first be compiled before it can be executed (this
process is automatic; you need only enter the RUN command). The program automatically goes
through a compilation phase, which produces an executable object code program, and the
object code program is then executed. Thus, greater efficiency can be achieved by retaining
the object code program in the permanent file system for later execution under the execute
subsystem. This can be accomplished by using the following commands (under the FORTRAN
subsystem):
RUN,B=lfn
Causes the object code program to be placed on temporary file lfn.
S AV E , l f n / S S = E X E C U T E

_.

Retains file lfn as a permanent file and sets the execute subsystem flag.
If this is done, subsequent requests for the file using the OLD command causes the execute
subsystem to be selected. Entering the RUN command initiates execution of the object code
program.

FORTRAN COMMAND
The FORTRAN command selects the FORTRAN subsystem. A RUN command under this subsystem uses
the FORTRAN Version 5 compiler.
Format:
FORTRAN,ccc
Parameter

Description

ccc Specifies a command in addition to the FORTRAN command. Any valid
command is permitted, as well as all valid parameters for that command,
The following example illustrates the use of the ccc parameter.
FORTRAN, OLD, TAX
TAX the primary file. The file name (TAX) is a valid parameter with the OLD command.
I In this example, the user selects the FORTRAN subsystem and makes a copy of permanent file

8-14

60459680

F

FTNTS COMMAND
The FTNTS command selects the FTNTS subsystem. A RUN command under this subsystem uses the
FORTRAN Extended Version 4 compiler.
Format:
FTNTS ,ccc
Parameter

Description

c c c S p e c i fi e s a c o m m a n d i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e F T N T S c o m m a n d . A n y v a l i d
command is permitted, as well as all valid.parameters for that command,
The following example illustrates the use of the ccc parameter.
FTNTS,OLD, DATA GEN
In this example, the user selects the FTNTS subsystem and makes a copy of permanent file
DATAGEN the primary file. The file name (DATAGEN) is a valid parameter with the OLD command.

NULL COMMAND
The NULL command selects the null subsystem. You cannot use the RUN command under this
subsystem.
Format:
NULL
This command is entered before saving the primary file if you do not want a specific
subsystem flag to be associated with the file. Normally, when you save the primary file, an
internal indicator called the subsystem flag is set to indicate the subsystem currently in
use. That subsystem is automatically selected in each succeeding request for the file using
the OLD command. An alternative way of saving the primary file with no subsystem
association is to specify the SS=NULL parameter on the SAVE command. No automatic subsystem
association occurs when saving temporary files other than the primary file.
If you do not specify a subsystem at login time, the system sets the subsystem specified in
the validation file during login (refer to the LIMITS Command in section 7). Null is the
default.

60459680

D

8-15

INTERACTIVE STATUS COMMANDS
The system executes interactive status commands immediately. You may enter them while the
system is executing another command. The system queues other commands that are typed prior
to prompts (refer to section 17).
Format:
ct x
Parameter

Description

c t c t i s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r d e fi n e d f o r t h e t e r m i n a l ( r e f e r t o
the CT command in appendix J). Do not include a space between ct and
x. We show one here only for clarity.
r ^ ^ \

x x can be the letter D, E, or S.
With the exception of the Detach command (ctD), the system generates only a line feed if you
enter an interactive status command during one of the following states:
• Te x t m o d e
• Auto mode
• Input mode (a program is waiting for input)
• During login
• During the processing of the interruption or termination sequence

DETACH COMMAND (ctD)
The Detach command detaches a terminal job from the terminal. You can detach a job at any
time during a terminal session. To detach the job during output, first enter the interrup
tion sequence and then enter the Detach command. Otherwise, ctD alone is sufficient.
When you detach a job, the following message appears at the terminal:
JOB DETACHED, JSN=jsn
All files assigned to the detached job remain assigned to it.
Subsequent to the detachment, the system creates a new terminal session with a new job
sequence name (JSN). Any commands you entered before or after the detachment that the
system has not yet processed become part of the new terminal job. However, if your job is
executing a procedure when you detach it, the procedure remains a part of the detached job.
The system initiates the new job with recovery dialogue processing (refer to the RECOVER
command in this section).
The detached job executes until one of the following occurs:
• No more commands remain. Detaching a job while it is in the IDLE status causes the
system to reach the end of the command record.
• A fatal error aborts the job.

8-16

60459680

D

0^\

• The job requests input from the terminal or queues output to the terminal.
• T h e j o b e x c e e d s i t s t i m e l i mi t o r SR U l i mi t.
• Certain system requests are encountered.
At this point, the system suspends the detached job (unless you had specified the OP-TJ
parameter on the most recent SETJOB command). The job remains suspended until you recover
it or until it exceeds its timeout period. You can recover an executing or suspended job
with the RECOVER command, which is described later in this section.
You may route terminal output from a detached job to the wait queue. To do this you must
enter a SETJOB command and an ASSIGN command before detaching the job. The SETJOB command
should specify DC=TO. The ASSIGN command should be as follows:
ASSIGN,MS,OUTPUT
The system limits the number of jobs you can detach (refer to the LIMITS command in
section 7).

IMMEDIATE JOB STATUS COMMAND (ctE)
This command requests detailed job status response. You can enter this command while
another command is active, and the system processes it immediately. The following output is
an example of the system's response to a ctE command:
JSN: AADF SYSTEM:
STATUS: IDLE

BATCH

SRU:

2.095 FILE NAME: SAMPLE2

ABBREVIATED JOB STATUS COMMAND (ctS)
This command causes the system to give an abbreviated job status response. The system
issues one of the following responses.
Response

Description

EXECUTE System is currently processing your command.
IDLE System is waiting for you to enter a command.
WAIT System is waiting for system resources to become available.

60459680 E

8-17

JOB PROCESSING COMMANDS
The job processing commands allow you to perform a variety of job processing or job-related
operations. These commands can be entered at any time after login is complete.

APPSW COMMAND

The APPSW command allows you to temporarily switch to a secondary (alternate) NAM
application program. The NAM application you originally logged into is called the primary
application. The secondary application that you specify on the APPSW command must be one
that is supported by your site and one that you are validated to use. When you log out of
the secondary application, your terminal reverts to the primary application. While in the
secondary application, your current IAF session is suspended. Upon exiting the secondary ^^
application, your IAF session resumes processing at the point where the APPSW command was -~M^
encountered.
The job issuing the APPSW command must be an interactive terminal job and must be a NAM
terminal connection. The APPSW command is invalid for RDF terminals or any origin type
other than Interactive.
Format:
APPSW,AP=appl,Z.data

APPSW,appl,Z.data
Parameter

Description

a p p l S p e c i fi e s o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g N A M a p p l i c a t i o n s :
appl
IAF

Description
Interactive

F a c i l i t y.

I T F I n t e r a c t i v e Tr a n s f e r F a c i l i t y.
MCS Message Control System.
P L AT O P L AT O - N A M I n t e r f a c e .
R B F R e m o t e B a t c h F a c i l i t y.
TA F

Transaction

F a c i l i t y.

T V F T e r m i n a l V e r i fi c a t i o n F a c i l i t y .
V E I A F N O S / V E I n t e r a c t i v e F a c i l i t y.
Z S p e c i fi e s t h a t a n y c h a r a c t e r s f o l l o w i n g t h e c o m m a n d t e r m i n a t o r a r e
to be forwarded to the secondary application as data.
data Data to be forwarded to the secondary application, data can be up
to 50 characters long; any additional characters are truncated.

8-18

60459680

H

j^Wt^

BYE COMMAND
The BYE command ends your session with IAF and either logs you out of your host and
disconnects the terminal or places you under the control of another NAM application.
If you are connected to IAF as your secondary application (refer to the APPSW command
description for more information on secondary applications), entering the BYE command with a
null application parameter returns your terminal connection to the primary application.
Format:
BYE,appl
Parameter
appl

Description
I f I A F i s y o u r p r i m a r y a p p l i c a t i o n , a p p l s p e c i fi e s a n a p p l i c a t i o n t o
which you wish to be connected. The following are some supported
applications:
appl

Description

ITF

I n t e r a c t i v e T r a n s f e r F a c i l i t y.

MCS

Message Control System.

PLATO

PLATO-NAM Interface.

RBF

Remote Batch Facility.

TAF

T r a n s a c t i o n F a c i l i t y.

TVF

Te r m i n a l Ve r i fi c a t i o n F a c i l i t y.

VEIAF

N O S / V E I n t e r a c t i v e F a c i l i t y.

If IAF is your secondary application, you have the following options
for the appl parameter:
appl

Description

o m i t t e d I f y o u o m i t t h e a p p l p a r a m e t e r, y o u r t e r m i n a l i s
logged out of IAF and is returned to the control
of the primary application.
ABORT If you specify ABORT for appl, an abort status
message is returned to the primary application,
and your terminal is disconnected from both the
primary and secondary applications.
Any other application name will be ignored, and you will be returned
to your primary application.

/ff^N

60459680 H

8-19

If IAF is your primary application and if you select an application that is available and
that you are validated to use, you are automatically released from IAF control and placed
under the control of the named application. If you do not select another application, you
are logged out of the host and the terminal is disconnected. In this case, IAF responds by
printing:
UN=username
LOG
OFF
JSN-jsn
SRU-S
Characters=xxxxx KCHS
IAF
CONNECT
TIME
LOGGED OUT.

hh.mm.ss.
s.sss
hh.mm.ss.

The following describes the variable items in the logout information:
Item

Description

username User name.
h h . m m . s s . Ti m e o f d a y t h i s c o m m a n d w a s e n t e r e d .
jsn

Job

sequence

name.

s.sss Measure of system resources used during IAF connection. The SRU is
a unit of measurement which includes all CPU time, memory usage, and
I / O a c t i v i t y s i n c e l o g i n t o I A F.
xxxxxxxx A count of the total number of input and output characters read
from, or written to, your terminal.
If you switch applications without disconnecting from the network, your terminal's
characteristics do not change.

NOTE
Ensure that all temporary files to be
retained are made permanent before issuing
this command. All files which have not
been saved are released when the BYE
command is processed.

This command can appear in a procedure or in a batch job. If used in this manner, it
terminates the job.

8-20

60459680

G

DIAL COMMAND
The DIAL command sends a one-line message to another terminal user.
Format:
DIAL,jsn,sss
Parameter

jsn

Description
Specifies the job sequence name (JSN) of the terminal to receive the
message.

s s s S p e c i fi e s t h e o n e - l i n e m e s s a g e .
The receiving terminal displays the message in the format:
FROM sjsn:sss
where sjsn is the JSN of the sending job and sss is the message.

The DIAL command can be entered only if the access subsystem is active. The terminal to
receive the message can have any subsystem active; it need not be under the access subsystem
or have access validation.
You can determine the appropriate jsn by using the WHATJSN command. If the terminal
specified is currently receiving output or has an input request outstanding, the message is
lost. No further attempt to transmit the message is made.

EXPLAIN COMMAND
The EXPLAIN command retrieves an online version of a CDC manual.
Format:
EXPLAIN,M=manual

EXPLAIN,manual
Parameter
M=manual

Description
Specifies the manual you want to retrieve. Your site determines what
manuals are available to you. If you omit the parameter M=manual, the
system generates a menu of the EXPLAIN features.

/f^\
60459680 F

8-20.1/8-20.2 |

GOODBYE COMMAND
Same as BYE command.
Format:
GOODBYE,application
This command can appear in a procedure or a batch job. If it does, it terminates the job.

HELLO COMMAND

0^\

The HELLO command logs you out of IAF and switches you to another application or reinitiates
the login sequence. Your terminal's characteristics do not change.
Format:
HELLO,application
If application is specified or if you are logged into IAF as a secondary application (in
which case, the application parameter is ignored), this command is the same as the
BYE,application command.
If application is not specified, this command logs you out of IAF, as in the BYE command,
but reinitiates the login sequence. Any temporary files that are to be retained must be
made permanent before the HELLO command is entered. This form of the command allows a new
user to log in without first having to establish communications with the network by dialing
the terminal telephone number.
This command can appear in a procedure or a batch job. If it does, it terminates the job.

60459680

F

8-21

HELL07 COMMAND
The HELL07 command allows you to submit a job that requires terminal input or output to a
linked SCOPE 2 system and to communicate interactively with an executing SCOPE 2 job. If
your SCOPE 2 job does not require interactive participation, you can route it to SCOPE 2
with the ROUTE command.
A job you submit through HELL07 (or the ROUTE command) must be a standard SCOPE 2 job using
SCOPE 2 control statements. The job initiates terminal input or output operations by
specifying CNF=YES on a FILE control statement or macro or by issuing a CONNECT macro for a
fi l e .
There are two modes of operation under HELL07: control mode and run mode. In control mode,
the initial mode on entering HELL07, you are communicating with the HELL07 utility. In
control mode you can submit a job to SCOPE 2, drop a job, or obtain status information on a
job. Once you submit a job to SCOPE 2 (by entering a SUBMIT directive), you enter run mode,
in which you interact directly with your job as it executes on the SCOPE 2 system. You
remain in run mode until you enter a termination directive.
The following command calls HELL07 and places the terminal in control mode.
Format:
HELL07.
If your NOS system is attached to a single SCOPE-2 mainframe, HELL07 normally responds with
a control mode prompt indicating that it is ready to accept a directive. The control mode
prompt consists of two asterisks (**). The run mode prompt, two dollar signs ($$), is
discussed under the PROMPT directive below. Both the control mode and run mode prompts are
followed by a ? prompt. The ? prompt appears at the beginning of the input line.
In a multimainframe environment, the following prompt may appear after you enter the HELL07
command•
MAINFRAME=
You respond by entering the logical identifier (LID) of the SCOPE 2 system you want to
access. -If the mainframe you request is not available, the following message appears at the
terminal.
MAINFRAME ID NOT IN ID TABLE
In response to this message you may enter an alternate LID, or you may terminate HELL07
processing by typing END.

HELL07 Directives
Once you have received the
obtain status information, or
directives. The termination
can be entered only In run

8-22

control mode prompt (**), you can submit a job, drop a job,
temporarily exit from HELL07 using the following HELL07
directive, *E0F directive, *E0P directive, and *E0S directive
mode. All other directives can be entered only in control mode.

60459680

D

iff^SN

Directive
ub2
(termination
directive)

Function
Suspends terminal communications with the SCOPE 2 job. The terminal
returns to control mode while the job continues to run. You can re
establish communications with the job (reenter run mode) later using
the RESUME directive.
ub2 represents the user break 2 termination sequence recognized by
your terminal. The actual termination sequence varies with the
terminal class; most terminal classes use ) or CTRL/T in the
termination sequence. Refer to Terminating Job Step in Section 16 and
to the B2 terminal definition command in Appendix J for more
information on the termination sequence.

JP\

DROP,J
or
DR.

Drops a SCOPE 2 job prior to normal termination. You can then enter a
status request to determine when drop completion has occurred.

END or E

Disconnects the terminal from HELL07 and drops any SCOPE 2 job active
at the time the END directive is issued.

*EOF

Inserts an end-of-information designator into terminal input data.

*EOP

Inserts an end-of-partition designator into terminal input data.

*EOS

Inserts an end-of-section designator into terminal input data.

EXIT

Disconnects the terminal from HELL07 but does not drop an active job
you have submitted to SCOPE 2. This allows you to leave HELL07,
execute other commands, eventually return to HELL07, and resume
monitoring the executing job.

PROMPT,status

Activates or deactivates the automatic run mode prompt which appears
at the terminal whenever the SCOPE 2 job requests input from the
terminal. The run mode prompt consists of two dollar signs ($$).
When the automatic prompt is off, terminal prompts must be supplied by
the executing SCOPE 2 job. Valid entries for status are as follows.

00t\,

Status

\

RESUME or R

Description

ON

The automatic prompt is activated (default).

OFF

The automatic prompt is deactivated.

Reestablishes terminal communications with an executing SCOPE 2 job.
This directive allows you to reenter run mode after having issued a
termination directive. On reentering run mode, the following message
appears at your terminal.
RESUMING 7000 MODE..
NOTE
If you have no SCOPE 2 job active when the
RESUME directive is issued, the above message
will be preceded by the warning message, NO
7000 JOB ACTIVE. The terminal will then
wait in run mode indefinitely for connected
file input/output with a SCOPE 2 job output.

60459680 E

8-23

Directive
STATUS or S

Function
Returns status information on the SCOPE 2 job submitted (using the
SUBMIT directive). The response is of the following form.
J OB NAME=jobname USERID=id STATUS=status

where:
jobname

Name of last job submitted to SCOPE 2.

id

Your user ID.

status

I n d i c a t e s t h e s t a t u s o f t h e j o b i d e n t i fi e d b y
jobname. The following values can be returned for
status.
status

Description

INPUT Indicates job waiting for terminal input.
OUTPUT Indicates job ready for terminal output.
RUN Indicates job is currently executing.
S TO P I n d i c a t e s j o b h a s a b o r t e d .

SUBMIT, lfn

Submits a local file lfn to the SCOPE 2 system for execution and
places the terminal in run mode. The SUBMIT directive must be entered
with no terminator. HELL07 responds to the directive with this
message.
FOftWARDING JOB TO MONITOR
The above message indicates that the job is being validated for
account codes. When validation is completed, the following message
appears.
/"SSHSv

ENTERING 7000 MODE .. WAIT
This message indicates that the logical file name has been routed to
SCOPE 2 for execution. At this point, you have entered run mode and
are waiting for the job to be scheduled. When the job is ready for
input, the run mode prompt ($$) will appear, unless you have disabled
the automatic prompt using the PROMPT,OFF directive.
If the connection to the SCOPE 2 system is inoperative, the following
message is returned in response to the SUBMIT directive.
7000 INTERACTIVE NOT ENABLED

8-24

60459680 D

/g$fSVy

Example:
The sample job below reads interactive input from a terminal and writes the input
i n f o r m a t i o n t o t h e o u t p u t fi l e . T h e s a m p l e j o b i s c o n t a i n e d i n a l o c a l fi l e c a l l e d
TESTJOB. Following the sample job is an example of an interactive session in which the
sample job is submitted to SCOPE 2 through HELL07.
Sample Job
H7J0B, STM FZ, job card parameters.
ACCOUNT,account card parameters,
FILE (INPUT,CNF=YES)
FILE *1^^\
e A
OLD:, MOD:, and NEW: prompts is suppressed.

When you enter the REDO command, the system prints the characters OLD:, followed by the
command to be modified. On the next line, the system prints the characters MOD: as a prompt
for you to enter modifications to the line. You enter modifications using the modification
symbols described below. When you finish your modifications and enter a carriage return,
the system executes the modified command and prints the characters NEW:, followed by the
modified line. Following is an example of a CATLIST command that is altered to specify a
d i f f e r e n t fi l e n a m e :
/REDO
OLD: CATLIST,LO=F,FN=BTK
MOD:
fac
NEW: CATLIST,LO=F,FN=FAC
In this example, the user spaced over to the last three characters in the line and typed in
a new file name.
The REDO command modification symbols are as follows:
Symbol

Effect

space Leaves the character unchanged.
# Deletes the character and shifts the remainder of the line one character to
the left.
& Replaces the character with a space.
A Inserts a character string before the character marked by the A. The
inserted string is terminated by a # or a carriage return. If a A is
followed immediately by a carriage return, the line is redisplayed as
modified up to that point, and further modifications are allowed.
! Deletes the remainder of the line.
o t h e r A n y o t h e r c h a r a c t e r e n t e r e d r e p l a c e s t h e o r i g i n a l c h a r a c t e r.
Example:
/REDO
OLD: RECLAIM/DUMP,TN=MYVSN,PF=*/ALPHA,GAMMA=BETA
MOD: A,Z.# DF FILADT=MS,
NEW: RECLAIM,Z./DUMP,DF=MYFIL,DT=MS,PF=*/ALPHA,GAMMA=BETA
8-34

60459680

F

jl^N

RUN COMMAND
The RUN command compiles and/or initiates execution of a local file. The compiler used (if
any) depends on the current subsystem. This command is valid only in the BASIC, FORTRAN,
FTNTS, and execute subsystems.
Formats:
RUN
RUN,I=lfni
RUN,B=lfn2

or

RUN,C=lfn2

RUN,I=lfnx ,B=lfn2 or RUN,1=1^ ,C=lfn2
R U N , T, q 1 , q 2 , . . . , q n
Parameter

Description

l f n j S p e c i fi e s t h e l o c a l fi l e t h a t c o n t a i n s t h e s o u r c e p r o g r a m t o b e
compiled and executed.
l f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e c o m p i l e r o r a s s e m b l e r o u t p u t fi l e . F i l e l f n 2 c a n b e
later executed in the execute subsystem by entering just RUN.
q i S p e c i fi e s l o c a l fi l e s t o r e p l a c e fi l e s s p e c i fi e d o n t h e P R O G R A M
statement in a FORTRAN 5 program.
The first format of the command compiles and initiates execution of the primary file.
The second format of the command compiles and initiates execution of the local file lfnj
if the subsystem and the source program are compatible.
The third format of the command compiles the primary file and generates a binary file,
lfn£, containing the resulting object code. The object code is not executed. File lfn£
can later be executed under the execute subsystem by entering the RUN command. The B and C
parameter names are interchangeable.
T h e f o u r t h f o r m a t c o m p i l e s l o c a l fi l e l f n j a n d g e n e r a t e s a b i n a r y fi l e , l f n 2 , c o n t a i n i n g
the resulting object code. The object code is not executed. File lfn2 can later be
executed under the execute subsystem by entering the RUN command. The B and C parameter
names are interchangeable.
The fifth format of the command applies only when running a previously compiled (object
code) FORTRAN program in the execute subsystem. It allows you to rename local files
specified in the PROGRAM statement without recompiling the program. Parameters qi through
qn specify new local file names to be used in place of those that currently exist in the
PROGRAM statement (the parameters are order-dependent and must correspond to those they
replace).
The following example illustrates the use of the RUN,T command. Assume a FORTRAN program
contains the following PROGRAM command.
PROGRAM TEST (INPUT,OUTPUT,AAA,BBB,TAPE1=AAA,TAPE2=SBB)
Normally,
Local file
names of
exists) by

to execute a program containing this command, you must define local file AAA.
BBB results from the execution of the program. However, you could change the
local files AAA and BBB without recompiling the program (if the object program
using the RUN,T command under the execute subsystem. For example:

RUN,T, INPUT,0UT PUT, CCC, DDD
60459680

E

8-35

I SECURE LOGIN COMMAND t
The secure login command ensures that your login information goes to the correct host
software. You can enter this command at any time you are connected to the network. If you
are already connected to a host when you enter this command, you will be unconditionally
disconnected and reconnected so that you can proceed with a secure login. This command does
not disconnect you from the network.
The secure login command includes a security character that is chosen by your site. The
procedure you use to enter this security character depends on your terminal type:
Te r m i n a l

Type

Secure

Login

Procedure

Asynchronous Press the BREAK key (or ATTN) and type the security character,
(except 2741s)

^SSv

X.25 PSN terminal Press the BREAK key (or ATTN), type the security character, and
enter the message transmission signal.
Mode 4 Clear the screen, enter a carriage return, and clear the screen
again. Type the security character and press the end-of-block key.
H A S P Ty p e t h e s e c u r i t y c h a r a c t e r a n d p r e s s t h e e n d - o f - l i n e k e y.
2780 or 3780 Enter /* and the security character from the console or a card
r e a d e r.
2 7 4 1 P r e s s t h e N L k e y t w i c e a n d t h e AT T N k e y o n c e . Ty p e t h e s e c u r i t y
character and press the NL key again.
1 3 2 7 0 C l e a r t h e s c r e ethe
n asecurity
n d e n character
t e r t h e and
p r o press
g r a m the
a t tENTER
e n t i o nkey.
1 key once. Type

SHOW COMMAND
The SHOW command calls an interactive procedure to display a screen formatting panel. SHOW
is used for testing purposes. It allows you to display a panel without having to write a
program that calls the panel.
Format:
SHOW,I-panelname
Parameter

Description

panelname Specifies the name of a compiled panel in user library PANELIB or in
a global library set.
Since the SHOW command is an interactive procedure, you can get help information for the
procedure by entering:
SHOW?

■/*S%u

t l f y o u r t e r m i n a l i s c o n n e c t e d t o a C D C N E T n e t w o r k , r e f e r t o t h e C D C N E T Te r m i n a l I n t e r f a c e f
Usage Manual.
8-36

60459680

G

TEXT COMMAND
The TEXT command selects text mode. Text mode allows direct entry of information (program
commands, data, or text) into the primary file without specifying line numbers. The system
interprets commands entered in text mode as text and does not process them directly.
Format:
TEXT
Unless changed during installation, the input line can consist of a maximum of 160
characters. The system appends data to the end of the file.
To terminate text mode, you should terminate the current input line with a carriage return,
then enter the interruption sequence or the termination sequence defined for the terminal in
use or the ETX character followed by a carriage return. (Interruption and termination in
sequences are discussed in section 16.)
The system automatically packs the text file to ensure that the data is in one logical
record.

NOTE
Do not enter a user break to terminate text
mode until you have received the ENTER TEXT
MODE message at your terminal. If entered
before this message, your user break clears
any unprocessed input, and no data goes into
t h e p r i m a r y fi l e .

WHATJSN COMMAND
ytPN,

The WHATJSN command returns the job sequence name (JSN) of the terminal you specify by a
user name. When several terminals are logged in under the specified user name, a list of
JSNs is returned. The WHATJSN command can be entered only from the access subsystem. It is
used in conjunction with the DIAL command to send a message to a user at an interactive
terminal.
Format:
WHATJSN,username
Parameter

Description

username Specifies the user name of user whose JSN you seek.

60459680

D

8-37

X COMMAND
The X command forces the system to interpret a command as a batch command. The X command
does not explicitly change the current subsystem for your job, however.
Format:
X,ccc
Parameter

Description

ccc Any valid batch command.
This command cannot exceed 80 characters. You must type the entire command but can omit the
terminator. However, you must enter a terminator after a command if you want to append a
comment to the command.
This command is used to enter a batch command that either is invalid in your current
subsystem or has a different function in that subsystem.
For example, the command
X,BASIC
calls the BASIC compiler instead of changing your subsystem to BASIC.

XMODEM COMMAND
The XMODEM command initiates the transfer of files between NOS and a microcomputer using the
Christensen protocol.
Format:
XMODEM,fn,td,ft,If,sp,ec,fm,cf.
XMODEM,FN=fn,TD=td,FT=ft,LF=lf,SP=sp,EC=ec,FM»fm,CF»cf.
Refer to appendix P for more information on the XMODEM command.

/^|bL,

8-38

60459680

G

PRIMARY FILE EDITING COMMANDS
To allow ease of editing primary files, the system provides a line editing capability that
can be used under any subsystem. The line editing capability allows you to:
List lines
Correct lines
Delete lines
Insert lines
Copy lines
The following commands perform the previously indicated editing operations upon the primary
fi l e :
Command

0^*.

Function

ALTER

C h a n g e s c h aracter strings within lines of the primary file.

DELETE

D e l e t e s l i n e s f r o m t h e p r i m a r y fi l e .

DUP

Duplicates lines and moves the duplicates to a specific location in
t h e p r i m a r y fi l e .

LIST

S e l e c t i v e l y l i s t s l i n e s o f t h e p r i m a r y fi l e .

MOVE

Moves lines from one location to another in the primary file.

READ

I n s e r t s a n o t h e r fi l e a t a s p e c i fi e d l o c a t i o n i n t h e p r i m a r y fi l e .

RESEQ

Resequences or adds line numbers to the primary file.

WRITE

Copies lines from the primary file to a specified sequenced file.

WRITEN

Copies lines from the primary file to an unsequenced file.

For other methods of file editing, refer to the EDIT, FSE, and XEDIT commands.

JfifiKRrfX^

i # ^ S

60459680 D

8-39 |

yfiPsIX

PARAMETER FORMAT
The following subsections describe the specific format of each command. Each command uses
one or more of the following parameters:
Parameter
Name

Format

Line number
Line range

Lines

Function
S p e c i fi e s p r i m a r y fi l e l i n e n u m b e r.

q..r

:1 »c2»» • • >cn

Specifies a set of sequential lines in the
p r i m a r y fi l e , q i s t h e b e g i n n i n g l i n e n u m b e r o f
the range, q may be specified by an asterisk to
signify that the line range starts at the
beginning of information (BOI). r represents
the ending line number of the range, r may be
s p e c i fi e d b y a n a s t e r i s k t o s i g n i f y t h a t t h e
line range ends at the end of information
(EOI). To specify a range from BOI to EOI you
may enter a single asterisk. When using line
numbers, q must be less than or equal to r.
Specifies a nonsequential set of lines and line
ranges separated by commas. Ci represents a
line or line range. For example,
60..90,120,10..40,350
is a valid entry. Regardless of the order the
lines or line ranges appear in the parameter,
the lines are processed in the order they appear
i n t h e fi l e .

Line number
increment

String

Generates sequential line numbers
when inserting text into the file or when
resequencing is required due to overlapping line
numbers (refer to Line Number Overlap section),
z must be in the range of one to 4095 and, when
omitted, assumes a value of one.
/string/

Specifies a sequence of characters, including
s p a c e s , d e l i m i t e d b y a s t r i n g d e l i m i t e r. T h e
string delimiter may not consist of the
following:
digit
)

* : letter
@ space

The delimiter chosen may not appear in the
string. In this subsection, a slant (/) is used
a s t h e s t r i n g d e l i m i t e r.

8-40

60459680 D

09Hr\

Parameter
Name

Format

Function

String pair

/stringl/string2/

Specifies two different character sequences
s e p a r a t e d b y a s t r i n g d e l i m i t e r. S t r i n g l
r e p r e s e n t s a s t r i n g a s i t a p p e a r s i n t h e fi l e .
String2 represents how stringl will appear after
command processing. Stringl and string2 may be
null strings. A null string contains no
characters. For example, if stringl were null,
the string pair would appear as //string2/ .
Refer to the string parameter description for
invalid string delimiters.

File name

fi l e n a m e

A file name consisting of 1 to 7 characters
where each character is a letter or digit.

SUPPRESSING EDITING RESPONSES
When changing lines within a file, the changed lines are displayed immediately after the
edit command has been processed. If you do not want the changed lines listed, enter:
BRIEF
This command will prevent the listing of changed lines. To resume listing changed lines,
enter:
NORMAL
The BRIEF and NORMAL commands are described earlier in this section.

LINE NUMBER OVERLAP
Some editing commands require the system to resequence lines of your file. New line numbers
may overlap existing line numbers. If this occurs, you are asked If the command should be
executed:
INSERTED LINES OVERLAP EXISTING LINES, AT 130.
ENTER Y TO CONTINUE OR N TO STOP
If your response is YES, the lines will be inserted and all lines that are overlapped will
have new line numbers generated in increments of the specified line number increment. If no
increment is specified, new line numbers are generated in increments of one from the last
inserted line. If your response is NO, the command is not executed.
If your primary file is a BASIC or FORTRAN program, select the corresponding subsystem
before editing. If you are not under the correct subsystem, the system may not make the
necessary changes when resequencing lines. Refer to the RESEQ command in section 9 for more
Information on how the system resequences FORTRAN and BASIC programs.

60459680 D

8-41

INSERTING LINES

You can add a line to the primary file by prefacing it with a unique line number.
The following example demonstrates how to insert a single line into a sequenced file.
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
00115 Let c=30
List
00100
00110
00115
00120

LET A=1
LET B=10
LET C=30
FOR 1=1 TO B

File is listed.

Line is entered inserting
line 115 between 110 and 120
File is listed to show
corrected version.

00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END

ALTER COMMAND

The ALTER command enables you to change character strings within specified lines in the
primary file.
Format:
A LT E R , c 1 , c 2 , . . . , c n , / s t r i n g l / s t r i n g 2 /
where the lines parameter is optional. If the lines parameter is omitted, the changes
s p e c i fi e d b y s t r i n g l a n d s t r i n g 2 a p p l y t o t h e e n t i r e fi l e .
When you enter the lines and string pair, only the occurrences of stringl appearing in the
lines specified by the lines parameter are changed to string2.
W h e n y o u e n t e r t h e l i n e s p a r a m e t e r, s t r i n g l , a n d a n u l l s t r i n g 2 ( / s t r i n g l / / ) , a l l
occurrences of stringl appearing in the lines specified in the lines parameter are deleted,
W h e n y o u e n t e r t h e l i n e s p a r a m e t e r, a n u l l s t r i n g l , a n d s t r i n g 2 ( / / s t r i n g 2 / ) , s t r i n g 2 i s
appended to the lines specified in the lines parameter.

| 8-42

60459680 D

To correct a single line in error, you can simply respecify the line number and enter the
l i n e c o r r e c t l y.
The following example demonstrates how to change a line by entering the corrected version of
the line:
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
00110 Let b=20

List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
0200 END

File is listed.

";I,"IS ";A

Line is entered changing
B's value from 10 to 20.
READY message is not
given after entry of line
File is listed to show
corrected version.

•;I,"IS ";A

When you enter the lines parameter, and stringl and string2 are null (///), the lines
s p e c i fi e d i n t h e l i n e s p a r a m e t e r a r e l i s t e d .
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
00200 END

File is listed.

•;I,"IS ";A

READY.
a L t e r, 1 0 0 . . 1 3 0 , / b / c /
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 to C
READY.
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO C
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
60459680 D

ALTER command is entered, changing
B to C in lines 100 through 130.
Changed lines are displayed
a u t o m a t i c a l l y.
File is listed to show
corrected version.

•;I,"IS ";A

8-43

DELETE COMMAND
You can delete specified lines from the primary file using the DELETE command.
Format:
DELETE,c1,C2,...,cn,/string/
where either the lines parameter or string parameter must be specified.
When you enter the lines parameter and do not enter the string parameter, all lines
specified by the lines parameter are deleted.
When you enter the string parameter and do not enter the lines parameter, all lines in the
fi l e c o n t a i n i n g t h e s p e c i fi e d s t r i n g a r e d e l e t e d .
When you enter both the lines parameter and the string parameter, only those lines specified
by the lines parameter containing the string specified in the string parameter are deleted.
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00105 LET B=10
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO C
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL I;I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
deLete,100..130,/b=10/
00105 LET B=10

READY.
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO C
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL I;I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END

| 8-44

File is listed.

DELETE command is entered,
deleting all lines from 100
through 130 which contain
the string B=10. The deleted
line is automatically listed.
File is listed to show
corrected version.

60459680 D

•"-%^V

You can also delete a line by specifying its line number and entering an empty line for it,
The following example demonstrates how to delete a single line from a sequenced file by
entering the number of the line to be deleted.
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00105 LET B*10
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 to C .
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
00105

P

List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO C
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
00200 END

File is listed.

00105 followed by carriage
return is entered, deleting
line 00105. The READY message
is not given after entry
of line.
File is listed to show
corrected version.

";I,"IS ";A

DUP COMMAND
/sP^\

You can duplicate lines and insert them in a specified location in the primary file using
the DUP command.
Format:
D U P, q . . r, n , z
where q..r is a line range and may be specified as a single line number.
n specifies the line number after which the duplicated the lines are to be inserted. If n
i s n o t s p e c i fi e d , t h e d u p l i c a t e d l i n e s a r e i n s e r t e d a t t h e e n d o f t h e fi l e . I f n i s l e s s
t h a n t h e fi r s t l i n e n u m b e r i n t h e fi l e , t h e d u p l i c a t e d l i n e s a r e i n s e r t e d a t t h e b e g i n n i n g
o f t h e fi l e . I f n i s b e t w e e n t w o e x i s t i n g l i n e n u m b e r s , t h e d u p l i c a t e d l i n e s a r e i n s e r t e d
between the adjacent lines and incremented by z. If the new line numbers overlap existing
edit file line numbers, line resequencing occurs as described under Line Number Overlap.

60459680 D

8-45

When BASIC statements containing line numbers and their referenced lines are duplicated, the
lines and their duplicates are kept separate. The duplicate statements containing line
references reference duplicate lines. Duplicate statements do not reference original
statements.
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
dup,130..150,150,10
00160 A=A*I
00170 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00180 NEXT I

";I,"IS ";A

READY.
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00160 A=A*I
00170 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00180 NEXT I
0200 END

File is listed.

DUP command is entered,
duplicating lines 130 through
150, and inserting the
duplicates after line 150,
incrementing subsequent lines
b y 1 0 . A ff e c t e d l i n e s a r e
automatically listed.
File is listed to show
corrected version.

/*5tfB£|\

/**^\
UST COMMAND
You can selectively list the lines of the primary file using the LIST command.
Format:
L I S T, C ! , C 2 , . . . , c n , / s t r i n g /
I f y o u s p e c i f y n o p a r a m e t e r s , t h e s y s t e m l i s t s a l l l i n e s i n t h e fi l e . To l i s t a l l o f t h e
lines in a local file other than the primary file, you can use the alternate format of the
LIST command, described earlier in this section under Job Processing Commands.

8-46

60459680 D

The following example illustrates how to use the command.
Example:
READY.
List

L i s t t h e e n t i r e fi l e .

00100 LET A=1
00105 LET B=10
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO C
00130 A=A+1
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I, "IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
List,100..130

List a range of lines.

00100 LET A=1
00105 LET B=10
00110 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO C
00130 A=A+1
READY.
List,120,100,140..200

List a nonsequential set of lines.

00100 LET A=1
00120 FOR 1=1 TO C
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I, "IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
List,/ a/

List all lines that contain the
character A.

00100 LET A=1
00130 A=A+1
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I, "IS ";A
READY.
List,130..200,/a/

L i s t o n l y t h o s e l i n e s i n a s p e c i fi e d
range that contain the character A.

00130 A=A+1
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I, "IS ";A
READY.

y j fff t x

60459680 D

8-47

MOVE COMMAND
You may also manipulate lines of the primary file with the use of the MOVE command.
MOVE command moves lines from one location in the primary file to another location.

The

Format:
MOVE,q..r,n,z
where q..r is the line range parameter and may be specified by a single line number. The
line number (n) and line number increment (z) parameters are optional.
The line range parameter specifies the lines to be moved.
If the n parameter is omitted, the lines are moved to the end of the file and successive
line numbers are generated in increments of z, if specified, from the last line of the
p r i m a r y fi l e .
If the new line numbers overlap existing line numbers in the primary file, line resequencing
occurs as described in the Line Number Overlap subsection.
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
move,100,110,10
INSERT LINES OVERLAP EXISTING LINES, AT 120.
ENTER Y TO CONTINUE OR N TO STOP
? y
00120 LET A=1
00130 FOR 1=1 TO B
00140 A=A*I
00150 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00160 NEXT I
READY.
List
00110 LET B=10
00120 LET A=1
00130 FOR 1=1 TO B
00140 A=A*I
00150 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00160 NEXT I
00200 END

8-48

File is listed.

MOVE command is entered,
moving line 100 and
inserting it immediately
f o l l o w i n g l i n e 11 0 ,
incrementing subsequent lines
b y 1 0 . A ff e c t e d l i n e s a r e
automatically listed.

File is listed to show
corrected version.

•;I,"IS ";A

60459680 D

READ COMMAND
The READ command inserts the lines of a file (read file) at a specific location in the
p r i m a r y fi l e .
Format:
READ,filename,n,z
where the line number (n) and line number increment (z) parameters are optional. The
parameter filename is the name of the file to be inserted.
When the line number parameter is entered, the contents of the file to be inserted are
inserted immediately following line n. If the parameter n is a line number that is not in
t h e p r i m a r y fi l e , t h e r e a d fi l e i s i n s e r t e d a f t e r t h e l a r g e s t l i n e n u m b e r t h a t i s l e s s t h a n
n. The line numbers of read files are incremented by 1, unless an increment is specified by
the z parameter.
If the line number parameter is not entered, the contents of the read file are added to the
end of the primary file and incremented by z from the last line number of the primary file.
For sequenced read files, line numbers are added in increments of one, unless otherwise
specified by the z parameter. A sequenced read file will be resequenced in increments of z
from the last line number in the primary file.
Unsequenced read files will have a five-digit line number added and followed by a blank (in
the FORTRAN and FTNTS subsystems, the line number is added but not the blank). If a line
consists of only a line number or a line number followed by zero or one blank, the line will
n o t b e i n s e r t e d i n t o t h e p r i m a r y fi l e .
If the new line numbers overlap existing lines in the primary file, line resequencing occurs
as described in the Line Number Overlap subsection.

60459680

D

8-49

In the BASIC subsystem, when inserting a sequenced read file where no overlapping of line
numbers occurs, the system handles line references within the read file in the following
manner. The system automatically updates line references within statements if the referenced
lines are within the read file. It does not alter line references within statements if the
lines referenced lie outside of the read file.
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
00200 END

Primary file is listed,

•;I,"IS ";A

READY,
get,skid
READY.
r e a d ,s k i d ,1 5 0 ,1 0
INSERT LINES OVERLAP EXISTING LINES,
AT 200.
ENTER Y TO CONTINUE OR N TO STOP
? y
00160 LET A=1
00170 LET B=50
00180 FOR 1=1 TO B
00190 A=A*I
00200 PRINT "FACTORIAL";I,A
00210 NEXT I
00220 END
READY.
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00160 LET A=1
00170 LET B=50
00180 FOR 1=1 TO B
00190 A=A*I
00200 PRINT "FACTORIAL";I,A
00210 NEXT I
00220 END

Read file is made local.
READ command is entered. With line
increments of 10, the read file is
inserted after line 150.
Y is entered to continue
command processing.

Inserted lines are
automatically listed.

Primary file is listed to
show corrected version.

*nS™£v

8-50

60459680 D

RESEQ COMMAND
Refer to the RESEQ command in section 9.

WRITE COMMAND
You can also append lines and line numbers of the primary file to another specified file
(destination file) by using the WRITE command.
Format:
W R I T E , fi l e n a m e , c 1 , c 2 , . . . , c n , / s t r i n g /
where the required parameter filename is the name of a local file. The lines and string
parameters are optional.
If the lines parameter is entered and the string parameter is omitted, all lines specified
by the lines parameter are copied to the destination file. If both the lines parameter and
string parameter are entered, the lines specified by the lines parameter which contain the
s t r i n g s p e c i fi e d b y t h e s t r i n g p a r a m e t e r a r e c o p i e d t o t h e d e s t i n a t i o n fi l e .
If the string parameter is entered and the lines parameter is omitted, all lines in the
p r i m a r y fi l e c o n t a i n i n g t h e s p e c i fi e d s t r i n g a r e c o p i e d t o t h e d e s t i n a t i o n fi l e . I f b o t h
the lines and string parameters are omitted, all lines of the primary file are copied to the
d e s t i n a t i o n fi l e .
Example:
List
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00115 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
00200 END

P r i m a r y fi l e i s l i s t e d .

•;I,"IS ";A

READY,
write ,fiLe2,100.. 110,120..*

READY.
L i s t , f = fi L e 2

WRITE command is entered,
writing lines 100 through
110 and lines 120 through
200 to destination file
FILE2.
FILE2 is listed.

00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B

00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL
00150 NEXT I
00200 END

60459680 D

•;I,"IS ";A

8-51

WRITEN COMMAND
To copy lines from a sequenced primary file to an unsequenced destination file, enter the
WRITEN command. The WRITEN command copies specified lines of the primary file to the
destination file while removing the line numbers; resulting in an unsequenced destination
fi l e .
Format:
WRITEN,filename,c ±,C2,•••»cn,/string/

Example:
list
00100 LET A=1
00110 LET B=10
00115 LET C=20
00120 FOR 1=1 TO B
00130 A=A*I
00140 PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
00150 NEXT I
00200 END
READY.
w r i t e n , fi L e 3 , 1 0 0 . . 11 0 , 1 2 0 . . *
READY.
L i s t , f = fi L e 3
LET A=1
LET B=10
FOR 1=1 TO B
A=A*I
PRINT "FACTORIAL ";I,"IS ";A
NEXT I
END

Primary file is listed.

WRITEN command is entered,
writing lines 100 through
110 and lines 120 through
2 0 0 t o d e s t i n a t i o n fi l e
FILE3.
FILE3 is listed.

Parameter combinations and functions are the same for the WRITEN and WRITE commands.

8-52

60459680 D

FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

The file management commands manipulate files assigned to your job. The commands included
in this category are:
ASSIGN

EVICT

RENAME

SKIPF

BKSP

FCOPY

REQUEST

SKIPFB

CLEAR

LIST80

RESEQ

SKIPR

COPY

LOCK

RETURN

SORT

COPYBF

L072

REWIND

TCOPY

COPYBR

MFQUEUE

ROUTE

TDUMP

COPYCF

NEW

SCOPY

UNLOAD

COPYCR

OUT

SECHDR

UNLOCK

COPYEI

OVWRITE

SETFAL

VERIFY

COPYSBF

PACK

SETFS

WRITEF

COPYX

PRIMARY

SKIPEI

WRITER

DOCMENT
The commands in this section position files, copy
method and format of input or output, sort files,
fi l e s t o a s p e c i fi c d e v i c e t y p e ; c h a n g e t h e fi l e
interlock status; and release them from your job.
records in a file or documentation in a file.

data from one file to another, specify the
and add corrections. You can assign your
t y p e , i d e n t i fi c a t i o n c o d e , a n d w r i t e
You can also receive information about

If you use these commands on files structured by CYBER Record Manager (CRM), the output may
not reflect the CRM logical file structure. The only commands recommended for copying CRM
files are COPY and COPYEI.
If a file is not specifically assigned through the use of an ASSIGN, LABEL, or REQUEST
command, the system assigns the file to available mass storage.

0®*\

60459680 E

9-1

ASSIGN COMMAND
The ASSIGN command directs the system to assign a file to the specified device or device
type. The following descriptions refer to devices other than magnetic tape. For use of the
ASSIGN command with magnetic tape, refer to section 12.
Format:
ASSIGN,nn,Ifn,checkpoint,AL=level.
Parameter

Description

n n S p e c i fi e s t h e d e v i c e o r d e v i c e t y p e t o w h i c h t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e i s t o
be assigned; nn may be either the EST ordinal of a peripheral device
or the device type as defined as follows:
Type

Equipment

DB 885-42 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
DC 895-1/2 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
DD 834 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
D E E x t e n d e d m e m o r y.
■

DF

887

Disk

Storage

Subsystem

(4K

sector;

full-track).

DG 836 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
|

DH

887

Disk

Storage

Subsystem

(16K

sector;

full-track).

DI 844-21 Disk Storage Subsystem (half-track).
DJ 844-41/44 Disk Storage Subsystem (half-track).
DK 844-21 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
DL 844-41/44 Disk Storage Subsystem (full-track).
D M 8 8 5 - 11 / 1 2 D i s k S t o r a g e S u b s y s t e m ( h a l f - t r a c k ) .
D P D i s t r i b u t i v e d a t a p a t h t o e x t e n d e d m e m o r y.
D Q 8 8 5 - 11 / 1 2 D i s k S t o r a g e S u b s y s t e m ( f u l l - t r a c k ) .
DV 819 Disk Storage Subsystem (single-density).
DW 819 Disk Storage Subsystem (double-density).
MS Mass storage device.
NE Null equipment.
TTt Interactive terminals.

tThis device type applies only to interactive origin jobs.

9-2

60459680

H

Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e a s s i g n e d t o t h e s p e c i fi e d
equipment.
c h e c k p o i n t S p e c i fi e s t h a t l f n i s t o b e u s e d a s a c h e c k p o i n t fi l e ( r e f e r t o
section 13).
checkpoint

Meaning

CK Each dump is written at the previous EOI of lfn.
CB Each dump is written at the BOI of lfn.

JpV

A L = l e v e l S p e c i fi e s t h e s e c u r i t y a c c e s s l e v e l t o a s s i g n t o t h e fi l e . U n l e s s
changed by your site, level can be one of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
The default is the current access level of the job.
On a secured system, the access level you specify must be valid for
the job (ENQUIRE,B returns this information) and for the device to
which you are assigning the file.
On an unsecured system, the parameter has no effect. The system does,
however, check for valid parameter specifications.

0^\

When using this command to assign a file for checkpoint dumps on a
secured system, use the AL=level parameter to assign the file at the
highest access level valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns this
information). The CKP command aborts the job if the checkpoint file
is not at this access level.

Example 1:
ASSIGN,MS,0UT PUT.
This command assigns file OUTPUT to mass storage. With this assignment in an interactive
job, you can cause output normally printed at your terminal to be written on a mass storage
file instead. Here, output means information generated by a program during execution.
Dayfile messages are still printed at the terminal. Once this assignment is made, output is
written on the mass storage file OUTPUT until the file is returned or reassigned.

Example 2:
ASSIGN,TT,XYZ.
This command assigns file XYZ to your interactive terminal. The assignment means that input
that the system would have read from file XYZ is instead solicited by a prompt at the
terminal and that output that the system would have written on file XYZ is instead displayed
at the terminal.
If you have multiple files assigned to your terminal, you may get some unpredictable results.

60459680 C

9-3

Example 3:
ASSIGN, DI, ABC.
This command assigns file ABC to an 844-21 disk drive, if one is available.
The ASSIGN command can also be used to create or access existing seven- or nine-track
unlabeled tapes. For a description of the command as it applies to magnetic tape
assignment, refer to section 12, Tape Management.

BKSP COMMAND
The BKSP command directs the system to bypass a specified number of logical records in the
reverse direction.
Format:
BKSP,lfn,n,m.
Parameter

Description

lfn Specifies the name of the file to be backspaced.
n Specifies the number of logical records (decimal) to backspace; if
this parameter is omitted, the system assumes n=l. The maximum for n
is 262143.

s*^\

m S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e m o d e : C f o r c o d e d , B f o r b i n a r y. I f m i s o m i t t e d ,
the system assumes the file is in binary mode.
The BKSP request can be issued at any point in a logical record. If, for example, FILE1
were positioned within the third record, a
BKSP.FILEl.
request would reposition F1LE1 to the beginning of the third record. The system does not /^^.
backspace past the beginning-of-information (BOI). However, EOF indicators are considered )
separate records and are included in the record count.
The BKSP command has no effect on a primary file since that file is rewound before every
operation.

^

9-4

60459680

C

^hitfi^!%k

CLEAR COMMAND
The CLEAR command releases all files currently assigned to the job. You can also specify
files that are not to be released.
Format:
CLEAR.
or
CLEAR,*,lf^ ,lfn2 lfnn.
The first format releases all files. The second format releases all files except those
named. If no files are named, all files assigned to the job are released.
There are several exceptions. The CLEAR command does not release any files that have
checkpoint or no-auto-drop status. Certain system scratch files (for example, ZZZZZCO,
ZZZZZC1, ZZZZZC2, and ZZZZZLD) have no-auto-drop status. You can give any local file this
status by using the SETFS command.
Refer to RETURN command in this section for the operations performed on each file type.

COPY COMMAND
The COPY command copies data from one file to another if the files are within the range of
permissible formats listed in table 9-1.

NOTE
When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF file
marks, the resulting file may have a differ
ent logical file structure. In particular,
when copying such a file to tape, the system
adds an EOR mark to the end of the file.
Such changes do not affect file content but
may cause verification errors.

00^\
\

60459680

C

9-5

Table 9-1. Range of Permissible Formats for the COPY Command

Output (0=lfn2)

9-6

Tape Formats
I

SI

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

SI
Tape
Formats S

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

L

Yes

Yes

Yes

F

Yes

Yes

Yes

Mass Storage
or Terminal

Input
Olfnx)

Mass
Storage
or
Terminal

If
W6
I
i
mi
m®m
Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

/////Yy

/sss/A

Yes

Yes

60459680 C

Order-dependent format:
C 0 P Y, l f n i , l f n 2 , x , c , t c , c o p y c n t , b s i z e , c h a r c n t , e r l i m i t , p i p 2 . . . p n , l f n 3 , n s
Order-independent format:
COPY,I=lfn1>o=lfn2,V=x,M=c,TC=tc,N=copycnt,BS=bsize,CC=charcnt,EL=erlimit,
PO=Plp2...pn,L=lfn3,NS=ns.
The parameters can appear in order-dependent format, order-independent format, or a
combination of both. If order-dependent and order-independent parameters are mixed in one
COPY command, the order-dependent parameters must appear in their proper position. All
parameters are optional. However, the specification of certain parameters precludes the
application of others. A nonapplicable parameter may be ignored or it may be invalid. This
is stated in the individual descriptions of the parameters.
Parameter

Description

Default

I = l f n i S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e c o p i e d . I N P U T
0 = l f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e r e c e i v i n g t h e c o p y. O U T P U T
V=x

/ fi ^ V

If

the x parameter (1 to 7 alphanumeric
characters) is present, both files are rewound,
copied, rewound, verified, and rewound. The x
parameter must not be zero.

No

verify

M = c S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r t h e i n p u t a n d o u t p u t fi l e s a r e
c o d e d fi l e s .
c

Description

Cl Coded mode is set on input only.

Binary

C2 Coded mode is set on output only.
x Coded mode is set on both input
and output. The value x is any alpha
numeric, 1- to 7-character string.
This parameter applies only to S and L format
tapes. If coded mode is set on an SI tape,
the system aborts the job. For other formats,
the system ignores the mode setting.
TC=tc

S p e c i fi e s t h e t e r m i n a t i o n c o n d i t i o n f o r c o p y
ing used in conjunction with N=copycnt. The
termination condition can be specified as
follows:
tc

Copy to double
EOF (TC=D or
TC=EOD)

Description

F or The N keyword specifies the number
E O F o f fi l e s t o c o p y .
I or Copy to the end of information. The
EOI N keyword is ignored.
60459680 D

9-7

J ^ ^ ^ \

Parameter

Description
tc

Default

Description

D or The N keyword is the number of double
EOD EOFs to copy to. If N > 1 is speci
fied together with this TC value, and
v e r i f y i s a l s o s e l e c t e d , t h e fi l e s a r e
v e r i fi e d o n l y t o t h e fi r s t e m p t y fi l e
(COPY calls VERIFY with N=0 parameter).
N = c o p y c n t S p e c i fi e s t h e c o p y c o u n t u s e d w i t h t h e c o p y t e r m i - 1
nation condition specified by the parameter TC=tc.
B S = b s i z e S p e c i fi e s t h e m a x i m u m b l o c k s i z e ( i n c e n t r a l
memory words) which specifies S or L tape PRU size,
This applies only when copying to or from S and
L tapes. It cannot be specified with the
CC=charcnt parameter.
C C = c h a r c n t S p e c i fi e s t h e m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f c h a r a c t e r s i n
an S or L tape block. This parameter can be
specified only when copying to or from S and L
tapes. The PRU size and unused bit count are
calculated from the character count. However,
the unused bit count is used only when writing a
full block to an S or L output tape during a copy
from mass storage, I, or SI format tape. The
charcnt value should be a multiple of 10. If it
is not, the characters that exceed the charcnt
value in the last word of the record are discarded
when writing an S or L format tape. This parameter
cannot be specified with the BS=bsize parameter.

If CC=charcnt
i s n o t s p e c i fi e d ,
1000g for S tape
copy and 2000g
for L tape copy.
No t used (the
PRU size is
s p e c i fi e d b y
the BS=bsize
parameter)
■- ^ \

E L = e r l i m i t S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f n o n f a t a l e r r o r s a l l o w e d 0 ( z e r o )
before abort. This includes both parity errors
and block-too large errors which are returned by
the tape subsystem after completing recovery
p r o c e d u r e s . I f E L = U i s s p e c i fi e d , u n l i m i t e d e r r o r
processing is allowed. Error recovery is supported
on mass storage and on all tape formats but is not
supported on a terminal or on unit record equipment.
In the latter cases, any error aborts the job.

,-**®?v

9-8

60459680 C

j^$^*\

Parameter

Description

Default

P0=p^p2...p One or more of the following processing options:
E Input blocks with parity errors or
block-too-large errors are processed
(copied).

Error blocks
are skipped.

D Any noise blocks generated by a copy
from mass storage, I format tape, or
SI format tape to an S or L format
tape are deleted. This parameter can
not be specified on any other type of
copy.

For S or L bi
nary tapes,
noise blocks
are padded to
noise size with
binary zeros;
for coded mode,
they are padded
with blanks.

R Allows record splitting during a copy
from mass storage, I format, or SI
format to S or L format tape. This
parameter cannot be specified on any
other type of copy.

Record splitting
is not allowed.

M C o p y fi l e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e c o p y
t e r m i n a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s p e c i fi e d b y
the keyword TC, eliminating each
EOF on output. This option is
primarily for use with labeled S
and L output tapes since it
e l i m i n a t e s t h e c o n fl i c t o f t h e
double meaning of a tape mark on
these formats (the tape mark on
these formats serves as both an EOF
and label group delimiter).

C o p y fi l e s
according to
s p e c i fi c a t i o n
of the copy
termination (TC),
writing an EOF
a f t e r e a c h fl L e
on output.

L = l f n 3 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f a n a l t e r n a t e fi l e t o
receive parity error messages when extended
error processing Is in effect (nonzero EL
s p e c i fi e d ) , i n w h i c h c a s e , fi l e n a m e l f n 3
must not be the same as lfn^ or lfn2«

OUTPUT

NS=ns Noise size. Any input block containing
fewer than ns characters is considered to
be noise and is discarded. This parameter
Is valid for Input tapes in S, L, or F
format. The maximum value that can be
s p e c i fi e d f o r n s i s 4 1 . I f N S = 0 i s s p e c i
fied, the default value of 18 is used.
Example:
The following COPY command combines order-dependent and order-independent parameters.
C0PY,FILE1,FILE2,VERIFY,C0DED,E0F,6,L=MY0UT,P0=E,EL=10.
FILE1 is the input file, and FILE2 the output file. Six coded files are copied and
verified. Up to 10 nonfatal errors are allowed, and the bad data is copied with informative
error messages written to the file MYOUT.
60459680 D

9-9

The COPY command begins a copying operation at the current position of both files unless the
v e r i f y o p t i o n i s s p e c i fi e d . I f v e r i fi c a t i o n i s s p e c i fi e d , b o t h fi l e s a r e r e w o u n d b e f o r e t h e
copying begins and rewound, verified, and rewound again after the copying is completed.
Th i s v e r i fi c a t i o n m a y n o t b e m e a n i n g f u l i f th e l o g i c a l s tr u c tu r e o f th e tw o fi l e s i s
incompatible.

COPY TERMINATION
Copying continues until the termination condition
The termination condition can be a file count, a
is terminated by a double EOF (for TC=EOD), the
t r a n s f e r r e d t o l f n 2 . I f l f n ^ l f ^ t h e n a m e d fi l e
tion Is satisfied or EOI is encountered.

for copying is met or EOI is encountered.
double EOF count, or EOI. If the copying
second EOF is detected on lfnx, but is not
Is read until the termination condi

If the copying command specifies a file count, TC=EOF, and EOI is encountered on the input
fi l e b e f o r e t h e fi l e c o u n t i s s a t i s fi e d , a n a d d i t i o n a l E O F i s w r i t t e n o n t h e o u t p u t fi l e
only if data or records have been transferred since the previous EOF was written (or since
the beginning of the copying if no EOFs have been encountered).

BLOCK SIZES
Both L and F tapes may require additional field length to accommodate their maximum block
size. The maximum block size for an L tape copy is specified either by the BS=bsize
parameter (or its default), or it is calculated from the CC=charcnt. The maximum block size
for an F tape is determined by the maximum frame or character count specified when the file
was assigned. The more accurate the selection of these values which determine block size,
the less are the requirements for field length, CPU time, and I/O time.

PROCESSING OPTIONS
The PO=D option specifies noise block processing, and the PO=R option specifies record
splitting for copies from mass storage, I format, or SI format to S or L format tapes. Due
t o t h e i n c o m p a t i b i l i t i e s b e t w e e n t h e l o g i c a l s t r u c t u r e o f t h e i n p u t a n d o u t p u t fi l e s ,
records may be encountered on the input file that are too small or too large to be copied
directly to the S or L output tape. If the output file block size is less than noise block
size, it is deleted if PO=D is specified. If PO=D is not specified, the block size is
rounded to the word multiple of noise size with binary zero fill for a binary S or L tape or
with blank fill for a coded S or L tape. Empty records on the input file are skipped since
they cannot exist on an S or L tape. If PO=R is specified and an input file record length
exceeds the S or L tape maximum block size (the PRU size as specified by BS=bsize or its
default, or by CC=charcnt), it Is split into multiple blocks.
The PO=M option makes it possible to copy a multifile file to a labeled S or L format tape
without writing the EOF tape marks. This avoids the conflict of a tape mark serving the
double purpose of defining an EOF and delimiting a label group on S and L format tapes.
This is In keeping with the tendency In the computer industry to define a tape mark only as
a l a b e l d e l i m i t e r.
The EL=erlimlt and PO=E parameters provide extended error processing.

9_10

60459680

D

1

jp^?$&ff*=S

COPYBF COMMAND
The COPYBF command copies a specified number of files from one multifile file to another.

NOTE
The COPYBF command is not recommended for
use with S, L, or F format tapes because it
does not have the data specification
parameters needed to accommodate the
variety of data formats possible with those
tape formats. For S, L, or F format tape
copying operations, issue a COPY command
with the appropriate parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .

When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF file marks, the resulting file may have a different
l o g i c a l fi l e s t r u c t u r e . I n p a r t i c u l a r, w h e n c o p y i n g s u c h a fi l e t o t a p e , t h e s y s t e m a d d s a n
EOR mark to the end of the file. Such changes do not affect file content but may cause
v e r i fi c a t i o n e r r o r s .
Format:
C O P Y B F, I f n ! , l f n 2 , n , c .
Parameter

Description

l f n l S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o c o p y . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d ,
file INPUT is assumed.
I f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o r e c e i v e t h e c o p y . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r
is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.
n S p e c i fi e s n u m b e r o f fi l e s ( d e c i m a l ) o n l f n ^ t o c o p y . I f t h i s
parameter is omitted, 1 is assumed.
c Indicates that the copying to or from an S or L format tape should be
performed in coded rather than binary mode. C is a one- to sevencharacter string. If coded mode Is set on an SI tape, the system
aborts the job. The system ignores this parameter for mass storage
files and I and F format tape files.
T h e c o p y i n g b e g i n s a t t h e c u r r e n t p o s i t i o n o f l f n x . i f l f n i = l f n 2 , t h e fi l e i s r e a d
u n t i l t h e fi l e c o u n t i s s a t i s fi e d o r E O I i s e n c o u n t e r e d .
If EOI is encountered on lfnj before the file count is satisfied, an additional EOF is
generated on lfn2 only if data or records have been transferred since the previous EOF was
written (or since the beginning of copy if no EOFs have been encountered).

60459680

C

9_u

COPYBR COMMAND
The COPYBR command copies a specified number of records from one file to another.

NOTE
The COPYBR command is not recommended for
use with S, L, or F format tapes because it
does not have the data specification
parameters needed to accommodate the
variety of data formats possible with those
tape formats. For an S, L, or F format
tape copying operation, issue a COPY
command with the appropriate parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .

When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF file marks, the resulting file may have a different
logical file structure. In particular, when copying such a file to tape, the system adds an
EOR mark to the end of the file. Such changes do not affect file content but may cause
v e r i fi c a t i o n e r r o r s .
Format:
CO P Y B R, I fn j ,Ifn 2 ,n ,c .
Parameter

Description

l f n j S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o c o p y . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d ,
file INPUT is assumed.
I f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o r e c e i v e t h e c o p y. I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r
is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.
n

S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f r e c o r d s
is omitted, 1 is assumed.

(decimal)

to

copy;

if

this

parameter

c Indicates that the copying to or from an S or L format tape should be
performed in coded rather than binary mode. The value C is an alpha
numeric one- to seven-character string. If coded mode is set on an SI
tape, the system aborts the job. The system ignores the mode setting
for other formats.
The copying begins at the current position of lfnj. EOF indicators are considered
separate records and are included in the record count. If lfn^=lfn2, the file is read
until the record count is satisfied or EOI is encountered.
If EOI is encountered on lfnj before the record count is satisfied, an additional EOR is
written on lfn2 only if data has been transferred since the previous EOR or EOF was
written (or since the beginning of the copy if no EORs or EOFs have been encountered).

9-12

60459680

C

"^

/j$P*S

COPYCF COMMAND
The COPYCF command copies a specified number of coded files from one file to another. A
coded file is defined as a file containing lines of 500 characters or less, each terminated
by a zero byte (12 zero bits in the lowest byte of a word).
NOTE
The COPYCF command is not recommended for
use with S, L, or F format tapes because it
does not have the data specification
parameters needed to accommodate the
variety of data formats possible with those
tape formats. For an S, L, or F format
tape copying operation, issue a COPY
command with the appropriate parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .

/(IfPN,

The COPYCF command cannot copy SI format
tapes. If coded mode is set for an SI
tape, the system terminates the job. The
TCOPY command converts SI coded tape files.
When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF file marks, the resulting file may have a different
logical file structure. In particular, when copying such a file to tape, the system adds an
EOR mark to the end of the file. Such changes do not affect file content buy may cause
v e r i fi c a t i o n e r r o r s .
Format:
C O P Y C F, I f n i , I f n 2 , n , f c h a r, l c h a r, n a .
Parameter

Description

l f n i S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o c o p y . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d ,
file INPUT is assumed.
l f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o r e c e i v e t h e c o p y . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r
is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.
n S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f fi l e s ( d e c i m a l ) t o c o p y . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s
omitted, 1 is assumed.
f c h a r t S p e c i fi e s t h e fi r s t c h a r a c t e r p o s i t i o n o f e a c h l i n e t o c o p y f o r 6 - b i t
characters. If this parameter is omitted, the copying begins at
character position 1.
l c h a r t S p e c i fi e s t h e l a s t c h a r a c t e r p o s i t i o n o f e a c h l i n e t o c o p y f o r 6 - b i t
c h a r a c t e r s , l c h a r m u s t b e g r e a t e r t h a n o r e q u a l t o f c h a r. I f t h i s
parameter is omitted, the copying ends at character position 136.
n a S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e j o b s t e p s h o u l d n o t a b o r t w h e n a l i n e t e r m i n a t o r
does not appear before an EOR. na can be any alphanumeric, one- to
seven-character string.
y$^*\

+Since many characters in 6/12-bit display code require 12 bits rather than 6, this param
eter may produce unforeseen results when copying a file containing 6/12-bit display code
data. Refer to appendix A for a description of character set codes.
60459680

F

9-13

The copying begins at the current position of lfnj. If
until the file count is satisfied or EOI is encountered.
file count is satisfied, an EOF is written on lfn2> and
line is encountered that has more than lchar characters,

lfni=lfn2» the file is read
If EOI is encountered before the
the operation terminates. If a
the excess characters are truncated.

The COPYCF command writes lines with an even number of characters. If an input line has an
odd character count and the last character is a blank not immediately preceded by a colon,
the last character is removed. If an input line has an odd character count and the last
character is not a blank or is a blank immediately preceded by a colon, an additional
trailing blank is appended.
If the COPYCF command attempts to copy a line longer than 500 6-bit characters, the line is
truncated, and an informative message is issued to the dayfile after the copying completes.
If the last line of a record does not have an end-of-line terminator, the system issues a
dayfile message. If the na parameter is not specified, the job step then aborts.

9-14

60459680

F

COPYCR COMMAND
The COPYCR command copies a specified number of coded records from one file to another. A
coded record contains lines of 500 characters or less, each terminated by a zero byte (12
zero bits in the lowest byte of a word).

NOTE
The COPYCR command is not recommended for
use with S, L, or F format tapes because it
does not have the data specification
parameters needed to accommodate the
variety of data formats possible with those
tape formats. For an S, L, or F format
tape copying operation, issue a COPY
command with the appropriate parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .

r

The COPYCR command cannot copy SI format
tapes. If coded mode is set for an SI
tape, the system terminates the job. The
TCOPY command converts SI coded tape files.
When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF file marks, the resulting file may have a different
l o g i c a l fi l e s t r u c t u r e . I n p a r t i c u l ar, when copying such a file to tape, the system adds an
EOR mark to the end of the file. Such changes do not affect file content but may cause
v e r i fi c a t i o n e r r o r s .
Format:
C O P Y C R , I f n x , I f n 2 , n , f c h a r, l c h a r. n a .
Parameter
>^S?Sy

Description

lfni

S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o c o p y. I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d ,
file INPUT is assumed.

lfn-

S p e c i fi e s the name of the file to receive the copy. If this parameter
is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.
Specifies the number of records (decimal) to copy. If this parameter
is omitted, 1 is assumed.

fchart

S p e c i fi e s t h e fi r s t c h a r a c t e r p o s i t i o n o f e a c h l i n e t o c o p y f o r 6 - b i t
characters. If this parameter is omitted, the copying begins at
character position 1.

1chart

Last character position of each line to copy for 6-bit characters,
lchar must be greater than or equal to fchar. If this parameter is
omitted, the copying ends at character position 136.
Specifies that the job step should not abort if a line terminator does
not appear before an EOR. The parameter na can be any alphanumeric,
one- to seven-character string.

+Since many characters in the 6/12-bit display code require 12 bits rather than 6, this
parameter may produce unforeseen results when copying a file containing 6/12-bit display
code data. Refer to appendix A for a description of character set codes.
60459680
F
9-15

The copying begins at the current position of lfnj. If lfni=lfn2, the file is read
until the record count is satisfied or EOI is encountered. EOF indicators are considered
separate records and are included in the record count. If the EOI is encountered before the
record count is satisfied, an EOR is written on lfn2, and the operation terminates. The
COPYCR command is processed in exactly the same manner as the COPYCF command except that n
specifies the number of records rather than the number of files.
I If the COPYCR command attempts to copy a line longer than 500 6-bit characters, the line is
truncated, and an informative message is issued to the dayfile after the copying completes.
If the last line of a record does not have an end-of-line terminator, the system issues a
dayfile message. If the na parameter is not specified, the job step then aborts.

COPYEI COMMAND
The COPYEI command copies one file to another. The copying begins at the current position %
of the file and continues until the EOI is encountered. The EOI is not defined for certain
tape formats (refer to table 2-1).
NOTE
The COPYEI command is not recommended for use
with S, L, or F format tapes because it does not
have the data specification parameters needed to
accommodate the variety of data formats possible
with those tape formats. For an S, L, or F for
mat tape copying operation, issue a COPY command
with the appropriate parameter specifications.
When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF file
marks, the resulting file may have a different
logical file structure. In particular, when
copying such a file to tape, the system adds an
EOR mark to the end of the file. Such changes
do not affect file content but may cause
verification errors.
Format:
COPYEI, If nlf If n2,x,c.
Parameter

Description

lfni Specifies the name of the file to copy. If this parameter is omitted,
file INPUT is assumed.
Ifn2 Specifies the name of the file to receive the copy. If this parameter
is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.
x Specifies that both files are rewound before the copying, and rewound,
verified, and rewound again after the copying is complete, x can be
any alphanumeric, one- to seven-character string.
c Indicates that the copying to or from an S or L format tape
performed in coded rather than binary mode. If coded mode
an SI tape, the system aborts the job. For other formats,
ignores the mode setting, c can be any alphanumeric, onecharacter string.

should be
is set on
the system
to seven-

If lfni=lfn2, the file is read until EOI is encountered.
9-16

60459680

F

COPYSBF COMMAND
The COPYSBF command copies a file and inserts a space before the first character of each
l i n e o f t h e fi l e . F o r a fi l e w i t h o u t p r i n t e r c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r s , i n s e r t s p a c e s i n t h e fi l e
with this command before routing the file to a printer. The system assumes that a file
routed to a printer has a printer control character as the first character of each line.
You might get undesirable results if you do not ensure that a printer control character
appears first. Refer to appendix H for more information on printer control characters.

NOTE
The COPYSBF command is not recommended for
use with S, L, or F format tapes because it
does not have the data specification
parameters needed to accommodate the
variety of data formats possible with those
tape formats. For an S, L, or F format
tape copying operation, issue a COPY
command with the appropriate parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF
file marks, the resulting file may have a
d i f f e r e n t l o g i c a l fi l e s t r u c t u r e . I n
particular, when copying such a file to
tape, the system adds an EOR mark to the
end of the file. Such changes do not
affect file content but may cause
v e r i fi c a t i o n e r r o r s .

Format:
COPYSBF,Ifnx,Ifn2,n,na.
Parameter

Description

lfnx

S p e c i fi e s the name of the file to copy. If this parameter is omitted,
file INPUT is assumed.

lfn2

Specifies the name of the file to receive the copy. If this parameter
is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.
S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f fi l e s ( d e c i m a l ) t o c o p y. I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s
omitted, 1 is assumed.

na

60459680 C

Specifies that the job step should not abort if a line terminator does
not appear before an EOR. na can be any alphanumeric, one- to sevencharacter string.

9-17

The COPYSBF command copies n files beginning at the current position of lfni to file
lfn2» shifting each line image one character to the right and adding a leading space.
Each line image may contain up to 500 (6-bit) characters. Any characters beyond 500 are
lost. A page eject character is inserted at the beginning of each logical record (refer to
a p p e n d i x I f o r a l i s t o f c a r r i a g e c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r s ) . I f l f n i = l f n 2 , n fi l e s a r e
skipped but no data transfer occurs. If the EOI is encountered before the file count is
satisfied, an EOF is written to lfn2, and the operation terminates.
If the COPYSBF command attempts to copy a line longer than 500 6-bit characters, the line is
truncated, and an informative message is issued to the dayfile after the copying completes.
If the last line of a record does not have an end-of-line terminator, the system issues a
dayfile message. If the na parameter is not specified, the job step then aborts.

COPYX COMMAND
The COPYX command copies logical records of a file until a user-specified condition is met,

NOTE
The COPYX command is not recommended for
use with S, L, or F format tapes because it
does not have the data specification
parameters needed to accommodate the
variety of data formats possible with those
tape formats. For an S, L, or F format
tape copying operation, issue a COPY
command with the appropriate parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF
file marks, the resulting file may have a
d i f f e r e n t l o g i c a l fi l e s t r u c t u r e . I n
particular, when copying such a file to
tape, the system adds an EOR mark to the
end of the file. Such changes do not
affect file content but may cause
v e r i fi c a t i o n e r r o r s .

F ormat:
COPYX,lfn1,lfn2,x,b,c.
Parameter

Description

l f n ^ S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o c o p y . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d ,
file INPUT is assumed.
I f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o r e c e i v e t h e c o p y. I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r
is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.

9-18

60459680

F

ylfn2,NR.
Parameter

Description

Ifnj Specifies the file from which to copy; if this parameter is omitted,
file LIST is assumed.
Ifn2 Specifies the file to which to copy; if this parameter is omitted,
file OUTPUT is assumed.
NR Indicates that lfnj should not be rewound.
The output listing omits the following information that appears on the COMPASS assembler
output listing.
• COMPASS version number on the page heading.
•

C O M PA S S

assembler

binary

values.

f^^%^

• INVENTED SYMBOLS comment.
• Symbolic Reference Table block column that contains either the system text file
name, the overlay name, or the name of the block containing the symbol.
Comments are truncated to column 65.

LOCK COMMAND
The LOCK command prevents writing on a file.
Format:
L 0 C K , l f n l fi f n 2 , . . . , l f n n .
Parameter

Description

l f n ^ L o g i c a l fi l e n a m e o f a l o c a l fi l e .
With the LOCK command, you can set the write interlock for a local file. Subsequently, the
system allows only read operations on the file.

9-26

60459680

D

L072 COMMAND
The L072 command reformats files.
Format:
L072,p1,p2,....pn.
Enter any of the following parameters in any order:

El
I
1=1fnx
1=0

00^\
S
S=lfn2

Description
Specifies that the reformat parameters are on file INPUT.
Reformat parameters are on file lfnj_.
There is no input file of reformat parameters.
If the I parameter is omitted, 1=0 is assumed.
Specifies that the data to be reformatted is on file SCR.
S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e d a t a t o b e r e f o r m a t t e d i s o n fi l e l f n 2 .
If the S parameter is omitted, SCR is assumed.

L
L=lfn-

Specifies that the reformatted data is listed on file OUTPUT.
S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e r e f o r m a t t e d d a t a i s l i s t e d o n fi l e l f n 3 . l f n 3
is always rewound unless the NR parameter is specified.
If the L parameter is omitted, OUTPUT is assumed.

T
T=x

S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e t o b e r e f o r m a t t e d i s o f t y p e B .
S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e t o b e r e f o r m a t t e d i s o f t y p e x .
_x_

Description

M Modify source data.
C C O M PA S S s o u r c e d a t a .
B Other source data.
If the T parameter is omitted, B is assumed.
H
H=xxx

Specifies that the number of characters per output line is 72.
Specifies that the number of characters per output line is xxx (maximum
allowed is 150 characters), xxx must be greater than or equal to the
number of characters being moved (Nx) plus the starting column number of
t h e d e s t i n a t i o n fi e l d ( O x ) .
If the H parameter Is omitted, 72 is assumed.

LP

S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e o u t p u t i s f o r m a t t e d f o r t h e l i n e p r i n t e r.

NR

S p e c i fi e s t h a t th e o u tp u t fil e i s n o t re w o u n d .

60459680 E

9-27

Pl

Description

Nx=y Specifies the number of characters to be moved (up to six
fi e l d s ) .
x(l to 6) Number of field being moved.
y Number of characters being moved.

NOTE
The following restrictions apply to the H,
N, I, and 0 parameters.
(Nx+Ix).GT.150 Yields an error (l
L072 COMPLETE.

v«s^\

Batch job entry:
L072,I.
where the input file has the following form:
S=SOURCE,L=OUT,T=B.
N4=1,14=2, 04=75.
H=90.
-EOREach line in the input file must end with a terminator.

9-30

60459680 D

j0^\

MFQUEUE COMMAND
The MFQUEUE command sends a local file from your host to the input or output queue of a
remote host. The MFQUEUE command functions much like the ROUTE command. For most file
transfers between mainframes, ROUTE is the preferred command. Unlike the ROUTE command,
MFQUEUE provides the capability of sending a separate routing directive with the file or of
indicating that the file has a nonstandard data format. The remote host processes the file
according to the routing directive. Only when you need special routing specifications not
provided by the ROUTE command do you need to use the MFQUEUE command. You must be
authorized to use the MFQUEUE command (refer to the LIMITS command).
Format:
MFQUEUE,lfn,ST=lid,DD=dd,I=dirfile,PC=c,DC=dc.

0$&!\
PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Parameters lfn and ST=lid are required and lfn must be the first parameter; the other
parameters are optional and order-independent.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e l o c a l fi l e t o b e r o u t e d t o t h e r e m o t e h o s t .
The file name must be one to seven alphanumeric characters.
S T = l i d S p e c i fi e s t h e l o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r ( L I D ) o f t h e r e m o t e h o s t t o w h i c h t h e
fi l e i s t o b e r o u t e d . T h e L I D s p e c i fi c a t i o n m u s t b e t h r e e
alphanumeric characters. ST=lid may not specify the local host.
DD=dd

Specifies
parameter
currently
after the

the data format of the file to be transferred. The DD=dd
both describes the character set of lfn on the host where it
resides and also specifies the character set lfn is to have
t r a n s f e r.

For file transfers between NOS mainframes and between NOS/BE and NOS
m a i n f r a m e s t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s e ff e c t i v e l y i g n o r e d . T h e fi l e w i l l h a v e
the same format on both mainframes.
The interpretation of the DD=dd parameter depends on the operating
s y s t e m ( s ) i n v o l v e d i n t h e fi l e t r a n s f e r. T h e f o l l o w i n g p a r a g r a p h s
describe how NOS interprets the DD=dd parameter. For its
interpretation by other operating systems, refer to the Remote Host
Facility Usage manual.

60459680 F

9-31

Parameter

Description
On NOS, you can specify the following values for dd:
dd
C 6 T h e fi l e
less)
code
byte

Description
contains character data in a 64-character (or
subset of the ASCII 128-character set. The character
of lfn is 6-bit display code and its lines are zeroterminated (Z-type records).

C 8 T h e fi l e c o n t a i n s c h a r a c t e r d a t a i n a l a r g e r t h a n
64-character subset of the ASCII 128-character set. The
character code of lfn is the 7-bit ASCII code (rightj u s t i fi e d i n 1 2 - b i t fi e l d s ) a n d i t s l i n e s a r e z e r o - b y t e
terminated (Z-type records).
U S S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e c o n t a i n s b i n a r y d a t a i n s t r u c t u r e d
format with EORs and EOFs. The file is transmitted as a
continuous string of binary data, broken only by EORs and
EOFs as appropriate.
U U S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e c o n t a i n s b i n a r y d a t a w i t h o u t E O R s
and EOFs. NOS treats UU as US.
If the file is character data, you do not need to specify a DD=dd
p a r a m e t e r. T h e r e m o t e h o s t d e t e r m i n e s t h e f o r m a t i n w h i c h t o w r i t e t h e / * = R % |
file. If NOS is the remote host and the DD=dd parameter has not been •
specified, NOS assumes character data and reads/writes the file in C6
format.
I = d i r fi l e S p e c i fi e s t h e l o c a l fi l e w h i c h c o n t a i n s t h e r o u t i n g d i r e c t i v e t h a t t h e
system sends to the remote host. The file name must be one to seven
a l p h a n u m e r i c c h a r a c te r s . If y o u s p e c i fy o n l y th e k e y w o r d I, fi l e
I N P U T b e c o m e s t h e d i r e c t i v e fi l e . I f y o u o m i t t h e I = d i r fi l e p a r a m e t e r,
the system reads directives from the lines immediately following the
MFQUEUE command. The lines must begin with the prefix character
defined by the PC=c parameter. The system reads the lines until it
c o m e s t o a l i n e w i t h o u t t h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r. I t t h e n s t r i p s o ff t h e
prefix character from each line and concatenates the lines into one
8ingle directive to send to the remote host. This directive must not
exceed the 256-character limit.
P C = c S p e c i fi e s t h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r f o r t h e l i n e s o f t h e r o u t i n g d i r e c t i v e .
The default is an asterisk (*). The prefix character can be any 6-bit
display code character, except a closing parenthesis, a dollar sign, a
period, or a colon. To avoid ambiguity between commands and routing
d i r e c t i v e s , u s e a l p h a b e ti c va l u e s fo r c ca u ti o u sl y.

9-32

60459680

D

Parameter

Description

D C = d c S p e c i fi e s t h e d i s p o s i t i o n c o d e s f o r t h e fi l e t o b e t r a n s f e r r e d . Yo u
can specify one of the following codes for dc:
dc

Description

C P P u n c h t h e fi l e i n c o d e d f o r m a t .
I N Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r i n p u t .
I X Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r i n p u t b u t d o n o t r e t u r n t h e o u t p u t
unless explicitly directed to do so.
LP
Print
the
fi l e .
P B P u n c h t h e fi l e i n s y s t e m b i n a r y f o r m a t .
P H S a m e a s C P.
P R S a m e a s L P.
P U S a m e a s C P.
P8 Punch in 80-column binary format.
SB Same as PB.
SP
Plot
in
binary
format.
Example:
To route a 7-bit ASCII file (MYFILE) to a remote mainframe (with REM
as its LID) for execution, enter this command:
MFQUEUE,MYFILE,ST=REM,DC=IN,DD=C8.

THE ROUTING DIRECTIVE
T h e r o u t i n g d i r e c t i v e p r o v i d e s a d d i t i o n a l r o u t i n g s p e c i fi c a t i o n s f o r t h e q u e u e d
I = d i r fi l e p a r a m e t e r d e t e r m i n e s t h e r e s i d e n c e o f t h i s d i r e c t i v e . T h e h o s t s t r i p s
characters from the lines of this directive and forwards the directive unaltered
prefix characters) to the remote host for processing. Hence, the directive must be
recognized by the remote host.

fi l e . T h e
t h e p r e fi x
(except for
a command

This section documents only the routing directive recognized by a NOS 2 remote host. For
information on routing directives for other remote hosts, refer to the Remote Host Facility
Usage manual.
The routing directive accepted by a NOS 2 remote host closely resembles its ROUTE command.
Format:
ROUTE,lfn,p1,p2,...,pn.
The parameter descriptions for this directive are the same as those for the ROUTE command
w i th th e fo l l o w i n g e xce p ti o n s:
• The lfn parameter is not required on the ROUTE directive and can be omitted.

r
jgpfev

60459680

H

9-33

■

• Parameters p± can be any of the following as described for the ROUTE command:
DC=dc
DO=lid
EC=ec
FC=fc
F I D = fi d

FM=fm
IC=ic
ID=id
PI=pi
REP=rep

SC=sc
SCL=scl
TID=tid
UJN=ujn
UN=un

EXAMPLE:
Assume you are at mainframe MFA. To route local file RBPRINT from mainframe MFA to a
remote batch printer logged in with user name ABC on NOS mainframe MFB, enter a command
similar to the following:
MFQUEUE,RBPRINT,ST=MFB.
*ROUTE,DC=PR,UN=ABC.
You can accomplish the same task with the following ROUTE command:
ROUTE,RBPRINT,DC=PR,UN=ABC,ST=MFB.

NEW COMMAND
The NEW command creates a primary file.
Format:
NEW,lfn/ND.
Parameter

Description

lfn Specifies the name of the file to be made the primary file.
ND Specifies that no files currently assigned to the job are released.
The NEW command creates an empty file and makes it your new primary file. If you do not ■/^\
s p e c i f y t h e N D p a r a m e t e r, t h e s y s t e m r e l e a s e s a l l fi l e s a s s i g n e d t o t h e j o b , e x c e p t t h o s e '
with checkpoint or no-auto-drop status. Certain system files (for example, ZZZZZCO,
ZZZZZC1, ZZZZZC2, and ZZZZZLD) always have no-auto-drop status. You can give any local file
this status by using the SETFS command. When the ND parameter is specified, any currently
existing primary file becomes a nonprimary local file.
The automatic rewinding of primary files is incompatible with some file manipulation
commands. Refer to the note in PRIMARY command later in this section.

9-34

60459680 G

OUT COMMAND
The OUT command queues files that you or the system has given a deferred routing (refer to
the ROUTE command, which is described later in this section). The command initiates the
queueing that the system automatically does at job termination.
Format:
OUT.
or
0 O T, * , l f n 1 , l f n 2 , . . . , l f n n .
se
/^F^^ Tehxec efipr ts tt hf oo sr m
e ant a q
mueedu e( lsf na^l.l Ief l ingoi b lfiel e fis l easr .e Tnhaem e
d c, oanl dl ef o
l i rgmi bal te qfiul ee u
s e as r ea l lq ueel iugei db .l e fi l e s
Any file given a deferred routing can be processed by the OUT command. Eligible files also
include local mass storage files named OUTPUT, PUNCH, PUNCHB, and P8. If selected, OUTPUT
is queued for printing and files PUNCH, PUNCHB, and P8 are queued for punching.
File PUNCH is punched as a coded deck in either 026 or 029 mode, depending on the origin of
the job. If the job is a local batch job, PUNCH is punched in the initial keypunch mode of
the job's command record. For all other job origin types, PUNCH is punched in the system
default keypunch mode.
/#*N File PUNCHB is punched as a binary deck in system binary format. File P8 is punched as a
\ binary deck in 80-column binary format.

OVWRITE COMMAND
The OVWRITE command destroys the contents of files by overwriting them. This command does
not apply to tape files or to files on which you cannot write (for example, direct access
files attached in a mode besides WRITE or files that have been locked). The command
o v e r w r i t e s t h e e n t i r e fi l e .
Formats:
OVWRITE,If m, If n2,..., If nm/0P=p1p2.
or
OVWRITE,*,Ifnx,Ifn2,...,lfnm/0P=p1P2.
Parameter

Description

l f n ^ S p e c i fi e s a fi l e a s s i g n e d t o y o u r j o b . T h i s fi l e c a n n o t b e a t a p e
fi l e .
0 P = p j p 2 S p e c i fi e s h o w t h e fi l e s a r e t o b e o v e r w r i t t e n a n d w h e t h e r t h e fi l e s
are to be released from the job after the overwriting. The value p^
can be any of the following:

60459680

D

9-35

Parameter

Description
p^

Description

Z O v e r w r i t e t h e fi l e s w i t h z e r o e s . T h i s i s t h e
default. You cannot specify both Z and X.
X O v e r w r i t e t h e fi l e s fi r s t w i t h z e r o e s , t h e n w i t h o n e s ,
and then with an alternating pattern of ones and
zeroes. You cannot specify both Z and X.
R R e l e a s e t h e fi l e s f r o m t h e j o b a f t e r o v e r w r i t i n g t h e m .
T h e fi r s t f o r m a t s h o w n o v e r w r i t e s fi l e s l f n ^ . T h e s e c o n d f o r m a t o v e r w r i t e s a l l fi l e s
assigned to the job except files lfn^.

PACK COMMAND
The PACK command removes all EOR and EOF marks from a specified file and copies it as one
r e c o r d t o a n o t h e r fi l e .
Format:
PA C K , l f n 1 , l f n 2 , x .
Parameter

Description

l f n ^ S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f fi l e t o b e p a c k e d . F r o m b a t c h o r i g i n , l f n ^
m u s t b e s p e c i fi e d ; f r o m i n t e r a c t i v e o r i g i n , t h e p r i m a r y fi l e i s u s e d
i f l f n i i s o m i t t e d . T h e fi l e m u s t n o t b e a s s i g n e d t o a i n t e r a c t i v e
t e r m i n a l ( fi l e t y p e T T ) .
l f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f fi l e t o r e c e i v e p a c k e d d a t a . I f l f n 2 i s
omitted, the packed file is written on lfn^.
x Indicates that lfnj should not be rewound before the pack occurs, x
can be any alphanumeric, one- to seven-character string.
The input file, lfnj[, may consist of any number of records or files. If no third parameter
is supplied, lfnj is read from the BOI to the EOI, and all EOR and EOF marks are removed.
I t i s w r i t t e n t o fi l e l f n 2 a t t h e c u r r e n t p o s i t i o n a s o n e r e c o r d . F i l e l f n 2 i s r e w o u n d
after the pack; lfni is not.
NOTE
Do not use the PACK command with S, L, or F
format tapes.

9-36

60459680

D

PRIMARY COMMAND
The PRIMARY command makes a local file the primary file, or it creates an empty primary file.
Format:
PRIMARY,lfn.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f l o c a l fi l e .
If lfn already exists, it must be a local mass storage file in order to be made the primary
file. If lfn does not exist, the PRIMARY command creates it on mass storage. Any currently
e x i s t i n g p r i m a r y fi l e ( o t h e r t h a n t h e l f n s p e c i fi e d ) b e c o m e s a n o n p r i m a r y l o c a l fi l e . I f
t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e i s a l r e a d y p r i m a r y, t h e o p e r a t i o n i s i g n o r e d .

NOTE
The primary file is rewound before every
command is processed. Therefore, the file
manipulation commands cannot be used to
p o s i t i o n w i t h i n t h e fi l e . A n a t t e m p t t o
add to the file using one of the copying
commands may result in writing over existing
data at the BOI.

00&>\

RENAME COMMAND
The RENAME command changes the name of a local file.
Format:
RENAME,nfni=ofni,nfn2=ofn2,...,nfnn=ofnn.
Parameter

Description

n f a ^ S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w n a m e o f t h e l o c a l fi l e .
o f n ^ S p e c i fi e s t h e e x i s t i n g n a m e o f t h e l o c a l fi l e .
The RENAME command changes the name of the local file ofnj to nfn£. This does not
change the names of files in the permanent file catalog. The renaming is done in the
following manner:
• If local file nfn^ did not previously exist, file ofn^ is simply renamed.
• If a local file nfn.^ already exists and is not the primary file, the system
discards nf^ and gives ofn^ the name nfn^.
• If nfnjL is the primary file, then the system discards nfnj^, gives of^ the
name nfn^, and makes it the primary file. In this case, ofn^ must have a local
fi l e t y p e .

60459680

D

9.37

For example, you have only two files assigned to the job. File A is a local mass storage
file and file B has a queued file type. If you issue the following request
RENAME,X=A.
file A is renamed file X, and its file type (local) is not changed. If you issue the request
RENAME,B=A.
file B no longer exists; file A is renamed file B and retains its local file type.

REQUEST COMMAND
The REQUEST command assigns a file to receive checkpoint dumps or sends a message to the
system operator requesting that the named file be assigned to the device described in the
comment field.
Format:
REQUEST,Ifn,checkpoint,AL=level.comment
Parameter

Description

lfn Specifies the name of the file to be assigned to a specified device or
to
be
used
as
a
checkpoint
fi l e .

^^

checkpoint Specifies that lfn is to be used as a checkpoint file.
checkpoint

Description

CK Each new dump is written at EOI of lfn.
CB Each new dump is written at BOI of lfn.
comment Specifies the comment that is displayed at the system console. In the
comment field, you direct the operator to make the requested device /=s^v
assignment.
AL=level Specifies the security access level to assign to the file. Unless
changed by your site, level can be one of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
The default is the current access level of the job.
On a secured system, the access level you specify must be valid for
the job (ENQUIRE,B returns this information) and for the device to
which you are assigning the file.
On an unsecured system, the parameter has no effect. The system does,
however, check for valid parameter specifications.
When using this command to assign a file for checkpoint dumps on a
secured system, use the AL=level parameter to assign the file at the
highest access level valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns this
information). The CKP command aborts the job if the checkpoint file
is not at this access level.
|

9-38

60459680

D

/ps^fe\

If the REQUEST command is used to request assignment of file lfn to the equipment specified
in the comment field, lfn must not be a local file.
If the REQUEST command Is used to assign lfn for checkpoint dumps, lfn must be a local file
and either the CK or CB keyword is specified. These keywords are used in conjunction with
the CKP and RESTART commands; they do the following:
• Save all checkpoint dumps by appending each dump to checkpoint file lfn:
REQUEST,Ifn,CK.
• Save only the last checkpoint dump by writing each dump at the beginning of check
p o i n t fi l e l f n :
REQUEST,Ifn,CB.
• Save two consecutive checkpoint dumps by alternately writing on two checkpoint files;
REQUEST,Ifni,CB.
REQUEST,Ifn2,CB.
If the CK keyword is specified for different files or if more than two checkpoint files are
specified, the job aborts. The CK and CB keywords specify a checkpoint file that is local
to the job. You can make the checkpoint file permanent by placing a DEFINE commandt before
the REQUEST command.
DEFINE,lfn.
REQUEST,Ifn,CK.
CKP.
You are not required to supply a REQUEST command to define a checkpoint file. You can use
an ASSIGN or LABEL command or you can use default values.
If no REQUEST command specifying a checkpoint file has been detected when the first CKP
command is encountered, the system requests a device, specifies a file name of CCCCCCC, and
selects the CK option. For a subsequent restart job, however, the system assumes you have
made the checkpoint file available.
If lfn is a local file when you enter the REQUEST command, no new assignment is made and job
processing continues with the next command. However, you can reassign lfn by issuing a
RETURN command on the file before entering the REQUEST command.
You can use the REQUEST command to assign a file to a mass storage device. However, you
must be authorized to assign a file to a magnetic tape or auxiliary device. If you do not
have this authorization and attempt to request a tape unit or auxiliary device, the system
aborts the job.
The REQUEST command can also be used to create or access existing seven- or nine-track
unlabeled tapes. If a magnetic tape assignment is needed to satisfy a REQUEST command, the
MT or NT parameter should be specified. For a description of magnetic tape assignment with
the REQUEST command, refer to section 12, Tape Management.
t Any mass storage file used as a checkpoint file must have write permission.
Refer to LIMITS Command in section 7.

60459680 D

9-39 |

RESEQ COMMAND
The RESEQ command resequences source files which have leading sequence numbers or adds
sequence numbers to an unsequenced file. The RESEQ command for interactive jobs acts only
upon the primary file and has a different parameter order.
Format for noninteractive jobs:
RESEQ,lfn,type,start,step.
Format for interactive jobs:
RESEQ,start,step,type.
Parameter

Description

lfn

Specifies the sorted file to be resequenced. The system does not sort
lfn (refer to the SORT command).

type

S p e c i fi e s t h e t y p e o f fi l e :
type

Description

B BASIC source code. The system updates BASIC statements
containing line references.
T Te x t s o u r c e i n f o r m a t i o n ; a fi v e - d i g i t s e q u e n c e n u m b e r
plus a blank is added at the beginning of each line.
T h e fi l e t e x t , h o w e v e r, i s n o t i n s p e c t e d . T h u s , i f
line numbers curently exist, two set of line numbers
result.
F Files that contain FORTRAN source code. The system
adds a five-digit line number to the beginning of each
line without a line number but adds no blanks. If your
FORTRAN source file does not have sequence numbers,
specify this parameter to resequence the file.
other Any number at the beginning of a line is considered a
or sequence number and is resequenced according to the
omitted start and step parameters; numbers are added to lines
where no leading sequence numbers are present. You can
use this option with a FORTRAN source file without
destroying the integrity of statement labels if the
file has leading sequence numbers.
s t a r t S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w l i n e n u m b e r o f t h e fi r s t l i n e . T h e d e f a u l t i s 1 0 0 .
s t e p S p e c i fi e s t h e l i n e n u m b e r i n c r e m e n t . T h e d e f a u l t i s 1 0 .
Files that have leading sequence numbers include FORTRAN and BASIC source files formatted
for interactive processing. If the file has no leading sequence numbers, five-digit numbers
are inserted at the beginning of each line. No line number can exceed 99999. When the
system encounters line numbers longer than five digits, it uses only the first five digits
to resequence the file.

9-40

60459680 D

/^^^\

When resequencing a BASIC source program, you must specify B for the file type parameter or
enter the command under the BASIC subsystem so that the system changes the line number
references within the source statements. The system supplies 5-digit line numbers and line
number references; excess surrounding blanks are used In the expansion of line number
r ef er enc e s .
In order to resequence a BASIC program written in 6/12-bit display code, you must call RESEQ
from an interactive job which is in ASCII mode.
Example:
File X contains the following BASIC source statements.
95 ON SGN(A)+2 GOTO 100,110,120 'COMMENT
1 0 0 P R I N T " A IS NEGATIVE"
105
GOTO
130
1 1 0 P R I N T " A IS ZERO"
11 5
GOTO
130
1 2 0 P R I N T " A IS POSITIVE"
130 LET B=A+130
135 END

•COMMENT
•COMMENT

The following command changes the contents of file X.
RESEQ,X,B,90,10.
File X now has the following contents:
00090 ON SGN(A)+2 GOTO 00100,00120,00140 'COMMENT
00100
PRINT"A IS NEGATIVE"
0 0 11 0
GOTO 00150
00120
PRINT "A IS ZERO"
00130
GOTO 00150
00140
PRINT "A IS POSITIVE"
00150 LET B=A+130
00160 END

r"

•COMMENT
'COMMENT

The RESEQ command changes the line numbers and the line number references. Line numbers now
begin at 90 and Increment by 10. The comment on the first line is moved to the right to
allow for the expanded line number references.
The RESEQ command retains at most one trailing space on a blank line. During a sort, the
system deletes lines with only one or no trailing spaces. Hence, a RESEQ command followed
by a sort causes all blank lines to be deleted from the file.

60459680

D

9-41

RETURN COMMAND
The RETURN command releases files assigned to a job and may release file space depending on
the file type.
Format:
RETURN,lfni,Ifn2,•••tlfnn#
or
RETURN,*,Ifnx,Ifn2»...,Ifnn.
Parameter
lfn^

Description

S p e c i fi e s

the

name

of

a

fi l e

assigned

to

your

job.

s**%.

The first format returns the named files (lfni,lfn2,...,lfnn). The second format
returns all files assigned to the job except the named files. If no files are named on the
second format, the asterisk returns all files assigned to the job.
There are several exceptions. The RETURN command does not release any files that have
checkpoint or no-auto-drop status. Certain system scratch files (for example, ZZZZZCO,
ZZZZZC1, ZZZZZC2, and ZZZZZLD) have no-auto-drop status. You can give any local file this
status by using the SETFS command.
RETURN

performs

the

following

Type

operations

according

to

the

fi l e

type.

^*^\

Operation

Input File name is changed to INPUT*. File space is not released (refer to
Input File Control in section 3 for further information).
Queued File space is released, and the file is no longer assigned to the job.
The file also loses its queued status.
Local File space is released, and the file is no longer assigned to the job.
Primary

Same

as

Local.

]

Library File space remains, but the file is no longer assigned to the job.
Direct access File space remains, but the file is no longer attached to the job.
Tape Tape is no longer assigned to the job. Refer to the REWIND or UNLOAD
command for a description of the processing that occurs if the previous
operation was a write.
In addition, the return of a magnetic tape file or the return of your last direct access
file on an auxiliary removable disk pack decrements the resource demand count as scheduled
by the RESOURC command if, and only if, the total concurrent resource demand (tapes and
removable packs) is presently assigned.
To release a file without decrementing the resource demand count, you can issue an UNLOAD
command. To release file space without releasing the file from the job, you can issue an
EVICT command.

9-42

60459680

D

If the file is a magnetic tape file and if the previous operation was a write, the following
operations are performed:
• If the tape is ANSI labeled, the system writes a tape mark, an E0F1 label, and three
tape marks and then returns the tape.
• If the tape is unlabeled and the data format specified on the ASSIGN, LABEL, or
REQUEST command is S, L, or F, the system writes four tape marks and then returns
the tape.
• If the tape is unlabeled and the data format is I or SI, the system writes a tape
mark, an E0F1 label, and three tape marks and then returns the tape.
Refer to Magnetic Tape Files in section 2 and Tape Management command in section 12 for
further information about tape files, and to appendix G for a description of an E0F1 label.

REWIND COMMAND
The REWIND command rewinds files. A mass storage file is positioned at its BOI. A tape
file is positioned at BOI (refer to appendix G). If the labeled tape file begins on a
previous volume, the system notifies the operator to mount that volume.
Format:
/^

REWIND,lfn1,lfn2,...,lfnn.
or
REWIND,*,Ifni,Ifn2,...,Ifnn.
Parameter

Description

l f n ^ S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f a fi l e a s s i g n e d t o y o u r j o b .
T h e fi r s t f o r m a t r e w i n d s t h e n a m e d fi l e s ( l f n x , l f n 2 , . . . , l f n n ) . T h e s e c o n d f o r m a t
rewinds all files assigned to the job except the named files. If no files are named on the
s e c o n d f o r m a t , t h e a s t e r i s k s p e c i fi c a t i o n r e w i n d s a l l fi l e s a s s i g n e d t o t h e j o b .
If the previous operation on the magnetic tape file was a write, a REWIND command causes the
following operations to be performed.
• If the tape is ANSI labeled, the system writes a tape mark, an E0F1 label, and three
tape marks and then rewinds the tape.
• If the tape is unlabeled and the data format specified on the ASSIGN, LABEL, or
REQUEST command is S, L, or F, the system writes four tape marks and then rewinds
the tape.
• If the tape is unlabeled and the data format is I or SI, the system writes a tape
mark, an E0F1 label, and three tape marks and then rewinds the tape.
Refer to Magnetic Tape Files in section 2 and to section 12, Tape Management, for further
information about tape files, and to appendix G for a description of E0F1 labels.

60459680

D

9-43

ROUTE COMMAND
The ROUTE command queues a file for disposal. The file routing may take effect when the
command is processed, or it may be deferred. If deferred, the routing characteristics
s p e c i fi e d d e fi n e t h e h a n d l i n g o f t h e fi l e i n l a t e r j o b s t e p s o r a t j o b t e r m i n a t i o n . T h i s
command can also rescind a prior deferred ROUTE command.
With the proper validation, you can use the ROUTE command to queue files on other
mainframes. Enter the LIMITS command to display the limits and user permissions for your
user name. The MFQUEUE comand also queues files on other mainframes, but use the ROUTE
command for this purpose unless you need special routing specifications not provided by
ROUTE.

PA R A M E T E R

DESCRIPTIONS

"^

Format:
ROUTE,Ifn,p1,p2,...,pn.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e t o r o u t e . F i l e l f n m u s t h a v e a q u e u e d fi l e t y p e o r
a l o c a l fi l e t y p e ; i t c a n n o t b e a p r i m a r y o r d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e . T h e
lfn parameter is required on all ROUTE commands.
The remaining parameters are order-independent.
PjL

Description

D C = d c S p e c i fi e s t h e d i s p o s i t i o n o f t h e q u e u e d fi l e .
dc

Meaning

I N Q u e u e t h e fi l e w i t h a n i n p u t d i s p o s i t i o n . N o r m a l j o b
i n p u t fi l e f o r m a t i s r e q u i r e d a n d t h e fi r s t r e c o r d o f t h e
file must be in 6-bit display code. If the Job command
w i t h i n t h e fi l e i s i n e r r o r, t h e fi l e i s n o t q u e u e d a n d
r e m a i n s a l o c a l fi l e .
L P Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p r i n t i n g o n a n y p r i n t e r .
L R Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p r i n t i n g o n 5 8 0 - 1 2 p r i n t e r .
L S Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p r i n t i n g o n 5 8 0 - 1 6 p r i n t e r .
LT Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p r i n t i n g o n 5 8 0 - 2 0 p r i n t e r .
L X Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p r i n t i n g o n 5 8 7 0 N o n - I m p a c t P r i n t e r.
N O Q u e u e t h e fi l e w i t h a n i n p u t d i s p o s i t i o n . O u t p u t n o t
explicitly routed by the job is discarded at job
completion. The dayfile is not written to file OUTPUT.
Normal job input file format is required and the first
record of the file must be in 6-bit display code. If the
Job command within the file is in error, the file is not
queued and remains a local file.

9-44

60459680

H

Pi

Description
dc

Meaning

PB Same as SB.
PH Same as PU.
P L Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p l o t t i n g .
P R S a m e a s L P.
P U Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p u n c h i n g i n c o d e d f o r m a t .
P 8 Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p u n c h i n g i n 8 0 - c o l u m n b i n a r y f o r m a t .
S B Q u e u e t h e fi l e f o r p u n c h i n g s y s t e m b i n a r y f o r m a t .
S C R e s c i n d p r i o r r o u t i n g a n d c h a n g e t h e fi l e t y p e t o l o c a l .
If no prior routing exists, SC is ignored.
T O Q u e u e t h e fi l e w i t h a n i n p u t d i s p o s i t i o n a n d q u e u e i t s
output with a wait disposition unless the job routes it
e l s e w h e r e . N o r m a l j o b i n p u t fi l e f o r m a t i s r e q u i r e d . I f
the Job command within the file is in error, the file is
not queued and remains a local file.
W T Q u e u e t h e fi l e w i t h a w a i t d i s p o s i t i o n .
If the DC=dc parameter is omitted and lfn has
deferred routing, the file is queued with the
previously specified. If the DC=dc parameter
not a deferred routed file, the file name may

been previously given a
disposition code
is omitted and lfn is
determine the default.

If DC is omitted and lfn is: ROUTE assumes DC=dc is:
OUTPUT

DC=LP

PUNCH

DC=PU

PUNCHB

DC=SB

P8

DC=P8

If a ROUTE command specifies an input disposition for the file (DC=IN,
DC=NO, or DC=TO) and the file has an invalid USER command, the job
containing the ROUTE command aborts with no exit processing. The
security count for the user name that did the ROUTE is decremented
accordingly. If you specify a remote host (ST=lid2) that does not
perform USER command validation, the local host does not check your
queued file for a USER command.
If a ROUTE command sends a file to a remote host with an input
disposition not supported on that host (for example, DC=TO or DC=NO to
a non-NOS 2 host), the remote host accepts the input file but treats
it as though it were routed with DC=IN. Hence, job output from a job
routed to a non-NOS 2 host with DC=NO or DC=TO returns and prints
l o c a l l y.

60459680

H

9-45

Pi

Description
On a dual-state system, if DC=NO is specified when routing a NOS/VE
batch job from NOS, the job output will be discarded at termination of
the NOS/VE job. If DC=TO is specified, job output will be queued with
a wait disposition.

D E F I n d i c a t e s t h a t q u e u e i n g o f t h e fi l e i s d e f e r r e d t o a l a t e r j o b s t e p
(OUT command or ROUTE command with the SC parameter specified) or end
o f j o b . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s s p e c i fi e d , t h e fi l e i s c r e a t e d i f i t
does not exist. DEF is not allowed if DC=IN, DC=NO, or DC=TO.
D O = l i d 1 S p e c i fi e s t h e l o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r ( L I D ) o f t h e m a i n f r a m e t o r e c e i v e t h e
output generated by the routed file. The LID can be any threecharacter, alphanumeric string defined by your site or you can specify
an asterisk.
By default, output returns to the originating mainframe, including
cases where your routed file submits jobs to still other mainframes.
For example, you are at mainframe MAA and you route job X to mainframe
MBB. Job X routes job Y to mainframe MCC. Then the output from both
jobs X and Y return to mainframe MAA by default.
D0=* returns the output to the mainframe that processed the ROUTE
command on which D0=* appears. For example, you are at mainframe MAA
and you route job A to mainframe MBB. Job A routes job B to mainframe
MCC with D0=* specified. Then output from job A returns to MAA but
output from job B returns to MBB.
In both preceding examples, all the mainframes must be directly
connected; that is, no two mainframes have to rely on a third for file
transfers.
You must have special authorization to use this parameter (refer to
the LIMITS command).
E C = e c D e fi n e s e x t e r n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s f o r fi l e s q u e u e d f o r p r i n t i n g o r
punching.
For files queued for printing, ec can be the following. (For more
information on print trains associated with various EC codes, refer to
Jobs Using Line Printers in appendix A.)
ec

Meaning

A 4 P r o v i d e d f o r N O S / B E c o m p a t i b i l i t y. I f y o u s p e c i f y A 4 , t h e
system uses the appropriate EC default (refer to following
note).
A6 ASCII graphic 63/64-character set.
A9 ASCII graphic 95-character set (except for CYBER model 810
systems using a PSU printer; to route files to a PSU
printer, use the FC parameter). File lfn must be a 7-bit
ASCII file. Refer to the FCOPY command earlier in this
section for information on how to convert a file to 7-bit
ASCII.

.^^?\

9-46

60459680

H

Pi

Description
ec

Meaning

B 4 P r o v i d e d f o r N O S / B E c o m p a t i b i l i t y. I f y o u s p e c i f y
B4, the system uses the appropriate EC default
(refer to following note).
B6

CDC

graphic

63/64-character

set.

For files queued for punching, ec can be the following.
ec

Meaning

ASCII

y * ! ^

Punch

ASCII.

026 or 026 Punch 026 mode.
029 or 029 Punch 029 mode.
SB

Punch

system

b i n a r y.

8 0 C 0 L P u n c h 8 0 - c o l u m n b i n a r y.
For files queued for plotting, ec can have the following values:
ec

Meaning

T6

S p e c i fi e s

6-bit,

transparent

plot

data.

T8

S p e c i fi e s

8-bit,

transparent

plot

data.

| NOTE
If an invalid external characteristic is
specified, the queued file processor cannot
o u t p u t t h e fi l e . Yo u m u s t n o t s p e c i f y a
printing characteristic for a queued punching
fi l e o r a p u n c h i n g fi l e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c f o r a
p r i n t fi l e q u e u e d f o r p r i n t i n g . Yo u a l s o
must not specify an external characteristic
not available at the site. If EC is not
specified, an appropriate EC default is set
on the basis of the DC parameter setting and
installation options.

FC=value This parameter has two possible uses depending on your site or host
c o n fi g u r a t i o n :
For routing of output requiring special forms, specify FC=fc, where fc
is a 2-character code assigned by the system operator to an output
d e v i c e . T h i s p r e v e n t s o u t p u t o f a fi l e b e f o r e i t s s p e c i a l f o r m s a r e
placed in the output device. In this case, omission of the parameter
results in a null value.

60459680

F

9-47

Pi

Description
For sites supporting two 533/536 or 585 printers, an ASCII graphic
64-character printer and an ASCII graphic 95-character printer, you
can use the FC parameter to select either printer. Specify FC=AS to
s e l e c t t h e 9 5 - c h a r a c t e r p r i n t e r. I n t h i s c a s e , o m i s s i o n o f t h e
p a r a m e t e r r e s u l t s in routing to the 64-character printer.

F I D = u j n F I D i s a N O S / B E p a r a m e t e r i n c l u d e d f o r c o m p a t i b i l i t y. U n d e r N O S , t h i s
parameter performs the same function as the UJN parameter.
FM=fm Indicates routing to a remote batch or interactive terminal logged in
with the family name specified. You must have special authorization
to specify an alternate family name (refer to the LIMITS command).
The one- to seven-character family name must be alphanumeric. If you ^_
specify only the keyword FM, implicit remote routing results (refer to •>#ws^
Implicit Routing following the last parameter description).
I C = i c S p e c i fi e s i n t e r n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e fi l e ; t h e v a l u e i c i s o n e o f
the following:
ic
DIS

Meaning
6-bit

display

code.

ASCII 7-bit ASCII code.
BIN

9-48

B i n a r y.

60459680

H

Pi

Description
This parameter is normally not specified since its default is
automatically established through the disposition code (DC=dc) and the
e x t e r n a l c haracteristic (EC=ec) parameters. The following lists show
the default for ic for the various ec values.
ec for printing

/fpfeey

Default ic

A4

ASCII

B4

DISPLAY

B6

DISPLAY

A6

DISPLAY

A9

ASCII

ec for punching

Default ic

SB

BINARY

80COL

BINARY

026

DISPLAY

029

DISPLAY

ASCII

ASCII

ID=id

S e l e c t s t h e d e v i c e l o c a l l y a s s o c i a t e d w i t h i d e n t i fi e r i d . I d e n t i fi e r
id can be 0 to 67B (octal default). If you specify only the keyword
ID, implicit remote routing results (refer to Implicit Routing
following the last parameter description).

PI=pi

Selects a print train image denoted either by a digit from 1 to 7 or
by a 1- to 7-character symbolic name assigned by your site.

PRI=pri

F i l e p r i o r i t y,
c o m p a t i b i l i t y.

REP=rep

Specifies the number of additional file copies to be routed to a
destination. The range for rep is from 0 to 31; therefore, the number
of copies that can be sent ranges from 1 to 32. Values for rep beyond
its range are set to zero, an informative message is sent, and one
copy is routed to the destination. The default value is zero; only
one copy is routed.

0^*\

60459680 G

This is a NOS/BE parameter included for
It produces an informative message under NOS.

9-48.1

Pi

Description

S C = s c S p e c i fi e s a p r o g r a m m a b l e f o r m a t c o n t r o l ( P F C ) a r r a y f o r t h e 5 8 0 P F C
printer, or a vertical format definition for a 533/536 or 585
printer. The system is released with two PFC arrays, a default
(sc=0), and an alternate (sc=l). If your site has 533/536 or 585
p r i n t e r s , t h e s y s t e m w i l l c o n t a i n s i x v e r t i c a l f o r m a t d e fi n i t i o n s f o r
these printers with a default of sc=3. For more information on PFC
arrays and vertical format definitions, refer to the NOS 2 Analysis
Handbook.
For 533/536 printers, you may choose one of the following sc values:
sc

Description

1

12-inch

forms

at

6

lines/inch.

2

12-inch

forms

at

8

lines/inch.

3

11 - i n c h

forms

at

6

lines/inch.

4

11 - i n c h

forms

at

8

lines/inch.

5

8.5-inch

forms

at

6

lines/inch.

6

8.5-inch

forms

at

8

lines/inch.

If no sc value is specified, the system default (SC=3) is used. Refer to NOS 2 Analysis
Handbook for more information on 533/536 printers.

9-48.2

60459680

H

Pi

Description

S C L = s c l S p e c i fi e s t h e s e r v i c e c l a s s t o b e a s s i g n e d t o t h i s r o u t e d fi l e . T h e
value scl must be one of the following:
scl

Description

DF

The default service class according to the origin type
of the routed file. The LIMITS command shows your
default service class assignments.

SY

System.

BC

Local batch.

RB

Remote batch.

TS

Interactive.

DI

Detached interactive

NS

Network supervisor.

MA

Maintenance.

CT

Communication task.

In

Installation class n (0 < n < 3).

When using the ROUTE command to queue a file to a remote host, the
service class for your job must be valid on the remote host and all
mainframes in the link to the remote host.
For a file queued for output, you can only specify a service class
v a l i d f o r y o u r c u r r e n t j o b . T h e d e f a u l t s e r v i c e c l a s s f o r s u c h a fi l e
is the service class of the current job.
For a file queued for input (DC=IN, DC=N0, and DC=T0), you can only
specify a service class valid for local batch jobs. The default
service class in this case is the service class the system assigns by
default to any of your local batch jobs. If you specify a service
class with this parameter for a file queued for input and the file's
Job command also has a service class specification, the service class
specified on the ROUTE command takes precedence. Refer to Job Service
Classes in section 3 for more information on service classes.

\

ST=lid-

Specifies the logical identifier (LID) of the mainframe to which you
a r e r o u t i n g the specified file. The LID can be any three-character,
alphanumeric string defined by your site or you can specify an
asterisk.
By default, the mainframe processing the ROUTE command also processes
t h e r o u t e d fi l e i f i t i s q u e u e d f o r i n p u t . T h i s m a i n f r a m e a l s o
processes the routed file if it is queued for output unless the job
containing this ROUTE command emanated from another job that is
diverting the output elsewhere.
ST=* ensures that the mainframe processing the ROUTE command always
p r o c e s s e s t h e r o u t e d fi l e .

60459680 H

9-49

Pi

Description
In a dual-state environment, you can route a file to NOS/VE by
specifying the NOS/VE LID on this parameter. The file must be in
ASCII (6/12-bit display code) format.
The ST=lid2 on the ROUTE command overrides the ST=lid parameter on
the Job command of the routed file.
You must have special authorization to use this parameter (refer to
the LIMITS command).

TID=tid The TID=tid form of this parameter functions the same as the UN=un
or parameter and is included for compatibility with NOS/BE. The TID=C
TID=C form of the parameter specifies routing to the central site. If you
specify only the keyword TID, implicit remote routing is selected
(refer to Implicit Routing below).
UJN=ujn Specifies a user job name (UJN) for the file
input dispositions, the default is the UJN of
enter the command. In the case where you
(DC=IN, DC=NO, or DC=TO), the Job command
determines the default UJN.

to be routed. Except for
the job from which you
specify an input disposition
of the queued file

UN=un Specifies the user name of the remote batch or interactive user to
whom the system routes the file. If you specify only the keyword UN,
implicit remote routing occurs (refer to Implicit Routing following
the last parameter description).

IMPLICIT ROUTING
For remote batch origin jobs, the following action is taken.
• Specifying an ID, ID=id, or TID=C parameter causes routing to the central site.
• Specifying an FM=fm or UN=un parameter with valid arguments causes routing to the ^%^
s p e c i fi e d
remote
batch
or
interactive
terminal.
'
• In all other cases, the system routes the file to the originating remote batch
terminal.
For jobs of any origin other than remote batch, the following action is taken.
• Specifying an ID, ID=id, or TID=C parameter causes routing to the central site.
• Specifying UN, TID, or FM causes routing to the terminal specified by the job's
family name and user name at the time of the processing of the ROUTE command.
• Specifying UN=un or FM=fm with valid arguments causes routing to the specified
remote batch or interactive terminal.
You can use the ENQUIRE command to determine whether your routed file is destined for the
central site or a remote batch terminal. If you specify the JSN=jsn or UJN=ujn parameter,
ENQUIRE returns either RB (remote batch routing) or BC (routing to the batch devices at the
central
site)
in
the
DS
fi e l d
of
the
d i s p l a y.

9-50

60459680

F

/-sS%k

SCOPY COMMAND
The SCOPY command copies a specified number of coded files from one file to another and,
u n l e s s e x p l i c i t l y p r o h i b i t e d , i n d i c a t e s t h e s t r u c t u r e o f t h e fi l e b e i n g c o p i e d b y d i s p l a y i n g
the EORs and EOFs in the receiving file. A coded file is defined as a file containing lines
of 500 characters or less, each terminated by a zero byte (12 zero bits in the lowest byte
of a word).

NOTE
The SCOPY command is not recommended for use
with S, L, or F format tapes because it does
not have the data specification parameters
needed to accommodate the variety of data
formats possible with those tape formats.
For an S, L, or F format tape copying
operation, issue a COPY command with the
a p p r o p r i a t e p a r a m e t e r s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
The SCOPY command cannot copy SI format
tapes. If coded mode is set for an SI tape,
the system terminates the job. The TCOPY
u t i l i t y c o n v e r t s S I c o d e d t a p e fi l e s .
When you copy a file with no EOR or EOF file
marks, the resulting file may have a
d i f f e r e n t l o g i c a l fi l e s t r u c t u r e . I n
particular, when copying such a file to
tape, the system adds an EOR mark to the end
of the file. Such changes do not affect
fi l e c o n t e n t b u t m a y c a u s e v e r i fi c a t i o n
errors.

Format:
S C O P Y, I f n i , l f n 2 , n , f c h a r , l c h a r , n a , R , f c s , fl i n e , l l i n e , n s .
Parameter

Description

lfn

Specifies the name of the file to be copied. You must specify this
parameter.

lfn<

S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e o n t o w h i c h l f n i i s c o p i e d ; i f t h i s
parameter is omitted, file OUTPUT is assumed.
Specifies the number of files (decimal) to copy; if this parameter is
omitted, the file is copied to EOI.

60459680 F

9-51

Parameter

Description

fchar

Specifies the first character position (1 to 500 for 6-bit characters)
of each line to copy; if this parameter is omitted, the copy begins at
character position l.t

lchar

Specifies the last character position (1 to 500 for 6-bit characters)
of each line to copy; lchar must be greater than or equal to fchar. If
this parameter is omitted, the copy ends at character position 500.t

na

Specifies that the job step should not abort when a line terminator
does not appear before an EOR. na can be any string of one to seven
alphanumeric characters.

R

Specifies that both lfni an(* lfn2 be rewound before copying.

fcs

Specifies the character set code of lfni. The value 0 indicates
display code or 6/12-bit display code. 0 is also the default. No
other values are allowed.

fl i n e

Specifies
if lfni Is
if lfni is
with the

the line number of the first line you want to copy from lfni
a sequenced file. If you do not specify this parameter or
not a sequenced file (no line numbers), the copying begins
fi r s t l i n e o f l f n i .

lline

Specifies
if lfni is
if lfni is
controlled

the line number of the last line you want to copy from lfni
a sequenced file. If you do not specify this parameter or
not a sequenced file (no line numbers), the copying is
by parameter n.

ns

S p e c i fi e s n o s t r u c t u r e r e p o r t i n g . I f y o u s p e c i f y a n o n n u l l v a l u e , t h e
system does not display the EORs and EOFs in lfn2. -

If EOI is encountered before the file count is satisfied, an EOF is written on lfn2, and
the operation terminates. If a line is encountered that has more than lchar characters, the
excess characters are truncated.
<*^«tE|v

tSince many characters in 6/12-bit display code require 12 bits rather than 6, this
parameter may produce unforeseen results when copying a file containing 6/12-bit display
code data. Refer to Appendix A for a description of character set codes.

9-52

60459680 F

SCOPY writes lines with an even number of characters. If an input line has an odd character
count and the last character is a blank not immediately preceded by a colon, the last
character is removed. If an input line has an odd character count and the last character is
not a blank or is a blank immediately preceded by a colon, an additional trailing blank is
appended.
If SCOPY attempts to copy a line longer than 500, 6-bit characters, the line is truncated, I
a n d a n i n f o r m a t i v e m e s s a g e i s i s s u e d t o t h e d a y fi l e a f t e r t h e c o p y c o m p l e t e s . '
If the last line of a record does not have an end-of-line terminator, SCOPY issues a dayfile
message. If the na parameter is not specified, the job step then aborts.
Example:
o l d , fi l e a
READY.
list
RECORD 1
AAA
BBB
CCC
RECORD 2
DDD
EEE
FFF
RECORD 3
GGG
•JHH

III
READY.
s c o p y, fi l e a

JpPSV

RECORD 1
AAA
BBB
CCC
-E0RRECORD 2
DDD
EEE
FFF
-E0RRECORD 3
GGG
HHH
III
-E0R-E0FREADY.

60459680 F

9-53

SECHDR COMMAND
The SECHDR command adds security-related information to a file. You can choose to have this
information placed on banner pages throughout the file, placed at the top and bottom of each
page, or both.
Format:
SECHDR,Ifn,FF,0P=p1p2p3p4.
The parameter lfn is required and must be the first parameter. The other parameters are
optional and order-independent.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s a fi l e a s s i g n e d t o y o u r j o b .

y^^v

F F S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e h a s a l r e a d y b e e n f o r m a t t e d f o r p r i n t i n g ; t h a t
is, carriage control characters (such as those controlling page ejects
and page density) have already been inserted.
0Ps=PlP2P3P4 Specifies where the security information will be inserted in the file.
OP=B is the default. You have the following choices:
Pi

Description

B Print the security information on two banner pages,
one at the beginning of the file and one at the end of
t h e fi l e .
F Print the security information on a banner page at the
beginning and the end of every logical file within
fi l e l f n .
R Print the security information on a banner page at the
beginning and the end of every logical record within
fi l e l f n .
P P r i n t t h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f t h e fi l e a t t h e t o p a n d
bottom of every page of output.
You can specify any combination of these options.

^B&K

9-54

60459680 D

The banner pages have the following header lines:
FILE NAME = file name
DATE PRINTED = yy/mm/dd
USER NAME = user name
where the lowercase characters represent job-specific information. Following those header
lines, the system prints the security access level of the file in large block characters.
Example:
The following command specifies that security information is to be placed both in a header
and a footer on each page of the file and also on banner pages that are to be printed at the
beginning and ending of each logical file within FILE213:
SECHDR,FILE213,0P=FP.

SETFAL COMMAND
The SETFAL command changes the security access level of a local file. In most cases, a
l o c a l fi l e r e c e i v e s t h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f t h e j o b t h a t c r e a t e s i t . R e f e r t o S e c u r i t y F e a t u r e s
in section 3 for a detailed discussion of file access levels.
Format:
SETFAL,Ifn,AL=level.
The two parameters are required and are order-dependent.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s a l o c a l fi l e . T h e fi l e c a n n o t b e a d i r e c t a c c e s s p e r m a n e n t
fi l e o r a m a g n e t i c t a p e fi l e .
v^gfey

A L = l e v e l S p e c i fi e s t h e s e c u r i t y a c c e s s l e v e l y o u w a n t a s s s i g n e d t o t h e fi l e .
Unless changed by your site, level can be one of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
On a secured system, the access level you specify must be valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B
r e t u r n s t h i s i n f o r m a t i o n ) . I n a d d i t i o n , t o l o w e r t h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f a fi l e , y o u m u s t b e
authorized to do so (refer to the LIMITS command).
On an unsecured system, the system does not use this access level assignment in monitoring
a c c e s s t o t h e fi l e . I t d o e s , h o w e v e r, b e c o m e a n a t t r i b u t e o f t h e fi l e .

/?s$P^V

60459680

D

9-55

^saafjjk

SETFS COMMAND
The SETFS command sets the auto-drop or no-auto-drop status on files assigned to your job.
If given the no-auto-drop status, a file is not released from your job by commands like NEW,
OLD, CLEAR, RETURN(*), and UNLOAD(*).
Format:
SETFS,Ifnx,Ifn2,...,Ifnn/FS=fs.
or
SETFS,*,lfn1,lfn2,...,lfnn/FS=fs.
Parameter

Description

lfn£ Specifies the local file to be affected.
F S = f s S p e c i fi e s e i t h e r t h e a u t o - d r o p ( F S = A D ) o r n o - a u t o - d r o p ( F S = N A D )
s t a t u s . T h e d e f a u l t s t a t u s f o r u s e r - c r e a t e d fi l e s i s a u t o - d r o p .
Certain system files (for example, ZZZZZCO, ZZZZZC1, ZZZZZC2, and
ZZZZZLD) always have the no-auto-drop status.
The first format of the command gives the specified status to the files lfni. ^e second
format gives the specified status to all files assigned to the job, except files lfn£.
The CLEAR command never releases a file that has a no-auto-drop status, the RETURN and
UNLOAD commands release such a file only if you specify it, and the NEW or OLD command
releases such a file only if It has the same name as the new primary file.

SKIPEI COMMAND
The SKIPEI command directs the system to position the specified file at the EOI.
Format:
/*riS*S

SKIPEI,lfn.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e p o s i t i o n e d .
On magnetic tapes where no EOI is defined, the operation stops at an EOF.
The SKIPEI command has no effect on a primary file since the file Is rewound before every
operation.

I

9-56

60459680

D

SKIPF COMMAND
The SKIPF command directs the system to bypass, in a forward direction, the specified number
of files from the current position of the named file.
Format:

T^

SKIPF,Ifn,n,m.
Parameter

.

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t p y b e p o s i t i o n e d .
n S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r ( d e c i m a l ) o f fi l e s t o b e s k i p p e d ; i f t h e
parameter is omitted, the system assumes 1. The maximum for n is
262143.
m S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e m o d e : C f o r c o d e d , B f o r b i n a r y . I f m i s o m i t t e d ,
the system assumes the file is^-i'n binary mode. If coded mode is set
on an SI tape, the system aborts .the job.
If an EOI is encountered before n files are bypassed, ''file lfn .remains positioned at the EOI,
The SKIPF command has no effect on a primary file since the file is rewound before every
operation.

SKIPFB COMMAND
The SKIPFB command directs the system to bypass, in the reverse direction, the specified
number of files from the current position of the named file.
Format:
SKIPFB,lfn,n,m.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e p o s i t i o n e d .
n S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r ( d e c i m a l ) o f fi l e s t o b e s k i p p e d ; i f t h e
parameter is omitted, the system assumes 1. The maximum for n is
262143.
m S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e m o d e : C f o r c o d e d , B f o r b i n a r y . I f m i s o m i t t e d ,
the system assumes the file is in binary mode. If coded mode is set
on an SI tape, the system aborts the job.
If the system encounters BOI (or the load point of the current volume of a multivolume tape
file), SKIPF command processing ends.
The SKIPFB command has no effect on a primary file since the file is rewound before every
operation.

60459680 D

9-57 |

SKIPR COMMAND
The SKIPR command directs the system to bypass, in a forward direction, the specified number
of logical record or file marks from the current position of the named file.
Format:
SKIPR,Ifn,n,level,m.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e p o s i t i o n e d .
n S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r ( d e c i m a l ) o f r e c o r d a n d fi l e m a r k s t o b e s k i p p e d ;
if this parameter is omitted, the system assumes 1. The maximum for n
is 262143.
l e v e l S p e c i fi e s t h e l e v e l n u m b e r ; 0 O L e v e l < 1 7 . I f 0 < l e v e l < 1 6 , b o t h E O R a n d
EOF marks are counted. If level is 17, only EOF marks are counted.
The default is 0.
m S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e m o d e : C f o r c o d e d , B f o r b i n a r y . I f m i s o m i t t e d ,
the system assumes the file is in binary mode. If coded mode Is set
on an SI tape, the system aborts the job.
Consecutive EOR or EOF marks are counted separately. If the EOI is encountered before n EOR
and EOF marks are bypassed, file lfn remains positioned at the EOI.

^/■^ilv

The SKIPR command has no effect on a primary file since the file is rewound before every
operation.

SORT COMMAND
The SORT command sorts a file of lines in numerical order based on leading line numbers
consisting of a specified number of digits.
Format:
SORT,lfn,NC=n.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e t o b e s o r t e d , l f n m a y b e a l o c a l fi l e o r a d i r e c t
access permanent file assigned to your job.
N C = n S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f l e a d i n g l i n e n u m b e r d i g i t s t o u s e i n s o r t i n g
t h e fi l e . n < 1 0 . T h e d e f a u l t i s 5 .
In the case of duplicate line numbers, all lines other than the first are considered
correction lines. All lines with the same number are deleted from the file except the last
line encountered.
For input from an interactive terminal, SORT deletes a line if a line number is followed by
an empty line or a line number is followed only by a blank. However, the system retains a
line with more than one blank after the line number.
For input from cards, SORT deletes a line if a card containing only the line number is
submitted.
,**C3SmV

| 9-58

60459680 D

/ff^s

If a line number contains more than n digits, you can delete the line either by entering the
first n digits of the line number and pressing the carriage return (terminal input) or by
submitting a card containing only the first n digits of the line number (batch input).
After the sort, lfn is packed and set at EOI.

TCOPY COMMAND
The TCOPY command copies X (external) format binary tapes or E (line image), B (blocked), or
SI (system internal) format coded tapes to mass storage, to an I format tape, or to an SI
binary format tape. It also writes E or B format tapes converted from files on mass
storage, I format tape, or SI format binary tape. The X binary and E, B, and SI coded tape
formats were supported under earlier versions of NOS. Refer to appendix I for the tape
formats of B, E, and X format coded tapes. Now, to access data or write data in one of
these formats, the tape must be assigned as an S (stranger) format tape (refer to the tape
assignment commands in section 12) and the file copied using the TCOPY command.
Order-dependent format:
T C O P Y, I f n j , I f n 2 , f o r m a t , t c , c o p y c n t , c h a r c n t , e r l i m i t , p i p 2 , I f n 3 , n s .
Order-independent format:
TCOPY,I=lfni,0=lfn2,F=format,TC=tc,N=copycnt,CC=charcnt,EL=erlimit,
PO=pip2,L=lfn3,NS=ns.
The parameters on the TCOPY command can appear in order-dependent format, order-independent
format, or a combination of both.
If order-dependent and order-independent parameters are mixed In one TCOPY command, the
order-dependent parameters must appear in their proper position. All parameters are
o p t i o n a l . H o w e v e r, t h e s p e c i fi c a t i o n o f c e r t a i n p a r a m e t e r s p r e c l u d e s t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f
others. A nonapplicable parameter may be ignored or may generate an error. This is stated
in the individual descriptions of the parameters.
/*•*** The parameters are defined as follows:
Parameter
I=lfni
0=lfn2

Description
S p e c i fi e s

S p e c i fi e s

F=format

the
the

fi l e

fi l e
to

Default
to

receive

c o p y.
the

c o p y.

D a t a f o r m a t t h a t s p e c i fi e s t h e t y p e o f
sion for the copying operation. This can be
any one of the following.
format

INPUT
OUTPUT

conver-

X

Conversion
Copy an E format tape to mass
storage, an I, or an SI binary tape
file, or generate a new E format
tape from mass storage, an I, or an
S I b i n a r y t a p e fi l e . T h e E t a p e
must be unlabeled and assigned as S
format.

60459680

D

9-59

Parameter

Description
format

Default

Conversion

B Copy a B format tape to mass
storage, an I, or an SI binary tape
file, or generate a new B tape from
mass storage, an I, or an SI binary
tape file. The B tape must be
unlabeled and assigned as S format.
X Copy an X format tape to mass
storage, an I, or an SI binary tape
file. The unlabeled input tape must
be assigned an S format, with noise
size of eight frames for seven-track
tape or six frames for nine-track
tape (refer to NS parameter on tape
assignment command).
SI Copy an SI coded format tape to mass
storage, an I, or an SI binary tape
fi l e . T h e l a b e l e d o r u n l a b e l e d
input tape must be assigned as S
format, with noise size of eight
frames for seven-track tape or six
frames for nine-track tape (refer to
NS parameter on tape assignment
command). If the SI coded input
tape is completed before EOI is
encountered; the position of the
input tape after the copying is
indeterminate. This is because
control words are used on the SI
coded tape read via S format (EOF on
an SI coded tape is a level 17g
block terminator, whereas EOF on an
S tape is a tape mark).
T C = t c S p e c i fi e s t h e t e r m i n a t i o n c o n d i t i o n f o r c o p y i n g
used in conjunction with N=copycnt. The term
ination condition can be specified as follows:
F or
EOF

When this TC=tc value is set, the
N keywordspecifies the number of
fi l e s t o c o p y.

I or
EOI

This specifies copying to the end
of information. The N keyword is
ignored.

D or
EOD

When this TC=tc value is set, the
N keyword is the number of double
EOFs to which to copy.

Copy to double EOF
(TC=Dor TC=EOD)

N = c o p y c n t S p e c i fi e s t h e c o p y c o u n t u s e d b y t h e t e r m i n a t i o n
condition parameter TC=tc.

9-60

60459680 H

Parameter

Description

Default

C C =ch a rcn t Sp e ci fie s the character count which determines
maximum block size (line length) in characters
for an E or B format tape. This parameter can
only be specified for copying an E or B format
tape.

136 characters for
E format; 150
characters for B
format.

E L = e r l i m i t S p e c i fi e s t h e e r r o r l i m i t , w h i c h s e t s t h e n u m b e r
of nonfatal errors allowed before abort. An
EL=U specification allows an unlimited number of
errors before an abort. This includes parity
errors and block-too-large errors which are re
turned by the tape subsystem after completing
recovery procedures. It also includes invalid
block format errors (invalid byte-count coded
format and/or unused bitcount) for X format and
SI coded format tapes. Error limit is ignored
when generating an E or B format tape from mass
storage, an I format, and an SI binary format
fi l e s i n c e c o n t r o l w o r d r e a d i s n o t u s e d . E r r o r
l i m i t i s l i k e w i s e i g n o r e d i f t h e i n p u t fi l e d e
vice does not support control word read (termi
nals). In that case, any error aborts the job.

Zero

P 0 = p i p 2 S p e c i fi e s o n e o r b o t h o f t h e f o l l o w i n g p r o c e s s i n g
options (not separated by commas).
E Input blocks with parity errors or blocktoo-large errors are processed (copied).

Error blocks are
skipped.

T When generating a B or E format tape,
blocks exceeding the maximum block size
(refer to the CC°charcnt parameter) are
truncated. P0=T is not allowed for other
fi l e c o n v e r s i o n s .

Lines exceeding
the maximum line
size are split
into multiple
blocks.

L = l f n 3 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f a n a l t e r n a t e o u t p u t fi l e t o
receive parity error messages when extended error
processing is in effect (nonzero EL specified),
in which case, the file name lfn3 must not be
the same as lfn2.

OUTPUT

NS=ns Noise size. Any input block containing fewer than
ns characters is considered to be noise and is
discarded. This parameter is valid only for E
format to B format conversions. The maximum value
that can be specified for ns is 41. If NS=0 is
specified, the default value of 18 is used.
Example:

The following TCOPY command combines order-dependent and order-independent parameters:
TCOPY,TAPE1,FILE2,E,CC=200,EL=12.

60459680 D

9-61

The input file TAPEl is an E format tape (assigned as an S format tape). It has a maximum
of 200 characters per line. The copying terminates when a double EOF is encountered
(default). The output file FILE2 can be a mass storage file or an I or SI binary format
tape. The error limit allows up to 12 nonfatal errors (parity/block-too-large), and the bad
data is skipped (default) with informative error messages written to the file OUTPUT
(default).
The TCOPY command begins a copying operation at the current position of both files and
continues until the copy termination condition for copying is met or EOI is encountered.
This termination condition can be a file count, double EOF count, or EOI. If the copying is
terminated by a double EOF (for TC=E0D parameter), the second EOF is detected on lfni but
is not transferred to lfn2. If lfni=lfn2, the named file is read until the
termination condition is satisfied or EOI is encountered. An SI coded tape can be
positioned correctly only to EOI (refer to the F=SI parameter description).
If you specify a file count TC=EOF, and EOI is encountered on the input file before the file ,^m\
c o u n t i s s a t i s fi e d , a n a d d i t i o n a l E O F i s w r i t t e n o n t h e o u t p u t fi l e o n l y i f d a t a o r r e c o r d s }
have been transferred since the previous EOF was written (or since the beginning of the
copying, if no EOFs have been encountered).
The EL=erlimit
processing or
count for the
for every block

or P0=E parameters provide extended error processing. This allows the
skipping of blocks with parity errors or block-too-large errors. The block
first block to be copied is initially set to zero and is incremented by one
and every EOF processed.

When creating a B format tape from a mass storage, I, or SI binary format file, a block
shorter than the noise size specified on the tape assignment statement is blank filled to
the noise size. A noise block could also be generated when a block exceeding the maximum
block size for the B format tape is split into multiple blocks. If the P0=T parameter is
specified, blocks exceeding the maximum block size are truncated.
When creating an E format tape from a mass storage, I, or SI binary format file, blocks that
exceed the maximum block size for the E format tape are split into multiple blocks. If a
continuation block contains only the end-of-line indicator (zero word), the continuation
block is discarded. If the PO1^ parameter Is specified, blocks exceeding the maximum block
size are truncated (all continuation blocks are discarded).

TDUMP COMMAND
The TDUMP command lists a file in octal or alphanumeric format. It dumps the entire file or
the specified number of lines, records, or files. If more than one limit is set, the limit
reached first overrides the others. If you are in ASCII mode (refer to the ASCII command in
section 8) and the output file is assigned to your terminal, TDUMP interprets input and
displays alphanumeric output as 6/12-bit display code.
NOTE
TDUMP produces unpredictable results when
dumping an S, L, or F format tape file.
Use the COPY command to convert the S, L,
or F format tape file to a mass storage
file or to an I or SI binary format tape
file before attempting to dump the file
using TDUMP.

9-62

60459680

D

Format:
T D U M P, P i , p 2 , .

»Pn«

El

Description

I=lfnL

Specifies the local file to be dumped (default is TAPE1).

L=lfn2

S p e c i fi e s t h e l o c a l fi l e t o w h i c h t h e o u t p u t i s w r i t t e n ( d e f a u l t i s
OUTPUT). If lfn2 is not a local file, TDUMP creates it. It does
not rewind lfn2 before or after the dump.

0

Specifies an octal dump only.

A

Specifies an alphanumeric dump only.

/§3^S

I f b o t h 0 and A are specified, the last one overrides. If neither 0
nor A is specified, TDUMP lists both an octal and an alphanumeric dump.
R=rcount

Specifies the maximum decimal number of records to be dumped. If R is
omitted or set to zero, the dump continues to EOI.

NOTE
The record count restarts at each EOF.

F=fcount

Specifies the maximum decimal number of files to be dumped. If F is
omitted, the dump continues to EOI. If F=0, dump continues until an
empty file (double EOF) or EOI is encountered.

N=lines

Specifies the maximum decimal number of lines to be dumped. If N is
omitted or set to zero, the dump continues to EOI. The blank line
o u t p u t w i t h t h e e n d - o f - r e c o r d , e n d - o f - fi l e , e n d - o f - i n f o r m a t i o n , a n d
ABOVE LINE REPEATED messages is included in the line count.

NR

D o n o t r e w i n d fi l e l f n i b e f o r e d u m p ( d e f a u l t i s t o r e w i n d l f n i ) .

Example:
Two lines, each containing the alphabet, were input to file X from an interactive terminal.
File X was dumped to file Y producing the following output.
FILE
BUMP
T D U M P, I = X , L = Y.
yy/mm/dd.
08.05.51.
PA G E
1.
F 1 R 1 W 0- 0102 0304 0506 0710 1112 1314 1516 1720 2122 2324 2526 2730 3132 0000 0000 0102 0304 0506 0710 1112
ABCDEFGHIJ
KLMN0PQRST
F 1 R 1 W 4- 1314 1516 1720 2122 2324 2526 2730 3132 0000 0000
KLMNOPQRST
UVWXYZ
— END OF RECORD —
— END OF INFORMATION —
— END OF DUMP —

60459680 D

UVWXYZ

ABCDEFGH1J

9-63

T h e p r e fi x
F

1

R

1

W

0

means file 1, record 1, word 0. The zeros following each alphabet are the end-of-line
indicators.

UNLOAD COMMAND
The UNLOAD command releases files assigned to the job and may release file space (depending
o n t h e fi l e t y p e ) .
Format:
UNLOAD,Ifnj,Ifn2,...,Ifnn.
or
UNLOAD,*,Ifnj,Ifn2,...,Ifnn.
Parameter

Description

l f n i S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f a fi l e a s s i g n e d t o y o u r j o b .
T h e fi r s t f o r m a t u n l o a d s t h e n a m e d fi l e s ( l f n i , l f n 2 , . . . , l f n n ) . T h e s e c o n d f o r m a t u n l o a d s
all files assigned to the job except the named files. If no files are named on the second
format, the asterisk specification unloads all files assigned to the job. There are some
exceptions. The UNLOAD command does not release any files that have checkpoint or no-autodrop status. Certain system scratch files (for example, ZZZZZCO, ZZZZZC1, ZZZZZC2, and
ZZZZZLD) have no-auto-drop status. You can give any local file this status by using the
SETFS command.
The UNLOAD command performs the same function as the RETURN command except as noted below.
Refer to the description of the RETURN command given earlier in this section to determine
the operation performed for each file type.
I f t h e fi l e b e i n g u n l o a d e d i s a m a g n e t i c t a p e fi l e o r a d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e r e s i d i n g o n a n ^
auxiliary removable pack and the job requires more than one tape or pack concurrently, the
UNLOAD command differs from the RETURN command. It does not decrease the number of tapes or
packs that were scheduled for the job with the RESOURC command. If the file is a magnetic
tape file and if the previous operation was a write, the following operations are performed:
• If the tape is ANSI labeled, the system writes a tape mark, an E0F1 label, and three
tape marks and then unloads the tape.
• If the tape Is unlabeled and the data format specified on the ASSIGN, LABEL, or
REQUEST command is S, L, or F, the system writes four tape marks and then unloads
the tape.
• If the tape is unlabeled and the data format is I or SI, the system writes a tape
mark, an EOF1 label, and three tape marks and then unloads the tape.
Refer to Magnetic Tape Files In section 2 and Tape Management commands in section 12 for
further information about tape files, and to appendix G for a description of an EOFl label.

9-64

60459680

D

UNLOCK COMMAND
The UNLOCK command rescinds the LOCK command and clears the write interlock for the
specified file. This command can only be used on local mass storage files.
Format:
UNLOCK,Ifnx,ifn2,...,lfnn.
Parameter

Description

l f n i S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f a l o c a l fi l e .
Library files cannot be unlocked.

VERIFY COMMAND
The VERIFY command performs a binary comparison of all data from the current position of the
fi l e s s p e c i fi e d . T h e c o m p a r i s o n I s m e a n i n g f u l i f t h e fi l e s a r e w i t h i n t h e r a n g e o f
c o m p a t i b l e f o r m a t s l i s t e d i n t a b l e 9 - 3 . F o r o u t p u t l i s t i n g fi l e s n o t c o n n e c t e d t o y o u r
terminal, the VERIFY command honors the page length and print density set for your job using
the SET command and the PL and PD symbolic names.
Format:
V E R I F Y, I f n x , I f n 2 , p i , p 2 , . . . , p n .
Parameter

lfn
lfn2

Description
S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi r s t fi l e ; i f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d ,
TAPE1 is assumed.
Specifies the name of the second file; if this parameter is omitted,
TAPE2 is assumed.

Optional parameters
Description

N=x

I n t h e c a s e o f m u l t i fi l e fi l e s , s p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r
o f fi l e s t o v e r i f y. T h e d e f a u l t i s N = l .
I f y o u s p e c i f y j u s t t h e k e y w o r d N , v e r i fi c a t i o n
proceeds until the end of information is reached on
b o t h fi l e s .
If you specify N=0, verification terminates whenever
an empty file is encountered on either file.

r
60459680 D

E=y

Specifies the maximum number of errors to list. The
default is E=100. Specifying E has the same effect as
E=0.

L=lfn3

L i s t e r r o r s o n fi l e l f n 3 . I f L i s o m i t t e d , t h e
system assumes L=OUTPUT.

9-65

-4££$${r~*

Pi

Description

A A b o r t a f t e r v e r i fi c a t i o n c o m p l e t e d i f e r r o r s o c c u r r e d .
R R e w i n d b o t h fi l e s b e f o r e a n d a f t e r t h e v e r i fi c a t i o n .
C S e t c o d e d fi l e m o d e o n b o t h fi l e s . T h i s i s a p p l i c a b l e
only to S and L format tapes. If coded mode is set on
an SI tape, the system aborts the job.
C l S e t c o d e d fi l e m o d e o n t h e fi r s t fi l e o n l y . T h i s i s
applicable only to S and L format tapes. If coded
mode is set on an SI tape, the system aborts the job.
C 2 S e t c o d e d fi l e m o d e o n t h e s e c o n d fi l e o n l y . T h i s i s
applicable only to S and L format tapes. If coded
mode is set on an SI tape, the system aborts the job.
BS=bsize Defines the maximum block size (PRU size) in central
memory words for an S or L tape. This parameter is
legal only for the verification of S and L tape
verifies. The default for an S tape is lOOOg words,
and for an L tape, it is 2000g words.
Whenever words on lfnj and lfn2 do not match, the VERIFY command lists the following.
• Record number.
• Word number within the record.
• Words from both files that do not match.

NOTE
When printing output for text files, VERIFY
u s e s t h e fi r s t s e ven characters of the first
word of the record as the record name.
VERIFY assumes that the record is in 6-bit
display code. Therefore, if you attempt to
display VERIFY output for a record in 6/12bit display code while your terminal is in
ASCII mode, the output display may be
garbled* To avoid this problem, you should
set your terminal to NORMAL mode before
listing VERIFY output.

In a verification involving S, L, or F format tapes, the VERIFY command first clears the
extraneous data in the last word of each block (as specified by the byte count and the
unused bit count) and then makes the comparison. On these formats, every block is
considered a record (returns EOR status).
If a verification of an L or F format tape requires additional field length, the VERIFY
command increases the field length as needed.
The maximum block size for an L format tape is specified by the BS=bsize or its default.
The maximum block size for an F format tape is calculated from the frame or character count
specified on the command when the file is assigned..
9-66

60459680

D

Table 9-3. Compatible File Structures for the VERIFY Command
SECOND FILE (lfn2)
Tape Formats

Mass
Storage
Mass Storage

FIRST
FILE
(lfnx)

SI

SI

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Tape
Format

mmm

Y//////A
Yes

NOTE
The No entries indicate that the logical
structures of the files compared are
incompatible. The VERIFY command may
accept those combinations, but the results
require you to make a knowledgeable
correlation of results with the format
descriptions in section 12. In some cases,
t h e v e r i fi c a t i o n o f a n i n c o m p a t i b l e p a i r
may result in a VERIFY GOOD message;
otherwise, a VERIFY ERRORS message is
listed.

/0^\,

/S&*\_

60459680 D

9-67

WRITEF COMMAND
The WRITEF command directs the system to write a specified number of file marks on the named
fi l e .
Format:
WRITEF,Ifn,x.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e w r i t t e n o n .
x S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f fi l e m a r k s t o b e w r i t t e n . I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s
omitted, the system assumes x is 1. The maximum for x is 262143.
If the last operation to the file was a write that did not end with the writing of an EOR or
EOF, WRITEF writes a record mark before it writes the specified number of file marks. For
all other cases, WRITEF writes the file marks without a preceding record mark.

WRITER COMMAND
The WRITER command directs the system to write a specified number of empty records on the
named file.
Format:
WRITER,lfn,x.
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o r e c e i v e t h e e m p t y r e c o r d s .
x S p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f e m p t y r e c o r d s t o b e w r i t t e n . I f t h i s
parameter is omitted, the system assumes x is 1. The maximum for x is
262143.

|

9-68

60459680

D

/IfP^N

PERMANENT FILE COMMANDS

10

With permanent file commands, you can create, access, and purge permanent files. You can
also control other users' access to your files.
The following are the permanent file commands and their functions.
Command

^

v

Function

APPEND

Appends data to an indirect access permanent file.

ATTACH

Assigns a direct access permanent file to a job.

CATLIST

L i s t s p e r m a n e n t fi l e i n f o r m a t i o n .

CHANGE

Changes permanent file characteristics.

COMMON

A c c e s s e s l i b r a r y t y p e fi l e s .

DEFINE

Creates a direct access permanent file.

DROPDS

Releases the disk space associated with a permanent file for which a
v a l i d a l t e r n a t e s t o r a g e c o p y e x i s t s . T h e l o c a l fi l e c o p y ( i f a n y ) w i l l
also be returned.

GET

Retrieves a copy of an indirect access permanent file as a local file.

MFLINK

Transfers a file from one mainfrmae to another or alters the attributes
of a file on another mainframe.

OLD

Retrieves a copy of an indirect access permanent file as the primary
fi l e .

PACKNAM

Specifies an auxiliary device from which permanent files are to be
accessed.

PERMIT

Grants permanent file access permission to other users.

PURGALL

P u r g e s a l l fi l e s h a v i n g t h e s p e c i fi e d c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s .

PURGE

Purges the named files.

RECLAIM

Creates and manages tape and disk backup copies of permanent files.

REPLACE

Copies a local file over an indirect access permanent file.

SAVE

Creates an indirect access permanent file.

SETPFAC

Changes the security access category set of a permanent file.

SETPFAL

Changes the security access level of a permanent file.

jj^\

60459680 G

10-1

If an error occurs in an operation on one file of a multifile request, the operation is not
performed on the subsequent files. For example, if an error occurs in the processing of
file B on the following command:
GET,A,B,C,D.
files C and D are not processed.
On a secured system, your job may not access a permanent file unless the job is validated
for the access level and access category set assigned to the file. For an alternate user
access, such an access attempt is treated as a file-not-found error; for an access to one of
y o u r o w n fi l e s , i t i s t r e a t e d a s a s e c u r i t y c o n fl i c t .
In addition, your job may not change or access certain types of permanent file information.
The following limitations apply:
• CHANGE, PERMIT, and SETPFAC requests are not allowed on files with an access level
lower than that of the job.
• CATLIST requests for permit information are not allowed on files
level higher than that of the job. Normal CATLIST requests are
information on the password expiration date and access category
in the CATLIST output. If a password exists, it is returned as

with an access
allowed, but
set is not included
seven asterisks

For more information on permanent files, refer to Permanent Files, Mass Storage File
Residence, and Alternate Storage Subsystems in section 2.
To determine the meaning of a permanent file error message, refer to appendix B.

COMMON PARAMETERS
Some permanent file commands can process several files. Each file is identified by a oneto seven-character file name. The permanent file operation is performed on each file in the
sequence specified on the command. If the NA parameter is not specified on the command and
if an error occurs while one of the files is being processed, the job step terminates.
When this happens, the files preceding the file in error are processed, but the files
succeeding it are not. If the NA parameter is specified on the command, the job step does
not terminate as a result of the error, and all files are processed except the file in error.
Where a slash is used, it separates the file names from other parameters. The parameters
specified after the slash are optional and order independent. Parameters specified after
the slash affect all files named before the slash.
Permanent file access is controlled by the permit category (CT), user name (UN), file access
password (PW), security access level (AL), and access mode (M). parameters. Permanent file
residence is determined by the preferred residence (PR), auxiliary device (PN), and device
type (R) parameters. Processing options include the no abort (NA), wait-if-busy (WB),
subsystem selection (SS), and backup copy (BR) parameters.

10-2

60459680

G

;

In the following list, parameters common to more than one permanent file command are
described in alphabetic order. For the format of each command, refer to the command
descriptions following the parameter descriptions.
Parameter
AL=level

Description
Specifies the security access level you want assigned to the file.
Unless changed by your site, level can be one of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
When used with the DEFINE command, the default for this parameter is
the current job access level. When used with the SAVE command, the
default is the access level of the local file being saved.

BR=br

Specifies the backup copy requirement. You can request that a tape
backup copy, an alternate storage subsystem backup copy, or no backup
copy be kept of the permanent file. If BR=br is omitted when the file
is created, a backup copy of the file is stored on tape. For more
information, refer to Alternate Storage Subsystems in section 2.
br

/#^\

Backup Requirement

Y

A tape backup copy should be kept, even if a copy of
the file exists on an alternate storage subsystem.

MD

A tape backup copy need not be kept, if a copy of the
file exists on an alternate storage subsystem.
A backup copy need not be kept for this file. The
system permanent file backup utilities do not process
files with BR=N.

CT=ct

S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e p e r m i t c a t e g o r y. I f C T = c t i s o m i t t e d w h e n t h e fi l e
i s c r e a t e d , t h e fi l e i s p r i v a t e . T h e fi l e c a t e g o r y c a n b e c h a n g e d
l a t e r.
ct
Category
P, PR, or PRIVATE

P r i v a t e fi l e s ; a v a i l a b l e f o r a c c e s s o n l y
by their creator and by those granted
e x p l i c i t a c c e s s p e r m i s s i o n b y t h e fi l e
creator (refer to the PERMIT command).
The system records the user name of each
user who accessed the file, the number of
accesses made, and the date and time of
the last access by each user. The file
creator can list this information with the
CATLIST(LO=FP) command.

60459680 G

10-3

Parameter

Description
ct

Category

S or SPRIV

S e m i p r i v a t e fi l e s ; a v a i l a b l e f o r
access by a user who knows the
file name, user name, and password
and who has not been explicitly
denied permission to the file
(M=NULL parameter on a PERMIT
command).
Information provided by
CATLIST(L0=FP) for semi-private
files is the same as that provided
f o r p r i v a t e fi l e s .

PU

NA

or

PUBLIC

Public

fi l e s ; a v a i l a b l e f o r a c c e s s
by all users who>know the file
name, user name, and password.
The system records the number of
times the file was accessed and
the date and time of the last
access, but does not record user
names. This information can be
obtained using CATLIST(LO=F).

Specifies the no abort option. Normally, an error in command
processing terminates the job. However, if NA is specified, the job
does not terminate as a result of the error. The error is handled in
one of two ways.
• I f t h e e r r o r c o n d i t i o n i s t e m p o r a r y, j o b p r o c e s s i n g i s
suspended until the error condition ends (for example, when a
requested direct access file is busy or a requested auxiliary
device is not available). In a multimainframe environment,
job processing may be suspended until some period after the
error condition ends.
• I f t h e e r r o r c o n d i t i o n i s n o t t e m p o r a r y, t h e j o b c o n t i n u e s
with the next operation. The job processes the next file
listed on the command or, if no more files are listed,
processes the next command.
You may not specify both the NA and WB parameters.

PN=packname

Specifies the one- to seven-character pack name used in conjunction
with the R parameter to identify the auxiliary device to be accessed
in the permanent file request. This parameter is specified only when
the file to be accessed resides on an auxiliary device.
An auxiliary device is a mass storage device that supplements the
normal family of permanent, file devices. A RESOURC command must be
included in any job that concurrently uses two or more auxiliary disk
packs or an auxiliary pack and a magnetic tape.
If you specify PN=0 on a permanent file command, it overrides any
previously issued PACKNAM commands. You can then access files on the
permanent file family device. PN=0 does not affect subsequent
commands, only the current command.

10-4

60459680 G

J0$^>\

Parameter

Description

P R = p r S p e c i fi e s t h e p r e f e r r e d r e s i d e n c e . I f P R = p r i s o m i t t e d w h e n a d i r e c t
access file is defined, no preference is assumed. For more
information, refer to Alternate Storage Subsystems in section 2.
Pr

Preference

M Yo u p r e f e r t h a t t h e d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e b e c o p i e d t o M S F
between accesses. However, the system might not copy the
file to MSF despite the specified preference.
N Yo u h a v e n o p r e f e r e n c e .
PW=password Specifies the 1- to 7-character file password. If a password is
a ssi g n e d to the file, users other than the file creator must specify
the password when accessing the file.
If only the keyword PW is specified, you must include the password as
a s i n g l e - l i n e r e c o r d i n t h e i n p u t fi l e . I n a i n t e r a c t i v e j o b , t h e
password is requested by a ? prompt at the terminal.
R = r S p e c i fi e s t h e d e v i c e t y p e o n w h i c h t h e fi l e r e s i d e s o r i s t o r e s i d e .
_r
Device
DBi 885-42 Disk Storage Subsystem (Ki<3; full-track).

r

DCi 895-1/2 Disk Storage Subsystem (l ^ .
f e r s . T h e fi l e n a m e m u s t b e o n e t o s e v e n a l p h a n u m e r i c c h a r a c t e r s a n d /
lfn must reside on disk. If the transfer is from the local host to
the remote host, lfn must be a local file before you enter the MFLINK
command. If the transfer is from the remote host to the local host,
MFLINK either writes over the existing lfn, or if there is no local
file, MFLINK creates a new file with the name lfn. If you omit lfn,
but subsequent directives call for a file transfer, MFLINK uses LFILE
as the default lfn. Some directives, such as CHANGE, PERMIT, and
PURGE (for a NOS remote host) do not require an lfn, because they do
not cause a file transfer. MFLINK rewinds lfn before and after the
t r a n s f e r.

S T = l i d S p e c i fi e s t h e l o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r ( L I D ) o f t h e r e m o t e h o s t t o w h i c h
MFLINK is to send the directives record. The LID must be a
three-character string defined by your site. You must specify the ST
parameter on the first, and only the first, MFLINK command of a series
of MFLINK commands (an MFLINK session) that are for the same remote
h o s t . T h e S T = l i d s p e c i fi c a t i o n r e m a i n s i n e ff e c t d u r i n g t h e e n t i r e
session. On subsequent MFLINK commands in the same session, any other
p a r a m e t e r s n o t s p eci fied revert to thei r defaul t values. The
occurrence of the ST=lid parameter on an MFLINK command initiates a
new MFLINK session with the specified remote host. Once you have
entered an MFLINK command with an ST=lid parameter, you can resume
that MFLINK session at any time during your job by entering an MFLINK
command without an ST=lid parameter.
I = d i r fi l e S p e c i fi e s t h e l o c a l fi l e w h i c h c o n t a i n s t h e d i r e c t i v e s t h a t t h e s y s t e m
sends to the remote host. The file name must be one to seven
alphanumeric characters. The system reads directives from the current
position on the file to the next EOR. If you specify only the keyword
I , fi l e I N P U T b e c o m e s t h e d i r e c t i v e s fi l e . I f y o u o m i t t h e I = d i r fi l e
parameter, the system reads directives from the lines immediately
following the MFLINK command. In this case, the directives must all
begin with a prefix character and the system reads directives until it
comes to a line without the prefix character.

10-22

60459680

G

0m^\

Parameter

Description

D D = d d S p e c i fi e s t h e d a t a f o r m a t o f t h e fi l e t o b e t r a n s f e r r e d . T h e D D = d d
parameter both describes the character set of lfn on the host where it
currently resides and also specifies the character set lfn is to have
a f t e r t h e t r a n s f e r.
For file transfers between NOS mainframes and between NOS/BE and NOS
m a i n f r a m e s t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s e ff e c t i v e l y i g n o r e d . T h e fi l e w i l l h a v e
the same format on both mainframes.
The interpretation of the DD=dd parameter depends on the operating
s y s t e m ( s ) i n v o l v e d i n t h e fi l e t r a n s f e r. T h e f o l l o w i n g p a r a g r a p h s
describe how NOS interprets the DD=dd parameter. For its
interpretation by other operating systems, refer to the Remote Host
Facility Usage manual.
On NOS, you can specify the following values for dd:
dd

Description

C 6 T h e fi l e c o n t a i n s c h a r a c t e r d a t a i n a 6 4 - c h a r a c t e r ( o r l e s s )
subset of the ASCII 128-character set. The character code
of lfn is 6-bit display code and its lines are zero-byte
termi nated.
C 8 T h e fi l e c o n t a i n s c h a r a c t e r d a t a i n a l a r g e r t h a n
64-character subset of the ASCII 128-character set. The
character code of lfn is the 7-bit ASCII code (rightj u s t i fi e d i n 1 2 - b i t fi e l d s ) a n d i t s l i n e s a r e z e r o - b y t e
termi nated.
U S S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e c o n t a i n s b i n a r y d a t a i n s t r u c t u r e d
format with EORs and EOFs. The file is transmitted as a
continuous string of binary data, broken only by EORs and
EOFs as appropriate.
U U S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e c o n t a i n s b i n a r y d a t a w i t h o u t E O R s
and EOFs. NOS treats UU as US. If you send a file to a
non-NOS or non-NOS/BE remote host with DD=UU specified and
the file contains EORs or EOFs, the remote host may ignore
them.

0$*\
60459680

G

10-22.1/10-22.2

|

V.

^

^

Parameter

Description
If the file is character data, you do not need to specify a DD=dd
parameter. The remote host determines the format in which to
r e a d / w r i t e t h e fi l e . I f y o u t r a n s f e r a b i n a r y fi l e t o o r f r o m a
mainframe with a different word size than the model 170, the mainframe
may add extra bits at EORs or EOFs.

EP

Specifies the error processing that ensues if network problems cause a
l o s s o f t h e c o n n e c t i o n d u r i n g a fi l e t r a n s f e r. I f y o u o m i t t h e
parameter EP, the system retries the request. The EP parameter
i n h i b i t s t h i s r e t r y. T h e s y s t e m a t t e m p t s t o c o r r e c t d a t a t r a n s m i s s i o n
errors, regardless of the EP parameter.

RT

Specifies the real-time action the system is to take when network
resources are temporarily unavailable. If you specify RT and some
network resource necessary for you to connect to a remote host is
unavailable, MFLINK aborts without any retries. If you do not specify
RT, a f t e r a n i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d p e r i o d o f t i m e M F L I N K r e t r i e s u n t i l
the connection is successful.

PC=c

S p e c i fi e s t h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r f o r M F L I N K d i r e c t i v e s . T h e d e f a u l t
p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r i s a n a s t e r i s k ( * ) . T h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r c a n b e a n y
6-bit display code character except a closing parenthesis, a dollar
sign, a period, comma, or a colon. To avoid confusion between
commands and routing directives, use caution in selecting alphabetic
c h a r a c t e r s f o r t h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r.

00™^\

/f^S.

MFLINK DIRECTIVES
The action taken by MFLINK depends on the directives you specify. You can specify directives
immediately following the MFLINK command if you prefix each directive with the prefix char
acter. The system discards the prefix characters before forwarding the directives to the
r e m o t e h o s t . A l t e r n a t i v e l y, y o u c a n s p e c i f y a d i r e c t i v e s fi l e w i t h t h e I = d i r fi l e p a r a m e t e r.
T h e d i r e c t i v e s i n t h e d i r e c t i v e s fi l e d o n o t r e q u i r e t h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r. T h e d i r e c t i v e s
must be commands recognized by the remote host; for example, if the remote host is a NOS/BE
system, your directives must be NOS/BE commands. NOS allows only a small subset of its
commands to be used as MFLINK directives and, further, may require some directives to have a
slightly different form or function from their command counterparts.
This section documents only those MFLINK directives valid for a NOS remote host,
remote hosts, refer to the Remote Host Facility Usage manual.

For other

NOS, as a remote host, processes directives of up to 80 characters. A directive longer than
80 characters terminates the processing of the current directives record. A directive can
span more than one line as long as it does not exceed the 80-character limit. You indicate
that the next line is a continuation line by ending the current line with a comma.

60459680 F

10-23

T h e M F L I N K d i r e c t i v e s f a l l i n t o t h e t h r e e c a t e g o r i e s o f r e c o v e r y d i r e c t i v e s , fi l e t r a n s f e r
d i r e c t i v e s , a n d fi l e a l t e r a t i o n d i r e c t i v e s a s f o l l o w s :
Recovery
USER
CHARGE

File

Transfer

File

APPEND
ATTACH
DEFINE

GET

REPLACE
SAVE

Alteration

CHANGE
PERMIT
PURGE
PACKNAM

Recovery directives are directives that a host must send a remote host any time you initiate
or resume an MFLINK session. File transfer directives are directives that transfer a file
from one host to another. There can be only one file transfer directive in a given direc
ti v e s r e c o r d .
The directives operate in a manner similar to that of their NOS command counterparts. One
exception is the function of the NA keyword.
The NA option on an MFLINK directive works in a manner very similar to the NA option on NOS
permanent file commands. The main difference is that the system does not suspend MFLINK
p r o c e s s i n g i n d e fi n i t e l y w h i l e i t w a i t s f o r a t e m p o r a r y e r r o r c o n d i t i o n t o c l e a r. I f A P L O
(removable pack option) is set to NONZERO (refer to the description of COMSPFM parameters in
the Installation Handbook) and the temporary error condition persists beyond an
installation-defined timeout period, MFLINK issues a message indicating that the timeout
o c c u r r e d a n d t h e n c o n t i n u e s . I f A P L O i s s e t t o Z E R O , M F L I N K w i l l n o t w a i t f o r a p a c k t o b e ■/ t S | %
mounted
but
will
continue
i m m e d i a t e l y.
/
The following directive descriptions show the format of each directive and describe the func
tion of each directive whose function differs from that of its NOS command counterpart.
APPEND Directive
The APPEND directive adds the file specified on the MFLINK command (lfn) to the end of pfn.
Format:
APPEND, pfn/UN=username, PW=pas sword, PN=packname, R=r, NA, WB.
ATTACH Directive
The ATTACH directive retrieves a copy of pfn from the remote host and makes that copy a
temporary file with the name specified on the MFLINK command. No interlock is maintained
between lfn and pfn, except during the file transfer (as if M=READ had been specified).
Format:
ATTACH,pfn/UN=username,PW=password,PN=packname,R=r,NA,RT,WB.
CHANGE Directive
The CHANGE directive operates the same as the NOS command.
Format:
CHANGE,nfn=ofn/PW=password,CT=ct,M=m,BR=br,PR=pr,PN=packname,
R=r,NA,CE,WB,XD=expiredate,XT=expireterm,AC=ac,CP.

10-24

60459680

E

CHARGE Directive
The CHARGE directive operates the same as its NOS command counterpart, including the
handling of default charges.
Format:
CHARGE,chargenumber,proj ectnumber.
If the CHARGE directive is required, it must immediately follow the USER directive.
DEFINE Directive
The DEFINE directive creates a
onto it the file specified by lfn
a n e x i s t i n g d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e ;
maintained between lfn and pfn,
s p e c i fi e d ) .

direct access file named pfn on the remote host and copies
on the MFLINK command. There is no provision to copy over
y o u m u s t p u r g e t h e e x i s t i n g fi l e . N o i n t e r l o c k i s
except during the file transfer (as if M=READ had been

Format:
DEFINE,pfn/PW=password,CT=c,M=m,BR=br,PR=pr,PN=packname,R=r,S=space,NA,WB,
AL=level,XD=expiredate,XT=expireterm,AC=ac.
/ fi p f fl ^

DROPDS Directive
The DROPDS directive releases the current copy of a permanent file from mass storage when a
back up copy has been saved on a storage device.
Format:
DROPDS,pfn/PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
GET Directive

/j$S5\

The GET directive retrieves a copy of a permanent file from the remote host and gives it the
name lfn, specified on the MFLINK command.
Format:
GET,pfn/UN=username,PW=password,PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
PACKNAM Directive
The PACKNAM directive operates the same as its NOS command counterpart. If you use the
PACKNAM directive, it must precede any file transfer directive in the same directives
record. The PACKNAM directive only applies to the directive record in which it appears.
Format:
PACKNAM,PN=packname,R=r.

y^SpB?5^

PACKNAM,packname,R=r.

60459680

H

10-25

If you are authorized to access auxiliary devices, you can always access files on an
auxiliary device that is already mounted. If you attempt an MFLINK access of a file on an
unmounted auxiliary device, you get a DEVICE UNAVAILABLE message unless your site has
enabled the wait-for-unmounted-device installation option. If this option is present on
more than one mainframe in an RHF network, a deadlock situation is possible. If such a
deadlock occurs, MFLINK would time-out the connection as discussed previously.
PERMIT Directive
The PERMIT directive operates the same as its NOS command counterpart.
Format:
PERMIT,pfn,username=m/PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB,XD=expiredate,XT=expireterm.
PURGE Directive
The PURGE directive operates the same as its NOS command counterpart.
Format:
PURGE,pfn/UN=username,PW=password,PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
REPLACE Directive
The REPLACE directive replaces pfn on the remote host with file lfn, as specified on the
MFLINK command.
Format:
REPLACE,pfn/UN=username,PW=password,PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
SAVE Directive
The SAVE directive creates an indirect access file named pfn on the remote host and copies
onto it the file specified by lfn on the MFLINK command.
Format:
SAVE,pfn/PW=password,CT=ct,M=m,PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB,AL=level,XD=expiredate,
XT=expireterm,AC=ac.
USER Directive
The USER directive specifies validation information for the remote host. It operates the
same as its NOS command counterpart. The USER directive must be the first directive
associated with an MFLINK command that has ST=lid specified. You do not need to specify
this directive at any other time.
Format:
USER,username,password,familyname.
If the remote host is a NOS Version 2.2 or higher system, the password specified must be the
batch password.
|

10-26

60459680

H

INTERACTIVE USE OF MFLINK
When you use MFLINK in an interactive job, the system obtains the directives in one of the
following ways:
• If you specify I=dirfile on the MFLINK command, the system reads the local file
n a m e d d i r fi l e . I f d i r fi l e i s a s s i g n e d t o t h e t e r m i n a l , t h e s y s t e m p r o m p t s t h e
t e r m i n a l u s i n g t h e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r.
• If you omit the I=dirfile parameter, the system also prompts the terminal using the
prefix character. If the MFLINK command is part of a procedure, the system reads
t h e l i n e s i m m e d i a t e l y f o l l o w i n g t h e c o m m a n d . I f t h e fi r s t l i n e f o l l o w i n g t h e
command does not begin with the prefix character, the system prompts the terminal.
/

^

T

\

When reading from the terminal, the system prompts for directives until you enter an empty
line (only a carriage return) or the prefix character in response to a prompt. The system
then sends the directives (minus the prefix character) to the remote host. The remote host
responds with messages indicating the success or failure of the operations.
Any time you enter an MFLINK command that has the ST=lid specified, the system initiates a
new MFLINK session. If you enter the command without the ST=lid parameter, the system
resumes the session with the remote host currently connected.
Examples: (NOS to NOS)
1. Assume you are at mainframe MFB. To transfer a file from mainframe MFA to MFB and
purge it on MFA, you must enter commands and directives similar to the following:
MFLINK, NE W FILE, ST =* FA.
•USER, XYX, ABC.
*ATTACH,OLDFILE/PN=USER.
*PURGE,OLDFILE/PN=USER.

2. Assume you are on mainframe MFB. To transfer four files from mainframe MFA, enter
commands and directives similar to the following:
MFLINK, FILE 1, ST =M FA, I=DIRECTS.
MFLINK,FILE2,I=DIRECTS.
MFLINK, FILE3,I=DIRECTS.
MFLINK,FILE4,I=DIRECTS.

/#*s\

r

60459680

D

10-27

The file DIRECTS has the following contents:
USER,XYZ,ABC.
CHARGE,1234,345N355.
GET,LFN1.
-EORGET,LFN2.
-EORATTACH,PFN1/PN=USER.
-EORATTACH,PFNS.
-EOI-

OLD COMMAND
The OLD command retrieves a copy of an indirect access permanent file and makes it the
p r i m a r y fi l e .
Format:
OLD,Ifn=pfn/UN=username,PW=password,PN=packname,R=r,NA,ND,WB.
Parameter

Description

l f n = p f n S p e c i fi e s t h e o n e - t o s e v e n - c h a r a c t e r fi l e n a m e l f n g i v e n t o t h e
p r i m a r y fi l e c o p y o f i n d i r e c t a c c e s s p e r m a n e n t fi l e p f n . I f l f n = i s
omitted, the primary file is named pfn.
The full descriptions of the following optional parameters (except ND) are given at the
beginning of this section.
Parameter

Description

UN=username Specifies the user name. Specified if the indirect access permanent
fi l e i s i n a n o t h e r u s e r ' s c a t a l o g .
PW=password Specifies the file password. Specified if UN=username is specified,
and if the permanent file has a password.
PN=packname Specifies the auxiliary device name. Specified if the permanent file
resides on an auxiliary device.
R = r S p e c i fi e s t h e d e v i c e t y p e . S p e c i fi e d i f a n a u x i l i a r y d e v i c e o f a
device type other than the installation-defined default is to be used.
N A S p e c i fi e s t h e n o a b o r t o p t i o n . I f N A i s s p e c i fi e d , p r o c e s s i n g e r r o r s
do not terminate the job.
N D S p e c i fi e s t h e n o d r o p o p t i o n . I f N D i s s p e c i fi e d , O L D c h a n g e s t h e
f o r m e r p r i m a r y fi l e i n t o a l o c a l fi l e , b u t d o e s n o t r e t u r n a n y fi l e s .
If ND is omitted, OLD returns all files that do not have checkpoint or
no-auto-drop status.
W B S p e c i fi e s t h e w a i t - i f - b u s y o p t i o n . W B c a u s e s t h e j o b t o w a i t f o r t h e
mounting of disk packs.

| 10-28

60459680 G

/^^Sk

If an auxiliary device has been previously specified by a PACKNAM command, the system
attempts to find the permanent file, pfn, on the auxiliary device rather than on the family
device.
If you do not specify the ND parameter, the system releases all files assigned to the job,
except those with checkpoint or no-auto-drop status. Certain system files (for example,
ZZZZZCO, ZZZZZC1, ZZZZZC2, and ZZZZZLD) always have no-auto-drop status. You can give any
local file this status by using the SETFS command. A copy of the indirect access permanent
file named on the OLD command becomes the primary file. The primary file is positioned at
its BOI.
The primary file is rewound before every job step. Therefore, the file positioning commands
have no effect on the primary file. Also, when two commands are issued to write on the
primary file, the second writes over the data written by the first because the primary file
is rewound between commands.

PACKNAM COMMAND
The PACKNAM command directs subsequent permanent file requests to the specified auxiliary
device.
Format:
PACKNAM,PN=packname,R=r.

PACKNAM,packname,R=r.
or
PACKNAM.
Parameter

Description

PN=packname

Specifies the one- to seven-character identifier of the
auxiliary device to be accessed in subsequent permanent file
commands.

R=r

S p e c i fi e s t h e d e v i c e t y p e o f t h e a u x i l i a r y d e v i c e s p e c i fi e d
by packnam.

You specify this parameter if you want to use a removable
auxiliary device whose device type differs from the
installation-defined default.
If you do not specify this parameter for a nondefault type
pack, you must specify this parameter on each subsequent
permanent file command.
A full description of this parameter appears at the beginning
of this section.

/4iffl*N,

60459680 D

10-29

PACKNAM allows you to omit the PN=packname parameter on command requests for files that
reside on the specified auxiliary device. However, to request permanent files on another
auxiliary device, you must specify the PN=packname parameter on the file request or enter
another PACKNAM command before the request (you must also specify the R=r parameter if the
device type is different). Refer to Mass Storage File Residence in section 2 for
information concerning auxiliary permanent file devices.
You can access permanent files residing on the family system devices while the PACKNAM
request is in effect by specifying PN=0 on permanent file commands. To clear the effect of
a PACKNAM command, include a PACKNAM command in either of the following formats.
PACKNAM.
or
PA C K N A M ,

PN=0.

/^

PERMIT COMMAND
The PERMIT command explicitly permits another user to access a private file in your
permanent file catalog. The PERMIT command can also change the mode in which another user
can access a semiprivate file.
Format:

PERMIT,pfn,usernamei=mi ,username2=m2,... ,usernamen=mn/PN=packname,R=r ,NA,WB,
XD=expiredate,XT=expireterm.
Parameter

Description

pfn Name of the private or semiprivate file for which access permission is
granted.
usernamei=mi Specifies that user name usernamei is granted the access permis
sions indicated by access mode mi. If mi is omitted, the read
access mode is assumed. If mi is NULL, the user is explicitly /*sv
d e n i e d p e r m i s s i o n t o a c c e s s t h e fi l e . F o r t h e a v a i l a b l e a c c e s s m o d e s , )
refer to DEFINE Command or SAVE Command in this section.
The full descriptions of the following optional parameters are given at the beginning of
this section.
Parameter

Description

PN=packname Auxiliary device name. Specified if the permanent file resides on an
auxiliary device.
R=r Device type. Specified if a removable auxiliary device on a device
type other than the installation-defined default is to be used.

j * ^ ^ ^ \

10-30

60459680

D

Parameter

Description

NA

N o a b o r t o p t i o n . I f N A i s s p e c i fi e d , p r o c e s s i n g e r r o r s d o n o t
terminate the job.

W
B

Specifies the wait-if-busy option. WB causes the job to wait for the
mounting of disk packs.

X D = e x p i r e d a t e S p e c i fi e s t h e e x p i r a t i o n d a t e f o r t h e fi l e p e r m i t . T h e v a l u e
expiredate must be a six-digit string of the form yymmdd; where yy,
mm, and dd are two-digit year, month, and day designators,
r e s p e c t i v e l y.
X T = e x p i r e t e r m S p e c i fi e s t h e l i f e o f t h e fi l e p e r m i t i n d a y s . I f y o u s p e c i f y 0 , t h e
fi l e p e r m i t e x p i r e s i m m e d i a t e l y. I f y o u s p e c i f y 4 0 9 5 o r * , t h e fi l e
permit does not expire.

PURGALL COMMAND
The PURGALL command purges all permanent files in your catalog that satisfy the criteria
specified by the parameters.
Format:
PURGAIA,TY=ty,CT=ct,AD=ad,MD=md,CD=cd,AF,TM=tm,PN=dn,PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
Parameter
TY=ty

Description
Specifies the file type to be purged.
ty

Action

I o r I N D I R P u r g e s a l l i n d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e s .
D o r D I R E C T P u r g e s a l l d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e s .
/fSp»y

A

or

ALL

Purges

all

fi l e s .

If this parameter is omitted, but other parameters are specified, the
system assumes ty is ALL. To purge all files if no other parameters
are specified, you must specify TY=A.
CT=ct

Specifies the permit category to be purged. Entries are P, PR, or
PRIVATE for private; S or SPRIV for semiprivate; and PU or PUBLIC for
public.

AD=ad

S p e c i fi e s t h e l a s t a c c e s s d a t e ; i t s f o r m a t i s y y m m d d . A l l fi l e s l a s t
accessed before this date are purged, unless the AF parameter is
s p e c i fi e d .

MD=md

S p e c i fi e s t h e l a s t m o d i fi c a t i o n d a t e ; i t s f o r m a t I s y y m m d d . A l l fi l e s
last modified before this date are purged, unless the AF parameter is
s p e c i fi e d .

60459680 D

10-31 |

y*S!\

Parameter

Description

CD=cd

S p e c i fi e s t h e c r e a t i o n d a t e ; i t s f o r m a t i s y y m m d d . A l l fi l e s c r e a t e d
before this date are purged, unless the AF parameter is specified.

AF

Specifies that files accessed after the date specified by the AD=ad
parameter, modified after the date specified by the MD=md parameter,
or created after the date specified by the CD=cd parameter are purged.

TM=tm

Specifies the time of day on the date specified by the AD, MD, or CD
parameter; its format is hhmmss.

DN=dn

Specifies the device number assigned to a device during system
i n i t i a l i z a t i o n . O n l y fi l e s o n t h a t d e v i c e a r e p u r g e d .

PN=packname Specifies the name of the auxiliary device on which the files to be
purged reside. The PN parameter cannot be specified if a device
number is specified (DN=dn).

R=r

Specifies the type of auxiliary device on which the files to be purged
reside. The R parameter cannot be specified if a device number is
specified (DN=dn).

NA

S p e c i fi e s t h e n o a b o r t o p t i o n . I f t h e s p e c i fi e d a u x i l i a r y d e v i c e i s
not available, the job is suspended until it becomes available.

W
B

Specifies the wait-if-busy option. WB causes the job to wait for the
mounting of disk packs.

To purge all files in your catalog, you must enter:
PURGALL,TY=A.
AF, CT, DN, NA, R, TY, TM, and one date (either AD, MD, or CD) can be entered on a single
PURGALL command.

PURGE COMMAND
The PURGE command names files to be removed from the permanent file device.
Format:
PURGE, pfnj, pf n2,. • ♦, pfnn/UN=username, PW=password, PN=packname, R=r ,NA, WB.
Parameter

Description

p f n A S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f a p e r m a n e n t fi l e t o b e p u r g e d . I f n o fi l e i s
named, and if a permanent file exists that has the same name as the
p r i m a r y fi l e , t h a t p e r m a n e n t fi l e i s p u r g e d ; t h e p r i m a r y fi l e r e m a i n s
assigned to the job.

y^^^jV

| 10-32

60459680 D

The full descriptions of the following optional parameters are given at the beginning of
this section.
Parameter

Description

UN=username Specifies the user name. Specified if the file(s) to be purged is in
another user's catalog. To purge a file, you must have write
permission for that file.
PW=password Specifies the file password. Specified if UN=username is specified,
and if the permanent file to be purged has a password.
PN=packname Specifies the auxiliary device name. Specified if the permanent file
resides on an auxiliary device.
R = r S p e c i fi e s t h e d e v i c e t y p e . S p e c i fi e d i f a r e m o v a b l e a u x i l i a r y d e v i c e
on a device type other than the installation-defined default is to be
used.
NA

Specifies the no abort option. If NA is specified, processing errors
do not terminate the job.

W
B

Specifies the wait-if-busy option. WB causes the job to wait for the
mounting of disk packs and busy files.

^^ When a PURGE command is issued for any direct access file, the file is purged and the
0v ^ apt tearcmhaende nt o
t fial e j ocba,t ailto gr e m
i s a ianl st e raetdt a cahcecdo r dt oi n gt lhy.e H
j oobw euvnet ir,l yi fo ut h er e tduirrne c it t . a c c e s s fi l e i s

RECLAIM COMMAND

01°^

The RECLAIM command performs a number of functions related to the transfer of NOS files
between your job and a dump file. The dump file can be a magnetic tape or a mass storage
(disk) file. Using RECLAIM you can selectively dump local or permanent files, retrieve
files from a dump file, and list information about files previously dumped to tape or mass
storage.
RECLAIM provides you with an easy way of making backup copies of local files or of direct
and indirect access permanent files. It also gives you greater control over the size of
your permanent file disk space. RECLAIM can be entered from a batch or interactive job.
Dumped files can be reloaded as local or permanent files. Reloaded permanent files have the
same permissions, modes, permit categories, and so forth that they had when dumped. Note,
however, that file history information for reloaded files (that is, file creation date, last
date modified, last date accessed, etc.) is set to the date and time of loading. Files can
be reloaded from tape by the file owner or by an alternate user.
Information about dumped files (such as file name, dump date, tape VSN, dump number, and so
forth) can be stored in a dump database. This database is maintained as a direct access
file in your permanent file catalog. RECLAIM automatically creates a dump database when you
enter a DUMP directive unless you specify that you do not want a database for the dump

60459680

D

10-33

/•*^\

(using the DB=0 parameter). If you do not specify a name for the database, RECLAIM uses the
default name RECLDB. To get information on individual files in the database, enter a
RECLAIM command with the LIST directive.
Multiple users can share a dump database. For example, alternate users can access a
database in your catalog by entering a RECLAIM command specifying your database file name
(on the DB parameter) and your user name (on the UN parameter). As with any other permanent
file, alternate users must have WRITE permission to access and use your database file.

MAGNETIC TAPES
As previously mentioned, you can use RECLAIM to dump or retrieve files to or from magnetic
t a p e s a s w e l l a s m a s s s t o r a g e m e d i a . Yo u s h o u l d b e a w a r e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g s p e c i a l r u l e s ^ ^ ^
that
apply
when
using
tapes
with
RECLAIM:
•*™s%
• You do not need to enter a REQUEST command for RECLAIM dump tapes. RECLAIM issues
its own REQUEST command internally when you enter a COMPACT, DUMP, LOAD, or COPY
directive (RECLAIM directives are described below). RECLAIM uses the default
parameter values for the REQUEST command.

NOTE
Since RECLAIM issues the REQUEST command
internally, you must be prepared to wait for
the tape mount if you enter a COMPACT, DUMP,
LOAD, or COPY directive from an interactive
job. Other alternatives are to submit the
RECLAIM command from a batch job or to
detach your interactive job using the Detach
(ctD) command.

• RECLAIM dump tapes must be labeled; unlabeled tapes are not permissible.
• If you enter a LOAD, COPY, or LIST directive for a tape that is not already defined
to the RECLAIM database, RECLAIM reads the entire tape and adds all files on the
tape, or all files matching the specified user index if the UI processing option is
specified, to the database. This feature lets you add the entire contents of a tape
to the database without having to name each file individually.
• The tape processing options listed under Processing Options in section 12 are valid
for RECLAIM tapes. Processing options are specified with the PO option.
• The permanent file tapes are written by the RECLAIM utility in a format compatible
with both PFDUMP and PFLOAD. The NOS 2 Analysis Handbook describes these permanent
fi l e u t i l i t i e s .

/-as^\

10-34

60459680

H

COMMAND FORMAT
The parameters of the RECLAIM command are order-independent,
are appended to the end of the command.

The directives and the options

NOTE
For sites using the Tape Management System
(TMS), there are additional directive
options available on the RECLAIM command
which are not described in this manual. For
a description of the RECLAIM command under
TMS, refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management
System (TMS) User Reference Manual.

Format;
RECLAIM,p1,p2,...,pn./directive1,options1/directive2,
options2/.../directiven,optionsn.
Parameter
00®\

DB=pfn

Description
Specifies the name of the direct access file that contains the RECLAIM
database. The default file name for pfn is RECLDB. If a value of 0
is entered for pfn, no database is created or maintained.
Do not attach the database file before you call RECLAIM; RECLAIM
a t t a c h e s t h e fi l e f o r y o u .

I=lfn1

Specifies the name of the local file containing the RECLAIM input
directives to be processed. The default file name for lfn1 Is INPUT.

L=lfn2

S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e l o c a l fi l e t o r e c e i v e o u t p u t l i s t i n g . T h e
default file name for lfn2 is OUTPUT.

NH

Inhibits RECLAIM from printing a header on file lfn2.

PW=password

S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e p a s s w o r d f o r t h e d a t a b a s e fi l e ; a p p l i c a b l e o n l y i f
the database file resides in an alternate user catalog.

UN=username

Specifies the user name of the database file owner; applicable only if
the database file resides in an alternate user catalog. You must have
WRITE permission to access files under an alternate user name.

NA

No abort option; inhibits RECLAIM abort in case of a program error.

NV

Specifies that a dump is to be written at end-of-information (EOI),
regardless of what precedes the EOI. If this parameter is omitted,
RECLAIM will not write a dump beginning at EOI unless at least one
valid RECLAIM dump precedes the EOI.

60459680 H

10-35

Parameter

Description
Specifies that the RECLAIM command contains input directives following
the terminator. If the Z parameter is specified, the I parameter is
ignored. Use of the Z parameter eliminates the need for an input file
(lfnj) when only a few directives are required.

directivei

Specifies how RECLAIM is to manipulate files that meet the criteria
set forth in the directive options. (RECLAIM directives and options
are described below.)

optionsi

Specifies a file characteristic or attribute RECLAIM is to use in
selecting the file or files to be processed. (RECLAIM directives and
options are described below.) Use a comma to separate individual
options.

RECLAIM directives define the operation to be performed on a specified file or files. All
directives except END can have one or more associated options. A comma is used as the
separator between a directive and its associated options.
When you enter a RECLAIM command with the Z parameter, you type in the directives following
the command terminator. The first character following the terminator must be the separator
character used to separate individual directives. The separator character can be any
character that does not appear within the directives. (We use the / character in the
examples in this section.)
Following are descriptions of the RECLAIM directives. The description of the options for
the d i r e c t i v e s i m m e d i a t e l y f o l l o w s t h e description of the directives.
Directive
COMPACT

Description
Rewrites a dump file using only the active files from the database.
All files logically deleted (using the DELETE directive) from your
database are physically deleted from the dump file and the database.
Options may also be specified which apply additional file selection
criteria. Files which do not meet these additional criteria are also
physically deleted. The active files rewritten by the COMPACT
directive are consolidated into a single dump before being rewritten;
that is, the new dump file contains only one dump. The database is
updated to remove all inactive entries and update the dumpfile number
for the remaining entries. COMPACT cannot be used on dump files that
have no database file.
You must specify one of the following options to indicate where the
dump file to be created by COMPACT is to be stored:
CF=clfn
CN=cpfn
CT=vsn
OV
Either or both of the CF=clfn and CN=cpfn options must be specified in
conjunction with the DT=MS option if a new mass storage file is to
receive the dump.
The CT=vsn option must be specified if a new tape is to receive the
dump. If you intend to enter a COMPACT directive specifying a new
tape, you must issue a RESOURC command to allow RECLAIM to request the
two tapes at once.

| 10-36

60459680 H

/^^8\

Directive

Description
You must specify the OV option if the dump is to be rewritten on the
original tape or file. To rewrite a dump tape, the compacted dump is
fi r s t w r i t t e n t o a d i s k s c r a t c h fi l e , t h e n c o p i e d t o t h e o r i g i n a l fi l e ,
If you know or expect that a dump will require multiple reels, you
must enter a VSN command before entering RECLAIM. The VSN command
should specify as many VSNs as necessary and should associate the VSNs
with the local file name specified by the CF option. If no CF option
is specified, the default local file name NTAPE is used.

COPY

C r e a t e s l o c a l fi l e c o p i e s o f a l l d u m p e d fi l e s t h a t m e e t t h e c r i t e r i a
specified by the COPY directive options. (The COPY directive is the
same as the LOAD directive except that the LOAD directive creates
permanent files from dumped files.) The copied files are created
u s i n g t h e i r original permanent file names unless they are ex plicitly
renamed.
The COPY directive performs its own tape requests internally. If a
c o p y i s i n i t i a t e d f o r s e v e r a l fi l e s r e s i d e n t o n a s i n g l e t a p e , t h a t
t a p e i s o n l y r e q u e s t e d o n c e . I f t h e c o p y s p e c i fi e s fi l e s o n m u l t i p l e
tapes, multiple tape requests are initiated.
The COPY directive can be used to read files from a tape that is not
listed in the RECLAIM database. When used in this way, RECLAIM reads
all files from the tape (regardless of how many files are specified by
the COPY directive options) and adds all files to the RECLAIM database,
The latest (most recently dumped) version of each file is copied
unless you specify other characteristics. The following are examples
of a COPY directive:
RECLAIM,Z./COPY,PF=ALPHA/COPY,PF=BETA/COPY,PF=SIGMA

RECLAIM,Z./COPY,PF=*/ALPHA,BETA,SIGMA
Either of the above commands copies the latest (most recently dumped)
versions of files ALPHA, BETA, and SIGMA and makes them local files.
DELETE

D i s a b l e s a l l fi l e s I n y o u r d a t a b a s e t h a t m e e t t h e c r i t e r i a s p e c i fi e d
by the DELETE directive options. Deleted files are not physically
deleted from the database and can be restored to active status using
the RESET directive. Use the LIST directive with the DE option to
list deleted files. You can use DELETE to temporarily disable
s e l e c t e d fi l e s , t h u s a l l o w i n g y o u t o l o a d a l l fi l e s e x c e p t t h o s e
disabled. All files disabled by DELETE are physically removed from
the dump file if a COMPACT directive is entered before the disabled
files are reactivated (using RESET). The following is an example of «
DELETE directive:
RECLAIM,Z./DELETE,DD=851204
The above example instructs RECLAIM to disable all files dumped on the
date 12/4/85.

60459680 H

10-37 |

r^^gK

Directive

Description

D U M P D u m p s t o t a p e o r m a s s s t o r a g e a l l p e r m a n e n t fi l e s t h a t m e e t t h e
c r i t e r i a s p e c i fi e d b y t h e D U M P d i r e c t i v e o p t i o n s . I n f o r m a t i o n t h a t
RECLAIM requires to perform future reloads from the dump file is
s t o r e d i n a d a t a b a s e fi l e w i t h i n t h e s p e c i fi e d u s e r c a t a l o g . I f t h e
specified database file does not exist, RECLAIM creates it. You can
inhibit the creation or use of a database file by specifying the DB=0
parameter.
Files are dumped in the order they appear in your permanent file
catalogue unless you specify the PF or FN option. Files are then
dumped in the order they are listed for PF or FN. If a file is listed
more than once for PF or FN, multiple copies are dumped, in the
s p e c i fi e d o r d e r.
Files dumped are written to the dump file at EOI unless EI=NO is
specified. If RECLAIM determines that a dump file is empty or does
not contain a RECLAIM dump, it sends the following message to the
dayfile and the terminal:
UNKNOWN DUMP FILE WILL BE REWRITTEN.
If the DUMP directive was entered interactively, RECLAIM issues the
prompt:
IS

THIS

OK

(YES

OR

NO)?

"^

If you enter YES, the dump proceeds normally. For a NO response,
RECLAIM ignores the directive and prompts for the next one. In a
noninteractive job, RECLAIM proceeds with the dump.
The following is an example of a RECLAIM DUMP directive:
RECLAIM,Z./DUMP,TY=D,TN=001442
This example Instructs RECLAIM to dump all direct access permanent
files in your catalog to a magnetic tape with the VSN of 001442. If a
database named RECLDB does not currently exist, RECLAIM creates it.
If you know or expect that a dump will require multiple reels, you
must enter a VSN command before entering the RECLAIM command. The VSN
command should specify as many VSNs as necessary and should associate
the VSNs with the local file name specified by the DF option. The
default name is TAPE. For example:
VSN,TAPE=001442/001501/001995.
RECLAIM,Z./DUMP,TN=001442,TY=D
The above example duplicates the previous example, but allows for a
multi-reel dump.

y^S^N.

|

10-38

60459680

H

Directive

END

Description
Ends the current RECLAIM session. At an interactive terminal, a blank
line followed by a carriage return is equivalent to an END. In a
directive file, an EOR has the same effect as an END directive.
You can use the F tape processing option (refer to Processing Options
in section 12) to instruct RECLAIM to unload a tape when the END
d i r e c t i v e i s e n t e r e d . To d o t h i s , e n t e r t h e f o l l o w i n g S E T d i r e c t i v e
before you initiate any operation that would cause a tape to be
mounted (such as a COPY, DUMP, or LOAD):
SET,PO=F

0p^m^^

LIST

Lists RECLAIM database information about all dumped files that meet
t h e c r i t e r i a s p e c i fi e d b y t h e a c c o m p a n y i n g d i r e c t i v e o p t i o n s . F i l e s
are listed in alphabetical order except for dump files without a
database. Dump files with no database are listed in sequential order.
The LIST directive can be used to list files on a tape that is not
listed in the RECLAIM database. When used in this way, RECLAIM adds
all files on the tape to the RECLAIM database, regardless of how many
fi l e s a r e s p e c i fi e d b y t h e L I S T d i r e c t i v e o p t i o n s .

LOAD

Loads into your permanent file catalog all of the files that meet the
criteria specified by the LOAD directive options. (The LOAD directive
is the same as the COPY directive except that the COPY directive
c r e a t e s o n l y l o c a l fi l e s . ) T h e l a t e s t ( m o s t r e c e n t l y d u m p e d ) v e r s i o n
o f e a c h fi l e i s l o a d e d u n l e s s y o u s p e c i f y o t h e r c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . I f a
file name specified in a LOAD directive already exists in the catalog,
the file will not be loaded unless the RP or RP=Y option is also
s p e c i fi e d .
The LOAD directive can be used to load files from a tape that is not
listed in the RECLAIM database. When used in this way, RECLAIM loads
all files from the tape (regardless of how many files are specified by
the LOAD directive options) and adds all files to the RECLAIM database.
The LOAD directive performs its own tape requests internally. If a
l o a d i s i n i t i a t e d f o r s e v e r a l fi l e s r e s i d e n t o n a s i n g l e t a p e , t h a t
t a p e i s o n l y r e q u e s t e d o n c e . I f t h e l o a d s p e c i fi e s fi l e s o n m u l t i p l e
tapes, multiple tape requests are initiated. Following are examples
of the LOAD directive:
RECLAIM,Z./LOAD,PF=MYFILE
The above LOAD directive loads into your catalog the most recently
dumped version of MYFILE.
RECLAIM,Z./LOAD,DD=840112,NF=595
The above LOAD directive loads up to 595 files dumped on the date
1/12/84.

60459680 H

10-38.1 |

Directive

Description
RECLAIM,Z./LOAD,PF=ALPHA,NN=BETA,MD=831114
or
RECLAIM,Z./LOAD,PF=*,MD=831114/BETA=ALPHA
Either of the previous LOAD directives loads the latest version of
file ALPHA with a modification date of 11/14/83. File ALPHA is loaded
into your catalog as file BETA. If a permanent file called BETA
a l r e a d y e x i s t s i n y o u r c a t a l o g , t h e fi l e i s n o t l o a d e d . I f a
permanent file named ALPHA exists in the catalog, it does not affect,
and is not affected by, this operation.

QUIT

Equivalent

to

END.

REMOVE Permanently removes a tape volume serial number (VSN) from the
database. This purges from the database all entries for the specified
tape.'
R E S E T R e a c t i v a t e s a l l fi l e s p r e v i o u s l y d i s a b l e d b y t h e D E L E T E d i r e c t i v e t h a t
meet the criteria specified by the RESET directive options.
S E T R e d e fi n e s t h e R E C L A I M d e f a u l t s f o r a n y d i r e c t i v e o p t i o n s . T y p i c a l l y ,
this directive is used during a long RECLAIM session to establish
criteria for subsequent processing. If a SET directive is encountered z*8^
without an accompanying option, it has no effect on current defaults.

I

10-38.2

60459680

H

The options which can be associated with RECLAIM directives are described below.
Option

Description

CF=clfn

Specifies the name of the local file to receive the compacted dump.
If clfn is omitted, the local file name is the name specified for the
CN parameter. If the CN parameter is omitted, the default name NTAPE
is used for clfn. This option is used with COMPACT.

CN=cpfn

Specifies the permanent file to receive the compacted dump if you do
not want to overwrite the original dump file. (Use the OV option to
overwrite the original dump file.) The CN option allows you to
specify different names for the local and permanent file copies of the
dump file. This option does not create, save, or replace the
p e r m a n e n t fi l e ; t h e s e o p e r a t i o n s a r e t h e u s e r ' s r e s p o n s i b i l i t y. T h i s
option is used with COMPACT.

CT=vsn

Specifies the VSN of the tape to which the compacted dump is to be
written. The CT option is used with COMPACT.

D=den

Specifies tape density; values that can be specified for den are as
follows:
D e s c r i p t i on

den
HI
HY
HD
PE
GE

556
800
800
1600
6250

cpi;
cpi;
cpi;
cpi;
cpi;

7-track
7-track
9-track
9-track
9-track

tapes
tapes
tapes
tapes
tapes

The D option is used with COMPACT and DUMP.
DA=yymmdd

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files dumped after a specified
date. DA may be used in conjunction with DB to specify a date range.
The DA option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, LIST, LOAD and RESET.

DB=yymmdd

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files dumped before a
specified date. DB may be used in conjunction with DA to specify a
date range. The DB option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, LIST,
LOAD and RESET.

DD=yymmdd

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files dumped on a specified
date. The DD option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, LIST, LOAD
and RESET.

DE

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files that have been disabled
by DELETE. If this option is omitted, only undeleted files are
processed. The DE option is used with COMPACT, COPY, LIST, LOAD and
RESET.

DF=dlfn

Specifies the name of the local file copy of a dump file,
name for dlfn is TAPE. The DF option is used with DUMP.

60459680 G

The default

10-39

Description

Option
DN=dpfn

Specifies the file to or from which files are to be processed. Only
fi l e s o n t h i s d u m p fi l e t h a t m e e t o t h e r s p e c i fi e d s e l e c t i o n c r i t e r i a
are selected. The DN option is logically equivalent to and
interchangeable with the TN option except if a DT, MT, or NT option is
not specified. In this case, DN implies a mass storage dump file
while TN implies a tape dump file (therefore, TN causes RECLAIM to
issue an internal REQUEST command, whereas DN does not). The DN
option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST, LOAD, and RESET,
If the DN option (or DT=MS) is used for a DUMP operation, RECLAIM does
not make the mass storage dump file permanent. If you wish to make
the dump file permanent, you may do so. However, the dump file must
be local before you can use it with RECLAIM.

DT=dtype

Specifies the type of dump file to be created,
dtype are:
dtype

Possible values for

S i g n i fi c a n c e

MS

The dump is placed on a mass storage (disk) file.

MT

The dump is placed on 7-track magnetic tape. (Same
as MT option.)

NT

The dump is placed on 9-track magnetic tape. (Same
as NT option.)

The DT option is used with COMPACT and DUMP.
EI=NO

Instructs RECLAIM to write dumped files at the beginning of the dump
fi l e , t h u s d e s t r o y i n g a n y e x i s t i n g i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e d u m p fi l e . I f
this option is omitted, files to be dumped are written to the dump
file at end-of-information. The EI option is used with DUMP.

EX=option

Specifies the use of exception processing for RECLAIM options. Values
that can be specified for option are Y or N. Y indicates that
exception processing will be used; that is, only files that fail one
or more selection criteria are .processed. N indicates that normal
p r o c e s s i n g i s u s e d ; t h a t i s , o n l y fi l e s t h a t m e e t a l l s e l e c t i o n
criteria are processed. The EX option is used with COMPACT, COPY,
DELETE, DUMP, LIST, LOAD, and RESET.

F=format

Specifies any valid NOS tape format,
COMPACT or DUMP.

FI=nn

Specifies the dump number (1 to 63) to which the dump file is to be
positioned. A dump is the set of user files dumped to a file by a
single DUMP or COMPACT directive.

The F option is used with

The FI option can be used in conjunction with the RC option to
p o s i t i o n t h e t a p e o r fi l e . p o i n t e r t o a p a r t i c u l a r fi l e w i t h i n a
specified dump. (The FI value associated with a particular file is
listed in the FI column of the RECLAIM output listing.) The FI option
is used with COPY and LOAD.

10-40

60459680 G

Op ti o n
FN=filename

Description
Processes files in the same manner as the PF option with one
exception: When used with a DUMP directive, it first checks to see if
a n a m e d fi l e e x i s t s a s a l o c a l fi l e . I f s o , t h e l o c a l fi l e i s d u m p e d .
The TY option can be used with FN to specify whether named local files
are to be dumped as direct access or indirect access files. The
default is direct access.
The FN option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST, LOAD,
and RESET. For all directives except DUMP, the FN and PF options are
interchangeable.

FT

Foreign tape. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management System (TMS) User
Reference Manual for a detailed description.

GT=length

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files that have a length in
PRUs greater than the length specified. GT may be used in conjunction
with LT to specify a size range. The GT option is used with COMPACT,
COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST, LOAD and RESET.

LT=length

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files that have a length in
PRUs less than the length specified. LT may be used in conjunction
with GT to specify a size range. The LT option is used with COMPACT,
COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST, LOAD and RESET.

LV

S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e m o s t c u r r e n t v e r s i o n o f t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e i s t o b e
processed. This is the default for the COPY and LOAD directives. The
LV option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, LIST, LOAD and RESET.

MA=yymmdd

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files modified after a
specified date. MA may be used in conjunction with MB to specify a
date range. The MA option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP,
LIST, LOAD and RESET.

MB=yymmdd

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files modified before a
specified date. MB may be used in conjunction with MA to specify a
date range. The MB option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP,
LIST, LOAD and RESET.

MD=yymmdd

Instructs RECLAIM to process only those files modified on a specified
date. The MD option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST,
LOAD and RESET.

MT

Specifies the use of a 7-track tape drive.
DUMP.

NF=num

Specifies the maximum number of files to be processed. If the NF
option is omitted, there is no limit on the number of files processed,
except for the DUMP directive. The limit for DUMP is 4095 files. The
NF option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST, LOAD and
RESET.

NN=pfn

Specifies a new file name for the file named by the PF option. The NN
option is used with COPY, DUMP and LOAD.

60459680 H

The MT option is used with

10-41

Option

Description

NT

Specifies the use of a 9-track tape drive. The NT option is used with
DUMP.

OV

Specifies that a compacted dump is to be written over the old dump
tape. The OV option is used with COMPACT.

PF=pfn

Specifies the name of the permanent file or files to be processed by
RECLAIM. If only one file is to be processed, pfn is any valid NOS
file name. If PF and FN are both omitted, the files to be processed
are determined by the other options which have been specified. If
multiple files are to be selected by name, specify an asterisk (*) for
pfn.
When PF=* is specified, a file name list containing up
names may be entered. A line of file names ending with
i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e fi l e n a m e l i s t i s c o n t i n u e d o n t h e
interactive requests, RECLAIM prompts you to enter the
the message:

to 999 file
a comma
next line. For
file names with

ENTER FILE NAMES.
The file name list contains one entry for each file to be processed.
Each entry consists simply of the name of the file to be processed,
unless the file is to be renamed. If the file is to be renamed, the
entry is in the format, newname=oldname. Entries are separated by
commas. An entry not followed by a separator indicates the end of the
list. A comma at end of line indicates that another line follows.
Following is an example of a file name list:
RECLAIM,Z./DUMP,TN=MYVSN,PF=*/ALPHA,GAMMA=BETA
This command will cause RECLAIM to dump files ALPHA and BETA. The
files will be identified in the dump and in the data base as ALPHA and
GAMMA. The PF option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST,
LOAD and RESET.
PO=plp2...pn

Specifies general tape processing options for a dump tape. Refer to
Processing Options in section 12 for a description of dump tape
processing options. The PO option is used with COMPACT, COPY, LIST,
LOAD, DUMP, and SET. PO=UR is the default for the COPY, LIST, and
LOAD directives. PO=UW is the default for the COMPACT and DUMP
directives.

PW=password

Password. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management System (TMS) User
Reference Manual for a detailed description.

RC=nnnn

Specifies the dump record number (1 to 4095) within a dump that
indicates where the dump file is to be positioned. The RC option is
used in conjunction with the FI option to specify the location of a
file within a dump. (The RC value associated with a particular file
is listed in the REC column of the RECLAIM listable output.) The RC
option is used with COPY and LOAD.

10-42

60459680 H

Option
RP=option

Description
Specifies that a file is to be loaded or copied from a dump file even
if a local or permanent file by the same name already exists.
Possible values for option are Y or N.
When used with the LOAD directive, specifying RP or RP=Y indicates
that an existing permanent file will be replaced by a file loaded from
a dump. Specifying RP=N or omitting the RP option indicates that an
existing permanent file will not be replaced by a loaded file.
When used with the COPY directive, specifying RP or RP=Y indicates
that a local file will be overwritten by a file copied from a dump.
If RP=N is specified, or if the RP option is omitted, RECLAIM returns
the existing local file before copying the file from DUMP.

00^\

The RP option is used with COPY and LOAD.

c

TN=vsn

Specifies the VSN of the tape to or from which files are to be
p r o c e s s e d ( V S N o f t h e fi r s t r e e l f o r a m u l t i - r e e l d u m p ) . O n l y fi l e s
on this tape which also meet any other specified selection criteria
are processed. This option is logically equivalent to and
interchangeable with the DN option except if a DT, MT, or NT option is
not specified. In this case, DN implies a mass storage dump file
while TN implies a tape dump file (therefore, TN causes RECLAIM to
issue an internal REQUEST command, whereas DN does not). The TN
option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, DUMP, LIST, LOAD, RESET and
SET.

TO=username

Username. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management System (TMS) User
Reference Manual for a detailed description.

TY=type

Specifies the permanent file type to be processed. Values that can be
s p e c i fi e d f o r t h e T Y o p t i o n a r e : D ( d i r e c t a c c e s s ) a n d I ( i n d i r e c t
a c c e s s ) . I f t h i s o p t i o n i s o m i t t e d , b o t h fi l e t y p e s a r e e l i g i b l e f o r
processing. The TY option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, LIST,
LOAD and RESET.

UI=user index

Instructs RECLAIM to process only files for the specified user index
when the COPY, LIST, or LOAD directive is used to process a dump tape
or file not on the database, or when no database is being used (DB=0).
If this option is either omitted or specified as UI=0, the user index
of files on the dump tape or file being processed will be ignored.

UN=username

Instructs RECLAIM to process files only for the specified user name on
the RECLAIM database, when files are shared among multiple users. If
this option is omitted, processing is performed only on the calling
user's dumped files. Files for all users will be processed if UN=0 is
specified. The UN option is used with COMPACT, COPY, DELETE, LIST,
LOAD and RESET. If the UN option specifies a user name not originally
in the RECLAIM database, RECLAIM loads all files (LOAD directive) or
l i s t s i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t a l l d u m p e d fi l e s ( L I S T d i r e c t i v e ) o n a fi l e
set specified by the TN or DN options. Loaded files are recorded in
the database under the user name specified by the UN option.

60459680 H

10-43

RECLAIM OUTPUT
All RECLAIM directives except END, QUIT and SET generate output listings in the following
format:
RECLAIM Vvvv OP=ddddddd UN=username yy/mm/dd. hh.mm.ss. PAGE nn
PFN TYPE LAST MOD DUMP DATE LENGTH USERNAME TAPE FI REC
pfname ty yy/mm/dd yy/mm/dd
pfname ty yy/mm/dd yy/mm/dd

l e n d m p u s e r d u m p i d fi
l e n d m p u s e r d u m p i d fi

re
re

n FILES PROCESSED
where:
vvv

Current version of RECLAIM.

ddddddd

Name of the RECLAIM directive being processed.

username

User name of the calling user.

nn

Current page number (not displayed for interactive users).

pfname

Name of the permanent file being processed.

ty

File type (I for indirect access or D for direct access).

len

Length in PRUs of file pfname when dumped.

dmpuser

The user name under which file pfname was originally dumped.

dumpid

VSN of the tape or name of dump file containing file pfname (VSN of
t h e fi r s t r e e l f o r a m u l t i - r e e l d u m p ) .

fi

The dump number on dumpid containing file pfname.
The record number on dump fi containing file pfname.

Entering a RECLAIM command with the NH parameter specified suppresses printing of the
heading and the n FILES PROCESSED line; only the file information is printed.
Example 1
The following RECLAIM command lists a portion of dump file database MYDB, and terminates the
RECLAIM session.
/recLaim,db=mydb,z./List,tn=:01/end
RECLAIM V4.2 0P=LIST UN=0MEN 83/12/14. 13.03.34.
PFN TYPE LAST MOD DUMP DATE LENGTH USERNAME TAPE FI REC

DEMA I 83/11/18 83/12/13
DEMB I 83/11/18 83/12/13

187
27

OMEN
OMEN

01
01

2 FILES PROCESSED.
RECLAIM COMPLETE.

|

1 0 -44

60459680 H

Example 2
The following example shows a RECLAIM session in which the system prompts for directives,
This RECLAIM command dumps two files to tape, then lists the affected portion of MYDB.
/reclaim,db=mydb,nh
ENTER DIRECTIVE.
? dump,tn=01,pf=*
ENTER FILE NAMES.
? demc,demd=kdefs
DEMD I 83/10/06
D E M C I 8 3 / 11 / 1 8
ENTER DIRECTIVE.
? List,tn=01
D E M A I 8 3 / 11 / 1 8
D E M B I 8 3 / 11 / 1 8
D E M C I 8 3 / 11 / 1 8
DEMD I 83/10/06
ENTER DIRECTIVE.
?end
RECLAIM COMPLETE.
/

60459680

83/12/14 92 OMEN 01
8 3 / 1 2 / 1 4 11 5 O M E N 0 1
83/12/13 187
83/12/13 27
8 3 / 1 2 / 1 4 11 5
83/12/14 92

H

OMEN
OMEN
OMEN
OMEN

01
01
01
01

10-44.1/10-44.2

g

/^*V

REPLACE COMMAND
The REPLACE command can purge an indirect access permanent file and replace it with a copy
of a local file on mass storage. It can also save a copy of a local file on mass storage as
a new indirect access permanent file.
Format:
REPLACE,Ifni=pfnA,Ifn2=pfn2,...,lfnn=pfnn/UN=username,PW=password,M=m,
PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
Parameter

JPN

indirect

Description

lfni=pfni Specifies that a copy of local file lfni becomes an indirect access
permanent file named pfnA (one- to seven-character name). If an
a c c e s s fi l e n a m e d p f n i a l r e a d y e x i s t s , i t i s r e p l a c e d .
If lfni is omitted, the name of the local file is assumed to be
pfni» If no files are named, a copy of the primary file becomes an
indirect access permanent file, replacing any existing indirect access
permanent file by that name.

The full descriptions of the following optional parameters are given at the beginning of
this section.
Parameter

Description

f U N = u s e r n a m e S p e c i fi e s t h e u s e r n a m e . S p e c i fi e d i f t h e fi l e t o b e r e p l a c e d i s i n
another user's catalog. To replace another user's file, you must have
write permission and be validated to create indirect access permanent
files (refer to LIMITS Command in section 7).
PW=password Specifies the file password. Specified if the UN=username is
specified, and if the permanent file to be replaced has a password.
M=n» Specifies the file access mode if the file does not already exist, or
if you want to change the access mode. If M=m is omitted for a newly
r

created

fi l e ,

existing
M = R E A D previously
is assum
e d . Ifile,
f t hthe
e current
p a r a maccess
e t e r mode
i s o mis i tretained.
ted for

a

PN=packname Specifies the auxiliary device name. Specified if the permanent file
to be replaced resides on an auxiliary device.
R = r S p e c i fi e s t h e d e v i c e t y p e . S p e c i fi e d i f a r e m o v a b l e a u x i l i a r y d e v i c e
on a device type other than the installation-defined default is to be
used.
NA

Specifies the no abort option. If NA is specified, processing errors
do not terminate the job.

W
B

Specifies the wait-if-busy option. The job waits for the mounting of
disk packs.

The local files, lfnit are rewound before and after the replace operation.
The indirect access file created has the same access category as the file it replaces.
replaced. If and
the alternate
file createduser
is aaccess
new file,
is created
private file.
r Permissionis information
datait for
the file as
area retained
when a file
60459680

E

10_45

■'**%.

SAVE COMMAND
The SAVE command retains a copy of a local file on mass storage as an indirect access file.
When you save a file using this command, the charge number and project number currently in
e ff e c t f o r y o u r j o b a r e a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e fi l e .
Format:
SAVE,lfni=pfni,lfn2=pfn2,... ,lfnn=pfnn/PW=password,CT=ct,M=m,SS=subsystem,
BR=br, PN=packname, R=r ,NA, WB, AL=level, XD=expiredate, XT=expire term, AC=ac.
Parameter

Description

l f n i = p f n i S p e c i fi e s t h a t a c o p y o f l o c a l fi l e l f n i b e c o m e s a n I n d i r e c t a c c e s s
permanent file named pfni (one- to seven-character name). If
lf«i= is omitted, the name of the local file is assumed to be
pfni. If no files are named, a copy of the primary file becomes an
indirect access permanent file with the same name as the primary file.
The full descriptions of the following optional parameters (except M=m) are given at the
beginning of this section.
Parameter

Description

PW=passwrd Specifies the one- to seven-character password that other users must
s p e c i f y t o a c c e s s t h e fi l e .
,**S«^y

C T = c t S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e p e r m i t c a t e g o r y ; e n t r i e s a r e P, P R , o r P R I VAT E f o r
private; S or SPRIV for semiprivate; and PU or PUBLIC for public. If
CT=ct is omitted, CT=PRIVATE is assumed.
M = n i S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e a c c e s s m o d e p e r m i t t e d t o o t h e r u s e r s i f t h e fi l e i s
public or semiprivate, and if explicit access permission has not been
granted to that user. If M=m is omitted, M=READ is assumed.
If m is:

Other users can:

R or READ
RU or READUP
RA or READAP
RM or READMD
U or UPDATE
E or EXECUTE

Retrieve a copy of the file. This copy can
be read or executed.

Retrieve a copy of the file. This copy can only
be executed.

A or APPEND Append data to the file with the APPEND command.
M o r M O D I F Y R e t r i e v e a c o p y o f t h e fi l e o r a p p e n d d a t a t o
the file. The user can enter GET, OLD, NEW, and
APPEND commands, but not a REPLACE command, for
t h e fi l e .

10-46

W or WRITE

Retrieve a copy of the file, append data to it,
replace it, or purge It.

N or NULL

No access is allowed.

60459680 D

0^^.
Parameter

Description

SS=subsystem

S p e c i fi e s t h e i n t e r a c t i v e s u b s y s t e m a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e fi l e . T h i s
subsystem becomes associated with the permanent file pfn, and is
selected automatically each time the file is retreived for use as a
primary file. If SS=subsystem is omitted, SS=NULL is assumed unless
l f n i s t h e p r i m a r y fi l e . I n t h a t c a s e , t h e fi l e i s a s s o c i a t e d w i t h
the currently active subsystem. If SS is specified without a
subsystem, the file is associated with the currently active subsystem.

BR=br

Specifies the backup copy requirement; entries are Y (tape), or MD
(alternate storage), or N (no backup). If BR=br is omitted, a backup
copy of the file is stored on tape. Because indirect access files are
not stored on the alternate storage, BR=MD on a SAVE command is
equivalent to BR=Y.

PN=packname Specifies the name of the auxiliary device on which the indirect
a c c e s s fi l e i s t o r e s i d e .

R=r

Specifies the device type on which the indirect access file is to
reside. The device must be a permanent file mass storage device on
which indirect access files are allowed.

N A S p e c i fi e s t h e n o a b o r t o p t i o n . I f N A i s s p e c i fi e d , p r o c e s s i n g e r r o r s
do not terminate the job.

0$^\

WB Causes the job to wait for the mounting of disk packs.
A L = l e v e l S p e c i fi e s t h e s e c u r i t y a c c e s s l e v e l y o u w a n t a s s s i g n e d t o t h e fi l e .
Unless changed by your site, level can be one of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
The default is the access level of the local file being saved.
X D = e x p i r e d a t e S p e c i fi e s t h e e x p i r a t i o n d a t e f o r t h e fi l e p a s s w o r d . T h e v a l u e
expiredate must be a six-digit string of the form yymmdd; where yy,
mm, and dd are two-digit year, month, and day designators,
respectively. You can specify this parameter only if you also specify
the PW=password parameter.
X T = e x p i r e t e r m S p e c i fi e s t h e l i f e o f t h e fi l e p a s s w o r d i n d a y s . I f y o u s p e c i f y 0 ,
the file password expires immediately. If you specify 4095 or *, the
file password does not expire. You can specify this parameter only if
you also specify the PW=password parameter.
AC=ac

Specifies whether alternate users may obtain information about the
file using CATLIST. Entries are Y (yes) and N (no). The default is N,

The local files, lfni, are rewound before and after the save operation.

j|P\

60459680 G

10-47

SETPFAC COMMAND
The SETPFAC command changes the set of security access categories associated with a
permanent file. You can either specify an entirely new category set or add to or delete
from the current category set. By default on a secured system, the system associates all of
the access categories for which you are authorized to any permanent file you create.
Format:
SETPFAC, pf n,AC=0,category! ,category2,... ,categoryn/PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
or
SETPFAC,pfn,AC=categoryi,category2,... ,categoryn/PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
Parameter

Description

pfn

Specifies the permanent file whose access category set you want to
change.

AC=0,...
category^,

Specifies a new category set. Unless changed by your site category.^
can be any of the following names:
CATOO,CAT02,...,CAT31

AC=...
categoryi,

Specifies categories to add or delete from the current category set.
To add a category, prefix the category name with a plus sign or use
no prefix at all. To delete a category, prefix the category name with
a minus sign.

PN=packname

Specifies the auxiliary device name. You must specify this parameter
if pfn resides on an auxiliary device.

R=r

Specifies the device type. You must specify this parameter if a
removable auxiliary device on a device type other than the
i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t i s t o b e u s e d .

NA

S p e c i fi e s t h e n o a b o r t o p t i o n . I f N A i s s p e c i fi e d , p r o c e s s i n g e r r o r s
do not terminate the job.

WB

Specifies the wait-if-busy option. WB causes the job to wait for the
mounting of disk packs.

The first format creates a new access category set. The second format adds to or deletes
from the current category set.
On a secured system, the categories you specify must be valid for your job (ENQUIRE,B
returns this information). On an unsecured system, the system does not use the categories
to monitor access to the file but does maintain the categories as a file attribute.

10-48

60459680 D

SETPFAL COMMAND
The SETPFAL command changes the security access level of a permanent file. By default, a
d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e i n h e r i t s t h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f t h e c r e a t i n g j o b . A n i n d i r e c t a c c e s s
p e r m a n e n t fi l e i n h e r i t s t h e a c c e s s level of the local file from which it was created. You
can also explicitly set the access level when you create a permanent file by specifying the
AL=level parameter on the command you use to create the file.
Format:
SETPFAL,pfn,AL=level/PN=packname,R=r,NA,WB.
The first two parameters are required and are order-dependent.
Parameter
/§!W\

Description

p f n S p e c i fi e s t h e p e r m a n e n t fi l e w h o s e a c c e s s l e v e l y o u w a n t t o c h a n g e .
A L = l e v e l S p e c i fi e s t h e s e c u r i t y a c c e s s l e v e l y o u w a n t a s s i g n e d t o t h e fi l e .
Unless changed by your site, level can be one of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
PN=packname Specifies the auxiliary device name. You must specify this parameter
if pfn resides on an auxiliary device.
R = r S p e c i fi e s t h e d e v i c e t y p e . Y o u m u s t s p e c i f y t h i s p a r a m e t e r i f a
removable auxiliary device on a device type other than the
i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t i s t o b e u s e d .
N A S p e c i fi e s t h e n o a b o r t o p t i o n . I f N A i s s p e c i fi e d , p r o c e s s i n g e r r o r s
do not terminate the job.
W B S p e c i fi e s t h e w a i t - i f - b u s y o p t i o n . W B c a u s e s t h e j o b t o w a i t f o r t h e
mounting of disk packs.
On a secured system, the access level you specify must be valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B
r e t u r n s t h i s i n f o r m a t i o n ) . I n a d d i t i o n , t o l o w e r t h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f a fi l e , y o u m u s t b e
authorized to do so (refer to the LIMITS command).
On an unsecured system, the system does not use this access level assignment to monitor
access to the file but does maintain this assignment as a file attribute.

/f^N

60459680 D

10-49 I

/^*v

L O A D / D U M P M E M O R Y C O M M A N D S 11

The load/dump memory commands transfer information that resides in your job field length to
a l o c a l fi l e o r t r a n s f e r i n f o r m a t i o n f r o m a l o a d fi l e i n t o y o u r j o b fi e l d l e n g t h . T h e
following commands are included in this category.
DMB

DMP

LOC

DMD

DMPECS

PBC

LBC

RBR

DMDECS

WBR

NOTE
For information concerning security restric
tions associated with the use of these
commands, refer to Security Control in
section 3.

The DMB command dumps the exchange package, central memory, and extended memory in binary.
The DMP and DMD commands dump the exchange package or central memory in octal representation
or display code equivalences. Likewise, the DMDECS and DMPECS commands dump extended
memory. These commands are particularly helpful in creating dumps for debugging purposes
(refer to volume 2, Guide to System Usage). Other transfers of data from central memory use
the PBC command, which dumps a binary record to PUNCHB, and the WBR command, which writes a
b i n a r y r e c o r d o n a s p e c i fi e d fi l e .
Data is loaded to central memory by the LBC, LOC, and RBR commands. The LBC command is
j#^N useful in loading binary data in an unknown format.
i

All numeric parameters for these commands may be expressed in octal (postradix is B) or
d e c i m a l ( p o s t r a d i x i s D ) n o t a t i o n . I f n o r a d i x i s s p e c i fi e d , o c t a l i s a s s u m e d .

DMB COMMAND
The DMB command generates a binary dump of the exchange package, central memory, and
extended memory associated with the current job. File ZZZZDMB receives the dump and is not
rewound before or after the dump. If ZZZZDMB is assigned to the terminal before the dump,
the system returns it and creates a mass storage file by that name. Each dump creates one
logical record on ZZZZDMB. Refer to Express Deadstart Dump Interpreter in the NOS 2
Analysis Handbook for a description of how file ZZZZDMB can be formatted into a report.
Format:
DMB,ordinal,xmemory.

60459680

G

11 - 1

Parameter

Description

ordinal Specifies the dump record name. The system appends this parameter to
the letter D to form a seven-character dump record name. Allowable
values of ordinal are 0 through 777777g. if the parameter ordinal
is greater than 377777g, the job aborts after the dump completes.
If you omit this parameter or specify a null entry, the record name
becomes D000000.
xmemory Determines whether the system dumps the extended memory assigned to
the job. The parameter xmemory can be any whole number. If xmemory
is zero or is omitted, the system dumps only the exchange package and
central memory assigned to the job. If xmemory is nonzero, the system
also dumps the extended memory assigned to the job.

^J*--!.f|l....T^.

11 - 2

60459680

C

You must not place another command (other than DMB, DMD, DMP, DMDECS, DMPECS, or EXIT)
between the program to be dumped and the DMB command.
A logical record of ZZZZDMB has the following format:

r

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11

59
47
7700
|
0016
D dump record name
yy/mm/dd.
hh.mm.ss.
pgnr

35

1o

L7

0
0
0

p r e fi x t a b l e

pgnr
ccdr

16

59

0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1

D
59
ID

53
53

A
A
59

17
dump record name

XP

47

17

1

0
version
version
yy/mm/dd.
hh.mm.ss.
m a c h i n e c haracteristics

47

17
32fi
exchange package

20
21

(A0) register

30
Jl
32

(A7) register

RA

RA+1

59
C
M

47

17
CM FL/1008
central memory

0
1

59

41
ECS

17
EM FL/10008

(

extended memory
m

60459680 C

11-3

59

41
END

If an extended memory error occurs, the block in error will be filled with 400g
words of the following format:

11

59
ECSERROR

The variable items in the preceding display have the following descriptions:
item
n
m

t\

nnnn
pgnr
ccdr

11-4

Description
Octal number of central memory words assigned to the job.
Octal number of extended memory words assigned to the job.
Space (display code value 55g).
Word number of the block in error (starting with 1).
Name of the system program called by DMB. Words 4 and 10
a r e b l a n k - fi l l e d .
An image of RA+70 to RA+75 of the field length dumped. This
is usually a copy of the command being executed prior to the
dump.

60459680 C

0$^*

DMD COMMAND
The DMD command requests a dump similar to that of the DMP command but adds the display code
equivalences to the right of the octal representations. If lines are duplicated, they are
suppressed and an informative message is issued to the output file.
Formats:
DMD,fwa,lwa.
DMD,lwa.
DMD.
Parameter

fwa

Description
Specifies the first word address of memory to be dumped; fwa is
relative to RA. If fwa is absent, dump mode depends on the presence
or absence of lwa.

l w a S p e c i fi e s t h e l a s t w o r d a d d r e s s p l u s o n e o f m e m o r y t o b e d u m p e d ; l w a
is relative to RA. If lwa alone is present, DMD assumes fwa is 0. If
neither fwa nor lwa is present, DMD dumps the exchange package and
40g locations before and after the program address in the exchange
package. Only the lower 17 bits of the program address are used.

r

You must not place another command (other than DMD, DMB, DMP, DMDECS, DMPECS, or EXIT)
between the program to be dumped and the DMD command.
In batch jobs, the dump is written on file OUTPUT. Central memory dumps are written four
words per line.
In interactive jobs, DMD is effective only within procedure files or when specified on the
ENTER command. A dump from a terminal is formatted for 72-column output and written on
local file ZZZDUMP. DMD displays an informative message at the terminal. ZZZDUMP is not
rewound before or after the dump.

60459680 H

11 - 5 |

DMDECS COMMAND
The DMDECS command requests a dump of extended memory on file OUTPUT. The dump is four
words per line with display code equivalences to the right of the octal representations. If
lines are duplicated, they are suppressed and an informative message is issued to the output
fi l e .

NOTE
The DMDECS command can dump only up to two
million words of extended memory. If you
want to dump more than two million words,
use the DMB command (described in this
section).

Formats:
DMDECS,fwa,lwa.
DMDECS,lwa.
Parameter

Description

fwa

Specifies the first word address of extended memory to be dumped; fwa
is relative to the reference address of the field in extended memory
being used by the job (RAE). If fwa is absent, DMDECS assumes fwa is
0.

lwa

Specifies the last word address of extended memory to be dumped; lwa
is relative to RAE.

The DMDECS command must immediately follow a program to be dumped, except that another
DMDECS or a DMPECS, DMB, DMP, DMD, or EXIT command may intervene.
Dumping always stops at the field length in extended memory (FLE) if lwa is greater than
FLE.
If fwa is greater than FLE, fwa is set to FLE-10. If both fwa and lwa are greater than FLE,
fwa is set to FLE-10 and lwa is set to FLE.

11-6

60459680 H

0SO^y.

DMP COMMAND
The DMP command can request an exchange package dump or a central memory dump.
Formats:
DMP,fwa,lwa.
DMP,lwa.
DMP.
Parameter

fwa
ypfey

Description
Specifies the first word address of memory to be dumped; fwa is
r e l a t i v e t o t h e fi r s t w o r d o f t h e j o b ' s fi e l d l e n g t h . I f f w a i s
absent, the resulting dump depends on the presence or absence of lwa.
I f f w a i s g r e a t e r t h a n t h e j o b ' s fi e l d l e n g t h , f w a i s s e t a t t h e j o b ' s
field length minus 10g. If fwa is greater than or equal to
4000008, the first dump address is fwa minus 400000g, memory from
the first dump address through lwa is dumped, and the job is aborted.

lwa

Specifies the last word address plus one of memory to be dumped; lwa
i s r e l a t i v e t o t h e fi r s t w o r d o f t h e j o b ' s fi e l d l e n g t h . I f l w a a l o n e
is present, DMP assumes fwa is 0. If neither fwa nor lwa is present,
DMP dumps the exchange package and 40g locations before and after
the address in the program address register in the exchange package.
Only the lower 17 bits of the program address are used. If lwa is
greater than the job's field length, the dump stops at the end of the
fi e l d l e n g t h .

If either fwa or lwa is nonnumeric, DMP dumps the exchange package and 40o locations
before and after the program address register in the exchange package. If both fwa and lwa
are greater than the job's field length, the last 10g words of the job's field length are
dumped. If fwa equals lwa, the 10g words beginning at fwa are dumped. If fwa is greater
than lwa, DMP issues an error message and terminates the job step.
You must not place another command (other than DMB, DMP, DMD, DMPECS, DMDECS, or EXIT)
between the program to be dumped and the DMP command.
DMP suppresses duplicate lines and then issues an informative message. In batch jobs, the
dump is written on file OUTPUT. Central memory dumps are written four words per line.
In interactive jobs, DMP is effective only within procedure files or when specified on the
ENTER command. A dump from a terminal is formatted for 72-column output and written on
local file ZZZDUMP. DMP displays an informative message at the terminal. ZZZDUMP is not
rewound before or after the dump.

0£^\
60459680 H

11 - 6 . 1 / 11 - 6 . 2 |

(*%

DMPECS COMMAND
The DMPECS command dumps the contents of extended memory of a job's field length on file
OUTPUT or a user-specified file. The dump is four words per line. If lines are duplicated,
they are suppressed and an informative message is issued to the output file.

NOTE
The DMPECS command can dump only up to two
million words of extended memory. If you
want to dump more than two million words,
use the DMB command (described in this
section).

A DMPECS command within an interactive job copies the contents of the extended memory of the
job's field length to the local file ZZZDUMP and displays a message at the terminal
informing you of the dump. ZZZDUMP is not rewound before or after the dump.
Formats:
DMPECS,fwa,lwa.
DMPECS,lwa.
DMPECS,fwa,lwa,f,Ifn.
Parameter

Description

f w a S p e c i fi e s t h e fi r s t w o r d a d d r e s s o f e x t e n d e d m e m o r y t o b e d u m p e d ; f w a
is relative to the reference address of the field in extended memory
being used by the job (RAE).
l w a S p e c i fi e s t h e l a s t w o r d o f e x t e n d e d m e m o r y t o b e d u m p e d ; l w a i s
relative to RAE.
f S p e c i fi e s t h e p r i n t f o r m a t ( i n c l u d e d f o r c o m p a t i b i l i t y w i t h N O S / B E ) .
l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e t o d u m p t o .
If the first format is used, the field in extended memory defined by fwa and lwa is dumped
to the file OUTPUT. Display code equivalences do not appear.
If the second format is used, DMPECS assumes fwa is 0. Display code equivalences do not
appear.
If the third format is used, the specified field in extended memory is dumped to lfn. The
parameter f is ignored. Display code equivalences appear to the right of the octal
representations, the same as the DMDECS command.
The DMPECS command must immediately follow a program to be dumped, except that another
DMDECS or DMPECS, DMB, DMP, DMD, or EXIT command may intervene.
Dumping always stops at the field length in extended memory (FLE) if lwa is greater than FLE.
If fwa is greater than FLE, fwa is set to FLE-10. If both fwa and lwa are greater than FLE,
fwa is set to FLE-10 and lwa is set to FLE.

60459680

H

U_7

LBC COMMAND
The LBC command is intended for loading binary data of unknown format.
Format:
LBC,addr.
Parameter

Description

a d d r S p e c i fi e s t h e a d d r e s s r e l a t i v e t o R A a t w h i c h b i n a r y l o a d b e g i n s ; i f a d d r
is omitted, 0 (RA) is assumed.
LBC reads only one record from file INPUT. You must make an LBC call for each record of
data to be loaded. If addr is specified in the program call, binary data is loaded
beginning at that address; otherwise, loading begins at the reference address (RA).

LOC COMMAND
The LOC command reads octal line images from file INPUT and enters them in the job's central
memory field length.
Formats:
LOC,fwa,lwa.
LOC,lwa.
LOC.
Parameter

Description

f w a S p e c i fi e s t h e fi r s t w o r d a d d r e s s o f a n a r e a t o c l e a r ( z e r o ) b e f o r e l o a d i n g
correction statements. If fwa is absent, LOC assumes 0.
l w a S p e c i fi e s t h e l a s t w o r d a d d r e s s p l u s 1 o f t h e a r e a t o b e c l e a r e d . I f l w a
is absent, LOC assumes 0.
To process the LOC command, the system reads correction statement images from the current
INPUT record. A correction statement consists of an octal address and a data field. The
address field specifies the location to be corrected, and the data field contains the data
to be placed in that location. Both fields may start at any column as long as the address
p r e c e d e s t h e d a t a . T h e a d d r e s s fi e l d c o n s i s t s o f a o n e - t o s i x - d i g i t a d d r e s s . I f i t i s
five characters or less, it is separated from the data field by a nonoctal character (for
ex a m p l e , a b l a n k ) . I f I t i s s i x c h a r a c t ers, no separator is required.
The data field consists of 1 to 20 octal characters. If it is less than 20 characters, it
i s t e r m i n a t e d b y a n o n b l a n k , n o n o c t a l c h a r a c t e r a n d i s s t o r e d r i g h t - j u s t i fi e d . I f i t i s 2 0
characters, no terminator is required. Embedded blanks in the data field are ignored.
If both fwa and lwa are specified and both are nonzero, storage is cleared from fwa to lwa,
and the octal line images are loaded at the specified addresses. If the current INPUT
record is empty, LOC clears the indicated area of memory.

11 - 8

60459680

C

/^SSv

PBC COMMAND
The PBC routine writes one record from the specified area of central memory to file PUNCHB.
Formats:
PBC,fwa,lwa.
PBC,lwa.
PBC.
Parameter

Description

fwa

Specifies the address relative to RA at which the binary deck begins;
if this parameter is omitted, the PBC operation depends upon the
presence or absence of lwa.

lwa

Specifies the last word address of the binary deck. If lwa alone is
present, PBC assumes that fwa is RA. If lwa equals fwa, and a nonzero
value is specified, PBC adds 108 to lwa. If fwa and lwa are 0 or
are omitted, lwa is set to the value in the lower 18 bits of RA. If
the upper 12 bits of RA are 77008> iwa is the lower 18 bits of the
l o c a t i o n f o l l o w i n g t h e p r e fi x ( 7 7 ) t a b l e p l u s t h e l e n g t h o f t h e p r e fi x
table.

Central memory is not altered by PBC.

RBR COMMAND
The RBR command loads one binary record from a specified file.
Format:
RBR,n,name.
Parameter
/dP^N

Description
Specifies that n is used in constructing the name of the file
containing the binary record to be read. If n is less than four
characters and is numeric, TAPEn is the file name. If n contains a
nonnumeric character or is four or more characters long, n itself is
used as the file name. If n is absent, TAPE is the file name.

name

Specifies the one- to seven-character name used in a record prefix.

The RBR command loads one binary record from the specified file into central memory starting
at RA. If the name parameter is included, a record prefix is placed in central memory
starting at RA. The record itself follows. The following is the format of the record
p r e fi x .

60459680 C

11-9

59
77

RA
RA+1
RA+2
RA+3

53

Too"

17

35

47

length

0016

— O -

date (yy/mm/dd.T

~<
RA+17
RA+208

5200
length
lengthj

0

lengthj

Record length including the prefix.
Record length minus words RA through RA + 178<

If the record is too long for available memory, memory Is filled, excess data is skipped,
and an error message is issued to the job's dayfile.

WBR COMMAND
The WBR command writes a binary record from central memory to a file at its current position.
Format:
WBR,n,rl.
Parameter

Description
Specifies the n is used in constructing the name of the file on which the
binary record is to be written. If n is less than four characters and is
numeric, TAPEn is the file name. If n contains a nonnumeric character or
is four or more characters long, n itself is used as the file name. If n
is absent, TAPE is the file name.

r l

Specifies the record length in words,
taken from the lower 18 bits of RA.

If rl is 0 or absent, the length is

WBR begins writing from RA.

11-10

60459680 C

TA P E

MANAGEMENT

12

This section describes commands used with magnetic tape files. For additional information
on NOS magnetic tape files, consult the glossary for definitions of terms; Magnetic Tape
Files in section 2 for descriptions of tape labels and data formats; and appendix G for tape
label formats. Section 7 describes the RESOURC command required in jobs that use more than
one tape or removable auxiliary pack concurrently.
To write on unlabeled tapes, you must have special authorization (refer to the LIMITS
command)•
NOTE
The term file as used in this section may
refer to a multifile file. Refer to table
2-1 for the EOR and EOF marks for tape files.
The commands described in this section are:
y g p s A S S I G N A s s i g n s a l o c a l fi l e t o a t a p e u n i t t ( s y s t e m o r i g i n j o b s o r j o b s w i t h
f system origin privileges only). Section 9 describes the ASSIGN command
for nontape files.
BLANK Blank labels a tape and may restrict access to the labeled tape.
LABEL Assigns a local file to a magnetic tape, creates and verifies tape
labels, and creates and accesses multifile set tapes.
LISTLB Lists tape labels.
^ . ^ R E Q U E S T A s s i g n s a l o c a l fi l e t o a m a g n e t i c t a p e d e v i c e .
VSN Associates a file name with one or more VSNs for later assignment by a
LABEL or REQUEST command.

TAPE ASSIGNMENT
Whenever a tape is mounted, the system checks for labels. If the tape is labeled, the
system records the volume serial number (VSN) read from the V0L1 label and the equipment on
which the tape is mounted. When a tape assignment is requested by a LABEL or REQUEST
command specifying an lfn and a VSN (or an lfn that has been named in a previous VSN
command), the system compares the VSN with the VSNs read from mounted tapes. If a match is
found, the system automatically assigns the tape to the requesting job, provided a deadlock
would not occur .tt If the tape is not mounted, the system rolls out the job until a tape
with the requested VSN is mounted.
tlf you do not specify a VSN parameter or an MT or NT parameter on the tape assignment
command, the operator can assign the file to any device.
TTRefer to the RESOURC command in section 7.
60459680

C

12_x

For a mounted, unlabeled tape, the operator enters a command specifying the requested VSN.
The system can then assign the tape. A VSN which contains nonalphanumeric characters should
not be specified in a request for an unlabeled tape because nonalphanumeric characters
cannot be entered with the operator command.
If a VSN is not associated with the requested lfn, the system directs the operator to assign
an available device.

COMMAND RULES
On the tape assignment commands (LABEL, REQUEST, and ASSIGN), you can specify the tape label
contents, tape density, track type, nine-track conversion mode, data format, noise size, and
processing options. If any of these specifications are omitted, the system uses a default
value.

NOTE
1. For nine-track tapes, the density
specification given on the tape assignment
is used only when the tape is written from
load point. Otherwise, the tape is read or
written using the density previously used
for that tape. To ensure that a labeled
tape is at load point for rewriting the tape
at a new density, perform one of the
f o l l o w i n g b e f o r e the write operation.
• Rewind the tape.
• Specify the W parameter on the LABEL
command used to assign the tape.
O Assign the tape using a REQUEST or
ASSIGN command.
2. Do not create labeled S or L format tapes
with tape marks embedded in the data.
Future adherence to ANSI standards will make
these tapes nonstandard as the ANSI standard
allows tape marks to be used only as
delimiters of label groups.

Do not specify duplicate or equivalent parameters. When you specify a parameter, do not
use = as a separator unless the parameter requires the keyword=value format.

12-2

60459680

C

^

You can use a continuation line for an ASSIGN, BLANK, LABEL, REQUEST, or VSN command when I
"e
the svstef
system
Hn6"
does
"r "not
m°re
encounter
than 8° aCharacters'
terminationIf character
> ln Processing
prior toonetheof end
theseof commands,
the line it *
assumes the next line is a continuation line. A continuation line should be terminated with
a valid terminator. The terminator for a continuation line must appear in or before
column 80.
NOTE
The system accepts continuation lines from
an interactive terminal only if they are
within a procedure file.
You can use literals for parameters that contain nonalphanumeric characters. These
parameters are FI/L, FA, SI/M, VA, FA, OFA, and VSN. Nonalphanumeric characters are
characters other than letters, numbers, and asterisks.

/ J i l W ^

A literal is a character string delimited by dollar signs. Blanks within literals are
retained. If the literal is to contain a dollar sign, two consecutive dollar signs must be
included. Thus, the literal
$A B$$41$
is interpreted as
J^v

A

B$41
When continuation lines are used, a literal cannot extend from one line to another.

PROCESSING OPTIONS
The P0= parameter on the LABEL, ASSIGN, and REQUEST tape assignment commands specify one or
more processing options that are to apply to that tape file. The characters representing
the processing options and their meaning are listed below.
PO=S gives the default end-of-tape conditions. Default error recovery attempts to recover
blocks having errors by repeatedly rereading the block. If the A, E, or N processing
options are not specified, the program determines whether an error aborts the job or the
Intfrf^ce)rf°rmS "^ processing (refer to the FET eP bit description in Volume 4, Program
Pi
A

Description
Automatically aborts job on an irrecoverable read or write parity
error (refer to the N option).
Specifies error inhibit. All hardware read/write errors are ignored
and processing continues. The system does not attempt error recovery,
issue error messages, or return error status. During a read
operation, blocks less than noise size (refer to the NS parameter) are
unconditionally bypassed. Use this option guardedly. Use it to
recover portions of data from a bad tape, to check out hardware, and
to write on tape without skipping bad spots; in the latter case, you
are responsible for verifying that the data is written correctly.

ysz\

60459680 E

12-3

Pi

Description

F Forces unload. Unload at end of usage. (Refer to the U option.)
G Disables all hardware error correction activity in GE (6250 cpi) write mode.
An on-the-fly error while writing a GE tape results in standard error recovery
processing. The system erases the defective portion of tape, thereby reducing
the amount of data that can be stored on the tape. The default is
installation-defined (refer to the H option).
H Enables hardware error correction activity in GE (6250 cpi) write mode. The
system allows certain types of single track errors to be written that can be
corrected when the tape is read (on-the-fly correction). This is the
recommended mode because it provides efficient throughput, error recovery, and
tape usage when writing GE tapes on a medium that is suitable for use at 3200 -^
f c i o r 6 2 5 0 c p i . T h e d e f a u l t o p t i o n ( G o r H ) i s i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d . * ^ \
I Rewrites the block on which the end-of-tape occurred as the first block on the
next volume, if the system senses the EOT during a write operation. During a
read operation, the block on which the EOT occurred is ignored and reading
continues on the next volume. If a tape mark and the EOT are sensed at the
same time, the EOT is ignored. This option cannot be specified for I or SI
format tapes. Refer to the P and S options.
L Issues only the first and last error messages for each bad tape block.
Numerous attempts are made to read each bad block, but only the messages for
t h e fi r s t a n d l a s t a t t e m p t s a r e i s s u e d t o t h e d a y fi l e . T h e d e f a u l t i s ' " ^
i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d
(refer
to
the
M
option).
'
M

Issues an error message for each attempt to read a bad tape block. The
default is installation-defined (refer to the L option).
Specifies that job is not automatically aborted on an irrecoverable read or
write parity error (refer to the A option); data is passed to the job on a
read operation without error status set even if the program requested error
processing. Use this option guardedly.
Writes a trailer sequence following the block on which the EOT was sensed, if
the system senses the EOT during a write operation. Any data that occurs
following the block on which EOT was sensed, yet before the tape mark, is
ignored. During a read operation, the system transfers the block on which the
EOT was sensed to the user job. The read operation resumes on the next reel.
If a tape mark and the EOT are sensed at the same time, the EOT is ignored.
Refer to the I and S options.
Enforces ring out. If the tape is mounted with the write ring in, job
processing is suspended until the operator remounts the tape correctly.
Specifies where the system is to stop on an exit condition. For unlabeled
tape, it directs the system to stop at the first tape mark after the EOT is
sensed. For labeled tape, it directs the system to stop at the tape mark plus
E0F1 or the tape mark plus E0V1 when the EOT is encountered.

<^^v
12-4

60459680 C

vg^>»

Pi

Description
If, during a write operation, the system senses the end-of-tape, the
system writes a trailer sequence following the block on which the EOT
was sensed. This trailer sequence consists of a tape mark followed by
an E0V1 label for labeled tapes and four tape marks for unlabeled
tapes. The next block is written on the next volume. During a read
operation, the EOT is noted and the system transfers to the user job
the block on which the EOT was sensed plus all following blocks until
a trailer sequence (as described previously) is recognized. Reading
resumes on the next volume.

U Inhibits unload. Do not unload at the end of usage. For system
origin jobs and the RECLAIM command, the inhibit unload option is
selected by default; for all other jobs, omission of the U option
causes the tape to be unloaded at end of usage.
W Enforces ring in. If the tape is mounted without the write ring in,
job processing is suspended until the operator remounts the tape
c o r r e c t l y.
Specifying QN=9999 on the LABEL command has the same effect for
m u l t i fi l e t a p e s .
If both ring enforcement options (R and W) are specified or more than one EOT option (I, P,
or S) is specified, the system issues a dayfile message and terminates the job step.
For further information on end-of-tape and end-of-reel conditions, refer to the CLOSER,
REWIND, UNLOAD, and LABEL macros in Volume 4, Program Interface.

ASSIGN COMMAND
The ASSIGN command names a tape unit and the local file to be assigned to that unit. It can
create an unlabeled tape file or access an existing labeled or unlabeled tape. It cannot
create or verify tape labels.

NOTE
To assign a tape unit using the ASSIGN
command, your job must be of system origin
or you must be authorized to use magnetic
tapes and to assign devices by EST ordinals.

Jobs that use this command without proper validation are aborted, and a dayfile message is
issued.
Before performing the assignment, the system unloads the local file (refer to the UNLOAD
command in section 9).
The following description applies only to magnetic tape files; for use of the ASSIGN command
with devices other than magnetic tape, refer to section 9.

60459680

H

12-5

Format:
ASSIGN,nn,Ifn,VSN=vsn /vsn =..,=vsn

»V"V |S} • fdeT) .Wor-t.LB-lb,

FC=fcount
C=ccount

CV=cv
„N =, Nc S
v=
l n s ,' P 0 =r pl r. p2o . . . *p t

CK
CB

,AL=level.

Required parameters:
Parameter

Description
Device or device type to which the file lfn is assigned, nn can be
the EST ordinal* of a magnetic tape unit or one of the device types MT
or NT. Specifying MT informs the operator to assign the file to a
seven-track magnetic tape drive; NT informs the operator to assign
the file to a nine-track magnetic tape drive. Omission of this
parameter results in an error.

lfn

Name of the file to be assigned to the device nn. Omission of this
parameter results in an error.

Optional parameters:
Parameter
VSN=vsn /vsn =

Description

=vsn /vsn One- to six-character volume serial number that
uniquely identifies a reel of tape. ASSIGN does not
use the VSN parameter to assign the tape, The nn
parameter determines the tape assignment.

MT or NT

Specifies seven-track (MT) or nine-track (NT) tape
d r i v e . I t m u s t n o t c o n fl i c t w i t h t h e n n
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

D=den or den

Tape density; must not conflict with the MT or NT
s p e c i fi c a t i o n . T h e d e f a u l t i s i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d ,
The parameter is ignored for nine-track tapes not
positioned at load point. Can be one of the
following:
Seven-track (MT)

Nine-track (NT)

den

Density

den

LO
HI
HY
200
556
800

200
556
800
200
556
800

HD
PE
GE
800
1600
6250

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

Density
800
1600
6250
800
1600
6250

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

tContact installation personnel for a list of EST ordinals.

12-6

60459680 H

09s.

Parameter
F= form at

Description
D a t a f o r m a t . D e f a u l t i s I . R e f e r t o M a g n e t i c Ta p e
Files in section 2 for descriptions of the data
formats.
Format
I
SI
L
S

\

Description
Internal.

System
Long

internal.t

block

stranger.

Stranger.

F Foreign (designed for tapes of unknown
data format).
LB=lb

Labeled or unlabeled tape. Default is KU if VSN is
omitted or KL if VSN is specified.
lb

Meaning

KL

ANSI-labeled. If the tape is a NOS
tape, volume and header label access
restrictions are enforced (refer to
appendix G).

KU

Unlabeled.

NS

Nonstandard-labeled. Assumes data
b e g i n s i m m e d i a t e l y a f t e r t h e fi r s t t a p e
mark.

FC=fcount or C=ccount

Whenever F format is specified, this parameter must
be specified. It specifies maximum block size in
frames. No default value. Illegal for other tape
formats.

CV=cv or N=cv

Conversion modettfor nine-track tapes; applies to
both labels and data on coded tapes; applies only to
labels on binary tapes. Default is installationdefined. Parameter is ignored for unlabeled I or SI
format binary tapes whose trailer labels are always
ASCII. Must not be specified with MT or seven-track
d e n s i t y s p e c i fi c a t i o n .
cv

Meaning

AS ASCII-display code conversion.
US Same as AS.
EB EBCDIC-display code conversion.
TNOS/BE system default tape format (binary mode only); used for tape interchange with
NOS/BE systems.
TTRefer to Magnetic Tape Users in appendix A.
60459680 C

12-7

Parameter

Description

NS=ns

Noise size. Any block containing fewer than ns
frames is considered as noise and is discarded. The
NS parameter is not valid for I or SI format tapes
or for other tape formats when either PE (9-track,
1600 cpi) or GE (9-track, 6250 cpi) density is
specified. For PE and GE densities, the noise block
size is zero. Default is 18 frames for other
formats. Maximum value is 31 frames. If NS=0 is
specified, the default Is used.

PO=p1P2...Pn

A string of characters (not separated by commas)
that specify processing options (refer to Processing
Options in this section).

CK or CB

Specifies that lfn is to be used as a checkpoint
fi l e ( r e f e r t o s e c t i o n 1 3 ) .
CK Each dump is written at the previous
EOI of lfn.

CB
AL=level

Each dump is written at the BOI of lfn.

Specifies the security access level to assign to the
file. Unless changed by your site, level can be one
of the following names:

^^^Nv

LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
The default is the current access level of the job.
On a secured system, the access level you specify
must be valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns this
information) and for the device to which you are
a s s i g n i n g t h e fi l e .
On an unsecured system, the parameter has no
effect. The system does, however, check for valid
p a r a m e te r s p e c i fi c a ti o n s .

y^SSV

When using this command to assign a file for
checkpoint dumps on a secured system, use the
AL=level parameter to assign the file at the highest
access level valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns
this information). The CKP command aborts the job
i f t h e c h e c k p o i n t fi l e i s n o t a t t h i s a c c e s s l e v e l .
Example:
ASSIGN,51,TAPE1,D=PE,F=SI.
This command assigns the file TAPE1 to the nine-track magnetic tape unit identified by EST
ordinal 51.
./"^Ss

12-8

60459680 D

BLANK COMMAND
The BLANK command writes the ANSI standard labels VOL1, HDRl, and E0F1 following the load
point of a tape. The labels are written as follows (asterisks represent tape marks):
V0L1

HDRl

Zl

E0F1

If the value of a labeled field is specified by a BLANK command parameter, that value is
written; otherwise, the default value is used. Refer to appendix G for the tape label
formats and default values.

NOTE
A BLANK command issued in a nonsystem origin
job cannot overwrite a label containing an
unexpired expiration date or a nonblank VA
fi e l d .
I f t h e FA fi e l d w i t h i n t h e l a b e l i s
nonblank, a nonsystem origin job must
specify the FA character using the OFA
p a r a m e t e r. I f t h e FA c h a r a c t e r i s A , o n l y
the owner or a system origin job can
overwrite the label.
Format:
B L A N K . V S N - v s n , { ^ } , { D ^ n } , { « : - j ) FA = f a , O FA = o f a , VA = v a ,
OWNER=username/familyname,LSL=lsl,U.
Parameter
VSN=vsn

Description

One- to six-character volume serial number that
u n i q u e l y i d e n t i fi e s t h e r e e l o f t a p e . I t i s e n t e r e d
in the V0L1 label. It need not match the VSN
previously recorded on the tape.

| NOTE
Avoid specifying a volume serial
number that matches a local file
name attached to your job or the
l o c a l fi l e w i l l b e l o s t .
Omitting the VSN parameter
discards any local file named
BLKTAPE from your job.

60459680 H

12-9

Parameter

Description

MT or NT

Specifies seven-track (MT) or nine-track (NT) tape
d r i v e . I n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t . M u s t n o t
c o n fl i c t w i t h D = d e n s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

D=den or den

Tape density; must not conflict with the MT or NT
s p e c i fi c a t i o n . T h e d e f a u l t i s
installation-defined, den can be one of the
following.

CV=cv or N=cv

Seven-track (MT)

Nine-track (NT)

den

Density

den

Density

LO
HI
HY
200
556
800

200
556
800
200
556
800

HD
PE
G
E
800

800
1600
6250
800
1600
6250

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

1600
6250

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

Conversion modet for nine-track tape labels.
I n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t . M u s t n o t b e s p e c i fi e d
with MT or seven-track density specification.
cv

Meaning

AS ASCII/6-bit display code conversion.
US Same as AS.
EB EBCDIC/6-bit display code conversion.
FA=fa

File accessibility character indicating who has
access to the labeled tape. Value entered in HDRl
and E0F1 labels.
/*^v\

fa

Description

Blank Unlimited access (default).
A Only the owner of this NOS written tape
can access it.
Other In all future accesses of this tape,
you must specify this character.
OFA=ofa

Old file accessibility character on a labeled tape
that is to be relabeled. This parameter must be
s p e c i fi e d i f t h e FA fi e l d i s c u r r e n t l y o t h e r t h a n A
or blank. Future accesses of the tape must specify
the character specified with the FA parameter.

TRefer to Magnetic Tape Users in appendix A,

12-10

60459680 H

Parameter
VA = v a

Description

Volume

accessibility
character
indicating
that
the
volume must be accessed as an ANSI-labeled tape
(LB=KL). If VA Is nonblank, only a system origin
job can destroy V0L1 (for example, assign tape as
unlabeled). Default is unrestricted access. Refer
to the V0L1 format in appendix G.

O W N E R = u s e r n a m e / f a m i l y n a m e O w n e r i d e n t i fi c a t i o n e n t e r e d i n V 0 L 1 l a b e l .
D e t e r m i n e s t h e o w n e r f o r fi l e a c c e s s i b i l i t y ( FA )
parameter.
LSL=lsl

Label

standard

level entered
is the number 1.

in

Isl

V0L1

label.

Default

Description

1 Ta p e l a b e l s a n d d a t a f o r m a t f o r t h i s
volume conform to the ANSI standard.
B l a n k Ta p e l a b e l s a n d d a t a f o r m a t f o r t h i s
volume may or may not conform to the
ANSI standard.
U

If

U

is

s p e c i fi e d ,

the
tape
is
physically
unloaded
when returned after blank labeling. If U Is
omitted, physical unloading is inhibited.

An installation can use the BLANK command to restrict use of its labeled tapes. Once a tape
has been blank labeled, you can modify the labels as follows:
1 . I f t h e v o l u m e a c c e s s i b i l i t y fi e l d o f V 0 L 1 i n d i c a t e s u n l i m i t e d a c c e s s ( t h a t i s , VA i s
blank), you can:
• Include another BLANK command to change V0L1, HDRl, or E0F1 values.
• Request the tape as unlabeled (with the parameter LB=KU) and write it in
whatever format you specify.
• Include a LABEL command to change HDRl by specifying one or more of the
parameters associated with that label and specifying the W parameter.
2 . I f t h e v o l u m e a c c e s s i b i l i t y fi e l d i s n o n b l a n k , y o u c a n :
• Include a LABEL command to change HDRl. However, in requesting a tape in
which VA is nonblank, you must specify an ANSI-labeled tape (with the
parameter LB=KL), and therefore, cannot change or destroy the V0L1 label.
• If validated, submit a system origin job to change V0L1.

60459680

H

12-10.1/12-10.2

LABEL COMMAND
Like ASSIGN and REQUEST commands, the LABEL command associates a file name lfn with a
magnetic tape, usually identified by its VSN. Unlike the ASSIGN and REQUEST commands the
LABEL command can create and verify tape labels. It can also position a multifile set for
access to any of its existing files or for appending a new file. The LABEL command can
create and access unlabeled as well as labeled tapes.

NOTE
A LABEL command cannot overwrite a label
with an unexpired expiration date (refer to
appendix G).
To write the labels that begin a labeled tape (refer to Magnetic Tape Files in section 2),
specify a write label (W) parameter. The W parameter always rewinds the tape to load point
a n d r e w r i t e s t h e fi r s t l a b e l g r o u p . O v e r w r i t i n g t h e h e a d e r l a b e l s f o r a t a p e fi l e
effectively destroys the data on the file. The label contents remain the same when a LABEL
command with the W parameter names an lfn already assigned to a tape file.
I f t h e t a p e w a s n o t p r e v i o u s l y p a r t o f a m u l t i fi l e s e t ( t h e S I fi e l d i n t h e fi r s t H D R l l a b e l
is blank), then specification of the SI and QN=9999 parameters rewrites the initial tape
labels.
r

r To p o s i t i o nonly),
t h e the
t a p eSI aparameter
f t e r a n y must
H D R lbel aspecified.
b e l o t h eWhen
r t h a nSI t h
ise specified,
fi r s t H D the
R l lR
a band
el (m
W u parameters
l t i fi l e s e t are
ignored unless QN=1 and the first file on the tape is to be written. The system determines
where to position the tape by matching the SI, FI, and QN parameter values (if specified) to
the corresponding values in the HDRl label. (The HDRl label format is given in appendix G.)
To write the E0F1 and HDRl labels between two files in a multifile set (refer to
figure 2-2), you specify the SI and QN=9999 parameters. The W parameter is ignored if
specified when appending the file (QN=9999). Although the SI=setid parameter must be
specified when appending a file to a multifile set, the appended file will be given the same
setid as the preceding file regardless of the setid value specified in the LABEL command.
J P * S T h i s i s d o n e t o e n s u r e t h a t a l l fi l e s i n a fi l e s e t h a v e t h e s a m e s e t i d e n t i fi e r .
If neither the MT nor NT parameter is specified and no VSN is named, the operator can assign
the file to any equipment. You must be validated for the assigned equipment or the job is
t er m inat ed .

60459680

H

12_n

■

,-*^^v

Format:
m\ \
{NTT

,D=den,F=format,LB=lb,

JFC=fcount|
|CV=cv|
|CK|/si=setid|
( C=ccount)'( N=cv|'NS-nS'P0-PlP2"-Pn'(cB)( M=setid) '
fSN=secnol (QN=seqno| (FI=fileid| „t c
\ V=secno) ' lP=seqno J ' lL=fileid J » FA=fa,G=genno,E=gvn,
( C R = c d a t e | } R T = y y d d d | j w l AT , , t „
=cdate| »
JT=ddd | | ' (r) »AL=level,AC=ac,CT=ct,MD=md,PW=password,TO=to,UN=username,
1 C=cdate)
* (T=ddd
Required parameter:
Parameter
lfn

Description
Name of the file that resides or is to reside on
magnetic tape. If lfn is already assigned to a mass
storage file, processing continues with the next
command. To assign a previously assigned lfn, you
must return lfn before its reassignment. If lfn is
already assigned to a tape and R parameter is
specified, the contents of the tape labels are
compared to the command parameter specifications.
I f t h e l a b e l v e r i fi c a t i o n f a i l s , t h e j o b a b o r t s .
Omission of lfn results in an error.

Optional parameters:
Parameter

Description

VSN=vsn /vsn =. . = v s n , / v s n
n-1

One- to six-character volume serial number that
u n i q u e l y i d e n t i fi e s a r e e l o f t a p e . I f V S N i s
omitted, the operator assigns an available unit to
lfn. Multiple VSNs can be specified if separated by
/ or = characters. If the VSNs are separated by the
= character, LABEL assigns lfn to the first available
VSN in the list. If the VSNs are separated by the
/ character, lfn is a multivolume file set, and LABEL
assigns the volumes in the sequence given. If
VSN=, VSN=0, or VSN=SCRATCH is specified, a scratch
ta p e i s a s s i g n e d . If a s c r a tc h ta p e i s u n a v a i l a b l e ,
the job is suspended until a tape is available.

>35^\
12-12

60459680 H

fmstx\

Parameter

Description

MT or NT

Requests seven-track (MT) or nine-track (NT) tape
d r i v e . I n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t . M u s t n o t
c o n fl i c t w i t h D = d e n s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

D=den

Tape density; must not conflict with MT or NT
s p e c i fi c a t i o n . T h e d e f a u l t i s
i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d . T h e p a r a m e t e r i s i g n o r e d f o r
nine-track tape not positioned at load point. Can
be one of the following:

F=format

Seven-track (MT)

Nine-track (NT)

den

Density

den

Density

LO
HI
HY
200
556
800

200
556
800
200
556
800

HD
PE
GE
800

800
1600
6250
800
1600
6250

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

1600
6250

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

D a ta fo r m a t. D e fa u l t i s I. R e fe r to M a g n e ti c Ta p e
Files in section 2 for descriptions of the data
formats.
format
I
SI
S
L

Description
Internal.

System

internal.

Stranger.
Long

block

stranger.

F Foreign (designed for tapes of unknown
data format).

/^P^»

LB=lb

Labeled or unlabeled tape. Default is KL.
Description

FC=fcount or C=ccount

KL

ANSI-labeled.

KU

Unlabeled.

NS

Nonstandard-labeled. Assumes data
b e g i n s i m m e d i a t e l y a f t e r t h e fi r s t t a p e
mark.

Whenever F format is specified, this parameter must
be specified. It specifies the maximum block size
in frames (no default value). Not applicable for
other tape formats.

TNOS/BE system default tape format (binary mode only); used for tape interchange with
NOS/BE systems.
60459680 C

12-13

Parameter

Description

CV=cv or N=cv Conversion modet for nine-track tapes; applies to
both labels and data on coded tapes; applies only to
l a b e l s o n b i n a r y t a p e s . I n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d
default. Ignored for unlabeled I or SI format
binary tapes whose trailer labels are always ASCII.
Must not be specified with MT or seven-track density
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .
cv

Meaning

AS ASCII/display code conversion.
US Same as AS.
EB EBCDIC/display code conversion.
NS=ns

Noise

size;

any

block
containing
fewer
than
ns
frames is considered noise and is discarded. The NS
parameter is not valid for I or SI format tapes or
for other tape formats when either PE (9-track,
1600 cpi) or GE (9-track, 6250 cpi) density is
specified. For PE and GE densities, the noise block
size is zero. Default is 18 frames for other
formats. Maximum value is 31 frames. If NS=0 is
specified, the default is used.

P0=pip2...pn A string of characters (not separated by commas)
t h a t s p e c i fi e s p r o c e s s i n g o p t i o n s . R e f e r t o
Processing Options in this section.
CK

or

CB

S p e c i fi e s

that

lfn is to be used as
fi l e ( r e f e r t o s e c t i o n 1 3 ) .

a

checkpoint

CK Each dump is written at the previous
EOI of lfn.
CB Each dump is written at the BOI of lfn.

tRefer to Magnetic Tape Users in appendix A.

12-14

60459680

D

Optional tape label parameters (refer to appendix G):
Parameter
SI=setid or M=setid

Description
O n e - t o s i x - c h a r a c t e r fi l e s e t i d e n t i fi e r ; m u s t b e
s p e c i fi e d f o r fi l e p o s i t i o n i n g w i t h i n a m u l t i fi l e
set.
T h e s y s t e m l e a v e s t h e s e t i d e n t i fi e r fi e l d i n t h e
HDRl label blank if you omit the SI=setid parameter
or if you specify blanks for setid.
Yo u m u s t s p e c i f y a n o n b l a n k fi l e s e t i d e n t i fi e r t o
b u i l d a m u l t i fi l e s e t . H e n c e , i f y o u o m i t t h i s
parameter when you write the first file on the tape,
the tape cannot then be a multifile set tape. When
you append a file to a multifile set tape, you must
specify this parameter to position the tape. Also,
the specified set identifier must be the same as
t h a t o f t h e fi r s t fi l e i n t h e m u l t i fi l e s e t .

SN=secno or V=secno

O n e - t o f o u r - d i g i t fi l e s e c t i o n n u m b e r s p e c i f y i n g I
the position of the volume within a multivolume file
set (numbered consecutively from 0001). The default
is 1.

QN=seqno or P=seqno

One- to four-digit file sequence number specifying
t h e p o s i t i o n o f t h e fi l e w i t h i n t h e m u l t i fi l e s e t
(numbered consecutively from 0001). The default is
1. QN must be set to 9999 to append a new file to a
m u l t i fi l e s e t .

F I = fi l e i d o r L = fi l e i d

A 1 - t o 1 7 - c h a r a c t e r fi l e i d e n t i fi e r r e c o r d e d i n t h e
HDRl label (refer to appendix G). The default is
blank.

FA=fa

File accessibility character indicating who has
access to the labeled tape.
fa

Description

Blank

Unlimited access (default).

A

Only the owner of the tape can access
it.

Oth e r To a cce ss th e ta p e , yo u mu st sp e ci fy
the character in the FA field of the
HDRl label.
G=genno

One- to four-digit generation number. The number
zero cannot be used. The default is 1.

/fPN,

60459680 H

12-15

Parameter

Description

E=gvn

One- to two-digit generation version number,
default is 0.

CR=cdate or C=cdate

Creation date in the form yyddd where
1 _< ddd <^ 366. Used only on read operations; write
operations always use the current date.

RT=yyddd or T=ddd

RT=yyddd specifies the expiration date where yy is
the last two digits of the year, and ddd is the day
of the year (1 < ddd _< 366). T=ddd specifies the
number of days the file is to be retained
(0 < ddd _< 999). The expiration date is entered in
the HDRl label. On or after this date the label and
the file can be overwritten.

R or W

If R is specified, the system compares the values
recorded on the file labels with the LABEL command
parameter values. If the comparison fails, it
terminates the job. R is the default.

The

If W is specified, the system writes ANSI standard
labels on the tape. The labels contain the values
specified with the LABEL command parameters or their
default values. If the tape is mounted without the
write ring, job processing is suspended until the
operator remounts the tape correctly. If both the W
and the P0=R parameters are specified, the job step
aborts.
W and R are ignored when SI is specified and
QN > 1. When QN = 1 (default value) and W are
s p e c i fi e d , t h e i n i t i a l h e a d e r l a b e l i s r e w r i t t e n .
AL=level

Specifies the security access level to assign to the
file. Unless changed by your site, level can be one
of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
The default is the current access level of the job.
On a secured system, the access level you specify
must be valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns this
information) and for the device to which you are
a s s i g n i n g t h e fi l e .
On an unsecured system, the parameter has no
effect. The system does, however, check for valid
p a r a m e t e r s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
When using this command to assign a file for
checkpoint dumps on a secured system, use the
AL=level parameter to assign the file at the highest
access level valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns
this information). The CKP command aborts the job
i f t h e c h e c k p o i n t fi l e i s n o t a t t h i s a c c e s s l e v e l .

12-16

60459680 H

0^\.
Parameter

Description

AC=ac

Alternate auditability. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape
Management System (TMS) User Reference Manual for a
detailed description.

CT=ct

File category. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management
System (TMS) User Reference Manual for a detailed
description.

MD=md

File Mode. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management
System (TMS) User Reference Manual for a detailed
description.

PW=password

Password. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management System
(TMS) User Reference Manual for a detailed
description.

TO=to

TMS tape option. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management
System (TMS) User Reference Manual for a detailed
description.

UN=username

User name. Refer to the NOS 2 Tape Management
System (TMS) User Reference Manual for a detailed
description.

60459680 H

12-16.1/12-16.2

f*%

g3^&*\

Example 1 - Reading and Writing a Single-File File Set:
In the following job, the user reads data from one tape and writes data on another tape.
Program input data previously written at 1600 cpi on a nine-track tape unit is read from
tape TP01. Output data is written on tape TP02.
FTNJOB.
USER, USERNAM, PA SSWRD.
RESOURC, PE=2.
FTN 5.
LAB EL, TA PE 1, VS N=T P01, D=PC , PO =R.
LABEL, TAPE2,VSN=TP02,D=PE,P0=W,W.
LGO.
-EORPROGRAM SORT

END
-EORThe RESOURC command schedules two nine-track, 1600-cpi tape units for concurrent use in the
job. The tapes are not requested until after compilation of the program in case compilation
e r r o r s o c c u r.

J^p&\

Assuming the compilation completes without fatal error, the LABEL commands request that two
tapes, TP01 and TP02, be mounted and assigned to the job. The tape files are called TAPE1
and TAPE2 within this job. P0=R is specified for the input tape, ensuring that the tape
does not have a write ring. P0=W is specified for the output tape which requires a write
ring. The W parameter on the second LABEL command specifies the writing of ANSI standard
l a b e l s . D e f a u l t v a l u e s a r e u s e d i n t h e l a b e l fi e l d s .
Following completion of the job, the tapes are rewound and unloaded.

Example 2 - Reading and Writing a Multifile Set:
The following job writes the object programs produced by three compilations as three files
of a multifile set. It then copies one of the files to mass storage and executes it.
SJOB.
USER, USERNAM, PASSWRD.
GET,BS0RT,QS0RT,LS0RT.
LABEL,STAPE,VSN=TP03,D=PE,SI=BINSET, FI=BS0RT,P0=W,W.
FTN5,I=BS0RT,B=STAPE.
LABEL,STAPE, VSN=TP03,D=PE,SI=B INSET, FI=QS0RT,QN =9999.
FTN5,I=QS0RT,B=STAPE.
LABEL,STAPE, VSN=TP03,D=PE,SI=B INSET, FI=LS0RT,QN =9999.
FTN5,I=LS0RT,B=STAPE.
LABEL,STAPE,VSN=TP03,D=PE,SI=B INSET, QN=2.
C0PYEI,STAPE,QS0RTB.
QSORTB.

r
j|!S5&»>

60459680

E

12-17

The GET command retrieves three indirect access files - BSORT, QSORT, and LSORT - containing
FORTRAN source programs. The first LABEL command requests the mounting and assignment of
tape TP03 to the job. The W parameter specifies the writing of ANSI standard labels. The
set identifier and file identifier fields are written using the values specified on the SI
and FI parameters. The B=STAPE parameter on the FTN5 command specifies that the object
program is to be written on the tape file.
The QN=9999 parameter on the second and third LABEL commands specifies that a file is to be
appended to the tape. Although the same set identifier is used for all files within a file
set, the SI parameter must be specified when positioning a multifile set. The second and
third compilations write the second and third files of the file set.
The QN=2 parameter on the fourth LABEL command positions the tape at the second file of the
file set. The tape could also have been positioned according to the file identifier
(FI=QSORT). The second file is copied to a local mass storage file, QSORTB, and executed.
Example 3 - Replacing a File within a Multifile Set:
To replace a file within a multifile set, you must first copy to temporary storage the files
that follow the file to be replaced, then write the replacement file, and last rewrite the
succeeding files in the file set.
RWJOB.
USER,USRNAME,PASWRD.
GET,S0RT2.
LABEL,STAPE,VSN=TPQ3,D=PE,SI=BINSET,QN=2,P0=W.
COPYEI,STAPE,SCRATCH.
LABEL,STAPE,VSN=TPQ3,D=PE,SI=BINSET,QN=1.
C0PYEI,S0RT2,STAPE.
LABEL,STAPE,VSN=TP03,D=PE,SI=BINSET,FI=QS0RT,QN=9999.
COPYEI, SCRATCH, STAPE.

The first LABEL command requests tape TP03 containing the multifile set created in example
2. The tape is mounted with a write ring inserted (PO=W) and is positioned at the second
file of the file set (QN=2). The COPYEI command copies the second file to the mass storage
file, SCRATCH.
The second LABEL command positions the tape at the first file. Although the contents of the
first file are rewritten, the file labels remain unaltered.
The third LABEL command appends the second file to the file set (QN=9999). The labels are
rewritten so you can change the label contents. The third COPYEI command writes the second
file as stored on file SCRATCH.
The third file of the multifile set is lost, because it was not saved before the tape was
rewritten.

12-18

60459680

C

LISTLB COMMAND
The LISTLB command lists the labels of an ANSI-labeled tape file. For a correct listing of
labels, the data format specified on the tape assignment command must correspond to the
format in which the tape was written. For output listing files not connected to your
terminal, the LISTLIB command honors the page length and print density set for your job
using the SET command and the PL and PD symbolic names.
Format:

LisxLB.ifn, {££«<) .{?!::qer}.^^,L=out.
Parameter
/SS^v

Description

lfn

File name assigned to tape file whose labels are to
b e l i s t e d . D e f a u l t i s fi l e n a m e TA P E . I f y o u u s e
the default name, assign TAPE to the labeled tape
being read.

SI=setid or M=setid

O n e - t o s i x - c h a r a c t e r fi l e s e t i d e n t i fi e r . I f
specified, only label groups whose HDRl label
c o n t a i n s t h i s v a l u e a r e l i s t e d . Yo u m u s t s p e c i f y
t h i s p a r a m e t e r t o l i s t t h e l a b e l s o f a m u l t i fi l e s e t .

QN=seqno or P=seqno

One- to four-digit file sequence number. If seqno
is specified, only the label group whose HDRl label
contains this value is listed. If seqno is
specified, SI must be specified; otherwise, LISTLB
terminates.

LO=ltype

Label type(s) to be listed. The default is R.
Required and optional labels are listed in appendix
G. Combinations of ltype mnemonics can be
specified, such as LO=VH to list only the VOLn and
HDRn labels.
A

List

all

labels.

R

List

required

labels.

0

List

optional

labels.

V

List

VOLn

labels.

List HDRn labels.
List EOFn labels.
List EOVn labels.
List UVLn, UHLn, and UTLn labels.
L=out

60459680 H

File on which the labels are to be listed. Default
is OUTPUT.

12-19

>=%\

To list labels for a multifile set (lfn contains more than one HDR1/E0F1 label pair), you
must specify the SI=setid parameter and the tape must be positioned at load point. LISTLB
then positions the tape for reading the requested labels. It searches for labels through
all volumes associated with lfn. At the end of the multifile set or if an expected label
group is not found, the following dayfile message is issued, n is the sequence number of
t h e l a s t fi l e f o u n d , ( n n n s h o u l d b e i g n o r e d . )
MULTI-FILE NOT FOUND, Lfn AT nnn.
REQUEST SECTION n+1.
FOUND SECTION n.
After issuing this dayfile message, LISTLB leaves the tape positioned after the last listed
label. The next command processed for the tape file must be either RETURN, EVICT, UNLOAD,
or LABEL.
F o r a t a p e fi l e t h a t i s n o t a m u l t i fi l e s e t , t h e r e a r e t w o c a s e s . I f y o u s p e c i f y t r a i l e r
labels, LISTLB leaves the tape positioned before the trailer labels last listed. Otherwise,
LISTLB leaves the tape positioned after the label last listed.

Example 1:
The following commands list the second label group of file set ABCDEF.
LABEL,T,VSN=EXAMP1,MT,D=HY,SI=ABCDEF.
LISTLB,T,SI=ABCDEF,QN=2.
Example 2:

To list only the volume and header labels (trailer labels omitted) of a multivolume file
set, you must request a volume of the file set, list its labels, and return the file set,
repeating the procedure for each volume of the file set.
LABEL,T,VSN=REEL1,MT,D=HY.
LISTLB,T,LO=VH.
RETURN,T.
LABEL,T,MT,D=HY,VSN=REEL2.
LISTLB,T,LO=VH.

Example 3:
To list all labels of the following file set, only one LISTLB command is required.
VSN,T=REEL1/REEL2.
LABEL,T,VSN=REEL1,D=HY.
LISTLB,T.
The LISTLB(T) command lists all labels on the volumes associated with T, that is, REEL1 and
REEL2.

12~20

60459680

C

REQUEST COMMAND
The REQUEST command associates a file name, lfn, with a magnetic tape device.t You can
direct the operator to make the tape assignment by including a comment following the command
terminator. This comment appears at the system console. However, if the tape is labeled
and you previously specified a VSN via the VSN control command or included the VSN parameter
on the REQUEST command, the system can automatically assign the tape. The REQUEST command
can create unlabeled tape files and access existing labeled and unlabeled tape files. It
cannot create or verify tape labels.
The LABEL command performs the same function as the REQUEST command. Unless you have reason
to do otherwise, use the LABEL command. TMS does not support the REQUEST command.
Format:

REQUEST,lfn,VSN=vsn1/vsn2=...=vsnn_1/vsnn, {^} , {°^enJ ,F=format,
tLB-lb>
h - i k (( FC=ccount)
C = f c o u n '{N=cv
t ) ( C pS=ns,PO=Plp2...pn,
V = c v l M P n n [ CjC]}j
K ) ,AL=level.comment
Required parameter:
Parameter

lfn

Description
Name of the file that resides or is to reside on
magnetic tape. If lfn is already assigned to a mass
storage file, processing continues with the next
command. To assign a previously assigned lfn, you
must return lfn before Its reassignment. Omission
of this parameter results in an error.

Optional parameters:
Parameter
V S N = v s1n . / v s n 2 = . . . = vns-n1 , / v s n n

Description
One- to six-character volume serial number
u n i q u e l y i d e n t i f y i n g a r e e l o f t a p e . Yo u s h o u l d
specify a VSN for labeled and unlabeled tapes. If
VSN is omitted, the operator must assign an
available device to lfn.
If VSN=, VSN=0, or VSN=SCRATCH is specified, a
scratch tape is assigned. If a scratch tape is
unavailable, the job is suspended until a tape is
available.
Multiple VSNs can be specified if separated by a /
or = character. If the VSNs are separated by the =
c h a r a c t e r, t h e s y s t e m a s s i g n s l f n t o t h e fi r s t
available VSN in the list. If the VSNs are
separated by the / character, lfn is a multivolume
file set, and LABEL assigns the volumes in the
sequence given.

tlf you do not specify a VSN parameter or an MT or NT parameter on the command, the
operator can assign any device to the file. If you are not authorized to use the assigned
device, the job aborts.
60459680 H

12-21

^^v

Parameter

Description

MT or NT

Requests seven-track (MT) or nine-track (NT) tape
d r i v e . I n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t . M u s t n o t
c o n fl i c t w i t h D = d e n s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

D=den or den

Tape density; must not conflict with MT or NT
s p e c i fi c a t i o n . T h e d e f a u l t i s
i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d . T h e p a r a m e t e r i s i g n o r e d f o r
nine-track tape not positioned at load point. Can
be one of the following.

F=format

Seven-track (MT)

Nine-track (NT)

den

Density

den

Density

LO
HI
HY
200
556
800

200
556
800
200
556
800

HD
PE
GE
800
1600
6250

800
1600
6250
800
1600
6250

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

Data format. Default is I. Refer to Magnetic Tape
Files in section 2 for descriptions of the data
formats.
format

LB=lb

cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi
cpi

Description

I

Internal.

Sit

System internal.

S

S t r a n g e r.

L

Long block stranger.

F

Foreign (designed for tapes of unknown
data format).

Labeled or unlabeled tape. Default is KL if a
volume serial number is specified by the VSN
parameter or by a VSN command; otherwise, the
default is KU.
lb
KL
KU

Description
ANSI-labeled.
Unlabeled.

NS Nonstandard-labeled. Assumes that data
begins immediately after the first tape
mark.

TNOS/BE system default tape format (binary mode only); used for tape interchange with
NOS/BE systems.
12-22

60459680 C

..oCfBsjV

Parameter

Description

FC=fcount or C=ccount

Whenever F format is specified, this parameter must
be specified. It specifies the maximum block size
in frames (no default value). Illegal for other
tape formats.

CV=cv or N=cv

Conversion mode* for nine-track tapes; applies to
both labels and data on coded tapes; applies only to
l a b e l s o n b i n a r y t a p e s . I n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d
default. Ignored for unlabeled I or SI format
binary tapes whose trailer labels are always ASCII.
Must not be specified with MT or seven-track density
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

cv

Meaning

AS ASCII/display code conversion.
US Same as AS.

EB
NS=ns

PO=p1p2...pn

r

CK or CB

EBCDIC/display code conversion.

Noise size. Any block containing fewer than ns
frames is considered as noise and is discarded. The
NS parameter is not valid for I or SI format tapes
or for other tape formats when either PE (9-track,
1600 cpi) or GE (9-track, 6250 cpi) density is
specified. For PE and GE densities, the noise block
size is zero. Default is 18 frames for other
formats. Maximum value is 31 frames. If NS=0 is
s p e c i fi e d , t h e d e f a u l t i s u s e d .
A string of characters (not separated by
commas) that specifies processing options,
to Processing Options in this section.)

(Refer

File lfn is to be used as a checkpoint file (refer
to section 9).
CK Each dump is written at the previous
EOI of lfn.

CB
AL=level

Each dump is written at the BOI of lfn.

Specifies the security access level to assign to the
file. Unless changed by your site, level can be one
of the following names:
LVLO, LVLl, LVL2, LVL3, LVL4, LVL5, LVL6, or LVL7
The default is the current access level of the job.

TRefer to Magnetic Tape Users in appendix A.

60459680 H

12-23

Parameter

Description
On a secured system, the access level you specify
must be valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns this
information) and for the device to which you are
a s s i g n i n g t h e fi l e .
On an unsecured system, the parameter has no
effect. The system does, however, check for valid
p a r a m e t e r s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
When using this command to assign a file for
checkpoint dumps on a secured system, use the
AL=level parameter to assign the file at the highest
access level valid for the job (ENQUIRE,B returns
this information). The CKP command aborts the job
i f t h e c h e c k p o i n t fi l e i s n o t a t t h i s a c c e s s l e v e l .

comment

The comment appears at the system console. In the
comment field, you can direct the operator to make
the requested assignment.

Example:
To send a message to the operator requesting that volume XYZ be mounted on tape unit NT62
and assigned to lfn TAPE1, you could issue the following command.
REQUEST,TAPE1. NEED VSN=XYZ ON NT062.

12-24

60459680 D

VSN COMMAND
The VSN command associates a file name lfn with one or more vol vanes of tape.t An lfn/VSN
association allows the system to assign the specified VSN to lfn without reference to a VSN
parameter on the LABEL or REQUEST command or to an operator command. Once declared, an
lfn/VSN association remains until the file is returned by an operation such as an EVICT,
RETURN, or UNLOAD command.
Format:
VSN,lfn^vsn.
i
i ,lfn =vsn_
z
z,...,lfnn =vsnn .
Parameter

Description

lfni File name to be associated with vsni» This parameter is required if
parameters are specified.
vsni one or more one- to six-character volime serial nunbers to be
associated with lfni. if vsni contains nonalphanuneric
characters, it must be a literal delimited by dollar signs ($) .
vs^

Meaning

emitted An available scratch tape is automatically
assigned to lfni.
0

Same

S C R AT C H

as
Same

omitted.
as

omitted.

vsn =vsn=...=vsn Names duplicate volumes, any of which may be
used with lfn. .tt*
vsn /vsn /.../vsn Successive volumes to be assigned to lfni.
The system assigns volumes in the order listed.
With a VSN command you can:
e Qnit the VSN keyword from your LABEL or REQUEST commands and specify lfn/VSN
associations on the VSN command instead. This allows you to specify new VSNs
without changing LABEL or REQUEST command.
• Override the VSN specified on subsequent ASSIGN, LABEL, REQUEST, or VSN commands.
For example, the sequence
VSN,FILEA=123.
VSN, FILEA =124.
LABEL,FILEA.

tUp to 60 VSNs can be specified for a single file name in any combination of duplicate reel
a n d / o r m u l t i r e e l s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
ttAll subsequent volumes must have the same characteristics as the first volume in the
s e q u e n c e . ( C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s i n c l u d e l a b e l s , t r a c k t y p e , d e n s i t y, a n d c o n v e r s i o n m o d e . ) I t
is recommended that all volumes be blank labeled (refer to the BLANK command) before use
in a multivolune sequence.

60459680

C

12_25

directs the system to assign FILEA to the tape with VSN 123. However, by returning
file lfn, you can specify another lfn/VSN association. Thus, the following sequence
directs the system to assign FILEA to the tape with VSN 124.
VSN, FILEA =123.
RET URN,F ILEA.
VSN, FILEA =124.
LABEL, FILEA.
Associate the VSNs of two or more duplicate volumes with one file name. For
example, the following command indicates that either the tape with VSN VOL100 or the
tape with VSN VOL101 can be assigned to FILE1.
VSN,FILE1 =VOL100«VOL101.
Specify the VSNs of a multivolume file set. For example, the following command ,^tnm\
indicates that FILE2 may extend through the three volumes identified by VSN23,
VSN24, and VSN25.
VSN,FILE2=VSN23/VSN24/VSN25.
Specify alternate volumes within a multivolume file set.
VSN,FILE3=VSNA=VSN1/VSN2/VSNB=VSN3=VSN4.
The first volume of the set can be either VSNA or VSNI. The second volume is VSN2.
The third volume can be either VSNB, VSN3, or VSN4, depending on which is available. r*=si%

12-26

60459680

C

/psfe\

C H E C K P O I N T / R E S TA RT

13

A job may terminate as the result of system, operator, or programmer error. For some jobs,
it becomes more advantageous to accept the overhead of checkpoint procedures than to run the
risk of losing the entire job output. The checkpoint/restart feature is implemented through
the CKP command and the RESTART command.

NOTE
For information concerning security
restrictions associated with the use of
these commands, refer to Security Control in
section 3.

CKP COMMAND
The CKP command causes a checkpoint dump to be taken.
Format:
C K P, l f n 1 , l f n 2 , . . . , l f n n .
Parameter

Description

l f n i S p e c i fi e s a fi l e t o b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e c h e c k p o i n t d u m p . I f n o fi l e s a r e
specified, all files local to the job at the time the CKP command is
processed are checkpointed.
Each time a CKP command is processed, the system takes a checkpoint dump. The dump is
written on the tape or mass storage checkpoint file specified on a REQUEST, ASSIGN, or LABEL
command with the CK or CB parameter. The dump consists of a copy of the job's field length
in central memory, the system information used for job control, and the names and position
a n d / o r c o n t e n t s o f a l l a s s i g n e d fi l e s e x p l i c i t l y o r i m p l i c i t l y i d e n t i fi e d b y t h e C K P
command. These files are:
• INPUT, OUTPUT, PUNCH, PUNCHB, P8, CCCCCCO, and LGO. These files are always included
in the checkpoint dump. Procedure scratch files ZZZZZCO, ZZZZZC1, and ZZZZZC2 are
also included if present. Data files using the default names ZZCCLAA, ZZCCLAB,...,
and ZZCCLZZ are also included if present.
• Library type files, working copies of indirect access files, and some direct access
files. If one of these types of files is specified on the CKP command, it is
included in the checkpoint dump, and all other files of that type are excluded. If
n o fi l e s a r e s p e c i fi e d , a l l fi l e s o f t h e s e t y p e s a s s i g n e d t o t h e j o b a r e i n c l u d e d i n
the dump.
The system does not include global library set files (ZZZZZLD and your library files) unless
you specify them on the command.
Each checkpointed mass storage file is copied according to the last operation performed on
i t . I f t h e l a s t o p e r a t i o n w a s a w r i t e , t h e fi l e i s c o p i e d f r o m t h e B O I t o i t s p o s i t i o n a t
c h e c k p o i n t t i m e ; o n l y t h a t p o r t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e a t r e s t a r t t i m e . T h e fi l e i s p o s i t i o n e d a t
the latter point.
60459680

D

13-1

If the last operation on a mass storage file was a read and the EOI was not detected, the
file is copied from its position at checkpoint time to the EOI; only that portion is
available at restart time. The file is positioned at the former point. If the last
operation was a read and the EOI was detected, no copy is performed.
The exception to this rule is the type of operation performed on execute-only direct access
files. If a dump is specified for this type of file, its name and associated system
information are copied but the contents of the file itself is not copied. Thus, if you
attempt to resume from such a dump, RESTART is unable to retrieve that file and aborts. You
can avoid this by selecting the NA and FC options of the RESTART command and retrieving the
fi l e y o u r s e l f .
When procedure scratch files are copied, they are copied from BOI to EOI.
For checkpointed magnetic tape files, only the relative position of the tape is captured so
that the tape can be properly positioned during restart. Mixed mode 7-track tapes are not
supported when using CHECKPOINT or RESTART.
If the checkpoint file is to reside on mass storage, you must include a SAVE or DEFINE
command in the checkpoint job and a GET or ATTACH command in the restart job.
If the checkpoint file is to reside on magnetic tape, care should be taken to use a labeled
or nonblank tape. An unlabeled blank tape (one which has never been used) cannot be
specified as the checkpoint file since the checkpoint program attempts to read the tape to
determine the number of the last checkpoint. The tape subsystem then aborts the job with a
blank tape read message.
The system numbers checkpoints starting at 1 and increases by 1 to a limit of 4095. At this
point, a second cycle of numbering begins, again starting at 1. An example showing how to
restart from a specific checkpoint is given in the RESTART command section.

RESTART COMMAND
The RESTART command directs the system to restart a previously terminated job from a
specified checkpoint.
Format:
RES TART, 1 f n ,nnnn ,x i.
Parameter

Description

lfn

Identifies the checkpoint file; you must have write permission to lfn.

nnnn

Number of the checkpoint from which to restart; if nnnn is *, the last
available checkpoint on lfn is used; if nnnn is omitted, the first
checkpoint is used. The nnnn parameter can be obtained from the
CHECKPOINT nnnn COMPLETE messages issued to the user's dayfile in
response to CKP command.

>tS*X

13-2

60459680 C

Parameter
xi Any

of

Description
the

following

in

any

order:

R I I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s i n c l u d e d , t h e c o m m a n d fi l e o n l f n i s
not restored. The command file of this restart job at its
current position is used instead.
The procedure scratch files ZZZZZCO, ZZZZZC1, and ZZZZZC2
are not restored from the checkpoint file. The values of
the symbolic names EFG, EF, RIG, Rl, R2, R3, and DSC of
this restart job are used, not the values from the
checkpoint file CPA.
If this parameter is not included, the entire command file
of the checkpointed job is restored and set to its
position at checkpoint time; any command following RESTART
is not processed.
N A I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s i n c l u d e d , R E S TA RT d o e s n o t a b o r t i f a
r e q u i r e d fi l e i s n o t a v a i l a b l e . A l s o , i f N A i s i n c l u d e d
and a read parity error occurs in an attempt to obtain a
file from checkpoint nnnn, RESTART selects checkpoint
nnnn-1 if it is available.
F C N o r m a l l y R E S TA RT r e s t o r e s a l l m a s s s t o r a g e fi l e s i n c l u d e d
i n t h e s p e c i fi e d c h e c k p o i n t . T h i s o p t i o n d o e s n o t r e s t o r e
ZZZZZCO, ZZZZZC1, or ZZZZZC2. However, if this option is
selected, RESTART first checks if a file is already local
to the restart job. If it is, RESTART does not replace it
with the file on the checkpoint dump.
Before you enter the RESTART command, do the following:
• Assign the checkpoint file to the job. You must include a REQUEST, ASSIGN, or LABEL
command if the checkpoint file resides on magnetic tape. You can use a GET or
ATTACH command if the checkpoint file resides on mass storage.
• Assign to the job all necessary magnetic tape files to be used by the restarted
job. You can use the LABEL command.
Checkpoint dumps are numbered in ascending order from 1 to 4095. When nnnn equals 4095, the
numbering sequence begins again at nnnn equal to 1. The value of nnnn depends on the
structure of the checkpoint file, as defined by the CK and CB parameters of the REQUEST,
ASSIGN, or LABEL commands.
If CK was specified when the checkpoints occurred, each dump is appended to the checkpoint
file, and therefore, all dumps up to the time the job aborted are available for restart.
You may specify a particular checkpoint dump in the following manner.

f

60459680

C

13_3

J ^ ^ V

Assume a CK file of the name CHKFILE is being used and checkpoint number 4095 has been
passed. The job is terminated at checkpoint number 10 in the second cycle of numbering. To
restart the job from checkpoint 4 of the second numbering cycle, the following commands can
be used.
SKIPR,CHKFILE,8196.

There are two records for every checkpoint, and 4098
checkpoints must be skipped to reach checkpoint 4 of the
second numbering cycle.

COPYBR,CHKFILE,AA,2.

T h e f o u r t h c h e c k p o i n t i s c o p i e d t o fi l e A A . A t t h i s p o i n t ,
file CHKFILE is not positioned correctly for subsequent
checkpoints. If you intend to continue checkpointing on this
fi l e , a
BKSP,CHKFILE.
command should be included.

RESTART,AA...

The job is restarted from file AA using the fourth checkpoint,

If the CB parameter was specified on the ASSIGN, LABEL, or REQUEST command naming the
checkpoint file, each dump is written over the preceding dump, and therefore, only the last
dump is available. If two REQUEST, ASSIGN, or LABEL commands with CB specified are
submitted, successive dumps are alternated between two files; therefore, the last two dumps
are available .t
All files copied by RESTART are made local to the restart job. Therefore, you must make
sure that any direct access files are not lost. For example, assume that direct access
files X, Y, and Z are attached to a job. The job is then checkpointed and X, Y, and Z are
c o p i e d t o t h e c h e c k p o i n t fi l e l f n . To r e t a i n t h e s e fi l e s a s d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e s d u r i n g
restart, you should include the following sequence of commands.
PURGE,X,Y,Z.
DEFINE,X,Y,Z.
RESTART,lfn,nnnn,x^.
If the information table associated with a file was included on the checkpoint file, but the
file itself was not copied, RESTART issues the appropriate commands to attempt to retrieve
the file unless one of the following is true:
• You specified the FC parameter and the file is already local to the restart job.
• The file resides on magnetic tape.

tlf alternate checkpoint files are used and a read parity error occurs in an attempt to
read the last checkpoint, RESTART aborts even if the NA option was selected.
13-4

60459680 C

SYSTEM UTILITY COMMANDS

14

NOS provides the following utilities for file maintenance and screen formatting.
EDIT

Edits

a

text

fi l e .

F S E E d i t s a fi l e i n l i n e o r s c r e e n m o d e .
KRONREF Generates a cross-reference listing of system symbols.
M O D I F Y E d i t s a M o d i f y - f o r m a t t e d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y fi l e .
O P L E D I T R e m o v e s m o d i fi c a t i o n d e c k s a n d i d e n t i fi e r s f r o m a M o d i f y - f o r m a t t e d p r o g r a m
l i b r a r y fi l e .
P D U C o m p i l e s a p a n e l d e fi n i t i o n fi l e a n d l o a d s i t i n a u s e r l i b r a r y .
P R O F I L E E n a b l e s a m a s t e r u s e r t o u p d a t e a n d i n q u i r e a b o u t a p r o fi l e fi l e .
U P D AT E E d i t s a n U p d a t e - f o r m a t t e d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y fi l e .
XEDIT

Edits

a

text

fi l e .

EDIT COMMAND
The EDIT command calls the Text Editor utility. The Text Editor manipulates data on a
specified mass storage file through use of special input directives called edit commands.
For a detailed description of the Text Editor and an explanation of these commands, refer to
the Text Editor Reference Manual.
Format:
EDIT»lf*l,m,lfn2,lfn3.
or
EDIT»FN=lfnl,M=m,I=lfn2,l^lfn3.
Parameter
lfni

Description
N a m e o f fi l e t o b e e d i t e d ( r e f e r r e d t o a s e d i t fi l e ) . T h i s
s p e c i fi c a t i o n i s r e q u i r e d f o r b a t c h o r i g i n j o b s .
Mode of file processing:
ASCII or AS ASCII mode edit file.
NORMAL or N NORMAL mode edit file.

60459680 C

lfn2

File from which directives (edit commands) are to be read. If
omitted, INPUT is assumed.

lfn3

File to which output is to be written. If omitted, OUTPUT is assumed.
14-1

FSE COMMAND
The FSE command calls the full screen editor FSE. For a complete description of the
features of FSE and its parameters and directives, refer to the Full Screen Editor User's
Guide.
Format:
FSE ,FN=filename, OP=access ,I=input, L=output ,IP=procedure,WF=workfile. directives
or
F S E , fi l e n a m e , a c c e s s , i n p u t , o u t p u t , p r o c e d u r e , w o r k fl i e . d i r e c t i v e s
The first format is the order-independent format for parameters. The second is the
order-dependent format.
Parameter

Description

FN»filename Specifies the file you want to edit. The file can be a local file or
a p e r m a n e n t fi l e . T h e d e f a u l t i s t h e fi l e m o s t r e c e n t l y e d i t e d d u r i n g
your job.
O P = a c c e s s S p e c i fi e s t h e c h a r a c t e r s e t c o d e a n d t h e l o c a t i o n o f t h e fi l e t o b e
edited. The following entries are valid:
Access
DISPLAY

or
NORMAL

Abbreviation

Description
Selects 6-bit display code. This
is the default if your terminal is
NORMAL mode.

ASCII

Selects 6/12-bit display code. This
is the default if your terminal is in
ASCII mode.

ASCII8

Selects 7-bit ASCII code rightj u s t i fi e d i n a 1 2 - b i t b y t e .

GET

S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e fi l e i s a d i r e c t
access or an indirect access permanent
fi l e .

To specify both a character set and the location of the file, you must
specify two values. For example, 0P=8G and OP=AG are valid.
To specify the OP=access parameter, you must also specify the
FN=filename parameter.
I"input

S p e c i fi e s a n i n p u t fi l e f o r d i r e c t i v e s . T h e d e f a u l t i s fi l e I N P U T.

L=output

Specifies an output file. The default is OUTPUT.

,*i3!Bs

14-2

60459680 D

Parameter

Description

IP=procedure Specifies a file to be the FSE procedure library. The default
procedure library is FSEPROC. If file FSEPROC is not a local file,
FSE automatically retrieves it. If FSEPROC is not one of your
indirect access permanent files, FSE retrieves a copy from user name
LIBRARY.
WF=workfile Specifies a work file for FSE. The default is ZZZWORK.
directives Specifies FSE directives to be executed before FSE executes those in
t h e i n p u t fi l e . U s e s e m i c o l o n s t o s e p a r a t e d i r e c t i v e s .
If you specify both an Input directive file (using the I=input parameter) and an output
listing file (using the L=output parameter), FSE is said to be in batch mode. When
operating in batch mode, the input directive file must be coded in 6/12-bit display code.

NOTE
When FSE is executing in batch mode, or when
the FSE command is included in a batch job,
you can significantly increase processing
efficiency by disabling UNDO processing
(using the SET UNDO directive). This action
inhibits FSE from keeping a record of each
operation performed.

r
60459680 D

14-3

KRONREF COMMAND
The KRONREF command generates a cross-reference listing of system symbols used by decks on a
Modify OPL. For output listing files not connected to your terminal, the KRONREF command
honors the page length and print density set for your job using the SET command and the PL
and PD symbolic names.
NOTE
Before entering a KRONREF command specifying
both OPL and NOSTEXT, you must enter an RFL
command to reserve sufficient memory to
contain systems text and OPL contents.
Format:
KRONREF,P=lfnx,L=lfn2,S=lfn3,G=lfn4.
Parameter

Description

P = l f n j O P L i n p u t f r o m fi l e l f n ^ I f t h e P o p t i o n i s o m i t t e d o r P a l o n e i s
specified, file OPL is assumed.
L = l f n 2 L i s t o u t p u t o n fi l e l f n 2 . I f t h e L o p t i o n i s o m i t t e d o r L a l o n e i s
specified, file OUTPUT is assumed.
S=lfn3 System text from overlay lfn3. The system text must contain symbol
d e fi n i t i o n s . I f t h e S o p t i o n i s o m i t t e d o r S a l o n e i s s p e c i fi e d , fi l e
NOSTEXT is assumed. If S=0 is specified, only the common deck
references and statistics are listed.
G=lfn^ System text from local
d e fi n i t i o n s . I f G i s
defaulted by the S
used. Use of the G

fi l e l f n $ . T h e s y s t e m t e x t m u s t c o n t a i n s y m b o l
o m i t t e d , s y s t e m t e x t i s a c q u i r e d a s s p e c i fi e d o r
option. If G alone is specified, local file TEXT is
option overrides any S specification.

The names of programs on the OPL are listed for those decks that reference the following:
P P d i r e c t c e l l l o c a t i o n s d e fi n e d i n l f n 0 o r l f n , .
3
4
PP resident entry points defined in lfn~.
Monitor functions.
Mass storage table words.
Global or local file name table words and ordinals.
Central memory pointers (in low central memory) defined in lfn« or lfn,.
Central memory locations (in low central memory) defined in lfn3 or lfn,.
Control point area words defined in lfn3 or lfn,.
Executing job table, equipment status table, or queue file table.
Negative field length symbols and dayfile message options.
File types and mass storage constants.
Job origin types and queue types.
E r r o r fl a g s r e f e r e n c e d .
Common deck calls.
PP packages called.
Special entry points.
14-4

60459680

E

MODIFY COMMAND
The MODIFY command edits a Modify-formatted program library file. For output listing files
not connected to your terminal, the MODIFY command honors the page length and print density
set for your job using the SET command and the PL and PD symbolic names.
Format:
M O D I F Y, P l , p 2 , . . . , p n .
The following optional parameters can be specified in any order.
Pi

Description

A W r i t e t h e c o m p i l e fi l e i n c o m p r e s s e d f o r m a t .
C=lfni Write compile output on lfni. If vou specify only C or omit this
parameter, lfni is COMPILE. C=0 results in no compile output.
CB=lfn2 Write binary output on lfn2. This parameter is equivalent to the
B=Ifn parameter on a compiler or assembler call command. If you
specify only CB or omit this parameter, LGO is the binary output
file. CB=0 produces no binary output. This parameter is meaningful
only if you specify the Q=processor or X=processor parameter.
CG=lfn3 Load system text from lfn3. This parameter is equivalent to the
G=lfn parameter on a compiler or assembler call command. Load system
text from SYSTEXT. CG=0 loads no system text. By default, the system
uses the CS=lfn5 parameter. You must specify the Q=processor or
X=processor parameter if the CL=lfn3 is to be meaningful.
CL=lfn4 Write full listing on lfn4« CL=lfn4 is equivalent to the L=lfn
parameter on a compiler or assembler call command. If you specify
only CL, OUTPUT is the list file. If you omit this parameter or
specify CL=0, a short listing is written on OUTPUT. This parameter is
meaningful only if you specify the Q=processor or X=processor
parameter.
C S = l f n 5 Ta k e s y s t e m t e x t f r o m l f n 5 « T h i s p a r a m e t e r i s e q u i v a l e n t t o t h e
S=lfn parameter on a compiler or assembler call command. If you omit
this parameter or specify only CS, the system text is taken from
SYSTEXT overlay. CS=0 produces no system text. This parameter is
meaningful only if you specify the Q=processor or X=processor
parameter.
C V = c v C o n v e r t t h e l i b r a r y t o t h e c h a r a c t e r s e t s p e c i fi e d b y c v ( 6 3 o r 6 4 ) .
By default, no conversion occurs.
NOTE
When the CV=63 or CV=64 parameter is speci
fi e d , M o d i f y prevents compile file genera
tion (C=0).

60459680 F

14-5

Pi

Description

D D o n o t a b o r t t h e j o b o n a d i r e c t i v e e r r o r. T h i s p a r a m e t e r d o e s n o t
a ff e c t f a t a l e r r o r p r o c e s s i n g . B y d e f a u l t , t h e j o b a b o r t s o n a
d i r e c t i v e o r f a t a l e r r o r.
F E d i t a l l d e c k s o n t h e l i b r a r y a n d w r i t e t h e m o n n e w p r o g r a m l i b r a r y,
c o m p i l e fi l e , a n d s o u r c e fi l e i f t h e r e s p e c t i v e o p t i o n s a r e s e l e c t e d .
By default, the U parameter or EDIT directives determine the decks to
be edited.
I = l f n 0 Ta k e d i r e c t i v e s f r o m n e x t r e c o r d o n l f n D . I N P U T i s t h e d e f a u l t .
The system reads no directives if you specify 1=0.
L = l f n 7 W r i t e l i s t o u t p u t o n l f n y. O U T P U T i s t h e d e f a u l t . L = 0 g e n e r a t e s n o
l i s t o u t p u t fi l e .

L0=cic2...cn Select list options c^. In an interactive job, the default
i s L 0 = E i f t h e l i s t o u t p u t fi l e i s a s s i g n e d t o t h e t e r m i n a l .
Otherwise, the default is L0=ECTMWD. You can specify a maximum of
seven list options Ci» .
Ci

S i g n i fi c a n c e

A Active

lines

in

deck.
/£^!\

C Directives other than INSERT, DELETE, RESTORE, MODNAME,
I, or D.
D
E
I

Deck

status.

Errors.
Inactive

lines

in

deck.

M M o d i fi c a t i o n s p e r f o r m e d .
S
T

Statistics.
Te x t

input.

W C o m p i l e fi l e d i r e c t i v e s .
Example: LO=EMS
N=lfn8 Write new program library on lfng. If you specify only the keyword
N, the system uses file NPL. If you omit this parameter or specify
N=0, the system generates no new program library.

NOTE
If a new program library is being generated,
the system performs an evict operation on
the file specified by the N=lfn8 parameter.

14-6

60459680

D

Pi

Description

N R D o n o t r e w i n d c o m p i l e fi l e . B y d e f a u l t , t h e s y s t e m r e w i n d s c o m p i l e
file at beginning and end of Modify run.
P = l f n Q Ta k e p r o g r a m l i b r a r y i n p u t f r o m I f n o . I f y o u d o n o t s p e c i f y a fi l e ,
the system takes the input from OPL. P=0 results in no input file for
the program library.
Q=processor Set LO=E and the A parameter at the beginning of the Modify run and
call the assembler or compiler specified by processor at the end of
the run. The system does not rewind the directives file or the list
output file. If you do not specify this parameter or specify Q=0, no
call is made to an assembler or compiler.
If you specify only the keyword Q, the system sets LO=E and the A
parameter at the beginning of the Modify run and calls the COMPASS
assembler at the end of the run. When this option is selected, the
CB=lfn2, CL=lfn4, CS=lfn5, and CG=lfn3 parameters are
meaningful. Compiler input is assumed to be COMPILE. All other
parameters are set by default. If CL is not specified with Q, lines
beginning with an asterisk in column 1 are not written to the compile
fi l e ( c o m p i l e fi l e d i r e c t i v e s a r e p r o c e s s e d ) .
S = l f n i Q W r i t e s o u r c e o u t p u t o n fi l e l f n i Q . I f y o u s p e c i f y o n l y t h e k e y w o r d
S, the file SOURCE is used. If you omit this parameter or specify
S=0, the system generates no source output file.
Do not specify this parameter if you specify the A, Q=processor, or
X=processor parameter.
U E d i t o n l y d e c k s f o r w h i c h t h e d i r e c t i v e s fi l e c o n t a i n s d e c k d i r e c t i v e s
and write them on the compile file, new program library, and source
fi l e ( i f t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e p a r a m e t e r s a r e s e l e c t e d ) . F, i f s p e c i fi e d ,
takes precedence. By default, decks to be edited are determined by
EDIT directives or by the F parameter.
rX

Process

the

same

a s d i rQ
e c=t ipv e
ro
s ci e
n psust o (rI ppa a
r armaemt eer )t earn, d lei sxt c oeupt pt u t t (hLa tp a r m
a moedt ei rf )y fi l e s a r e
rewound before processing.

Z Read the input directives following the terminator of the MODIFY
command; the input file is not read. This eliminates the need for a
separate input file for the directives when only a few directives are
needed. The first character following the command terminator is the
separator character for all directives on the command. Any display
code character that is not used in any of the directives, including a
space, can be used as the separator character. The directives can
extend to column 80 on the command. Continuation lines are not
permitted. If Z is omitted, the command does not contain the input
directives.

NOTE
Do not place another terminator after the
directives.
For a detailed description of the Modify utility, refer to the Modify Reference Manual.
60459680

D

14_7

I

OPLEDIT COMMAND
The OPLEDIT command removes modification decks and identifiers from a Modify-formatted
program library file. For output listing files not connected to your terminal, the OPLEDIT
command honors the page length and print density set for your job using the SET command and
the PL and PD symbolic names.
Format:
O P L E D I T, P i , p 2 , . . . , p n .
Pi

Description

I = l f n i U s e d i r e c t i v e i n p u t f r o m fi l e l n fi . T a k e I n p u t d i r e c t i v e s f r o m fi l e
lfni. INPUT is the default. 1=0 indicates that there are no input
directives.
P = l f n 2 U s e fi l e l f n 2 f o r t h e o l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y . U s e fi l e l f n 2 f o r t h e
o l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y. O P L i s t h e d e f a u l t . P = 0 i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e r e i s
no old program library.
N = l f n 3 W r i t e n e w p r o g r a m l i b r a r y o n fi l e l f n 3 . W r i t e t h e n e w p r o g r a m
library on lfn3. If you specify only the keyword N, NPL is used.
If you omit this parameter or specify N=0, the system writes no new
p r o g r a m l i b r a r y.
L=lfn4 List output on file lfn4» Place list output on file lfn4. OUTPUT
is the default. L=0 generates no list output.
M = l f n 5 W r i t e o u t p u t f r o m * P U L L M 0 D d i r e c t i v e s o n fi l e l f n s . I f t h i s o p t i o n
is omitted, M=M0DSETS is assumed.
L 0 = c i c 2 . . . c n S e l e c t s u p t o fi v e l i s t o p t i o n s C i .

fl

Description

E

Errors.

C

Input directives.

M

Modifications made.

D

Deck status.

S

Statistics.

I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d o r j u s t L O i s s p e c i fi e d , i t s e l e c t s a l l
l i s t o p t i o n s . I f t h e o u t p u t fi l e i s a s s i g n e d t o t h e t e r m i n a l i n a
interactive job and this parameter is omitted or just LO is specified,
list option E is selected.

/eS5S\

14-8

60459680

D

0W\

Pi
F

Modify

D

Debug;

Description
all

decks.

ignore

errors.

U

Generate *EDIT directives for all decks; meaningful only for *PULLMOD
executions.

U=0

Generate no *EDIT directives. If the U option is omitted, generate
*EDIT directives for common decks. This is meaningful only for
*PULLMOD execution.
R e a d t h e i n p u t d i r e c t i v e s t h a t f o l l o w t h e t e r m i n a t o r. T h e i n p u t fi l e
is not read. This eliminates the need to use a separate input file
for the directives when only a few directives are needed. The first
character following the command terminator is the separator
character. If Z is omitted, the command does not contain the input
directives.

| NOTE
Do not place another terminator after the
directives.
For a complete description of the OPLEDIT utility, refer to the Modify Reference Manual.

60459680 D

14-9 |

/<<^%y

PDU COMMAND
The PDU command compiles a panel definition file and stores the compiled panel in a user
library. Refer to the NOS Screen Formatting Reference Manual for information on panels.
Format:
P D U , I = p a n e l , L = l i s t i n g , C = c a p s u l e , L I B = l i b r a r y.
or
P D U , p a n e l , l i s t i n g , c a p s u l e , l i b r a r y.
The first format is the order-independent format for the parameters. The second is the
order-dependent format. Only the first parameter is required.
Parameter

Description

I = p a n e l S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e p a n e l d e fi n i t i o n fi l e . T h e fi l e m u s t b e
local. You must specify this parameter.
This file name is the same as the panel name and will be the record
name of the panel in the user library.
L = l i s t i n g S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e l i s t i n g fi l e . T h e d e f a u l t i s O U T P U T. I f
you specify L=0, no listings are generated.
C = c a p s u l e S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e c a p s u l e fi l e , t h e fi l e o n w h i c h t h e s y s t e m
writes the compiled panel. The default is CAPSULE. If you specify
C=0, no capsule is generated.
L I B = l i b r a r y S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e l o c a l fi l e t o r e c e i v e t h e c a p s u l e . T h e
default user library is PANELIB. If you specify LIB=0, the system
does not store the compiled panel in a user library.
The PDU command is an interactive procedure. Hence, you can get help information for the
command and its parameters and be prompted for parameters. If you enter
PDU?
the system gives you information about the command itself and prompts you for parameters.
If you enter
PDU,parameter?
the system gives you information about the specified parameter and prompts you for
parameters.

14-10

60459680

C

PROFILE COMMAND
The PROFILE command enables the master user to update and inquire about a project profile
fi l e f o r u s e r p r o fi l e c o n t r o l . O t h e r c a p a b i l i t i e s o f P R O F I L E ( a v a i l a b l e o n l y t o s y s t e m
origin jobs) are described in the NOS 2 Administration Handbook. For output listing files
not connected to your terminal, the PROFILE command honors the page length and print density
set for your job using the SET command and the PL and PD symbolic names.
Format:
PROFILE,Pl,p2,...,pn.
The following optional parameters can be specified in any order.
Meaning
I=lfn

File lfni contains input directives for an update (OP=U). If
omitted, file INPUT is assumed.

L=lfn2

File lfn2 receives output listings. If omitted, OUTPUT is assumed.

P=lfno

F i l e l f n 3 i s t h e p r o j e c t p r o fi l e fi l e . I f o m i t t e d , fi l e P R O F I L C i s
assumed.

CN=cn

Charge number inquiry. All project numbers valid for charge number cn
a r e w r i t t e n t o o u t p u t fi l e . Va l i d o n l y i f O P = I o p t i o n s p e c i fi e d .

PN=pn

Project number inquiry. The control values and all valid user names
for project number pn are written to the output file. The OP=I and
CN=cn options must also be specified to use the PN option.

CV

Convert option. Builds a source file from NOS 2.2 PROFILC.
Suppresses project prologue and epilogue directives. This parameter
is only meaningful with OP=S.

OP=opt

PROFILE processing option. One of the following:
opt

Description

L L i s t s p o r t i o n s o f t h e p r o fi l e fi l e a s s p e c i fi e d b y t h e
LO=op parameter.
U U p d a t e s t h e p r o j e c t p r o fi l e fi l e w i t h d i r e c t i v e s s u p p l i e d
b y t h e i n p u t fi l e . U i s t h e d e f a u l t v a l u e f o r t h e m a s t e r
user if the OP option is omitted.
T Interactive update. Processing is the same as OP=U, but
preliminary instructions are suppressed.
I Inquire option. Output is dependent upon the CN or PN=pn
parameter specified.
S S p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e p r o fi l e fi l e i s t o b e w r i t t e n i n s o u r c e
format (directive images) and placed on the source file
(specified by S=source parameter). The source file can be
used as the input for a later create or update session.

60459680 H

14-11

Pl

Meaning

L O = o p P R O F I L E l i s t o p t i o n ( O P = L m u s t b e s p e c i fi e d ) . O n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
QP

Description

F M F u l l l i s t o f e v e r y t h i n g a c c e s s i b l e o n t h e p r o fi l e fi l e b y
the master user. This is the default for a nonsystem
origin job if the LO=op parameter is omitted.

CM

Charge number list of all charge numbers accessible on the
p r o fi l e fi l e b y t h e m a s t e r u s e r.

PM

Project number list of all project numbers accessible on
the profile file by the master user.

Directives are available to the master user as input to PROFILE to add or update information
concerning each charge number. The input file for a PROFILE update (OP=U) is divided into
groups of entries that each begin with a charge number directive. Each directive following
a particular charge number entry applies only to that charge number, until another charge
number entry occurs.
Each line of the input file can contain one or more directives (up to 72 characters per
line) in the following format.
diri,dir2

dim

z^^t\

Each directive is separated by a delimiter which can be any special character (display code
greater than 448) exCept the following:
/

+

-

*

:

An end-of-line or end-of-card also delimits directives. The following directives are
available to the master user for PROFILE input.
dlri

Description

APN=pn Adds or activates project number pn.
AUN=un Adds user names un (must be preceded by PN directive).
/ c n S p e c i fi e s t h e c h a r g e n u m b e r c n t o w h i c h t h e f o l l o w i n g d i r e c t i v e s
apply. If this form of charge number specification is used (refer to
CN=cn directive), it must begin in column 1 with the slant (/).
CN=cn Same as /cn except that it can begin in any column.
DPN=pn Deactivates project number pn. This directive does not delete the
specified project number entry but sets its status such that it cannot
be specified by users.
DUN=un

Deletes user name un from the list of those who may access the project
number (must be preceded by PN directive).

E F N = f n S p e c i fi e s t h e i n d i r e c t a c c e s s p e r m a n e n t fi l e t h a t c o n t a i n s t h e
epilogue to be associated with the specified project. The epilogue
can be a procedure or a binary program. A null entry, which is the
default, clears the project epilogue.

14-12

60459680

C

dir

Description

EPW=pw

Specifies the file password associated with the project epilogue
fi l e . A n u l l e n t r y, w h i c h i s t h e d e f a u l t , i n d i c a t e s t h a t n o p a s s w o r d
i s a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e fi l e .

EUN=un

Specifies the user who owns the project epilogue file. A null entry,
which is the default, indicates that the owner of the project epilogue
file is the user on whose behalf the epilogue is to run.

ISV=x

Sets x as the maximum SRU accumulation for any job using the charge
number and project number specified by preceding CN and PN directives.

PCR=option

Defines the conditions under which the system sets a charge-required
state after the project prologue executes. You can specify one of the
following values:
Option

Description

U S e t a c h a r g e - r e q u i r e d s t a t e u n c o n d i t i o n a l l y.
A Sets a charge-required state only if the project
prologue aborts.
null Does not set a charge-required state. This is the
default.
PEX=yymmdd,

Specifies expiration date for project number of preceding PN
directive. If PEX=0 is entered, the project number is not limited by
an expiration date.

PFN=fn

Specifies the indirect access permanent file that contains the
prologue to be associated with the specified project. The prologue
can be a procedure or a binary program. A null entry, which is the
default, clears the project prologue.

PN=pn

Project number for which the following directives (until the next PN
d i r e c t i v e ) a p p l y.

PPW=pw

Specifies the file password associated with the project prologue
fi l e . A n u l l e n t r y, w h i c h i s t h e d e f a u l t , i n d i c a t e s t h a t n o p a s s w o r d
i s a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e fi l e .

PUN=un

Specifies the user who owns the project prologue file. A null entry,
which is the default, indicates that the owner of the project prologue
file is the user on whose behalf the prologue is to run.

SMA=acc

Sets the current number of accumulated SRUs the project number has
used (PN directive required). This accumulator is updated at the end
of a job or terminal session and each time a CHARGE command is
entered. When the SMA value surpasses the SML value, the project is
not available to users until either the limit or accumulator is
r e s p e c i fi e d .

SML=lim

Specifies the maximum number of accumulated SRUs the project (PN
directive) may use. SML=0 implies no restriction.

/f|P^\

60459680 C

14-13

diri

Description

TI=ti Specifies the time of day before which the project number specified by
the PN directive cannot be used. The time is specified in 24-hour
clock notation. For example, a ti specification of 1315 indicates the
project number cannot be used before 1:15 in the afternoon.
TO=to Specifies the time of day after which the project number specified by
the PN directive cannot be used. The time is specified in 24-hour
clock notation. For example, a to specification of 1315 indicates
that the project number cannot be used after 1:15 in the afternoon.

UPDATE COMMAND
The UPDATE command creates, edits, or copies an Update-formatted program library file. For
complete information on Update directives and processing, refer to the Update Reference
Manual.
Format:
UPDATE,Pl,p2,...,pn.
The parameters are optional and can be specified in any order.
For file-specifying parameters (those associated with the keywords C, G, I, K, N, 0, S, or .s^h
T), you can append either the digit 6 or 8 (but not both) to the keyword. Each
file-specifying parameter has its own default for the character code set of the file (refer
to Character Sets in appendix A). The digit 6 or 8 overrides this default. The digit 6
directs the system to represent the file in the 6-bit display code set. The digit 8 directs
the system to represent the file in the 7-bit ASCII code set.t However, the system uses the
ASCII code set only if the digit 8 is appended to the keyword and if the input file is also
represented in the 7-bit ASCII code set. For example, C8=FILE directs the system to write
the decks on the compile file FILE in the ASCII code set.
Pi

Description

A Copies the old sequential access program library to a new random
access program library.
B Copies the old random access program library to a new sequential
access program library.
C=lfni Specifies the compile file. Unless otherwise specified, the compile
file has the same character code set as the old program library.
C=PUNCH implies the D and 8 parameters. C=0 implies no compile file.
If you omit this parameter or specify the keyword only, COMPILE
becomes the compile file. If you specify the K=lfnj parameter, the
C=lfni parameter is ignored.

tThe digit 8 directs the system to represent the file in the 6/12-bit display code set if
the job is interactive and the file is an input or output file.

14-14

60459680

C

Pi

Description

D S e t s t h e w i d t h o f t h e c o m p i l e fi l e t o 8 0 c h a r a c t e r s . T h e d e f a u l t i s
72.
E E d i t s t h e o l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y. To c o m p l e t e l y e d i t t h e l i b r a r y,
specify the E parameter on two UPDATE commands. The first occurrence
of the E parameter causes the system to rearrange the directory to
reflect the actual order of the decks on the library and to remove
previously purged identifiers. The second occurrence of the E
parameter causes the system to remove the identifiers that exist only
as directory entries.
F

S p e c i fi e s

full

Update

mode.

G = l f n 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e o u t p u t fi l e f o r t h e P U L L M O D d i r e c t i v e . U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e
specified, the character code set of lfn2 is the same as that of the
old program library. If you do not specify lfn2^ the output from
the PULLMOD directive is appended to the source file (specified by the
S=lfn8 parameter).
H = n S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r a 6 3 - o r 6 4 - c h a r a c t e r c h a r a c t e r s e t i s t o b e u s e d i n
the Update run.
n
/g^K

Description

3

A

63-character

character

set.

4

A

64-character

character

set.

o m i t t e d C h a r a c t e r s e t t h a t w a s u s e d i n t h e o l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y.
I = l f n 3 S p e c i fi e s t h e p r i m a r y i n p u t fi l e . T h e d e f a u l t i s I N P U T. T h e d e f a u l t
character code set is 6/12-bit ASCII code if INPUT is associated with
the terminal. Otherwise, it is display code.

r

K = l f n i S p e c i fi e s t h e c o m p i l e fi l e a n d s p e c i fi e s t h a t t h e d e c k s a r e w r i t t e n t o
that file in their order of appearance in the COMPILE directives. The
default is file COMPILE. The default character code set is 6-bit
display code.

/gP^N

60459680

C

!4_15

/^s^s^v

Pi

Description

L = c l c 2 . . . c n S p e c i fi e s o n e o r m o r e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g l i s t o p t i o n s .
Ci

List

Options

A L i s t s d e c k n a m e s a n d c o r r e c t i o n s e t i d e n t i fi e r s , C O M D E C K
directives, definitions, and decks written on the compile
fi l e .
F Uses all list options except 0.
0 Suppresses all listing.
1

Lists

lines

in

error.

2 Lists active Update directives.
3 Notes on each line that changed status during current
execution.
4

Lists

text

lines.

5 L i s t s a c t i v e c o m p i l e fi l e d i r e c t i v e s .
6 Lists active and inactive lines.
7 Lists all active lines.
8 Lists all inactive lines.
9 Lists correction history of all lines selected by list
options 5, 7, and 8.
The default depends on the nature of the Update processing. For a
creation run, the default is options A, 1, and 2. For a correction
run, the default is A, 1, 2, 3, and 4. For a copy run, the default is
A and 1.
M = l f n 4 M e r g e s l f n 4 a n d t h e o l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y. I f y o u s p e c i f y o n l y t h e
keyword M, the system merges the file MERGE and the old program
library. The two libraries must have the same character code set. If
the parameter is omitted, no merging occurs.
N = l f n 5 S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w p r o g r a m l i b r a r y. I f y o u d o s p e c i f y a n e w p r o g r a m
library on a correction run, no new program library is generated.
Otherwise, the default is the file NEWPL. The default character code
of the new program library is the same as that of the old program
library unless the primary input file is in 7-bit ASCII code and the
old program library is in 6-bit display code. In this case, the
default is the 7-bit ASCII code set.

14-16

60459680

C

Pi

Description

0 = l f n 6 S p e c i fi e s t h e o u t p u t fi l e . T h e d e f a u l t i s O U T P U T . T h e
default character code is the same as that of the old program
l i b r a r y.
P = l f n 7 / s 1 / s 2 / . . . / s 7 S pthe
e c i keyword
fi e s fi l e Pl f nIs
7 specified,
a s t h e o lfile
d p OLDPL
r o g r a m isl i bassumed.
r a r y. I f jIfu s t
s l / s 2 / . . . / s 7 i s s p e c i fi e d , s e c o n d a r y o l d p r o g r a m
l i b r a r i e s w i l l r e s i d e o n fi l e s s i , s 2 s 7 .
Q

Processes

only

decks

on

COMPILE

directives

(quick

mode).

R = c l c 2 . . . c 4 R e w i n d s p e c i fi e d fi l e s b e f o r e a n d a f t e r t h e U p d a t e r u n .
fi
C
N

Files
Compile
New

fi l e .

program

l i b r a r y.

P O l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y a n d m e r g e l i b r a r y.
S S o u r c e a n d P U L L M O D fi l e s .
I f C i i s o m i t t e d , n o fi l e s a r e r e w o u n d . I f
R=clc2...c4 is omitted, the old program library, new
program library, compile file, source file, and PULLMOD file
are rewound.
S = l f n 8 S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e s o u r c e fi l e . I f y o u s p e c i f y t h e
keyword only, the file SOURCE becomes the source file. If you
omit the parameter, the system does not write a source file
unless you specify the T=lfn8 parameter. The default
character code set of the source file is the same as that of
the old program library.
rT=lfn8

Functions

the

same

a excludes
s
t h e common
S=lfn8
decks
p afrom
rame
the
t e rsource
,
e x file.
c e p This
t
t hparameter
at
it
takes precedence over the S=lfn8 parameter.

U

S p e c i fi e s

that

W

The

program library is written in sequential access
format. If W is omitted, the new program library is written
in random access format unless the file is on magnetic tape.

X

Writes

the

8

Writes

compile

60459680

new

Update processing is
n o r m a l l y f a t a l e r r o r s o c c u r.

to

continue

even

c o m p i l e fi l e i n c o m p r e s s e d f o r m a t . I f
omitted, the compile file is not compressed.

X

if

is

fi l e o u t p u t a s 8 0 - c h a r a c t e r l i n e i m a g e s . I f 8
i s o m i t t e d , t h e c o m p i l e fi l e i s w r i t t e n a s 9 0 - c h a r a c t e r l i n e
images.

C

14_17

Pi

Description

* = c h a r T h e m a s t e r c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r ( fi r s t c h a r a c t e r o f e a c h d i r e c t i v e ) f o r
this Update run is char, which can be any character having a 6-bit
display code octal value in the range 01 through 54 except for 51 and
52 (the open and close parentheses). If this option is omitted, the
master control character is *.
/ = c h a r T h e c o m m e n t c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r t h i s U p d a t e r u n i s c h a r, w h i c h c a n
be A through Z, 0 through 9, or + -*/$=. The character should not be
changed to one of the abbreviated forms of the directives unless
NOABBREV is in effect. If this option is omitted, the comment control
character is a slant bar.

XEDIT COMMAND
The XEDIT command calls the text editor, XEDIT. For a complete description of XEDIT
parameters and directives, refer to the XEDIT Reference Manual.
NOTE
When XEDIT encounters lines longer than 150
characters it truncates those lines without
warning; therefore, you should use caution
when calling XEDIT to edit a file that may
contain lines longer than 150 characters or
when editing an ASCII file in NORMAL mode.
Format:
X E D I T, l f n i » P l » P 2 » • • • , P n * d i r e c t i v e s
All parameters are optional. The following are brief parameter descriptions.
Parameter

lfm

Description
Use lfni as ttie name °f the file to be edited or created. If lfni
is omitted (indicated by two separators before other parameters), the
p r i m a r y fi l e i s e d i t e d .

Pi

Description

AS

Edit lfni in ASCII interactive mode. After the
XEDIT job step, processing returns to the original
mode.

B

Process the job as a batch origin job.

C

C r e a t e a n e w fi l e l f ^ .

FR

Ta k e t h e fi r s t e d i t i n g d i r e c t i v e f r o m t h e fi r s t l i n e
of lfn^.

y^ffiiSv

14-18

60459680 D

Parameter

Description
Pi

Description

I = l f n 2 Ta k e e d i t i n g d i r e c t i v e s f r o m l f n 2 . B y d e f a u l t ,
d i r e c t i v e s a r e t a k e n f r o m fi l e I N P U T. I f y o u s p e c i f y
1=0, the system takes all directives from the trailing
delimited directive sequence. (If the FR parameter is
also specified, the system processes the delimited
directive sequence after processing directives from
t h e fi r s t l i n e o f l f n i . )
L = l f n 3 P u t a l l X E D I T o u t p u t o n t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e . O U T P U T i s
the default. If you specify L=0, the system
suppresses all output.
N H S u p p r e s s p r i n t i n g o f t h e X E D I T h e a d e r.
P R e t r i e v e a n d e d i t p e r m a n e n t fi l e l f n i . D i r e c t
access files are attached in write mode. If P is
o m i t t e d , t h e fi l e l f n i I s a s s u m e d t o b e a l o c a l fi l e .

/0^\

d i r e c t i v e s P r o c e s s t h e d i r e c t i v e s t h a t f o l l o w t h e c o m m a n d t e r m i n a t o r. T h e fi r s t
character that follows the terminator delimits the directives. The
value directives has the following form (the semicolon serves as the
delimiter):
;directivei;directive2;...; directiven
Do not place a terminator after the last directive.

60459680

D

i4_19

I

/?s?^%

j0^\

LIBRARY MAINTENANCE

15

A l i b r a r y i s a fi l e c o n t a i n i n g r e c o r d s t h a t a r e a c c e s s e d i n d i v i d u a l l y. T h i s s e c t i o n
describes the creation and maintenance of user libraries. User libraries are not to be
confused with program libraries. User libraries are created using the LIBGEN, ULIB, PDU, or
TDU commands. A user library can be named in an LDSET or a LIBRARY command to establish a
local or global library set. Program libraries are source code libraries, created and
edited using either the MODIFY utility or the UPDATE utility.

/f*Qb*\

This section describes file access methods, library record types, and the following commands
and their functions.
Command

jg^3\

Function

CATALOG

Describes the records on a file.

COPYL and COPYLM

Copies an old file to a new file, updating the records from a
r e p l a c e m e n t fi l e .

GTR

Appends records selected from one file to another file.

ITEMIZE

Describes the records on a file.

LIBEDIT

Generates a file containing records from one or more other
files. The records may be of several types.

LIBGEN

Generates a user library; that is, a library of relocatable,
capsule, absolute, CP overlay, or procedure file records that can
be accessed by CYBER Loader.

LIBRARY

S p e c i fi e s a g l o b a l l i b r a r y s e t f o r t h e j o b .

ULIB

Creates or modifies a local copy of a user library.

VFYLIB

Compares the records in two files and lists their differences.

With the exception of CATALOG and ITEMIZE, we do not recommend using these commands on files
structured by CYBER Record Manager (CRM). Because of certain incompatibilities with NOS
file structures, the output from these commands may not accurately reflect the CRM file
structure.

LIBRARY FILE ACCESS METHODS
The methods used to access records within NOS files are sequential access and random access.
To access a record sequentially, NOS rewinds the file to BOI and then reads records until it
finds the requested one. To replace, insert, or delete records from a sequential access
file, NOS must rewrite the entire file. (Records can be appended at EOI without rewriting
t h e fi l e . )

60459680 E

15-1

RELATIVE
PRU
ADDRESS
1

record.

a
recordg
14
1/
23

DIRECTORY CONTENTS
NAME LENGTH ADDRESS
record?
directory

record.
records

17

record?

Figure 15-1. Random Access File Structure

To access a record randomly, the file must be on mass storage and must have a directory
containing the address of each record (figure 15-1). The GTR, LIBGEN, and LIBEDIT commands
can generate random access directories. Records within a file can then be replaced,
i n s e r t e d , o r d e l e t e d b y r e w r i t i n g t h e d i r e c t o r y i n s t e a d o f r e w r i t i n g t h e e n t i r e fi l e .
Records within a random access file can also be accessed sequentially.

LIBRARY RECORD TYPES
NOS determines the type and the name of a record from information contained within the
record. If the record begins with a prefix table, the record name (if any) is obtained from
that table and the type of the record is determined from the first word following the prefix
table. Otherwise, the first word of the record determines the type and name (if any) of the
record.
Prefix tables exist, unless they have been specifically suppressed, for:
• Assembled or compiled programs.
• System text overlays.
• User library header records and directory records.
• Modify program library decks, common decks, or directory records.
The prefix table consists of a header word with an octal table type identifier followed by
varying amounts of control information.
T h e p r e fi x t a b l e i s i d e n t i fi e d b y o c t a l d i g i t s 7 7 0 0 i n b i t s 5 9 t h r o u g h 4 8 o f i t s fi r s t w o r d ;
consequently, it is often referred to as a 77 or 7700 table. Information in the prefix
table, which originates with the assembler, compiler, or other program that creates the
table, can specify items such as the date created and the system on which the job was
processed (refer to CYBER Loader Version 1 Reference Manual).
15-2

60459680 D

If a prefix table is not present, the first word in a record is examined. If a record meets
the criteria for a given type of record, the utilities identify it as such. For instance, a
load file beginning with a Job command may be identified as type TEXT, depending on the
particular characters in the Job command.
Although some of the records may contain display coded data (loader directives, for
instance, are coded), they are considered binary records.
The following record types can be specified on the COPYX, GTR, and LIBEDIT commands and are
recognized by the CATALOG and VFYLIB commands. You determine the record types contained in
a file by issuing a CATALOG command naming the file. VFYLIB lists the differences between
the record types of two files. LIBGEN generates a user library from relocatable (REL)
capsule (CAP), absolute (ABS), CP overlay (OVL), or procedure file (PROC) records.
Mnemonic

Meaning

A B S M u l t i p l e e n t r y p o i n t o v e r l a y.
CAP CYBER Loader capsule.
O P L O l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y d e c k c r e a t e d b y M o d i f y.
OPLC Old program library common deck created by Modify or LIBEDIT.
O P L D O l d p r o g r a m l i b r a r y d i r e c t o r y c r e a t e d b y M o d i f y o r L I B E D I T.
O V L C e n t r a l p r o c e s s o r o v e r l a y.
PP Peripheral processor program.
PPU Peripheral processor unit program.
PROC

Procedure

fi l e .

REL Relocatable central processor program.
TEXT Unrecognizable as a program.
U L I B U s e r l i b r a r y d i r e c t o r y.
The following record types are recognized by COPYL, COPYLM, and ITEMIZE commands. Record
types ACF, OPLD, UCF, ULIB, and UPLx are recognized by the ITEMIZE command but are not
recognized by COPYL or COPYLM.
Mnemonic

Meaning

ABS

M u l t i p l e e n t r y p o i n t o v e r l a y.

ACF

Modify compressed compile file. It has no record name. This record type
is determined by a nonzero value in bits 17 through 0 in the second word of
the 77 table.

CAP

CYBER Loader capsule.

OPL

Old program library deck created by Modify.

OPLC

Old program library common deck created by Modify.

/#^N
60459680 H

15-3

/^^\

Mnemonic

Meaning

OPLD

Old program library directory created by Modify or LIBEDIT,

OVCAP

Overlay capsule.

OVL

Central processor overlay.

PROC

P r o c e d u r e fi l e .

REL

Relocatable user program.

TEXT

Unrecognizable as a program.

UCF

Update compressed compile file. It has no record name,
is determined by a 77 table with a zero word count.

ULIB

U s e r l i b r a r y d i r e c t o r y.

UPLx

Update sequential program library with x master control character. It has
no record name. This record type is determined by no 77 table and the
characters CHECK in bits 59 through 30; control characters are obtained
from bits 5 through 0.

6PP

Peripheral processor program.

7PP

Peripheral processor program.

This record type

Appendix G in Volume 4, Program Interface, contains the formats of PP (6PP), OPL, OPLD,
ULIB, and TEXT records. (The OPLC record format is identical to that of the OPL record.)
The Modify Reference Manual describes how to create ACF, OPL, OPLC, and OPLD records. The
CYBER Loader Reference Manual contains the formats of ABS, CAP, OVCAP, OVL, PP, and REL
records. The CYBER Loader Instant contains the PPU (7PP) record format. The Update
Reference Manual contains the formats of UCF and UPLx records. Section 4 describes the
creation of procedures (PROC).

15-4

60459680 F

CATALOG COMMAND
The CATALOG command lists information about each record in a file assigned to the job. The
record types recognized by CATALOG are listed in Library Record Types in this section.
NOTE
CATALOG produces unpredictable results when
attempting to catalog an S, L, or F format
tape. Use the COPY command to convert the
S, L, or F format tape to a mass storage
file or to an I or SI binary format tape
b e f o r e a t t e m p t i n g t o c a t a l o g t h e fi l e .
Format:
CATALOG,lfn,p1>p2^#^pn^
Parameter

Description

l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e t o b e c a t a l o g e d . T h e d e f a u l t i s F I L E .
Pi Pi can be any of the following:
Pi

Description

N = n C a t a l o g s n fi l e s . I f n i s 0 , t h e s y s t e m c a t a l o g s t h e
fi l e u n t i l a n e m p t y fi l e i s e n c o u n t e r e d ( t w o c o n s e c u t i v e
EOFs). If you specify only the keyword N, the system
catalogs until it encounters the EOI. The default is
N=l.
L=fname Specifies the name of the output file; if L=fname is
omitted, CATALOG assumes L=0UTPUT.
T Lists the entire text record if the record name begins
with any of the following characters:

0**»\

APRD
CMRD
EQPD

IPRD
LIBD

If you omit T, the system does not list the contents of
the text record. If the text record name begins with
OVERLAY, the system always lists the first line of the
record.
U L i s t s a l l r e c o r d s w i t h i n a u s e r l i b r a r y . I f fi l e l f n i s
a user library and you omit U, CATALOG lists only the
ULIB record.
D S u p p r e s s e s t h e c o m m e n t s fi e l d ; s u p p r e s s e s a l l p a g e
h e a d i n g s a f t e r t h e i n i t i a l p a g e h e a d i n g f o r e a c h fi l e .

CS

Suppresses character set indicator (63 or 64) for OPL
and OPLC records.
Rewinds lfn before and after cataloging; if R is
omitted, lfn is not rewound.

60459680 C

15-5

The listing for each file of a multifile file begins on a new page with a page heading for
that file. If the D option has been specified, the page heading appears only once, at the
beginning of the file. For CATALOG listing files not connected to a terminal, you can
control the print density and page length using the SET command and the PL and PD symbolic
names. The information listed under each heading is as follows:
Information

Heading
REC

Record number (zero-length records and EOF marks are counted).

NAME

Record name [the contents of the name field from the second word of the
p r e fi x ( 7 7 ) t a b l e , i f p r e s e n t ; o t h e r w i s e , t h e fi r s t s e v e n c h a r a c t e r s o f
the record]. For ABS and REL records, the entry points are listed
beneath the record name.

TYPE

Record type (refer to Library Record Types in this section).

LENGTH

Record length in words, printed as an octal number. For TEXT records,
this includes the prefix table length. For PROC records, this contains
t h e a c t u a l r e c o r d l e n g t h . F o r o t h e r r e c o r d t y p e s , t h e p r e fi x t a b l e
length is not included.

CKSUM

A checksum (that is, a value used to verify that the contents of a
record were copied correctly). Except for TEXT records, the checksum
does not verify the contents of the prefix table.

DATE

Record creation date (taken from the third word of the prefix table, if
present).

COMMENTS Comments are taken from the comments field of the prefix table. A zero
byte or a COPYRIGHT comment in the comments field of the table
terminates the listing. This field is not shown when CATALOG Output is
a s s i g n e d t o a t e r m i n a l fi l e . )
CATALOG lists additional information depending on the record type. Entry points are listed
for REL and ABS records. The character set used, correction identifiers, and their YANK
status (refer to the Modify Reference Manual) are listed for OPL and OPLC records.
NOTE
When printing output for text files, CATALOG
u s e s t h e fi r s t s e v e n c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e fi r s t
word of the record as the record name.
CATALOG assumes that the record is in 6-bit
display code. Therefore, if you attempt to
display CATALOG output for a record in 6/12
display code while your terminal is in ASCII
mode, the output display may be garbled. To
avoid this problem, you should set your
terminal to NORMAL mode before listing
CATALOG output.
A ULIB record suppresses listing of the other records in the user library unless the U
parameter is specified on the command.
If an OPLD record in the user library is not encountered before an EOF or EOI within the
cataloged file, the following message is output before the *EOF* or *EOI* line.
*OPLD MISSING*
15-6

60459680 E

When a zero-length record is encountered, the length since the last zero-length record is
given. If an EOR does not precede an EOF or EOI within the cataloged file, the following
message is output before the *EOF* or *EOI* line.
*EOR MISSING*
The ITEMIZE command is similar to the CATALOG command, but ITEMIZE recognizes additional
record types (refer to Library Record Types, earlier in this section).
Example:
Compilation of the FORTRAN program SUBROUT and its subroutines SUBl, SUB2, and SUB3 wrote
relocatable object code on file LGO. The following is a catalog of file LGO (refer to the
h e a d i n g d e fi n i t i o n s g i v e n e a r l i e r ) .

:c
1
2

3

CATALOG OF LGO
NAME
TYPE
SUBROUT
SUBROUT
A
A
B

FILE
LENGTH

CKSUM

REL

44

6215

yy/mm/dd

REL

41

7424

yy/mm/dd

REL

41

0465

yy/mm/dd

REL

41

5525

yy/mm/dd

Q

4

C
C

* EOF *

DATE

SUM =

207

COPYL AND COPYLM COMMANDS
The COPYL and COPYLM commands copy an old file to a new file, substituting records from a
replacement file for the matching records on the old file. Records on the replacement file
which do not match records on the old file are either ignored or appended to the new file
/ # ^ v a c c o r d i n g t o y o u r p a r a m e t e r s p e c i fi c a t i o n s . R e c o r d s a r e c o n s i d e r e d t o m a t c h i f t h e y h a v e
' t h e s a m e t y p e a n d s a m e n a m e . H o w e v e r, y o u m a y s p e c i f y t h a t t h e r e c o r d t y p e b e i g n o r e d .
COPYL and COPYLM are commonly used to maintain files of procedures or relocatable records.
COPYL and COPYLM differ only in the handling of multiple occurrences of a record on the old
file. COPYL uses each record on the replacement file only once, replacing the first
matching record from the old file. COPYLM uses the first matching record encountered on the
replacement file to replace each matching record from the old file. COPYL can be used to
replace multiple occurrences of the same record if multiple occurrences of the record are in
t h e r e p l a c e m e n t fi l e .
The old file and the replacement file must reside on mass storage or an I or SI format
tape. Only a single file terminated by an end-of-file marker is processed by a single call
to COPYL or COPYLM unless you request processing to the end-of-information by using the E
processing option. When working with multifile files, you must be sure to position the
m u l t i fi l e fi l e t o t h e fi l e t h a t i s t o b e p r o c e s s e d .
The order of the records on the replacement file is not significant. The system copies the
records to the new file in the same order as they are on the old file.

60459680 D

15-7

COPYL and COPYLM issue dayfile messages during processing; no other printed output is
produced. The dayfile messages list which replacement records were copied and which
replacement records were not copied to the new file.
COPYL and COPYLM replace only the types of records listed in Library Record Types, earlier
in this section. Any record on the old file that is not recognized as one of the listed
types is copied to the new file without further processing. Any replacement file record
type that is not listed in Library Record Type, is ignored without comment.
Format:
C O P Y L , o l d l f n , r e p l f n , n e w l f n , l a s t , fl a g .

Single replacement,

or
C O P Y L M , o l d l f n , r e p l f n , n e w l f n , l a s t , fl a g .

Multiple replacement.

All parameters are optional and order-dependent. You denote an omitted parameter by
consecutive commas.
Parameter

Description

oldlfn

File name of the old file; default name is OLD.

replfn

File name of the replacement file; default name is LGO.

newlfn

File name of the updated file; default name is NEW.

last

Name of the last record on oldlfn to be processed. If last is not
specified, all records on oldlfn are processed from its current
position to the next EOF (or EOI if the E processing option is used).

fl a g

Processing options.
fl a g
R

**^s\

Description
Rewind oldlfn and newlfn files before processing, (The
replfn file is always rewound before and after
processing, oldlfn and newlfn are not necessarily rewound
t o b e g l n n i n g - o f - i n f o r m a t i o n i n m u l t i fi l e fi l e s . R e f e r t o
explanation below.)
Append to
match any
records on
records on
issued.

the end of newlfn all replfn records that do not
records on the oldlfn. If A is not selected,
the replacement file that do not match any
the oldlfn are ignored and a dayfile message is

Check for matching name of record, but omit check for
matching type of record. If T is not selected, records
match only if both the type and name of the records are
the same.
Process oldlfn until the end-of-information.
These options can be specified by combining one or more letters in any
order, such as TRA, AR, ERTA, or TR.
COPYL and COPYLM check only the first four flag options; if more than
four are specified, the remaining characters are ignored.
15-8

60459680 C

The R option affects file positioning of the old and new files before processing. If R is
s p e c i fi e d , t h e o l d a n d n e w fi l e s a r e r e w o u n d b e f o r e p r o c e s s i n g . I n a m u l t i fi l e fi l e , i f
there is one or more end-of-file markers between the current position of the file and the
b e g i n n i n g - o f - i n f o r m a t i o n , t h e R option rewinds the file to the first preceding EOF. In the
absence of R, you are responsible for positioning the oldlfn and newlfn files. The R option
does not affect the file of replacement records, since the current file of the replacement
file always is rewound to the beginning-of-information before and after processing.
The E option causes the old file to be processed to the end-of-information. Each
end-of-file encountered on the old file causes a matching end-of-file to be written on the
new file. Records that are added to the new file as a result of combining the A and E
options are appended with an end-of-file prior to the end-of-information. In this case,
such appended records will follow an end-of-file if both end-of-file and end-of-information
existed at the end of the old file.
P r o c e s s i n g s t o p s a f t e r a n e n d -of-file, end-of-record, or end-of-information is reached,
depending on the structure of the old file and the processing options selected. If
processing stopped because end-of-file or end-of-record was reached, the old file is
positioned after that EOF or EOR. If processing stopped because end-of-information was
r e a c h e d , t h e o l d fi l e i s p o s i t i o n e d j u s t p r i o r t o t h e e n d - o f - i n f o r m a t i o n .
COPYL and COPYLM add an end-of-file to the new file even if no end-of-file is encountered on
t h e o l d fi l e . N o f u r t h e r p o s i t i o n i n g o f t h e n e w fi l e t a k e s p l a c e .

y ^ N

60459680

C

15_9

y*3V

Example:
The following COPYL command updates OLDFILE with replacement records from REPFILE and writes
them on NEWFILE. The A option appends to the end of NEWFILE any records in REPFILE that do
not match a record on OLDFILE.
COPYL,OLDFILE,REPFILE,NEWFILE„A.

The following dayfile segment shows that COPYL updated the record named B and appended the
record named C.
08.53.23.COPYL,OLDFILE,REPFILE,NEWFILE„A.
08.53.24. UPDATED — PROC / B
08.53.24.APPENDED — PROC / C
08.53.24. COPYL COMPLETE.

y^H^ftv

The ITEMIZE command show the record information for all records in OLDFILE, REPFILE, and
NEWFILE.
/itemize/) Id fi Le
REC
1
2
3

ITEMIZE OF OLDFILE
NAME
TYPE
A
B

FILE
LENGTH

PROC
PROC

CKSUM

DATE

3310
5306

(00)

SUM »

10

* EOI *

SUM =

10

ITEMIZE COMPLETE.
/ i t e m i z e ,repfi Le
REC
1
2

ITEMIZE OF REPFILE
TYPE
NAME
B
PROC
C
PROC
* EOI *

FILE
LENGTH
4
4

SUM =

CKSUM

DATE

CKSUM

DATE

10

ITEMIZE COMPLETE.

/itemize,newfi Le
ITEMIZE OF NEWFILE
REC

NAME

FILE
LENGTH

TYPE
PROC
PROC

3310
1535
SUM =

10

PROC
* EOF *

7304
SUM =

14

ITEMIZE COMPLETE.

15-10

60459680 C

GTR COMMAND
The GTR command extracts records selected from one file and writes them on another file.
The records are selected according to directives specifying their type and name. (Refer to
Library Record Types in this section for the list of valid record types.) Records can be
a c c e s s e d r a n d o m l y ( d e f a u l t i f a d i r e c t o r y e x i s t s ) o r s e q u e n t i a l l y. I f s p e c i fi e d , a r a n d o m
access directory is appended to the changed file. The system writes an EOF after the
d i r e c t o r y.
Format:
GTR,lfni,lfn2,d,NR,S,NA.directive1,directive2,...,directiven
NOTE
The parameters must be in the order shown.
GTR identifies its parameters by their
position, not by keywords. An omitted
parameter is denoted by consecutive commas.
Do not place blanks between the terminator
(right parenthesis or period) and
directivei. Also, do not place a
terminator after directiven.

Parameter

^p*\

Description

lfm

File which is searched for the requested records; if lfni is
omitted, file OLD is assumed, lfni *s always rewound before the GTR
operation.

lfn-

File on which the selected records are written; if lfn2 is omitted,
file LGO is assumed. For disk files, GTR always positions lfn2 at
EOI before copying the selected records. GTR only appends records to
tape files when you specify the NR parameter. Otherwise, GTR starts
w r i t i n g o n t a p e fi l e s a t t h e i r B O I .
Random access directory parameter. If d is specified, lfn2 must be
a mass storage file. GTR cannot append records after a directory.
If lfni nas a random access directory and if sequential access (the
S parameter) is not specified, the lfn2 directory record is given
the same name as the lfni directory record. Otherwise, the lfn2
directory record is named lfn2.
d^

Description

omitted No new random access directory (OPLD) is added to
lfn . If the directives specify the user2library
record type (ULIB), the first record of the user
library (ULIB) is not copied to lfn2. The second
and subsequent records are copied, and the last record
(OPLD) is copied without alteration. The system does
not write an EOF at the end of the file.

60459680 F

15-11

Parameter

Description
_d_

Description

U No new random access directory (OPLD) is added to
lfn . If the directives specify the user2library
record type (ULIB), the first record of the user
library (ULIB) is copied without alteration to lfn2
along with the remainder of the library, including the
OPLD. The system does not write an EOF at the end of
t h e fi l e .
D or other Writes a new random access directory (OPLD) at the end
of lfn2. If the directives specify the user library
record type (ULIB), the first record of the user
library (ULIB) is copied without alteration to lfn2
along with the remainder of the library, including the
OPLD. The system writes an EOF after the new
d i r e c t o r y.
I NOTE |
The new random access directory contains
entries only for records specified on
the current GTR command. To build a new
random access directory which contains
entries for all records on lfn2, use
LIBEDIT.
NR No rewind option, lfnj is not rewound after the operation; lfn2
is not rewound before or after the operation. If lfnj has a
d i r e c t o r y, t h e d i r e c t o r y i s c o p i e d t o l f n 2 .
If NR is omitted, both files are rewound after the operation, but only
when lfn2 is a tape file is lfn2 rewound before the operation.
S lfnj^ is searched sequentially; no attempt is made to read a
d i r e c t o r y.
N A N o a b o r t o p t i o n . I f s p e c i fi e d , G T R d o e s n o t s e a r c h f o r a n E X I T
command when an error occurs. It issues a dayfile message for the
error and continues GTR processing at the next directive.
d i r e c t i v e . ^ S p e c i fi e s a r e c o r d or group of records to be retrieved. One or more
of the following formats can be used. Valid record types are listed
under Library Record Types in this section. The default type is the
last type specified on a directive, or if none is specified, TEXT.
The record name is the first seven characters of the record, or if a
prefix table is present, the contents of the name field in its second
word.
Directive

Meaning

t y p e / n a m e R e c o r d w i t h t h e s p e c i fi e d t y p e a n d n a m e .
name

Record

with

t h e s p e c i fi e d
default type.

name

and

the
s*ts$$\

15-12

60459680

H

Parameter

Description
Directive

Meaning

type1/name.-type2/name2

Group of records beginning with
namei 0f typei and ending with
name2 of type2.

t yP ei/namei-name2

Group of records beginning with namel
of typei and ending with name2 of
type1#

namei-name2

Group of records beginning with namel
of the default type and ending with
name2 of the default type.

type/name-*

A l l r e c o r d s o f t h e s p e c i fi e d t y p e
beginning with the named record.
All records of the default type beginning
with the named record.

type/*

A l l r e c o r d s o f t h e s p e c i fi e d t y p e .

*

All records of the default type.

0

A zero-length record is inserted.

GTR searches file lfnx for the records specified by the selection directives. If GTR
cannot find a record specified by type and name, it issues the following dayfile message.
GTR ERRORS.
If also issues this message when the record specified is within a user library and when the
GTR command syntax is incorrect.
If lfni has a directory (OPLD) record, GTR writes the selected records on lfn2 in the
order specified on the GTR command. If lfn2 does not have a directory record, GTR writes
the selected records in the order that it finds them on lfni, rather than in the order
specified on the command.
If lfn2 is on tape, the selected records are copied from the current file position; if
lfn2 is on mass storage, the copy starts at the current EOI of the file. If an EOF exists
before the EOI, GTR appends the records as a file following the existing EOF.
Examples:
• GTR,SYSTEM,BIN,D.PP/*
GTR copies all PP records from file SYSTEM to file BIN. It then builds a random
access directory and writes it as the last record on BIN.
• GTR,OPL,NEW,,NR.OPLC/COMCARG,0,COMCCIO
GTR retrieves common decks COMCARG and COMCCIO from file OPL. It then writes
COMCARG, a zero-length record, and COMCCIO at the current position of file NEW.
NEW is not rewound before the operation; OPL and NEW are not rewound following the
operation.

60459680 C

15-13

• GTR,SYSTEM,SYSLIB,D.ULIB/SYSLIB
GTR copies the user library SYSLIB from file SYSTEM to the end of file SYSLIB.
• GTR.REL/A
GTR retrieves the relocatable record A from file OLD and copies it to file LGO.

ITEMIZE COMMAND
ITEMIZE lists pertinent information about each record of a binary file in a format suitable
for printing. Earlier in this section, Library Record Type describes the types of records
processed by ITEMIZE.
ITEMIZE processes mass storage files or I or SI format tape files. A file can be processed
from beginning-of-information through end-of-information.
Format:
ITEMIZE,Ifn,L=listlfn,BL,PW=n,PD,NR,N=n,E,U.
The first parameter is order-dependent; if lfn is omitted, its position must be indicated by
a comma. All the other parameters are optional and order-independent.
Parameter

Description

l f n N a m e o f fi l e t o b e i t e m i z e d ; d e f a u l t n a m e i s L G O .
L = l i s t l f n L i s t o u t p u t o n fi l e l i s t l f n ; d e f a u l t i s L = O U T P U T.
B L B u r s t a b l e l i s t i n g ; e a c h fi l e o u t p u t s t a r t s a t t h e t o p o f a p a g e .
Default is a compact listing in which a page eject occurs only when the
c u r r e n t p a g e i s n e a r l y full.
PW=n

Print either 136-character lines or 72-character lines, depending on the
value of the decimal integer n. If n > 136, print 136-character line.
If n < 136, print 72-character lines.
If just PW is specified, print 72-character lines regardless of the
l i s t i n g fi l e d e v i c e .
If PW=n is omitted, the default value is 72-character lines if the
l i s t i n g fi l e i s a t e r m i n a l ; o t h e r w i s e , t h e d e f a u l t v a l u e i s
136-character lines.

PD

Print density at eight lines per inch; default is six lines per inch.
If this parameter is to produce the desired result, you must ensure that
output appears at a printer capable of eight lines per inch.

NR

No rewind of lfn before or after processing; default is rewind before
and after processing.

N=n

Itemize n files, where n is a decimal integer; default is N=l.
I f j u s t N i s s p e c i fi e d , i t e m i z e u n t i l e n d - o f - i n f o r m a t i o n .
If N=0, itemize until an empty file is processed.
"•^x

15-14

60459680 C

Parameter

Description

E Expand output to list further information; default is no expansion.
For record types CAP and REL, list entry points.
For types OPL and OPLC, list modification set names and their YANK
status.
For record types UPL, list correction identifier names.
U Itemize all records within a user library; default is list only the
user library directory (ULIB type record).
If both E and U are selected for ULIB type records, all records in the library are itemized;
and for REL type records, their entry points are listed.
Output from ITEMIZE is affected by the type of record and parameters selected. A header
appears for each file terminated by an end-of-file marker within the file specified by the
fi l e n a m e . T h e fi r s t l i n e o f t h e h e a d e r i d e n t i fi e s t h e fi l e n a m e , fi l e p o s i t i o n w i t h i n t h a t
fi l e , a n d t h e d a t e a n d t i m e o f t h e r u n . I t a l s o i n c l u d e s t h e F I fi e l d i f t h e fi l e i s a
multifile set tape file (refer to the LABEL command). The second line of the header has the
f o l l o w i n g fi e l d s :
Field
REC

Description
Position

of

the

record

within

the

fi l e .

N A M E R e c o r d n a m e o b t a i n e d f r o m t h e s e c o n d w o r d o f t h e p r e fi x t a b l e o r f r o m
the first word of the record.
T Y P E Ty p e o f r e c o r d . R e f e r t o L i b r a r y R e c o r d Ty p e , e a r l i e r i n t h i s
section, for a description of the record types.
L E N G T H N u m b e r o f w o r d s ( o c t a l ) i n t h e r e c o r d , e x c l u d i n g t h e p r e fi x t a b l e
(except TEXT records for which the prefix table is included).
C K S U M L o g i c a l c h e c k s u m ( o c t a l ) , e x c l u d i n g t h e p r e fi x t a b l e ( e x c e p t T E X T
r e c o r d s f or which the prefix table is included).
D A T E D a t e r e c o r d w a s c r e a t e d a s s t o r e d i n t h e p r e fi x t a b l e .
C O M M E N T S C o n t e n t s o f t h e c o m m e n t s fi e l d i n t h e p r e fi x t a b l e .
I f n o p r e fi x t a b l e i s p r e s e n t , t h e a s s o c i a t e d fi e l d s a r e b l a n k .
NOTE
When printing output for text files, ITEMIZE
u s e s t h e fi r s t s e v e n c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e fi r s t
word of the record as the record name.
ITEMIZE assumes that the record is in 6-bit
display code. Therefore, if you attempt to
display ITEMIZE output for a record in
6/12-bit display code while your terminal is
in ASCII mode, the output display may be
garbled. To avoid this problem, you should
set your terminal to NORMAL- mode before
listing ITEMIZE output.
60459680

E

15-15

Additional information listed depends on the type of record:
Record

Type

,

Description

ABS Entry point names are listed.
OPL, OPLC, UPL Deck names are listed.
OVL

Overlay

level

is

listed

(octal).

T E X T E n t i r e r e c o r d i s l i s t e d i f t h e n a m e o f t h e r e c o r d i s O V E R L AY
APRDxxx, CMRDxxx, EQPDxxx, IPRDxxx, LIBDxxx or COMMENT.
6PP Lists the octal equivalent of the load address.
7PP

Lists

the

octal

equivalent

of

the

load

address.

.^^v

The E parameter can select further details about several types of records (refer to the
example that ends the ITEMIZE command description).
The last record in each file is the end-of-file marker, which appears on the listing as the
characters *EOF*. The SUM= identification is the total length, in words, for all records in
the file, including the prefix table lengths.
Any zero-length record in the file appears with the
record is encountered, a sum of the lengths of the
of the file, or since the last sum was taken,
p r e fi x t a b l e s . R e c o r d n u m b e r i n g i s n o t

record name (00). When a zero-length
records encountered since the beginning
is listed on the output. The length includes ./assx
r e s t a r t e d u n t i l a n e w fi l e i s e n c o u n t e r e d . ^

If a record of type UPL has more correction identifier names and/or deck names than can be
accommodated within ITEMIZE, the following message appears on the listing in place of the
excess names:
TRUNCATED - REQUESTED LIST TOO LONG
In this instance, the Update utility must be used to obtain a complete list of identifiers
and deck names.
A

d a y fi l e

15-16

message

is

issued

when

60459680

ITEMIZE

completes

execution.

G

1

(T$i8"ttl£*y

Example:
A FORTRAN program named SUBROUT has three subroutines. The following ITEMIZE command lists
the records of the binary object file LGO. The E option lists the entry point for each REL
type record listed.
/itemize,Lgo,e

REC

/#^\

ITEMIZE OF LGO
NAME
TYPE

1

SUBROUT

2

SUB1

3

SUB2

4

SUB3

* EOI *

REL
SUBROUT
REL
SUB1
REL
SUB2
REL
SUB3

SUM =

FILE
LENGTH

CKSUM

DATE

105

5355

yy/mm/dd.

45

0263

yy/mm/dd.

45

3276

yy/mm/dd.

45

1542

yy/mm/dd.

264

ITEMIZE COMPLETE.

LIBEDIT COMMAND
LIBEDIT is a general-purpose utility that generates a file containing records copied from
one or more other files (figure 15-2). LIBEDIT can build a random access directory for the
new file. It recognizes the record types listed in Library Record Types in this section.
LIBEDIT can edit a library according to directives requesting addition, deletion, or
replacement of specified records from one or more replacement files.
LIBEDIT executes in two phases. During the first phase, it reads directives and replacement
records. It groups directives by type and file and groups changes when several insertions
take place relative to the same record.
During the second phase, LIBEDIT writes the new file. If LIBEDIT cannot process the
specified combination of directives, and the D option (refer to description under Command
F o r m a t ) w a s n o t s p e c i fi e d , L I B E D I T l i s t s i t s i n t e r p r e t a t i o n o f t h e c o n fl i c t i n g d i r e c t i v e s ,
issues an error message, and aborts the job step. If the D option was specified, LIBEDIT
continues processing the directives.
For output listing files not connected to your terminal, the LIBEDIT command honors the page
length and print density set for your job using the SET command and the PL and PD symbolic
names.

(

60459680

D

15-17

Figure 15-2. LIBEDIT Input and Output
COMMAND FORMAT
The following command calls LIBEDIT. Its parameters specify options and files used for the
c a l l a s i l l u s t r a t e d i n fi g u r e 1 6 - 2 .
Format:
L I B E D I T, p i , p 2 , . . . , p n .
Optional parmeters Pi can be in any order. Each parameter cannot be specified more than
once.
PL
P=lfni

Description
E d i t o l d fi l e l f n ^ T h e d e f a u l t i s O L D . P = 0 d i r e c t s t h e s y s t e m t o
create the new file from replacement file(s).

Although LIBEDIT can write the new file (lfn2)
directly to tape, the directory that LIBEDIT
writes on such a tape contains tape PRU random
addresses rather than disk PRU random
addresses. If this tape is subsequently
copied to disk, the directory will not be
processed correctly by programs such as GTR
and MODIFY. Therefore, if you intend to copy
the file back to disk at a later time, you
should specify a temporary disk file for the
LIBEDIT new file (lfn2) and then use the COPY
u ti l i ty to co p y th e new file to tape.
15-18

60459680 D

Pi

Description

N = l f n 2 W r i t e t h e n e w fi l e o n l f n 2 . T h e d e f a u l t i s N E W .
I = l f n 3 Ta k e t h e n e w d i r e c t i v e s f r o m t h e n e x t r e c o r d o f fi l e l f n 3 . T h e
default is INPUT (INPUT is connected to the terminal in interactive
jobs). 1=0 indicates that there are no directives.
Z Ta k e t h e d i r e c t i v e s f r o m t h e c o m m a n d l i n e . T h e d i r e c t i v e s i m m e d i a t e l y
follow the command terminator. The first character following the
terminator is the separator character used to separate the directives
in the sequence. It can be any character not used in the directives.
For example:
LIBEDIT,Z.#*DELETE REL/PR0G1#*ADD PR0G2
The Z parameter overrides the I=lfn3.
B = l f n 4 U s e r e c o r d s f r o m fi l e l f n 4 f o r i n s e r t i o n s a n d r e p l a c e m e n t s . T h e
default is LGO. B=0 indicates that there is no replacement file.
L = l f n 5 L i s t o u t p u t o n fi l e l f n 5 . T h e d e f a u l t i s O U T P U T. L = 0 s p e c i fi e s n o
output.
L0=listopt Use list option listopt.
listopt

Meaning

C

List

E

List

M

List

directives.
errors.
m o d i fi c a t i o n s .

N L i s t r e c o r d s w r i t t e n t o n e w fi l e .
F Give a full listing (enable all list options).
You can combine the list options; for example, L0=CM or L0=CE.
The default is L0=EM for interactive jobs, and L0=F for all other jobs,
V V e r i f y t h e n e w fi l e a g a i n s t t h e o l d fi l e a f t e r L I B E D I T p r o c e s s i n g b y
calling VFYLIB. The default is no call to VFYLIB. The U parameter
overrides this parameter.
C C o p y t h e n e w fi l e o v e r t h e o l d fi l e a f t e r L I B E D I T p r o c e s s i n g .
D Do not abort LIBEDIT processing because of errors.
U = r e c o r d R e q u i r e t h e o l d fi l e t o b e a u s e r l i b r a r y, a d d a n y n e w r e c o r d s f r o m
the replacement file to the new file, and make the new file a user
library by calling LIBGEN. This parameter overrides the V parameter.
The value record becomes the name of the user library directory
record. If you specify only the keyword U or omit the parameter
entirely, the default record name is ULIB.
NA Do

not

abort

on

directive

errors.

N I D o n o t i n s e r t u n r e p l a c e a b l e r e c o r d s a t E O F o f t h e n e w fi l e .

60459680

G

15-19

<^sSy

Pi

Description

N R D o n o t r e w i n d t h e o l d o r n e w fi l e b e f o r e o r a f t e r L I B E D I T p r o c e s s i n g .
By default, the system rewinds the old file and new file.
NX=n Include cross-references in the library directory of the new user
library if n is 0. If n is nonzero, do not include cross-references.
This parameter is meaningful only if you specify the U parameter or
the *LIBGEN directive. The default is NX=0.

LIBEDIT DIRECTIVES
You can specify directives to control LIBEDIT processing. These directives can be in a
record on file INPUT (terminal input for interactive jobs), can be on the file specified by
I=lfn3 parameter of the command, or can follow the terminator of the command when the Z
p a r a m e t e r i s s p e c i fi e d . D i r e c t i v e s a r e n o t r e q u i r e d .
Unless specified otherwise by parameters or directives, LIBEDIT compares the name and type
of each record on the old file with those of the records on the replacement file (specified
by the B parameter). If a record with the same name and type appears on the replacement
file, LIBEDIT writes that record on the new file and skips the record on the old file unless
you specified the *N0REP directive. If 1=0 and B=0 are specified, LIBEDIT copies the old
file to the new file until it encounters an EOF mark or an OPLD directory on the old file.
Records on a replacement file which do not appear on the old file with the same name and
type are considered unreplaceable. Such records will be inserted at EOF of the new file,
unless the NI parameter or *N0INS directive is specified. If a record with the same name or
type appears on more than one replacement file or appears more than one on a replacement
file, the extra copies will be treated as unreplaceable records.
LIBEDIT processing of user libraries beginning with a ULIB record differs depending on
whether or not the LIBGEN directive is specified. If no LIBGEN directive is specified, the
user library is processed as one record (from ULIB header to OPLD). In this case, the only
part of the user library that can be manipulated by LIBEDIT is the ULIB header. The records
within the user library are transparent to LIBEDIT and cannot be referenced by directives.
If the LIBGEN directive is specified, LIBEDIT deletes the ULIB header and OPLD records from
all user libraries encountered. In this case, LIBEDIT directives can reference any records
within the user library but cannot reference the ULIB header.
LIBEDIT directives take precedence over the parameters of the command when conflicting
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s o c c u r.

15-20

60459680

G

J^^v

LIBEDIT recognizes the following directives,
Function

Directive
*ADD

Inserts records before a zero-length record within the
fi l e .

*BEFORE or *B

Inserts record before the named record.

*BUILD

Builds a directory at the end of the new file.

*COMMENT

Adds a comment to the prefix table.

*COPY

Copies the new file to the old at the end of editing.

*DATE

Adds the date and a comment to the prefix table.

*DELETE or *D

Does not copy specified records to the new file.

*FILE

Declares a file to be a replacement file.

*IGNORE

Ignores records when reading the replacement file.

*INSERT or *I or *AFTER or *A

Copies record from the replacement file after copying
t h e s p e c i fi e d o l d fi l e r e c o r d .

*LIBGEN

Generates a user library by calling LIBGEN after
LIBEDIT processing.

*LIST

S p e c i fi e s a l i s t fi l e a n d l i s t o p t i o n s .

*NEW

Specifies a new file.

*NOINS

Prevents the insertion of unreplaceable records at EOF
of the new file.

*NOREP

Does not automatically replace old file records with
r e c o r d s f r o m t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e .

*NOREW

Prevents the old file and the new file from being
rewound before and after LIBEDIT processing.

*OLD

S p e c i fi e s a n o l d fi l e .

*RENAME

Renames record.

*REPLACE

Replaces the named records from the old file with
records from the replacement file.

*REWIND

Names file to be rewound before and after editing.

*TYPE or *NAME

Sets default record type.

*VFYLIB

Ve r i fi e s t h e n e w fi l e a g a i n s t t h e o l d fi l e b y c a l l i n g
VFYLIB after LIBEDIT processing (overridden by *LIBGEN).

0$&\
60459680 G

15-20.1/15-20.2 |

0^%\

A directive begins with an asterisk in column I followed immediately by the directive
i d e n t i fi e r. T h e d i r e c t i v e i d e n t i fi e r a n d t h e fi r s t p a r a m e t e r a r e b o t h d e l i m i t e d b y a c o m m a
or one or more spaces. If a directive does not begin with an asterisk and a directive
identifier, LIBEDIT assumes that the operation is a continuation of the previous directive
o p e r a t i o n . I f a n a s t e r i s k a n d d i r e c t i v e i d e n t i fi e r d o n o t b e g i n t h e fi r s t l i n e o f t h e
d i r e c t i v e s r e c o r d , L I B E D I T p r e fi x e s t h e f o l l o w i n g t o t h e fi r s t l i n e .
*BEFORE,*,
Parameters other than the first parameter are delimited by a space, an end-of-line, or a
comma. A hyphen (-) indicates a record group. Record group identifiers (gid entries)
cannot be split between lines. For example, the lines

0*&»\

*B,0VL/P1,0VL/P2,OVL/
P3
do not constitute a valid directive. The last entry would not be processed as 0VL/P3. On
the other hand, the lines
*B,0VL/P1,0VL/P2
0VL/P3
do constitute a valid directive and would be processed as
*B,0VL/PI,0VL/P2.0VL/P3
Parameters common to many directives are the reference record identifier (rid) and the
r e c o r d g r o u p i d e n t i fi e r ( g i d ) . Va l i d r e c o r d t y p e s f o r t h e s e p a r a m e t e r s a r e l i s t e d i n
Library Record Types in this section. The default type is the last type specified in a
directive; if none are specified, TEXT is the default. The record name is the first seven
characters of the record, or if a prefix table is present, the name in its second word. The
first character of a record name specified in a directive must not be an asterisk.
r i d R e f e r e n c e r e c o r d i d e n t i fi e r s p e c i f y i n g t h e r e f e r e n c e p o i n t f o r t h e r e q u e s t e d
change. It can have the following formats.
Parameter

Description

t y p e / n a m e R e f e r e n c e r e c o r d h a s t h e s p e c i fi e d t y p e a n d n a m e .
name
*

Reference

Reference

r e c o r d h a s t h e s p e c i fi e d
the default type.

point

is
an
e n d - o f - fi l e
*BEFORE directive only).

name

mark

and

(used

is

of

with

g i d R e c o r d g r o u p i d e n t i fi e r i n d i c a t i n g a r e c o r d o r g r o u p o f r e c o r d s t o b e i n s e r t e d ,
deleted, or replaced. It can have the following formats.
Parameter

Description

t y p e / n a m e R e c o r d w i t h t h e s p e c i fi e d t y p e a n d n a m e .
name

Record

with

the

s p e c i fi e d

name

of

the

default

type.

type /name -type„/name- Group of records beginning with namei of typei
and ending with name2 of type2.

60459680

G

15_21

Parameter

Description

typei/namei-name2

Group of records beginning with namei of typei
and ending with name2 of typei•

namei-name2

Group of records beginning with namei °f the
default type and ending with name2 of the
default type.

type/name-*

All records of the specified type beginning with
the named record.

name-*

All records of the default type beginning with the
named record.

type/* '

All records of the specified type.
All records of the default type.

0

A zero-length record is inserted.

LIBEDIT checks the syntax of directives during an interactive session and
reprompts you for a directive in error.

/tr^$$\

15-22

60459680 G

ADD Directive

The ADD directive inserts records before a zero-length record. A CATALOG listing of the old
file numbers each group of records ending with a zero-length record (called a library on the
listing). This number on the ADD directive identifies the record group.
NOTE
Adding a zero-length record does not change
t h e d i r e c t o r y.
Format:
*ADD LIBn,gidi,gld2 gidn
Parameter

Description

L I B n S p e c i fi e s t h e r e c o r d g r o u p t o w h i c h t h e r e c o r d s a r e a p p e n d e d . Va l u e s
for n are 1 to 63 and can be determined from a CATALOG listing of the
o l d fi l e .
8 " i I d e n t i fi e s t h e r e c o r d s o r g r o u p s o f r e c o r d s f r o m t h e c u r r e n t
replacement file that are to be inserted before the zero-length record.
Example:
The following is a CATALOG listing of file Q.
CATALOG OF Q
NAME
TYPE

:c
1
2
3

REC1
REC 2

4

REC 4

FILE
LENGTH

TEXT
TEXT

(00)

5302
5304
LIBRARY =

SUM =
TEXT

* EOI *

DATE

CKSUM

5310
SUM =

The following output results when a record was added to file Q, producing file Y.
LIBEDIT

DIRECTIVE

*ADD L I B 1 , REC 3
RECORDS WRITTEN ON FILE Y
RECORD
TYPE
FILE
REC1
TEXT
REC2
TEXT
INSERTED REC3
TEXT

CARDS.

DATE

yy/mm/dd.

COMMENT

15.12.51.

yy/mm/dd. 15.12.51.

PA G E

1

PAGE 2

00
ygfeWlL

REC4
**E0F**

60459680 C

TEXT

15-23

BEFORE Directive
A BEFORE directive inserts records or groups of records before a specified reference record
on the old file. An old file record with the same name and type as an inserted record is
not copied to the new file.
Formats:

*BEFORE rid,gidi,gid2>_>gidn
or
*B rid,gld1,gld2>...tgldn
Parameter

Description

r i d N a m e s t h e o l d fi l e r e c o r d b e f o r e w h i c h t h e s p e c i fi e d r e p l a c e m e n t fi l e
records are to be inserted.
S i " ! I d e n t i fi e s r e c o r d s o r g r o u p s o f r e c o r d s f r o m t h e c u r r e n t r e p l a c e m e n t
file that are to be inserted before the reference record (rid).
If the first line of the LIBEDIT directives record does not begin with an asterisk and
directive name, LIBEDIT assumes that the line is the gid parameters following a *BEFORE*,
directive.

BUILD Directive

A BUILD
directory
LIBEDIT
can also

directive constructs and appends a random access directory to the new file. The
is in Modify format (an OPLD record). If the old file has an OPLD directory,
constructs a directory for the new file with or without a BUILD directive. BUILD
be used to change the directory name.

Format:
*BUILD dname
d n a m e S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e f o r t h e d i r e c t o r y r e c o r d . T h e n a m e m u s t b e o n e t o
seven alphanumeric characters. No default.

15-24

60459680

C

COMMENT Directive
The COMMENT directive adds a comment to the prefix (77) table of a record written on the new
fi l e .
Format:
♦COMMENT rid comment
Parameter

Description

r i d N a m e o f a r e c o r d t o b e w r i t t e n o n t h e n e w fi l e .
comment A string of up to 70 characters that appears in the comment field of
t h e p r e fi x t a b l e . A d d i t i o n a l c h a r a c t e r s a r e t r u n c a t e d .

COPY Directive
The COPY directive directs LIBEDIT to copy the new file over the old file after it has
processed all directives. It performs the same function as the C parameter on the LIBEDIT
command. This directive has no parameters.

DATE Directive
The DATE directive adds the current date and the specified comment to the prefix (77) table
of a record written on the new file.
Format:
*DATE rid comment
Parameter

Description

r i d R e c o r d t o b e w r i t t e n o n t h e n e w fi l e .
c o m m e n t A s t r i n g o f u p t o 7 0 c h a r a c t e r s t o b e w r i t t e n i n t h e c o m m e n t fi e l d o f
t h e p r e fi x t a b l e . A d d i t i o n a l c h a r a c t e r s a r e t r u n c a t e d .

60459680

C

15-25

DELETE Directive

The DELETE directive suppresses copying of the specified records from the old file to the
new file.
Formats:
*DELKTE8ldlfgld2f..Btgldn
or
*d eidi,gid2,...,gidn
8idi Identifies records or groups of records that are not to be copied from
the old file to the new file.
Example:
*DELETE OVL/LAD-REL/RUN
This directive requests LIBEDIT not to copy the sequence of records starting with overlay
LAD through relocatable CPU program RUN.

RLE Directive

The FILE directive names a file assigned to the job that contains replacement records.
LIBEDIT directives following the FILE directive refer to records on the declared replacement
fi l e .
Format:
*FILE lfn
l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f a r e l a c e m e n t fi l e . I f l f n i s a n a s t e r i s k ( * ) ,
LIBEDIT uses the replacement file specified by the LIBEDIT command.
If the B parameter was omitted from the command, LGO is used. ,*$$*.

15-26

60459680

C

IGNORE Directive
The IGNORE directive requests LIBEDIT to ignore a record or group of records on the current
r e p l a c e m e n t fi l e .
Format:

*IGNOREgidifgid2>_>gidn
8i<*i Identifies records or groups of records on the replacement file that are
to be ignored.
Example:
*FILE ALPHA
*IGNORE C-*
LIBEDIT ignores the sequence of records on file ALPHA starting with record C of the default
type and including all records of the default type from C to the EOF mark.

INSERT or AFTER Directive
The INSERT or AFTER directive requests LIBEDIT to copy the specified records or groups of
records from the current replacement file after it has copied the specified old file record
onto the new file. Any record on the old file that has the same name and type as an
inserted record is not copied to the new file.
Formats:

*INSERT rid,gidi>gid2>...>gidn
or
*I rid,gidi>gid2>_>gldn
*AFTER rid,gidi,gid2 gidn
or
*A rid,gidi>gid2>..#>gidn
Example:
*INSERT OPL/K,TEXT/L
This directive requests LIBEDIT to copy the replacement file text record L to the new file
after it has copied the old file OPL record K.

60459680

C

15_27

,*J^^\

LIBGEN Directive

The LIBGEN directive specifies that the new file will be a user library. The U parameter of
the LIBEDIT command performs the same function. The LIBGEN directive will override the
VFYLIB directive.
Format:
*LIBGEN recordname
recordname Specifies the name of the new user library directory record. The
default is ULIB.

,«<^x

LIST Directive

The LIST directive changes the list file and the list option (refer to the L=lfn5 and
LO=listopt parameters of the LIBEDIT command described earlier).
Format:
* L I S T l i s t fi l e , l i s t o p t
Parameter Description
l i s t fi l e

S p e c i fi e s

the

list

fi l e .

l i s t o p t S p e c i fi e s t h e l i s t o p t i o n .

NEW Directive

The NEW directive specifies the name of the new file. The N=lfn2 parameter of the LIBEDIT
command performs the same function.
Format:
*NEW newfile
newfile Specifies the name of the new file.

NOINS Directive

The NOINS directive prevents the insertion of unreplaceable records at EOF of the new file.
The NI parameter of the LIBEDIT command performs the same function. This directive has no
parameters.

15-28

60459680

C

/"^.

NOREP Directive
The NOREP directive declares the specified files to be no-replace files. A no-replace file
is a replacement file whose records do not automatically replace old file records having the
same name and type. The user selects records to be written on the new file from no-replace
files by specifying the file on a FILE directive and then naming the records on *AFTER,
*BEFORE, *INSERT, and *REPLACE directives.
Format:
* N O R E P l f n l fl f n 2 l f n n
lfnl

■

NOREW

S p e c i fi e s

the

no-replace

fi l e s .

Directive
The NOREW directive prevents the old file and new file from being rewound before and after
LIBEDIT processing. The NR parameter of the LIBEDIT command performs the same function.
This directive has no parameters.

OLD Directive
The OLD directive specifies the name of the old file. The P=lfni parameter of the LIBEDIT
command performs the same function.
Format:
* O L D o l d fi l e
o l d fi l e S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e o l d fi l e .

RENAME Directive
The RENAME directive assigns a new name to a record written on the new file. If the renamed
record is referenced by another directive in the directive record, the old name should be
used. A RENAME is not allowed on a PROC or TEXT type record.
Format:
*RENAME rid,name
Parameter

Description

r i d S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e r e p l a c e m e n t fi l e r e c o r d o r o l d fi l e r e c o r d
to be renamed.
n a m e S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e r e c o r d . T h e n a m e c a n b e o n e t o s e v e n
alphanumeric characters.

60459680

D

15_29

REPLACE Directive
The REPLACE directive requests LIBEDIT to replace the old file records having the specified
names and types with the replacement file records having matching names and types. This
directive is used when the current replacement file has been declared a no-replace file
(refer to the NOREP directive description). If the replacement file is not a no-replace
file, LIBEDIT performs the replace operation automatically.
Format:
*REPLACE gidi,gid2,...,gidn
& i d i S p e c i fi e s r e c o r d s o r g r o u p s o f r e c o r d s t h a t a p p e a r o n b o t h t h e o l d
file and the current replacement file.
Example:
The old file contains text records A, B, C, and D; the replacement file RF also contains
text records named A, B, C, and D. Either of the following directive sequences writes
records A and B from the old file and records C and D from file RF onto the new file.
Sequence 1 Sequence 2
*FILE RF *FILE RF
*NOREP RF *IGNORE A-B
♦REPLACE C-D

REWIND Directive
The REWIND directive tells LIBEDIT to rewind the specified file before and after processing.
Format:
♦REWIND lfn
l f n S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e fi l e t o b e r e w o u n d .

15-30

60459680

C

0^\

TYPE or NAME Directive
A TYPE or NAME directive sets the default record type.
Formats:
*TYPE type
*NAME type
t y p e S p e c i fi e s d e f a u l t r e c o r d t y p e s . V a l i d r e c o r d t y p e s a r e l i s t e d i n
Library Record Types in this section.
The default record type can also be set by an explicit record type specification within a
d i r e c t i v e . I n e i t h e r c a s e , t h e d e f a u l t r e c o r d t y p e s e t t i n g r e m a i n s i n e ff e c t u n t i l a n o t h e r
record type is explicitly named. If a default record type is not declared in the directive
sequence, the default is TEXT. For example, the following two directive sequences are
equivalent•
Sequence

1

Sequence

2

*TYPE
REL
*INSERT
REL/X,Y
*INSERT X,Y *DELETE FILE1-FILE4
*DELETE FILE1-FILE4
VFYUB Directive
The VFYLIB directive verifies the new file against the old file by calling VFYLIB after
LIBEDIT processing. The V parameter of the LIBEDIT command performs the same function.
This directive has no parameters. The LIBGEN directive or U parameter will override the
VFYLIB directive.

LIBEDIT OUTPUT
LIBEDIT interprets all directives in the directive record before beginning directive
processing. If one or more errors are found, LIBEDIT issues the dayfile message
y^*K

n DIRECTIVE ERROR(S).
and aborts the job step (unless the D parameter is specified on the command or the job is
interactive). The following LIBEDIT output shows the results of a directive syntax error
(the FILE directive is not followed by a space or comma).
DIRECTIVE
•ERROR* *FILERF1

ERRORS.

yy/mm/dd.

10.36.47

PA G E

1

Directives which cannot be executed are listed as LIBEDIT interpreted them. The following
LIBEDIT run called for a replacement file not assigned to the job.
DIRECTIVE
ERRORS.
yy/mm/dd.
•FILE RF1
*B *,X
•ERROR* DIRECTIVE CARD CAN NOT BE PERFORMED
•FILE RF1
• BEFORE TEXT/*,TEXT/X

60459680

C

10.37.39

PA G E

1

15-31

Nonfatal errors are listed in an error directory following the listing of records written to
the new file. The RECORDS NOT REPLACED error shown in the following example could be
corrected by including an *IGNORE directive naming the records not to be replaced.
y y / m m / d d . 0 3 . 3 7 . 4 3 . PA G E 1

DIRECTIVE ERRORS.
•FILER F2
•B *,REC1
RECORDS WRITTEN ON FILE NEW
RECORD TYPE FILE
INSERTED REC 1 TEXT RF2
**E0F**
OLD

y y / m m / d d . 0 3 . 3 7 . 4 3 . PA G E 2
DATE

ERROR DIRECTORY - RECORDS NOT REPLACED.
RECORD TYPE FILE
REC3
TEXT
RF2
REC4
TEXT
RF2

COMMENT

y y / m m / d d . 0 8 . 3 7 . 4 3 . PA G E 3

If you are using LIBEDIT from an interactive job, the BRIEF command suppresses the printing
of title lines on the output.

LIBGEN COMMAND
The LIBGEN command generates a user library of routines for use with CYBER Loader.
Format:
LIBGEN,pi,p2,...,Pn.
Any of the following parameters may be specified in any order (only one instance of each).
Pi

15-32

Description

F=lfn!

Specifies the source file containing absolute (ABS), overlay (OVL),
procedure (PROC), relocatable (REL), or capsule (CAP) records for the
u s e r l i b r a r y. O t h e r r e c o r d t y p e s a r e i g n o r e d . I f t h e fi l e F d o e s n o t
contain any of the record types specified, no library is generated.
The default for this parameter is LGO.

P=lfn2

Specifies the file on which the user library is to be written. The
default is ULIB.

N=name

Specifies the name of the user library generated; name is entered in
ULIB and OPLD records. The default is the user library name
determined by the P=lfn2 parameter.

NX=n

Specifies whether or not to include cross-references in the ULIB
directory. If n is not zero, no cross-references are included in the
U L I B d i r e c t o r y. I f n i s z e r o , c r o s s - r e f e r e n c e s a r e i n c l u d e d . T h e
later case is the default.

60459680 G

If the F=lfni and P=lfn2 parameters specify the same file, LIBGEN issues a dayfile
message and does not generate a user library.
F i g u r e 1 5 - 3 i l l u s t r a t e s t h e s t r u c t u r e o f a u s e r l i b r a r y. To g e n e r a t e a u s e r l i b r a r y, t h e
system rewinds and scans the input file. It then builds a directory of all entry points,
program names, and external references in the records of the file. Adding the ULIB and OPLD
r e c o r d s , t h e s y s t e m t h e n c o p i e s t h e i n p u t fi l e t o t h e u s e r l i b r a r y fi l e .

ULIB

} User library directory

REL
REL
j

^

' Relocatable routines

^

REL
OPLD

| Random access directory

Figure 15-3. User Library Structure

Unless the NX=n parameter specifies otherwise, the ULIB directory contains the external
reference/entry point linkage between routines in the user library. When CYBER Loader loads
a routine from the user library, it loads (at the same time) all user library routines
r e f e r e n c e d b y t h e r e q u e s t e d r o u t i n e . A l l e x t e r n a l s f o r u s e r l i b r a r y r o u t i n e s a r e s a t i s fi e d
from the user library, if possible. If desired, you can request with the NX=n parameter
that the ULIB directory contains no cross-linking of records. In that case, when a routine
from the user library is requested, only that routine is loaded. Loading in this manner is
typically slower than using the cross-reference linkage option.
Example 1:
File RELB contains relocatable routines that are used for execution of several
applications. To enable loading of these routines as needed during execution of an
application program, the user generates a user library using the following command.
LIBGEN,F=RELB,P=MYLIB,N=APPLIB.
This creates user library APPLIB on file MYLIB. The following loader sequence allows use of
the APPLIB routines during execution of a compiled FORTRAN 5 program on file LGO.
LDSET,LIB=MYLIB.
LOAD,LGO.
EXECUTE.
The program is loaded and executed with externals satisfied first from user library MYLIB
and then from the system default library SYSLIB. Refer to the CYBER Loader Reference Manual
for more information on library search procedures.
y^3Pv

60459680 G

15-33

Example 2:
If a routine has no external references, no entry is made in the ULIB directory. To load
this routine, you must include the loader command LDSET(USEP=pname) in a loader sequence.
Suppose a FORTRAN 5 contains a BLOCK DATA subroutine without external references to any of
its entry points. The user has not named the block, and it has the default name BLKDAT. To
load this routine, you must include the following command in the loader sequence.
LDSET,USEP=$BLKDAT.$.

ULIB COMMAND
The ULIB command creates a user library or adds a record to, deletes a record from, or
replaces a record in an existing user library. ULIB changes affect only the local copy of a
user library. Use the SAVE or REPLACE command to make the user library file permanent.
Format:
ULIB,OP=operation,REC=record,LIB=library.
or
U L I B , o p e r a t i o n , r e c o r d , l i b r a r y.
All parameters are required. The first format is the order-independent format for the
parameters. The second is the order-dependent format.
Parameter

Description

OP=operation Specifies the library operation to be done. You can specify one of
the following values:
Operation
C

Create

Description
a

new

user

l i b r a r y.

A Add a record to the user library (same as R).
D D e l e t e a r e c o r d f r o m t h e u s e r l i b r a r y.
R Replace a record in the user library (same as A).
F Copy a record from the user library and make the
copy a local file with the same name as the record.
REC=record Specifies the name of the record to be added, deleted, replaced, or
copied. The record name must be the name of a local file.
L I B = l i b r a r y S p e c i fi e s t h e n a m e o f t h e l o c a l l i b r a r y fi l e t o b e c r e a t e d o r
modified. Except in the case of OP=C or OP=F, ULIB returns the
o r i g i n a l l i b r a r y fi l e a n d c r e a t e s a n e w l o c a l fi l e . H e n c e , U L I B
cannot be used to modify a library on a direct access file.

15-34

60459680 D

The ULIB command is an interactive procedure. You can get help information for the command
and its parameters and be prompted for parameters. If you enter
ULIB?
the system gives you information about the command itself and prompts you for parameters.
If you enter
ULIB,parameter?
the system gives you information about the specified parameter and prompts you for
parameters.

VFYLIB COMMAND
The VFYLIB command rewinds two files, compares their records, and lists the differences.
VFYLIB does not perform a bit-by-blt comparison of the two files. It only compares such
entries as name, type, length, and checksum for the records of the two files. For a binary
comparison of two files, use the VERIFY command. For output listing files not connected to
your terminal, the VFYLIB command honors the page length and print density set for your job
using the SET command and the PL and PD symbolic names.
Format:
VFYLIB,lfni,ifn2,Ifn3,NR.
Parameter

Description

l f n i N a m e o f t h e fi r s t fi l e ; i f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d , V F Y L I B a s s u m e s
file OLD.
l f n 2 N a m e o f t h e s e c o n d fi l e ; i f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d , V F Y L I B a s s u m e s
file NEW.
I f n 3 N a m e o f t h e o u t p u t fi l e ; I f t h i s p a r a m e t e r i s o m i t t e d , V F Y L I B a s s u m e s
file OUTPUT.
N R I f s p e c i fi e d , l f n i a n d l f n 2 a r e n o t r e w o u n d a f t e r v e r i fi c a t i o n .
The record types that VFYLIB recogizes are listed in Library Record Types In this section.
VFYLIB lists changes in residence (between record groups separated by zero-length records),
replacements, deletions, and insertions. A record is defined as being replaced when its
name and type remain the same, but its contents differ. VFYLIB does not compare prefix (77)
table information such as last modification date and last assembly date. VFYLIB does not
consider a difference in record order as a difference between the two files.
NOTE
When printing output for text files, VFYLIB
u s e s t h e fi r s t s e v e n c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e fi r s t
word of the record as the record name. VFYLIB
assumes that the record is in 6-bit display
code. Therefore, if you attempt to display
VFYLIB output for a record in 6/12-bit display
code while your terminal is in ASCII mode,
the output display may be garbled. To avoid
this problem, you should set your terminal to
NORMAL mode before listing VFYLIB output.
60459680 D

15-35

Example:
The following are CATALOG listings of file OLD and file NEW.

REC
1
2
3
4

CATALOG OF OLD
NAME
TYPE
A
A
(00)

REL

B
B

FILE 1
ILENGTH
CKSUM DATE

41

7424 yy/mm/dd.

41

LIBRARY = 1

REL

41

0465 yy/mm/dd.

REL

41

5525 yy/mm/dd.

SUM =

C

5 * EOF *

SUM =

143

CATALOG COMPLETE.

REC
1

CATALOG OF NEW
NAME
TYPE

LENGTH

CKSUM

DATE

REL

41

7424

yy/mm/dd.

REL

41

0465

yy/mm/dd.

3

A
A
B
B
(00)

102

LIBRARY

4

D

TEXT

5

* EOF *

2

SUM =

1000
SUM =

103

CATALOG COMPLETE.

0

VFYLIB.
RECORD

OLD FILE = OLD
TYPE
ULIB

NEW FILE = NEW
yy/mm/dd. 12.18.25.
LIB DATE
COMMENT

PAGE

0 CHANGES IN RESIDENCE.
B

REL

yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0

0 DELETED PROGRAMS.
C

REL

yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0

0 INSERTED PROGRAMS.
D

TEXT

s ^ i \

15-36

60459680 C

LIBRARY PROCESSING EXAMPLES
The following examples illustrate the use of CATALOG, LIBEDIT, and LIBGEN commands. To
duplicate the examples, you should execute the jobs in sequence.
Example 1:
The following submit job builds a program library from a replacement file of relocatable
binary (REL) records.
/JOB
LIBTES1.
/USER
FTN5,L=0.
DEFINE/TESTLIB.
CATALOG,LGO,R.
LIBEDIT,P=0,N=TESTLIB.
CATALOG,TESTLIB,R.
/EOR
SUBROUTINE A
STOP
END
SUBROUTINE D
STOP
END
SUBROUTINE C
STOP
END
SUBROUTINE B
STOP
END
/EOR
•BUILD LIBRARY
*B,*,REL/A,B,C,D
/EOF

The FORTRAN compilation produces relocatable binaries on the default file LGO. The DEFINE
command creates a direct access permanent file TESTLIB on which the new program library is
written. The first CATALOG command lists the LGO file as follows:
C ATA L O G O F L G O F I L E 1 y y / m m / d d . 1 2 . 3 4 . 4 9 .
R E C N A M E T Y P E L E N G T H C K S U M D AT E C O M M E N T S
1 A REL 41 7424 yy/mm/dd.
A
2 D REL 41 6566 yy/mm/dd.
3

C

4
5

REL
C
B
B

*

EOF

41

•

5525

yy/mm/dd.

REL

41

SUM

=

PA G E

1

SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/

S/

M

SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/

S/

M

S/

M

SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND=

A/

0465 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

204

The P-0 in the LIBEDIT command indicates that no old program library exists. The N parameter
indicates that the new program library is written on file TESTLIB. The replacement file is
the default LGO. The directives are on the default INPUT file.

60459680

D

15-37

LIBEDIT reads the binaries from LGO and the directives from INPUT. On the basis of the
d i r e c t i v e s p e c i fi c a t i o n s , t h e b i n a r i e s a r e i n s e r t e d b e f o r e t h e e n d - o f - fi l e o n fi l e T E S T L I B
in the order specified in the directives (A, B, C, D). The directory record created is
given the name LIBRARY as a result of the *BUILD directive. It is written before the
end-of-file on the new program library TESTLIB.
The directives are written to OUTPUT. The records on file TESTLIB are listed on the next
page of OUTPUT. The following listing consists of these two pages.
LIBEDIT DIRECTIVES.

yy/mm/dd. 12.34.52.

PAGE

•BUILD LIBRARY
*B,*,REL/A,B,C,D

z^SSfei

RECORDS WRITTEN ON FILE TESTLIB
12.34.52.
PA G E
2
RECORD

INSERTED A
INSERTED B
INSERTED C
INSERTED D
ADDED LIBRARY
**EOF**

TYPE

FILE

REL
REL
REL
REL

LGO
LGO
LGO
LGO

DATE

COMMENT

yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINE0PT=0
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0
yy/mm/dd.

*****

OPLD

yy/mm/dd.

The second CATALOG command produces the following listing of information about the records
on TESTLIB.

REC

CATALOG O
F TESTLIB
NAME
TYPE

1

5

A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
LIBRARY

6

* EOF

2
3
4

FILE
LENGTH

y y / m m / d d . 1 2 . 3 4 . 5 2 . PA G E
C K S U M D AT E C O M M E N T S

REL

41

7424 yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

0465 yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

5525 yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

6566 yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M

OPLD

13

2073 yy/mm/dd.

SUM =

217

.-*s»v

15-38

60459680 C

Example 2:
This submit job builds a new program library from an old program library by inserting new
relocatable routines into and deleting routines from the old program library created in
example 1 (TESTLIB).
/JOB
LIBTES2.
/USER
FTN5,L=0.
ATTACH,OLD=TESTLIB.
DEFINE,NEW=TES2LIB.
L I B E D I T.
CATALOG,NEW,R.
/EOR
SUBROUTINE BONE
STOP
END

SUBROUTINE NEWC
STOP
END
SUBROUTINE D
STOP
END
/EOR
•TYPE REL
•I,B,BONE
•D,C
/EOF
Three relocatable binaries (BONE, D, and NEWC) are produced via a FORTRAN compilation. The
old program library (TESTLIB) is attached in read mode and referenced as OLD. A direct ac
cess file (TES2LIB) is created for the new program library. This file is referenced as NEW.
LIBEDIT reads the binaries from the replacement file LGO and the input directives from file
INPUT. It writes the modified old program library (OLD) to the new program library (NEW).
BONE and NEWC are inserted after records B and C, respectively, and record C is deleted.
Record D, which already existed on the old program library, is replaced by record D from the
replacement file LGO. The following action is taken on file NEW.
LIBEDIT DIRECTIVES.

yy/mm/dd. 12.34.58.

PAGE

*TYPE REL
*I,B,BONE
*D,C
RECORDS WRITTEN ON FILE NEW
RECORD TYPE FILE

A
B
INSERTED BONE
DELETED-(C)
REPLACED D
ADDED NEWC
ADDED LIBRARY
••EOF**
60459680 C

REL
REL
REL
REL
REL
REL
OPLD

OLD
OLD
LGO
OLD
LGO
LGO

*****

OLD

yy/mm/dd. 12.34.58.

PAGE

D AT E C O M M E N T
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd.
15-39

The CATALOG output shows the following contents of the new program library.

CATALOG OF NEW FILE
REC NAME TYPE

1

6

A
A
B
B
BONE
BONE
D
D
NEWC
NEWC
LIBRARY

7

* EOF *

2
3
4
5

15-40

LENGTH

yy/mm/dd. 12.34.58. PAGE
CKSUM DATE COMMENTS

REL

41

7424 yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

0465 yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

4312 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

6566 yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

4432 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

OPLD

15

7700 yy/mm/dd.

SUM =

262

60459680 C

y^^V

/sPi^Hy

Example 3:
This submit job uses LIBGEN to generate a user library file from the program library file
TES2LIB created in example 2.
/JOB
LIBTES3.
/USER
ATTACH,TES2LIB.
DEFINE,LIBFILE.
LIBGEN,F=TES2LIB,P=LIBFILE,N=L0ADLIB.
CATALOG,LIBFILE,R,U.
/EOF
The program library TES2LIB is attached to the job. A direct access file LIBFILE is defined
f o r w r i t i n g t h e u s e r l i b r a r y fi l e .
LIBGEN scans TES2LIB and builds a ULIB directory of entry points, program names, and external
references for relocatable (REL) records in the file. ULIB is copied to the file LIBFILE,
followed by the records from TES2LIB. A file index of addresses for each record in the file
is added as the last record of LIBFILE. LOADLIB is the name of the ULIB and OPLD records.
The CATALOG output of the user library file LIBFILE shows the following content.

CA1fALOG OF LIBFILE

:c

NAME

TYPE

1
2

ULIB

7

LOADLIB
A
A
B
B
BONE
BONE
D
D
NEWC
NEWC
LOADLIB

8

* EOF *

FILE
LENGTH

y y / m m / d d . 1 2 . 3 5 . 0 7 . PA G E 1
C K S U M D AT E C O M M E N T S

ygp*V

3
4
5
6
0$^K^

60459680 C

REL

13
41

7725 yy/mm/dd.
7424 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

0465 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

4312 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

6566 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

REL

41

4432 yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,R0UND= A/ S/ M

OPLD

15

0515 yy/mm/dd.

SUM

275

15-41

Example 4:
This submit job illustrates a method for deleting records from a user library.
/JOB
LIBTES4.
/USER
ATTACH,LIBFILE/M=W.
LIBEDIT,P=LIBFILE,U,Z.#*D,REL/NEWC
CATALOG,NEW,R,U.
/EOR
LIBEDIT references the program library LIBFILE and the directive following the command,
deletes NEWC, and writes this modified file on the default NEW. The output shows the
LIBEDIT processing.
LIBEDIT DIRECTIVES.

yy/mm/dd. 12.35.14.

PAGE

yy/mm/dd. 12.35.14.

PAGE

•D,REL/NEWC

RECORDS WRITTEN ON FILE NEW
RECORD TYPE FILE

A
B

BONE

D

DELETED-CNEWC)
ADDED LOADLIB
**EOF**

REL
REL
REL
REL
REL

OPLD

LIBFILE
LIBFILE
LIBFILE
LIBFILE
LIBFILE
*****
LIBFILE

DATE COMMENT
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd. SUBR0UTINE0PT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd. SUBROUTINEOPT=0,ROUND= A/ S/ M
yy/mm/dd.

LIBGEN generates a new user library on the file NEW. It uses LIBFILE as the source and
names the new user library ULIB.
The user library is cataloged, showing the following contents.

15-42

60459680 C

LIBRARY COMMAND
The LIBRARY command specifies a global library set for your current job. Once you specify a
global library set, you can execute any program or procedure on a global library file by
entering the entry point name for the program or procedure name. Special entry points ARG=,
NPC=, RFL=, and SDM= are also honored. (Refer to Volume 4, Program Interface for more
information.) A program can load overlays randomly from this global library set.
Format:
L I B R A R Y, fi l e L , fi l e 2 , . . . , fi l e n / d i r e c t i v e
Parameter

Description

fi l e ^

S p e c i fi e s a fi l e c o n t a i n i n g a u s e r l i b r a r y. T h e fi l e m u s t b e a l o c a l
fi l e o r a s y s t e m l i b r a r y.

directive

S p e c i fi e s i f fi l e i , fi l e 2 , . . . fi l e n a r e t o b e a d d e d t o , t o b e
deleted from or to replace the global library set.
directive

Description

A A d d t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e s t o t h e g l o b a l l i b r a r y s e t .
D D e l e t e t h e s p e c i fi e d fi l e s f r o m t h e g l o b a l l i b r a r y
set.
y fl $ ^ * \

R Replace the existing global library set with the
s p e c i fi e d fi l e s . R i s t h e d e f a u l t .
To clear your global library set, specify no parameters:
LIBRARY.
NOTE
A n o - a u t o - d r o p s t a t u s i s s e t f o r a n y fi l e
inserted in the global library set. The
no-drop-status is cleared when a library is
removed from the global library set. Refer
to SETFS command for an explanation of
no-auto-drop status.

MAXIMUM SIZE OF GLOBAL LIBRARY SET
The maximum number of libraries allowed in your global library set varies with the number of
n o n s y s t e m l i b r a r i e s y o u s p e c i f y. F i g u r e 1 5 - 4 s h o w s t h e v a r i o u s p o s s i b i l i t i e s :

User libraries

60459680 G

Number of system
libraries allowed

Maximum number
of libraries

0

24

24

1

13

14

2

2

4

Figure 15-4. Maximum Size of Global Library Set

15-43

Nominally, you can never specify more than two user libraries (nonsystem libraries).
However, you can circumvent this restriction by making the local file name of a user library
the same as that of a system library. The system libraries USRLIB1, USRLIB2,..., and
USRLIB8 are available for this purpose.

LIBRARY SEARCH ORDER
The system searches the libraries in the global library set in the order in which you
specified them in the LIBRARY command. If an entry point name appears in multiple
l i b r a r i e s , t h e s y s t e m u s e s i t s fi r s t o c c u r r e n c e . I f y o u w a n t t o f u r t h e r c o n t r o l t h e l i b r a r y
search order, use the LIBLOAD and SATISFY commands, described in the CYBER Loader Reference
Manual.

EXAMPLES
Suppose you want to write a command to yield the date and another to yield your social
security number. This example uses a procedure to produce the date and a FORTRAN 5 program
to display your social security number.
File DATPROC has the following contents:
.PROC,DATE*I.
DISP,$TODAY'S DATE IS:$,DATE+.
REVERT,NOLIST.
eoi
.PR0C,DISP*I,STRING1,STRING2.
N0TE.+STRING1 STRING2
REVERT,NOLIST.
File SSPROG has the following contents:
PROGRAM SSNUM
PRINT*,'MY SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER IS 530-82-7161.'
END
The following command entries establish your global library set:
/get,datproc,ssprog.
/ftn5,i=ssprog,L=0.
0.009 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME.
/ L i b e d i t , n = m y l i b , u , z . + * fi L e d a t p r o c
RECORDS WRITTEN ON FILE MYLIB
RECORD
TYPE
FILE
D AT E

COMMENT

ADDED
SSNUM
REL
LGO
yy/mm/dd.
ADDED
D AT E
PROC
D AT P R O C
ADDED
DISP
PROC
D AT P R O C
LIBRARY GENERATION COMPLETE.
/ L i b r a r y, m y l i b
LIBRARY,MYLIB.

15-44

60459680

G

0^\:

The FTN5 command creates file LGO and LIBEDIT creates user library MYLIB, containing the
procedure and compiled program. The LIBRARY command specifies your global library set.
The following sequence tests your commands:
/date
TODAY'S DATE IS: yymmdd
/ssnum
MY SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER IS 530-82-7161.
0.003 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME.
Suppose you wish to include three of your own user libraries in the global library set for
your current job. You can accomplish this with the following commands:
/get, myLibl, myLib2, myLib3.
/Library, myLibl, myLib2, myLib3.
TOO MANY USER LIBRARIES SPECIFIED.
/rename, usrLibl = mylib3.
/ L i b r a r y, m y L i b l , m y L i b 2 , u s r L i b l .
LIBRARY, MYLIB1, MYLIB2, USRLIBL
Note that it was necessary to use the name of a system library USRLIBl for the third library
MYLIB3 in order to use more than two libraries at once.
The following command produces a display of your global library set:
/enquire,L
LOADER INFORMATION.
MAP OPTIONS = DEFAULT
DEBUG = OFF
GLOBAL LIBRARY SET IS MYLIB1, MYLIB2, USRLIB1

60459680

G

15-45

•

{*%

{**%

TERMINAL

INPUT/OUTPUT

16

This section distinguishes NAM/CCP network functions from IAF functions to aid in error
checking and to allow you to carry over knowledge of the network to other products (RBF or
TAF, for example). If you are connected to a CDCNET network, refer to the CDCNET Terminal
Interfaces Usage manual for a description of terminal input and output. The network
interface is largely invisible to the IAF user. In most cases, you can ignore the existence
of the network and proceed as if you are communicating exclusively with IAF. However,
certain commands which involve communication only with the network are available to the IAF
user (appendix J). These network commands change the characteristics of a terminal (for
example, changing the backspace character or initiating paper tape operations), change the
character code set of a terminal, and send messages to the local operator. Unlike other
system commands, these network commands can be used any time a data connection exists between
the terminal and the communications network, including prior to the completion of login.

TERMINALS
IAF and the network provide support for 18 terminal classes.t Each terminal class
corresponds to an actual terminal or terminals as follows:
Class
1

Te r m i n a l

M33,

M35,

M37,

M38

teletypes

2 CDC 713-10, 722, 751-1, 752, 756
3

CDC

4

IBM

5
(

6

721,

722-30

2741
M40

Hazeltine

2000

7 Te r m i n a l s c o n f o r m i n g t o t h e A N S I X 3 . 6 4 s t a n d a r d ( D E C V T 1 0 0 ,
TeleVideo 924, 950, 955)
8

Te k t r o n i x

4010,

4014

9 HASP protocol post-print format control
10

200

User

Te r m i n a l

11

CDC

714-30

12

CDC

7 11 - 1 0

13

CDC

714-10/20

14 HASP protocol pre-print format control

j ^ ^ \

TTerminals of all classes can be connected to NOS. Some terminals in terminal classes 1,
2, 3, and 5 through 8 can be connected to a packet switching network (PSN) with a
connection established to NOS.
60459680

H

16-1

Class
15

Te r m i n a l

CDC

731-12,

732-12,

16

IBM

2780

17

IBM

3780

18

IBM

3270

734

A computer site may support terminals other than those listed. Consult local site personnel
to determine if terminal types not listed are supported and to obtain additional operating
instructions for supported nonstandard terminals.
Associated with each
values are listed in
should provide you with
istics with the TRMDEF
(appendix J). Important

t e r m i n a l c l a s s a r e s p e c i fi c t e r m i n a l o p e r a t i n g c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . D e f a u l t > r t ^ .
appendix J. A site can change these default values. If it does, it 1
a list of the new values. You can also change terminal character
command (section 8) and with the terminal definition commands
characteristics which may vary from terminal to terminal include:

Abort output block character (AB).
Backspace character (BS).
Cancel character (CN).
Control character (CT).
End-of-line character (EL).
End-of-block character (EB).
Interruption character (Bl).
Termination character (B2).

INPUT/OUTPUT CONVENTIONS
There are many standards and conventions that apply to input and output. Some features,
however, vary according to terminal class as this section indicates. The information in
this section pertains to line mode operations only.
INPUT FROM TERMINAL
The system normally issues you input prompts. However, you need not wait for an input prompt
before entering the next input line (refer to Entering Input Before Prompts later in this
section). Any input from the terminal halts output to the terminal until you enter a
A question mark (?) output to the terminal is usually a request from an executing program
for user input. You can enter terminal definition commands in response to any request for
input. For example, when you are in text mode or are using Text Editor or FSE. If you
enter a terminal definition command following a request for input, the system does not send
a new prompt.
I f y o u a r e a t a P S N t e r m i n a l , h o w e v e r, y o u m u s t w a i t f o r o u t p u t t o c e a s e b e f o r e e n t e r i n g ^ ^ \
more
input.
!

16-2

60459680

F

LENGTH OF OUTPUT/INPUT LINES
A logical input line can consist of a maximum of 2500 characters,t but the system does not
impose a limit on the length of a logical output line. The current page widthtt determines
the maximum number of characters in a physical output line. If a logical output line
exceeds the current page width, the system places the additional characters on the next
physical line. If you enter a logical input line (terminated by a carriage return) longer
than 2500 characters, the system discards the entire logical line and issues the *0VL*
message.

TERMINATING INPUT LINE
The line feed key, which terminates physical lines, and the carriage return key, which
terminates logical lines, vary with terminal class. Appendix K lists the carriage return,
line feed, and message transmission keys for the various terminal classes. Line feed and
carriage return are generic terms which represent characters that terminate a line of text.
The logical end-of-line character can be changed by you (refer to the EL command In appendix
J), your application, or by your local site.
You must terminate each logical line of input by entering a carriage return. This tells the
system that the current logical line is complete. The system may respond by positioning the
carriage (or cursor) at the beginning of the next line. You can then enter additional input
information on the new line.ttt
You continue a logical line on a new physical line by entering a line feed. The system
responds by positioning the carriage (or cursor) at the beginning of the next line.

CORRECTING INPUT UNE
You can correct entry errors in the input line before pressing® by using the backspace
character. One character (including spaces) is deleted for each backspace character
entered. If the beginning of the physical line is reached, further backspace characters are
ignored. For example, when the Input line contains
BAX«—SJK««— IC
it is interpreted by the system as the BASIC subsystem selection command (or a line of text
interpreted as the word BASIC, if you are in text mode).
The backspace character can be changed by you (refer to the BS command in Appendix J), your
application, or by your site.

tThis applies only to IAF and can be changed by your site.
t t T h i s c h a r a c t e r i s t i c v a r i e s w i t h t h e t e r m i n a l c l a s s . Yo u c a n c h a n g e t h i s c h a r a c t e r i s t i c
with the TRMDEF command (section 8) or with one of the terminal definition commands
(appendix J),
tttA PSN does not normally reposition its terminals to the next line until It sends the next
output message. You must reposition the carriage on terminals connected to a PSN (for
example, by entering a carriage return in local mode in order to enter input before the
system prompts for it).

60459680

F

16-3

DELETING INPUT LINE
When you discover an error in the command or other input before pressing @, you can delete
the current logical input line by entering the cancel line charactert followed by a carriage
return. For most terminals, this is CTRL/X or the ( character. Default values for each
terminal class are given in appendix J.
The network responds to the cancel line character by printing *DEL* on the next line and
positioning the carriage or cursor to the beginning of a new line. The following example
illustrates the use of the cancel line character.
READY.
10 program t
20 print 6
30 6 format 9'this is a test
*DEL*
30 6 format ( ' t h i s i s i t ' )
40 end
List

You enter the cancel line character.

10 PROGRAM T
20 PRINT 6
30 6 FORMAT ('THIS IS CT')
40 END
READY.

ENTERING INPUT BEFORE PROMPTS
Under IAF, you normally wait for an input prompt before entering data or commands. This
prompt appears as either a READY message, a slant (/), a question mark (?), or a
program-defined prompt. You can, however, enter input before receiving a prompt; the system
processes the input in the order that you enter it. The prompts the system issues after
processing individual commands still appear at the terminal in their normal manner. If you
enter too many commands before receiving an input prompt, the system issues the following
message;
WAIT..
You should then reenter the unprocessed commands after the system issues its REPEAT., prompt.
Even if it is currently processing another command, the system processes these three types
of input immediately: terminal definition commands, interactive status commands, and user
break sequences (interruption and termination sequences).
Terminal definition commands change the terminal's characteristics,
detailed description of terminal definition commands.

Appendix J gives a

Interactive status commands get an immediate status response from the system. The
interactive status commands, ctD, ctE, and ctS, use the network control character defined
for your terminal (refer to table J-l). Detailed descriptions of ctD, ctE, and ctS appear
in section 8.
TThis characteristic varies with the terminal class. You can change this characteristic
with the TRMDEF command (section 8) or with one of the terminal definition commands
(appendix J).
16-4

60459680 C

y^ff^Sy

PAGE WAIT
Each terminal class defines a certain number of lines of output as a page.t For a display
terminal with page wait enabled, output stops at each page boundary. To display the next
page, you can enter a carriage return .tt For a printing terminal with page wait enabled, the
system inserts six line feeds at each page boundary and output continues. If output ceases
and the message
OVER..
is displayed at the end of the output, while the present page is not full, another page
exists and can be viewed by pressing (cr) .

SUSPENDING OUTPUT
The procedure for suspending output varies with the terminal type. To suspend output on
asynchronous terminals (terminal classes 1 through 8), you can press the BREAK key (the
BREAK key is sometimes labeled INT, INTRPT, or ATTN). You can also suspend output by
pressing any other key.ttt You can then enter the cancel line character (CN)t followed by a
carriage return to continue output and to avoid having the keyed entry interpreted as input.
Synchronous terminals do not have a BREAK key. You cannot suspend output on these
terminals, except through the normal page wait controls.

n

After suspending output with the BREAK key, you can either abort the current output block,
interrupt the current job step, or terminate the current job step. The next three
subsections define the procedures for each of these options. If you enter input other than
the controls described in the following sections, the system resumes output.

ABORTING OUTPUT BLOCK
To abort the current output block, first suspend output by pressing the BREAK key and then
enter the abort block character followed by a carriage return .tttt

0O^\

tThis characteristic varies with the terminal class. It can be changed using the TRMDEF
command (section 8) or one of the terminal definition commands (appendix J).
ttFor mode 4 terminals, enter the network control character (ct) followed by a carriage
return to see the next page.
tttOn asynchronous terminals connected to a PSN, you can only suspend output by using the
BREAK key, which might result in the loss of data the PSN holds.
tttTA PSN does not support the abort output block feature for its terminals.

60459680

C

16-5

INTERRUPTING JOB STEP
To interrupt a job step, you enter the interruption charactert followed by a carriage
return. For most terminals, the interruption character is CTRL/P, CTRL/F, or a colon (:).
Appendix J lists the default values for each terminal class. The interruption sequence is
also called the user break 1 sequence. IAF responds with the message:
INTERRUPTED*
and discards any input you may have previously entered.
If the system Is transmitting output to the terminal, first suspend output by pressing the
BREAK key and then enter the interruption sequence. To interrupt output on synchronous
terminals, you can enter the interruption sequence only when output ceases at a page
boundary. You must have already enabled page wait.

TERMINATING JOB STEP
To terminate a job step, enter the termination charactert followed by a carriage return.
For most terminals, the termination character is CTRL/T or a right parenthesis. Appendix J
lists the default values for each terminal class. The termination sequence is also called
the user break 2 sequence. IAF responds with
TERMINATED*
and discards any input you may have entered previously.
If the system is transmitting output to the terminal, first suspend terminal output by
pressing the BREAK key and then enter the termination sequence. To terminate output on
synchronous terminals, you enter the termination sequence only when output ceases at a page
boundary. You must have already enabled page wait.

NOTE
Yo u
cannot
enter
the
termination sequence if output has been
suspended with a key other than the BREAK
key or the interruption or termination
character.

interruption

tThis characteristic varies with the terminal class. It can be changed using the TRMDEF
command (section 8) or one of the terminal definition commands (appendix J).

16-6

60459680

C

or

)

0^s

r
CONTINUING A SUSPENDED JOB
After you have suspended your job during program execution by entering the interruption
sequence, you can enter one of the following:
Entry

Description

@ Continues output. A portion of the output is lost if the program
was transmitting output to the terminal when suspended. When output
is complete, program execution continues.
P Proceeds. If the program was transmitting output to the terminal
when suspended, the system discards the data generated by the
program prior to the interruption sequence. The amount of output
discarded depends on the program being executed. Program execution
continues.
O t h e r S t o p s . Te r m i n a t e s t h e j o b s t e p .

60459680

C

16_7

The following example illustrates the use of the interruption sequence to interrupt a
FORTRAN 5 program.
List
00100
00110
00120
00130
00140
00150
00160
00170
00180
READY.

PROGRAM DO
INTEGER E
DO 10 E=1,300
PRINT*,E
10 CONTINUE
READ*, I, J

PRINT*,I,J
STOP

END

run
1
2
3
•INTERRUPTED*

©

110
111
112
•INTERRUPTED*

You interrupt with the BREAK key to stop
output and enter the interruption
sequence to suspend the job. You
continue by pressing (eg) (some output is
lost).
You again press the BREAK key to stop
output and enter the interruption
sequence to suspend the job.

@
p@>
193
194
195
196
•INTERRUPTED*

P@
? 4,5
4 5
SRU

0.863 UNTS.

RUN COMPLETE.

You enter P®, directing the system to
discard data. As execution continues,
more data is printed at the terminal.
You again suspend the job.
You enter P® directing the system to
discard data. All output has been
generated. Program execution continues.

y&$$\

The number of times you would have
to interrupt a program and enter P
before all output has been generated
depends on the program.

USING ATTN ON IBM 2741 TERMINALS
You must press the ATTN key before entering the network control character, abort block
c h a r a c t e r, i n t e r r u p t i o n c h a r a c t e r, o r t e r m i n a t i o n c h a r a c t e r o r a f t e r e n t e r i n g t h e c a n c e l
character. For further information about these characters, refer to appendix J.

^SJSK

16-8

60459680 C

CONTROL BYTES
You can design an interactive program to control terminal activity by including control
bytes in your output. Control bytes perform operations such as controlling the positioning
of the printing element and defining alternate input modes.
A c o n t r o l b y t e i s a 1 2 - b i t q u a n t i t y, r i g h t - j u s t i fi e d i n b i t p o s i t i o n 0 , 1 2 , 2 4 , 3 6 , o r 4 8 o f
a central memory (CM) word. You must be careful since data can be mistaken for a control
byte. For example, the 64-character set characters :D at the beginning of a line and
followed by an end-of-line may log out your job if written to the terminal output file,
since the code 0004 is transmitted. The following control bytes are available.
Byte

Description

0001
or
0002
0003

End-of-block.
Auto

input.

0004

Log

0005

Initiate

0006

Initiate

transparent

input

0007

Initiate

transparent

output

0010
0 0 11
0013
0016

out
ASCII

job.
input

mode.

NAM/CDCNET
Initiate

ASCII

output

mode.
mode.

terminal

r e d e fi n i t i o n .

I

mode.

End-of-string.
NAM/CCP

terminal

r e d e fi n i t i o n .

|

T h e u s e o f t h e s e c o n t r o l b y t e s i s d e s c r i b e d i n d e t a i l i n s e c t i o n 1 2 o f Vo l u m e 4 , P r o g r a m I
I n t e r f a c e . F o r a d d i t i o n a l i n f o r m a t i o n , r e f e r t o t h e E F F E C T m a c r o d e s c r i p t i o n i n Vo l u m e 4 . |

60459680

H

16_9

r%

0S=%i

CHARACTER SETS

A character set is composed of graphic and control characters. A code set is a. set of codes
used to represent each character within a character set.

i«j!fff*S

A graphic character may be displayed at
are the characters A through Z and the
modifies, or stops a control operation. An
the terminal carriage or cursor back one
graphic character, a terminal may produce
control character.

a terminal or printed by a line printer. Examples
digits 0 through 9. A control character initiates,
example is the backspace character that moves
space. Although a control character is not a
a graphic representation when it receives a

All references within this manual to the ASCII character set or the ASCII code set refer to
the character set and code set defined in the American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange (ASCII, ANSI Standard X3.4-1977). References in this manual to the
ASCII character set do not necessarily refer to the ASCII code set.
NOS supports the following character sets.
• CDC graphic 64- (or 63-) character set.
• ASCII 128-character set.
• ASCII graphic 64- (or 63-) character set.
• ASCII graphic 95-character set.
Each installation selects either the 64-character set or the 63-character set. The
differences between the two are described in Character Set Anomalies in this appendix. Any
reference in this appendix to the 64-character set implies either the 63- or 64-character
set, unless otherwise stated.
jrr*Vi\

NOS supports the following code sets.
• 6-bit display code.
• 6/12-bit display code.
• 7-bit ASCII code.
Display code is a set of 6-bit codes from 00g to 778.
The 6/12-bit display code is a combination of 6-bit codes and 12-bit codes. The 6-bit codes
are 00g through 778, excluding 74g and 768. (Refer to Character Set Anomalies for
the interpretation of the 00g and 638 codes.) The 12-bit codes begin with either 748
or 76g and are followed by a 6-bit code. Thus, 74g and 768 are considered escape
codes and are never used as 6-bit codes within the 6/12-bit display code set. The 12-bit
codes are 74018, 74028, 74048, 74078, and 76018 through 76778. All other 12-bit
codes (74xx8 and 76008) are undefined.

J

^

^

\

60459680

C

A_2

/rtssav

The 7-bit ASCII code (as defined by ANSI Standard X3.4-1977) is right-justified in a 12-bit
byte. Assuming that the bits are numbered from the right starting with 0, bits 0 through 6
contain the ASCII code, bits 7 through 10 contain zeros, and bit 11 distinguishes the
OOOOg code from the end-of-line byte. The 7-bit codes are 00018 through 01778 and
40008.

CHARACTER SET ANOMALIES
NOS interprets
rather than the
percent graphic
percent graphic

two codes differently when the installation selects the 63-character set
64-character set. In tables A-l, A-2, and A-3, the codes for the colon and
characters in the 64-character set are unshaded; the codes for the colon and
characters in the 63-character set are shaded.

If an installation uses the 63-character set, the colon graphic character is always "^^fes
represented by a 638 code, and the 008 code is undefined, rbwever, if the installation
uses the 64-character set, output of 6/12-bit display codes 74048 or 6-bit display code
008 produces a colon. In ASCII mode for interactive jobs, a colon can be input only as a
74048 6/12-bit display code.
When using either the 63- or 64-character set, the use of undefined 6/12-bit display codes
in output files produces unpredictable results and should be avoided.
On input, NOS recognizes alternate 029 punch codes of 11-0 for the right bracket (]) and
12-0 for the left bracket ([). The alternate codes support the COBOL sign overpunch
convention and are not recommended for other uses. Refer to COBOL 5 Reference Manual. "**^
Also, two 008 codes may be confused with an end-of-line byte and should be avoided (refer
to appendix F for further explanation) .
Translation of 7-bit ASCII to 6-bit display code causes character set folding from the
128-character ASCII set to the 63- or 64-character ASCII subset. The following special
character substitutions occur:
7 - B i t ASCII
Code
Character

6 - B i t D i s p l a y Code
Code
Character

7 - B i t ASCII
Code
Charac ter

0140

74

0100

0173

61

0133

0174

—

>

75

>

0134

0175

62

0135

0176

76

0136

CHARACTER SET TABLES
This appendix contains character set tables for interactive jobs, batch jobs, and jobs
involving magnetic tapes. Table A-l is for interactive jobs, and table A-2 is for batch
jobs. Table A-3 is a conversion table used to cross-reference 7-bit ASCII codes and
6/12-bit display codes and to convert ASCII codes from octal to hexadecimal.
Tables A-4, A-5, and A-6 list the magnetic tape codes and their display code equivalents,

A-2

60459680

C

The character set tables are designed so that you can find the character represented by a
code (such as in a dump) or find the code that represents a character. To find the
character represented by a code, look up the code in the column listing the appropriate code
set and then find the character on that line in the column listing the appropriate character
set. To find the code that represents a character, you first look up the character and then
find the code on the same line in the appropriate column.

INTERACTIVE JOBS

/ff*\

Table A-l shows the character sets and code sets available to you at an ASCII code
terminal. When in NORMAL mode (specified by the NORMAL command), NOS displays the ASCII
graphic 64-character set and interprets all input and output as 6-bit display code. When in
ASCII mode (specified by the ASCII command), NOS displays the ASCII 128-character set and
interprets all input and output as 6/12-bit display code.
To determine the octal or hexadecimal ASCII code for a character, refer to table A-3.
(Certain terminal definition commands require specification of an ASCII code.)
On output, the US code is reserved for network use and defined as an end-of-line. Use of
this character, except in transparent mode, causes incorrect formatting and possible loss of
output characters.

BATCH JOBS
Table A-2 lists the CDC graphic 64-character set, the ASCII graphic 64-character set, and
the ASCII graphic 95-character sets. It also lists the code sets and card punch codes (026
and 029) that represent the characters.
The 64-character sets use display code as their code set; the 95-character set uses 7-bit
ASCII code. The 95-character set is composed of all the characters in the ASCII
128-character set that can be printed at a line printer (refer to jobs using Line Printers),
Only 7-bit ASCII code files can be printed using the ASCII graphic 95-character set. To
print a 6/12-bit display code file (usually created by an interactive job in ASCII mode),
you must convert the file to 7-bit ASCII code. To do this, you enter the FCOPY command
(section 9). The 95-character set is represented by 7-bit ASCII codes 0040g through
01768.

JOBS USING UNE PRINTERS
The batch character set printed depends on the print train used on the line printer to which
the file is sent. In addition, you may choose from one of several subsets of the characters
on the print train by specifying the print train image (for information on specifying print
train images, refer to the ROUTE command in section 9).
The following table lists the print trains according to the associated ROUTE command EC
parameter values.

r

60459680

H

A-3

ROUTE EC Values
That Will Print

ROUTE EC Values
That Will Not Print

Suggested
Print Band

ot

N0NE,B4,B6

A4,A6,A9

595-1/596-1

1

N0NE,B4,B6

A4,A6,A9

595-1/596-1

2t

NONE,B4,B6

A4,A6,A9

595-1/596-1

3t

N0NE,B4,B6

A4,A6,A9

595-1/596-1

4

N0NE,A4,A6,A9

B4,B6

595-6/596-6

5

N0NE,A4,A6

B4,B6,A9

595-4/596-4
or
595-5/596-5

6

A9

NONE,B4,B6,A4,A6

595-6/596-6

7

N0NE,B4,B6,A4,A6,A9

Print
Tr a i n

595-6/596-6

TThese print trains are reserved for future use. If specified, they have the same
effect as if print train 1 had been specified.

For PSU printers, the batch character sets and associated print bands are as follows:
Character

Set

533/536

Print

ASCII graphic 64-character set

530-1

ASCII graphic 95-character set

530-2

Band

The characters of the default 596-1 print train are listed in the table A-2 column labeled
CDC Graphic (64 Char); the 596-5 print train characters are listed in the table A-2 column
labeled ASCII Graphic (64 Char); and the 596-6 print train characters are listed in the
table A-2 column labeled ASCII Graphic (95 Char).
If a transmission error occurs when printing a line, the system prints the line again. The
CDC graphic print train prints a concatenation symbol (r*0 in the first printable column of
the repeated listing of the line. The ASCII print trains print an underline ( ) instead of
the concatenation symbol.
If an unprintable character exists in a line (that is, a 7-bit ASCII code outside the range
00408 through 01768), the number sign (//) appears in the first printable column of a
print line, and a space replaces the unprintable character.
To route and correctly print a 6/12-bit display code file on a line printer with the ASCII
graphic 95-character set, you must convert the 6/12-bit display code file to a 7-bit ASCII
code file with the FCOPY command (refer to section 9). The resulting 7-bit ASCII file can
be routed to a line printer (refer to the ROUTE command in section 9) but cannot be output
at an interactive terminal.

A-4

60459680 E

Table A-l. Character Sets for Interactive Jobs (Sheet 1 of 2)
6/12ASCII

ASCII
Character

Graphic
(64 Character)

(128 Character)

: colon

6-Bit
Display
Code

Bit
Display
Code

7-Bit
ASCII
Code

00*

Display t greater than
@ commercial at
\ reverse slant
c i r c u m fl e x
; semicolon

70
71
72
73
74t
75
76t
77

? question mark
< less than
> greater than
@ commercial at
\ reverse slant
c i r c u m fl e x
; semicolon

: colon

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Q

t
[
j
X

ASCII
Character
(128 Character)

" quote

' apostrophe

• 12

6/12ASCII
Graphic
(64 Character)

„.._*-«. %~. < ,«y! ^pOtOttO&'fh-t^r-..
' grave accent

74*

/S™S^

^The interpretation of

slant
opening parenthesis
closing parenthesis
dollar sign
equal

t h i s c h a r a c t e r o r c o d e may dep > n d o n i t > c o n t e x t .

{
1
}
~

opening brace
vertical line
closing brace
tilde

DEL

61T
75 t
621

76t

Bit
Display
Code

60
61
62
63t

.'63 s '
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73

7-Bit
ASCII
Code
0043
0133
0135
0045

0072
0042
0137
0041
0046

77

0047
0077
0074
0076
0100
0134
0136
0073

7404

0072

7407

0140

7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607

0141
0142
0143
0144
0145
0146
0147

7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617

0150
0151
0152
0153
0154
0155
0156
0157

7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627

0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167

7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637

0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177

7401

75
7402

',Wfcb3« MBSStt*.

Refer to Character Set Anomalies elsewhere in this appe n d i x .

/0K>\

60459680 C

A-5

Table A-l. Character Sets for Interactive Jobs (Sheet 2 of 2)

ASCII
Graphic
(64 Character)

ASCII
Character
(128 Character)

6/126-Bit
Display
Code

Bit

ASCII
Graphic
(64 Character)

ASCII
Character
(128 Character)

Bit

Display
Code

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL

7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647

4000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

OLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB

7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667

0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027

B
S
HT
LF
VT
F
F
C
R
S
O
SI

7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657

0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017

CAN
E
M
SUB
ESC
FS
G
S
R
S

7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677

0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037

ust

6-Bit
Display
Code

6/127-Bit
ASCII
Code

Display
Code

7-Bit
ASCII
Code

tReserved for network use. Refer to Character Set Tables in this appendix.

S&^s

A-6

6045% 80 C

Table A-2. Character Sets for Batch Jobs (Sheet 1 of 3)
CDC
Graphic
(64 Character)
: colont
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

ASCII
Graphic
(64 Character)

ASCII
Graphic
(95 Character)

: colont

IWM^S^^M

6-Bit 6/12-Bit 7-Bit
D i sp l a y Display ASCII
Code
Code
Code

oot
ol

u

Punch Code
026
029
8-2

8-2

^W

02
03
04
05
06
07

02
03
04
05
06
07

0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107

12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7

12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7

H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117

12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6

12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6

P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W

P
Q
R
T
U
V
W

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127

11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6

11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6

X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4

X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4

X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

0130
0131
0132
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064

0-7
0-8
0-9

0-7
0-8
0-9

5
6
7
8
9
+ plus
- dash
* asterisk

5
6
7
8
9
+ plus
- dash
* asterisk

5
6
7
8
9
+ plus
- dash
* asterisk

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

0065
0066
0067
0070
0071
0053
0055
0052

12
11
11-8-4

12-8-6
11
11-8-4

B
C
D
E
F
G

B
C
D
E
F
G

H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0

H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0

P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W

s

t T h e i n t e r p r e t a t i o n of this character or code may depend on its context.
elsewhere in this appendix.

60459680 C

Refer to Chara cter Set Anomalies

A-7

r^BSV

Table A-2. Character Sets for Batch Jobs (Sheet 2 of 3)
CDC
Graphic
(64 Character)
/
(
)
$
=

ASCII
Graphic
(64 Character)

ASCII
Graphic
(95 Character)

slant
opening parenthesis
closing parenthesis
dollar sign
equal
space
, comma
. period

/
(
)
$
=

slant
opening parenthesis
closing parenthesis
dollar sign
equal
space
, comma
. period

/
(
)
$
=

—
[
]
%

//
[
]
%

equivalence
opening bracket
closing bracket
percent signt

number sign
opening bracket
closing bracket
percent signt

slant
opening parenthesis
closing parenthesis
dollar sign
equal

6-Bit 6/12-Bit 7-Bit
Display D i sp l a y ASCII
Code
Code
Code

Punch Code
026
029

space
, comma
. period

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

0057
0050
0051
0044
0075
0040
0054
0056

0-1
0-8-4
12-8-4
11-8-3
8-3
no punch
0-8-3
12-8-3

// number sign
[ opening bracket
] closing bracket
% percent signt

60
61
62
63t

60
61
62
63t

0043
0133
0135
0045

0-8-6
8-7
0-8-2
8-6

8-3
12-8-2t
ll-8-2t
0-8-4

0-1
12-8-5
11-8-5
11-8-3
8-6
no punch
0-8-3
12-8-3

-mxo& \y "' 5 c?'s
r* concatenation
V logical OR
A logical AND

_ underline
! exclamation point
& ampersand
' apostrophe

^ superscript
>J, subscript
< less than
> greater than
< less or equal
> greater or equal
- logical NOT

? question mark
< less than
> greater than
@ commercial at
slant
*\ reverse
circumflex

; semicolon

; semicolon

'T''-

__ underline
! exclamation point
& ampersand

65
66
67

65
66
67

0137
0041
0046

0-8-5
11-0
0-8-7

0-8-5
12-8-7
12

apostrophe
? question mark
< less than
> greater than

70
71
72
73

70
71
72
73

0047
0077
0074
0076

75
76
77

75

0134

77

0073

11-8-5
11-8-6
12-0
11-8-7
8-5
12-8-5
12-8-6
12-8-7

8-5
0-8-7
12-8-4
0-8-6
8-4
0-8-2
11-8-7
11-8-6

74t
76t

7401
7402

0100
0136

lit

\ reverse slant
; semicolon
@ commercial at
" circumflex
: colont.

Wt « WJ, tr
y^&\$*£$'» r*> y- -. *ipi'&t r- ^;- * ^y ^y *** M;kw$Mi&iM?$
«^*#>^5*v%
$' ^>imti
" 746Y
&ztV~w&£LT$?:%
* grave accent\ \ *%? ■ ▶s
V*74"Y
'6i4cT v
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
tThe interpretation of this character or c ode may depend on its context.
elsewhere in this appendix.

A-8

« H

7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607

0141
0142
0143
0144
0145
0146
0147

Refer to Char acter Set Anomalies

60459680 C

,<«3^SV

Table A-2. Character Sets for Batch Jobs (Sheet 3 of 3)
CDC
Graphic
(64 Character)

ASCII
Graphic
(64 Character)

ASCII
Graphic
(95 Character)

6-Bit 6/12-Bit 7-Bit
D i sp l a y Display ASCII
Code
Code
Code

h
i
j
k
1
m
n
0

P
q
r
s
t
u
V

w
X

y
z
{
|
}~

opening brace
vertical line
closing
brace
tilde

6lt
75t
62t
76t

t T h e i n t e r p r e t a t i o n o f t h i s c h a r a c t e r o r code may depend on its c o n t e x t .
elsewhere in this appendix.

60459680 C

7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617

0150
0151
0152
0153
0154
0155
0156
0157

7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627

0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167

7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636

0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176

Punch Code
026
029

Refer to Character Set Anomalies

A-9

Table A-3. ASCII to 6/12-Bit Display Code Conversion (Sheet 1 of 2)
ASCII
Character
(128 Character)

7-Bit
ASCII Code
Octal Hexadecimal

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL

4000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647

BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI

0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017

08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
OF

7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657

DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB

0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667

CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS

0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037

18
19
1A
IB
IC
ID
IE
IF

7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677t

0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045

20
21
22
23
24
25

55
66
64
60
53

GS

R
S
USt
space
! exclamation point
" quote
il number sign
$ dollar sign
% percent signtt

'^Wr^^ti^T^^- -'' ^ $ ; :

6/12-Bit
Display
Code

63tf

& ampersand
' apostrophe

0046
0047

'26
27

67
70

( opening parenthesis
) closing parenthesis
* asterisk
+ plus
, comma
- dash
. period
/ slant

0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057

28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F

51
52
47
45
56
46
57
50

ASCII
Character
(128 Character)

7-Bit
ASCII Code
Octal Hexadecimal

4
5
6
7

0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

8
9
: colontt

0070
0071
0072

38
39
3A

;
<
=
>
?

semicolon
less than
equal
greater than
question mark

0073
0074
0075
0076
0077

3C
3D
3E
3F

77
72
54
73
71

@ commercial at
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

7401
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0

0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117

48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W

0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

X
Y
Z
[
\
*]

0130
0131
0132
0133
0134
0135
0136
0137

58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F

30
31
32
61
75
62
7402
65

'

opening bracket
reverse slant
closing
bracket
circumflex
underline

6/12-Bit
Display
Code
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
7404tt

tReserved for network use. Refer to Character Set Tables in this appendix.
ttThe interpretation of this character or code may depend on its context. Refer to Character Set Anomalies in
this appendix.

,XSSv

A-10

60459680 C

Table A-3. ASCII to 6/12-Bit Display Code Conversion (Sheet 2 of 2)
ASCII
Character
(128 Character)
v grave accent

7-Bit
ASCII Code
O c t a l Hexadecimal

6/12-Bit
Display
Code

ASCII
Character
(128 Character)

7-Bit
ASCII Code
Octal Hexadecimal

6/12-Bit
Display
Code

a
b
c
d
e
f
g

0140
0141
0142
0143
0144
0145
0146
0147

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

7407
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607

0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627

h
i
j
k
1
m
n
o

0150
0151
0152
0153
0154
0155
0156
0157

68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F

7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617

0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177

78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F

7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637

60459680 C

{
I
}~

opening brace
vertical line
closing
brace
tilde

DEL

A-ll

JOBS USING MAGNETIC TAPES

Coded data to be copied from mass storage to magnetic tape is assumed to be represented in
display code. NOS converts the data to external BCD code when writing a coded seven-track
tape and to ASCII or EBCDIC code (as specified on the tape assignment command) when writing
a coded nine-track tape.
Because only 63 characters can be represented in seven-track even parity, one of the 64
display codes is lost in conversion to and from external BCD code. The following shows the
differences in conversion depending on the character set (63 or 64) which the system uses.
The ASCII character for the specified character code is shown in parentheses. The output
arrow shows how the 6-bit display code changes when it is written on tape in external BCD.
The input arrow shows how the external BCD code changes when the tape is read and converted
to 6-bit display code.
63-Character Set

00
33

6-Bit Display Code

External BCD

6-Bit Display Code

16 (%)
(0)

Output
*

63 (:)

12 (0)

00
Input

33 (0)
33 (0)

12 (0)
64-Character Set

6-Bit Display Code

External BCD

6-Bit Display Code

00 (:)

12 (0)

33 (0)

33 (0)
63 (%)

Output

12 (0)
16 (%)

Input

33 (0)
63 (%)

If a lowercase ASCII or EBCDIC code is read from a nine-track coded tape, it is converted to
its uppercase 6-bit display code equivalent. To read or write lowercase ASCII or EBCDIC
characters, you must assign the tape in binary mode and use FCOPY to read or write the tape.
Tables A-4 and A-5 show the character set conversion for nine-track tapes. Table A-4 lists
the conversions to and from the 7-bit ASCII character code and 6-bit display code. Table
A-5 lists the conversions between the EBCDIC character code and the 6-bit display code.
Table A-6 shows the character set conversions between external BCD and 6-bit display code
for seven-track tapes.

A-l 2

60459680 D

J0**\

Table A-4. Nine-Track ASCII Coded Tape Conversion
6-Bit
D i sp l a y
Code

7-Bit ASCII
Code
(Hex)
20
21
22
23
24
25

Chart
space
ii

f2*' f b *y *
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A

Code
(Hex)

Chartt

00
NUL
7D
02
STX
03
ETX
04
EOT
05
ENQ
;y$5 - ;^$$^y
06
ACK
07
BEL
08
BS
09
HT
0A
LF
0B
VT
OC
FF
0D
CR
0E
SO
OF
SI
10
DLE
11
DC1
12
DC2
13
DC3
14
DC4
15
NAK
16
SYN
17
ETB
18
CAN
19
EM
1A
SUB

Char
space
ii

Code
(Octal)
55
66
64
60
53
63

x«i»«a#ft U»-<\; > »
67
70
51
52
47
45
56
46
57
50
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
00

* *HBt*fc 4&pl&f % &4& 0$. is ,ipiefixmo at a&top, «4i«g-

3A
3B
3C
3D

* " 14 IB
7B
ID

$m * 'ESC

GS

' *v

* $ y. ^
77
72
54

6-Bit
Display
Code

7-bit ASCII
Code
(Hex)
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F

Chart

Code
(Hex)
IE
IF
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
IC
7C
01
7E
7F

Chartt
RS
US

FS
SOH
DEL

Char

Code
(Octal)
73
71
74
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
61
75
62
76
65

tWhen these characters are copied from/or to a tape , the characters remain the same but the codes change
from one code set to the other.
ttThese characters do not exist in 6-bit display cod e. Therefore, when the characters are copied from a
tape, each 7-bit ASCII character is changed to an alternate 6-bit display code charact e r . T h e
corresponding codes are also changed. Example: Wtien the system copies a lowercase a, 6116, from tape,
it writes an uppercase A, Olg.
tttA 6-bit display code space always translates to a 7-bit ASCII space.

60459680 E

A-l 3

Ta b l e A - 5 . N i n e - Tr a c k E B C D I C C o d e d Ta p e C o n v e r s i o n

6-Bit
Display
Code

EBCDIC
Code
(Hex)
40
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
6B

6D
6E
6F
7A

7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
Cl
C2
C3

Chart
space
i

<
(
+

Code
(Hex)
00
IC
0E
CO
16
OB
DO
2E
01
37
25
05
27
Al
OD
OF
OC
2D

Chartt
NUL
IFS
SO
{
BS
VT
}
ACK
SOH
EOT
LF
HT
ESC

Code
C h a r t t (OcVal)
space
[

<
(
+
t

&
]

$

55
61
57
72
51
45
66
67
62
53
47
52
77
76
46
50
56
63

07
IE
IF
3F

03
79
2F
ID
02
81
82
83

ETX
BEL
IGS
STX

60
74
70
54
64
01
02
03

6-Bit
Display
Code

EBCDIC
Code
(Hex)
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
DI
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
EO
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9

Chart

Code
(Hex)

84
85
86
87
88
89
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
6A
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
10
11
12
13
3C
3D
32
26
18
19

Char

1.

DLE
DC1
DC2

TM
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM

Char

Code
(Octal)
04
05
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
75
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44

tWhen these character? are copied from/or to a tape, the characters remain the same (except EBCDIC codes
4A, 4F, 5A, and 5F) but the codes change from one code set to the other.
ttThese characters do not exist in 6-bit display code. Therefore, when the characters are copied from a
tape, each EBCDIC character is changed to an alternate 6-bit display code character. The corresponding
codes are also changed. Example: When the system copies a lowercase a, 81jg, from tape, it writes an
uppercase A, 01 g.
TTtAll EBCDIC codes not listed translate to 6-bit display code 55g (space). A 6-bit display code space
always translates to an EBCDIC space.

A-14

60459680 C

Table A-6.

Seven-Track Coded Tape Conversions

6-Bit
Display
External
ASCII
Code
BCD
Character ( O c t a l )
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
11
12t
13
14
15
16T
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

j0^\

ii

space

34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
33
54
64
74
63
61
55
50
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
62
56
51
65
60
67

6-Bit
Display
Ex ternal
ASCII
Code
BCD
Character ( O c t a l )
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
"

9

46
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
66
53
47
70
71
73
45
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
11
72
57
52
75
76
77

tAs explained previously in this section, conversion
of these codes depends on whether the tape is being
read or written.

JfSss

60459680 C

A-15

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

This appendix contains an alphabetical listing of the messages that may appear in your
dayfile. Lowercase characters are used to identify variable names or fields. All messages
are sorted according to the first nonvariable word or character. Messages beginning with
special characters (such as hyphens or asterisks are sorted as if the special characters
were not present. For example, the message
filename ALREADY PERMANENT,
is listed with the messages beginning with A, and the message
****ENDING SUPPORT OF LFM FUNCTION nnB.
is listed with the messages beginning with E.
Dayfile messages usually issued only to COMPASS programs are listed in appendix B of
Volume 4, Program Interface.
If you encounter a diagnostic or informative message that does not appear in this appendix,
consult the NOS 2 Diagnostic Index. This publication catalogs all messages produced by NOS
and its products and specifies the manual or manuals in which each message is fully
documented.
All pages are at revision level H. Only changed or new messages are indicated by change
bars.

60459680

H

B-l

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

ABSC, sc.

An informative message indicating the
initial service class of your job.
sc Service class

None.

CLASS

cmd ACCEPTED..

The network has accepted your terminal
definition command cmd.

None.

CCP

ACCESS CATEGORIES NOT VALID FOR JOB.

You attempted to use the SETPFAC command
or macro to set one or more permanent file
access categories for which you are not
validated.

Retry using a set of
access categories for
which you are validated
and that is valid for
your job.

ACCESS LEVEL NOT VALID FOR FILE.

One of the following:
You attempted to save a local file
using an access level for the
permanent file that is not valid for
the device on which the local file
resides.
You attempted to define an existing
local file as a direct access
permanent file using an access level
for the permanent file that is not
valid for the device on which the
local file resides.

Retry using an access
level for the permanent
file that is not lower
than the access level of
t h e l o c a l fi l e .

PFM

ACCESS LEVEL NOT VALID FOR JOB.

One of the following:
You attempted to save a local file
at an access level that is not valid
for your job.
You attempted to define an existing
local file as a direct access
permanent file at an access level
that is not valid for your job.
You attempted to set an access level
for a permanent file that is not
valid for your job using the SETPFAL
command or macro.

Retry using a valid access
level.

PFM

ACCESS LEVEL NOT VALID ON PF DEVICE.

On a SAVE, DEFINE, or SETPFAL command or
macro, you specified an access level that
is outside the range of access levels
allowed on your permanent file device.

Inform security
administrator that
your permanent file
device is not valid for
all the access levels
for which you are
validated.

PFM

ACCOUNT BLOCK LIMIT.

The monitor detected the expiration of the
account block SRU limit.

Reset account block SRU
limit with SETASL
command or macro. If
the account block limit
is set at its maximum,
issue another CHARGE
command to begin a new
account block.

1AJ

ADDING FILE lfn TO DATABASE.

File lfn is being read; RECLAIM is
adding information for this file to
your database.

None.

RECLAIM

ADDING TAPE vsn TO DATABASE.

Tape with VSN vsn is being read; RECLAIM is
adding information for this tape to your
database.

None.

ADDRESS OUT OF RANGE.

An address in a parameter block is outside
the job's field length.

Specify parameter block
address within field
length.

ADDRESS OUT OF RANGE address.

LOC read
statement
the job's
statement

Correct the correction
statement(s) and retry.

CPMEM

AFD - INPUT FILE NOT FOUND.

The file specified by the I=filename
parameter is not a local file.

Retry using a local file.

DAYFILE

AFD - UNEXPECTED EOF/EOI ENCOUNTERED.

An EOF or EOI was encountered before the
PRU count was depleted on the input file.
The dayfile is shorter than expected based
on the PRU count.

Retry operation.

ALL EQ.-S CHECKPOINTED.
RECOVERY ABORTED.

In the process of aborting a CM recovery,
1CK was called to process all outstanding
checkpoint requests.

Level 0 deadstart
required.

filename ALREADY PERMANENT.

You have already saved or defined a file
with the name specified.

Save or define file
u s i n g d i f f e r e n t fi l e
name or purge existing
fi l e .

B-2

an address on a correction
that is greater than or equal to
field length. The correction
is ignored and LOC continues.

/*S^\

1CK

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

ALTERNATE IMAGE OBSOLETE.

T h e d i s k s p a c e f o r t h e fi l e c a n n o t b e
released because the alternate storage
image is labeled obsolete or the alternate
s t o r a g e a d d r e s s i s n o t s p e c i fi e d i n t h e
p e r m a n e n t fi l e c a t a l o g .

ALTERNATE STORAGE ERROR.

It is not possible to drop the disk space
a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e s p e c i fi e d p e r m a n e n t
fi l e , s i n c e a n e r r o r e x i s t s o n t h e
a l t e r n a t e s t o r a g e c o p y o f t h e fi l e .

None.

PFM

APPENDED - type/name

The record with type and name on the
r e p l a c e m e n t fi l e w a s n o t m a t c h e d ; i t h a s
b e e n a p p e n d e d t o t h e n e w fi l e . A o p t i o n
selected.

None.

COPYL
COPYLM

APPLICATION NAME IS REQUIRED.

You entered an APPSW command that did not
specify a secondary application.

Reenter the command with
the appl parameter
s p e c i fi e d .

APPLICATION NOT PRESENT.

The requested application is currently not
available for use.

Enter the name of
another application or
l o g o ff a n d t r y l a t e r.

APPLICATION RETRY LIMIT.

Four unsuccessful attempts were made to
enter a legal application name, after which
the terminal was disconnected.

Check the accuracy of
t h e e n t r y. I f p r o b l e m s
persist, contact
installation personnel.

NETVAL

ARA BURST DEFFECTIVE.

First block of tape at 1600 or 6250 cpi
cannot be read or written. Another unit or
t a p e s h o u l d b e t r i e d . T h e d a y fi l e m e s s a g e
STATUS ERROR, filename AT address precedes
t h i s m e s s a g e a n d s p e c i fi e s t h e fi l e
( fi l e n a m e ) a n d t h e a d d r e s s a d d r.

Retry or inform site
analyst.

1MT

ARG. ERROR.

LDR parameters were outside your job's
fi e l d l e n g t h o r t h e c e n t r a l m e m o r y a d d r e s s
i n c a l l i s n o t w i t h i n y o u r j o b ' s fi e l d
length.

Examine program to
d e t e r m i n e e r r o r.

LDR

ARGUMENT ERROR.

The command syntax is incorrect. When the
system processes tape management commands,
for example, it issues this message if both
ring enforcement options (P0=R and P0=W) or
more than one EOT option (P0=I, P0=P, and
P 0 = S ) i s s p e c i fi e d . A l s o s p e c i fi c a t i o n o f
duplicate parameters (more than one
occurrence of a keyword) or multiple
e q u i v a l e n t p a r a m e t e r s ( s u c h a s M T / N T,
C B / C K , F I / L , R / W, a n d s o f o r t h ) i s n o t
allowed on a tape assignment command. The
address parameter on DMPECS, DMDECS, LBC,
LOC, PBC, or WBR must be numeric.

Reenter command using
the correct parameters
and syntax.

COPYB
CPMEM
FOTD
LDI
L072
RECOVER
RESEX
SU8SYST
COPYB

ARGUMENT ERRORS.

The ENQUIRE command's syntax is incorrect.

Check parameters on
command and retry.

ENQUIRE

ARITHMETIC INDEFINITE.

T h e C P U fl o a t i n g - p o i n t a r i t h m e t i c u n i t
a t t e m p t e d t o u s e a n i n d e fi n i t e o p e r a n d .

Analyze the job output
and dumps to determine
the cause.

1AJ

ARITHMETIC OVERFLOW.

T h e C P U fl o a t i n g - p o i n t a r i t h m e t i c u n i t
received an operand too large for
computation.

Analyze the job output
and dumps to determine
the cause.

1AJ

ARITHMETIC UNDERFLOW.

T h e C P U fl o a t i n g - p o i n t a r i t h m e t i c u n i t
received an operand too small for
computation.

Analyze the job output
and dumps to determine
the cause.

1AJ

est, ASSIGNED TO filename,

Informative message specifying EST ordinal
a s s i g n e d t o fi l e fi l e n a m e .

None.

LFM

ttest, ASSIGNED TO filename,

Equipment type tt with EST ordinal est was
a s s i g n e d t o fi l e fi l e n a m e .

None.

LFM

jsn ASSIGNS EXCEED DEMANDS.

S y s t e m e r r o r. T h e r e s o u r c e s a c t u a l l y
a s s i g n e d t o t h e j o b w i t h t h e s p e c i fi e d j o b
sequence name exceed the resources demanded
on a RESOURC command.

Inform site analyst.

ATTRIBUTE COMMANDS MUST 8E OF ONE NETWORK
TYPE.

Te r m i n a l a t t r i b u t e s u n i q u e t o N A M / C C P a n d
to NAM/CDCNET were specified on the same
TRMDEF command.

On the TRMDEF command,
check to ensure that all
terminal attributes are
supported by your
network type.

60459680 H

TRMDEF

8-3

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

BAD CATALOG/PERMIT SECTOR.

PFM has encountered a catalog or permit
sector which does not have a valid sector
length. This indicates corruption of
system areas on disk.

Inform site analyst.
If many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITIALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

BAD DATA IN OLDPL HEADER

The file is a program library but its
program library is not of a recognizable
format.

Tr y r e b u i l d i n g t h e fi l e i f
possible. Inform site
analyst.

BAD FCOPY CONVERSION TABLE.

FCOPY tables are in error.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

n BAD FORMAT BLOCKS.

Block(s) not meeting X or Si-coded
conversion requirements have been
encountered on input.

Check tape format for
errors.

COPYB

BINARY SEQ. ERROR, RECxxxx CDyyyy.

A binary command was found to be out of
sequence and the job was terminated without
EXIT processing. Error is on command yyyy
of record xxxx.

Examine sequencing of
binary deck and correct
e r r o r.

1AJ

BLANK LABELS DO NOT VERIFY.

The tape labels written on the blank tape
could not be verified, probably due to
hardware failure.

Request that the
operator blank label the
tape using a different
tape drive.

BLANK

BLANK TAPE, filename AT address.

A blank tape was read. Blank tape is
defined as more than 25 feet of erased tape.

Ensure correct tape is
specified on command.

1MT

BLOCK NUMBER nnnnnn, filename AT address.

A tape error has occurred at block nnnnnn.
A second message generally accompanies
this message, giving more detail as to
the nature of the error.

None.

1MT

BLOCK SEQUENCE ERROR, filename AT address.

The block length recorded in the
not match the length of the block
the block number recorded in the
not match the system block count
message applies to I format tapes

Ensure accuracy of
format parameter (F) on
command or macro.

1MT

BLOCK SIZE NOT APPLICABLE.

Either the CC or BS parameter was specified
on a COPY command for which neither the
input nor output file was an S or L format
tape or the CC parameter was specified on a
COPYB command without the E or B conversion
parameter specified.

Refer to the COPY or
COPYB command
description, correct the
command, and retry.

COPYB

BLOCK SIZE TOO LARGE ON filenam.

S tape block size exceeds maximum for that
format (1000B) and COPY or character count
for E or B tape COPYB exceeds maximum for
that format (5120 characters).

Reduce the block size or
character counts.

C0PY8

BLOCK SIZE TOO SMALL ON filename.

On F to F tape copy the maximum frame count
for the first file exceeds that of the
second file. On S and L tape copy, block
size is less than noise size. On E and B
tape COPYB, block size is less than the
corresponding S tape noise size.

Increase block size so
that it is greater than
the noise size. On F to
F tape copy, increase
output file block size
so it is greater than
the block size of the
i n p u t fi l e .

COPYB

BLOCK TOO LARGE, filename AT address.

The tape being read contained a data block
greater in size than that allowed by the
specified format or by your specification.

Ensure accuracy of
format parameter (F) on
command or macro.

1MT

BLOCK TOO LONG FOR BUFFERS.

The product of the fixed length line length
(FL parameter) and the lines per block (LB
parameter) was greater than 3840D.

Correct parameters and
r e t r y.

FCOPY

BOT/EOT ENCOUNTERED, filename AT address.

Indicates an abnormal tape position.

Inform site analyst if
persistent.

1MT

BREAKPOINT CONDITION.

The job executed an address for which a
breakpoint was requested by the system.

Inform software support.

1AJ

BUFFER ARG. ERROR.

CM address in call is not less than the
field length minus the word count; buffer
extends past the job's field length.

Verify that operation
does not reference
address beyond end of
b u ff e r o r j o b ' s fi e l d
length.

1AJ
TCS

B-4

file did
read, or
file did
(this
only).

ITEMIZE

60459680 H

/*^^v

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

BUFFER ARGUMENT ERROR, filename AT address.

For tape operations, this message indicates
one of the following.
- FET less than 7 words long for S/L format
- MLRS greater than 1000 octal for S format
- POSMF issued and no HDR1 label found in
FET or extended label buffer
refer to Volume 4.

Examine program to
determine error.

BUFFER ARGUMENT ERROR ON filename AT
address.

A buffer pointer did not conform to the
following constraints.
- FIRST .LE. IN
- FIRST .LE. OUT
- IN AMD OUT .LT. LIMIT .LE. FL
Refer to Volume 4.

Examine program to
determine error in
buffer pointers.

1MS

BUFFER CONTROL WORD ERROR.

Dayfile message indicating that the word
count in the disk linkage is greater than
100B.

Take a deadstart dump,
write a PSR, and send
the dump and PSR to CDC
along with any support
materials which will
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

SLL

BUFFER CONTROL WORD ERROR, filename AT
address.

Either an attempt was made to write a block
smaller than the noise size on an S, L, or
F format tape, or a control word error
occurred in a write (such as bad byte
count).

Examine program to
determine error.

1MT

BUFFER OVERFLOW - ALL FILES LISTED BUT NOT
SORTED.

Informative output file message indicating
that you have more permanent files than can
fit in the sort buffer. The system listed
all of the files but not in alphabetical
o r d e r.

BUFFER SPACE ERROR (TOV)

I n t e r n a l e r r o r.

Submit a PSR with
information on how
to duplicate the
problem.

pfn BUSY.

The specified direct access file is
currently attached in an incompatible
mode, or is already being accessed by
4095 users in your specified mode (R,
RA, RU, or RM).

Reissue ATTACH until
file becomes available,
or issue ATTACH
specifying WB option.

CALLING JOB MAY NOT DROP ITSELF.

You attempted to drop your current job.

Do not attempt to drop
your current job.

CANNOT ATTACH/GET FILE-FILE SKIPPED.

An error occurred when attempting to get or
attach a file. The file may have been
attached or purged by another job.

Check your dayfile for a
specific error message.
If you do not find one,
inform the site analyst.

RECLAIM

CANNOT CHANGE CLASS OF ON-LINE JOB.

You extended a CLASS command with a JSN
parameter that attempted to change the
service class of an on-line job. You
cannot use the JSN parameter to change the
service class of an on-line job.

None.

CLASS

CANNOT CHANGE CLASS OF SUBSYSTEM.

The service class of a job executing at the
subsystem service class cannot be changed.

CARD READER ERROR.

Job was terminated without exit processing.

Resubmit job.

1AJ

CATALOG ARGUMENT ERROR.

The syntax of the CATALOG command is
incorrect.

Check the CATALOG
command description and
correct the command.

CATALOG

CATALOG FILE NAME CONFLICT.

The same file was named as the file to be
cataloged and as the file onto which the
catalog is written.

Change one of the file
names on the CATALOG
command.

CATLIST COMPLETE.

Informative message indicating a successful
completion of the CATLIST command.

None.

CATLIST

CCL1O0-SEPARATOR FOLLOWING VERB MUST BE
COMMA OR LEFT PARENTHESIS

Separator following verb (directive name)
must be a comma or a left parenthesis.

Change separator
following verb to a
comma or a left
parenthesis.

CCL

CCL101-LAST NON-BLANK CHARACTER MUST BE
SEPARATOR

Last character string of line was not
followed by a separator or a terminator.

To terminate command,
make last nonblank
character a period or
r i g h t p a r e n t h e s i s . To
continue command on next
command or line, make
last nonblank character
a valid separator.

CCL

60459680 H

CLASS

B-5

|

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTIo,

CCL102-EQUAL SIGN MUST FOLLOW FIRST SYMBOLIC
NAME

The first parameter in a SET command is a
symbolic name to be equated. An equal sign
must follow the symbolic name.

Change separator
following the symbolic
name to an equal sign.
Equal sign must be
followed by an
expression.

CCL103-STATEMENT INCOMPLETE

A terminator was detected immediately
following the command name.

Check command format
(refer to section 6)
and rewrite command,
using a comma
or left parenthesis
after the command name.

CCL

CCL104-EXPRESSI0N AND COMMAND TERMINATED
BY terminator

An expression or a command name was
followed by a command terminator (period or
right parenthesis) instead of a comma. Any
of the following conditions may produce
this error. This message is informative and
is issued in conjunction with message
CCL123.
- The label string parameter was omitted.
- A relational or logical operator was
delimited by a period on left side only.
- An unmatched right parenthesis appeared
in expression. If the separator
following a command name was a left
parenthesis, an unmatched right
parenthesis may appear matched. For
example, IFE(R1+R2)=3, LABEL, is
terminated by right parenthesis.

- Place a comma after
the expression or the
command name and add
a label parameter.
- Delimit operator with
periods on both sides.
- If error was caused
by a misleading left
parenthesis following
the command name, add
a comma immediately
after the command
name. Otherwise,
recheck all
parentheses and match
unmatched right
parenthesis.

CCL

CCL120-ALL COMMANDS SKIPPED - XXXXXX

In process of skipping, end of command
record was reached. Any of the following
conditions may produce this error.
- An IFE, SKIP, or ELSE expression was
false and no ENDIF command terminated
resultant skip.
- A WHILE expression was false and no ENDW
command terminated resultant skip.
- An ENDW command was not preceded by a
WHILE command.

- Either add an ENDIF
command with a
matching label string
or correct existing
ENDIF command.
- Either add an ENDW
command with a
matching label string
or correct existing
ENDW command so that
WHILE and ENDW label
strings match.
- Precede ENDW command
with a WHILE command.

CCL

CCL121-LABEL STRING MUST BEGIN WITH ALPHA
CHARACTER

The first character of a label string must
not be numeric.

Change label string to a
label string of 1 to 7
alphanumeric characters,
beginning with an
alphabetic character.

CCL

CCL123-ALPHANUMERIC LABEL STRING REQUIRED

The commands ELSE, ENDIF, ENDW, IFE, SKIP,
and WHILE require a label string
parameter. This message is issued in
conjunction with the message CCL104.

Refer to message CCL104
for cause and suggested
action.

CCL124-PRECEDING ERR MSG. APPLIES TO
FOLLOWING

Dayfile message which precedes CCL124 is an
error message which was caused by the
command printed after CCL124.

Refer to error message
which precedes this in
the dayfile for cause
and suggested action.

CCL

CCL125-NUMBER OF COMMANDS SUPPRESSED=X

A command which the system is printing from
an internal buffer continued over more
lines of input than buffer size. The
system prints the first three lines and
then prints this message to indicate the
number of lines suppressed, x. Remaining
lines of the command follow this message.

None.

CCL

CCL126-C0MMANDS TERMINATOR MUST FOLLOW
LABEL

Either of the following conditions may
produce this error.
- A label string is last parameter on an
ELSE, ENDIF, ENDW, IF, SKIP, or WHILE
command. It must be followed by a
period or a right parenthesis.
- An expression contained a comma, and the
character string that followed was
assumed to be a label string.

CCL127-LA8EL STRING EXCEEDS xx CHARACTERS

The label string parameter on an ELSE,
ENDIF, ENDW, IFE, SKIP, or WHILE command is
greater than xx characters, xx is the
maximum number of characters defined by
installation.

/*^8j\

Terminate command
with a period or a
right parenthesis.
Either remove comma
or replace it with a
left parenthesis,
depending on nature
o f e r r o r.
Change label string on
any command it appears
to a label string with
xx or fewer alphanumeric
characters.

CCL

^^^S
|

B-6

60459680 H

0^t\

MESSAGE

ACTION

x is not a valid operator in the preceding
command.

If x is part of a
character string,
^-delimit character
string. If x is an
intended operator, refer
to section 6 for a list
of valid operators.

CCL151-EXPRESSION FORMAT ERROR (IN FILE
FUNCTION)

The format of the expression is incorrect.
The probable cause is use of commas or
unmatched left parenthesis within an
expression. If error was detected within a
FILE function, IN FILE FUNCTION is included
in message. FILE function must be of form
FILE(filename,exp), where exp is a valid
function or symbolic name.

Check parentheses and
match unmatched left
parenthesis or remove
excess commas from FILE
function.

CCL152-POORLY FORMED FUNCTION (NUM, DT, SS)

You made one of the following errors.
- Separator after function name is not a
left parenthesis or function is not
terminated by a right parenthesis.
- Character string evaluated by function
contained special characters but was not
$-delimited.

Correct format of
function.
S-delimit special
characters.

CCL153-INC0RRECT FUNCTION CALL (WITHIN FILE
FUNCTION)

The NUM function, FILE function, or SS
symbolic name appears within a FILE
function.

Restructure expression
SO NUM, SS, or FILE is
not within a FILE
function.

CCL154-INCORRECT EXPONENT

A negative exponent in an expression is
incorrect.

Remove minus sign
preceding exponent.

CCL155-OPERATOR OR OPERAND SEQUENCE ERROR

You made one of the following errors.
- Sequence of adjacent operators is
incorrect. For example, 3*-4 is not
allowed.
- An operand is adjacent to a left or

- Use parentheses to

00&\

>

SIGNIFICANCE

CCL150-EXPRESSI0N CONTAINS INCORRECT OPERATOR

right parenthesis. Implied
multiplication is not allowed. For
exampte, 3(R+1) is incorrect.

ROUTINE

CCL

CCL

CCL

separate adjacent
operators.
- Use an operator to
separate operand and
parenthesis.

CCL156-STRING TOO LONG -strng

The listed character string is too long. A
character string may not be longer than 10
characters, excluding $ delimiters for
literals.

Shorten character string
to 10 characters or less.

CCL

CCL157-UNKNOWN NAME -strng

The alphanumeric character string strng is
is not a symbolic name recognized by the
system.

Replace strng with a
valid symbolic name.
Refer to Section 6 for a
list of valid symbolic
names.

CCL

CCL158-OPERATOR/TERMINATOR MUST FOLLOW
FUNCTION (DT, FILE, NUM)

A function was properly formed and
positioned within a command, but it was not
followed by an operator, separator, or
terminator.

Place an operator,
separator, or terminator
after function.

CCL159-FIRST PARAMETER INCORRECT IN SET
COMMAND

The first parameter in the SET command was
not one of the following symbolic names:
DSC, EF, EFG, R1, R2, R3, R1G, or SS.

Replace first parameter
with a valid symbolic
name.

CCL

CCL160-NUMERIC OR LITERAL ILLEGAL (IN FILE
FUNCTION)

The expression of a FILE function may
contain only symbolic names defined for the
function.

Remove numeric or
literal character
string. Refer to
section 6 for a list of
FILE symbolic names.

CCL

CCL161-STACK OVERFLOW

Evaluation of an expression overflowed
either operator or operand stack.

Check expression for
errors and correct. If
no errors, either
simplify expression or
break it apart so that
two or more commands
have same effect as one.

CCL

CCL162 - PERIOD BRACKETED OPERATORS
PREFERRED

Informative message indicating that a
single character operator was used in an
expression, (i.e., > instead of .GT.).

Use period bracketed
operators.

CCL

CCL163-SUBSYSTEM REFERENCE ERROR

The system does not recognize the name
associated with the symbolic name SS.

Refer to section 6 for a
list of valid names.

CCL164 - PAGE PARAMETER ERROR

An error was detected when setting the job
default page size symbols PD, PS, PW.

Check to see if the
value in the expression
is within the range of
the symbol.

/^*N
60459680 H

B-7

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

CCL

CCL200-PR0CEDURE NESTING LEVEL xx EXCEEDED

The current procedure call forced procedure
nesting to exceed the limit of xx, which is
defined by installation.

Reposition procedure
calls so limit xx is not
exceeded.

CCL201-PROCEDURE NAME MORE THAN 7 CHARACTERS

A procedure name cannot be greater than 7
characters.

Rename procedure.

CCL202 - PROCEDURE FILE IS EXECUTE ONLY
MODE

The procedure file was
the call in execute-only
procedure file may have
the call in execute-only

Return file and attach
with default mode.

CCL203-PR0CEDURE FILE NAME NOT SPECIFIED OR
INCORRECT

You made one of the following errors:
- File name specified on procedure call
was greater than 40 characters.
- pfile parameter on procedure call was
null. Your site does not have a default
f o r p fi l e .

- Specify a file name
with seven or fewer
characters.
- Specify a file name.

CCL204-MULTIPLE EQUIVALENCE SPECIFICATIONS
FOR XX

A keyword has been specified more than once
on a procedure call. The last
specification is used.

If a preceding
s p e c i fi c a t i o n i s
desired, remove
succeeding
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .
Otherwise, no action is
required.

CCL205-FORMAL PARAMETER LIST DOES NOT
INCLUDE -x

While is equivalence mode, the system
discovered a keyword x on the procedure
call that was not specified on the
procedure header directive.

Remove keyword x from
procedure call.

CCL

CCL206-SYMBOLIC SPECIFICATION INCORRECT xxx

A parameter, xxx, on the procedure call is
followed by a plus sign. A plus sign
indicates that the system is to convert the
value to display code and is valid only
when preceded by a symbolic name and
followed by a D, B, or a null field.
(Example: R1+B is a valid value, but 37+R1
is not.)

If plus sign is part of
a character string,
S-detimit character
string. If plus sign
should convert a
symbolic name to display
code, replace xxx with a
valid symbolic name.
Refer to section 6 for a
list of valid symbotic
names.

CCL

CCL207-PROCEDURE NAMED BEGIN IS INCORRECT

A procedure must not be named 8EGIN.

Select another procedure
name.

CCL

CCL211-SPECIFICATION EXCEEDS xx CHARACTERS

The value on a procedure call or default
value on a procedure header directive is
greater than xx characters, xx is defined
by installation.

Specify a value with xx
or fewer characters.

CCL

CCL212-SEPARAT0R INCORRECT strng s

s is an incorrect separator and strng is
the character string that precedes s. Any
of the following conditions produces this
e r r o r.
- On a procedure call, the separator

attached prior to
mode. The
been saved prior to
mode.

preceding a formal keyword or a
positionally specified value is not a
comma.
- Invalid separator is part of a character
string. If a valid separator
immediately precedes incorrect separator
s, the string is null.
- 0DATA or #FILE has been specified on the
procedure call.

Change separator s to
a comma.
$-delimit character
string.
Remove #DATA or 0FILE
from procedure call
and specify it on
procedure header
directive.

CCL213-END OF INFORMATION ON PROMPTED INPUT

The user assigned INPUT to a file that is
at the end of information, and CCL needs to
prompt for a parameter. The INPUT file
probably contains faulty data.

Correct the file
contents or supply the
CCL parameters
i n t e r a c t i v e l y.

CCL230-PROCEDURE FILE NOT FOUND

The file named on the procedure call was
not assigned to the job and the
installation chose to inhibit automatic
retrieval of a permanent file with that
name.

Check file name for
errors and correct. If
name is correct,
r e t r i e v e fi l e p r i o r t o
procedure call.

CCL231-PROCEDURE NOT FOUND

The local or permanent file indicated on
the procedure call was found, but the
system could not find the procedure on the
fi l e .

Check procedure name for
errors and correct. If
name is correct, check
file for procedure.

CCL232 - PROCEDURE FILE IS BUSY.

The CCL ATTACH found a file busy status on
the procedure file.

Clear file busy
condition and resubmit
procedure.

B-8

CCL

CCL

CCL

60459680 H

*^?N

CCL
CCL

header

and

CCL

60459680 H

/!^V

vtfmfB&V

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

CCL330 - EXPECTED , = OR ) AFTER CHECKLIST
PATTERN

The pattern part of a checklist item can
only be followed by another pattern
preceded by a comma, a replacement value
preceded by an equal sign, or a right
parenthesis to indicate the end of the
checklist.

Correct procedure header
and resubmit.

CCL

CCL331 - EXPECTED , OR ) AFTER PATTERN VALUE

The replacement value part of a checklist
item can only be followed by another
pattern preceded by a comma or a right
parenthesis to indicate the end of a
checklist.

Correct procedure header
and resubmit.

CCL

CCL332 - WRITE SET AS *SN(SET) ON PROC
HEADER

A set pattern in a checklist must be
written as *S followed by an optional
unsigned integer in the range 1-40 followed
by up to 40 characters enclosed in
parentheses.

Correct procedure header
and resubmit.

CCL

CCL333 - DUPLICATE *K *N - PROC HEADER

A single checklist may not contain more
than one *K or more than one *N pattern.

Correct procedure header
and resubmit.

CCL

CCL334 - MISSING QUOTE - PROMPT/TITLE/
DESCRIPTION

A prompt, title, or description string on
the procedure header must begin and end
with a quote and cannot extend onto another
line.

Insert quotes.

CCL

CCL335 - DESCRIPTION MISSING 3 BRACKET.

The terminating right bracket (1) on a
description string was not found.

Start the string with a
left bracket (O and
terminate it with a
right bracket (1).

CCL

CCL336 - PATTERN OR VALUE ON PROC HEADER
-GT. 40

A single checklist item may contain literal
patterns and replacement values (values
which stand for themselves). These values
may not exceed 40 characters in length.
Literals may not exceed 40 characters after
evaluation.

Correct procedure header
and resubmit.

CCL

CCL352 - HELP PARAMETER NAME NOT FOUND

If a commas follows the .HELP directive,
the system expects to find a parameter
name or the parameter NOLIST.

Correct directive and
resubmit.

CCL

CCL353 - ONLY COMMA ALLOWED AFTER .HELP

The system found something other than comma
after .KELP directive.

Correct directive and
resubmit.

CCL

CCL354 - .HELP STATEMENT INCORRECTLY
WRITTEN

The .HELP directive can have one of four
formats:
.HELP.
.HELP,keyword.
.HELP,keyword,N0LIST.
•HELP,,NOLIST.

Correct directive
resubmit.

CCL

CCL355 - NO .ENDHELP FOR .HELP

The system found an end of record before it
encountered a .ENDHELP directive.

Add an .ENDHELP
directive and resubmit.

CCL357 - DUPLICATE HELP DIRECTIVES IN PROC
BODY

Either more than one .HELP directive with
no parameter name or more than one .HELP
directive with the same parameter name was
found.

Delete duplicate .HELP
directives and retry.

CCL373 - EXPECTING ( OR , AFTER .IF .ELSE
.ENDIF.

A .IF, .ELSE, or .ENDIF directive in the
procedure body must have a left parenthesis
or a comma immediately following the
directive name.

Insert a left
parenthesis or a comma.

CCL374 - EXPECTING PERIOD AFTER .EX

A period must follow the .EX directive name
in the procedure body.

Insert a period after
the directive name.

CCL

CCL375 - COMMAND IS NULL ON .EX DIRECTIVE.

You have not specified a command on the .EX
directive.

Specify a command on the
directive.

CCL

CCL376 - .IF DIRECTIVE HAS INCOMPLETE
EXPRESSION

A .IF directive in the procedure body is
incomplete.

Complete the expression
and add a label or
command to the directive.

CCL

CCL377 - EXPECTING , ) OR . AFTER .IF
EXPRESSION

A comma, period, or right parenthesis must
follow the expression on a .IF directive in
the procedure body.

Insert a comma, period,
or right parenthesis
after the expression.

CCL

CCL378 - , OR C MUST FOLLOW .DIRECTIVE NAME

A procedure directive is missing the comma
or left parenthesis separator.

Place separator after
the directive name.

CCL379 - NO .ENDIF FOR .IF/.ELSE LABEL
aaaaaa - LAST LINES SKIPPED

A .ENDIF directive with a label matching
the .IF/.ELSE directive label aaaaaa was
not found.

Add a .ENDIF directive
or correct label on
existing .ENDIF.

60459680 H

CCL

B-11

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

CCL

CCL380 - EXPECTING TITLE OR , AFTER *M ON
HEADER

A title, if there is one, or a comma was
not found immediately following the *M on a
menu procedure.

Place a title surrounded
by quotes after the *M
or else place a comma
after *M.

CCL381 - KEYWORD MISSING ON MENU HEADER

You must specify a formal parameter keyword
after the procedure name in the procedure
header of a menu-generating procedure.

Insert a parameter
keyword.

CCL382 - PROMPT ON PROC HEADER IS TOO LARGE

A prompt/description string on your
procedure header is greater than 40
6/12-bit display code or 80 6-bit display
code characters.

Reduce the size of the
prompt string.

CCL

CCL383 - MISSING SELECTION ON MENU HEADER

Your procedure header checklist has a null
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

Specify a checklist with
integer selections.

CCL

CCL384 - TITLE ON PROC HEADER IS TOO LARGE

A title string on a menu procedure header
is greater than 40 6/12-bit display code or
80 6-bit display code characters.

Reduce the size of the
title string.

CCL

CCL385 - EXPECTING = AFTER KEYWORD ON
HEADER

An equal sign must follow the parameter
keyword on your procedure header.

Insert an equal sign
after the parameter
keyword.

CCL

CCL386 - EXPECTING COMMA AFTER HEADER
TITLE

A character other than a comma was found
following the title on the procedure header.

Place a comma after the
title.

CCL

CCL387 - BEGINNING OF HEADER CHECKLIST NOT
FOUND

Either your procedure header does not
contain a checklist or the checklist begins
with a special character other than a left
parenthesis.

Specify a checklist
beginning with a left
parenthesis.

CCL

CCL388 - EXPECTING INTEGER HEADER SELECTION
OPTION

You specified a non integer selection in
your procedure header checklist. A
selection must be a 1- to 10-digit integer.

Make all menu selections
integers.

CCL

CCL390 - EXPECTING , OR ) AFTER CHECKLIST
SELECTION

You specified a special character other
than comma or right parenthesis after a
menu selection on your procedure header.

Replace the special
character with a comma
or terminate the
checklist with a right
parenthesis.

CCL

CCL392 - EXPECTING , OR ) AFTER HEADER
PROMPT

You specified a special character other
than comma or right parenthesis after a
prompt/description string on your procedure
header.

Replace the special
character with a comma
or terminate the
checklist with a right
parenthesis.

CCL

CCL393 - EXPECTING PERIOD AFTER HEADER
CHECKLIST

You specified either no period or a special
character other than a period following a
procedure header checklist.

Insert a period after
the checklist.

CCL

CCL394 - TOO MANY HEADER SELECTIONS
SPECIFIED

You specified more than 50 menu selections
in your procedure header checklist.

Reduce the number of
selections.

CCL

CCL395 - HEADER SELECTION EXCEEDS 10
CHARACTERS

In your procedure header, a menu selection
number contains more than 10 digits.

Use 10 or fewer digits
for your selection.

CCL

CCL421 - EXPECTING , OR ( AFTER .DIRECTIVE

A character other than , or ( was specified
between the directive name and its
parameters.

Place a , or ( after the
directive name.

CCL

CCL422 - A .DIRECTIVE WAS FOUND IN THE PROC
BODY

One of the following:
- A line that is not a directive begins
with a period or a , or a directive is
misplaced.
- A .HELP, .PROMPT, .ENTER, .PAGE, .CORRECT,

Correct the error
and resubmit.

CCL

•F1, .F2, .F3, .F4, .FS, or .F6 directive
was found after .ENDHELP in the procedure
body.
- An .EOR or .EOF directive is outside
of the data section of the procedure
body.

|

CCL440 - EXPECTING INHIBIT CHARACTER - .IC
DIRECTIVE

The .K directive is missing a special
character which would replace the current
inhibition character.

Specify a special
character as a
replacement.

CCL441 - EXPECTING CONCATENATION CHARACTER
- .CC

The .CC directive is missing a special
character which would replace the current
concatenation character.

Specify a special
character as a
replacement.

CCL442 - EXPECTING TERMINATOR ON DIRECTIVE

A CCL directive was not terminated by a
period or right parenthesis.

Terminate the directive
with a period or a right
parenthesis.

B-12

CCL

60459680 H

MESSAGE

r^

ACTION

SIGNIFICANCE

ROUTINE

CCL443 - EXPECTING ON/OFF
.EXPAND DIRECTIVE

The only arguments allowed for .EXPAND are
ON and OFF. The argument must be preceded
by a comma or opening parenthesis and
followed by a period or closing
parenthesis. The argument may be omitted.

Correct the argument or
syntax and resubmit.

CCL

CCL480- USE NUMERIC MIN..MAX VALUES IN
RANGE

A non-numeric minimum or maxium range was
found within a checklist on the procedure
header.

Use a numeric minimum or
maximum range.

CCL

CCL481- USE CONSECUTIVE PERIODS MIN..MAX
IN RANGE

A range was specified on the procedure
header without 2 consecutive periods
separating the minimum and maximum.

Use consecutive periods
to specify a range.

CCL

CCL482- MINIMUM EXCEEDS MAXIMUM IN RANGE

A checklist range on the procedure header
has a minimum larger than the maximum.

Change either the
minimum or maximum and
resubmit the procedure.

CCL483- *F RANGE MUST BE .GE. 1 AND .LE. 7

The *F checklist pattern specifies a file
name, which cannot exceed 7 characters.

Correct range maximum to
7 or less.

CCL484- *A RANGE MUST BE .GE. 1 AND .LE. 40

The range for the *A checklist pattern was
zero or greater than 40.

Correct *A checklist
range.

CCL485- USE *SN(SET) OR *SN/M FOR SET
ATTRIBUTES

The *S checklist pattern has two forms.
The first is *Sn(SET) and the second is
*Sn/M. The *S specification on the
procedure header does not conform to either.

Correct the *S checklist
pattern.

CCL

CCL486- USE M=A,D,B,AD,AB for *SN/M TYPE
SET

When the *Sn/M checklist pattern is used,
only A, D, B, or AB may be substituted for
M. For example: *S2..10/AD

Correct the *S checklist
pattern.

CCL

CCL487- RANGE MAXIMUM MUST BE .GT. ZERO

A checklist range on the procedure header
has a maximum of zero.

Change the maximum to a
value greater than zero.

CCL

CFO FROM JOB jsn

The CFO command was issued to the job by
the job jsn.

CFO FROM OPERATOR

The CFO command was issued to the job by
the console operator.

CHANNEL MALFUNCTION, filename AT address.
* CHARGE(charge,project)

1RI
None.

1RI

A hardware malfunction occurred.

Inform site analyst.

1MT

Indicates that you entered the default
format of the CHARGE command (CHARGE,*).
c h a r g e Yo u r d e f a u l t c h a r g e n u m b e r.
p r o j e c t Yo u r d e f a u l t p r o j e c t n u m b e r.

None

CHARGE

CHARGE ABORTED.

Dayfile message indicating that a central
site operator action caused the CHARGE
operation to abnormally terminate.

Reenter CHARGE command.

CHARGE

CHARGE CARD REQUIRED.

A CHARGE command is required before the
current USER command may be processed.

Enter a CHARGE command
and retry.

CHARGE

CHARGE COMMAND REQUIRED.

Dayfile message indicating that a CHARGE
command must be executed before the
requested command can be executed.

Enter a valid CHARGE
command and then reenter
the original command.

1AJ

CHARGE FILE BUSY.

Dayfile message indicating that the file
which the system uses to validate charge
numbers and project numbers is busy.

Reenter CHARGE command.

CHARGE

CHARGE INCORRECT AT THIS HOUR.

Dayfile message indicating that the
specified project number cannot be used at
this time of day.

Retry during the time
the project number is
valid.

CHARGE

CHARGE NOT VALID.

Dayfile and output file message indicating
one of the following:
- The charge or project number does not
exist.
- The project number is not available to a
user with this user name.
- The charge and project exist but are
inactive.

Check correctness of
charge and project
number. Use another
charge and project
number.

CHARGE

CHARGE NUMBER EXPIRED.

Dayfile and output file message indicating
the charge number expiration date has
occurred.

CHARGE REQUIRED.

Charge number and project number are
required to complete login sequence.

Enter CHARGE command
with appropriate charge
and project numbers.

/$ps\
60459680 H

B-13

ACTION

SIGNIFICANCE

MESSAGE

ROUTINE

CHECK DAYFILE FOR ERRORS.

Informative message indicating that you
should check the dayfile for errors.

Examine error messages
i n d a y fi l e .

PFATC
PFCAT
PFCOPY
PFDUMP
PFLOAD
COPYB

CHECKPOINT nnnn COMPLETE.

Indicates that checkpoint nnnn has
completed. Issued if only one checkpoint
fi l e i s p r e s e n t .

None.

CHKPT

CHECKPOINT nnnn COMPLETED TO filename.

Indicates that checkpoint nnnn has been
completed to file filename. Issued if
alternate CB checkpoint files are used.

CHECKPOINT FILE ACCESS LEVEL ERROR.

In a secure system, the checkpoint file
access level is not the same as the job
access level limit, This is to insure that
the checkpoint file is secure enough to
contain alt local fi Les. The access level
of the checkpoint fi le is not changed to
this level since thi s is not possible for
magnetic tape files or direct access
permanent file, and these are the usual
file types used for checkpoint files.

Insure that the access
level of the checkpoint
file is the same as the
job access level upper
limit.

CHKPT

CHECKPOINT FILE ERROR.

For
the
the
that

Correct specification of
checkpoint file.

RESTART

CHECKPOINT FILE ERROR.

During a checkpoint operation, more than
two checkpoint files were present or two
checkpoint files of type "CK" were present.

Correct specification of
c h e c k p o i n t fi l e .

CHKPT

CHECKPOINT NOT FOUND.

The specified checkpoint (nn parameter on
RESTART command) could not be found on the
fi l e .

Verify that checkpoint
i s o n fi l e .

CHKPT UNABLE TO READ TAPE.

Indicates a tape file had an unrecovered
parity error when CHKPT tried to write it
to the checkpoint file.

RESTART, this message indicates that
structure of the file declared to be
checkpoint file does not correspond to
of a checkpoint file.

Updating of resource file returned error
status other than end-of-device.

Rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
a site analyst, write
a PSR and include
support material so that
CDC can duplicate the
problem.

RESEX

CKP REQUEST.

A checkpoint has been initiated.

None.

CHKPT

CLASS ARGUMENT ERROR.

One of your arguments is not correct.

Check command
description, then retry.

CLASS

CLASS COMPLETE.

An informative message indicating that your
attempt to change a job's service class was
successful.

CM BLOCK OUT OF RANGE.

Data transfer from extended memory
specified a CM address outside the job
fi e l d l e n g t h .

Analyze the job output
and dumps to determine
the cause.

1AJ

CM OR EC REQUEST EXCEEDS MAXIMUM.

Field length of more than 77000 octal (CM)
or more than 7777 octal (EM) was specified
in RFL command.

Retry with lower
value(s).

CONTROL

CM OUT OF RANGE.

The program referenced an address outside
the job CM field length.

Analyze job output and
dumps to determine the
cause.

1AJ

CM PARITY ERROR.

Double data parity error (two data bits
failed) between central memory control
(CMC) and CM as detected by the
single-error correction double-error
detection (SECDED) network, or a single
parity error when operating in default mode
(SECDED network disabled).

Inform customer engineer

1AJ

CM RANGE EXIT MODE NOT DESELECTABLE.

You attempted to deselect system checking
for CM out of range errors. This cannot be
done on a model 176.

Determine if the program
can run with CM range
error checking. If it
cannot, the program must
be changed.

CPM

CMC PARITY ERROR.

The CPU sent the central memory control
(CMC) data or an address having incorrect
p a r i t y.

Inform customer engineer.

1AJ

CLASS

<^SE§jjy

|

B-14

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

COMMAND ERROR.

A n i n c o r r e c t p a r a m e t e r w a s s p e c i fi e d o n t h e
command.

Correct command and
r e t r y.

EDIT
LISTLB

COMMAND LIMIT.

The system has processed the maximum number
of commands allowed in one of your jobs
(refer to the LIMITS command).

If you must rerun the
job, restructure it such
that it requires fewer
commands.

1AJ

COMMAND NOT ALLOWED IN PROJECT PROGRAM.

A CHARGE command was placed in a project
prolog or epilog.

Remove the CHARGE
command from the project
prolog or epilog.

CPM

COMMAND NOT PROCESSED DUE TO OVERLAP

Yo u h a v e s p e c i fi e d t h a t t h e s e l e c t e d e d i t
command should not be processed due to
overlapping Line numbers.

None.

IAF

COMMAND NOT UNIQUE.

The characters entered do not uniquely
specify a command.

Ensure accuracy of
e n t r y. E n t e r a
s u f fi c i e n t n u m b e r o f
characters to specify a
unique command.

IAFEX

COMMAND TOO LONG.

You entered a command string longer
than 80 characters.

Reenter using a shorter
version of the command.

COMMENT FROM JOB jsn

A COMMENT command was issued to the job by
the job jsn.

None.

1RI

COMMENT FROM OPERATOR

A COMMENT command was issued to the job by
t h e c o n s o l e o p e r a t o r.

None.

1RI

CONFLICTING PARAMETERS.

Yo u q u e u e d a fi l e a n d s p e c i fi e d a n i n p u t
disposition more than once.

Reenter with correct
parameters.

CONFLICTING RESOURCE TYPES.

PE, HD, and GE resources cannot be
s p e c i fi e d c o n c u r r e n t l y w i t h a n N T r e s o u r c e
in the same job.

Correct the RESOURC
command.

CONNECT REJECT, filename AT address.

The system was unable to connect a
peripheral device.

Inform site analyst.

1MT

CONNECTION REJECTED.

The requested application is already
servicing the maximum number of terminals.

Request a different
application or log off
a n d t r y l a t e r.

NETVAL

CONTROL ARGUMENT ERROR

I n t e r n a l e r r o r.

Submit a PSR with
information on how
to duplicate the
problem.

CONTROLLED BACKSPACE ERROR, filename AT
address.

Controlled backspace operation failed
d u r i n g w r i t e e r r o r r e c o v e r y. P o s i t i o n o f
tape is uncertain.

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

1MT

COPY COMPLETE.

C o p y t e r m i n a t i o n c o n d i t i o n w a s s a t i s fi e d
before EOI was encountered.

None.

COPYB
COPYC

COPY FL ABOVE USER LIMIT.

Field length for L or F tape copy exceeds
your current maximum.

Use smaller block size
on L and F tapes or
increase maximum FL.

COPY INDETERMINATE.

Yo u r c o p y i n g o p e r a t i o n w i t h S , L , o r F t a p e
is unpredictable. Only the COPY command
supports these formats.

Retry copy using the
COPY icommand.

COPYB
COPYB

COPYING - type/name

The record with the type and name on the
o l d fi l e w a s c o p i e d t o t h e n e w fi l e .

None.

COPYL
COPYLM

COPYL COMPLETE.

A l l r e c o r d s o n t h e o l d fi l e h a v e b e e n
processed.

None.

COPYL
COPYLM

COPYL DID NOT FIND type/name

The record with type and name on the
r e p l a c e m e n t fi l e w a s n o t f o u n d o n t h e o l d
fi l e . S i n c e t h e A o p t i o n w a s n o t s e l e c t e d ,
the record is ignored.

None.

COPYL
COPYLM

CPest, CHcc count INCOMPLETE TRANSFER.
CPest, CHcc CONTROLLER HUNG BUSY.
CPest, CHcc Fcode FUNCTION TIMEOUT.
C P e s t, C H c h Fc o d e R E J P d r i v e r,C c o n v e r,E e q u i p .
CPest, CHCC RESERVED.
CPest, CHcc TURNED OFF.
CPest, COMPARE ERROR.
CPest, FEED FAILURE.

Card punch messages. Refer to EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

QAP
11 0

CPM - ACCESS LEVEL NOT VALID FOR JOB.

Yo u a t t e m p t e d t o c h a n g e t h e j o b a c c e s s
level to a value not valid for the job.

Retry with a valid level.

CPM

60459680 H

B-15

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

CPM - ARGUMENT ERROR.

An incorrect argument was specified.

Retry the command using
valid arguments.

CPM

CPM - INCORRECT PACK NAME.

An incorrect pack name has been specified.

Ensure that a valid pack
name is used.

CPM

CPM - INCORRECT REQUEST.

A job was incorrect CPM function code,
subfunction code was specified, or extended
reprieve is set (for EREXIT).

Specify auto recall on
monitor request call to
CPM.

CPM

CPM - INCORRECT *SHELL* FILE.

You entered a SHELL command with one of the
following errors:
The specified SHELL program was not
found on mass storage.
You specified the local load option
for a file that was not found in the
local file name table (FNT).

Correct the SHELL
command or create the
proper SHELL program
fi l e . S H E L L fi l e .

CPM - INVALID PAGE VALUE.

There was an error in your job page size
information.

Retry with correct
values.

CPM

CPM - LIBRARY NOT FOUND = library.

The system could not find the
s p e c i fi e d l i b r a r y.

Ensure that the library
name is correct on the
command or macro.

CPM

CPM - MASS STORAGE ERROR.

One of the following:
A nonrecoverable error occurred when
your job attempted to access a mass
storage device.
Your job was aborted after being
rolled out due to a recoverable mass
storage device error.

Inform site analyst.

CPM - MISSING *SHELL* LOAD OPTION.

You attempted to set a shell control
without specifying a load option.

Specify a load option in
the shell command or
macro and try again.

CPM - SYSTEM ERROR.

For function 42 (Special Charge) or 106
(Set Job Characteristics), CPM was unable
to read the input file.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

CPM

CPM - USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

1. You tried to perform a CPM operation for
which you are not authorized.
2. A CPU program issued a DSDOUT or a
DSDINP macro request when it did not
have access to the L display CMR buffers.

Ensure that the L
display utility was
initiated at the system
console with the
appropriate commands.

CPM

CPU ABORT.

RECLAIM system error.

Check previous messages
and the dayfile for the
reason for the abort.
If you find no other
messages, inform the
site analyst.

RECLAIM

CPU ERROR EXIT.

Self-explanatory.

None.

RECLAIM

CPU ERROR EXIT AT address.

The errors listed after this message
occurred at address, causing job
termination.

Refer to the
descriptions of the
error messages issued
with this message.

1AJ

CRest, CHcc Acount INCOMPLETE TRANSFER.
CRest, CHcc CONTROLLER HUNG BUSY.
CRest, CHcc Fcode FUNCTION TIMEOUT.
CRest, CHcc Fcode REJ Pdriver,Cconvert,Eequip.
CRest, CHcc TURNED OFF.

Card reader messages. Refer to EQest, CHcc Inform customer engineer.

110
QAP

CRest, CHcc RESERVED.

The 405 card reader is reserved and cannot
be connected on channel cc.
est EST ordinal of card reader
cc Channel number.

Inform customer engineer.

110

CRC ERROR.

An error was detected in cyclic redundancy
character. The dayfile message STATUS
ERROR, filename AT address precedes this
message and specifies the file (filename)
and the address.

Retry or inform site
analyst.

1MT

CT, CN, OR OV KEYWORD NOT PRESENT.

The COMPACT directive has been specified
on the RECLAIM command; COMPACT requires
either the CT, CN, or OV option, but
none of these was specified.

Retry with the CT, CN,
or OV option.

RECLAIM

0^^\

-^^*v

B-16

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

CUMULATIVE LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Dayfile and output file message indicating
that one of the installation-defined
resource usage accumulators for this
project exceeded the maximum allowed. The
system does not update these accumulators
in PROFILa. Each installation must provide
this capability if desired.

CUMULATIVE SRU LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Dayfile and output file message indicating
that accumulated SRUs have exceeded the
maximum allowed.

None.

CHARGE

DATA BASE ERROR.

The system has detected an error in its
v a l i d a t i o n fi l e .

Contact installation
personnel.

CHARGE

DATA/PERMIT ERRORS.

When the specified file was loaded from
tape, errors were encountered in both data
and permit information.

Enter CHANGE command or
macro with CE parameter
to allow access to the
fi l e . M a k e t h e fi l e
local and check if data
is accurate. Enter a
CATLIST command to see
if the permits are
accurate.

PFM

DATA TRANSFER ERROR.

An error occurred in a read operation
during a file transfer.

Inform site analyst. If
many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITIALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

DATABASE CORRUPTED.

RECLAIM encountered a problem with the
database; usually indicates that the
database is empty or has been overwritten
with something other than a database.

Check to ensure that
your database is in
correct RECLAIM format
and that it is not empty.

RECLAIM

DATABASE NOT FOUND-DEFINING NEW ONE.

RECLAIM did not find the specified database
in your catalog and is attempting to define
a new one.

None.

RECLAIM

DAYFILE - INPUT FILE CANNOT BE EXECUTE ONLY.

You specified an execute-only file in the
I=infile parameter of the DAYFILE command.
The input file cannot be execute-only,
i n fi l e T h e i n p u t fi l e t o b e
processed by DAYFILE.

Specify an input file
that is not execute-only.

DAYFILE

DAYFILE - INTERACTIVE INPUT FILE NOT ALLOWED.

Dayfile data cannot be entered directly
from the keyboard.

Specify dayfile input
from other than the
terminal (TT device).

DAYFILE

DAYFILE - JOB FIELD DISALLOWED ON USER
DAYFILE.

Options specified are not allowed for your
job's dayfile processing.

Retry with a correct
0P=op parameter.

DAYFILE

DAYFILE - JOB TERMINATION OPTION.

An incorrect value was specified for the
*JT* option.

Correct option and retry.

DAYFILE

DAYFILE - LOCAL DAYFILE PROCESSED.

DAYFILE has successfully completed
processing a local file as input.

None.

DAYFILE

DAYFILE - PAGE SIZE FORMAT.

The page size option is nonnumeric.

Retry with a valid
option.

DAYFILE

DAYFILE - PRINT DENSITY.

The print density option is not 3,4,6, or 8.

Retry with a valid
option.

DAYFILE

DAYFILE - PRINT DENSITY FORMAT.

The print density option is nonnumeric.
Print density must be 3,4,6, or 8.

Retry with a valid
option.

DAYFILE

DC REQUIRED IF JSN/UJN NOT SPECIFIED.

If the JSN or the UJN parameters are
omitted, the DC parameter must be entered.

Add the DC parameter and
r e t r y.

DROP

-DEBUG-GARBAGE IN ZZZZZDS FILE.

File ZZZZZDS contains information other
than the suspended job of the current
session. Retrieval of debug information
from session is impossible.

Return file ZZZZZDS and
restart debug session.

DEBUG

DEBUG-ILLEGAL PARAMETER-p.

You specified an incorrect parameter on
DEBUG command. The three parameters
allowed are ON, OFF, or RESUME.

Reenter DEBUG command
with correct parameter.

DEBUG-ONLY ONE PARAMETER ALLOWED.

You entered more than one parameter on the
DEBUG command.

Reenter DEBUG command
with correct parameter.

-DEBUG-ZZZZZDS FILE NOT FOUND.

You did not suspend the debug session
during the current terminal session. Refer
to the SUSPEND command (CYBER Interactive
Debug Version 1 Reference Manual).

Restart debug session.

jsH*n

60459680 H

CHARGE

DEBUG

MESSAGE

|

ACTION

SIGNIFICANCE

ROUTINE

DEFAULT CHARGE NOT VALID.

Dayfile and output file message indicating
one of the following:
- The default charge or project number
associated with the current user name
does not exist.
- The default charge or project number
associated with the current user name is
not available to that user name.
- The default charge and project
associated with the current user name
exist but are inactive.

Use another charge and
project number.

CHARGE

DEFAULT FAMILY USED.

You entered a FAMILY command with no
parameter. The default family was used.

None.

CONTROL

DEFERRED BATCH VALIDATION EXCEEDED
filename.

You have too many queued files.

Enter the LIMITS command
to ascertain the number
of queued files you can
have.

DSP

*DEL*

The system has deleted the last line of
input. This occurred when the terminal
operator entered the cancel character (CN)
followed by the end of line/end of block
terminator.

None.

DEMAND EXCEEDED.

You attempted to assign more units than
were scheduled on the RESOURC command.

Increase appropriate
parameter value on
RESOURC command.

DEMAND FILE ERROR.

Resource execution error was encountered.
This error occurred because the demand file
(RSXDid) entry does not match the job
i d e n t i fi c a t i o n .

Rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
a site analyst, write
a PSR and include
support material so that
CDC can duplicate the
problem.

DEMAND VALIDATION ERROR.

The specified number of units exceeds your
validation limits.

Decrease appropriate
parameter value on
RESOURC command.

RESEX

DETACH LIMIT EXCEEDED.

You have too many detached jobs or are not
authorized to detach jobs.

If you are authorized to
detach jobs, enter
ENQUIRE,JSN to identify
existing detached jobs
and DROP,jsn to drop
selected jobs.

IAFEX

DEVICE ERROR ON FILE filename AT address.

An irrecoverable error occurred on the mass
storage device containing the file filename.

Inform customer engineer.

1MS

DEVICE INACCESSIBLE - DETACH FAILED.

Your job could not be detached due to a
mass storage device error.

Inform site analyst.

IAFEX

DEVICE INACCESSIBLE - LOGIN FAILED.

Login failed because of mass storage device
e r r o r.

Inform site analyst.

IAFEX

DEVICE UNAVAILABLE.

One of the following:
- A packname was specified for a pack that
is not currently mounted.
- For a DIS job, no SUI or USER command
has been entered.
- No permanent file device could be found
for your user name.
- On a secure system, no permanent file
device with the proper access level
could be found for your user name.

If a packname was
specified, try again
with the WB or NA
parameter to request
that the pack be
mounted. For other
errors, inform site
operator.

PFM

DIRECT ACCESS DEVICE ERROR.

One of the following occurred.
- An incorrect device type was specified.
- The device on which the local file
resides may not contain direct access
fi l e s .

Specify correct device
type, or return the
l o c a l fi l e a n d r e tr y.

PFM

DIRECT ACCESS FILE ERROR.

The system sector for the file contains
incorrect data or cannot be read.

Inform site anlyst. If
many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITIALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

PFM

DIRECTIVE ERRORS.

A LIBEDIT directive has incorrect syntax.

Examine the LIBEDIT
output to determine
cause of error.

LIBEDIT

B-18

RESEX

60459680 H

MESSAGE

i^p\l

VSSBSSEV

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

n DIRECTIVE ERRORS.

The system could not interpret n directives.

Correct errors as listed
in LIBEDIT output and
rerun job.

DISK FULL.

Job was terminated without exit processing.

Resubmit job.

1AJ

DM* TOO SHORT.

System file DM* cannot accommodate the dump.

Inform site analyst.

CPMEM

DROP COMPLETE.

Informative only.

None.

DROP

DROPPED BY USER JOB jsn.

The job was dropped by the job jsn.

None.

DROP

DROPPING SUPPORT OF SUMMARY, USE ENQUIRE.

SUMMARY will be removed in a future release.

Use ENQUIRE instead of
SUMMARY.

ENQUIRE

DSP - CANNOT ROUTE JOB INPUT FILE.

An attempt was made to route the job input
fi l e .

Copy job input file to a
local file and route it.

DSP

DSP - COMPLETE BIT ALREADY SET.

The complete bit was not cleared before DSP
was called.

Clear complete bit
before calling DSP.

DSP - DEFERRED ROUTING NOT ALLOWED.

A file cannot be deferred routed if data
declaration, or implicit/expticit remote
t e x t i s s p e c i fi e d .

Correct and retry.

DSP - DEVICE FULL.

There is no space on the device for current
use.

Retry route at a later
time.

DSP - DEVICE UNAVAILABLE.

DSP attempted to create a file on a device
that was turned off or is currently
unavailable for access.

Specify different device
or contact site operator.

DSP - FILE NAME ERROR.

An attempt was made to create a file with
an incorrect file name.

Specify valid file name.

DSP - FILE NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

An attempt was made to route a file not on
mass storage.

Copy file to mass
storage before routing.

DSP - FILE ON REMOVABLE DEVICE.

A file on a removable device cannot be
routed.

Copy file to
nonremovable device
before routing.

DSP - FOMSM CODE NOT ALPHANUMERIC.

The forms code specification (FC=fc
parameter) must consist of two
alphanumeric characters.

Specify alphanumeric
forms code.

DSP - I/O SEQUENCE ERROR.

A request was made on a busy file.

Wa i t u n t i l fi l e i s n o t
busy.

DSP - IMMEDIATE ROUTING - NO FILE.

The specified file for the immediate
routing could not be found.

Ensure that file to be
routed is available to
job for processing.

DSP - INCORRECT DATA DECLARATION.

The specified data declaration is not
recognized.

Correct and retry.

DSP - INCORRECT DISPOSITION CODE.

Specified disposition code is not
recognized.

Verify disposition code.

DSP - INCORRECT EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS.

You specified an undefined external
characteristic code.

Ve r i f y e x t e r n a l
characteristic code.

DSP - INCORRECT FILE MODE.

You attempted to route an execute-only file.

Verify that the file t o
be routed is not an
e x e c u t e - o n l y fi l e .

DSP

DSP - INCORRECT FILE TYPE.

The file being processed is not a local or
queued file type.

Ensure that file being
processed is of correct
type.

DSP

DSP - INCORRECT FILE TYPE.

You entered a ROUTE command that attempts
to route a direct access file. Direct
access files cannot be routed with the
ROUTE command.

Copy the direct access
file to a temporary
local file and resubmit
the ROUTE command for
t h e l o c a l fi l e .

DSP

DSP - INCORRECT INTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS.

You specified an undefined internal
characteristics code.

Ve r i f y i n t e r n a l
characteristics code.

DSP

DSP - INCORRECT LID.

You specified an incorrect logical
identifier (LID) for a remote mainframe on
the ROUTE command.

Ensure that your LID
s p e c i fi c a t i o n i s
correct. If the problem
persists, inform site
analyst.

DSP - INCORRECT ORIGIN TYPE.

The system cannot queue the file for input
with the specified origin type.

Specify valid origin
type.

60459680 H

DSP

DSP

DSP

B-1?

MESSAGE

|

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

DSP - INCORRECT REQUEST.

One of the following:
- Parameter block is not within field
length.
- Request was not made with auto recall.

Change parameter block DSP
addresses or specify
auto recall.

DSP - INCORRECT SERVICE CLASS

An invalid service class was specified.

Verify the IPRDECK, SERVICE, DSP
CLASS, and PCLASS entries
and ensure that the MODVAL
VM parameter validation is
correct.

DSP - INCORRECT TID.

One of the following.
- Username and familyname parameters were
not in CM field length.
- Terminal identifier (TID) is greater
than or equal to IDLM for batch jobs.
- The familyname or username is not valid.

Verify that TID
parameters are valid.

DSP - INCORRECT USER COMMAND.

For*an operation on an input file, either a
USER command was not included, or the user
name or password on USER command is not
valid.

Verify that a USER
command is present and
that the user name and
password are correct.

DSP - MASS STORAGE ERROR.

A mass storage error was encountered on the
fi l e .

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

DSP

DSP - QFT FULL.

The system cannot process your file because
it is already processing its maximum number
of queued files.

Wait and retry.

DSP

DSP - QUEUED FILE READ ERROR.

The system encountered an equipment
malfunction and, consequently, cannot
process your deferred routed file.

Recreate the output file.

DSP

DSP - ROUTE TO INPUT NOT IMMEDIATE.

You attempted to queue a file for input
using a deferred ROUTE.

Change to immediate
route.

DSP

DSP - THIS ROUTING NOT ALLOWED.

You attempted to change the queue
disposition of a deferred routed file.

Rescind prior routing by
using the SC disposition
code with the ROUTE
command or macro. Route
the file again with the
d e s i r e d fi n a l
disposition code.

DSP - TOO MANY DEFERRED BATCH JOBS.

You attempted to submit more deferred batch
jobs than allowed by your validation limit.

Wait for jobs to
complete or request a
larger validation limit
from site personnel.

DSP - USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

Caller is not validated to specify one of
the following:
DLID
SLID
Data declaration

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

DUMP FILE CONTAINS 63 DUMPS. TAPE IS FULL.

In response to a DUMP operation, RECAIM has
determined that the tape already contains
the maximum allowable number of dumps; the
DUMP directive is ignored.

Compress the current RECLAIM
dump tape using the
COMPACT directive or use
a new tape.

DUMP FILE MALFUNCTION-EOI ENCOUNTERED.

An EOI was encountered before the specified
dump file or record was found; the tape has
probably been overwritten.

Check the contents of RECLAIM
the dump fite tape.

DUMP FILE MALFUNCTION-FILE NAME MISMATCH.

The specified file name does not match the
file name found at the specified position
on the dump tape; the tape has probably
been overwritten.

Check the contents of RECLAIM
the dump tape.

DUMP FILE MALFUNCTION-POSITON LOST.

RECLAIM system error.

Inform site analyst. RECLAIM

DUMP FILE MALFUNCTION-UNRECOGNIZABLE PFC.

The PFC for the dumped file is incorrect;
either the tape is bad or has been
overwritten.

Check the contents of RECLAIM
the tape.

DUMP FILE MUST BE IN WRITE MODE

A DUMP or COMPACT was attempted using a
mass storage dump file which was attached
in some mode other than WRITE mode.

A t t a c h t h e d u m p fi l e i n R E C L A I M
WRITE mode and retry.

DUMP FILE NOT FOUND

A LOAD or COPY was attempted and the mass
storage dump file indicated by the data
base could not be found. The file may have
been purged or may never have been made
permanent.

Check your options. If RECLAIM
they are correct, you
may have to load your
files from an alternate
source. Check with your
site analyst.

B-20

DSP

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

cmd DUPLICATE CHARACTER

The value you specified in the terminal
definition command cmd conflicts with
another terminal definition.

Try another value.

DUPLICATE FILE NAME.

The file specified already exists in the
system.

Use different name in
request.

DUPLICATE FILE NAME

The read or destination file name matches
the primary file name.

Enter the edit command
with the read or
destination file name
different than the
primary file name.

DUPLICATE UJN - MUST SPECIFY JSN.

Two of your jobs have the same UJN.

Use the ENQUIRE command
to determine the
appropriate JSN to use.

DUPLICATED LINES.

Duplicate lines, which would have been
printed during a dump operation, were
suppressed.

None.

CPMEM

DVest,DNdn,message.

A form of PFM error message (issued to the
system dayfile, error log, and sometimes
the user dayfile) identifying the mass
storage equipment on which the error
occurred. The equipment type is 819 disk
(single density).
est EST ordinal of device.
d n D e v i c e n u m b e r.
message PFM error message.

Refer to the
significance and action
of the message as given
in this list of error
messages.

PFM

DWest,DNdn,message.

A form of PFM error message (issued to the
system dayfile, error log, and sometimes
the user dayfile) identifying the mass
storage equipment on which the error
occurred. The equipment type DW is 819 disk
(double density).
est EST ordinal of device.
d n D e v i c e n u m b e r.
message PFM error message.

Refer to the
significance and action
of the message as given
in this list of error
messages.

PFM

EC NOT VALIDATED.

The number of extended memory blocks
specified on the Job command either exceeds
that for which you are authorized or
exceeds the machine size available to user
jobs.

Check your validation
with the LIMITS command.

CPM

EDITING COMPLETE,

Library editing is complete.

filename EMPTY.

The file specified on a SAVE command
contains no data.

Ve r i f y t h a t fi l e
contains data and retry.

PFM

EMPTY FILE (SSF)

I n t e r n a l e r r o r.

Submit a PSR with
information on how
to duplicate the
problem.

IAF

EMPTY SORT INPUT FILE.

Dayfile message indicating that the file
specified on the SORT command contains no
data.

Correct and rerun.

SORT

END est, nn.

The operator ended batch equipment est for
nn copies.

END OF SET INCORRECT REQUEST, filename AT
address.

A multifile set tape is positioned at the
end of set after searching for a file set
that was not found. Until the tape is
returned or repositioned within the
multifile set, all other tape operations on
this tape are incorrect.

Return the tape via a
RETURN, UNLOAD, or EVICT
command, or reposition
the tape with the LABEL
command.

1MT

END OF TAPE, filename AT address.

The end-of-tape was encountered.

Ensure that correct file
manipulation operation
i s s p e c i fi e d .

1MT

**** ENDING SUPPORT OF STS FUNCTION 01 ***.

The system will phase out support of this
function.

Consult the site analyst
to find a different
method to obtain the
required data.

SFP

ENQUIRE ABORTED.

ENQUIRE has been aborted as a result of a
system error.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

ENQUIRY COMPLETE.

Message issued when ENQUIRE command
processing is completed.

None.

/Sfe^X

60459680 H

CCP

LIBEDIT

8-21

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

ENTER GO TO CONTINUE CURRENT JOB.
RELIST TO LIST RECOVERABLE JOBS,
OR DESIRED JSN:

You have recoverable jobs and the system
awaits your input.

Enter appropriate
response.

RECOVER

ENTERING RECOVERY MODE ... WAIT

SCOPE 2 is entering recovery mode. There
is a delay until the recovery cycle
completes.

Wait for the user prompt. H E L L 0 7

ENTRY POINT NOT FOUND.

The specified entry point could not be
found.

Ve r i f y t h a t e n t r y p o i n t 1 A J
is valid.

ENTRY POINT TABLE OVERFLOW.

The number of entry points per program unit
has exceeded the table space allowed.

C o n t a c t C e n t r a l S o f t w a r e L I B R A RY
Support.

EOF ENCOUNTERED.

End-of-file was encountered before copy
termination condition was satisfied.

None.

EOI CHANGED BY RECOVERY.

The file was truncated during deadstart
recovery.

Use CHANGE command or
macro with CE parameter
to allow access to the
fi l e . M a k e t h e fi l e
local and list it to
determine how much of
the file was lost.

PFM

EOI ENCOUNTERED.

End-of-information was encountered on the
i n p u t fi l e .

If the message was not
expected, check if the
copy was performed as
desired. The source
file may not have been
positioned correctly
before the copy.

COPYB
COPYC

EQest,DNdn,message.

A form of PFM error message (issued to the
system dayfile, error log, and sometimes
the user dayfile) identifying the mass
storage equipment on which the error
occurred.
est EST ordinal of device.
d n D e v i c e n u m b e r.
message PFM error message.

Refer to the
significance and action
of the message as given
in this list of error
messages.

EQUIPMENT NOT AVAILABLE.

The requested equipment is either in use
or does not exist, or no requested
equipment with the proper access Level
can be found.

Ensure accuracy of macro
or command or retry at a
later time.

LFM
RESEX

ERASE LIMIT, filename AT address.

For 1600 cpi or 6250 cpi densities, the
block could not be rewritten properly
after 40 erasures (approximately 15 feet
of tape) or, for 800 cpi, the current block
could not be rewritten properly due to
parity errors after 40 attempts to erase
a single area of tape (approximately
40 feet of tape).

Clean the tape drive.
Have the tape cleaned and
certified or use a new tape.
Run diagnostic T7X to ensure
proper tape drive operation.

1MT

COPYB

The tape is unusable and the job will
terminate.
ERROR CODE ec, filename AT address.

1MT error code ec has occurred but no
specific message is issued. This would
normally not occur unless the job was
dropped by the operator.

Inform site analyst,

1MT

ERROR - FILES(S) NOT PROCESSED.

One or more files were not checkpointed
because CHKPT detected an error while
getting a list of the files at the control
point. This could occur if there are many
l o c a l fi l e s .

Contact Central Software
Support.

CHKPT

ERROR FLAG TERMINATION, filename AT address.

The job was aborted with a tape operation
in progress. The operation/request is not
complete. For example, the operator could
kill the job while tape error recovery is
in progress.

None.

1MT

ERROR FLAG TERMINATION, FILE filename AT
address

The job was aborted with an input/output
request in progress. The operation/request
is not complete.

ERROR IN ALTERNATE CATLIST PERMISSION

The option specified on the AC parameter is
incorrect.

/*^s\

1MS

Check the AC parameter
description and correct
the command.

PFILES

'^s^\

B-22

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ERROR IN ARGUMENT.

One of the following.
- The pfn is blank or fn = filename.
- You specified no arguments or a blank
argument.
- You specified too many files.
- You entered an incorrect parameter or
combination of parameters.
- You specified both XD and XT parameters
in a command.
- You specified an XD or XT parameter in z
command other than CHANGE, DEFINE, or
SAVE.
- You specified an XD or XT parameter in a
DEFINE or SAVE command without
specifying a PW parameter.

Reenter the command with
correct parameters.

ERROR IN ARGUMENTS.

The system did not recognize one or more
parameters.

Compare the parameters
specified with the
command description.

ERROR IN ARGUMENTS.

One or more of the following command errors
were detected.
- More than one date was entered.
- No options were selected.
- The parameter was incorrect or could not
be recognized.
- The TM option was selected but no data
was specified.
- Both the device number parameter and the
pack name or auxiliary device parameter
were selected; auxiliary devices do not
have device numbers.
- Both the NA and WB parameters were

Correct command and
r e t r y.

BLANK
PURGALL
ITEMIZE

ERROR IN ARGUMENTS.

RESTART detected incorrect arguments on the
command call.

Correct the command.

RESTART

ERROR IN ARGUMENTS.

The parameter list specified on the Job
command or the USER command was not
correct.

Correct the parameter
l i s t a n d r e t r y.

ERROR IN BACKUP REQUIREMENT.

The option specified on the BR parameter on
the DEFINE, CHANGE, or SAVE command is
incorrect.

Check the BR parameter
description and correct
the command.

PFILES

ERROR IN CHVAL ARGUMENTS.

An invalid keyword was specified on the
command. Too many characters were specified
for the UC parameter.

Correct and retry.

MODVAL

ERROR IN CONTROL ARGUMENTS.

Either the number of arguments was
incorrect, an incorrect argument was
specified, or a numeric parameter was
nonnumeric.

Check the description of
the command.

CONTROL

ERROR IN DATE.

The format of the date (ad, md, or cd)
parameter in a PURGALL request was
incorrect.

Check the format of the
PURGALL command in
section 10.

ERROR IN DEVICE NUMBER.

The file residency as specified by the
device number parameter was incorrect.

Correct the device
number parameter.

ERROR IN DOCMENT ARGUMENTS.

An error was found among the numbers that
were entered as parameters.

Check parameters and
r e t r y.

DOCMENT

ERROR IN EXPIRATION DATE.

One of the following:
You specified an expiration date
that is before the current date.
You specified a date with the month
not in the range 1-12 or the day not
in the range 1-31.
You specified an XT parameter
greater than the maximum allowed.

Reenter the command with
a correct XD or XT
parameter.

PFILES

ERROR IN FCOPY ARGUMENTS.

The format of the FCOPY command is in error.

Refer to the description
of the FCOPY command.

ERROR IN FILE CATEGORY.

The option specified on the CT parameter is
incorrect.

Check the CT parameter PFILES
description and correct PURGALL
the command.

ERROR IN FILE DATA.

When the specified file was loaded from
tape, an error was encountered in the data.

Enter CHANGE command or
macro with CE parameter
to allow access to the
fi l e . M a k e t h e fi l e
local and ensure the
accuracy of the data.

PFILES

specified; select one or the other.

00*\ ^
60459680 H

B-23

|

SIGNIFICANCE

/•cSfev

ACTION

ERROR IN FILE TYPE.

You specified an incorrect file type.

Check the PURGALL
command description
and correct the
statement.

ERROR IN FILENAME LIST.

A syntax error was found in the list of
file names entered using the PF=* option.

Correct the file name
l i s t a n d r e t r y.

RECLAIM

ERROR IN KRONREF ARGUMENTS.

The command entered contained an incorrect
parameter.

Correct and rerun.

KRONREF

ERROR IN LIBRARY ARGUMENTS.

The LIBRARY command has an incorrect
argument or the format of the command is
incorrect.

Correct the error and
reenter the command.

LIBRARY

ERROR IN LIMITS ARGUMENT.

Dayfile message indicating that parameters
other than L=lfn were included on the LIMITS
command.

Correct and rerun.

MODVAL

ERROR IN MODE.

The option specified on the M parameter is
incorrect.

Check the M parameter
description and correct
the command.

PFILES

ERROR IN PASSWOR ARGUMENTS.

PASSWOR command parameters are incorrect.

Correct command and
reenter.

MODVAL

ERROR IN PASSWOR ARGUMENTS.

This message is returned for either of two
reasons:
You entered a PASSWOR command that
specifies an expiration date or
term, but does not specify the old
and new passwords. You must specify
an old and a new password to change
the expiration date or term.
You entered a character other than
I, B, or carriage return in response
to the PASSWOR prompt:
ENTER INTERACTIVE OR BATCH (I,B)

Correct the PASSWOR
command and resubmit.

MODVAL

ERROR IN PERMIT DATA.

When the specified file was loaded from
tape, an error was encountered in the
permit entries.

Enter CHANGE command or
macro with CE parameter
to allow access to the
file. Do a CATLIST to
see if the permits are
accurate.

PFM

ERROR IN PREFERRED RESIDENCE.

The option specified on the PR parameter on
the DEFINE or CHANGE command is incorrect.

Check the PR parameter
description and correct
the command.

PFILES

ERROR IN RESIDENCE.

The R=r parameter you specified
contains an incorrect device type.

Correct the R=r
parameter.

ERROR IN ROUTE FUNCTION, LFN=filename.

Informative message issued to the system
dayfile indicating that an error occurred
while routing filename.

Examine the job's
dayfile for a more
specific error message.

ERROR IN SECHOR PARAMETERS.

You specified and unknown parameter on a
SECHOR command.

Reenter the command with
the correct parameter(s).

ERROR IN SUBSYSTEM.

The option specified on the SS parameter c
the CHANGE or SAVE command is incorrect.

Check the SS parameter
description and correct
the command.

ERROR IN SYSTEM TEXT.

The system text referenced by the KRONREF
command did not contain symbol definitions.

Ensure that the system
text specified by the 6
or S parameter contains
symbol definitions.

ERROR IN TIME.

The format of the time parameter in a
PURGALL request was incorrect.

Check the format of the
PURGALL command in
section 10.

ERROR IN TRMDEF ARGUMENT.

One or more parameters specified in the
TRMDEF command were in error.

Ensure that parameters
are in correct format
and new values are valid.

ERROR IN UPROC ARGUMENTS.

Dayfile message indicating that incorrect
command arguments were entered.

Specify the correct
arguments and rerun.

MODVAL

ERROR IN 5TH COPYL PARAMETER.

Fatal error; only A, R, E, and T are
recognized parameters.

Correct processing
option.

COPYL
COPYLM

ERROR LIMIT, integer ADDITIONAL ERRORS
FOUND.

More than 20 errors were found during
conversion.
integer Errors in excess of 20.

Verify deck and retry.

B-24

/"•^iSy

DSP

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

ERROR LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Number of parity and block-too-large errors
exceed the error limit.

If dayfile shows blocktoo-large errors have
occurred and tape is S,
L, or F format, increase
block size and retry;
otherwise, tape is probably
assigned in the wrong
format. If parity errors
have occurred, the tape is
bad and the data on it can
not be correctly recovered.

COPYB

ERROR ON DETACH.

The system was not able to detach the job
upon your request.

Retry command.

IAFEX

ERROR PROCESSING LIMIT.

Following an error, a job has tried to
restart itself more than 512 times.

None.

1AJ

EXCHANGE PACKAGE/MEMORY DUMP ON FILE
ZZZDUMP.

The exchange package and memory dump is
written on local file ZZZDUMP because the
job is of interactive origin and file
OUTPUT is assigned to a terminal.

To examine the exchange
package and dump, list
file ZZZDUMP.

CPMEM

EXEC - SLAVE i OMITTED - message
- STOM FILE ERROR.

MESSEXEC was unable to establish or main
tain access to a communication file with
MSSSLV on mainframe i. MSSEXEC will con
tinue to operate, but will not attempt to
receive requests from MSSSLV on mainframe i.

If MSSSLV is to be run on
mainframe i, idle MSSEXEC,
purge the STOM file,
initiate MSSSLV, and then
initiate MSSEXEC.

EXECUTE

The system is processing one of your
commands.

None.

EXECUTE ONLY FILE.

The permanent file accessed can only be
executed and cannot be read, written, or
listed.

Ensure accuracy of entry.

EXTENDED MEMORY BLOCK OUT OF RANGE.

Data transfer between CM and extended
memory specified an extended memory address
outside the job field length.

Analyze the job output
and dumps to determine
the cause of the error.

1AJ

EXTENDED MEMORY FLAG REGISTER PARITY.

Parity error detected on extended memory
flag register operation.

Inform customer engineer.

1AJ

EXTENDED MEMORY OUT OF RANGE.

Job referenced extended memory address
outside job field length.

Analyze the job output
and dumps to determine
the cause of the error.

1AJ

EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR.

ECS transfer on a model 176 failed.

Inform customer engineer.

1AJ

EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR.

Extended memory failed.

Inform customer engineer.

RECLAIM I

EXTENDED MEMORY READ ERROR.

An unrecoverable extended memory read error
occurred.

None.

CPMEM

EXTENDED MEMORY ROLLIN ERROR.

An irrecoverable extended memory parity
error occurred while the system was writing
the job's extended memory field length to a
r o l l o u t fi l e .

Inform the site analyst
of the parity error.
Rerun the job after
extended memory has been
repaired.

1RI

FAMILY NOT FOUND.

No family exists with the name you
s p e c i fi e d .

Retry with an existing
family name.

CONTROL

FCOPY COMPLETE.

The FCOPY conversion is finished.

None.

FCOPY

FET TOO SHORT.

FET is not long enough for processing by
requested function.

Increase FET size.

LFM

FIELD BEGINNING AT nn NO COMPARE.

Verification of label field at character
position nn does not compare with that
specified by the user on an OPEN statement.

FILE BOI/EOI/UI MISMATCH.

Data in the system sector for file filename
does not match information from the EOI
sector and/or catalog information. This
indicates that the file has been destroyed.

Inform site analyst. If
many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

FILE COUNT PARAM NOT NUMERIC.

The file count specified with the N command
option is not numeric.

Correct the parameter
and retry.

ITEMIZE

FILE EMPTY.

The file specified was empty.

Ve r i f y t h a t t h e fi l e
contains data and retry.

LFM
SFM

FILE ERROR filename.

An incorrect address was detected on file
filename.

Correct error and retry.

RESTART

60459680 H

1HT

B-25

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

FILE IDENTIFIER NOT FOUND.

You failed to specify or improperly
specified the FI=fileid or QN=seqno
parameters of the LABEL command.

Correct the FI=fileid
and QN=seqno parameter
specifications of the
LABEL command.

1MT

FILE/JOB NOT FOUND.

The specified file or job was not found in
the system.

Use the ENQUIRE command
to ensure job is still
in the system.

CONTROL

FILE LENGTH ERROR.

The length of a file does not equal the
length specified in the catalog. This
indicates that the file has been
destroyed.

Inform site analyst. If
many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITIALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

PFM

FILE NAME CONFLICT.

The same file name has been specified for
more than one parameter.

Correct the command so
that all files have a
unique name.

LIBEDIT

.FILE NAME CONFLICT.

For the L072 command, the S and L file
names are the same. For the ITEMIZE
command, the output and binary file names
are the same.

Rename either output
fi l e o r fi l e t o b e
itemized.

L072
ITEMIZE

FILE NAME CONFLICT.

The old file, replacement file, and the
new file were not all specified by
unique file names.

Specify unique file
names.

ITEMIZE
COPYL
COPYLM

FILE NAME CONFLICT.

Either you tried to process two files
having the same name or you specified a
reserved file name.

Correct the command so
all files have a unique
name.

FCOPY
COPYB

FILE NAME CONFLICT.

The same file name was specified for both
the file to be itemized and for the list
fi l e .

Specify the correct file
name and retry.

ITEMIZE

FILE NAME ERROR

The file name specified contains more than
seven characters or non-alphanumeric
characters.

Reenter command with
correct file name.

IAF

FILE NAME ERROR.

File name contains incorrect characters or
contains more than seven characters.

E n s u r e t h a t a v a l i d fi l e L F M
n a m e i s s p e c i fi e d . L I S T L B
PFM

FILE NAME MISSING.

The LO=P, LP=FP or L0=X option was
specified in a CATLIST command, but no file
was specified with the FN parameter.

Correct

FILE NAME TOO LONG.

A file name was specified that has more
than seven characters.

Use a file name that has COPYL
seven or less characters. COPYLM

FILE NOT DISK RESIDENT

The disk space associated with the
specified permanent file has already been
dropped.

FILE NOT FOUND - filename.

The designated input file did not exist
prior to the copy or verify.

If file should have existed, COPYB
reaccess the file and retry. VERIFY

FILE NOT FOUND - filename

RECLAIM did not process the named file
because it could not find the file on the
dump tape or file (for a LOAD or COPY
operation) or it could not find a local or
permanent file by that name (for a DUMP
operation).
filename A file name you specified in
a RECLAIM PF or FN option.

C h e c k t o s e e t h a t a fi l e R E C L A I P
exists with the
specified file name.

FILE NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

The specified file does not reside on mass
storage.

Copy
fi l e
to
storage and retry.

FILE NOT OVERLAY FORMAT.

First record on the file was not an overlay.

C o r r e c t fi l e f o r m a t o n L D R
LDR call.

FILE STATUS NOT SPECIFIED.

Your SETFS command does not specify a file
status.

Retry command with a
file status parameter.

FILE STRUCTURES NOT COMPATIBLE.

Verification results cannot be guaranteed
correct when the logical structures of the
files being verified are not compatible.

FILE TOO LONG.

The local file specified for a SAVE,
REPLACE, or APPEND command exceeds the
length allowed or the direct access file
specified for an ATTACH operation in WRITE,
MODIFY, UPDATE, or APPEND mode exceeds the
direct access file length limit for which
you are authorized.

B-Z6

and

r e t r y.

mass

C AT L I S T

1AJ

Reduce length of file or
save as a direct access
fi l e .

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

FILE TOO LONG, FILE filename AT address.

The length of the direct access permanent
file currently being written exceeds the
direct access file length limit for which
you are authorized.

Reduce the length of the
file or ask site personnel
for a larger direct access
fi l e l e n g t h l i m i t .

1MS

FILENAME CONFLICT.

The first two parameters of the GTR command
are identical.

S p e c i f y d i ff e r e n t fi l e
names for the first two
parameters on the GTR
command.

GTR

nnn FILE(S) PROCESSED.

The operation was performed on nnn files.

None.

MFILES

FIP - ACN acn NOT WITHIN RANGE.

A data transfer error has occurred. The
system has halted the file transfer.
acn Application connection number
(octal).

Inform site analyst.

FIP

FIP - CIO ERROR xxB ON filename, reason

NETXFR has terminated file transfer because
of a fault while reading or writing the
l o c a l fi l e .
xx CIO error code (octal).
Refer to Volume 4 of the NOS
2 Reference Set.
fi l e n a m e T h e a f f e c t e d fi l e ,
reason Abbreviated error
description:
ERROR ON FILE-OPEN.
DEVICE FULL.
PARITY ERROR.
TAPE BLOCK SIZE ERROR.

Correct problem and
r e t r y t r a n s f e r. I n f o r m
site analyst if
problem persists.

FIP

FIP - CONNECTION BROKEN ON ACN acn.

The network connection has been broken
unexpectedly. The system has halted the
fi l e t r a n s f e r.
acn Application connection number
(octal).

Rerun your job.
site analyst.

FIP

FIP - CONVERT MODE N/A FOR filename.

The application timed out waiting for
resources to become available,
fi l e n a m e T h e a f f e c t e d fi l e .

Try again. If problem
persists, inform site
analyst.

FIP - DISABLE WARNING RECEIVED.

The system has halted the file transfer
because the network is shutting down
immediately.

Retry the file transfer
after the network is
reactivated.

FIP - GT 4 FILE TRANSFERS INITIATED.

The system is attempting too many file
transfers simultaneously. The system has
not initiated the file transfer you are
requesting.

Inform site analyst.

FIP - INITIATING XFR OF filename.

The system has initiated the transfer of
fi l e fi l e n a m e .
fi l e n a m e F i l e b e i n g t r a n s f e r r e d .

FIP - NETOFF DURING FILE TRANSFER.

An internal error occurred during your file
transfer. The file transfer was not
completed successfully.

Inform site analyst.

FIP

FIP - NETXFR ERROR, ALL TRANSFER TABLES IN
USE.

NETXFR aborted the application after
finding all internal tables in use.

R e t r y t r a n s f e r. I n f o r m
site analyst if
problem persists.

FIP

FIP - NETXFR ERROR, BAD ATTRIB. xxxx FOR
COMMAND yy.

NETXFR aborted the application after
finding a faulty internal attribute value.
xxxx Attribute value (hexadecimal).
yy associated command value
(decimal).

R e t r y t r a n s f e r. I n f o r m
site analyst if
problem persists.

FIP

FIP - NETXFR ERROR, BAD INTERNAL TRANSFER
STATE = xxB.

NETXFR detected an internal fault and
aborted the application.
xx Internal transfer state (octal).

R e t r y t r a n s f e r. I n f o r m
site analyst if
problem persists.

FIP

FIP - NETXFR ERROR. BAD PARAMETER DD = xxB.

NETXFR detected a faulty DD parameter in
the application's NETXFR call, and aborted
the application.
xx DD parameter value (octal)

Inform site analyst or
correct application
program.

FIP

FIP - filename ON INVALID DEVICE.

You have file filename assigned to an
inaccessible device. The system has halted
t h e fi l e t r a n s f e r.
fi l e n a m e F i l e b e i n g t r a n s f e r r e d .

Reassign file filename
to an accessible device
and rerun job. Inform
site analyst if the
problem persists.

FIP

Inform

FIP

00^\
60459680 H

B-27

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

FIP - OUTPUT BLOCK NOT DEL ON ACN acn.

The remote system did not receive the
network message or data block before the
time-out period elapsed. The system has
halted the file transfer.
acn Application connection number
(octal).

Retry the file
t r a n s f e r. I n f o r m s i t e
analyst if the problem
persists.

FIP

FIP - PREMATURE TERMINATION RCVD ON acn.

The system detected an error during a file
transfer and halted the file transfer,
acn Application connection number
(octal).

R e t r y fi l e t r a n s f e r.
Inform site analyst if
the problem persists.

FIP

FIP - PROTOCOL ERROR DETECTED.

An unrecognized or unexpected network
message has been received. The file
transfer is ended.

R e t r y fi l e t r a n s f e r.
Inform system analyst
if problem persists.

FIP - RHF I/O ERROR xxB ON filename, reason

NETXFR has terminated file transfer because
of a fault while reading or writing file
data to or from the network.
fi l e n a m e T h e a f f e c t e d fi l e .
xx RHF I/O error code (octal).
Refer to the Remote Host
Facility Access Method
Reference Manual for the
descriptions of the error
codes,
reason Abbreviated error
description:
BLOCK NOT 60-BIT MULTIPLE.
BLOCK LENGTH MISMATCH.
CONTROL WORD FORMAT ERROR.
HOST A8N MISCOMPARE.
INVALID PARTIAL BLOCK.
LAST BLOCK TOO BIG.
NETWORK ABN MISCOMPARE.
RHF FET PARAMETER ERROR.
UNKNOWN BLOCK ERROR.

FIP - SECOND FILE XFR ON ACN acn.

The system attempted a file transfer
connection that already has a file
in progress. The system halted the
fi l e t r a n s f e r.
acn Application connection
(octal).

FIP - SYSTEM ERROR, reason, status.

A system
interrupted
attempting
(indicated
messages
completed.

on a
transfer
second

R e t r y t r a n s f e r. I n f o r m
site analyst if
problem persists.

FIP

Inform site analyst.

FIP

Retry the file transfer
after correcting the
problem, or inform
site analyst.

FIP

FIP

number

error (indicated by reason) has
NETXFR, which is either
or abandoning recovery
by status). Subsequent dayfile
indicate whether the file transfer

reason CPU TIME LIMIT
PP ABORT
OPERATOR DROP
OPERATOR RERUN
EM PARITY ERROR
MASS STORAGE LIMIT
I/O LIMIT
TERMINAL INTERRUPT
status FIP REPRIEVING
FIP REPRIEVES EXHAUSTED
FIP - TIMED OUT WAITING FOR NETWORK.

The network failed to respond before the
time-out period elapsed. The system halted
t h e fi l e t r a n s f e r.

Ensure that the network
and remote system are
active and retry the
fi l e t r a n s f e r. I n f o r m
site analyst if the
problem persists.

FIP - TRANSFER OF filename COMPLETE.

Self-explanatory.
fi l e n a m e F i l e b e i n g t r a n s f e r r e d .

None.

FIP - TRANSFER OF filename IN PROGRESS.

Self-explanatory.
fi l e n a m e F i l e b e i n g t r a n s f e r r e d .

FIP - XFR COMPLETE, NO ERR, IDLEDOWN.

The network is shutting down, but your file
transfer completed successfully.

FIP - XFR TERM WITH ERR, IDLEDOWN.

The network is shutting down and your file
transfer ended unsuccessfully.

Retry the file transfer
when the network becomes
active.

FL BEYOND MFL.

Request field length exceeds maximum field
length.

Increase MFL via MFL
request or increase your
validation FL.

1AJ

/•^v

/*^^\
|

B-28

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

FL REQUEST BEYOND MFL (ECS).

Extended memory field length requirements
for the job step exceed the extended memory
field length allowed.

Increase job step
extended memory field
length.

1MA

FL TOO SHORT FOR PROGRAM.

The job's field length is too short for the
program.

Rerun the job with
larger field length
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

1AJ
1AJ

FLE TOO SHORT FOR LOAD.

You attempted to load extended memory data
beyond the job's extended memory field
length.

None.

1AJ

**** FORMAT ERROR.

Your entry is not recognized as valid
system input. The line of input is
disregarded.

FORMAT ERROR.

One of the following.
- The GTR command format was incorrect.
- An incorrect library type was specified.
- A record name longer than seven
characters was specified.

Refer to the description
of the GTR command.

FORMAT ERROR ON COMMAND.

An error was detected in the format of the
command.

Check the description of
command format.

1AJ

FORMAT REQUIRES UNLABELED TAPE.

The format specified (F) is valid only for
unlabeled tapes.

The tape must be
assigned as an unlabeled
tape.

RESEX

FOT FULL - FILES IGNORED.

The queued files were not processed because
there was no FOT entry for the creation
and/or destination familyname and the table
was full.

A level 0 deadstart is
required to create some
space in the FOT.

QLOAD
QMOVE

pfn FOUND.

The file name specified on the CATLIST
(10=0) command was found in your catalog or
the file name or user name specified on the
CATLIST (L0=P) command was granted
permission.

None.

»FM

un FOUND.

FOUND SECTION section.

This is the last line of a three-line
message:
MULTIFILE NOT FOUND, filename AT address.
REQUESTED SECTION section.
FOUND SECTION section.
The system has reached the end of a
m u l t i fi l e s e t .

*FR* NOT FOUND.

The specified string was not in the
d a y fi l e . I f y o u r j o b i s i n t e r a c t i v e y o u
will get a full dayfile dump. A dayfile
dump is not produced for a batch job.

Retry with a corrected
FR=string.

FROM sjsn: message

Another interactive user with the JSN sjsn
sent this message using the DIAL command.

If validated to use the
access subsystem, you
may respond to this
message using DIAL.

FROM NOP...message.

The network operator sent this message.

If necessary, you can
respond using the MS
command.

FUNCTION REJECT, filename AT address.

Function was rejected (possible hardware
problem).

Inform site analyst.

1MT

FWA .GE. LWA+1.

The first word address parameter was
greater than the last word address
parameter on DMP, DMD, DMPECS, DMDECS, LOC,
or PBC command or DMP, DMD, DED, or DEP
system requests.

Correct error and retry.

CPHEM

FWA/LWA .GE. FL.

Either first word address parameter of LOC
or the last word address of LOC or PBC was
greater than or equal to your field length.

Reduce FWA and/or LWA
and retry.

CPMEM

GARBAGE IN OLDPL HEADER.

The file has been identified as a program
library, but does not have a recognizable
format.

Try rebuilding the file
if possible. Inform
site analyst.

ITEMIZE

GLOBAL LIBRARY DIRECTORY DEFECTIVE.

The global library directory file ZZZZZLD
contains errors.

Regenerate the library
d i r e c t o r y fi l e .

1AJ

y^Vfffesr^k

60459680 H

1MT

B-29

MESSAGE

|

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

GLOBAL LIBRARY DIRECTORY NOT FOUND.

Global library set processing is active,
but there is no directory file (ZZZZZLD).

Enter the LIBRARY
command with no
parameters to clear the
global library set
processing, or
regenerate ZZZZZLD by
reentering the LIBRARY
command with the
appropriate libraries
s p e c i fi e d .

1AJ

GLOBAL LIBRARY SET CLEARED.

An informative message.

None.

LIBRARY

GO FROM JOB jsn

A 60 command was issued to the job by the
job jsn.

None.

1RI

GO FROM OPERATOR

A GO command was issued to the job by the
console operator.

None.

1RI

GTR ERRORS.

There are errors on the GTR command.

Check the description of
the GTR command.

GTR

.H VALUE INCORRECT.

The H parameter was zero or greater than
the buffer length.

Correct parameter and
r e t r y.

L072

HARDWARE RERUN THRESHOLD EXCEEDED.

The job has been rerun the maximum number of
times due to a hardware error. The maximum
is n-2, where the default is n=2 (defined by
HRTL in common deck COMSMSC).

Analyze job dumps, mainte
nance registers, and the
error log for HPA reports to
determine cause.

1AJ

HOST AVAILABLE CONTROL CHARACTER=char
ENTER INPUT TO CONNECT TO HOST

Your selected host is available,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

Enter any input to
initiate your connection
to the host.

CCP

HOST BUSY CONTROL CHARACTER*char
ENTER char HD TO SEE HOST STATUS

The host rejected your attempt to connect,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

Check the status of
the hosts in your
c o n fi g u r a t i o n .

CCP

HOST CONNECTED CONTROL CHARACTERS char
READY FOR INPUT

You are connected to the host,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

Proceed with your login
to the host.

CCP

HOST CONNECTED CONTROL CHARACTER=char
TERMINAL DISABLED BY NOP

The network operator has disabled your
terminal. No further input is possible,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

HOST CONNECTED CONTROL CHARACTER* char
READY FOR INPUT

You are connected to the host,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

Proceed with your login
to the host.

HOST DISCONNECTED CONTROL CHARACTER=char
ENTER INPUT TO CONNECT TO HOST

You have been disconnected from the host,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

None.

HOST DISCONNECTED CONTROL CHARACTER=char
TERMINAL DISABLED BY NOP

The network operator has disabled your
terminal. No further input is possible,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

None.

HOST UNAVAILABLE CONTROL CHARACTER=char
ENTER char HD TO SEE HOST STATUS

You have attempted a connection to a host
that is not up.
char The network control
character for your terminal.

Check the status of
the hosts in your
c o n fi g u r a t i o n .

HTIME xxxxxxxxxxxx.xxx KCYCLES.

Dayfile message giving the model 176 CPU
clock cycle count for the job. The count
is in kilocycle units.

HTIME NOT AVAILABLE.

The HTIME command or macro is valid only on
a model 176.

None.

1AJ

I/O LIMITS EXCEEDED.

Your validated job I/O limits have been
exceeded during the current RECLAIM session.

Log in and retry the
operation. If it fails
again, check your
validated I/O limits for
tape mounts to ensure
that you have not
exceeded your limits.

RECLAIM

I/O ON EXECUTE-ONLY FILE.

An overlay load was attempted from an
execute-only file other than that from
which the main routine was loaded.

Correct overlay calls
and retry.

I/O ON EXECUTE-ONLY FILE filename AT
address.

You attempted an action not allowed on an
execute-only file.

Assign file in proper
mode to allow the
desired operation.

B-30

CCP

/■^StSk
CCP

1AJ

1MS

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

I/O SEQUENCE ERROR.

Action was requested on a local file that
was busy.

Write a PSR.

LFM
PFM
1AJ

I/O SEQUENCE ERROR ON FILE filename AT
address.

You attempted to perform a function on a
local file before another function on the
same file was complete.

Modify program to wait
until each function is
complete before
attempting another.

1MS

IAF CLOSED.

IAF is not available for use by terminals.
Issued by NAM. IAF and NAM did not
connect.

Contact Central Software
Support.

IDLE

The system is waiting for you to enter a
command.

Enter a command.

ILLEGAL PW SPECIFICATION - IGNORED.

The value specified with the PW command
option is not numeric.

Correct the parameter ITEMIZE
and retry.

ILLEGAL REQUEST.

No parameters were specified on a DMPECS or
DMDECS command.

Retry job with corrected CPMEM
command.

ILLEGAL USER.

Four unsuccessful attempts at login were
made after which the terminal was
disconnected from the system.

O b t a i n a c c u r a t e l o g i n N E T VA L
information before
attempting to log in.
Inform site analyst if
problem persists.

cmd ILLEGAL VALUE

You specified an invalid value in the
terminal definition command cmd.

C h o o s e a v a l i d v a l u e N E T VA L
(refer to appendix J).

IMPROPER ACCESSIBILITY.

You did not specify the correct file
accessibility on the LABEL command or
macro, or volume accessibility was set and
you attempted to assign the tape as
unlabeled from a nonsystem origin job.

Ensure accuracy of RESEX
request.

IMPROPER LOGIN, TRY AGAIN.

You have entered an incorrect family name,
user name, or password during login.

Check parameters and IAFEX
r e t r y.

IMPROPER VALIDATION.

You entered incorrect or insufficient
validation information.

Verify that USER command 1AJ
precedes rest of job
(followed by CHARGE, if
required) and is the
first command after the
Job.

IMPROPER VALIDATION.

A CHARGE command is required to continue.

Enter a CHARGE command. 1AJ

INCORRECT ACCESS LEVEL FOR EQUIPMENT.

You have specified a level outside of the
equipment access level limits.

Use access level within RESEX
required equipment's
access level limits, or
use equipment with
access level required.

INCORRECT ARGUMENT.

On a SETFAL, SETJAL, SETPFAC, or SETPFAL
command, you specified an incorrect
argument other than access level or access
category.

Reenter the command with MLSEXEC
correct arguments.

INCORRECT ARGUMENT VALUE.

A directive keyword was equated to an
incorrect value such as a file name longer
than seven characters or an alphabetic
character in a numeric string.

Correct the value and RECLAIM
r e t r y.

INCORRECT CHARACTER.

Incorrect character read from 9-track
tape. If a 1 is detected in bit 7 of a
translated character, the character is
incorrect. The dayfile message STATUS
ERROR, filename AT address precedes this
message and specifies the file (filename)
and the address.

Verify the following: 1MT
- Tape contains coded
data rather than binary,
b i n a r y. I f b i n a r y, u s e
binary copy operation.
- Tape is ASCII rather
than EBCDIC. If
EBCDIC, specify CV=EB
on LABEL command.
- Tape is 7-bit rather
than 8-bit ASCII. If
8-bit, use FCOPY to
convert to 7-bit.
If all the above are
v e r i fi e d ( t h a t i s ,
tape is 7-bit ASCII)
notify site analyst.

60459680 H

8-31

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE
In a copy request, one of the following was
detected.
- Last character position was less than
first character position.
- Last character position was greater than
150.
- Either first character position or last
character position was unrecognizable.

Ensure accuracy of
command parameters.

COPYC
COPYC

INCORRECT CHARGE.

Dayfile and output file message indicating
one of the following.
- The charge or project number does not
exist.
- The project number is not available to a
user with this user name.
- The charge or project number exists but
is inactive.

Check to see that charge
and project numbers are
correct and reenter.

CHARGE

INCORRECT COMBINATION OF QN/SI.

SI was specified and QN was not. If SI is
specified, then QN must also be specified.

Specify QN and rerun the
job.

LISTLB

xx INCORRECT COMMAND

The characters xx must be a terminal
definition mnemonic or interactive status
command.

Ensure the accuracy of
your entry and retry.

INCORRECT COMMAND.

You entered an incorrect command or a
command you are not authorized to use.

Correct command and
reenter.

INCORRECT COMMAND.

The system could not identify the command.

Check validity of
command.

1AJ

INCORRECT COMMAND

You specified an incorrect command or
too many parameters on the command.

Check the accuracy
of the command.

QGET
DROP

INCORRECT COMMAND

One of the following has occurred:
- The CHARGE command has an incorrect

Use the LIMITS command
to check your validation
and, if validated to use
command, correct the
format of the command
and reenter.

CHARGE
IAFEX

parameter or it has no terminator.
- You entered an incorrect command or a
command you were not validated to use.
- The job was not in a state to process
the command at that time.

|

ACTION

INCORRECT CHARACTER NUMBER.

INCORRECT COPY.

File and/or conversion types do not meet
copy requirements.

Correct error and retry.

COPYB

INCORRECT COUNT.

The copy file count is nonnumeric or
specified as zero.

Correct command and
r e t r y.

COPYC

INCORRECT CPU PRIORITY VALUE.

You specified a CPU priority value which
exceeds the maximum value allowed.

Reenter the command with
a valid CPU priority.

CONTROL

INCORRECT DC CODE.

Disposition code specified on the command
is not valid.

Correct and retry.

INCORRECT DC PARAMETER - dc

You specified an incorrect DC=dc
parameter.

Correct the
DC=dc parameter

INCORRECT DEVICE REQUEST.

The device type (R parameter) specified on
a request for an auxiliary device cannot be
recognized or does not exist in the
system. If the auxiliary device specified
by the PN parameter is not the same type as
the system or job default, the R parameter
must be included.

Examine auxiliary device
request and ensure its
accuracy.

INCORRECT END OF JOB OPTION SPECIFIED.

The option specified is not valid for a
noninteractive job.

Retry with a different
option.

CPM

♦INCORRECT ENTRY, TRY AGAIN*

You entered incorrect characters in
response to an SRU limit or time limit.

Enter correct characters.

IAFEX

INCORRECT EQUIPMENT.

Equipment specified does not exist or is
not allowed (for example, an interactive
terainal is requested from other than
interactive origin, or a tape is being
requested with the REQUEST macro).

Ensure that file resides
on a legal equipment
type.

LFM
RESEX

INCORRECT EQUIPMENT ON FILE filename AT
address.

A system error.

Inform site analyst.

1MS

INCORRECT ERROR EXIT ADDRESS.

Error exit address is beyond the job's
current field length.

None.

1AJ

INCORRECT EXTERNAL CALL.

RESEX did not recognize an external call.

Inform site analyst.

RESEX

INCORRECT FILE MODE.

You tried to unlock a file that was
attached in execute-only mode.

None.

LFM

B-32

QGET
DROP

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

INCORRECT FILE NAME filename AT address.

The file name does not conform to
established rules. The file name must have
a maximum of seven characters,
alphanumeric, and must be left-justified
w i t h b i n a r y z e r o fi l l .

Use valid file name.

1MS

INCORRECT FILE STATUS.

Specified file status is incorrect.

Check value.

LFM

INCORRECT FILE TYPE.

The specified file is of a type not allowed
in the requested operation. Possible
causes include attempts to
- Change a nonlocal file to file type
l i b r a r y.
- Designate a direct access file as the
p r i m a r y fi l e .
- Route the primary file.
- Change the access level of a nonlocal
fi l e .

Ve r i f y t h a t fi l e t y p e i s
appropriate.

LFM

pfn INCORRECT FILE TYPE.

The operation requested cannot be performed
on the specified file because it is of the
wrong file type. This message is issued
when you 1) attempt to define a direct access
file with the same local file name as a
file currently assigned to the job that is
of a file type other than local, or 2) the
local file being saved is a direct access
file attached in read/allow modify or
read/allow append mode.

1) Define the file useing a unique name, or
2) Return the file and
reattach it in a differ
ent mode.

PFM

INCORRECT FILE TYPE FOR SPECIFIED CHARACTER
SET.

ASCFL or EBCFL was specified as the
character set for a non-tape file, or any
other character set for a stranger tape
fi l e .

Correct the parameter
and retry.

FCOPY

INCORRECT HOLL. CODE, RECxxx CDyyyy.

Command yyyy in record xxx was found to
contain an incorrect Hollerith code. The
job was terminated without EXIT processing.

Correct command in error.

1AJ

INCORRECT I/O REQUEST ON FILE filename AT
address.

The system could not recognize the
specified function code, or the code was
not valid for the type of device to which
the file was assigned. You attempted to
write on a local file that resides on a
device whose highest access level is below
the current access level of your job. The
system provides a dump of the FET on file
OUTPUT.

Verify CIO function code
being used. Lower the
access level of your
job, if possible, or
raise the access level
o f t h e fi l e .

1MS

INCORRECT ID CODE.

An identification code not in the range
0-678 or 77B is present on the LDI command.

Reissue the request with
the correct
identification code.

INCORRECT INPUT FILE.

An attempt was made to pack a file that is
assigned to an interactive terminal. For
example, file INPUT for an interactive
origin jobs cannot be packed.

Verify that file being
packed is not assigned
to an interactive
terminal.

PACK

INCORRECT INPUT FILE SYSTEM SECTOR.

Job terminated without exit processing due
to system error.

Inform software support.

1AJ

INCORRECT INSTRUCTION.

The CPU attempted to execute an incorrect
or unavailable instruction.

Analyze job output and
dumps to determine the
cause of the error.

1AJ

INCORRECT JOB ORIGIN TYPE FOR TRMDEF.

The TRMDEF command was entered from a job
that was not of an interactive origin.

Retry from an
interactive origin job
or remove the TRMDEF
command.

INCORRECT JSN ARGUMENT.

The JSN specified is not four characters.

Fix JSN and retry.

CLASS

INCORRECT LABEL TYPE, filename AT address.

Incorrect label type. The only valid label
types are ANSI labeled and nonstandard
labeled.

Use correct label type.

1MT

INCORRECT LINE LENGTH.

Either of the following out of bounds
conditions exists with respect to the Ix,
Nx, Ox, and H parameters of the L072
command.
- (0x+Nx).GT.H
- (Ix+Nx).GT.(buffer length) where 1 .LE.
x .LE. b

Correct parameter and
r e t r y.

L072

INCORRECT LIST OPTION.

The list option specified in a CATLIST
command is incorrect.

Refer to description of
CATLIST command for
valid List options.

CATLIST

60459680 H

B-33

|

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

INCORRECT LOAD ADDRESS.

The load address is less than 2.

Specify larger load
address and retry.

1AJ

INCORRECT LOCAL FILE NAME.

The FN=lfn parameter on the QGET command
contains an error.
l f n T h e l o c a l fi l e n a m e f o r t h e
queued output.

Correct the parameter.

QGET

INCORRECT MODIFICATION OF filename AT address.

Either you have attempted to shorten a
modify-only file or the file cannot be
modified at all.

Determine whether file
can be modified.

1MS

INCORRECT NOISE SIZE ON filenam.

Noise size on S, L, or F format tape does
not meet copy requirements.

For copy, ensure that
noise size on input file
is greater than or equal
to that of the output
file. For COPYB,
correct noise size to
meet requirements and
retry (noise size of 8
for 7-track or 6 for
9-track tapes is
required for X and SI
format conversions).

COPYB

INCORRECT -NR- PARAMETER.

You specified something other than NR to
inhibit the rewinding of the file.

Correct the NOTE command
and retry.

INCORRECT OP PARAMETER - op

You specified an incorrect OP=op
parameter.

Correct the
OP=op parameter.

INCORRECT */* OPTION.

An incorrect command option followed the
start.

Correct the option and
r e t r y.

MFILES

INCORRECT OPTION ARGUMENT.

Command contains an incorrect argument for
an option.

Check command
description and retry.

CLASS

INCORRECT OUTPUT FILENAME.

Command contained filename that was more
than seven characters long, or contained a
non-alphanumeric character.

Correct filename and
r e t r y.

CLASS

INCORRECT PARAMETER.

One of the following.
- Parameter value is out of range.
- You specified a parameter that cannot be
included on the command.
- Command is incorrect.

Ensure accuracy of
command.

IAFEX
LISTL8
CATLIST

INCORRECT PARAMETER.

You specified an incorrect parameter on the
current command.

Ensure the accuracy of
your parameter.

CONTROL

INCORRECT PARAMETER.

The parameter in the entry was invalid or
too long.

Correct the parameter
and retry.

-INCORRECT PARAMETER.

The S or L parameter was entered as zero on
the L072 command.

Retry command, adding a
correct S or L parameter
value.

L072

INCORRECT PARAMETER LENGTH OR SEPARATOR.

You specified a parameter longer than seven
characters or used an incorrect separator.

Ensure the accuracy of
your parameter
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s .

CONTROL

INCORRECT QUEUE SPECIFIED.

You specified an incorrect disposition code.

Retry with valid
disposition code.

SUBMIT

INCORRECT QUEUE TYPE.

System error.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

ENQUIRE

INCORRECT -R/NR- PARAMETER.

You entered a value other than R or NR for
the second parameter of the BLOCK command.

Correct the R/NR
parameter and resubmit.

NOTE

INCORRECT REPLY LIMIT REACHED.

The number of consecutive incorrect entries
exceeds the limit.

None.

RECOVER

INCORRECT REQUEST.

A program issued a request (such as a
MEMORY request) in which the request word
was outside the job's field length.

If the message occurs
after you entered a user
break 2, ignore the
message. If not,
correct the program.

1MA

INCORRECT RESOURCE COUNT.

Total resource demand exceeds maximum
allowed, as defined by installation
parameter MAXD (defined in RESEX).

Reduce RESOURC demands.

B-34

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

INCORRECT SERVICE CLASS.

You entered an invalid service class for
the SC parameter of the CLASS command.
Either you are not validated to use the
service class you specified, or the service
class is not valid for the origin type of
the job you specified in the JSN parameter.

Correct the service CLASS
class entry and resubmit.

INCORRECT SORT PARAMETER.

An incorrect parameter has been specified
on the SORT command.

Consult description of SORT
SORT command for valid
parameters.

INCORRECT SYNTAX,

A required parameter is missing, parameters
are given in the wrong order, or an
incorrect separator has been encountered.

Check proper command IEDIT
format and reenter the
command.

cmd INCORRECT TERMINAL CLASS

The value you specified in the terminal
definition command cmd is not valid for
your terminal.

Choose an appropriate CCP
value (refer to appendix
J).

INCORRECT TERMINAL REQUEST.

Informative message indicating that an
unidentified request was encountered, or
auto recall was not requested by the
calling job.

Correct
erroneous
request, or rewrite
program to use recall.

INCORRECT TERMINAL TYPE FOR TRMDEF.

The TRMDEF command was entered from a
terminal that was not a network terminal.

Retry from a network TRMDEF
terminal.

INCORRECT USER.

Four unsuccessful attempts at login were
made after which the terminal was discon
nected from the system.

Obtain accurate login NVF
information before
attempting to log in.
Inform site analyst if
problem persists.

INCORRECT USER ACCESS.

You tried to access a subsystem for
which you do not have authorization.

Check to see if you
are authorized to use
the subsystem you
specified. (Refer to
LIMITS command"*.

EXINIT
EXSLV

INCORRECT USER COMMAND.

The user name or password could not be
validated, or a secondary USER command to a
different family was attempted and you are
not validated to change families.

Verify that user name
and password are valid.

CPM

cmd INCORRECT VALUE

You specified an invalid value in the
terminal definition command cmd.

Choose a valid value
(refer to appendix J).

INCORRECTLY-FORMATTED LIBRARY, Iname.

There is an error in the ULIB record of
file Iname. The system does not create a
d i r e c t o r y f o r t h i s fi l e .

Correct the error in the LIBRARY
ULIB record of Iname.

INCORRECTLY FORMATTED TRMDEF data.

A terminal definition parameter specified
on the TRMDEF command or via the 0016
control byte was not correct.

Ensure accuracy of entry
and retry.

INDEX TOO LARGE ON OPEN, FILE filename AT
address.

For an OPEN function, the random index
length exceeded the index buffer size.

Set EP bit in FET+1 to 1MS
get error status without
abort or increase index
buffer size.

INITIAL COMMAND LIMIT.

The number of commands processed by the job
exceeded the limit for which you are
validated. At this point, an additional
eight commands are allowed for error
processing.

Split the job into two 1AJ
or more jobs, reduce the
number of commands in
the job, or request a
larger command limit
from site personnel.

INITIAL MESSAGE LIMIT.

MONITOR has detected that the message limit
for the job has expired.

Decrease job size or 1AJ
increase limit.

INPUT DISCARDED

The network has discarded the last input
from your terminal. May be caused by
entering a user break or interactive status
command while awaiting a response to a
previous user break or interactive status
command.

Reenter your last input. CCP

.INPUT FILE ERROR.

An error on the input file was encountered
during the unpack operation.

Correct

INPUT FILE IN NO RERUN STATUS.

Informative message.

None.

QFM

INPUT FILE IN RERUN STATUS.

Informative message.

None.

QFM

INPUT FILE NOT FOUND.

The input file must be either a local or an
attached direct access file.

Create the file and
r e t r y.

FCOPY

60459680 H

and

r e t r y.

TLX

L07Z

B-35

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

INPUT LOST, REENTER LAST LINE.

Your last line of input was lost due to an
IAF internal error.

Reenter the last line.
If the error recurs,
inform site analyst or
customer engineer.

IAFEX

•INPUT* NOT ASSIGNED TO TERMINAL.

You entered the PASSWOR command from an
input file when password randomization is
required. If password randomization is
required, you must enter the PASSWOR
command as a direct response to a system
prompt.

Resumbit the PASSWOR
command in response to
the system prompt.

MODVAL

INSERTED LINES OVERLAP EXISTING LINES, AT
nnnnn. ENTER Y TO CONTINUE OR N TO STOP.

The MOVE, DUP, or READ conmand cannot be
completed without line number overlap
processing. The processing will begin at
line nnnnn.

Type Y to complete the
edit command or type N
to terminate the edit
command.

INSUFFICIENT RESOURCES ON SYSTEM.

Resource demand exceeds the number of units
physically available on the system.

Reduce resource demand.

RESEX

INSUFFICIENT RESOURCES ... RE-ENTER

The system has insufficient resources to
handle the current request.

Retry the request.

HELL07

INSUFFICIENT STORAGE FOR LIBRARY GENERATION.

Additional memory is required for the
LIBGEN command.

Increase field length
and retry.

LIBGEN

INTERACTIVE JOB STEP, DUMP DISABLED.

You entered a memory dump command directly
from a terminal. This is not allowed.

To get a memory dump
from an interactive job,
place the dump command
in a procedure or in an
ENTER command.

1AJ

INVAILD APPLICATION, TRY AGAIN.

The requested application is unknown or
unavailable to the user.

Check the accuracy of
the entry. If problems
persist, contact
installation personal
concerning validations.

NVF

INVALID DEFAULT CHARGE

An informative message indicating that you
entered a CHARGE(*) command but that your
default charge information is not valid.
Since you are not required to enter a
charge comnunand, your job is not aborted
and you may continue processing.

Contact your site
administration to check
on the validity of
information in your user
v a l i d a t i o n fi l e .

MODVAL

INVALID DISPLAY DATA FROM SCOPE 2

A hardware or system error occurred.

Reenter the command. If
the same message is
returned, inform the
site analyst.

QUEUE7

INVALID ENTRY.

You entered something other than GO,
RELIST, or a valid job sequence name.

Enter GO, RELIST, or a
valid job sequence name.

RECOVER

INVALID FILE STATUS.

You specified a file status in a SETFS
command other than AD or NAD.

Retry with a proper file
status parameter.

MFILES

INVALID OPTION X.

The option specified is not defined for
ENQUIRE.

Check parameters on
command and retry.

ENQUIRE

INVALID USER ACCESS.

You attempted to use a command that can be
used only in interactive jobs and your job
is not interactive.

None.

pfn IS DIRECT ACCESS.

An indirect access file operation was
attempted on a direct access file.

Use the appropriate
direct access file
request.

PFM

filename IS EXECUTE ONLY.

The specified local file cannot be accessed
by SAVE, REPLACE, APPEND or DEFINE since it
is an execute-only file.

None.

PFM

pfn IS INDIRECT ACCESS.

A direct access file operation was
attempted on an indirect access file.

Use the appropriate
i n d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e
request.

filename IS READ ONLY.

filename was not processed because the user
was not permitted to write to it.

Correct and retry.

MFILES

ITEMIZE COMPLETE.

Specified processing is finished.

None

ITEMIZE

ITEMIZING xxxx

Record xxxx is being processed.

None.

ITEMIZE

8-36

60459680 H

MESSAGE
ITF, ACN acn, APPLICATION LINKAGE ERROR WITH
HOST pid.
CN acn, REASON CODE = nn - xxxx.

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

The host physical identifier pid has detected Inform site analyst,
one of the following anomalies on the
application connection number acn:

ROUTINE

ITF

01 UNRECOGNIZED COMMAND.
02 INVALID QUALIFIER.
03 INVALID ATTRIBUTE.
04 REQUIRED ATTRIBUTE MISSING.
05 CONNECTION TIMED OUT.
06 FC/BRK RECEIVED.
07 FC/NAK RETRY COUNT EXECEEDED.
08 BLOCKS OUT OF SEQUENCE.
09 UNEXPECTED COMMAND.

y$p*3RSy

ITF, ACN acn, APPLICATION LINKAGE REJECTED BY
HOST pid

Indicates ITFS application on remote host
physical identifier has rejected linkage
request.
acn Application connection number
p i d P h y s i c a l i d e n t i fi e r

If problem persists,
inform site analyst.

ITF, ACN acn, RETRANSMITTING TO HOST pid.

The RHF subsystem
the transmission of
acn Application
pid Physical

If problem persists,
inform site analyst.

ITF, ACN acn, TRANSMISSION RESUMED TO HOST
pid.

ITF has successfully transmitted a network
block which had been previously rejected by
the RHF subsystem.
acn Application connection number
p i d P h y s i c a l i d e n t i fi e r

None.

ITF

ITF, CONNECTED TO HOST pid ON ACN c/TCN yy.

Indicates state of terminal connection,
pid is remote host, c is RHF connection
number, and yy is virtual connection number.

None.

ITF

ITF, COULD NOT CONNECT TO HOST pid.
ITF, REASON CODE = nn - xxxx.

ITF was not able to establish an RHF
connection to remote host pid due to one of
the following conditions:

If problem persists,
contact local operator
to ensure RHF subsystem
and the LCN are
operational and/or
operator for remote host
pid to ensure RHF
software and hardwre as
well as the ITF servicer
application are
operational there.

nn

has repeatedly rejected
a network block by ITF.
connection number
i d e n t i fi e r

xxxx

01 LID UNKNOWN TO SUBSYSTEM.
02 REJECTED BY HOST.
03 NETWORK RESOURCE LIMIT.
04 SERIVCER UNAVAILABLE.
05 PATH DISABLED OR DOWN.
06 HOST NOT RESPONDING,
other CONNECTION REJECT.
ITF, COULD NOT CONNECT TO RHF SUBSYSTEM.
ITF, REASON CODE = nn - xxxx.

ITF was not able to establish
communications with the RHF subsystem due
to one of the following conditions:

nn

Contact local operator.

ITF

xxxx

01 SUBSYSTEM UNAVAILABLE.
0 2 I T F U N AVA I L A B L E .
03 ITF DISABLED
other NETON FAILURE.
ITF, HOST pid HAS RESPONDED.

Indicates state of connection to host pid.

None.

TTF

ITF, NAM NETWORK IDLEDOWN IN PROGRESS.

The operator has initiated subsystem
idledown. ITF will not accept any new
connections.

None.

ITF

ITF, RHF NETWORK IDLEDOWN IN PROGRESS.

The operator has initiated subsystem
idledown. ITF will not accept any new
connections.

ITF, RHF NETWORK SHUTDOWN.

The subsystem is terminating immediately.
All connections are aborted.

None.

ITF, Tnnnn, TERMINAL CONNECTION ABORTED BY
HOST pid.

Indicates state of terminal connection.

None.

ITF, Tnnnn, TERMINAL CONNECTION ABORTED TO
HOST pid.

Indicates state of terminal connection.

ITF, Tnnnn, TERMINAL CONNECTION ENDED BY
HOST pid.

Indicates state of terminal connection.

ITF

ITF, Tnnnn, TERMINAL CONNECTION ENDED TO
HOST pid.

Indicates state of terminal connection.

ITF

ITF, Tnnnn, TERMINAL CONNECTION REJECTED BY
HOST pid.

Indicates state of terminal connection.

ITF

60459680 H

ITF

ITF

B-37

I

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

ITF, TERMINAL TIMEOUT.

Terminal inactivity forced disconnection.

None.

ITF

ITF, TERMINAL WILL DISCONNECT IN ONE MINUTE.

Due to lack of activity, your terminal will
be disconnected.

Resume activity or else
terminal is disconnected.

ITF

ITF, WAITING FOR HOST pid TO RESPOND.

Indicates state of connection to host pid.

None.

ITF

.IX OR OX NOT DEFINED.

The Ix or Ox parameter was not specified in
conjunction with the Nx parameter on an
L072 command.

Check the description of
the L072 command in
section 9.

L072

JOB ACTIVE.

The system is unable to process the command
because the previous command has not
completed.

Retry when current
operation is complete.

JOB ALREADY WAITING ON SERVICE CLASS.

Change cannot be made because the job is
already waiting for a CLASS command in the
job to complete.

Wait and retry later.

JOB CANNOT ACCESS FILE.

The permanent file being processed has
either an access level or access categories
that are not valid for your job.

None. Your job cannot
access the file.

JOB CARD ERROR (jobname)

The Job command of a routed job contains an
e r r o r.
jobname First 20 characters
of the job command
in error.

Correct the Job command
and retry.

DSP

JOB COMMAND ERROR.

The Job command on the file being submitted
i s i n e r r o r.

Compare the Job command
in error with the Job
command description in
section 7. Also check
your validation limits.

1AJ

JOB DETACHED, JSN=oldjsn
JSN: newjsn, NAMIAF.

Informative message. The system creates
the new JSN newjsn for your current
terminal session.

No action required.

IAFEX

JOB DROP IN PROCESS

You have issued a DROP,J request which is
being processed.

Wait for the user prompt.

HELL07

JOB HUNG IN AUTO RECALL.

System error.

Inform site analyst.

RECLAIM

JOB HUNG IN AUTORECALL

System detected an autorecall call to an
incomplete word and there was no activity
to make the word complete.

Correct the program to
issue a correct recall
request.

1AJ

JOB IN NORERUN STATE ON RECOVERY.

Identifies a job recovered on level 0 or
level 3 deadstart that was aborted because
it was in a no-rerun node (due to NORERUN
command or macro).

Refer to the NORERUN
command or macro
description.

1AJ

JOB NOT DETACHED.

Condition encountered during terminal job
recovery attempt. The JSN specified is
not associated with a job.

Retry command.
Recheck the JSN.

IAFEX

JOB NOT FOUND.

Condition encountered during terminal job
recovery attempt.

Retry command.

IAFEX

JOB NOT RECOVERABLE.

Condition encountered during terminal job
recovery attempt.

Retry command.
Recheck the JSN.

IAFEX

JOB NOT RERUN.

The system was unable to successfully rerun
a job because of a mass storage read error
or because the QFT is full.

Resubmit the job to the
system.

1AJ

JOB REPRIEVED.

The job has been successfully reprieved.

None.

1AJ

JOB RERUN.

The job has been terminated and requeued
for input.

None.

1AJ

JOB STEP ABORT.

The job step was aborted due to mass
storage device error.

Retry the job step. If
the problem recurs,
inform site analyst.

1AJ

JOB STEP EXCEEDS ACCOUNT BLOCK.

You tried to set your job step limit to a
value greater than your account block limit
or tried to set your account block limit to
a value less than your job step limit.

Check values on SETJSL
and SETASL commands.

JOB STEP LIMIT.

The monitor detected the expiration of the
job step SRU limit.

Reset job step limit
with SETJSL command or
macro and retry. If job
step SRU limit is set at
maximum, request
increased SRU validation.

CLASS

.rrfS^K

1AJ

>^S\
B-38

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

JOBNAME IS jsn

An LDI command queued a file for input.
The entered job has specified job sequence
name.

None.

LDI

JSN MORE THAN FOUR CHARACTERS

You specified a job sequence name (JSN)
of more than four characters.

Correct the JSN=jsn
parameter.

QGET
DROP

JSN NOT FOUND.

For the JSN parameter of the CLASS command,
you specified a JSN that is not in the
system, or that does no belong to you.

Check to see if you
entered the correct JSN.

CLASS

JSN OR UJN MUST BE SPECIFIED.

The JSN or the UJN must be specified within
the command parameters.

Specify the JSN or the
UJN and retry the
command.

LABEL CONTENT ERROR, filename AT address.

A block read was the correct size for a
label but one or more required fields (such
as the label name) were incorrect.

Use LISTLB command to
obtain label data and
r e t r y.

1MT

LABEL MISSING, filename AT address.

During a read operation, a required label
was missing.

Ensure that tape has
label.

1MT

LABEL NOT EXPIRED.

You attempted to write on a tape with an
unexpired label.

If current contents of
tape can be sacrificed,
have operator blank
label tape. Otherwise,
wait until label has
expired.

1MT

LABEL PARAMETER ERROR ON OPEN, filename
AT address.

Label fields did not match on open
request. An additional message,
FIELD BEGINNING AT addr NO COMPARE,
specifying the decimal character position
in HDR1 of the first field that did not
compare correctly, is also issued.

Use LISTLB command to
obtain label data.

1MT

LDD - ARGUMENT ERROR - address.

One of the following conditions is true:
- FET address is less than 2.
- FET address is greater than FL-2.
- Auto recall was not set when LDD was
called.
address Parameter block address.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

LDD - DEVICE ERROR - FILENAM AT address.

An unrecovered device error occured on file
filename.

Contact a customer
engineer.

FDL

LDD - I/O SEQUENCE ERROR.

I/O was attempted on a file that is
currently active on another I/O request.

Check program for
concurrent I/O.

FOL

LDI ID AND FM/UN CONFLICT.

Both the ID and FM/UN parameters were
specified on the command. ID may not be
specified with FM or UN.

Correct and retry.

LDQ - ARGUMENT ERROR - address.

The FET address is less than 2 or greater
than FL-4.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

FDL

LDQ - DEVICE ERROR - FILENAM AT address.

An unrecovered device error occured on file
filename.

Contact a customer
engineer.

FDL

LDQ - I/O SEQUENCE ERROR.

I/O was attempted on a file that is
currently active on another I/O request.

Check program for
concurrent I/O.

FDL

LDR ERROR.

Issued before one of the following errors.
- OVERLAY NOT FOUND IN LIBRARY.
- ARGUMENT ERROR.

Correct error and retry.

LDR

LFM ERROR.

LFM detected an error in the request. See
other error messages in dayfile for more
information.

Ensure that a valid LFM
request is being made.

LFM

LFM INCORRECT REQUEST.

One of the following:
- The function detected was not recognized
as a valid LFM function.
- An LFM function was issued without the
auto recall bit set.

Verify that a valid LFM
request is being used.

LFM

LIBEDIT ARGUMENT ERROR(S).

The LIBEDIT command contains an incorrect
parameter.

Check the LIBEDIT
command description for
the correct format and
r e t r y.

LIBGEN ARGUMENT ERROR.

An incorrect parameter was used on the
LIBGEN command.

Check the format of the
LIBGEN command and retry.

LI8GEN

LIBGEN FILE NAME CONFLICT.

The LIBGEN command named the same file as
the input file and as the output file.

Change the input file or
output file name.

LIBGEN

/k'kto**v

y^^N
60459680 H

8-39 I

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

LIBRARY FILE NOT GENERATED.

The file to be processed did not contain
any of the proper record types.

Check for proper source
fi l e .

LIBGEN

LIBRARY FILE NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

An attempt was made to generate a user
library onto a file not assigned to mass
storage.

Choose an output file
that resides on mass
storage.

LIBGEN

LIBRARY GENERATION COMPLETE.

Message issued when generation of a library
is completed.

None.

LIBGEN

LIBRARY GENERATION FILE EMPTY.

The file to be processed is empty.

Ve r i f y t h a t fi l e i s
local to job and
contains data.

LIBGEN

LIBRARY NOT FOUND, Iname.

User library Iname is not a local file.

Make file Iname local.

LIBRARY

LID NOT FOUND

In a LISTLID command, you extended a LID
that either does not exist or that the site
had defined as not listable through LISTLID.

Check to see that you
entered the correct LID.

LISTLID

LINE LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Your job generated more lines of print than
that for which you are authorized. If you
do not fill all pages, the system still
assesses a minimum number of lines per page.

Ensure that your print
files do not contain
undesired line feeds and
page ejects (refer to
appendix H). If
necessary, request a
higher limit from your
site.

QAP

LINE NUM8ER INCREMENT ERROR

Line number increment specified is less
than one or greater than 4095.

Reenter command with
correct line number
increment.

IEDIT

LINE NUMBER LIMIT EXCEEDED.

The line number encountered or required
during a resequencing (RESEQ) operation
exceeded 99999.

Examine program and
correct line number in
e r r o r.

LINE NUMBER LIMIT EXCEEDED

An attempt to move, duplicate, or read a
group of lines in the edit file required a
line number greater than 99999 to be
assigned.

Resequence the file
(using RESEQ command)
and reenter the command.

IEDIT

LINE NUMBER OVERLAP ERROR

Two or more line ranges have at least one
line number in common.

Reenter command with
non-overlapping tine
ranges.

IEDIT

LINE RANGE ERROR

An incorrect line number was specified in a
line range.

Reenter command with
correct line range.

LINE TERMINATORS NOT USED ON A STRANGER
TAPE.

A line terminator parameter was specified
for a file residing on a stranger tape.

Remove the line
terminator parameter and
r e t r y.

FCOPY

LINE lineno TRUNCATED

The indicated line of the file was
truncated during RESEQ processing.

Check file to determine
whether relevant data
was lost.

RESEQ

LINE WAS DISCONNECTED WHILE LOANED.

The line connection to your secondary
application was broken.

Enter another APPSW
command to reestablish
the connection.

nnnn LINE(S) TRUNCATED.

nnnn Lines were truncated because they were
longer than 150 characters.

Determine if relevant
data was tost in the
truncation. If
possible, split the too
Long lines and repeat
the copy operation.

COPYC

nnn LINES TRUNCATED.

The processing of a SECHDR command caused
nnn lines of your file to be truncated by
one character from the right.

None.

SECHDR

xxxxxx LINES TRUNCATED.

1 or more lines were truncated when they
were found to be longer than the fixed
length line length (FL parameter) or an
FCOPY to a stranger tape.

If data lost was
s i g n i fi c a n t , r e t r y
command with a larger
value for the FL
parameter.

FCOPY

nnnnn LINES TRUNCATED ON FILE filename

nnnnn lines on file filename have been
truncated.

Inform site analyst. If
many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITIALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

IEDIT

LIST OF FILES LENGTH TOO LONG OR ZERO.

The list of files exceeds the length of the
local FNT, starts or extends beyond the
job's field length, or has a length of zero.

Contact software support.

1AJ

B-40

60459680 H

MESSAGE

r

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

LIST OPTION ERROR.

A n i n c o r r e c t l i s t o p t i o n w a s s p e c i fi e d f o r
the *LO* parameter in the LIBEDIT command.

Change the *L0*
parameter to specify
only valid options.

LIBEDIT

LISTLB ABORT.

A fatal error has occurred while processing
the LISTLB command.

R e f e r t o d a y fi l e f o r
cause of problem.

LISTLB

LISTLB COMPLETE.

Informative message indicating that the
L I S T L B o p e r a t i o n h a s fi n i s h e d .

None.

LISTLB

LOADER MISSING.

1AJ could not find BEGIN or LDR=.

Inform software support.

1AJ

LOCAL FILE xxxxxxx ALREADY EXISTS.

T h e fi l e c o u l d n o t b e a t t a c h e d b e c a u s e a
l o c a l fi l e a l r e a d y e x i s t s w i t h t h e
name xxxxxxx.

Use a different name
in the request or
r e t u r n t h e l o c a l fi l e .

QGET

LOCAL FILE LIMIT.

The job tried to create too many local
fi l e s .

R e d u c e l o c a l fi l e u s a g e .

1AJ

LOG - PPU BUSY.

DSD cannot process an entry into the
errorlog at this time.

Erase command and
r e t r y. I n f o r m s i t e
analyst if the probelm
persists.

DSD

LOST 7000 COMMUNICATIONS

Communications between NOS and the SCOPE 2
system have been temporarily lost.

Enter a RESUME directive
t o a t t e m p t r e c o v e r y.

HELL07

.L072 COMPLETE.

Informative message indicating that the
program has completed processing.

None.

L072

LPest, CHcc Acount INCOMPLETE TRANSFER.
LPest, CHcc CONTROLLER HUNG BUSY.
LPest, CHcc Fcode FUNCTION TIMEOUT.
L P e s t , C H c c F c o d e R E J P d r i v e r, C c o n v e r t , E e q u i p .
LPest, CHcc TURNED OFF.

Line printer messages. Refer to EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

110
QAP

LPest, CHcc RESERVED.

The line printer is reserved and cannot be
connected on channel cc.
est EST ordinal of line printer
cc Channel number

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

110

LRest, CHcc Acount INCOMPLETE TRANSFER.
LRest, CHcc CONTROLLER HUNG BUSY.
LRest, CHcc Fcode FUNCTION TIMEOUT.

580-12 line printer messages. Refer to
EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

11 0
QAP

LRest, CHcc PRINT ERROR LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Line printer message. Refer to EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

QAP

LRest, CHcc RESERVED.

The 580-12 line printer is reserved and
cannot be connected on channel cc.
est EST ordinal of line printer
cc Channel number.

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

110

LRest, nnnn PRINT ERRORS.

Line printer message. Refer to EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

QAP

LRC ERROR.

The longitudinal redundancy check character
was read incorrectly (9-track NRZI). The
dayfile message STATUS ERROR, filename AT
a d d r e s s p r e c e d e s t h i s m e s s a g e a n d s p e c i fi e s
t h e fi l e ( fi l e n a m e ) a n d t h e a d d r e s s .

Retry or inform site
analyst.

1MT

LSest, CHcc Acount INCOMPLETE TRANSFER.
LSest, CHcc CONTROLLER HUNG BUSY.
LSest, CHcc Fcode FUNCTION TIMEOUT.

580-16 line printer messages. Refer to
EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

110
QAP

LSest, CHcc Emmmm PFC ERROR.

580-16 line printer message. Refer to
EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

11 0
QAP

LSest, CHcc PRINT ERROR LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Line printer message. Refer to EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

QAP

LSest, CHcc RESERVED.

The 580-16 line printer is reserved and
cannot be connected to channel cc.
est EST ordinal of line printer
cc Channel number.

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

11 0

LSest, nnnn PRINT ERRORS.

Line printer message. Refer to EQest...

I n f o r m c u s t o m e r e n g i n e e r.

QAP

LRest, CHcc Fcode REJ
P d r i v e r, C c o n v e r t , E e q u i p .
LRest, CHcc TURNED OFF.

LSest, CHcc Fcode REJ
P d r i v e r, C c o n v e r t , E e q u i p .
LSest, CHcc TURNED OFF.

60459680 H

B-41

MESSAGE
LTest, CHcc Acount INCOMPLETE TRANSFER.
LTest, CHcc CONTROLLER HUNG BUSY.
LTest, CHcc Fcode FUNCTION TIMEOUT.

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

580-20 line printer messages. Refer to
EQest...

Inform customer engineer.

110
QAP

580-20 line printer message. Refer to
EQest...

Inform customer engineer.

110
QAP

LTest, CHcc PRINT ERROR LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Line printer message. Refer to EQest...

Inform customer engineer.

QAP

LTest, CHcc RESERVED.

The 580-20 line printer is reserved and
cannot be connected to channel cc.
est EST ordinal of line printer
c c C h a n n e l n u m b e r.

Inform customer engineer.

110

LTest, nnnn PRINT ERRORS.

Line printer message. Refer to EQest...

Inform customer engineer.

QAP

M.T. NOT AVAILABLE ON FILE filename AT
address.

The magnetic tape executive is not
executing.

Inform site operator.
Bring up MAGNET.

1MS

MAGNETIC TAPE SUBSYSTEM NOT ACTIVE.

One of the following occurred during a
magnetic tape request.
- There was no UDT address in the FST.
- The UDT address in the FST was incorrect.
- The MAG subsystem was not present.

Contact site operator
to have MAGNET
brought up. Otherwise
contact central
software support.

LFM

MAINFRAME=

Prompt requesting the LID of the SCOPE 2
mainframe you want to access.

Enter a valid SCOPE 2
mainframe LID.

HELL07

MAINFRAME ID NOT IN ID TABLE

The mainframe you requested is not
available.

Enter an alternate
mainframe LID, or type
END to terminate the
HELL07 session.

HELL07

MAINFRAME UNAVAILABLE

The mainframe you specified is not
currently available.

Enter a QUEUE7, ID command
to list PIDs currently,
active, then reenter the
command with an active
mainframe PID.

QUEUE7

MARGINALLY WRITTEN TAPE, filename AT address.

Some or all of the previous good blocks
used to create the recovery block ID
window cannot be read with error
correction enabled during repositioning
of the tape for write recovery. The
tape is marginal and will possibly fail
on a read. The job will terminate to
prevent the possibility of bad data in
t h e l i b r a r y.

Clean the tape drive. Have
the tape cleaned and
certified or use a new tape.

1MT

MASS STORAGE DIRECTORY NOT WRITTEN.

On a GTR command, you have requested that a
mass storage directory record be written on
a nonmass storage file.

Ensure that file resides
on mass storage.

MASS STORAGE ERROR.

An error was encountered in reading a
portion of the permanent file catalog or
permit information (error log and dayfile
message). This indicates a hardware
problem with a disk pack or disk drive.

Inform site analyst. If
many of these errors occur,
the site anlayst should
perform a full PFDUMP, total
INITIALIZE, and full PFLOAD
on the device.

MASS STORAGE ERROR.

Job was terminated without exit processing.

Resubmit job.

1AJ

MASS STORAGE LIMIT.

You have exceeded your mass storage
validation limits.

Return all unneeded
fi l e s a n d t r y a g a i n . I f
the message occurs
again, your validation
limit is too low to
allow the operation you
are attempting.

RECLAIM

MAXIMUM FL ENCOUNTERED - JOB LIST
INCOMPLETE.

The system has found too many recoverable
jobs.

Proceed as normal or
wait for other jobs to
time out and try again.

RECOVER

MEMORY OVERFLOW.

Insufficient field length has been
specified for KRONREF to execute.

Increase field length
with RFL command and
r e t r y.

LTest, CHcc Fcode REJ
Pdriver,Cconvert,Eequi p.
LTest, CHcc TURNED OFF.
LTest, CHcc Eequip PFC ERROR.

B-42

RESEX

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

MESSAGE LIMIT.

The number of messages issued by the job
has exceeded the limit for which you are
authorized. Message functions issued by
compilers or applications that run in the
job's field length are also counted as job
dayfile messages and thus are subject to
your dayfile message limit.

Split job into two or 1AJ
more jobs and retry.

MFL LESS THAN EXTENDED MEMORY MINIMUM CM FL.

To use extended memory you must have a
required minimum amount of central memory
field length. This message indicates that
you do not have the required central memory
fi e l d l e n g t h .

Increase central memory 1MA
fi e l d l e n g t h .

MFL REQUEST TOO SMALL, MINIMUM USED.

MFL request was less than CONTROL'S RFL=
value. CONTROL'S RFL= value is used for
this MFL request, thus allowing further MFL
requests.

Check the description of CONTROL
field length control in
section 3.

MFLINK - APPLICATION CONNECTION BROKEN.

The connection with the remote host was
broken by the network or remote host.

Inform site analyst. MFLINK
MFLINK retries unless
unless EP specified.

MFLINK - APPLICATION CONNECTION TIMEOUT.

The remote host did not respond in the
allotted time.

Inform site analyst. MFLINK
MFLINK retries unless
EP specified.

MFLINK - APPLICATION DISABLED.

The operator has disabled the PTF for the
network subsystem (RHF or NAM).

C o n t a c t s i t e o p e r a t o r. M F L I N K
MFLINK retries unless
RT specified.

MFLINK - BLOCK TOO LARGE.

The remote host or the network sent a block
or message that was too large.

Inform site analyst. MFLINK

MFLINK - CANNOT READ FROM filename.

The file filename does not have read
permission. The file type is not
supported by MFLINK, or the file
does not exist.

Correct and resubmit. MFLINK

MFLINK - CANNOT WRITE ON filename.

The file filename does not have write
permission, or the file type is not
supported by MFLINK.

Correct and resubmit. MFLINK

MFLINK - CONNECTING TO lid.

Informative message. You are being
connected to the remote host you specified.

None.

MFLINK - CONNECTION REJECTED BY REMOTE HOST.

The remote host you specified has rejected
the connection.

Inform remote analyst. MFLINK

MFLINK - CONTINUATION BLOCK DID NOT FOLLOW.

The continuation block did not follow.

Inform site analyst. MFLINK

MFLINK - ERR/LGL RECEIVED FROM SUBSYSTEM.

The network subsystem (RHF or NAM) detected
detected a logic error in communication.

Inform site analyst. MFLINK

MFLINK - FC/8RK RECEIVED RC=rc.

The remote host has sent a break with
reason code re.

Inform site analyst. MFLINK

MFLINK - FC/NAK RETRY LIMIT.

MFLINK was unable to transmit a block after
a system-defined number of attempts. Each
attempt was rejected by the network
subsystem (RHF or NAM).

Inform site analyst. MFLINK

MFLINK - FILE RETRANSMIT REQUESTED.

The remote host has requested that the host
retransmit the file.

None.

MFLINK - INCORRECT LID.

No mainframe in the network has the
specified logical identifier (LID), or the
LID specified contains an illegal character
or is not three characters long.

Use the LISTLID command MFLINK
to select the proper LID.

MFLINK - INVALID ACCESS VALIDATION.

Your user name does not have required
validation to access the remote mainframe.

Contact your site
administrator to get
the authorization.

MFLINK - INVALID COMMAND cmd.

The system received an invalid command
(cmd) from the remote host or received a
command out of sequence.

Inform site analyst. MFLINK

MFLINK - INVALID CONTROL STATEMENT.

You specified an incorrect parameter or
value on the MFLINK command,
command.

Correct the MFLINK
command and retry.

MFLINK - INVALID DATA DECLARATION.

You specified an incorrect DD=dd parameter
on the MFLINK command.

Correct the MFLINK
command and retry.

MFLINK - INVALID DIRECTIVE FILE NAME.

You specified an incorrect I=dirfile
parameter on the MFLINK command.

Correct the MFLINK
command and reissue.

/0H$*\

0 9 ^

MFLINK

MFLINK

MFLINK

/r^mp\

60459680 H

B-43

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ROUTINE

The file name you specified on the MFLINK
command is incorrect.

Correct
the
MFLINK
command and retry.

MFLINK - INVALID FILE TYPE.

T h e fi l e y o u a t t e m p t e d t o t r a n s f e r t o a
r e m o t e h o s t d o e s n o t h a v e a L o c a l fi l e t y p e .

E n s u r e t h a t t h e fi l e h a s M F L I N K
the correct type and
r e t r y.

MFLINK - INVALID PARAMETER xx FOR yy.

Informative message indicating the remote
host is sending protocol parameters which
are not supported by the host.
x x P r o t o c o l p a r a m e t e r.
yy Protocol command.

Inform site analyst
problems result.

MFLINK - INVALID SUPERVISORY MESSAGE.

The remote host or the network sent an in
correct or unsupported supervisory message.

Inform

MFLINK - LID CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE.

The network subsystem (RHF or NAM) is
unable to complete the connection to
the remote host.

Contact site operator.
MFLDNK retries unless
R T s p e c i fi e d .

MFLINK

MFLINK - LID DISABLED.

T h e m a i n f r a m e w i t h t h e s p e c i fi e d l o g i c a l
i d e n t i fi e r ( L I D ) h a s b e e n d i s a b l e d b y t h e
system.

Contact stie operator.
MFLINK retries unless
R T s p e c i fi e d .

MFLINK

MFLINK - LID NO LONGER AVAILABLE.

The status of the LID has changed,
i s n o l o n g e r d e fi n e d .

Contact site operator to MFLINK
d e fi n e t h e L I D a n d t r y
again. MFLINK retries
u n l e s s R T s p e c i fi e d .

MFLINK - LID UNKNOWN TO SUBSYSTEM.

The network subsystem (RHF or NAM) has
rejected a connection request to the
s p e c i fi e d L I D e v e n t h o u g h t h e s y s t e m L I D
table indicates a network path is
available.

If
problem
persists,
inform site analyst.

MFLINK

MFLINK - LOCAL NETWORK RESOURCE LIMIT.

The network subsystem (RHF or NAM) is
temporarily unable to complete the con
nection to the requested remote host.

If
problem
persists,
inform site analyst.
MFLINK retries unless
R T s p e c i fi e d .

MFLINK

MFLINK - NETON REJECT = re.

A system or network error occurred.

Inform site analyst
problem persists..

MFLINK

MFLINK - NETWORK SEQUENCE ERROR.

A network message block was found for the
connection before the connection was
completed.

Inform

MFLINK - NETWORK SHUTDOWN.

The operator has disabled the PTF
application in the network subsystem (RHF
or NAM). MFLINK terminates the network
connection.

Contact

MFLINK - NETXFR ERROR re - rejmess

A n e r r o r o c c u r r e d d u r i n g fi l e t r a n s f e r ,
re
reason
code
rejmass reject message

Inform site analyst
problem persists.
MFLINK retries unless
E P s p e c i fi e d .

re

MFLINK - NETXFR STATUS = 0.

|

ACTION

MFLINK - INVALID FILE NAME.

B-44

reason

The lid

code

re

rejmess

03
04
05
06
07
08
09
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

CONNECTION BROKEN.
PROTOCOL ERROR.
TIMEOUT EXPIRED.
B L O C K N O T S E N T.
TOO MANY TRANSFERS
A C N O U T- O F - R A N G E .
CIO ERROR.
IDLEDOWN ERROR.
SHUTDOWN.
RHF I/O ERROR
INCORRECT DEVICE.
CODE CONV N/A. (not avail)
CONTROL WORD ERROR.
INCORRECT DEVICE.
EMPTY FILE.
N A M I N T E R FA C E E R R .
B L K N U M M I S C O M PA R E .
INCORRECT BLK SIZE.
BLOCK SEQUENCE ERR.
PRU BOUNDS ERROR.
INTRA-HOST PRU XFR.
ERROR DURING XFR.
ABL OUT OF RANGE.
A P P L N O T VA L I D AT E D .
FILE TYPE ERROR.
JOB ORIGIN ERROR.

A system or network error occurred.

MFLINK
/**Si^v

site

site

site

if

analyst.

MFLINK

MFLINK

if

analyst.

MFLINK

operator.

MFLINK

if

MFLINK

Inform site analyst.

60459680 H

MESSAGE

r

0$^\

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

MFLINK - NO CONNECTION RECEIVED.

The network failed to respond to the
application connection request before the
timeout period elapsed.

Inform site analyst if
problem persists.

MFLINK

MFLINK - NO LID SPECIFIED.

You failed to specify the ST=lid parameter
on the first MFLINK command of the MFLINK
session.

Correct the MFLINK
command and retry.

MFLINK

MFLINK - NO PATHS AVAILABLE TO LID.

No paths are currently available to any
remote host with the specified LID through
either network subsystem (RHF or NAM).

If message persists,
contact site operator.
MFLINK retries if RT
not specified.

MFLINK

MFLINK - NO REMOTE DIRECTIVES FOUND.

The system is unable to find your MFLINK
directives.

Correct the MFLINK
command and reissue.

MFLINK

MFLINK - PROTOCOL ERROR IN xx.

MFLINK received an incorrect value for the
parameter xx.

Inform site analyst if
problems result.

MFLINK

MFLINK - RECOVERING ST lid.

An informative message. The system is
recovering the files for the mainframe
specified by lid.

None.

MFLINK

MFLINK - REMOTE SUBSTEM RESOURCE LIMIT.

The network or network subsystem (RHF or
NAM) on the remote host is temporarily
unable to complete the connection.

MFLINK - REMOTE SUBSYSTEM NOT RESPONDING.

The network subsystem (RHF or NAM) cannot
establish communication with the remote
host.

Contact site operator.
MFLINK retries unless
RT specified.

MFLINK - SUBSYSTEM FULL.

The network subsystem (RHF or NAM) is
temporarily too busy to process your
request.

MFLINK retries unless
RT is specified.

MFLINK - SUBSYSTEM UNAVAILABLE.

The network subsystem is temporarily too
busy to process your request.

Contact site operator.
MFLINK retries unless

MFLINK

MFLINK - UNKNOWN NETWORK INTERFACE TYPE.

An internal error was detected by MFLINK.

Inform site analyst.

MFLINK

MFLINK - WRONG REMOTE APPLICATION LEVEL.
MFLINK - TRANSFER IMPOSSIBLE TO ST Lid.

You entered an MFLINK command with ST=lid;
the transfer failed because MFLINK's
protocol version or level is incompatible
with the Permanent File Transfer Facitity
(PTF) software at the remote host.

Inform site analyst.

MFLINK

MFQUEUE - COMPLETE,
jsn = ROUTED FILE NAME.

Your job jsn was successfully routed.

None.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - CONTROL STATEMENT ERROR.

MFQUEUE was unable to process the command.
Usually an invalid character or successive
separators is the cause of this problem.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - DUPLICATE PARAMETER.

Multiple occurrences are not allowed for
any of the MFQUEUE parameters.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - DIRECTIVE EXCEEDS 256 CHARACTERS.

The user supplied remote directive for
this command exceeds 256 characters.

Correct the directive.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - FIRST PARAMETER NOT VALID LFN.

The first parameter must be a valid file
name.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - ILLEGAL DC VALUE SPECIFIED.

The DC=dc parameter is not supported.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - ILLEGAL DD VALUE SPECIFIED.

Your DD=dd specification is not supported.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - ILLEGAL ST VALUE SPECIFIED.

The logical identifier (LID) you specified
in the ST=lid parameter is not three
alphanumeric characters.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - INVALID DIRECTIVE NAME.

The directive file name must be a valid
file name.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - INVALID PARAMETER.

You specified a parameter that is not
allowed on the MFQUEUE command.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - NO REMOTE DIRECTIVES FOUND.

The directive file was empty or you did not
supply remote directives via the PC
parameter.

Fix the job so that the
d i r e c t i v e fi l e i s n o t
empty.

MFQUEUE

MFQUEUE - ST PARAMETER MUST BE SPECIFIED.

The ST parameter is not optional. It must
appear on each MFQUEUE command.

Correct the command.

MFQUEUE

60459680 H

MFLINK

B-45

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

MFSTAT REJECTED REQUEST

You did not enter the correct PID for the
SCOPE 2 mainframe.

Be sure to use only the
primary physical
i d e n t i fi e r ( P I D ) t o
reference a SCOPE 2
mainframe. You may
enter a QUEUE7, ID
command to list PIDs
currently active.

QUEUE7

MISSING DEMAND FILE ENTRY.

Dayfile message indicating a system problem.
The overcommitment algorithm was initiated
without a demand file entry having been
defined previously.

Rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
a site analyst, write
a PSR and include
support material so that
CDC can duplicate the
problem.

RESEX

jsn MISSING RESOURCE.

Dayfile message indicating that a system
problem occurred. The system expected but
did not find a resource unit assigned to
the job with job sequence name jsn. This
could occur if the MAG subsystem was
stopped while tapes were assigned.

Rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
a site analyst, write
a PSR and include
support material so that
CDC can duplicate the
problem.

RESEX

MISSING VSN OR EQUIPMENT ASSIGNMENT.

Dayfile message indicating a system
malfunction (expected VSN or equipment
assignment was not found).

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or
contact Central Software
Support.

RESEX

MLTFPROC ABORT - INVALID SEQ ORD (nn).

Fatal error. The sequencer-ordinal
parameter (SEQ=nn) on the MLTF procedure
call is defective, nn must be a number 1 to
63.

Correct MLTF procedure
call. Notify site
analyst if error occurs
after RHF command
ENABLE, mltf ordinal.

MLTF

MLTFPROC ABORT - SEQ ORD OUT OF RANGE (nn).

Fatal error. The sequencer-ordinal
parameter (SEQ=nn) on the MLTF procedure
call is defective, nn must be 1 to 63.

Correct MLTF procedure
call. Notify site
analyst if error occurs
after RHF command
ENABLE, mltf ordinal.

MODE ERROR.

An arithmetic error, or CPU/CM parity error
has been encountered during processing of
job.

Examine reprieve block
error flag to determine
the nature of the error.

1AJ

MONITOR CALL ERROR, xxxx nnnnnnnnn.

One of the following occurred during the
processing of an monitor request:
- The monitor request call was not

Examine program to
determine why incorrect
monitor request call is
being made.

1AJ

1MT

recognized by the system.
- Bad parameters were supplied in the
request.
- Incorrect user access was encountered.
- An incorrect request was included in the
request.

|

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,B.C. RESTART.

Magnetic tape controller controlware
restarted.

None.

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,BAD ERASE.

Error detected after an erase was attempted
to recover a write error.

Inform site analyst.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Khhhhhhhh,BAD RECOVERY-x.

A single block mispositioning error was
recovered by block ID recovery. If x is B,
the error was caused by backspacing the
tape too far; if x is F, the tape was not
backspaced far enough.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,BLOCK TOO LARGE.

Data block is at least one byte longer than
length bbbb shown in third Line of message.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,BUSY.

Unit was still busy after one second.

Inform customer engineer.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,CHANNEL ILL.

Channel is not accepting function for
status requests properly.

Inform customer engineer.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,CON. REJ.

Connect reject; unable to connect to the '
unit.

Inform site analyst.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,CON. REJ. MDI.

Connect reject; unable to connect to unit
because of marginal detection indication
(thermal warning). Unit turned off.

Inform customer engineer.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,CON. REJ. OFF.

Connect reject; unable to connect to unit.
Unit turned off.

Inform site analyst.

1MT

8-46

60459680 H

S^^lK

/^Sv

/§fe\

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,FNffff,Pyyyy.

Function ffff was rejected by the
controller; yyyy is the address in 1MT
where the function was initiated.

Inform site analyst.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,Lbbbb,Bnnnnnn.

The length (bbbb) and block number (nnnnnn)
read from trailer bytes in block did not
match the actual length or the block number
read given in previous message line.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,LOAD CHECK.

Load sequence failed on the unit.

Push CLEAR button and
reload tape, or inform
site analyst.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,MARGINAL, DOWN.

Indicates controller failure. Channel has
been logically turned off and maintenance
is required.

Inform customer engineer.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,MARGINAL, OFF.

Unit has been logically turned off because
of read/write failure. This occurred when
a special function to check the read/write
path to a unit failed during initial label
scan. Maintenance is required.

Inform customer engineer.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,NO EOP.

No end-of-operation detected from unit
within 1 second.

Inform customer engineer.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,NOISE.

A noise block was skipped on the tape.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,NOT READY.

Tape unit dropped ready status.

Make unit ready.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,ON THE FLY.

Error was corrected as the data was read.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,POSITION LOST.

The last good block written cannot be found
during write recovery.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,RECOVERED.

Previously reported error has been
successfully recovered.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,STATUS.

Error type cannot be determined so actual
controller status is returned.

Inform site analyst.

1MT

MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,WRONG PARITY.

Tape was written in parity opposite that
being read.

None.

1MT

MT,Ccc-e-uu,vsn,rw,est,Ss,GSgggggggg
MT,Ccc,Dddd...d.
MT,Ccc,Uuu...u,Ttttt.
MT,Ccc,Aaaaaaaaa.
MT,Ccc,Fff,Iii,Bnnnnnn,Lbbbb,Ppppppppp.
MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,type.
or
MT,Ccc-e-uu,vsn,rw,est,Ss,GSgggggggg.
MT,Ccc,Dddd...d.
MT,Ccc,Aaaaaaaaa.
MT,Ccc,Fff,Iii,Bnnnnnn,Lbbbb,Ppppppppp.
MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,type.
or
MT,Ccc,-e-uu,vsn,rw,est,Ss,GSgggggggg.
MT,Ccc,Dddd...d.
MT,Ccc,Fff,Iii,Bnnnnnn,Lbbbb,Ppppppppp.
MT,Ccc,Eec,Hhhhhhhhh,type.
or
MT,Ccc-e-uu,vsn,rw,est,Ss,GSgggggggg.
MT,Ccc,Dddd...d.
M T, C c c , U u u . . . u , T t t t t .
MT,Ccc,Fff,Iii,Bnnnnnn,Lbbbb,Ppppppppp.
MT,Ccc,Eed,Hhhhhhhhh,type.

Four or five or six-line message describing
a magnetic tape hardware malfunction on a
66x or 67x tape unit. Message as
illustrated indicates 7-track, model 667 or
677 unit. If NT appears in place of MT,
message indicates 9-track, model 669 or 679
unit. Message is issued to error log and
d a y fi l e .

Refer to the separate
l i s ti n g o f th e l a s t l i n e
message (MT,...,type.)
for the appropriate
action.

1MT

The first line of each message provides the
following information.
cc-e-uu Channel, equipment (tape
controller), and physical
unit number of tape unit on
which error was encountered.
v s n Vo l u m e s e r i a l n u m b e r
associated with tape on the
specified unit.
rw Read (RD) or write (WR)
operation; any operation not
involving an actual read or
write is listed as a read.
est EST ordinal of the unit on
which the tape was written.
This is provided only for
labeled tapes generated
under NOS; otherwise, the
fi e l d i s b l a n k .
s
Channel
status.
gggggggg General status of magnetic
tape unit. Last byte is
block ID.
The MT,Ccc,Dddd...d line of the message
provides the following information.
cc Channel number; the channel
number is repeated to allow
the analyst to associate
this message with the first
message if errors are
occurring on more than one
tape channel at the same
time.
ddd...d Detailed status of magnetic
tape unit.

0i^\
60459680 H

B-47

|

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

The MT,Ccc,Uuu...u,Ttttt line of the
message provides the following information,
cc Channel number; repeated to
associate this message with
the previous message.
uu...u Detailed unit status,
tttt Third byte of the tape unit
format parameters (refer to
the magnetic tape subsystem
reference manual for
descriptions of unit format
parameter fields).
The MT,Ccc,Aaaaaaaa line (for FSC only)
contains the additional sense byte
status not placed in the detailed status
or unit status fields.
cc Channel number.
aaaaaaa Sense byte.
The MT,Ccc,Fff,...,Ppppppppp line of the
message provides the following information,
cc Channel number; repeated to
associate this message with
the previous message.
ff
Software function on which
the error occurred.
ii
Error iteration; number of
times error has been
encountered on this unit
without successful recovery.
Block number on which error
occurred.
bbbb
Length of block on which
error occurred in octal
bytes,
pppppppp 1MT internal error
parameters.
The last line of each message provides the
following information.
cc Channel number; repeated to
associate this message with
the previous message
ec Octal error code value.
hhhhhhhh
Parameters passed to the
tape unit for the format
function (refer to the tape
drive's hardware reference
manual for descriptions of
the unit format parameter
fi e l d s ) .
Additional description of
type
the error. Refer to
individual listing of the
last line message.
MT/NT CONFLICT.

Conflict exists between 7-track and 9-track
tape descriptors (track type, density, and
conversion mode). For example, a request
for a 9-track tape specified 200 bpi
density. This message can also be issued
if the device type specified in FET+1
conflicts with the track type specified in
bit 56 of FET+10 octal. If dt=MT and bit
56 is set, the message is issued.

Ensure accuracy of
command.

RESEX
BLANK

MULTI-FILE NOT FOUND, filename AT address.

Either LISTLB has reached the end of the
multifile set or the requested file was not
found. The following additional messages
are also given.
- REQUESTED SECTION xxxx.
- FOUND SECTION yyyy. or
- FILE IDENTIFIER NOT FOUND.
The filename, address, xxxx, and yyyy given
can be ignored.

If LISTLB reached the
end of the multifile
set, the operation is
complete and no action
is required. Otherwise,
ensure that the correct
tape is being used and
that it contains the
d e s i r e d fi l e ( s ) . A l l
label parameters must
match in order to
position to the
s p e c i fi e d fi l e .

1MT

MULTI-TRACK PHASE ERROR.

Multiple tracks were found to be in error
at 1600 cpi, making recovery impossible.
The dayfile message STATUS ERROR, filename
AT address precedes this message and
specifies the file (filename) and the
address.

Retry or inform site
analyst.

1MT

B-48

60459680 H

MESSAGE

r

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

MULTIPLE CONCURRENT LOGINS PROHIBITED.

Another terminal session is active
under your user name, and you are
not validated to have more than one
terminal session simultaneously.

If you need to do this,
contact your site
personnel.

NVF

MULTIPLE 7000 JOBS NOT ALLOWED

You have attempted to submit a second job
file when you already have an outstanding
SCOPE 2 job in processing.

Wait for the first job
to complete before
submitting another job.

HELL07

MUST HAVE SYSTEM ORIGIN PRIVILEGES.

The Mass Storage Subsystem Utility must be
run from job with system origin privileges.

Make sure job has system
origin privileges.

ASDEBUG
ASDEF
ASLABEL
ASMOVE
ASUSE
ASVAL

NETWORK APPLICATION ABORTED, RC5=568.
NFETCH: ILLEGAL FIELD MNEMONIC.

Either the field or value parameter in the
indicated call was not found.

Correct the call and rerun FIP
the job

NETWORK APPLICATION ABORTED, RC5=569.
NSTORE: ILLEGAL FIELD MNEMONIC.

Either the field or value parameter in the
indicated call was not found.

Correct the call and rerun FIP
the job.

NETWORK TYPE DOES NOT SUPPORT ATTRIBUTE
COMMAND.

You are attempting to enter NAM/CDCNET
commands from a NAM/CCP connection.

Ensure
that
the
attributes you are
trying to change can be
changed in your network
by TRMDEF.

NEXT VSN est,vsn.

Tape volume vsn is mounted on tape unit est
and accepted as the next volume in the file
being processed.

None.

NO CLOSING DELIMITER FOUND

No closing delimiter was found on a
string. A string is considered to end
after the last nonblank character.

None.

IEDIT

NO DATA FOUND FOR USERNAME.

RECLAIM could not find the calling user in
the directory of the database.

Check for correct
database file
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

RECLAIM

NO EXTENDED MEMORY.

A DMPECS or DMDECS command or DED or DEP
request was entered and no extended memory
field length is assigned to you.

None.

CPMEM

NO FILE NAME SPECIFIED.

You entered a SECHDR command without
specifying a file name.

Reenter the command with
the correct file name.

NO FILES FOUND.

No entries exist for specified *FN* option
when the *FN* parameter contained one for
more asterisks.

None.

NO FILES FOUND FOR SPECIFIED DUMP FILE.

For a COPY,
RECLAIM did
the database;
the tape and
tape.

Check your database file
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

NO HDR1 LABEL RETURNED ON OPEN.

No HDR1 label was found in the label buffer
after the OPEN function was completed.
Indicates a possible system error.

Inform site analyst.

NO HOST AVAILABLE CONTROL CHARACTER=char
ENTER char HD TO SEE HOST STATUS

No hosts are available.
char The network control
character for your terminal.

Check the status of
the hosts in your
c o n fi g u r a t i o n .

NO HOST CONNECTED CONTROL CHARACTER=char
TERMINAL DISABLED BY NOP

The network operator has disabled your
terminal. No further input is possible,
char The network control
character for your terminal.

None.

CCP

NO HOST SELECTED CONTROL CHARACTER=char
ENTER char HN=NODE NUMBER or
HS=NAME TO SELECT HOST

You have not selected a host and a host is
available.
char The network control
character for your terminal.

Select a host.

CCP

NO INPUT FILE FOUND.

No valid input file exists; functions
cannot be performed.

Ve r i f y t h a t i n p u t fi l e
is present.

NO JOB CHARACTERISTICS SPECIFIED.

You specified no parameters or made
incomplete parameter specifications on the
SETJOB command.

Do not enter the command
if you do not want to
change any job
characteristics.
Otherwise, specify the
parameter correctly.

CONTROL

NO JOBS FOUND.

The system can find none of your jobs.

None.

ENQUIRE

NO JSN-S RECOVERED.

The system encountered an EOR, EOF, or EOI
while reading input directives.

60459680 H

LOAD, or LIST directive,
not find the specified VSN in
RECLAIM is attempting to read
rebuild the database for that

TRMDEF

1MT

CATLIST

LISTLB

RECOVER

B-49

MESSAGE

|

SIGNIFICANCE

ROUTINE

NO LINE NUMBER ON LINE

Either the primary file or a sequenced
READ file contains a Line without a Line
number.

Use an editor to
correct the bad
line.

NO LINE NUMBER ON SORT FILE.

A Line on the input file to a SORT request
is missing a line number or a line exceeded
the line length limit.

Check the format of the
i n p u t fi l e .

SORT

NO LINE TERMINATOR AT EOR(S),

You attempted to copy a file in which the
last line of one or more records did not
have a line terminator.

Check the structure of
the file to be copied.

COPYC

NO LINES FOUND

No line in the edit file meets the criteria
specified by the edit command.

None.

NO MASS STORAGE AVAILABLE.

No mass storage space of the requested
type could be found.

Retry later.

NO NEW FILE.

N=0 was inappropriately specified for the
*N* parameter.

Either omit the *N*
parameter to allow the
default file *NEW* to be
used or set it equal to
the valid file name.

LIBEDIT

NO PERMITS.

No permit entries exist for the specified
fi l e .

None.

CATLIST

NO PRIMARY FILE.

The command entered requires a primary file.

E s t a b l i s h a p r i m a r y fi l e I A F E X
with NEW, OLD, or
PRIMARY command and
reenter original command.

NO PRIMARY FILE.

A command needed the primary file as the
default file. No primary file was found.

S p e c i f y a fi l e n a m e o n P F I L E S
the command or create a
primary file with the
NEW, OLD, or PRIMARY
command, and then retry.

NO READ/DESTINATION FILE SPECIFIED

No read or destination file was specified
in the edit command.

Reenter command with
specified read or
d e s t i n a t i o n fi l e .

NO READ FILE FOUND - filename.

The file specified on the READ directive
cannot be found.

Ensure that file name
specified is correct and
that the file is a local
file or a permanent file.

SUBMIT

NO RECOVERABLE JOBS.

You have no recoverable jobs.

No action required.

RECOVER

NO RECOVERABLE JOBS.

Condition encountered during terminal
recovery attempt. There are no detached
jobs for this user.

None.

IAFEX

NO RESPONSE FROM OTHER MAINFRAME

Communications between SCOPE 2 and the
SCOPE 2 station have been interrupted by a
system problem.

Try to reenter the
command at a later time.

QUEUE7

NO SOURCE FILE SPECIFIED.

No file name was specified on the SUBMIT
command.

Specify a file name on
the SUBMIT command.

SUBMIT

NO SUCH FILE

The file requested in the SUBMIT directive
cannot be found.

Check to ensure
correct file name
entered and that
file exists as a
NOS file.

HELL07

filename - NO TEMP DEVICE FOUND.

You attempted to create a local copy of an
indirect access permanent fite, but the
file's access level was not within the
range of valid access levels for any active
temporary storage device.

Inform security
a d m i n i s t r a t o r. T h e
security administrator
needs to configure the
system so that temporary
devices are available
for all valid access
levels.

PFM

NO TERMINATOR IN COMMAND CALL.

No terminator was found before the first
delimiter in a NOTE, BLOCK, or ENTER
command.

Correct command and
r e t r y.

NOTE

B-50

that the
was
the
local

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

NO WRITE ENABLE, filename AT address.

Either you attempted to write on a tape
mounted with no write ring, or no write was
allowed because of additional constraints
described in an additional message tine.

If no additional message
line appears, ensure the
inserting of a write
ring by specifying the W
processing option on the
tape request (for
example, P0=W on the
LABEL command).
Otherwise, refer to the
description of the
message in the
additional message line.

1MT

NO 7000 JOB ACTIVE

You issued a STATUS or RESUME directive
when no SCOPE 2 job can be associated with
your user name.

None.

HELL07

NOISE BLOCK PROCESSING IN EFFECT.

Noise processing was automatically selected
because the output tape noise size exceeded
the input tape noise size on a COPY where
no noise size was specified.

None.

COPYB

n NOISE BLOCKS DELETED,
n NOISE BLOCKS PADDED.

Block(s> on S or L output tape smaller than
noise size have been deleted/padded.

None.

NOISE SIZE IGNORED FOR PE/GE.

An informative message indicating that you
entered a LABEL, REQUEST, or ASSIGN command
with a noise size (NS parameter) specified
for a PE or GE density tape on an ISMT
subsystem. The NS parameter is ignored for
those tape densities on an ISMT subsystem.

NON-BUFFERED EQ-S CHECKPOINTED.
RECOVERY ABORTED.

In the recovery process of aborting a CM
recovery, 1CK was called to process
outstanding checkpoint requests for all
nonbuffered devices.

Level 0 deadstart
required.

NON-EXISTENT EDIT VERB SPECIFIED

I n t e r n a l e r r o r.

Submit a PSR with
information on how
to duplicate the
problem.

NON-MATCHING CONVERSION.

Informative message indicating conversion
mode on labeled 9-track tape differs from
that specified by assignment request.
System writes tape in specified mode, or
reads tape with write ring out in correct
mode. However, reading tape with write ring
in or using wrong conversion mode generates
conversion errors.

If reading tape with
write ring in, return
and reassign with
correct conversion mode.

NON-MATCHING DENSITY.

Informative message indicating that the
density specified on the command or macro
is not the same as the density of the
assigned tape. Issued only to 9-track
tapes with write ring out. 9-track tapes
are read at the current density on tape.
They are written at specified density if
write initiated from load point; otherwise,
tape is written at the current density on
the tape.

None.

NORERUN/RERUN INCORRECT FROM INTERACTIVE
JOBS.

You entered a NORERUN or RERUN command from
an interactive terminal. The command is
ignored.

None.

QFM
CONTROL

NOT ALL EQUIPMENT SERVICEABLE.

The number of batch I/O equipments defined
in the EST exceeds an assembly constant.
It will not be possible to access some
equipment.

Modify the EQP deck or
contact Central Software
Support.

110.

filename NOT DECLARED NRANDOM.

An EOF was encountered on the nonrandom
fi l e , fi l e n a m e .

Verify that file name is
in correct format.

LIBEDIT

jsn/ujn NOT FOUND.

The system could not find the job with
the specified job sequence name (JSN)
and user job name (UJN).

Check to see if you
specified the correct
JSN and UJN.

QGET
DROP

filename NOT FOUND.

RESTART was unable to retrieve the named
fi l e .

Verify that filename is
vaIi d.

60459680 H

RESEX

1CK

RESEX

8-51

MESSAGE

|

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

filename NOT FOUND.
or
username NOT FOUND.

One of the following:
- The specified permanent file could not
be found.
- The specified user name could not be
found.
- You are not allowed to access the
s p e c i fi e d fi l e .
- The specified local file could not be
found.

Verify that file name/
user name is correct,
that access permission
has been granted, and
that correct access is
being attempted.

jsn NOT FOUND.

You specified a JSN that you cannot recover.

Refer to your list of
recoverable jobs. Type
RELIST for another list.

RECOVER

n NOT FOUND.

n, the specified UJN or JSN, was not found.

None.

ENQUIRE

xxx NOT IN PP LIB.

Dayfile message indicating that PP package
xxx was not found in PP libraries.

Ensure that the correct
PP package name was
s p e c i fi e d .

SFP

xxx NOT IN PP LIB. CALLED BY yyy.

Dayfile message indicating that PP package
xxx, which was called by package yyy, was
not found in the PP libraries.

Ensure that the correct
PP package name was
specified or write a PSR.

SFP

filename NOT IN WRITE MODE.

The file specified in an OVWRITE command or
macro was not processed because you do not
have write access to it.

Correct and retry.

1MS

filename NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

The file to be saved is not on mass
storage; the first track of the file is not
recognizable.

Verify that file is on
mass storage.

PFM

filename NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

The file specified in an OVWRITE command or
macro was not processed because it does not
reside on mass storage.

Correct and retry.

1MS

filename NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

filename was not processed because it could
not be found on mass storage.

Move file to mass
storage, or correct the
commmand and retry.

MFILES

NOT VALID TO DOWNGRADE DATA.

You attempted to lower the access level of
a permanent file, but you are not validated
to downgrade files.

None.

PFM

NOT VALIDATED FOR EXTENDED MEMORY MINIMUM CM.

You were authorized for the extended memory
specified on the Job command but was not
authorized for at least 10000 octal words
of memory.

Request a larger CM
validation limit from
site personnel.

CHARGE

NOT VALIDATED FOR REQUESTED ACCESS LEVEL.

User has specified an access level outside
the user's access level validation.

Use a validated access
level, or site must
validate user for
additional access level.

RESEX

NOT VALIDATED FOR WRITING UNLABELED TAPES.

User has not been validated for writing on
unlabeled tape.

Either use labeled tape
or site must validate
user for SAV=CULT MODVAL
privilege.

RESEX

NOT VALIDATED TO SET XD/XT.

You specified an XD or XT parameter in a
CHANGE, DEFINE or PERMIT command or macro
without having validation to use these
parameters.

Retry without XD or XT
parameter, or obtain
validation and retry.

PFM

NOTICE*** DATA READ ERROR.

Read error caused loss of words in the
d a y fi l e .

None.

DAYFILE

NT DENSITY CONFLICT.

9-track tape unit specified by EST ordinal
on ASSIGN command does not support the
required density.

Ensure that density
compatible tape unit is
s p e c i fi e d .

NT DRIVE CONFLICT.

One of the following.
- 9-track tape unit specified by EST
ordinal on ASSIGN command conflicts with
other resource requirements for this
job. In this case the system rejects
assignment to prevent the job from
deadlocking itself.
- Increased resource demands (RESOURC
command) cannot be satisfied due to
conflicts with currently assigned
resources (job would deadlock itself).

Check the description of
the RESOURC command in
section 7. Reduce
resource demand which
causes conflict.

RESEX

OFFSW, x FROM JOB jsn

An OFFSW command was issued to the job by
the job jsn. x represents the sense
switch(es) that has been turned off.

None.

1RI

B-52

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

OFFSW, x FROM OPERATOR

An OFFSW command was issued to the job by
the console operator, x represents the
sense switch(es) that has been turned off.

None.

1RI

OLD MASTER FILE EMPTY OR MISPOSITIONED

None of the replacement file records were
copied to the new file.

Ensure that the file is
assigned to the job. If
file is assigned, rewind
t h e fi l e .

COPYL
COPYLM

ONLY CORRECT PARAMETERS ARE *ON* OR *OFF*.

The parameter you specified was not
recognized.

Check command
description and retry.

CONTROL

ONSW,x FROM JOB jsn.

An ONSW command was issued to the job by
the job jsn. x represents the sense
switches that sense switches that have been
turned on.

None.

1RI

OP OPTION NOT VALID.

You specified some value other than T for
the 0P=op parameter.

Either omit the 0P=op
parameter or specify T
for its value.

RECOVER

OPERATOR DROP.

Informative message indicating that the
operator dropped the job.

None.

1AJ

OPERATOR INPUT TERMINATION.

Job was terminated without exit processing. Resubmit job.

1AJ

OPERATOR KILL.

The operator entered a KILL command to drop
the job. This disallows exit
processing unless the job has extended
reprieve. A job with extended reprieve
processing is reprieved once. Exit
processing is allowed.

Correct job as needed
and rerun.

1AJ
RECLAIM

OPERATOR OVERRIDE.

The operator entered an OVERRIDE command to
drop the job. This disallows exit, erexit,
and reprieve processing.

Correct job as needed
and rerun.

1AJ

OPERATOR RERUN.

The operator is rerunning the job.

No action required.

1AJ
RECLAIM

OUTPUT INCOMPLETE

A hardware or software problem occurred.

Reenter the command. If
the same message is
returned, inform the
site analyst.

QUEUE7

OVERLAPPING INSERT OR DELETE.

LIBEDIT encountered an overlap in the
record names specified in the directives.

Correct the directives
listed in the LIBEDIT
output so that there is
no overlapping of file
names for insertions or
deletions.

OVERLAY FILE EMPTY.

No data appears in the requested file.

Ve r i f y t h a t o v e r l a y fi l e
is valid.

1AJ

OVERLAY FILE NOT FOUND.

The specified file was not available.

Ve r i f y t h a t fi l e i s
local to job and retry.

1AJ

OVERLAY LOST.

The specified overlay was not found.

Inform software support.

1AJ

OVERLAY NOT FOUND.

The specified overlay was not found.

Ve r i f y t h a t t h e fi l e
with the specified
overlay is local to the
job.

1AJ

OVERLAY NOT FOUND IN LIBRARY - ovIname.

The overlay ovIname was not found in the
system library.

Verify that call is to
v a l i d o v e r l a y.

*OVL*

You have entered a logical line that
exceeds the maximum logical line length and
IAF has discarded it.

Reenter data in logical
lines of shorter length.

IAFEX

PACK COMPLETE.

Informative message indicating that the
program has completed processing.

None.

PACK

PACK PARAMETER ERROR.

The PACK command contains too many or no
file names.

Check the format of the
PACK command in section
9.

PACK

PARAMETER *ON* OR *OFF* REQUIRED.

No parameter was specified on ERRMSG
command.

Retry with a parameter.

CONTROL

PARAMETERS CE AND CP ARE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE.

You entered a CHANGE command that included
both a CE and a CP parameter. These
parameters cannot both be specified in the
same CHANGE command.

Correct the parameter
specifications and
resubmit.

/0®$£\

60459680 H

B-53

MESSAGE
PARAMETERS CE AND CP ARE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE.

ACTION

SIGNIFICANCE
You attempted to specify both the CE and
the CP parameter on the same CHANGE
command. They cannot be specified together.

ROUTINE

Do two separate CHANGE
commands to perform the
two functions.

PFILES
e^%k

PARAMETERS *0N* AND *OFF* ARE MUTUALLY
EXCLUSIVE.

You specified both the ON and OFF
parameters on the same command. Only one
is allowed.

Retry with either ON or
OFF.

CONTROL

n PARITY/BLOCK TOO LARGE ERRORS.

Parity and/or block-too-large errors have
been encountered on the input file during
the copy operation.

If dayfile shows block
too-large errors have
occurred and tape is S,
L, or F format, increase
block size and retry;
otherwise, tape is
probably assigned in the
wrong format. If parity
errors have occurred,
the tape is bad and the
data on it cannot be
correctly recovered.

COPYB

PARITY ERROR.

The tape could not be read/written
correctly. The dayfile message STATUS
ERROR, filename AT address precedes this
message and specifies the file (filename)
and the address.

Retry or inform site
analyst.

PARITY ERROR, JOB HUNG.

A CM parity error occurred in the jobs
field length. The job is hung to freeze
the affected area.

Inform software support.

PARITY ERROR - RESTARTED FROM kk.

Because RESTART detected a parity error in
attempting to restart from the specified
checkpoint nn, the alternate checkpoint kk
was used instead.

None.

RESTART

PASSWORD RANDOMIZATION NOT PERMITTED FROM
BATCH.

You entered a PASSWOR command from a
non-interactive job when password
randomization is required. When password
randomization is required, PASSWOR can
only be entereed from an interactive job.

Resubmit PASSWOR from an
interactive job.

MODVAL

PASSWORD TOO LONG.

You entered a PASSWOR command with a new
password that is too long. The new
password cannot exceed seven characters
including randomization characters.

Correct the new password
specification and
resubmit.

MODVAL

PASSWORD TOO SHORT.

Either you specified fewer than two
nonrandom characters for the new password
specification in a PASSWOR command, or the
new password was shorter than the minimum
password length required by the site.

Correct the new password
specification and
resubmit.

MODVAL

PASSWORD VERIFICATION ERROR. PASSWORD NOT
CHANGED.

For the PASSWOR command, you entered the
new password incorrectly in response to the
password identification prompt.

Resubmit the PASSWOR
command.

MODVAL

PAUSE FROM JOB jsn

A PAUSE command was issued to the job by
the job jsn.

None.

1RI

PAUSE FROM OPERATOR

A PAUSE command was issued to the job by
the console operator.

None.

1RI

pfn PERMANENT ERROR.

The specified direct access file resides on
alternate storage and has data errors that
must be corrected. The error flag must be
cleared or the file must be reloaded from a
backup copy.

Inform site analyst.
The site analyst may
be able to correct the
problem with ASDEBUG or
SSDEBUG; otherwise, the
file must be purged or
reloaded.

PFM

PERMIT LIMIT EXCEEDED.

A PERMIT command or macro cannot be
processed because the file specified
already has the maximum number of permits
allowed.

None.

PFM

PF STAGING DISABLED.

The specified direct access file cannot be
accessed since it resides on the Mass
Storage Facility (MSF) and the site has
temporarily disabled all MSF file staging.

Determine from site
operator when MSF file
staging will resume and
retry the job at that
time.

PF UTILITY ACTIVE.

The operation was not attempted because a
permanent file utility was currently active.

Wait until PF utility is
not active and retry.

PFM

PFATC - NO FILES PROCESSED.

Informative message indicating that no
files meeting the specified selection
criteria were found.

None.

PFATC

1MT

1AJ
-*^s%

-

^

/•<©X

B-54

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

PFM ABORTED.

Error flag detected at PFM control point.

Check dayfile for reason
f o r e r r o r fl a g .

POSITION ERROR ON-filename.

File filename was not repositioned after
being checkpointed because CHKPT detected
an address error.

None.

CHKPT

POSITION LOST, filename AT address.

A block ID mismatch exists or; the block
ID window is all ones. This indicates
that a NOS terminator label mismatch
exists.

Clean the tape path.

1MT

1MT

In either case, the position on the tape
cannot be established and the job will
terminate.
POSTAMBLE ERROR.

A missing or defective postamble was
detected at 1600 cpi. The dayfile message
STATUS ERROR, filename AT address precedes
this message and specifies the file
(filename) and the address.

Retry or inform site
analyst.

PP A80RT.

System error in PPU.

Examine the job dayfile to
determine the cause.

PP CALL ERROR.

The monitor detected an error in a CPU
request for PP action.

Verify that correct PP
call is issued.

1AJ

PP CALL ERROR.

Error detected in PP call due to hardware
or RECLAIM error.

Inform site analyst.

RECLAIM

PREMATURE EOR/EOF ON SOURCE FILE.

The system encountered an end-of-record
(EOR) or end-of-file (EOF) in the source
file before it processed all the
information.

Remove the extra EORs
and EOFs from the source
fi l e .

DOCMENT

PRIOR TAPE ASSIGNMENT LOST.

Magnetic tape executive has been dropped
along with tapes assigned. All of the
job's prior tape assignments are lost.

From an interactive job,
return/unload all prior
tapes and reassign. A
batch job aborts and
must be rerun.

PROCESSING OPTION NOT APPLICABLE.

The processing options, P0=R and P0=D, are
allowed only on a COPY command copying from
mass storage, or an I or Si-binary format
tape to an S or L format tape. The
processing option, P0=T, is allowed on a
COPYB command that generates an E or B
format tape.

Refer to the COPY or
COPYB command
description in section
9, correct the command,
and retry.

PROCESSOR DETECTED MALFUNCTION

A hardware error (error code=20) occurred
such as a data or address parity error
or double bit error.

Analyze job dumps,
maintenance registers,
and the error log or
HPA reports to
determine cause.

1AJ

PROCESSOR STATE ERROR

A hardware error (error code=67) or a
software error.

Analyze job output,
dumps, listings,
maintenance registers
and the error log or
HPA reports to determine
cause.

1AJ

PROGRAM FILE EMPTY.

A load of an empty file was attempted.

None.

1AJ

PROGRAM STOP.

The system processed a program stop (00)
instruction.

None.

1AJ

PROGRAM STOP AT address.

The monitor detected a program stop
instruction at the specified address.

None.

1AJ

PROJECT NUMBER EXPIRED.

Dayfile and output file message indicating
that the project number expiration date has
occurred.

None.

CHARGE

PRU LIMIT.

The job's mass storage PRU limit was
exceeded during preparation of a local copy
of an indirect access file.

Return one or more local
fi l e s a n d r e t r y.

GET

PRU LIMIT, FILE filename AT address.

The job's mass storage PRU limit was
exceeded during an attempt to write or
extend this file.

Return one or more local
fi l e s a n d r e t r y.

1MS

PRUS REQUESTED UNAVAILABLE.

On a DEFINE, no device currently has
available the amount of space requested by
the S parameter. On a secured system, no
device with the proper access level
currently has the amount of space requested.

If possible, reduce the
number of PRUs specified
by the S parameter, or
retry at another time
when space might be
available.

60459680 H

B-55

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

NOTE

/ff=*^5^h

A number of messages of the form "PTFS-message" are not unique to PTFS. These
messages are listed alphabetically by the message itself; just ignore the letters
PTFS when looking them up.

PTFS - error message returned by NOS

An error message has been received from NOS
by PTFS. PTFS takes this message, prefaces
it with a 'PTFS - ', and returns the new
message to you.

Refer to the message
returned by NOS for the
appropriate action. (That
is, ignore the letters
"PTFS -" and look up the
message itself alphabetically
in this appendix).

PTFS - APPLICATION CONNECTION TIMEOUT.

The remote host did not respond in the
alloted time.

None.

PTFS - CHARGE REQUIRED.

You must specify a CHARGE directive and you
did not do so.

Restart your session and PTFS
include a CHARGE
directive.

PTFS - CHARGE RESTRICTED TO DEFAULT.

On a CHARGE command, you specified a charge
and project number which was not the
default that you were validated for, and
your validation restricts you to that
default.

Use CHARGE(*) rather PTFS
than specifying a charge
and project number.

PTFS - DEFAULT CHARGE IS NULL.

The default charge number for the current
user name is undefined, and charge is
required.

Use a valid charge and PTFS
project number.

PTFS - DIRECTIVE TOO LONG.

Your directive is too long. A directive
cannot exceed 80 characters.

Shorten your directive PTFS
and retry.

PTFS - ERROR IN ARGUMENTS.

Either one or both of the following occured
on a SAVE or a DEFINE directive on a MFLINK
command.
- You specified both XD and XP parameters.
- You specified an XD or XP parameter
without specifying a PW parameter.

C o r r e c t t h e S AV E o r P T F S
DEFINE directive, and
reenter the MFLINK
command.

PTFS - ERROR IN EXPIRATION DATE

There was an error in the expiration date
specified on a SAVE or a DEFINE directive
on a MFLINK command.

Correct the expiration PTFS
date on the SAVE or the
DEFINE directive and
reenter the MFLINK
command.

PTFS - EXECUTE ONLY FILE.

You attempted to transfer an execute-only
fi l e .

C h a n g e p e r m a n e n t fi l e P T F S
access to allow read
permission.

PTFS - FILE ALREADY PERMANENT.

P u r g e t h e fi l e a n d r e t r y. P T F S

PTFS - FILE IS DIRECT ACCESS.

You attempted to save a file that is
already permanent.
You attempted to alter a direct access file
with a REPLACE or APPEND directive. This
is not allowed.

PTFS - FL TOO SHORT FOR PROGRAM.

There is a system error in the remote host.

Inform

site

analyst.

PTFS

PTFS - HOST NOT SPECIFIED TYPE.

Your job assumes a non-NOS remote host and
you have been linked to a NOS remote host.

Inform

site

analyst.

PTFS

PTFS - INCOMPLETE CONTINUED DIRECTIVE.

The remote host expected the text string to
be a continuation of the previous string
and it was not.

Correct the syntax of PTFS
your directives record
with emphasis on the
continuation lines.

PTFS - INVALID keyword=value.

You specified an incorrect parameter
(keyword=value).
Your USER directive has an incorrect user
name or the specified user name does not
have job processing privileges on the
remote host.

Correct

PTFS - INVALID ACCESS VALIDATION.

Change directive and PTFS
r e t r y.

and

r e t r y.

PTFS

Ensure that the user PTFS
name is correct and
r e t r y. I n f o r m s i t e
analyst if the problem
persists.

PTFS - INVALID ALTERNATE CATLIST
PERMISSION.

You specified an incorrect value for the AC
parameter on a SAVE, DEFINE or CHANGE
command.

R e t r y, s p e c i f y i n g
correct value.

PTFS - INVALID BACKUP/RESIDENCE REQUIREMENT.

You specified an incorrect BR=br or PR=pr
parameter on one of your directives.
You specified an incorrect DD=dd parameter.

Correct the parameter PTFS
and retry.

You specified an incorrect R=r parameter on
your directive.
The remote host does not recognize the
directive you specified.

PTFS

PTFS - INVALID DATA DECLARATION TYPE.
PTFS - INVALID DEVICE SPECIFICATION.
PTFS - INVALID DIRECTIVE.

B-56

a

Correct the DD=dd
parameter and retry.
C o r r e c t a n d r e t r y.

PTFS

PTFS

Ensure that the syntax PTFS
of the directive is
correct and retry.

60459680 H

Xj8B&\

0ffiZ\

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

PTFS - INVALID MODE/CATEGORY.

The mode and category you specified for the
file are not defined.

Correct

PTFS - INVALID xxxxxx=NO VALUE.

Argument xxxxxx was entered without a value.

Correct remote directive PTFS
and reissue.

PTFS - LID UNAVAILABLE.

The requested LID is not a host LID, is
disabled, or is a store-forward LID.

Inform site analyst. PTFS

PTFS - MISSING CHARGE/PROJECT.

The CHARGE directive did not have the
required charge and project number.

Correct

and

r e t r y.

PTFS

PTFS - MISSING USER NAME.

The USER directive did not contain the
required user name.

Correct

and

r e t r y.

PTFS

PTFS - MULTIPLE FILE TRANSFERS REQUESTED.

You have more than one file transfer
directive in a given directive record.
This is not allowed.

P l a c e t h e fi l e t r a n s f e r P T F S
directives in separate
records, one file
transfer directive per
record.

PTFS - PARAMETERS CE AND CP ARE MUTUALLY
EXCLUSIVE.

The parameters CE and CP may not both be
specified on the same CHANGE command.

Use two separate CHANGE PTFS
commands, with one
specifying CP and the
other specifying CE.

PTFS - PF NAME REQUIRED.

You did not specify the permanent file to
be processed.

Correct

PTFS - PF REQUEST COMPLETE.

The remote host successfully processed your
permanent file request.

PTFS - RECOVERY DIRECTIVE AFTER FILE TRANSFER.

Your MFLINK directives are not in the
proper sequence. If a file transfer
directive is in the same record as a USER
CHARGE, or PACKNAM directive; the USER,
CHARGE, or PACKNAM directive must precede
t h e fi l e t r a n s f e r d i r e c t i v e .

Resequence
your
directives and retry.

PTFS - SECONDARY USER DIRECTIVES DISABLED.

You are not authorized to specify secondary
USER directives.

Get site personnel to so PTFS
authorize you or do not
attempt to use secondary
USER directives.

PTFS - UNKNOWN ACCESS LEVEL NAME.

You entered an unknown access level name on
a SAVE or a DEFINE directive through a
MFLINK command.

Correct the access level PTFS
name on the SAVE or the
DEFINE directive and
reenter the MFLINK
command.

PTFS - USER DIRECTIVE REQUIRED FIRST.

You must first specify a USER directive to
access permanent files on remote NOS hosts.

Correct

PURGE COMPLETE.

The files have been purged as requested.

None.

PURGALL

QAC ERROR ENCOUNTERED.

System error.

Inform site analyst.

ENQUIRE

QAP - BUFFER ARGUMENT ERROR.

System error.

Inform Central Software
Support.

QAP

QAP - INCORRECT REQUEST.

Bad parameter in QAP call.

Inform Central Software
Support.

QAP

QAP - USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

You tried to perform an operation for which
you are not authorized (for example, trying
to use PFC arrays when not authorized to do
so).

Ensure accuracy of
command or determine
proper validation
requi rements.

QAP

QFM FILE NAME ERROR.

The filename specified is not a valid file
name.

Verify file name.

QFM

QGET COMPLETE.

Informative only.

None.

QGET

QTF, -n- qfn ACQUIRED, DC=dc, ST=did,
DO=sid.

The system has acquired local queue file
qfn on connection number n from the local
queue with disposition code dc for transfer
to destination LID did with source LID sid.

None.

QTF

QTF, -n- qfn CONNECTING TO pid.

The system is attempting to establish
communications with remote host pid.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e
p i d P h y s i c a l i d e n t i fi e r

None.

QTF

QTF, -n- qfn CONNECTION REJECTED.

The system was unable to establish a
connection to the remote host partner,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e .

If problem persists,
contact remote operator
to ensure remote
subsystem and QTFS are
operational; otherwise
contact site analyst.

QTF

60459680 H

and

and

and

r e t r y.

r e t r y.

r e t r y.

PTFS

PTFS

PTFS

PTFS

B-57

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

QTF, -n- qfn EVICTED.

The system evicted the local queue file qfn
to connection number n from the local queue,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

QTF, -n- qfn INVALID QUALIFIER OR PARAMETER.

The system received an invalid network
message from the remote host,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF

QTF, -n- qfn REQUIRED PARAMETER MISSING.

The remote host failed to send a required
parameter on a network message,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF

QTF, -n- qfn SENT TO PID xxx, PID yyy
RESPONDING.

The subsystem network description table
does not agree with the remote host PID
returned by the remote host QTFS. The file
transfer may complete.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF

QTF, -n- qfn UNEXPECTED ACQUIRE ERROR CODE
nnnB.

A system error.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF

QTF, -n- qfn UNRECOGNIZED DISPOSITION CODE.

The system has
local queue with
disposition code.
disposition code
qfn Queued

None.

QTF

QTF(S), -n- qfn CONNECTION BROKEN.

The remote host partner or the remote
subsystem broke the network connection
usually due to an involuntary termination
or failing network hardware,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

If error persists,
inform site analyst and
customer engineer.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn CONNECTION TIMED OUT.

Remote host partner did not respond within
the allowed time span. Transfer will be
retried.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

If error persists,
inform site analyst and
disable remote host pid
in subsystem ID table.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S>, -n- qfn CONNECTION TO pid
ESTABLISHED.

Indicates state of connection to remote
host partner.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e
p i d p h y s i c a l i d e n t i fi e r

None.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn CONNECTION TO pid ABORTED.

Indicates state of connection to remote
host partner.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e
p i d P h y s i c a l i d e n t i fi e r

None.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn CONNECTION TO pid ENDED.

Indicates state of connection to remote
host partner.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e
p i d P h y s i c a l i d e n t i fi e r

None.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), COUNT OF ACTIVE CONNECTIONS
DECREMENTED BELOW ZERO.

The application received a disconnect
but had no paths active.

Inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn ERROR IN FILE TRANSFER.

Transfer of file qfn was unsuccessful,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

If error persists,
inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn FC/BRK RECEIVED.

The remote host partner broke the network
connection. Usual cause is detection of an
unrecoverable protocol anamoly.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

If error persists,
inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn FC/NAK RETRY COUNT EXCEEDED.

The subsystem was unable to deliver a
network message.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S) -n- qfn FIRST KEYWORD IS NOT *ROUTE*.

The MFQUEUE routing directive must begin
with the keyword ROUTE.

Correct the MFQUEUE
routing directive.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S) -n- qfn INCORRECT EC FOR THIS QUEUE
TYPE.

The external charactersitics (EC) value
specified on a MFQUEUE routing directive
does not match the disposition code of the
fi l e .

Correct the MFQUEUE
routing directive using
a print-type EC value if
the file is a print
file, or a punch-type EC
value if the file is to
be punched.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S) -n- qfn INCORRECT VALUE (xxx).

You specified an incorrect keyword, xxx, on
an MFQUEUE routing directive.

Correct the MFQUEUE
routing directive.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S) -n- qfn INCORRECT VALUE (xxx=yyy).

You specified an incorrect value yyy for
keyword xxx on an MFQUEUE routing directive.

Correct the MFQUEUE
routing directive.

QTF
QTFS

QTFS, -n- qfn INVALID ATTRIBUTE IGNORED.

QTFS received a network message from the
remote host QTF with an unrecognized
parameter. Transfer may complete,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

B-58

acquired a file from the
an unrecognized
See previous message for
value,
fi l e n a m e

QTF

<^Sv

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

QTF(S), -n- qfn INVALID SEQUENCE RECEIVED.

A network message from the remote host
partner was received that was not in
sequence.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), JOB ORIGIN ERROR.

QTF or QTFS was improperly initiated by
user command.

None.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn MESSAGE FROM REMOTE HOST
QTF(S), -n- qfn xxx.

xxx is the text of a message received from
t h e r e m o t e h o s t p a r t n e r,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

None.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn NETWORK BLOCKS OUT OF
SEQUENCE.

A network message from the remote host
partner was received that was not in
sequence.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn NETXFR ERROR re - rejmess

A n e r r o r o c c u r r e d d u r i n g fi l e t r a n s f e r ,
qfn
queued
fi l e n a m e
re
reason
code
rejmess reject message

Inform site analyst if
problem persists.

QTF
QTFS

re

rejmess

03
04
05
06
07
08
09
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

CONNECTION BROKEN.
PROTOCOL ERROR.
TIMEOUT EXPIRED.
B L O C K N O T S E N T.
TO O M A N Y T R A N S F E R S
A C N O U T- O F - R A N G E .
CIO ERROR.
IDLEDOWN ERROR.
SHUTDOWN.
RHF I/O ERROR
INCORRECT DEVICE.
CODE CONV N/A. (not avail)
CONTROL WORD ERROR.
INCORRECT DEVICE.
EMPTY FILE.
N A M I N T E R FA C E E R R .
B L K N U M M I S C O M PA R E .
INCORRECT BLK SIZE.
BLOCK SEQUENCE ERR.
PRU BOUNDS ERROR.
INTRA-HOST PRU XFR.
ERROR DURING XFR.
ABL OUT OF RANGE.
A P P L N O T VA L I D AT E D .
FILE TYPE ERROR.
JOB ORIGIN ERROR.

QTF(S) -n- qfn NO USERNAME FOR *DC=WT/TT*
FILE.

Q T F S i s u n a b l e t o a c c e p t a fi l e f o r t h e
wait queue because no user name exists
w i t h w h i c h t o a s s o c i a t e t h e fi l e .

Specify
UN=username
parameter on MFQUEUE
routing directive.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S) -n- qfn ROUTE ERROR nnB-xxxx.

QTFS was unable to queue the file qfn due
to one of the reasons in the following list,
nn is the DSP error code, and xxxx is the
reason.
- I N VA L I D
- DISPOSITION CODE. INVALID ST OR DO
- L I D . I N VA L I D T E R M I N A L I D . I N VA L I D

If
RETRY
L AT E R ,
no
action is required; QTF
wilt periodically retry
t o t r a n s f e r t h e fi l e
until the temporary
condition clears. For
all other reasons, the
fi l e i s e v i c t e d a n d t h e
l o g fi l e i s r e t u r n e d t o
o r i g i n a t o r. C o r r e c t t h e
ROUTE command or MFQUEUE
routing directive, if
possible; otherwise
inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

FOMSM CODE. INVALID JOB COMMAND.
INVALID DATA DECLARATION. INVALID
INTERNAL CHAR. INVALID EXTERNAL CHAR.
INVALID SPACING CODE. TOO MANY DEFERRED
JOBS. INVALID USER ACCESS. INVALID
USER COMMAND. QFT FULL (RETRY LATER).
DISK FULL (RETRY LATER). INVALID OWNER
USER. INVALID CREATION USER. FILE
IS EMPTY.

qfn
QTF(S), -n- qfn TRANSFER xxxxxxxxxx BY
REMOTE HOST.
QTF(S), -n- qfn REASON CODE = nnnnnn.
or
QTF(S), -n- qfn REASON CODE = nnnnnn - yyy.

Queued file name

QTF or QTFS has been informed by its remote
h o s t p a r t n e r t h a t t h e c u r r e n t fi l e t r a n s f e r
cannot be initiated or completed,
xxxxxxxxxx may be either REJECTED,
TERMINATED, or ABORTED, nnnnnn is the
reason code and yyy is one of the following:
- (CONTACT SITE ANALYST).

If fatal transfer error, QTF
fi l e i s e v i c t e d a n d Q T F Q T F S
l o g fi l e r e t u r n e d t o
originator. In all
other cases, transfer
will be retried. If
error persists, inform
site analyst.

An unexpected reason code was received.
- PROTOCOL ERROR.
The remote host partner detected a protocol
a n a m o l y.

60459680 H

B-59

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

TIME-OUT MATURED.
Remote host partner did not receive message
within the allowed time span.
- SENDER PROBLEMS.
Unspecified problems were encountered on
the sending (QTF) side.
- RECEIVER PROBLEMS.
Unspecified problems were encountered on
the receiving (QTFS) side.
- FILE SIZE TOO BIG.
The file is too large to be accommodated on
the remote host or not enough space was
preallocated.
- INVALID USERNAME/ACCOUNT.
An invalid or missing account or username
was detected by the remote host partner.
- UNSPECIFIC TRANSFER
Insufficient information was received by
the remote host partner to allow the
transfer to continue.
- QUEUE TYPE UNAVAILABLE.
The disposition code requested on the ROUTE
command or MFQUEUE routing directive could
not be processed on the remote host. For
example, a print file was attempted to be
transferred to a CYBER 200 remote host.
- UNACCEPTABLE ATTRIBUTES.
An invalid attribute value was received by
the remote host partner.
QTF(S), SUPERVISORY MESSAGE RECEIVED
FOR INACTIVE ACN.
QTF(S), HDR=FIRST TWO WORDS OF HEADER.

A supervisory message that was received
contained a connection number that was
not currently active.

QTF(S), -n- qfn UNKNOWN *PI* PARAMETER,
DEFAULT USED.

The remote NOS 2 system received a print
file with an unknown PI (print-image)
parameter. The file will be printed
using the default PI paramaeter.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e .

QTF(S), -n- qfn UNKNOWN STATE-OF-TRANSFER
SENT BY REMOTE HOST.
QTF(S), -n- qfn REASON CODE = nnnnnn - (CONTACT
SITE ANALYST).

An unrecognized value, nnnnnn, for the
state-of-transfer attribute was received on
a network message from the remote host
p a r t n e r.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn UNRECOGNIZED COMMAND
RECEIVED XX.

The command sent by the remote host partner
is not recognized.
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e
xx Command number received.

Inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QTF(S), -n- qfn UNRECOGNIZED MESSAGE
RECEIVED.

The network message received from the
subsystem is not recognized,
q f n Q u e u e d fi l e n a m e

Inform site analyst.

QTF
QTFS

QUEUE7 ARGUMENT ERROR

You entered the QUEUE7 command incorrectly.

Check the command
format, then reenter the
command. You may enter
a QUEUE7,SYNTAX command
to display the command
format.

QUEUE7

RANDOM INDEX ERROR.

The random disk address of the permit
sector is in error (error log and dayfile
message). This may be a problem with
your program.

Check your program. If
it does not use the
CATLIST macro, inform
site analyst.

READ AFTER WRITE, filename AT address.

You attempted to read a tape on which the
last operation was a write.

Ensure accuracy of tape
positioning commands
(BKSP, BKSPRU, SKIPFB,
or REWIND required to
read after write).

B-60

Inform site analyst

QTF
QTFS
QTF
QTFS

1MT

/*^\

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

READ FILE BUSY - filename.

The read file is found to be busy (direct
access file only).

Retry after file is not
busy.

SUBMIT

READ FILE EMPTY.

The READ file specified does not exist or
contains no data.

Reenter command with a
correct read file.

IEDIT

READ ID BURST FAILURE, filename AT address.

The tape is assigned to a control point
in PE (1600 cpi) mode and the drive is
unable to read the ID burst at load
point. The tape was assigned to a control
point in GE (6250 cpi) and the drive was
unable to read the ID burst at load point
or is unable to set the automatic gain
control using the automatic read
amplitude (ARA) burst.

Load the tape on another
drive or use a different
tape.

IMT

READY.

The system is ready to process the next
command. This message is not issued in
the BATCH subsystem.

Enter your next command.

IAFEX
EDIT

READY DROP, filename AT address.

Unit dropped ready status.

None.

1MT

RECLAIM ABORTED.

RECLAIM has been aborted due to error or
user intervention.

Check the previous
message for a
description of the error.

RECLAIM

RECLAIM ARGUMENT ERROR.

An invalid argument was detected in the
RECLAIM command.

Check the RECLAIM
command for correct
parameters, values, etc.

RECLAIM

RECLAIM COMPLETE.

Normal completion.

None.

RECLAIM

RECORD TOO LARGE ON filename.

An input record was encountered that
exceeded S or L output tape block size.

Reduce input record
size, or use COPY
command to increase S or
L tape block size or
allow record splitting
with PO parameter.

COPYBF
COPYB

RECORD TOO LONG.

The record is too long for available
memory. In response to a WBR request, the
record length parameter was greater than or
equal to the job's field length. Available
memory is filled and the excess data is
skipped.

Increase field length
and rerun.

CPMEM

n RECORDS NOT REPLACED.

Informative message. LIBEDIT encountered n
records on a replacement file that were not
named in the directives and did not replace
o l d fi l e r e c o r d s .

Either change the
directives so that the
replacement file is a
no-replace file or
include an *IGN0RE
directive listing the
records that are not to
be used.

n RECORDS SPLITS OCCURRED.

Multiple blocks per record have been
written on an S or L output tape.

None.

COPYB

RECOVERY COMPLETE.

Informative message.

None.

110

RECOVERY COMPLETE...CONTINUE

Job recovery was successful.

Issue a STATUS directive
to dtermine the state of
the job, then proceed.

HELL07

RECOVERY RERUN.

The system is rerunning the job following a
level 3 deadstart.

No action required.

1AJ

REMOVABLE PACKS OVERCOMMITMENT.

Removable pack request without NA selected
causes resource overcommitment.

Retry later or retry
with NA parameter on
ATTACH, DEFINE, etc.,
with PN parameter
s p e c i fi e d .

RESEX

RENAME NOT ALLOWED FOR PROC OR TEXT RECORD.

A RENAME of a PROC or TEXT type record was
attempted; this is not allowed.

None.

RENAME OF PROC TYPE NOT ALLOWED.

A RENAME of a PROC type record was
attempted; this is not allowed.

None.

LIBEDIT

REPEAT..

Data will now be accepted by the network.

None.

CCP

REPLACE ERROR.

The same file was found twice during a
catalog search. This error can occur for
APPEND or REPLACE commands or macros after
a file is found and purged and the catalog
search is continued (error log and dayfile
message).

Inform site analyst. If
many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITIALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

PFM

0$$&t\.

60459680 H

8-61

MESSAGE

ACTION

SIGNIFICANCE

ROUTINE

REPOSITION CORRECTED ERROR, filename AT
address.

The tape drive is writing in a marginal
state. This message is intended to
prevent the generation of a marginal
tape by the subsystem and its devices.
This message is to be considered a
marginal drive indicator (MDI) and
requires immediate action.

Clean the drive and test to
ensure proper operation.
Inform the customer engineer.

IMT

REPRIEVE BLOCK ERROR.

An address is cut of range or there is an
incorrect parameter in the reprieve
parameter block at the time of an error.
The message is also issued if the specified
reprieve address itself is out of range.
(1AJ issues this message for all errors
except terminal interrupts processed by
1RI.)

Ensure parameter block
is correct.

1AJ

REPRIEVE CHECKSUM BAD.

The computed checksum does not agree with
the checksum specified in the parameter
block at the time of the error. (1AJ
issues this message for all errors except
terminal interrupts processed by 1RI.)

Ensure interrupt handler
is still intact. Ensure
that code in the area
for which checksum was
computed has not changed.

1AJ

REQUEST IS VALID ONLY FROM A NETWORK
TERMINAL.

You attempted to enter an APPSW command
from a job that was not of interactive
origin type or from a terminal not
connected to NAM (for example, through
RDF). To use the APPSW command, your job
must be of interactive origin type and your
terminal must be connected to NAM.

Login to IAF from a
terminal connected to
NAM.

TLX

REQUEST UNDEFINED ON DEVICE, filename AT
address.

The specified function cannot be performed
on the device on which the file resides.
The system provides a dump of the FET on
file OUTPUT.

Verify that valid device
i s s p e c i fi e d .

1MS

REQUESTED SECTION section.

This is the second line of a three-line
message:
MULTIFILE NOT FOUND,filename AT ADDRESS.
REQUESTED SECTION section.
FOUND SECTION section.
The system has reached the end of a
m u l t i fi l e s e t .

None.

1MT

REQUIRED FL EXCEEDS VALIDATED LIMIT.

The job requires more field length than you
are authorized to have.

Decrease the job size or
request the site to
increase your field
length validation.

LIBEDIT

RESEQ COMMAND ERROR.

The RESEQ command contains a syntax error.

Correct error and rerun.

RESEQ

RESEQ ERRORS.

A resequencing error was encountered.

Refer to preceding
message for more
specific information
about the error.

RESEQ

RESEQ NUMERIC PARAM ERROR.

A parameter which is supposed to be numeric
contains a nonnumeric character.

Correct error and rerun.

RESEQ

RESERVED FILE NAME.

Read or destination file name matches an
internal scratch file. (ZZZZZG0-ZZZZZG7)

Rename file and reenter
command.

IEDIT

RESERVED FILE NAME

File name specified on SORT command is
reserved for use by the editor (ZZZZZGO,
ZZZZZG1).

Rename file and
rerun.

SORT

RESEX ABORT - OPERATOR TERMINATION.

The operator entered a DROP, KILL or RERUN
command. The system performed appropriate
cleanup procedures before termination.

Determine reason for
operator action. Rerun
job if possible.

RESEX

RESEX ABORT - SYSTEM RESOURCE LIMIT.

The job terminated prematurely due to job
time limit, SRU Limit, or track limit. The
system performs appropriate cleanup
procedures before termination.

If error caused by SRU
or time limit, increase
resource limits. If
caused by track limit,
contact site analyst.

RESEX

RESEX ABORT - TERMINAL INTERRUPT.

You entered the interrupt or terminate
sequence. The system performs appropriate
cleanup procedures before termination.

None.

RESEX FAILURE.

The resource executive (RESEX) has detected
a fatal error.

Write a PSR.

PFM

RESOURCE DEMAND ERROR.

You attempted to decrease the number of
scheduled units to less than the number of
currently assigned units or increase the
number of scheduled units to a point where
a deadlock would occur.

Adjust RESOURC command
parameters accordingly.

RESEX

B-62

'*sa?\

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

RESOURCE ENVIRONMENT ERROR.

System error.

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or
contact Central Software
Support.

RESOURCE NEGATIVE SHARE COUNT.

The resource over commitment algorithm
indicates a greater number of users are
sharing a removable pack than are actually
sharing the pack.

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or
contact Central Software
Support.

RESOURCE PF ERROR ec filename.

PFM error ec occurred when attaching
resource file filename.

Rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
a site analyst, write
a PSR and include
support material so that
CDC can duplicate the
problem.

RESOURCE SCRATCH FILE ERROR.

An empty entry has been found in the
overcommitment algorithm scratch file.

Rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
a site analyst, write
a PSR and include
support material so that
CDC can duplicate the
problem.

RESOURCE TYPE ERROR.

You specified an incorrect resource type.

Ensure accuracy of
command.

RESEX

jsn RESTARTED FROM yy/mm/dd. hh.mm.ss.

The checkpoint job identified by jsn was
restarted from the checkpoint taken on the
specified date and time. This message is
issued whenever a checkpoint job is
restarted.

None.

RESTART

RESUMING 7000 MODE..

HELL07 is attempting to reestablish
connections with a SCOPE 2 job as a result
of a RESUME directive.

Wait for the HELL07
prompt to appear. If
the prompt does not
appeaar, check to ensure
that you have a SCOPE 2
j o b a c ti v e .

HELL07

RETRY APPLICATION SWITCH.

An attempt to switch applications failed

Retry the APPSW
command. If the error
recurs, inform your site
analyst.

TLX

Increase maximum field
length with MFL command
or SETMFL macro.

CPM

due to software error.

RFL BEYOND MFL.

RHF, jobn APPLICATION IS NOT NETTED ON

The RFL request is greater than the maximum
field length for a job step.
The application with job name or job
sequence name jobn requested an RHF
^rV function before requesting a NETON to RHF.
RHF aborts the application.

RESEX

RESEX

None.

RHF, DUPLICATE NETON REQUEST.

Two NETON requests were made for the same
application without an intervening NETOFF
request. RHF aborts the application.

Remove the second NETON
request or add the
missing NETOFF request.

RHF

RHF, FATAL SSF ERROR. FC=fc, RC=rc.

System error.

Inform site analyst.

RHF

RHF, INVALID APPLICATION CALL TO RHF.

An application issued an invalid RHF call.
The call may contain an incorrect RHF
function, a request (other than NETON) from
an application with an end-of-job connect
status, or an incorrect word count in the
RHF call. RHF aborts the application.

Correct error in
application and retry.

RHF

RHF, INVALID APPLICATION NAME ON NETON.

An application issued a NETON request using
an application name that was not in RHF's
configuration or that contained incorrect
characters. RHF aborts the application.

Correct name in the
application NETON call
or add the application
name to RHF's
c o n fi g u r a t i o n .

RHF, INVALID APPLICATION TABLE ADDRESS.

In an RHF call an application used an
incorrect application table address. The
address may be out of range or may point to
another application table. RHF aborts the
application.

Correct error i n
application.

RHF, jsn INVALID FET PRAM. FET = ADDRESS

System error.

Inform site analyst.

RHF

RHF, jsn INVALID HEADER ADDRESS address

System error.

Inform site analyst.

RHF

60459680 H

B-63

|

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

RHF, INVALID MINACN/MAXACN ON NETON.

The value for the minimum or maximum ACN in
the NETON request is outside the range
specified for the application. RHF aborts
the application.

Correct the minimum or
maximum ACN in the
application's NETON
request.

RHF, INVALID SSF UCP ADDRESS address

System error.

Inform site analyst.

RHF

RHF, INVALID TEXT ADDRESS address.

System error.

Inform site analyst.

RHF

RHF, NETON SECURITY VIOLATION

An application is not validated to do a
NETON request. RHF aborts the application.

None.

RHF

RHF, NO APPLICATION ADDRESS IN RHF
CALL—EXTRA CHARGE

Informative message indicating an
application issued an RHF request (other
than NETON) without specifying an
application table address in the RHF call.
The application is charged less if it
specifies its application table address in
each RHF call.

RHF, QUEUED MESSAGE LIMIT EXCEEDED

An application exceeded the maximum number
of supervisory messages that are queued in
RHF. RHF aborts the application.

Modify the application
to issue more frequent
NETGET's for the
supervisory messages
queued in RHF.

RHF

ROLLOUT FILE BAD.

A job could not be rolled out correctly.

Inform site analyst.
Check error log dayfile
for the job that was
aborted and the location
of the bad rollout file.

1RI

ROUTE COMMAND ERROR.

Format of the command is incorrect.

Check the ROUTE command
format in section 9.

ROUTE

ROUTE COMPLETE.

Informative message indicating ROUTE
operation has completed.

None.

ROUTE

ROUTE COMPLETE. JSN IS jsn.

A ROUTE command queued a job for input.
The routed job has the job sequence name
jsn .

None.

ROUTE

You specified a DC/EC combination that is

If the DC parameter

ROUTE

ROUTE *DC* INCOMPATIBLE WITH *EC*.

not valid.

RHF

implies a print or punch

disposition, the EC
parameter must
correspond.

|

ROUTE INCORRECT *DO* PARAMETER.

The DO=lid parameter on the ROUTE command
has an incorrect format.
l i d L o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r o f r e m o t e
mainframe.

Correct the format of
your DO=Lid
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

ROUTE

ROUTE INCORRECT *EC* PARAMETER.

You specified an incorrect external
characteristics code on the ROUTE command.

Correctly specify the
EC=ec parameter on the
ROUTE command.

ROUTE

ROUTE INCORRECT *FC* PARAMETER.

The forms code specified on the c
not
valid.
\

Check the command format
and reenter command.

ROUTE

ROUTE INCORRECT *IC* PARAMETER.

You specified an incorrect internal
characteristics code on the ROUTE command.

Correctly specify the
IC=ic parameter on the
ROUTE command.

ROUTE

ROUTE INCORRECT KEYWORD.

Command contains a duplicate or incorrect
keyword.

Check the ROUTE command
format in section 9.

ROUTE

ROUTE INCORRECT *OT* PARAMETER.

A system table contains an incorrect value
for the job's origin type.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

ROUTE INCORRECT SPACING CODE.

The SC=xx parameter on the ROUTE command
specified a spacing code greater than 77B.

Correct the spacing code
specified on the ROUTE
command.

ROUTE

ROUTE INCORRECT *ST* PARAMETER.

The ST=lid parameter on the ROUTE command
has an incorrect format.
l i d L o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r o f r e m o t e
mainframe.

Correct the format of
your ST=Ud
s p e c i fi c a t i o n .

ROUTE

ROUTE *OT* NOT ALLOWED.

Your program is not system origin and only
system origin jobs can use the OT parameter.

Do not attempt to use
the OT parameter unless
you have system origin
privileges.

ROUTE

ROUTE *PRI* IGNORED.

Informative message listed for NOS/BE
c o m p a t i b i l i t y.

None.

ROUTE

B-64

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

ROUTE *REP* GT 31. DEFAULT USED.

The repeat count specified was greater than
31; it has been set to 0. This condition
does not abort the program.

Use a repeat count less
than 32.

ROUTE

ROUTE *ST* IGNORED.

Informative message listed for NOS/BE
c o m p a t i b i l i t y.

None.

ROUTE

ROUTE *TID* AND *FM/UN* CONFLICT.

The TID parameter was specified with either
the FM or UN parameter. Neither one of
these parameters can be specified along
with TID.

Refer to section 9 for
the correct format of
the ROUTE command.

ROUTE

ROUTE *TID/FM/UN* and *ID* CONFLICT.

The ID parameter was specified with the
TID, FM, or UN parameter.

Refer to section 9 for
the correct format of
the ROUTE command.

ROUTE *TID=xx - VALUE IGNORED.

Informative message listed for NOS/BE
c o m p a t i b i l i t y.

None.

ROUTE

ROUTE UNDEFINED SERVICE CLASS.

The specified service class was not
recognized.

Correct and retry.

ROUTE

ROUTE UNKNOWN PI PARAMETER, DEFAULT USED.

The ROUTE command contains an incorrect PI
parameter.

Check with central site
personnel to determine
the correct value to be
specified. The file was
routed with site default.

ROUTE

filename ROUTED. JSN IS jsn.

filename is the name of the file which was
routed, jsn is the job sequence name (JSN)
assigned to the file.

None.

MFILES

RPV - PREVIOUS ERROR CONDITIONS RESET.

Normal message on RPV reset call.

None.

RPV

RTIME nnnnnn.nnn SECS.

Dayfile message output by RTIME command
giving the real-time seconds count.

None.

1AJ

RUN COMPLETE.

Completion message for jobs in all
subsystems except batch.

None.

SC ONLY PARAMETER VALID WITH JSN.

You included an OT, L, or OP parameter
along with a JSN parameter on a CLASS
command. If you specify a JSN parameter,
the only other valid parameter for CLASS is
the SC parameter.

Correct the CLASS
command parameters and
resubmit.

CLASS

SCP INCORRECT TRANSFER ADDRESS.

The SCP SSCR (RA + 51B) word contains
incorrect parameters on the completion
address for an SF.REGR, SF.SWPI or SF.SWPQ
function is no longer within the SCP field
length.

Correct code error in
SCP.

1AJ

SECONDARY APPLICATION ABORTED CONNECTION.

You intentionally or unintentionally
aborted the secondary connection. Possible
causes are security conflict or entry of a
BYE,ABORT command.

If the abort was
unintentional and you
cannot establish a
cause, see your site
analyst.

TLX

SECONDARY APPLICATION CONNECTION LIMIT.

The application you specified on an APPSW
command is busy with the maximum allowable
number of terminal connections.

Try again later.

TLX

SECONDARY APPLICATION FAILED.

Your secondary application has failed,
probably due to a system problem.

Check with your site
analyst or try again
l a t e r.

TLX

SECONDARY APPLICATION NETTED OFF.

The application was brought down by the
network operator.

Check with your site
analyst or try again
l a t e r.

SECONDARY APPLICATION NOT AVAILABLE.

The secondary application requested on an
APPSW command is either temporarily
unavailable or is not supported at your
site.

Check with your site
analyst.

SECONDARY APPLICATION PROCESSING COMPLETE.

The connection to your secondary
application has been terminated normally.

None.

SECONDARY APPLICATION REFUSED CONNECTION.

The application refused to accept your
connection, possibly as a result of a
validation problem or security conflict.

Check with your site
analyst.

SECURE FILES - CHECKPOINT ABORT.

Indicates a local file being checkpointed
had secure file status set.

None.

TLX

CHKPT

zifi^v
60459680 H

B-65

MESSAGE

|

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

SECURE MEMORY, DUMP DISABLED.

You either attempted to dump memory
protected by the system, or entered a
memory dump request after a protected
command or from a terminal.

Refer to Security
Control in section 3 and
the load/dump Memory
commands in section 11.
To obtain memory dumps
from an interactive job,
include the dump command
in a procedure or in an
ENTER command.

1AJ

SECURITY CONFLICT.

An attempted operation within the job would
have resulted in a violation of security
access levels or categories. The cause is
described in the immediately preceding
dayfile message.

Correct and retry.

1AJ

SECURITY VIOLATION ON FILE filename AT
address.

One of the following:
You issued an OPEN request that
specified an access level for a file
that is not valid for your job.
You attempted to write on a direct
access permanent file whose access
level is lower than that of your job.

Set the access level of
the file to the correct
value and retry.

1MS

SERVICE CLASS FULL.

You attempted to change a job to service
class for which the service class limit has
already been reached.

Resubmit the CLASS
command at a later time.

CLASS

SERVICE CLASS FULL.

The number of jobs in a particular service
class has reached its limit.

Retry loging in at a
later time or contact
site administrator to
increase number of jobs
allowed in particular
service class.

IAFEX

SERVICE CLASS REQUIRED WITH JSN.

You entered a CLASS command with a JSN
parameter but did not include an SC
parameter. If the JSN parameter is
specified, an SC parameter must also be
included.

Correct the CLASS
command parameters and
resubmit.

CLASS

SERVICE LIMIT EXCEEDED.

Your job exceeded the field length limits
for a job in its service class.

Reduce the job's field
length requirements and
resubmit.

1AJ

SFM ABORTED.

An error flag was set at SFM's control
point.

Inform site analyst.

SFM

SFM FAST ATTACH SYSTEM SECTOR ERROR.

An unrecoverable error was detected when
trying to read the system sector of the
file being entered into fast attach
status. The file was entered, but, the
system sector pointers were not set. This
file may not be dumped properly by *PFDUMP*
when this occurs.

Inform site analyst.

SFM

SFM I/O SEQUENCE ERROR.

Action has been requested on a busy file.

Wa i t u n t i l fi l e i s n o t
busy and retry.

SFM

SFP CALL ERROR.

System error.

Write a PSR, including
a dump or support
materials to allow CDC
to duplicate the
problem.

SFP

SFP/DOO BAD ERROR TEXT.

The specified system text is not in the
correct format.

RebuiId system text
using correct format.

SFP/DOO ERROR TEXT NOT FOUND.

The specified system text could not be
found.

Ensure the system text
s p e c i fi e d i s c o r r e c tl y
installed on the system.
If it is, write a PSR.

SFP/DOO ERROR TEXT NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

The specified system text does not reside
on mass storage.

Move system text to mass
storage.

SFP/DOO INVALID MESSAGE NUMBER.

The specified message number could not be
found on the system text.

Ensure that 000 was
called with the correct
message number.

SFP/xxx INCORRECT FUNCTION CODE.

The specified function code to the program
xxx is not defined.

Ensure the correct
function code was used.

SFP/xxx INCORRECT ORIGIN CODE.

Dayfile message indicating that the
function was incorrect for the job's origin.

Write a PSR.

8-66

SFP

SFP

60459680 H

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

SFP/xxx PARAMETER ERROR.

Dayfile message indicating that the
parameter address was outside the field
length.

If the code is yours,
find the source of
the error and fix it.
If the code is CDC's,
wrote a PSR.

SFP

SFP/PFE I/O SEQUENCE ERROR.

Action was requested on a file that was
already busy.

Wa i t u n t i l t h e fi l e i s
not busy and retry.

SFP

SFP/RPV UNABLE TO RESET, NOT REPRIEVED.

Dayfile message indicating that an attempt
was made to reset when the job had not been
reprieved.

If the code is yours,
find the source of the
e r r o r a n d fi x t i t .
If the code is CDC's,
write a PSR.

SFP/SRP SPECIAL REQUEST PROCESSING ERROR.

Dayfile message indicating that the SPCW
word was busy.

Write a PSR, including
a dump or support
materials to allow CDC
to duplicate the
problem.

SFP/STS UNKNOWN DEVICE TYPE/NAME.

The device code is not recognized by the
system.

Check device code for
v a l i d i t y.

SHARE TABLE ERROR.

System error.

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
yopur site analyst or
contact Central Software
Support.

RESEX

jsn SHARE TABLE MISMATCH.

A system error occurred while processing
the job with the specified job sequence
name (jsn).

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or
contact Central Software
support.

RESEX

SINGLE FRAME ERROR.

A frame (NRZI only) containing all zeros
was read; data will be at least one frara
short. The dayfile message STATUS ERROR,
filename AT address precedes this message
and specifies the file (filename) and the
address.

Retry or inform site
analyst.

1MT

SL NOT VALIDATED.

The SRU limit requested exceeds that for
which you are authorized.

Request smaller SRU
limit.

CPM

SMP - ABORTED DUE TO ROLLOUT REQUEST

The rollout request flag is set in the
job's control point area. This may
happen as a result of terminal I/O or
*DIS* dropping while SMP is running.

None.

SPCW CALL ERROR.

A DNP= type call was made, and the program
called is either not in the CLD or does not
have a DMP= entry point defined.

Inform site analyst.

1AJ

SPECIAL REQUEST PROCESSING ERROR.

Error encountered in *SPCW* call word.

Inform site analyst.

1AJ

*SRU LIMIT*
ENTER S TO CONTINUE OR STOP TO ENO JOB STEP.
TYPED AHEAD INPUT MUST BE REENTERED.

You have exceeded your system resource unit
(SRU) limit during a terminal session.

To continue, allocate
nnnnn additional SRUs
with S,nnnnn command or
enter S alone to
allocate an
i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d
number of SRUs.

IAFEX

STACK PURGING NOT DESELECTABLE.

You attempted to change the purging bit
with the EREXIT function. This cannot be
done on 6000 or CYBER 70 systems.

None.

CPM

pfn STAGE INITIATED.

The file does not reside on disk. It is
currently being staged from alternate
storage to disk.

Wait until stage
operation is complete.

STATION DOWN

The SCOPE 2 station is not currently
executing.

Try to reenter the
command at a later time.

QUEUE7

STATUS ERROR, filename AT address.

An error was encountered during magnetic
tape processing. A second message line
describes the error in more detail.

Retry or inform site
analyst.

1MT

STEP CONDITION.

Step mode flag set in the PSD register
caused the program to interrupt at the end
of a program instruction with an exchange
jump to EEA (the error exit address in the
exchange package).

Inform site analyst.

1AJ

/^$P*N

60459680 H

B-67

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

SUBMIT COMPLETE. JSN IS jobseq

The SUBMIT command successfully queued the
file for input. The job sequence name
(JSN) for the job is jobseq.

None.

SUBMIT

SUBMIT ERROR - RETRY

An internal error occurred during SUBMIT
processing.

Reenter the SUBMIT
directive. If the error
recurs, inform the site
analyst.

HELL07

SUBMIT ERROR - RETRY

An internal error occurred during SUBMIT
processing.

Reenter the SUBMIT
directive. If the error
recurs, inform the site
analyst.

DROP
HELL07

SUBMIT FILE EMPTY.

An EOR or EOF was encountered on the submit
file before any data was found.

Rewind submit file,
verify format of data
and that the file is a
local file, and retry
operation.

SUBMIT NOT CALLED FROM HELL07

A SCOPE 2 job requiring terminal I/O was
not submitted through HELL07.

Resubmit the job through
HELL07.

HELL07

SUBSYSTEM ABORTED.

Your job was connected (either long term
connection or wait response set) to a
subsystem which aborted.

Retry later.

1AJ

SYSTEM ABORT.

Possible causes include the following.
- Incorrect USER command.
- Attempt to access a restricted subsystem.
- Operator evicted job.
- Unrecognizable error flag.
- SSJ= block outside field length.
- 1RI detected a bad rollout file.
- 1R0 detected an unrecoverable extended
memory parity error during rollout of a
job's extended memory field length.

If the cause was an
incorrect USER command
or an attempt to access
a restricted subsystem,
correct the job and
rerun. Otherwise,
inform a site analyst.

1AJ

SYSTEM CHECKPOINT ABORT.

A subsystem has aborted due to a CHECK
POINT SYSTEM request initiated by the
operator.

SYSTEM ERROR.

A software or hardware system error
occurred. This message follows a
more specific message in the
d a y fi l e .

SYSTEM ERROR.

The command is not recognized by the system. Retry command.

IAFEX

SYSTEM ERROR.

LFM cannot complete the requested LFM
function because the calling program has a
DMP= entry point.

Inform site analyst
or write a PSR and
include support
material so that
CDC can duplicate
the problem.

BLANK
RESEX

SYSTEM ERROR.

Requested function cannot be completed
because the calling program has a DMP=
entry point.

Contact Central Software
Support.

LFM

SYSTEM ERROR - NOTIFY SITE ANALYST.

An internal software error has occurred.

Write a PSR and include
support materials to
allow CDC to duplicate
the problem.

DROP
QGET

SYSTEM FULL.

System table is full; no new logins are
being accepted at this time.

Wait a few minutes and
try to login again.

IAF

SYSTEM PROCEDURE ACCESS ERROR.

Informative message indicating that the
system prologue did not execute.

Inform site analyst.

CHARGE

SYSTEM PROLOGUE NOT FOUND.

A system prologue was defined but could not
be accessed.

Inform site analyst.

CHARGE.

SYSTEM SECTOR ERROR.

The system sector of an indirect access
permanent file contains an error (error log
and dayfile message). This indicates that
the file has been destroyed.

Inform site analyst. If
many of these errors
occur, the site analyst
should perform a full
PFDUMP, total INITIALIZE,
and full PFLOAD on the
device.

SYSTEM SOFTWARE RERUN THRESHOLD EXCEEDED.

The job has been rerun the maximum number of
times due to a software error. The maximum
is n-1, where the default for n is 2
(defined by MSER in common deck COMSMSC).

Analyze the job output,
dumps, and listings to
determine cause.

1AJ

The job field length is too small to hold
the tables for processing the GTR command.

Increase field length
and rerun job.

GTR

TABLE OVERFLOW.

B-68

1CK

Refer to action for
the associated
message.

MODVAL
PFM

,***5V

60459680 H

MESSAGE

r

r

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

TAPE BLANK LABELED.

Dayfile message indicating that the blank
label operation successfully completed.

None.

BLANK

TAPE BLOCK DEFINITION ERROR.

You attempted to define data block size via
the FC or C keyword or noise block size via
the NS keyword in such a manner that the
system is unable to correctly define the
size of the data block. The omission of
the FC or C parameter on a command where it
is required also causes this message to be
issued.

Ensure accuracy of
command.

RESEX

TAPE CLEANER FAULT, filename AT address.

Recovery from the tape CLEANER FAULT error
failed and TERMINATE,est. was entered; or,
the tape is not assigned to a job and the
tape cleaner failed to return to the parked
or stowed position after a tape load
operation or a high speed rewind operation.
Magnet will automatically unload the tape
and turn off the drive.

Mount the tape on a
different tape drive.

1MT

TAPE FORMAT PROBABLY WRONG.

This message is issued in addition to one
of the following messages:
- BLOCK SEQUENCE ERROR, filename AT addr.
- BLOCK TOO LARGE, filename AT addr.
- WRONG PARITY, filename AT addr.

Ensure accuracy of
format (F) parameter on
command or macro.

1MT

TAPE FUNC REJ function.

Tape drive rejected the attempted
function. Printed on the preceding line is
the name of the current program or command
b u f f e r.

Press the space bar to
retry the function.

CTI

TAPE READ/WRITE ERROR (BLANK).

The BLANK label operation was unable to
complete successfully.

Retry with the same tape
or use a different tape.

BLANK

TCS INCORRECT REQUEST.

The translate commands (TCS) program was
called with an incorrect function code.

Correct the call to TCS
and retry.

1AJ

pfn TEMPORARY ERROR, TRY LATER.

The system has detected a temporary
problem which prevents it from staging
your file (pfn) from permanent storage.

Wait a few minutes and
tr y to a tta c h th e fi l e
again.

TERMINAL BUSY.

You attempted to send a message to a
terminal which was receiving output or had
an input request outstanding. The message
was lost.

Retry operation at a
later time.

IAFEX

TERMINAL INTERRUPT.

RECLAIM processing was terminated due to a
terminal user break.

None.

RECLAIM

TERMINAL NOT ACTIVE.

You attempted to send a message to an
inactive terminal.

None.

IAFEX

TERMINAL TIME OUT - JSN=aaaa.

The terminal has been logged off after no
input was received in the
installation-defined timeout period.

Attempt recovery or log
in again.

IAFEX

TERMINAL TIMEOUT IN nn SECONDS.

No input was received for several minutes.
The system will log you out after nn
seconds if no input is entered.

Enter CR to prevent
logout.

IAFEX

THE STATION IS NOT LOGGED INTO SCOPE 2

The SCOPE 2 station is not active.

Reenter the command
later when the station
is executing.

QUEUE7

THIS CONNECTION IS ALREADY LOANED.

This error indicates an abnormal condition
is occuring in IAF.

Inform site analyst.

TLX

TIME LIMIT.

The execution time limit for a job step
expired resulting in job termination.

If a time limit was set
for the job, include a
SETTL command requesting
a longer time limit for
the job step. If the
job step time limit was
the maximum for which
you are validated,
request a larger time
limit or decrease the
amount of processing to
be performed by the job
step.

1AJ

•TIME LIMIT*
ENTER T TO CONTINUE OR STOP TO END JOB STEP.
TYPED AHEAD INPUT MUST 8E REENTERED.

The system detected that the time limit for
the job step has expired.

To continue, reset time
limit with T,nnnnn
command or enter T alone
to set time limit to an
i n s t a l l a t i o n - d e fi n e d
default.

IAFEX

60459680 H

B-69

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

TIME LIMIT.

The job has reached its CPU time limit.

Increase your job's time RECLAIM
limit.

TIMEOUT.

The user has not responded to a login
prompt whithin the system-specified time
interval (usually about 2 minutes) and the
terminal was disconnected.

Respond more quickly to NVF
prompts.

TL NOT VALIDATED.

The time limit requested exceeds that for
which you are authorized.

Request smaller time
limit.

CPM

TLX - RPV ALREADY SET.

Your program tried to set extended reprieve
when it was already set.

None.

TLX

TN MUST BE SPECIFIED.

A COMPACT, DUMP, or REMOVE directive was
entered without a TN option specification.

Correct the directive
and retry.

RECLAIM

TN OR DN MUST BE SPECIFIED.

A RECLAIM operation was attempted which
required a dump file name or tape number,
but neither was specified.

Retry after specifying
the file name or tape
number.

RECLAIM

TOO MANY ARGUMENTS.

The number of arguments on the command
exceeds that allowed by the program.

Reformat the command
with an allowable number
of arguments.

SUBMIT
TCS

TOO MANY ARGUMENTS.

The number of arguments in the command
exceeds GOB.

Check format of command
and reduce the argument
count.

1AJ

TOO MANY FILES

You have attempted to route a second file
to SCOPE 2 when you already have a file
routed to SCOPE 2.

Wait until the first job
completes before
submitting another job.

HELL07

TOO MANY LI8RARY NAMES SPECIFIED.

The number of libraries specified on the
LIBRARY command exceeds the maximum of 24.
The current global library set remains in
effect.

Correct the command.

LIBRARY

TOO MANY PARAMETERS.

More parameters were entered (including
null parameters) than are allowed for
command.

Ensure accuracy of entry.

GTR
IAFEX
NOTE

TOO MANY PERMANENT FILES.

The number of files in your catalog exceeds
your limit.

Purge one or more
permanent files to
allow you to
save or define
a d d i t i o n a l fi l e s .

PFM

TOO MANY USER LIBRARIES SPECIFIED.

The number of user libraries specified
exceeds the number allowed based on the
number of system libraries specified. The
current global library set remains in
effect.

Correct the command.

LIBRARY

TOO MANY 7000 JOBS...SUBMIT LATER

The SCOPE 2 limit for the number of
concurrent connected jobs has been
reached. The system will continue to
reject the SUBMIT directive until the
connected job count is reduced.

Retry later.

HELL07

TOO MUCH INDIRECT ACCESS FILE SPACE.

The cumulative size of the indirect access
files in your catalog exceeds your limit.

Purge or shorten
one or more indirect
access files to
allow additional
permanent file space.

PFM

TOO SMALL BUFFER SPACE

I n t e r n a l e r r o r.

Submit a PSR with
information on how
to duplicate the
problem.

IEDIT

TOTAL ASSIGNED COUNT ERROR.

System error (sum of individual resource
assigned counts differs from total assigned
count in demand file entry).

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or

RESEX

TOTAL DEMAND COUNT ERROR.

System error (sum of individual resource
demand counts differs from total demand
count in demand file entry).

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or
contact Central Software
support.

^^*\

B-70

60459680 H

/§ssfey

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

TRACK LIMIT.

No allocatable tracks remain on your
permanent file equipment (error log and
dayfile message).

None; job will con
tinue as tracks
become available.
If problem persists,
contact Central
Software Support.

PFM

TRACK LIMIT, LVLX.

1MS is waiting for temporary file mass
storage space on any mass storage device
with access level LVLX.

Inform site analyst.

1NS

TRAILER BLOCK COUNT ERROR, filename AT
address.

The block count in the E0F1 or EOV1 label
did not match the block count maintained by
the tape executive during the read
operation.

Inform site analyst.

1HT

TRMDEF COMPLETE.

The TRMDEF command was processed with no
errors.

None.

TRMDEF ERRORS.

Errors were found in the TRMDEF command.
Additional error messages are listed at the
terminal or, if the L parameter was
included, on the output file specified by L.

Correct error and retry.

TRMDEF

TRMDEF REQUIRES JOB TO BE ON-LINE

A TRMDEF command was issued while the job
-was detached. This caused the job to be
suspended. When the job is recovered, this
message is issued and the command processed.

None.

TRMDEF

TTest, ASSIGNED TO filename, VSN=vsn.

The specified file name is assigned to the
tape volume with the specified VSN that is
mounted on tape drive TTest (the
seven-track (MT) or a nine-track (NT) tape
unit with EST ordinal est).

Informative message.
Processing of the tape
file can begin.

T76 RETURNED UNKNOWN ERROR OF nn

A system error has occurred between NOS and
the SCOPE 2 station, nn is a two-digit
error code meaningful to the site analyst.

Reenter the command. If
the same message is
returned, inform the
site analyst.

QUEUE7

UNABLE TO DROP JOB.

You attempted to drop the job associated
with your terminal. It is not possible.

If you want to drop
another one of your
jobs, use ENQUIRE,JSN to
ascertain their job
names.

DROP

UNABLE TO PROCESS TERMINAL FILE.

The file you specified in a SECHDR command
is currently assigned to a terminal.

Assign the file to an
appropriate device and
reenter the command.

SECHDR

UNABLE TO READ IQFT FILE.

An attempt to initialize inactive queues
failed because the IQFT file could not be
read.

Retry operation.

INS
NSI

UNABLE TO RECOVER YOUR JOB

The SCOPE 2 job was either in execution and
could not be rerun, or, due to certain file
functions performed prior to the recovery
mode, was not recoverable.

None.

HELL07

UNDEFINED ORIGIN TYPE

Origin type mnemonic specified is undefined.

Correct origin type and
r e t r y.

CLASS

UNDEFINED SERVICE CLASS.

You specified an undefined service class
value for the SC parameter on the CLASS
command.

Correct the SC parameter
value and resubmit.

CLASS

UNIDENTIFIED PROGRAM FORMAT.

The file you requested to be loaded was ir
an unrecognizable format.

Check the format of the 1AJ
fi l e .

UNIT HAS MOTION PROBLEMS.

The tape unit cannot properly write the
tape. The dayfile message STATUS ERROR, filename AT address precedes this message
and specifies the file (filename) and the
address.

Resubmit your job, using 1MT
a different tape unit or
inform site analyst.

UNIT HUNG UP ON EOP OR BUSY, filename AT
address.

Unit did not receive EOP on unit busy.

Inform site analyst.

UNIT PROBLEMS.

Unit check bit is set in detailed status
(67x units only). The dayfile message
STATUS ERROR, filename AT address precedes
this message and specifies the file
(filename) and the address.

Try another unit or
inform site analyst.

UNKNOWN ACCESS CATEGORY NAME.

You specified an undefined access category
name on a SETPFAC command.

Reenter the command with
the correct access
category name(s).

>!^^5v

60459680 H

1MT

B-71

|

MESSAGE
UNKNOWN ACCESS LEVEL NAME.

SIGNIFICANCE
The job specified an undefined access
level name.

ACTION

ROUTINE

Reenter the command with
the correct access level
name.

MLSEXEC

MSI
PFS
RESEX
PFILES

UNKNOWN CODE ccc, FILE filename, RECORD
recordnumber, LINE linenumber.

Character code ccc is not a valid character
code in the character code set specified by
PC=cs1 in the FCOPY command.
filename
File that contains the
code.
recordnumber
Record that contains the
code.
linenumber
Line that contains the
code.

Correct file and retry.

FCOPY

UNKNOWN DEVICE TYPE - filename.

File filename was specified as either the
old file or the correction file and is not
a mass storage file.

Choose an old file and a
c o r r e c t i o n fi l e t h a t
reside on mass storage.

LIBEDIT

UNKNOWN OPTION - x.

You specified an undefined option in a
SECHDR command.
x undefined option specified.

Reenter the command with
correct option.

UNKNOWN SECONDARY APPLICATION.

On an APPSW command, you specified a
secondary application that does not exist.

Correctly specify a
secondary application.

TLX

UNLABELED TAPE REQUIRED - filename.

An S tape used for E, B, or X tape
conversion must be unlabeled.

Use unlabeled tape.

COPYB

UNNECESSARY CIO FCT. nnn ON filename AT
address.

The read or write CIO function specified by
nnn was unnecessary, since your I/O buffer
was already full (read) or empty (write)
and no data could be transferred for this
CIO call. The message is issued to the job
dayfile only if analyst logging is enabled
on the system (console entry).

Ignore or correct
program to be more
e f fi c i e n t .

1MS

UNRECOGNIZABLE TYPE SPECIFIED.

The type of the source file was not valid.

Check type of source
fi l e .

L072

UNRECOGNIZED BACKSPACE CODE.

The specified backspace code was not 0, 1,
2, or 3.

Refer to the COPYB
coramand description,
correct the error, and
r e t r y.

COPYB

UNRECOGNIZED CODE SET PARAMETER.

Parameters PC=cs1 and NC=cs2 specify an
unsupported conversion.

Verify conversion and
r e t r y.

FCOPY

UNRECOGNIZED TERMINAL MODEL.

You entered an invalid terminal model
mnemonic as a parameter in the SCREEN
or LINE command.

Retry with valid
mnemonic.

CONTROL

UNRECOGNIZED TERMINATION CONDITION.

The specified termination record count or
record type was not recognized.

Refer to the COPYB
command description,
correct the error, and
r e t r y.

COPYB

UNRECOVERABLE ERROR ON filename.

An unrecoverable error such as wrong
parity, density change, or ready drop was
detected on the input file.

Either the tape was bad
or the tape drive is
malfunctioning.

COPYB

UNRECOVERED MASS STORAGE ERROR.

A command or overlay calls a system library
program. During the load, an unrecoverable
read error occurred.

Inform site analyst.

1AJ

UNSUPPORTED VALUE ON - xx.

The value of the attribute is recognized
but not supported by TRMDEF.
xx Attribute mnemonic.

None.

TRMDEF

UNTERMINATED PROCEDURE CALL.

A BEGIN or name call to an interactive
procedure did not have a terminator. One
or more parameters may be incorrect or
omitted.

Check parameters displayed
on screen and verify or
correct before proceeding.

CCL

UNUSUAL END-OF-FILE ENCOUNTERED.

GTR detected an EOF mark not preceded by an
EOR mark.

Dump file to determine
fi l e f o r m a t e r r o r.

GTR

UPDATED - type/name

The record with type and name on the old
file was replaced with the matching record
from the replacement file.

None.

COPYL
COPYLM

UPROC COMPLETE.

The prolog you specified in the UPROC
command has been successfully assigned to
your user name.

None.

MODVAL

**** USE *FILINFO* IN PLACE OF *PRM* CALL

You used a *PRM* call to obtain file
permission data.

Use a *FILINF0* call to
obtain the desired
information.

B-72

/"*^>>.

60459680 H

MESSAGE

/gP5\

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

**** USE *FILINFO* IN PLACE OF *STS* CALL

You used a *STS* call to obtain file
allocation data.

Use *FILINF0* calls to
obtain the desired data.

SFP

USE SCOPY FOR FILE STRUCTURE.

You entered R parameter on the LIST
command. The function of the LIST,R
command has been replaced by the SCOPY
command.

Enter SC0PY,fn. for file
structure information.

IAFEX

USER ACCESS NOT POSSIBLE - CONTACT
NETWORK ADMIN.

Either the application rejected the
connection, or the security count was
exhausted, or an invalid application
name was specified in the local
configuration file (LCF).

Contact the network
administrator.

USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

You tried to perform an operation for which
you are not authorized. Possible causes
include attempts to access a file or
equipment which you are not authorized to
access.

Ensure accuracy of
command or determine
proper validation
requirements via LIMITS
command.

USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

You tried to perform an operation for which
you are not authorized. Possible causes
include attempts to
- Run a system origin job from nonsystem
origin.
- Access a restricted subsystem without
proper validation.
- Use the V carriage control character
without validation.

Ensure accuracy of
command or macro, or
determine proper
validation requirements
via LIMITS command.

DSD
EXUBUT
EXCSLV
MSI
QFSP
RESEX
1MA
IAFEX

USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

The user name or password could not be
validated, or a secondary USER command was
encountered while secondary USER commands
were disabled.

Verify that user name
and password are valid.
If secondary USER
commands are disabled,
ensure that no secondary
USER commands are
present.

CPM

USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

You attempted to use RECOVER in a
noninteractive job.

Initiate an interactive
job to use RECOVER.

RECOVER

USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

You made an unauthorized call to a utility
reserved for system origin privileged users.

Ensure that you have
system origin privileges
before using this
u t i l i t y.

FOTD
SUBSYST

USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

The SRU or time limit request is outside of
your validated range.

Retry with a lower value.

CONTROL

USER ACCESS NOT VALID.

One of the following:
You are not authorized to create
direct access or indirect access
fi l e s .
You are not authorized to access
auxiliary devices.
Your job made a CATLIST request for
permit information on a file that
has a higher access level than that
of your job.

Contact your site
administration about
obtaining the necessary
validations. For
CATLIST request,
resubmit the request
after raising your job's
access level.

PFM

USER BREAK TWO ENCOUNTERED.

Informative message.

None.

1AJ

USER CANNOT SWITCH FROM SECONDARY
APPLICATION.

You attempted to enter an APPSW command
from a secondary application.

To return to your
primary application, log
out of your secondary
application. If you
wish to switch to a
third application, you
can enter another APPSW
command from your
primary application.

TLX

USER COMMAND HAS NOT BEEN EXECUTED.

A SUBMIT cUSER directive could not be
processed because your job had not
processed a USER command before calling
SUBMIT.

Enter a valid USER
command, then retry
SUBMIT.

SUBMIT

USER DAYFILE PROCESSED.

The job's dayfile dump is complete.

USER DIRECTIVE INCORRECT.

You did not furnish the accounting data
needed to process the job.

Check file and add a
USER command.

SUBMIT

USER LIBRARY NOT FOUND.

The requested entry point is in the
directory file, but the associated user
library is not present.

Regenerate the user
l i b r a r y.

1AJ

USER LIBRARY NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

The requested entry point is in the
directory file, but the associated user
library is not on mass storage.

Assign the user library
to a mass storage device.

1AJ

60459680 H

DAYFILE

B-73

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

USER NOT VALIDATED FOR DETACHED SERVICE
CLASS.

User is not validated for detached service
class (DI).

Have site administrator
validate user for
detached service class
if appropriate.

IAFEX

USER NOT VALIDATED FOR INTERACTIVE SERVICE
CLASS.

User is not validated for interactive
service class (TS).

Have site administrator
validate user for
interactive service
class if appropriate.

IAFEX

USER NOT VALIDATED FOR SECONDARY
APPLICATION.

You submitted an APPSW command specifying
an application for which you are not
validated.

To check your current
validations, enter a
LIMITS command. If you
require validation for
additional applications,
see your site
administration.

TLX

USER PROLOGUE NOT FOUND.

Although a user prologue was defined,
it could not be accessed.

Delete the prologue
definition or create a
p r o l o g u e fi l e .

CHARGE

USER RETRY LIMIT.

Four unsuccessful attempts at login were
made after which the terminal was
disconnected from the system.

Obtain accurate login
information before
attempting to log in.
Inform site analyst if
problem persists.

NETVAL

USER SECURITY COUNT EXHAUSTED.

The security count for the user name
specified has been decremented to zero.
You are denied all access to the operating
system until the operator resets your
security count.

Contact site personnel
to reestablish access.

CPM

USER VALIDATION LIMIT EXCEEDED.

A validation limit has been reached for a
job step or account block. The Limit is
either a time limit or an SRU limit.

If appropriate, have
site administrator
increase validation
limits.

IAFEX

VALIDATION FILE BUSY - TRY AGAIN LATER

The validation routine (MODVAL) was unable
to access the validation file to perform
the requested UPROC, PASSWOR, or CHVAL
operation.

Try again later.

MODVAL

cmd VALUE INAPPROPRIATE

The value you specified in the terminal
definition command cmd is not appropriate
for your terminal.

Choose an appropriate
value (refer to appendix
J).

CCP

VE ENTRY REQUIRED.

A level 0 deadstart is required to add or
change a CMRDECK VE entry.

Level 0 deadstart is
required.

REC

VERIFY ARGUMENT ERROR.

One or more of the parameters specified in
a VERIFY was not recognized.

Compare the parameters
specified with the
command description.

VERIFY ERRORS.

Verification errors were encountered during
comparison of date/records/files.

Check output file for
errors.

VERIFY

VERIFY FILE NAME CONFLICT - filename.

Either you tried to process two files
having the same name or you specified a
reserved file name.

Correct the command so
all files have a unique
name.

VERIFY

VERIFY FL ABOVE USER LIMIT.

Field length for L or F tape verify exceeds
your current maximum.

Use MFL to increase
maximum field length or
reduce block size on L
or F tapes.

VERIFY GOOD.

Verify completed with no errors found.

None.

VERIFY

VSN FILE ERROR.

System error (VSN file entry does not match
j o b i d e n t i fi c a t i o n ) .

Reenter the command or
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or
contact Centrat Software
Support.

RESEX

WAIT

The system is waiting for system resources
to become available.

None.

IAFEX

The network is unable to accept any further
data from your terminal. Data that was
entered is discarded. This is normally a
temporary situation caused by buffer
shortages in the host or the network.

Wait for the REPEAT,
message.

CCP

B-74

60459680 H

/£<3Sy

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

pfn WAITING ALTERNATE STORAGE EXEC.

The file must be staged from alternate
storage to disk and the alternate storage
executive is not currently available to
perform the stage operation.

Wa i t f o r e x e c u t i v e t o b e P F M
started or inform site
operator that the
alternate storage
executive should be
initialized.

WAITING FOR DATABASE NON-BUSY.

The specified database is busy (for
example, it may be attached in write mode
to another job). RECLAIM continues to
attempt to attach the file at ten second
intervals until the file becomes available
or you interrupt RECLAIM.

W a i t f o r t h e s p e c i fi e d R E C L A I M
database to become
available or terminate
RECLAIM processing.

WAITING FOR MAGNET.

The job is waiting for the magnetic tape
subsystem to be activated.

Wa i t f o r t h e o p e r a t o r t o R E S E
activate MAGNET or
terminate job.

WAITING FOR NFL.

Informative message stating that your job
has been delayed and/or rolled out
waiting for NFL space. The job has not
been aborted; it will eventually continue.
The message is visible via ENQUIRE.

None.

WAITING FOR PN=packname, type.

The job is waiting for the operator to
mount pack packname on device type type.

Wait until the operator RESEX
mounts the requested
pack or terminate job.

WAITING FOR RESOURCE FILE.

The job is waiting for the resource demand
file or VSN file to become available.

W a i t u n t i l r e s o u r c e fi l e R E S E X
becomes available or
terminate job. To
operator: If job is n o t
rolled out and this
message persists, inform
site analyst or drop the
job. If the operator
decides to override an
interrupted job at this
point, the preview data
in the demand file is
not cleared and the E,P
display continues to
show the VSN request
associated with the job
until you log off or
issue a subsequent
request for tape or pack.

WAITING FOR RESOURCES.

The job is waiting for sufficient resources
to allow assignment of the tape/pack
without causing a system deadlock.

Wa i t u n t i l t h e r e s o u r c e s R E S E X
become available or
terminate job.

WAITING FOR SERVICE CLASS TO CHANGE TO x.

Service class x has reached its service
limit, and job is waiting for a place in it.

None.

CLASS

WAITING FOR STORAGE.

Issued to DSD B and J displays. BIO is
waiting to increase its field length or for
a buffer to become available.

None.

11 0

WAITING FOR STORAGE (ECS).

The job is waiting for additional extended
memory to become available.

Wait for additional
storage or terminate job.

1MA

WAITING FOR STORAGE (EM).

The job is waiting for additional central
memory to be made available.

Wait for additional
storage or terminate job.

IMA

WAITING FOR VALIDATION FILE.

The job is waiting for the validation file
to become available to process a UPROC,
PASSWOR or CHVAL command.

Try

WAITING FOR VSN= vsn, type.

The job is waiting
mount the tape with
specified type (MT,
SCRATCH indicates
acceptable.

Wa i t f o r t h e o p e r a t o r t o R E S E X
mount the tape or
terminate the job.

WAITING - INACCESSIBLE DEVICE.

Your job has been rolled out waiting for an
inaccessible mass storage device. The
device is off, down, or is encountering
hardware errors.

Inform

WAITING ON TRACK LIMIT.

The job is waiting for additional tracks on
the familyname device containing the
resource demand and VSN files.

Wait for the additional RESEX
tracks or terminate job.

WAITING - SERVICE LIMIT.

The job has reached a service limit for
central memory or extended memory field
length.

D e t a c h t h e j o b f o r l a t e r 1 TA
processing or abort the
job step.

60459680 H

for the operator to
VSN vsn on the
HD, PE, or GE). VSN=
that any scratch tape is

PFM

again

site

later.

analyst.

MODV

1RJ

B-75

|

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

WRITE-DOWN OF DATA PROHIBITED.

One of the following:
On an APPEND or REPLACE command or
macro, the access level of the local
file is higher than the access level
of the permanent file.
On a DEFINE command or macro, the
access level of a local file having
the same name as the file specified
has a lower access level than the
job.
- On a CHANGE, PERMIT, or SETPFAC
command or macro, the access level
of the specified permanent file is
lower than that of the job.

Retry using a higher
access level for the
permanent file (APPEND
or REPLACE), or change
the job's access level
and then retry (DEFINE,
CHANGE, PERMIT, or
SETPFAC).

PFM

WRITE ID BURST FAILURE, filename AT address.

The tape driver is unable to correctly
write the PE (1600 cpi) or GE (6250 cpi)
identification tracks or the automatic
read amplitude (ARA) burst at load point.

Load the tape on another
drive or use a different
tape.

1MT

WRITE ON READ-ONLY FILE filename AT address.

Either you attempted to write on a file
with write lock-out, or the direct access
file was not attached in write mode.

Reattach file in write
mode or clear write
interlock.

1MS
IAFEX

WRITE OVER LABEL ILLEGAL.

You attempted to write over the V0L1 label.

Have the operator blank
label the tape.

1MT

WRITE TAPE MARK ERROR.

The tape subsystem was unable to write a
tape mark on the tape being written,
probably as a result of a bad tape.

Replace tape and try
again. If problem
persists, try another
tape drive. If problem
still occurs, inform
site analyst.

1MT

An error occurred after six attempts to
write a tape mark and read it back.

Clean the tape drive or use
a cleaned or new tape.

1MT

The tape was positioned properly, but
the current block cannot be read
because of a triple track error.

Clean the tape drive or use
a cleaned or new tape.

1MT

WRONG PARITY, filename AT address.

A seven-track tape is being read in
opposite parity from which it was written.

Ensure accuracy of
format parameter (F> on
command or macro.

1MT

XD/XT EXCEEDS MAXIMUM.

The XD parameter for a password or file
permission is more than the maximum number
of days past the current date, or the XT
parameter is larger than the maximum
allowed.

Correct XD or XT
parameter and retry.

PFM

XL BUFFER/FET PARAMETER ERROR, filename
AT address.

One of the following:
- HDR1 label in extended label buffer or
FET contains a nonnumeric display code
value in a numeric field.
- Character count in header word preceding
labels in the extended label buffer does
not equal 80.

Correct condition that
caused error and retry.

1MT

YOUR PASSWORD WILL BE EXPIRED yy/mm/dd.

Ypu should change your password prior to
this date. If you donot change your
password prior to this date, you will
not be able to login.

Contact site personnel
if you are not familiar
with your site policy
regarding passwords.

CHARGE

ZZZZZLD NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

The directory file ZZZZZLD does not reside
on mass storage.

Assign the directory
file to mass storage.

1AJ

200 BPI WRITE INCORRECT.

The tape unit (667 or 677) cannot record
data at 200 bpi.

Specify a different tape
d e n s i t y.

1MT

7000 EXITING

Indicates normal completion of a SCOPE 2
job step.

None.

HELL07

7000 JOB EARLY ABORT

A submitted job aborted before it was able
to connect to the terminal.

Check the job's dayfile
for an error indication.

HELL07

7000 JOB ERROR - ERROR=xxx

The SCOPE 2 connected job encountered error
condition xxx, as described in the Record
Manager section of the SCOPE 2 Diagnostic
Handbook.

Refer to the SCOPE 2
Diagnostic Handbook.

HELL07

address.
I WRITE
TAPE MARK FAILURE, filename AT
I WRITE VERIFY FAILURE, filename AT address.

B-76

60459680 H

0 ^

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

USER NOT VALIDATED FOR DETACHED SERVICE
CLASS.

User is not validated for detached service
class (DI).

Have site administrator IAFEX
validate user for
detached service class
if appropriate.

USER NOT VALIDATED FOR INTERACTIVE SERVICE
CLASS.

User is not validated for interactive
service class (TS).

Have site administrator IAFEX
validate user for
interactive service
class if appropriate.

USER NOT VALIDATED FOR SECONDARY
APPLICATION.

You submitted an APPSW command specifying
an application for which you are not
validated.

To c h e c k y o u r c u r r e n t T L X
validations, enter a
LIMITS command. If you
require validation for
additional applications,
see your site
administration.

USER RETRY LIMIT.

Four unsuccessful attempts at login were
made after which the terminal was
disconnected from the system.

O b t a i n a c c u r a t e l o g i n N E T VA L
information before
attempting to log in.
Inform site analyst if
problem persists.

USER SECURITY COUNT EXHAUSTED.

The security count for the user name
specified has been decremented to zero.
You are denied all access to the operating
system until the operator resets your
security count.

Contact site personnel CPM
to reestablish access.

USER VALIDATION DENIED.

The job calling CVL is not valid to do so.
Either the job must be system origin, or
the user must have system origin
privileges. Sumbit the job when the system
is in engineering mode. In addition, the
user must be validated to run on-line
diagnostics.

Insure the user is valid CVL
to run on-line
diagnostics. If so,
submit the job from the
console, or if the user
has system origin
privileges, set
engineering mode (Refer
to ENABLE command in
Analysis Handbook).

VALIDATION FILE BUSY - TRY AGAIN LATER

The validation routine (MODVAL) was unable
to access the validation file to perform
the requested UPROC, PASSWOR, or CHVAL
operation.

Try

cmd VALUE INAPPROPRIATE

The value you specified in the terminal
definition command cmd is not appropriate
for your terminal.

Choose an appropriate CCP
value (refer to appendix
J).

VERIFY ARGUMENT ERROR.

One or more of the parameters specified in
a VERIFY was not recognized.

Compare the parameters VERIFY
specified with the
command description.

VERIFY ERRORS.

Verification errors were encountered during
comparison of date/records/files.

C h e c k o u t p u t fi l e f o r V E R I F Y
errors.

VERIFY FILE NAME CONFLICT - filename.

Either you tried to process two files
having the same name or you specified a
reserved file name.

Correct the command so VERIFY
all files have a unique
name.

VERIFY FL ABOVE USER LIMIT.

Field length for L or F tape verify exceeds
your current maximum.

Use MFL to increase VERIFY
maximum field length or
reduce block size on L
or F tapes.

VERIFY GOOD.

again

later.

M O D VA L

Verify completed with no errors found.

None.

VSN FILE ERROR.

System error (VSN file entry does not match
j o b i d e n t i fi c a t i o n ) .

Reenter the command or RESEX
rerun the job. If the
problem recurs, inform
your site analyst or
contact Central Software
Support.

VERIFY

WAIT

The system is waiting for system resources
to become available.

None.

WAIT..

The network is unable to accept any further
data from your terminal. Data that was
entered is discarded. This is normally a
temporary situation caused by buffer
shortages in the host or the network.

W a i t f o r t h e R E P E A T. . C C P
message.

IAFEX

(

60459680 F

B-77

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

pfn WAITING ALTERNATE STORAGE EXEC.

The file must be staged from alternate
storage to disk and the alternate storage
executive is not currently available to
perform the stage operation.

Wa i t f o r e x e c u t i v e t o b e P F M
started or inform site
-operator that the
alternate storage
executive should be
ilitialized.

WAITING FOR MAGNET.

The job is waiting for the magnetic tape
subsystem to be activated.

Wa i t f o r t h e o p e r a t o r t o R E S E X
activate MAGNET or
terminate job.

WAITING FOR NFL.

Informative message stating that your job
has been delayed and/or rolled out
waiting for NFL space. The job has not
been aborted; it will eventually continue.
The message is visible via ENQUIRE.

None.

WAITING FOR PN=packname, type.

The job is waiting for the operator to
mount pack packname on device type type.

Wait until the operator RESEX
mounts the requested
pack or terminate job.

WAITING FOR RESOURCE FILE.

The job is waiting for the resource demand
file or VSN file to become available.

W a i t u n t i l r e s o u r c e fi l e R E S E X
becomes available or
terminate job. To
operator: If job is not
rolled out and this
message persists, inform
site analyst or drop the
job. If the operator
decides to override an
interrupted job at this
point, the preview data
in the demand file is
not cleared and the E,P
display continues to
show the VSN request
associated with the job
until you log off or
issue a subsequent
request for tape or pack.

WAITING FOR RESOURCES.

The job is waiting for sufficient resources
to allow assignment of the tape/pack
without causing a system deadlock.

Wa i t u n t i l t h e r e s o u r c e s R E S E X
become available or
terminate job.

WAITING FOR SERVICE CLASS TO CHANGE TO x.

Service class x has reached its service
limit, and job is waiting for a place in it.

None.

CLASS

WAITING FOR STORAGE.

Issued to DSD B and J displays. BIO is
waiting to increase its field length or for
a buffer to become available.

None.

11 0

WAITING FOR STORAGE (ECS).

The job is waiting for additional extended
memory to become available.

Wait for additional
storage or terminate job.

1MA

WAITING FOR STORAGE (EM).

The job is waiting for additional central
memory to be made available.

Wait for additional
storage or terminate job.

1MA

WAITING FOR VALIDATION FILE.

The job is waiting for the validation file
to become available to process a UPROC,
PASSWOR or CHVAL command.

Try

WAITING FOR VSN= vsn, type.

The job is waiting
mount the tape with
specified type (MT,
SCRATCH indicates
acceptable.

Wa i t f o r t h e o p e r a t o r t o R E S E X
mount the tape or
terminate the job.

WAITING - INACCESSIBLE DEVICE.

Your job has been rolled out waiting for an
inaccessible mass storage device. The
device is off, down, or is encountering
hardware errors.

Inform

WAITING ON TRACK LIMIT.

The job is waiting for additional tracks on
the familyname device containing the
resource demand and VSN files.

Wait for the additional RESEX
tracks or terminate job.

for the operator to
VSN vsn on the
HD, PE, or GE). VSN=
that any scratch tape is

PFM

again

site

later.

M O D VA L

analyst.

1RJ

■/tfS^\

B-78

60459680 F

MESSAGE

SIGNIFICANCE

ACTION

ROUTINE

WRITE-DOWN OF DATA PROHIBITED.

One of the following:
On an APPEND or REPLACE command or
macro, the access level of the local
file is higher than the access level
of the permanent file.
On a DEFINE command or macro, the
access level of a local file having
the same name as the file specified
has a lower access level than the
job.
- On a CHANGE, PERMIT, or SETPFAC
command or macro, the access level
of the specified permanent file is
lower than that of the job.

Retry using a higher
access level for the
permanent file (APPEND
or REPLACE), or change
the job's access level
and then retry (DEFINE,
CHANGE, PERMIT, or
SETPFAC).

PFM

WRITE ON READ-ONLY FILE filename AT address.

Either you attempted to write on a file
with write lock-out, or the direct access
file was not attached in write mode.

Reattach file in write
mode or clear write
interlock.

1MS
IAFEX

WRITE OVER LABEL ILLEGAL.

You attempted to write over the VOL1 label.

Have the operator blank
label the tape.

1MT

WRITE TAPE MARK ERROR.

The tape subsystem was unable to write a
tape mark on the tape being written,
probably as a result of a had tape.

Replace tape and try
again. If problem
persists, try another
tape drive. If problem
still occurs, inform
site analyst.

1MT

WRONG PARITY, filename AT address.

A seven-track tape is being read in
opposite parity from which it was written.

Ensure accuracy of
format parameter (F) on
command or macro.

1MT

XD/XT EXCEEDS MAXIMUM.

The XD parameter for a password or file
permission is more than the maximum number
of days past the current date, or the XT
parameter is larger than the maximum
allowed.

Correct XD or XT
parameter and retry.

XL BUFFER/FET PARAMETER ERROR, filename
AT address.

One of the following:
- HDR1 label in extended label buffer or
FET contains a nonnumeric display code
value in a numeric field.
- Character count in header word preceding
labels in the extended label buffer does
not equal 80.

Correct condition that
caused error and retry.

1MT

ZZZZZLD NOT ON MASS STORAGE.

The directory file ZZZZZLD does not reside
on mass storage.

Assign the directory
file to mass storage.

1AJ

200 BPI WRITE INCORRECT.

The tape unit (667 or 677) cannot record
data at 200 bpi.

Specify a different tape
d e n s i t y.

1MT

7000 EXITING

Indicates normal completion of a SCOPE 2
job step.

7000 JOB EARLY ABORT

A submitted job aborted before it was able
to connect to the terminal.

Check the job's dayfile
for an error indication.

HELL07

7000 JOB ERROR - ERROR=xxx

The SCOPE 2 connected job encountered error
condition xxx, as described in the Record
Manager section of the SCOPE 2 Diagnostic
Handbook.

Refer to the SCOPE 2
Diagnostic Handbook.

HELL07

/$&&\

HELL07

/ fff ^ y
60459680 F

B-79

GLOSSARY

Abort
To terminate a program, job or job step
when an error condition (hardware or
software) exists from which the program
or computer cannot recover.
Access Category
Refer to File Access Category, Job
Access Category Set, and System Access
Category Set.
Access Level
A property of each file, job, and equip
ment on a secured system that is used to
indicate the sensitivity of information
i n t h e fi l e o r j o b , o r t h e s e n s i t i v i t y o f
information that can be processed by the
equipment. On a secured system, there
are up to eight access levels correspond
i n g t o i n c r e a s i n g l e v e l s o f s e n s i t i v i t y.
You are authorized to access some or all
of those levels. Refer also to Equipment
Access Levels, File Access Level, Job
Access Level, and System Access Levels.
Access Level Limits
Refer to Job Access Level Limits.
Account Block
That portion of a session from login to
logoff or entry of a CHARGE command
which signals a new account block.

Application
A program resident in a host computer
that provides an information storage,
retrieval, or processing service to a
remote user via the data communication
network. IAF is an example of an
application.
Application Switching
The process of leaving the control of one
application and entering the control of
another, without going through another
complete login sequence.
Argument
Refer to Parameter.
ASCII

American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange. The standard
character set and code used for informa
tion interchange between systems.
Auxiliary Device
Mass storage permanent file device used
to supplement storage provided by the
normal permanent file devices associated
with the system (refer to Family Device),

Allocatable Device
A storage device allocated by the system
w i t h o u t o p e r a t o r i n t e r v e n t ion that can
be shared by more than one job.

BASIC

1.

Beginner's Ail-Purpose Symbolic
Instruction Code, an elementary
programming language.

2.

The subsystem that uses the BASIC
c o m p i l e r.

Alphanumeric
Consisting of alphabetic or numeric
c h a r a c t e r s o n l y.

0^>\

60459680 C

C-l

Beginning-of-Information (BOI)
A file boundary that marks the beginning
of a file. You can reference the BOI by
name. For a labeled tape file on a
single volume, the HDRl represents BOI.
I f t h e fi l e i s a m u l t i v o l u m e ( m u l t i r e e l )
tape file, BOI is the HDRl label of the
fi r s t v o l u m e . I f t h e t a p e fi l e i s a n
ANSI multifile file, BOI is the HDRl
associated with the beginning of the
m u l t i fi l e .

Bit
An abbreviation of binary digit. It is a
single digit, 0 or 1, in a binary number.
Also used to represent the smallest unit
of information. A central memory word
(one storage location) contains 60 bits.
Block
Blocking is the grouping of user records
for efficiency in transfer between memory
and storage devices. For magnetic tapes,
it is the information between interrecord
gaps.

BOI

Checkpoint
The process of writing to a magnetic tape
or mass storage file a copy of your job's
central memory, the system information
used for job control, and the names and
contents of all assigned files that are
identified in a CHECKPT request.
Checkpoint File
File on which the results of a partially
completed job are dumped when a check
point request is processed.
Command
A sequence of words and characters that
call a system routine to perform a job
step. The command must conform to format
specifications. You can usually place a
comment after the command terminator.
Command Record
The first, and possibly only, record of
a job file consisting of command images
that start with the Job command and end
with the first EOR, EOF, or EOI. Also
refers to a procedure containing
commands.

Refer to Beginning-of-Information,
Compile

bpi
An abbreviation for bits per inch.
Refer to fci.

Byte
A group of 12 bits. Five bytes comprise
a 60-bit central memory word. Bytes are
numbered 0 to 4 from the left.

Catalog
The list of names of permanent files be
longing to a particular user name; this
list also contains information about the
p e r m a n e n t fi l e s .
Character

To translate a program from a higher
level programming language (for example,
FORTRAN or BASIC) into machine instruc
tions called object code.
Control Character
1. A terminal-dependent character that
is a part of interactive status
commands and terminal definition
commands. It gives these commands a
preemptive status so that they are
processed immediately.
2. A character whose occurrence within
a fi l e q u e u e d f o r p r i n t i n g , a f f e c t s
carriage control. Examples are the
carriage return and line feed
characters.
Control Point

Any alphabetic, numeric, or special
symbol that can be encoded. This term
applies to the graphic characters for an
input or output device, and to uniquely
encoded control characters used by a
terminal.

The portion of central memory that
assigned to a job. When a job is
cated a portion of central memory,
becomes eligible for assignment to
central processor for execution.

is
allo
it
the
>*^s\

C-2

60459680 G

Control Statement

Default

Refer to Command.

A system supplied option used when you do
not supply the option.

Control Statement Record
Refer to Command Record,

Detached Job
An interactive origin job that you have
dissociated from your terminal by using
the DETACH command. It continues to
execute under system control. You can
reattach an executing detached job with
the RECOVER command.

cpi
Characters per inch. A measure of
d e n s i t y.
CYBER Loader
The utility that prepares programs for
execution by placing program instruction
and data blocks in central memory.
CYBER Record Manager (CRM)

0S^>\

c

A software product that allows a variety
of record types, blocking types, and file
organizations to be created and accessed.
Products like COBOL 5, FORTRAN Extended
4, FORTRAN 5, Sort/Merge 4, Sort/Merge 5,
ALGOL 5, and DMS 170 use CRM to manage
execution time input/output. Neither the
input/output of the operating system nor
that of most of the system utilities such
as COPY or SKIPF is implemented through
CYBER Record Manager. All CYBER Record
Manager file processing requests ulti
mately pass through the operating system
input/output routines.

Device
Peripheral equipment.
Direct Access File
A NOS permanent mass storage file that
can be attached to the your job. All
changes to this file are made on the file
itself rather than a temporary copy of
the file (compare with Indirect Access
File).
Directive
An instruction subordinate to a system
command.
Display Code
A 6-bit character code set used to repre
sent alphanumeric and special characters.

D a y fi l e
A c h r o n o l o g i c a l fi l e c r e a t e d d u r i n g j o b
execution which forms a permanent
accounting and job history record. Dayfile messages are generated by operator
action or, with some exceptions, when
commands are processed. A copy of the
d a y fi l e i s p r i n t e d w i t h t h e o u t p u t f o r
each job. You must explicitly request
it in an interactive job.

Disposition Code
A two-character mnemonic that indicates
the manner in which the system is to
dispose of a queued file. The DC=dc
parameter of the LDI, QGET, ROUTE,
SETJOB, and SUBMIT commands specify a
disposition code.
EBCDIC

Deadstart
The process of initializing the system
by loading the operating system library
programs and any of the product set from
magnetic tape or disk. Deadstart re
covery is reinitialization after system ■
failure.

Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange
Code. An 8-bit code which represents a
set of 256 characters.

ECS
Extended Core Storage.
Memory.

Refer to Extended

jiPn
60459680 G

C-3

Empty PRU/Record

EOR
Refer to End-Of-Record.

A PRU that contains no user data. Refer
also to Zero-Length PRU.
End-Of-File (EOF)
A boundary within a sequential file, but
not necessarily the end of a file that
can be referenced by name. The actual
end of a named file is defined by EOI.
For labeled tape, EOF and EOI (denoted
by the E0F1 label) are the same. For
multifile tape files, EOF and EOI do not
correspond. In the product set manuals,
an end-of-file is also referred to as an
end-of-partition.
End-Of-Information (EOI)
The end of data on a file. Information
appearing after this point is not
c o n s i d e r e d p a r t o f fi l e d a t a . I n c a r d
decks, a card with a 6/7/8/9 multiple
punch in column one. On mass storage
devices, the position of the last written
data. On labeled tape, it is the E0F1
label. CYBER Record Manager defines.endo f - i n f o r m a t i o n i n t e r m s o f fi l e r e s i d e n c y
and organization.

EOT
Refer to End-Of-Tape.

Epilogue
A program that executes at the end of
your job or, in the case of a project
epilogue, at the end of an account block.
Equipment Access Levels
A range of access levels specified for
each equipment on a secured system. In
order for a file to be stored or output
on a given equipment, the file's access
level must be within the equipment
access levels for the defined equipment.
Error Flag

/^^P^\

A character or bit that signals the
occurrence or presence of an error.

End-Of-Record (EOR)
EST Ordinal
An indicator that marks the end of a
logical record. Also referred to as
end-of-section.
End-Of-Tape (EOT)
A reflective strip near the end of a
magnetic tape. It is used to signal
termination of operations on a particular
tape volume. At least 5.5 meters (18
feet) of tape must follow this marker.
Entry Point
A location within a program or procedure
that can be referenced from other pro
grams. Each entry point has a unique
name with which it is associated.

EOF
Refer to End-Of-File.

EOI

| C-4

The number designating the position of an
entry within the equipment status table
(EST) established at each installation.
Devices are identified in operator com
mands by EST ordinals. The EST ordinal
is sometimes referred to as equipment
number.

Exchange Package
A table that contains information used
during job execution. It is printed as
part of the output when a job aborts.
Executable Object Code
Machine language instructions that can be
executed directly by the machine. A com
piled program is composed of executable
object code.
Extended Core Storage (ECS)

Refer to End-Of-Information.

/r*fiS«SV

Refer to Extended Memory.
60459680 G

Jpw*N

Extended Instruction Stack Purging
Extended instruction stack purging
applies to models 825, 835, and 855 only.
It causes the instruction lookahead regi
sters to be purged under a wider range of
conditions than normal. Under normal
conditions, the lookahead registers for
models 825, 835, and 855 are purged by
the execution of a return jump instruc
tion (010), UEM read instruction (Oil),
exchange jump instruction (013), or
unconditional branch instruction (02).
Under extended instruction stack purging,
these registers are also purged by the
execution of any conditional jump
instruction (03 through 07) or any
central memory store instruction (50
through 57 with i = 6 or 7). The
instructions that cause instruction
stack purging vary from model to model
for other computer systems (refer to the
hardware reference manual for the indi
vidual computer system).
Extended Memory
O p t i o n a l a d d i t i o n a l m e m o r y. Va r i o u s l y
called extended core storage (ECS),
extended semiconductor memory (ESM),
unified extended memory (UEM), large
central memory (LCM), and large central
memory extended (LCME), depending on the
model of the computer system. Extended
memory contains 60-bit words. It has a
large amount of storage and fast transfer
rates. Extended memory can be used only
for program and data storage, not for
program instructions. Special hardware
instructions exist for transferring data
between central memory and extended
memory.
Family Device
Mass storage permanent file device asso
c i a t e d w i t h a s p e c i fi c s y s t e m . A f a m i l y
may consist of 1 to 63 logical devices.
Normally, a system runs with one family
of permanent file devices available.
However, additional families may be
introduced during normal operation. This
enables users associated with the addi
tional families to access their permanent
fi l e s v i a t h e a l t e r n a t e f a m i l y.

60459680 G

Family Name
The name that is associated with a group
of permanent file devices.

fci
Flux changes per inch. A measure of
density used with magnetic tapes. Each
flux change records two bits of
information (per track); 3200 fci
encodes 6400 bits of information. If
you subtract 150 bits for error
checking, 3200 fci is equal to 6250 cpi
(assuming 1 bpi per track translates
into 1 cpi per frame).

FET
Refer to File Environment Table.
Field Length (FL)
The central memory and extended memory
assigned an executing job.
File
1. A set of information that begins at
beginning-of-information (BOI), ends
at end-of-information (EOI), and is
referenced by a local file name.
2 . T h a t p o r t i o n o f a m u l t i fi l e fi l e
terminated by an end-of-file (EOF).
3. Data recorded on a magnetic tape
beginning after an HDRl label and
ending before an E0F1 label.
NOS commands requiring a parameter that
i s a fi l e n a m e r e f e r t o d e fi n i t i o n 1 .
Commands requiring a parameter that
s p e c i fi e s t h e n u m b e r o f fi l e s r e f e r t o
d e fi n i t i o n 2 . D e fi n i t i o n 3 a p p l i e s o n l y
to labeled magnetic tapes.
File Access Category
A property of a permanent file used by
the creator of the file on a secured
s y s t e m t o r e s t r i c t a c c e s s o f t h e fi l e t o
a particular group of users. A secured
system supports up to 32 access categor
ies, and you are authorized to use some,
all, or none of those categories. Refer
also to Job Access Category Set and
System Access Category Set.

C-5

File Access Level
A property of each file on a secured
system used to indicate the sensitivity
o f i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a i n e d o n t h e fi l e . A
file is assigned the current job access
level by default when it is created or
stored; the file creator may specify any
a c c e s s l e v e l f o r t h a t fi l e t h a t i s
within the set of access levels valid
f o r t h e j o b , t h e s y s t e m , t h e fi l e
c r e a t o r, a n d ( f o r i n t e r a c t i v e j o b s ) t h e
communication line to the host
mainframe. If you access a file on a
secured system, you must be validated
f o r t h e a c c e s s l e v e l o f t h e fi l e . R e f e r
also to Access Level, Job Access Level,
and Job Access Level Limits.
File Environment Table (FET)
A table within a program's field length
through which the program communicates
with operating system input/output
routines. One FET exists for each file
in use by the program.
File Information Table (FTT)
A table through which a user program
communicates with CYBER Record Manager.
For direct processing through CRM, you
must initiate establishment of this
t a b l e . A l l fi l e p r o c e s s i n g e x e c u t e s o n
the basis of information in this table.
You can set FIT fields directly or use
parameters in a file access call that
s e t s t h e fi e l d s i n d i r e c t l y. S o m e p r o d u c t
set members set the fields automatically.
File Set
One or more tape files referred to by
the set identifier on a tape assignment
command or macro. A file set may consist
of:
1. One file recorded on a single volume.
2. More than one file recorded on a
single volume.
3. One file recorded on more than one
volume.
4. More than one file recorded on more
than one volume.
All files within a file set have the same
s e t i d e n t i fi e r i n t h e i r H D R l l a b e l s .
C-6

FIT
Refer to File Information Table.
Flag
A character or bit that signals the
occurrence or presence of a particular
condition.
FNT
Refer to Local File Name Table.
FORTRAN

1 . F o r m u l a Tr a n s l a t i o n , a h i g h - l e v e l
language consisting of symbols and
statements that can be used to
create a program closely resembling
mathematical notation.
2. The subsystem that uses the FORTRAN
Version 5 compiler.
Frame
A tape recording unit made up of one bit
from each tape track (7 bits for 7-track
tape and 9 bits for 9-track tape) . Each
frame on a coded tape usually represents
one character.

Generation
The position of a file within a series
of files, each file developed from the
preceding file. The generation number
and generation version number of a tape
file can be entered in its HDRl label.
Global Library Set
A set of user libraries you specify on
the LIBRARY command. The system condi
tionally searches these libraries when
it attempts to process a command.
Graphic
A character that can be printed or
d i s p l a y e d . R e f e r t o C o n t r o l C h a r a c t e r.

lb st
A computer that executes an application.
60459680 C

0^\

IAF
R e f e r t o I n t e r a c t i v e F a c i l i t y.
Indirect Access File
A NOS permanent file that you access by
making a temporary copy of the file (GET
or OLD command). You create or alter it
by saving or substituting the contents
of an existing temporary file (REPLACE
or SAVE command).
Input File Type
The file type the system assigns to file
INPUT. Its first record is a command
record which may be followed by records
containing data, directives, or programs
used by job steps.
Instruction Stack Purging
The process of clearing the instruction
s t a c k i n t h e c e n t r a l p r o c e s s o r. I t
affects the speed and accuracy of the
c e n t r a l p r o c e s s o r.
Interactive Facility (IAF)
An application that provides a terminal
operator with interactive processing
c a p a b i l i t y. T h e i n t e r a c t i v e f a c i l i t y
makes terminal input/output and file
input/output appear the same to an
executing program.
Interrecord Gap
Space skipped between the writing of data
blocks on magnetic tape.
Interruption Sequence

detach a job during the session. After
a job detachment, the terminal session
becomes a new job.
Job Access Category Set
On a secured system, a set of access
categories is set when the job is
initiated. This set is the intersection
of your set of validated access
categories and the system access
category set. Refer also to File Access
Category and System Access Category Set.
Job Access Level
On a secured system, each job has an
access level. This is the default
a c c e s s l e v e l t h a t i s a s s i g n e d t o fi l e s
that are created or stored in the job.
A job's initial access level is the
lower access level limit for the job.
The job's access level is automatically
raised to the access level of any file
from which information is read. You can
also change the job access level. Refer
also to Job Access Level Limits.
Job Access Level Limits
An upper limit and a lower limit that
determine the range of access levels
that are valid for a particular job on a
s e c u r e d s y s t e m . A l l fi l e s u s e d i n a
given job must have an access level
within the job's access level limits.
Job Sequence Name (JSN)
The unique, system-defined name assigned
to every executing job or queued file.
The JSN is a string of four alphabetic
characters.

The character or sequence of characters
that causes an executing program to be
interrupted (also called the user break
1).

Job Step

A set of commands and the data and
directives used by those commands. A
batch job must begin with the Job and
USER commands. An interactive job is
all activity associated with a terminal
session from login to logout unless you

Label

Job

60459680 C

An individual command, procedure or
loader sequence. A group of job steps
forms a job stream, command record, or
p r o c e d u r e fi l e .

A block at the beginning or end of a
magnetic tape volume or file, which
serves to identify or delimit that
v o l u m e o r fi l e .

C-7

Level Number
An octal number (0, 1, or 17) in the
terminating marker of a PRU. A level
number of 17 designates an EOF. A level
number of 0 designates an EOR. A level
number of 1 designates that the line of
data is from a terminal and is not an
empty line.
Library

1. A collection of programs or routines.
2. A file containing records that are
accessed individually.
3. A file searched by CYBER Loader for
entry points referenced by a program.
4. A file containing compressed records
in Modify or Update format.
Library File
A read-only file that can be accessed by
several users simultaneously or a file
you specify on a LIBRARY command.
LID

Local File Name
The file name assigned to a file while it
is local (assigned) to a job. The name
is contained in the local file name
table.
Local File Name Table (FNT)
A system-managed table that contains the
local file name, the file type, and other
job control information.
Locked File
A file on which you cannot write.
Logical Device
One or more physical disk units known to
the system as a single device.
Logical Identifier (LID)
A three-character, alphanumeric string
used to identify a particular mainframe
in a loosely coupled network. LIDs are
identified by your site.
Logical Record

R e f e r t o L o g i c a l I d e n t i fi e r.

Line
A unit of data terminated by a zero-byte
terminator. Unit used in interactive
input/output, line printer output, and
card reader input.
Line Mode
A mode of job interaction in which the
basic unit of interaction is a line of
data. Contrast with Screen Mode.
Load Point
Metallic strip marking the beginning of
the recordable portion of a magnetic
tape. Data, including labels, is written
after the load point.

A data grouping that consists of zero or
more PRUs and ends with a short PRU or a
zero-length PRU.
Login
The procedure used at an interactive
terminal to gain access to the system.
Logout
The procedure used to end a terminal
session.
Loosely Coupled Network (LCN)
A network of physically connected
computer systems. The LCN environment
allows jobs, data files, and messages to
be transmitted from one computer system
to another.

Local File
Macro

Any file that is currently associated
with a job. Local files include all
temporary files and attached direct
access files.
C-8

A sequence of source statements that are
saved and then assembled whenever needed
through a macro call.
60459680 C

/ffiSsv

Mass Storage
Magnetic disk or extended memory that
can be accessed randomly as well as
s e q u e n t i a l l y.
Master Device
Mass storage device that contains your
p e r m a n e n t fi l e c a t a l o g e n t r i e s ; a l l y o u r
i n d i r e c t a c c e s s fi l e s ; a n d a l l , p a r t , o r
none of your direct access files.
M u l t i fi l e F i l e
A file containing more than one logical
file. It begins at BOI and ends at EOI.
O n a l a b e l e d t a p e , a m u l t i fi l e fi l e i s
delimited by corresponding HDRl and E0F1
labels.
M u l t i fi l e S e t
A tape file set having more than one
t a p e fi l e .
Network
A data and message switching and routing
system used to provide communication
between terminals, applications, and
mainframes.
Network Operator (NOP)
The network operator manages the communi
cations elements of the network. Network
operator functions may be performed at
the system console, or at a remote
terminal.
Noise
Any tape block less than the minimum
acceptable block size for its data
format. Noise is discarded by the
system.
Nonallocatable Device
A device (such as a magnetic tape unit,
card reader, card punch, or line printer)
which can be used only by one job at a
time.

60459680 D

Object Code
Executable machine language instructions.
An object code program need not be
recompiled each time it is executed.
Order-Dependent
Used to describe items which must appear
i n a s p e c i fi c o r d e r.
Order-Independent
Used to describe items which need not
appear in any specific order. Param
eters, particularly those with keywords,
may be order-independent.
Origin Type
A job attribute that indicates how a job
entered the system. The four origin
types are interactive origin, batch
origin, remote batch origin, and system
origin.
Packet-Switching Network (PSN)
A system that provides data communication
service between different terminals and
computer systems. The PSN is usually
licensed as a common carrier. GTE
Telenet is an example of a PSN.
Subscribers use a protocol defined by a
standards body such as CCITT to interface
with a PSN. The packet assembly/
disassembly (PAD) access defines the
terminal interface. The X.25 protocol
defines the PSN interface with NOS.
Panel
A formatted screen defined
p a n e l d e fi n i t i o n u t i l i t y .
application program uses a
display data or to request
the terminal.

using the
An
panel to
user input at

Parameter
A value that follows a command name or
function name and that alters the
behavior of the command or function.

C-9

yrS^.

Parity

Physical Record Unit (PRU)

In writing data, an extra bit is either
set or cleared in each byte so that every
byte has either an odd number of set bits
(odd parity) or an even number of set
bits (even parity). Parity is checked
on a read for error detection and
possible recovery.

The amount of information transmitted by
a single physical operation of a speci
fied device. For mass storage files, a
PRU is 64 central memory words (640 char
acters); for magnetic tape files, the
size of the PRU depends upon the tape
format. A PRU that is not full of user
data is called a short PRU; a PRU that
has a level terminator but no user data
is called a zero-length PRU.

Passive Procedure
A procedure that does not have the
p a r a m e t e r - p r o m p t i n g c a p a b i l i t y. I f t h e
call to the procedure contains errors,
the job step terminates and the procedure
is not executed.

Password
1. A system access word that must be
used in addition to the user name at
log in.
2 . A fi l e a c c e s s w o r d t h a t c o n t r o l s
a c c e s s t o a p a r t i c u l a r fi l e b y
alternate users.

Post Radix
A letter following a numeral that
indicates the base numbering system.

PP
Refer to Peripheral Processor.
Prefix Character
A ch a ra cte r th a t h a s a sp e ci a l si g n i fi
cance to a program or the operating
system and is used in front of a string
of characters.

Peripheral Processor (PP)
The hardware unit within the host com
puter that performs physical input and
output through the computer's data
channels.
Permanent File
A mass storage file that is cataloged by
the system so that its location and
identification are always known to the
system. Permanent files cannot be
destroyed accidentally during normal
system operation. They are protected by
the system from unauthorized access
a c c o r d i n g t o p r i v a c y c o n t r o l s s p e cified
when they are created.
Permanent File Device
Mass storage defined by your site to hold
p e r m a n e n t fi l e s .
Permanent File Family
Permanent files which reside on the
family devices of a specific system.

Primary File
A temporary file created with the OLD,
NEW, LIB (interactive jobs only), or
PRIMARY command. The primary file is
assumed to be the file on which most
system operations are performed unless
a n o t h e r fi l e i s s p e c i fi e d . T h e r e c a n b e
only one primary file associated with
your j ob.
Private Auxiliary Device
Auxiliary device associated with a speci
fic user name. Only that user name may
create files on the device, although
other users may be permitted to access
files which reside on the device.
Procedure
A u s e r - d e fi n e d s e t o f i n s t r u c t i o n s t h a t
can be referenced by name. The
instructions consist of procedure
directives and system commands.
«**SX

C-10

60459680 C

/fl^^N

Procedure File
A file containing one or more procedures,
Project Epilogue
An epilogue that executes any time you
end an account block.
Project Prologue
A prologue that executes any time you
initiate a new account block.

Random Access
Access method by which any record in a
file can be accessed at any time.
Applies only to mass storage files with
an organization other than sequential.
Compare with Sequential Access.
Random Access File
A file whose records are accessed through
a directory containing the address of
each record.

Prologue
A program the system executes any time
you initiate a job (user prologue and
system prologue) or initiate a new
account block (project prologue).
PRU
Refer to Physical Record Unit.
PRU Device
A magnetic tape file or a mass storage
device. Records on these devices are
written in physical record units (PRUs).
PSN

Refer to Packet-Switching Network.
Public Auxiliary Device
Auxiliary device available for access by
all validated users knowing the correct
pack name. Additional validation is
required to create or replace files on
an auxiliary device.
Queue Priority
A number that controls the scheduling of
a job to and from the rollout queue rela
tive to other jobs of the same origin
type.
Queued File

0iffi$\

A file you have submitted for job entry
or a file of job output waiting for
processing. The queued file may have a
print, punch, wait, or input disposition.

60459680 C

Read-Only Permission
If you have read-only permission on a
file, you can read and execute the file.
You cannot write, modify, append, or
purge the file.
Record
A unit of information. In CYBER Record
Manager and its language processors, a
record is a unit of information produced
by a single read or write request. Eight
different record types exist within CRM.
You define the structure and character
istics of records within a file by
declaring a record format.
A NOS record is a second-level subdivi
sion of a file. It is the smallest
subdivision that NOS recognizes. A NOS
record can consist of a group of CRM
records.
Recovery
The process by which you reattach a job
to the terminal. You could have explic
itly detached the job using the DETACH
command or the job could have been de
tached because of a system failure or
terminal disconnection before logout.
You can initiate recovery processing
with the RECOVER command.
Reference Address (RA and RAE)
RA is the absolute central memory address
that is the starting or zero relative
address assigned to a program. Addresses
within the program are relative to RA.

C-ll

/ f fi s ^ y

RA+1 is
between
RAE is
starting

used as the communication word
the user program and the system.
the absolute extended memory
address assigned to a program.

Remote Host
A computer connected to your local host
so as to permit permanent file and queue
file transfers between hosts.
Remote Host Facility (RHF)
An application program that allows you .
to transfer files to and from other
mainframes connected to a loosely
coupled network (LCN).
Rolled Out
The status of an executing job that has
been temporarily removed from central
memory.
Rubout Characters
Characters created by pressing the RUB
OUT key on the terminal. These are con
sidered null input by the system and are
required in paper tape output.
Scheduling Priority
The variable associated with an executing
job that controls the scheduling of the
job for CPU time.
Screen Mode
A mode of job interaction in which the
basic unit of interaction is a screen of
data. Contrast with Line Mode.
Secured System
A system in which a mandatory security
mechanism has been enabled during
deadstart. A secured system protects
information by enforcing restrictions
based on access levels and access
categories, and restricts many sensitive
system functions to security
administrators.

C-12

Security Administrator
A secured system prevents users and
operators from performing certain
functions that could result in the
unauthorized disclosure of information.
These functions can only be performed by
a person who is designated a security
a d m i n i s t r a t o r. A s e c u r i t y a d m i n i s t r a t o r
is always authorized to access the
highest level of information stored on
the system. This person performs
functions in the areas of installation,
user validation, system operation, and
system maintenance.
Security Count
The number of security violations you
have left before you are denied access
to the system.
Security Unlock Status
This status of the system console
applies only to a secured system and
must be set by a security
administrator. The console must be in
security unlock status in order for the
security administrator to perform
certain functions that are restricted on
a secured system.

Sequence Number
1. Number at the beginning of each line
o f a fi l e .
2. For tape labels, number indicating
p o s i t i o n o f a fi l e w i t h i n a fi l e s e t .
Sequential Access
A method in which only the record
l o c a t e d a t t h e c u r r e n t fi l e p o s i t i o n c a n
be accessed. Refer to Random Access.
Sequential (SQ) File
A file in which records are accessed in
the order in which they occur. Any file
can be accessed sequentially.

60459680 F

/./iSSjk

Service Class
A job classification based on a job's
origin type or job's status. It deter
mines how a job is serviced as it flows
through the system.
Short PRU
A PRU that does not contain the maximum
amount of character data allowed for a
PRU. Refer to Zero Length PRU.
Source Code
Code input to the computer for later
translation into executable machine
l a n g u a g e i n s t r u c t i o n s ( o b j e c t code).
Special Editing Mode
A variation of normal input mode (other
than transparent input mode) in which
the cancel input character, backspace
character, and line feed character are
not treated as special characters but
are passed to IAF as input data.

running, you may only use access
categories that are within the set of
system access categories. Refer also to
File Access Category and Job Access
C ategori es.
System Access Levels
On a secured system, a range of access
levels is set during level 0 deadstart.
This range may contain some or all of
the eight possible access levels. While
the system is running, you may only use
access levels that are within the range
of system access levels.
System File
A file that can be accessed only by a
system program.
System Resource Unit (SRU)
A unit of measurement of system usage.
The number of SRUs includes the central
processor time, memory usage, and input/
output resources used for a given job.

SRU
Refer to System Resource Unit.
Standard Labeled Tape
A tape with labels conforming to American
National Standard Magnetic Tape Labels
for Information Interchange X3.27-1969.
Also called a system labeled tape.
String
A sequence of characters.

Tape Format
A p a r a m e t e r t h a t s p e c i fi e s t h e i n t e r n a l
recording format of a magnetic tape.
Tape Mark
A delimiter written on tapes under
operating system control to separate
l a b e l g r o u p s , fi l e s , a n d / o r l a b e l s .
Interpretation depends on the tape
format.
Temporary File

Subsystem Flag
A character or bit that tells the system
that a particular subsystem is associated
w i t h a fi l e .
System Access Category Set
On a secured system, a set of access
categories is set during level 0
deadstart. This set may consist of
some, all, or none of the 32 possible
access categories. While the system is

60459680 C

A file that is assigned to your job and
vanishes once you release it or at job
termination. Local copies of indirect
access permanent files are temporary
fi l e s ; d i r e c t a c c e s s p e r m a n e n t fi l e s
assigned to your job are not temporary
fi l e s .
Terminal Name
A network-supplied name used to identify
the terminal to the network operator.

C-13

Termination Sequence
The character or sequence of characters
that causes an executing program to be
terminated (also called the user break
2).
Time Slice
The amount of CPU or CM time a job is
allowed to use before the system lowers
its priority to allow other jobs to
execute.
Timed/Event Rollout
A condition where an executing job that
has been temporarily removed from central
memory but will be rolled back into
central memory only when a specified
event (such as a file is no longer busy)
or a specified time period has elapsed.
Transparent Input Mode
An input mode in which all characters
entered at the terminal are sent to IAF
as 7-bit codes (or as 8-bit codes, de
pending on the parity) without transla
tion. Normally, characters entered at
the terminal are translated and stored
as 6-bit and/or 12-bit display codes.
This mode is initiated either with the
0006 control byte or with the IN=X,
IN=XK, or IN=XP terminal definition
commands. In former interactive systems
this mode was referred to as binary mode.
Transparent Submit Mode
The mode used in a submit file to
transfer information that contains
reformatting directives without
processing the directives.

User Break 2
Refer to Termination Sequence.
User Index
A number the system assigns each user
name and uses for internal record
keeping.
User Index Hash
A string of four alphabetic characters
derived from your user index that serves
as the default user job name (UJN) for
interactive jobs. It appears on the
banner page/card of all line printer and
card punch output. You can ascertain
your user index hash with the ENQUIRE
command.
User Job Name (UJN)

In general, the user-defined name for an
executing job or queued file. If you
fail to specify a UJN, the system uses
your index hash. The UJN must be a
string of seven or fewer alphanumeric
characters. Unlike the job sequence
name (JSN), the UJN for jobs is not
always unique.
User Name
A one to seven-character name that iden
tifies the user to the system and for
which there is assigned a user index
that allows access to permanent files.
User Number
Refer to User Name.

Unsecured System
A system in which the security mechanism
has not been enabled during deadstart.
The restrictions based on access levels
and access categories are not enforced
on an unsecured system.
User Break 1
Refer to Interruption Sequence.

C-14

Va l i d a t i o n F i l e
File containing validation information
for all users (user names, passwords,
resources allowed, and so on).
Volume
A r e e l o f m a g n e t i c t a p e . A g i v e n fi l e
can be comprised of more than one volume,

60459680 C

Volume Serial Number (VSN)
A o n e - t o s i x - c h a r a c t e r i d e n t i fi e r t h a t
identifies the volume of magnetic tape
to the system.

VSN

In 6-bit display code, two colons create
12 bits of zeros in the 64-character set.
If two consecutive colons occur in a
fi l e t h a t c o n t a i n s z e r o - b y t e t e r m i n a t e d
records, they might be stored in the
lower order portion of a word and create
a z e r o - b y t e t e r m i n a t o r.

Refer to Volume Serial Number.
Word

r

A group of bits (or 6-bit characters) be
tween boundaries imposed by the computer
system. A word is 60 bits in length.
The bits are numbered 59 through 0
starting from the left. It is also
composed of five 12-bit bytes, numbered
0 through 4 from the left.

Zero Byte Terminator
The 12 bits of zero in the low order
position of a central memory word that
are used to terminate a line of coded
information. A record with such a
terminator in CYBER Record Manager is a
zero-byte record (Z type record).

Write Interlock

0S^\

Write interlock ensures that only one
person at a time can attach a direct
a c c e s s fi l e i n w r i t e m o d e . A d i r e c t
a c c e s s fi l e t h a t i s a t t a c h e d i n w r i t e
mode is in write interlock.

Zero Length PRU
A PRU that contains system information,
but no user data. Under NOS, a zerolength PRU defines EOF.

Write Ring
A circular device inserted into a tape
reel indicating to the tape unit that it
can write on that reel. NOS checks for
the presence of a write ring if you
request it.

6/7/8/9 Multipunch
A card with the characters 6, 7, 8, and 9
m u l t i p u n c h e d i n c o l u m n 1 . S i g n i fi e s a
card deck EOI.

XMODEM
XMODEM is the industry standard error
checking communications protocol used to
transfer files to and from microcomputers
and mainframes. Also known as the
Christensen protocol.
Files created interactively at a terminal
and by commands that manipulate coded
lines contain zero-byte terminated
records. The image of cards input
through a card reader also has such a
t e r m i n a t o r.

6/7/9 Multipunch
A card with the characters 6, 7, and 9
m u l t i p u n c h e d i n c o l u m n 1 . S i g n i fi e s a
card deck EOF.

7/8/9 Multipunch
A card with the characters 7, 8, and 9
m u l t i p u n c h e d i n c o l u m n 1 . S i g n i fi e s a
card deck EOR.

0O^^\
60459680 H

C-l 5

0*%

JfP^V

SAMPLE JOB OUTPUT

This appendix lists the output information printed for the sample job shown below. The job
consists of the following commands.

OUTPUT.
USER,STARSKY,HUTCH.
GET,PFL.
ITEMIZE,PFL.
This job generates three pages of output. The first page is the banner page (shown on D-2),
the second is the output generated by ITEMIZE (shown on D-3), and the third is the dayfile
(shown on D-4).

60459680

C

D-l

PRINTED - yy/mm/dd 13.48.33.

OPERATING SYSTEM = NOS 2 crtndate
UJN
OUTPUT
FA M I LY
CREATING JSN - ABNS USER NAME

l l l t U U M
4,4444*44444 4
*
A

JJJJJJJJJJJJ
JJJtJJJJJJJJ
JJ
JJ

A
*
1
1
«AMA4AAAt* A
i«fU>/
Mil 4
4
1
t
A
>
4

JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JJ
JIJJIJJ
JJJJJ

4444444444
44444444444

L
I
I
I
I
L
1
L
L
L
I
I
I
IL
LL
ILLILLLLLLLL
1LLULUllLL

44(41444444
AA4AA4AAAAA

4
4
4

- M AT H J O B O R I G I N - B AT C H .
- STARSKY SERVICE CLASS - BATCH.

4444444444
444444444444
4
A

t t t "9XXXXXX
BX9 sa^tjaqqn
P»
8X
PB

A
4
A
t

fa
Ci
BX
PX
RK
pqcinn^naneBn

44444444444A
44444444444A
A
A
A
A
a
A

P m i « B ? 11 H 9
PX
PR
Pl
9°
nq
PX
Q 9
PX
»S
PX
p,*xxax9xxxxt>
IMMHMH

ox
«x

•JM
NN
NNN
t>'N
NNNN
NN
NN
NM IN
IN
NN
NN
IN
NN
NN
MN
NN
NN
NN
NN
hN
NN
NNNN
NN
NNN
NN
NN
N I
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN
NN

s*

Labels padded to longer than 80 characters and which otherwise meet the ANSI X3.27-1969
standard are not processed by NOS as ANSI labels. Tapes with padded labels can be processed
as unlabeled tapes by using the F, S, or L format (in this case, the label data is read or
written by a user program).
The following is a summary of each label type, name, function, and whether or not it is
required.
Type

/^^*V

No

VOL

Name

Used As

Required/Optional

Volume header label

Beg inning-of-volume

Required

User volume label

Beg inning-of-volume

Optional

File header label

Beginning-of-information

Required

File header label

Beginning-of-information

Optional

UHL

User header label

Beg inning-of-informa tion

Optional

EOF

E n d - o f - fi l e l a b e l

End-of-information

Required

E n d - o f - fi l e l a b e l

End-o f-info rma tion

Optional

UTL

User trailer label

End-of-information

Optional

EOV

End-o f-volume label

End-o f-volume

Required when
appropriate

End-of-volume label

End-o f-volume

Optional

UVL

1-9

HDR
HDR

EOF

EOV

2-9

2-9

2-9

REQUIRED LABELS
The VOL1, HDRl, and E0F1 labels are required on
E0V1 label is required if the physical end-of-tape
l a b e l i s w r i t t e n o r i f a m u l t i fi l e s e t i s c o n t i n u e d
of the contents of these labels, n is any numeric
of the following special characters.

all ANSI-labeled tapes. In addition, an
reflector is encountered before an E0F1
on another volume. In the descriptions
digit and a is any letter, digit, or any

tAny member of the CDC 6-bit subset of the ASCII character set.
60459680 C

G-l

Space

&
/

:

(

;

]

Some fields are optional. An optional field which does not contain the designated
information must contain blanks. Fields which are not described as optional are required
a n d w r i t t e n a s s p e c i fi e d , n - t y p e fi e l d s a r e r i g h t - j u s t i fi e d a n d z e r o - fi l l e d , a n d a - t y p e
fi e l d s a r e l e f t - j u s t i fi e d a n d b l a n k - fi l l e d .

VOL 1—VOLUME HEADER LABEL
The volume header label must be the first label on a labeled tape. All reels begin with a
V0L1 label. If two or more reels belong to a volume set, the file section field in the
following HDRl label gives the actual reel number.

VOL

^/iSSV

volume serial number

va

reserved
reserved
owner
i d e n t i fi c a t i o n

reserved

o w n e r i d e n t i fi c a t i o n ( o i d )

oid

reserved
reserved
reserved

lsl

«*^^y

G-2

60459680 C

Character
Position Field Name

Length
(in Characters)

Contents

Default

Checked on
Read

Checked on
Overwrite

1-3

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

Must be VOL.

Yes

No

4

Label number

Must be 1.

Yes

No

5-10

Volume serial
number

Vo l u m e i d e n t i fi c a t i o n
assigned by owner to
identify this physical
reel of tape. If the
volume serial number
is all blanks, the
tape is a scratch tape.

As read from
existing label

Yes, if the
file was
assigned by
volume serial
number.

No

Accessibility
(va)

An a character which
indicates the restric
tions , If any, on
who may have access
to the information
on the tape. A
blank means un
limited access.
Any other character
means special
handling, in the
manner agreed
between the inter
change parties.
Refer to the
BLANK command.

Blank (un
limited access)

No (refer to
BLANK command.

Yes

No

No

20

12-31

Reserved for
future standard
ization

32-37

Reserved for
future standard
ization

38-51

Owner identi
fi c a t i o n ( o i d )

1A

Any a characters
identifying the
owner of the physical
volume.

52-79

Reserved for
future standard
ization

28

Must be blanks.

80

Label standard
level (lsl)

yfP^V

60459680 C

Must be blanks.

Must be blanks.

A 1 means the labels
and data formats on
this volume conform
to the requirements
of the ANSI standard.
A blank means the
labels and data for
mats on this volume
require the agreement
of the interchange
parties.

No

family
name, user
name

Refer to dis
cussion of fa
field of HDRl.

Yes

No

G-3

HDRl—FIRST FILE HEADER LABEL
The first file header label must appear before each file. When a file is continued on more
than one volume, the file header label is repeated after the volume header label on each new
volume for that file. If two or more files are grouped in a multifile set, each HDRl label
i n d i c a t e s t h e r e l a t i v e p o s i t i o n o f i t s a s s o c i a t e d fi l e w i t h i n t h e s e t .

HDR

fi l e i d e n t i fi e r ( fi )
fi l e i d e n t i fi e r ( fi )

fi
secno

gvn

fi l e s e c t i o n
number (secno)

s e t i d e n t i fi c a t i o n
fi l e
sequence number

^X^WlV

generation number

creation date
expiration
date

fa

gvn

expiration date
block count

system code
system code

G-4

reserved

60459680 C

Character
Position

Field Name

1_3

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

it

Label number

5-21

F i l e i d e n t i fi e r
( fl )

Length
(In Characters)
3

Contents

Default

Must be HDR.

Yes

Must be 1.

17

Up to 17 a chara
used as the file

S e t i d e n t i fi c a t i o n 6

/#^N

28-31

File section
number (secno)

Checked on
Overwrite
No

No
Blank

Checked if
s p e c i fi e d .

No

Up to six a characters
used as the setid
parameter on the
LABEL command. To
conform to the ANSI
tape standard, this
value is the same
f o r a l l fi l e s o f
a m u l t i fi l e s e t .

Blank; an
a p p e n d e d fi l e
is given the
same set iden
t i fi c a t i o n a s
its preceding
fi l e .

Checked If
s p e c i fi e d .

No

Four n characters
i d e n t i f y i n g t h e fi l e
s e c t i o n n u m b e r.
T h e fi l e s e c t i o n
n u m b e r o f t h e fi r s t
H D R l l a b e l o f a fi l e
i s 0 0 0 1 . I f t h e fi l e
extends to more than
one volume, this
number is incre
mented by one for
each subsequent
volume. This value

0001

Checked if
s p e c i fi e d .

No

0001

Checked if
s p e c i fi e d .

t i fl c a t i o n
( fi l e i d )
parameter on the
LABEL command.
22-27

Checked on
Read

corresponds to the
secno parameter on
the LABEL command.
32-35

60459680 C

File sequence
number

Four n characters used
as the seqno parameter
on the LABEL command This parameter speciffi e s t h e p o s i t i o n o f
a fi l e w i t h i n a fi l e
set. This value is
0 0 0 1 f o r t h e fi r s t fi l e ,
0002 for the second,
and so on. In all the
l a b e l s f o r a g i v e n fi l e ,
t h i s fi e l d c o n t a i n s t h e
same number.

G-5

Character
Position

Field Name

Length
(in Characters)

Checked on
Default

Contents

36-39

Generation
number
(optional)

Four n characters
specifying the gen
eration number of a
fi l e . T h i s i s t h e
genno parameter of
the LABEL command.
This value is 0001
f o r t h e fi r s t g e n e r a
t i o n o f a fi l e , 0 0 0 2
for the second, and

0001

40-41

Generation
version
number (grn)

Tw o n c h a r a c t e r s u s e d
to distinguish suc
cessive iterations
of the same genera
tion. The generation
version number of
t h e fi r s t a t t e m p t t o
c r e a t e a fi l e i s 0 0 .
This value corre
sponds to the gvn
parameter of the
LABEL command.

00

42-47

Creation date

D a t e t h e fi l e w a s C u r r e n t
created; it is re
corded as a space
followed by two n
characters for the
year followed by
three n characters
for the day within
t h e y e a r. T h i s v a l u e
corresponds to the
edate parameter of
the LABEL command.

48-53 Expiration date

date

T h e fi l e i s c o n s i d e r e d C u r r e n t d a t e
expired when today's
date Is the same as or
later than the date
g i v e n i n t h i s fi e l d .
When this condition is
s a t i s fi e d , t h e r e m a i n d e r
of the volume may be
overwritten. Thus, to be
e f f e c t i v e o n m u l t i fi l e
volumes, the expiration
d a t e o f a fi l e m u s t b e
earlier than or the same
as the expiration date of

Checked on
Read

Overwrite

Checked if
s p e c i fi e d .

No

Yes

No

Ye s . T h e c r e a
tion date is
meaningful only
on read opera
tions; on write
operations, the
current date is
always used.

Yes

■^®\
G-6

60459680 C

Character
Position

Field Name

Length
(in Characters)

Contents

Default

Checked on
Read

Checked on
Overwrite

Yes, if a
NOS written
tape.

Yes

No

No

all preceding files on
the volume. The ex
piration date is writ
ten in the same format
as the creation date.
It corresponds to the
rdate parameter of the
LABEL command.
54

Accessibility
(fa)

An a character which
indicates the restric
tions, if any, on who
may have access to
the information in
t h i s fi l e . A b l a n k
means unlimited ac
cess. If fa is A,
only the owner of
the NOS written
tape can access the
fi l e . I f f a i s a n y
o t h e r c h a r a c t e r, a l l
future accesses to
the tape must specify
this character as
the fa parameter.

Blank (un
limited access)

File accessibility is
not checked for sys
tem origin jobs.
55-60 Block count

6

Must be zeros.

61-73 System code

13

Thirteen characters
identifying the op
erating system that
r e c o r d e d t h i s fi l e .
The tape is con
sidered to have
been written under
NOS if the first 10
characters match the
default.

74-80

Reserved for
future stan
dardization

Must be spaces.

NOS ver-est
(ver is the
system version
number and est
is the EST ordi
nal of the unit
on which the
fi l e w a s
written).

No

No

z^B>v

60459680 C

G-7

EOF!—FIRST END-OF-FILE LABEL

The end-of-file label is the last block of every file. It is the system end-of-information
for the file. A single tape mark precedes E0F1. A double tape mark written after the E0F1
label marks the end of a multifile set.
EOF

fi l e i d e n t i fi e r ( fi )
fi l e i d e n t i fi e r ( fi )

fi

fi l e s e c t i o n
number (secno)

s e t i d e n t i fi c a t i o n
fi l e
sequence number

secno

generation number

c r e a t i o n d ate

gvn

expiration
date

gvn

expiration date

fa

block count

system code
system code

Character
Position

Field Name

1-3

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

4

Label number

5-54 Same as corre
sponding fields
ih HDRl (optional)

G-8

55-60

Block count

61-80

Same as corre
sponding fields
iii HDRl (optional)

reserved

Length
(in Characters)

50

20

Contents

Default

Checked on
Read

Must be EOV.

Yes

Must be 1.

Yes

Same as the corresponding
fields in HDRl.

Same as HDRl.

Six n characters specifying
the number of data blocks
between this label and the
preceding HDR label group.
This total does not include
labels or tape marks.

Yes

Same as corresponding fields
in HDRl.

Same as HDRl.

60459680 C

ziP^s

EOV1—FIRST END-OF-VOLUME LABEL
T h e e n d - o f - v o l u m e l a b e l i s r e q u i r e d o n l y i f t h e p h y s i c a l e h d - o f - t a p e r e fl e c t o r i s
encountered before an E0F1 label is written or if a multifile set is continued on another
volume. E0V1 is preceded by a single tape mark and followed by a double tape mark.

EOV

1

fi l e i d e n t i fi e r ( fi )
fi l e i d e n t i fi e r ( fi )

fi

fi l e
sequence number

secno

0@&\.

fi l e s e c t i o n
number (secno)

s e t i d e n t i fi c a t i o n

generation number

c r eation date

gvn

expiration
date

gvn

expiration date

fa

block count

system code
system code

Character
Position

J0^\

Field Name

Length
(in Characters)

reserved

Contents

Default

Checked on
Read

1-3.

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

Must be EOF.

Yes

4

Label number

Must be 1.

Yes

5-54

Same as corre
sponding fields
in HDRl (optional)

Same as the corresponding
fields in HDRl.

Same as HDRl.

55-60

Block count

61-80

Same as corre
sponding fields
in HDRl (optional)

60459680 C

50

Six n characters specifying
the number of data blocks
between this label and the
preceding HDR label group.
This total does not include
labels or tape marks.

20

Same as corresponding fields
in HDRl.

Same as HDRl.

G-9

'*^%V

OPTIONAL LABELS
Six types of optional labels are allowed. They are additional file header (HDR2-9),
end-of-file (EOF2-9), user volume (UVLa), header (UHLa), and trailer (UTLa) labels.
HDR2 THROUGH HDR9—ADDITIONAL FILE HEADER LABELS t
HDR2 through HDR9 labels may immediately follow HDRl. Their format is:
Character
Position
1-3

Field Name

Length
(in Characters)

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

Contents

Default
Written

HDR

HDR

2-9

2-9

s^k.

4

Labe
Label
l
number
number

1

5-80

76

Only the label identifier and the label number are checked on read.
EOF2 THROUGH EOF9—ADDITIONAL END-OF-FILE LABELS t
E0F2 through E0F9 labels may immediately follow E0F1. Their format is:
Character
Position

Field Name

1-3

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

4

Label number

Leng th
(in Characters)

Contents

Default
Written

3

EOF

EOF

2-9

2-9

76

5-80

Only the label identifier and the label number are checked on read.
EOV2 THROUGH EOV9—ADDITIONAL END-OF-VOLUME LABELS t
E0V2 through E0V9 labels may immediately follow E0V1. Their format is:
Character
Position

Field Name

Length
(in Characters)

Contents

Default
Written

1-3

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

EOV

EOV

4

Label number

2-9

2-9

5-80

76

tThese are reserved for operating system use. Attempts by user programs to generate them
w i l l p r o d u c e u n d e fi n e d r e s u l t s .

G-10

60459680 C

/P^N

Refer to section 3 in Volume 4, Program Interface, for a description of the use of E0V2
labels in conjunction with CLOSER, REWIND, and UNLOAD macros.

USER LABELS
User labels may immediately follow their associated system labels. Thus, user volume labels
(UVLa) may follow V0L1, user header labels (UHLa) may follow the last HDRn label, and user
trailer labels (UTLa) may follow the last EOVn or EOFn label. Their format is:
Character
Position
1-3

5-80

Field Name

Length
(in Characters)

Contents

Label
i d e n t i fi e r

UVL, UHL, or UTL.

Label number

Must be 1, 2, 3, 4,
and so on, consec
utively for UVL labels.
For other labels, any
a c h a r a c t e r.

User option

76

Default
Written
UVL, UHL,
or UTL.

Any a characters.

Only the label identifier and the label number are checked on read. The system checks the
number of user labels of a label type; a maximum of 64 is allowed.

j^PS.

60459680 C

G-ll

0^\

LINE PRINTER CARRIAGE CONTROL H

A p p e n d i x H p r o v i d e s i n f o r m a t i o n r e q u i r e d t o p r e p a r e fi l e s f o r p r i n t i n g . t T h e i n f o r m a t i o n
includes the following:
• NOS-supported paper lengths.
• Carriage control characters.
• Punched tape channel formats (non-PFC printers only).
/$sB*?\

• PFC, EVFU, and VFU arrays.
For the 5870 Non-Impact Printer, applicable information in this section is contained under
Printed Data below and in table H-l. Note that the Q, R, S, T, and V carriage control
characters are not supported by the 5870 printer. If encountered in a print file, these
characters are ignored.
Default characteristics for the 5870 printer, such as the print font, page length, and print
density are determined by the site. Check with your site administration for this
information.
F o r f u r t h e r i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e f u n c t i o n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e 5 8 7 0 p r i n t e r, r e f e r t o t h e
5870 Site Reference Manual.

PRINTED DATA
All data to be printed is in coded format in a file within the print queue. The data
consists of either 6-bit or 12-bit codes. Data recorded using the 6/12-bit display code set
(refer to appendix A) should be converted to the 7-bit ASCII code set (refer to the FCOPY
command in section 9) before being routed to a line printer.
The system extracts data until an end-of-line occurs or until 137 characters are retrieved.
End-of-line is 12 or more zero bits in the rightmost byte of a central memory word.

PAPER LENGTH

580 LINE PRINTERS
NOS supports two paper lengths for 580 line printers, standard (14 inches x 11 inches) and
short (14 inches x 8 1/2 inches). Files routed to a line printer must be properly formatted
for the paper length used on the specified printer.

TThe information in this appendix does not apply to remote batch line printers.

60459680

H

H_!

When printing on standard paper size, you have the option of specifying a print density of
either 6 or 8 lines per inch. At 6 lines per inch, a maximum of 64 lines per page can be
printed on standard paper. At 8 lines per inch, a maximum of 84 lines per page can be
printed on standard paper.
All output printed on short paper is printed at a density of eight lines per inch. The
carriage control characters used to specify print density (S and T) are ignored. A maximum
of 66 lines can be printed on one page of short paper; overflow lines, if any, are printed
on the following page.
A system default print density is used if you do not specify one for your print file. The
system default is site selectable using the SPD IPRDECK entry; refer to NOS 2 Analysis
Handbook for more information on SPD IPRDECK entry.

533/536 AND 585 PRINTERS
The 533/536 and 585 printers are supported by the Printer Support Utility (PSU). These
printers can accommodate 8 1/2-, 11-, and 12-inch paper sizes. Modifying the EVFU load file
(for 533/536 printers) or the VFU load procedure (for 585 printers) enables these printers
to use other paper sizes. Refer to the NOS 2 Analysis Handbook for more information on PSU,
and the EVFU load file. Refer to the CDCNET Network Configuration and Site Administration
Guide for more information on the VFU load procedure.
Unlike the 580 printers, the 533/536 and 585 printers support both six and eight lines per
inch print densities for short paper output, as specified by the S and T carriage control
characters.

CARRIAGE CONTROL
You can control the format of printer output using the carriage control characters listed in
table H-l and table H-2. The system interprets the first character in a line as the
carriage control character and that character is not printed.t The remainder of the line
is then printed, except when a Q, R, S, T, or V carriage control character is specified.
The Q, R, S, T, and V format controls remain in effect until changed; all other carriage
control characters must be supplied for each line they control.
Line spacing is normally done in auto eject mode; that is, creases in the paper are skipped
by the line printer's automatic line spacing mechanism if the paper is loaded properly.
Auto eject mode must be turned off if you want to select format channels to advance printing
from a position above the bottom of form to a position beyond the next top of form.
The 585 printers support
carriage control characters
585 printers whenever the
cleared. Also, for 533/536
density is changed.

all carriage control characters. The 533/536 printers support all
except V. Note that a page eject is issued to the 533/536 and
print density is changed or when auto page eject is either set or
printers, auto page eject is set to ON whenever the print

The system limits the number of lines you can print from a given file (refer to the LIMITS
command). Your site can further limit the number of lines you can print by establishing a
minimum number of lines per page for which you will be charged. During the printing of each
file, the system maintains a count of the number of lines printed or skipped for the file.
If the number exceeds the limit for which you are validated, printing of the file is
terminated. The informative diagnostic LINE LIMIT EXCEEDED is printed. If a job's dayfile
i s p a r t o f t h e t e r m i n a t e d fi l e , t h e d a y fi l e i s s u b s e q u e n t l y p r i n t e d .
t To print a file in which the first character of each line is not a carriage control
character, refer to the COPYSBF command in section 9.
H"2

60459680

H

Table H-l. Carriage Control Characters for 512/580 and 5870 Printers

Character

512/580
Line
Charge

space
1
0

5870
Line
Charge

Action
Single space.

Page
Size

Eject page before printing.

2

Skip one line before printing (double space).

3

Skip two lines before printing (triple space).

+

1

Suppress carriage advance before printing (overprint).

/

1

Suppress carriage advance after printing (overprint).

2

Page
Size/2T

PM

Skip to last line of form (format channel 12) before printing.
Stop printer and display the rest of the line at the operator
console; used to issue a change forms request or other
i n s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e o p e r a t o r.

Q

0

Clear auto eject;tt remainder of line is not printed.

R

0

Set auto eject; remainder of line is not printed.ttttt

sttt

0

P r i n t 6 lines per inch (remainder of line is not printed) .ttttt

Tttt

0

Print 8 lines per inch (remainder of line is not printed).ttttt

V

Page

Sizet

Eject page before printing on a 580 PFC printer; loads a
u s e r - s p e c i fi e d P F C a r r a y . t t t t t t t t t

8

1

Skip to top of page (format channel 1) before printing.

7

2

Skip two lines (format channel 2) before printing.

6

2

Skip three lines (format channel 3) before printing.

5

3

Skip four lines (format channel 4) before printing.

4

3

S k i p fi v e l i n e s ( f o r m a t c h a n n e l 5 ) b e f o r e p r i n t i n g .

3

4

Skip one page (format channel 6) before printing.

H

1

Skip to top of page (format channel 1) after printing.

G

2

Skip two lines (format channel 2) after printing.

F

2

Skip three lines (format channel 3) after printing.

E

3

Skip four lines (format channel 4) after printing.

D

3

S k i p fi v e l i n e s ( f o r m a t c h a n n e l 5 ) a f t e r p r i n t i n g .

C

4

Skip one page (format channel 6) after printing.

t Page size is 64 lines per page if 6 lines per inch is selected or page size is 85
lines per page if 8 lines per inch selected,
tt When printing at 8 lines per inch, a Q carriage control character also causes a 580
printer to revert to 6 lines per inch (except when short paper is used),
tttNo line feed after printing; for all other control characters, a line feed is issued
after printing. The S and T control characters are ignored when short paper is
specified; short paper output is printed at 8 lines per inch,
ttttYou must be properly validated to use the V carriage control character,
tttttNot supported by the 5870 Non-Impact Printer.
60459680 H

H-3

Table H-2. Carriage Control Characters for 585 Printers (Sheet 1 of 2)

Character

585
Line Charge

space
1
0

Action
Single space.

Page Sizet
2

Eject page before printing.
Skip one line before printing.

3

Skip two lines before printing.

+

0

Suppress carriage return before printing (overprint).

/

0

Suppress carriage return after printing (overprint).

2

tt
ttt

PM

Skip to last line of form (format channel 12) before printing.
Stop printer and display the rest of the line at the operator
console; used to issue a change forms request or other
i n s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e o p e r a t o r.

V

tttt
tttt
tttt
tttt
tttt

8

t

Skip to top of page (format channel 1) before printing.

Q
R
S
T

Clear auto eject; remainder of line is not printed .ttttt
Set auto eject; remainder of line is not printed .ttttt
Print 6 lines per inch; remainder of line is not printed .ttttt.
Print 8 lines per inch; remainder of line is not printed .ttttt
Eject page before printing; loads a user specified vertical
format unit (VFU). ttttt

7

2

Skip two lines (format channel 2) before printing.

6

3

Skip three lines (format channel 3) before printing.

5

4

Skip four lines (format channel 4) before printing.

4

5

Skip five lines (format channel 5) before printing.

3

6

Skip six lines (format channel 6) before printing.

9

7

Skip to format channel 7 before printing.

X

8

Skip to format channel 8 before printing.

Y

9

Skip to format channel 9 before printing.

Z

10

Skip to format channel 10 before printing.

t Number of lines remaining on the page. Page size is 66 if 6 lines per inch is
selected and 88 if 8 lines per inch is selected.
tt Half the number of lines remaining on the page,
ttt Number of lines remaining on the page minus 2. If the number of lines remaining on
the page is less than 2, count page size.
Number of lines according to required paper movement: 0 if format effector is ignored
or discarded; 1 if line is printed with single spacing; number of lines remaining if a
VFU load with page eject is required.
Causes page eject when action is complete. Undefined or unsupported control
c h a r a c t e r s a r e d i s c a r d e d . L i n e s containing control characters redefining an existing
condition are processed with the unsupported format effector action specified by your
site.

H-4

60459680 H

Table H-2. Carriage Control Characters for 585 Printers (Sheet 2 of 2)

Character

585
Line Charge

Action

W

t

Skip to format channel 11 before printing.

U

12

Skip to format channel 12 before printing.

A
H

t
tt
t

G

2

Skip two lines (format channel 2) after printing.

F

Skip three lines (format channel 3) after printing.

C

3
4
5
6

I

7

Skip to format channel 7 after printing.

J

8

Skip to format channel 8 after printing.

K

Skip to format channel 9 after printing.

L

9
10

M

t

Skip to format channel 11 after printing.

N

12

Skip to format channel 12 after printing.

B

E
D

Eject page after printing.
Skip to last line of form after printing.
Skip to top of page (format channel 1) after printing.

Skip four lines (format channel 4) after printing.
S k i p fi v e l i n e s ( f o r m a t c h a n n e l 5 ) a f t e r p r i n t i n g .
Skip six lines (format channel 6) after printing.

Skip to format channel 10 after printing.

tNumber of lines remaining on the page. Page size is 66 if 6 lines per inch is
selected and 88 if 8 lines per inch is selected,
tt Number of lines remaining on the page minus 2. If the number of lines remaining on
the page is less than 2, count page size.
/$pfe\

r

60459680 H

H-4.1

FORMAT CHANNEL SELECTION ON NON-PFC PRINTERS
Non-PFC line printers, other than 533/536 and 585 printers, use a punched tape loop to
control carriage advancement. Figure H-l shows the released tape format for printers using
the standard paper size at 6 lines per inch. Figure H-2 shows the tape format for short
paper printers.
The format tape shown in figure H-l can be ordered as customer engineer's part number
44682683.
Each line, or frame, in the tape format represents one line of printer output. Notice, in
figure H-l, that frames 132 through 134 are identical to frames 0 through 2. To form a
continuous loop, the ends of the tape are fastened together with the first three frames (0
through 2) superimposed over the last three frames (132 through 134). This leaves a tape
loop consisting of 131 frames. The tape format in figure H-l represents two pages of
64-line printer output. The blank lines at frames 64 and 65, and at frames 130 and 131,
represent spaces for the creases between pages.
Each channel controls a specific carriage control operation. Channel 1, for example,
provides for top of page spacing, channel 3 controls triple spacing of lines, and channel 12
spaces to the bottom of the page.
For postprint operations, when the carriage control character in column 1 of a print line
specifies a channel number, the printer checks that format channel, in the current frame,
for a punch. If a punch is found, the printer prints the line. If no punch is found, the
printer advances the punched tape loop (and, at the same time, the printer carriage) until a
punch is found in that channel in a subsequent frame. At that point, the printer prints the
line.
As an example of format channel usage, assume that the printer carriage is positioned at the
second line of a page (frame 1 of the format tape). Also assume that the second output line
contains a carriage control character of 2. The printer checks frame 1 and finds no punch
in channel 12, so it advances to the next frame containing a punch in channel 12. The next
punch occurs in frame 63 (line 64); therefore, the second output line is printed as the last
line on the page.

FORMAT CHANNEL SELECTION ON 533/536 PRINTERS
Format channel selection for 533/536 and 585 printers is defined by the EVFU load file and
the VFU load procedure respectively. Refer to the NOS 2 Analysis Handbook for a description
of the EVFU load file. Refer to the CDCNET Network Configuration and Site Administration
Guide for a description of the VFU load procedure.

H_4'2

60459680

H

/#*N

Frame

Channelq
12

/pf^

11

10

X

X

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

Fram

12

X
X
X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

X

X

X
X

Channels

X
X

X

X
X

11

10

68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134

Figure H-l. Carriage Control Tape Format (Standard Paper Length; 6LPI)
60459680 D

H-5

Frame

12
0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

Frame

Channels

11

10

X
X

X

X

X

X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X

X
X

X

X
X

X

11

10

-5

70

X
X
X
X

Channels

12

8 | 7

X

X
X

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105

ld6

x•

107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138

Figure H-2. Carriage Control Tape Format (Short Paper Length; 8 LPI)

H-6

60459680 D

CARRIAGE CONTROL ARRAYS
Line spacing on a printer is controlled by a carriage control array. This array has the
following forms for the various printers:
• Programmable format control (PFC) array for 580 printers.
• Carriage control tape for non-PFC 580 printers.
• Electronic vertical format unit (EVFU) for 533/536 printers.
• Ve r t i c a l f o r m a t u n i t ( V F U ) f o r 5 8 5 p r i n t e r s .
The selection of an array for any printer is dependent on the print density and the paper
length to be used. You can specify one of several arrays already defined by the system
using the SC parameter on the ROUTE command. These arrays are described in the NOS 2
Analysis Handbook. You can also select a user-specified PFC or VFU array to control print
spacing. You must have validation to use a user-specified PFC array (refer to the LIMITS
command). A user-specified array remains in effect until another array is encountered or
t h e e n d - o f - fi l e i s r e a c h e d . T h e p r i n t d e n s i t y f o r p r i n t e r s u s i n g s t a n d a r d s i z e d p a p e r i s
selected using the S or T carriage control characters. 580 printers using short paper
always use a print density of 8 lines per inch and ignore S and T.
A user-specified array begins with the control character V. When a V is encountered, the
p ri n te r e j e cts th e p a g e . Fo r n o n -PFC 580 printers, the rest of the line is ignored. For
PFC 580 printers, if your are not validated to use the V carriage control character, the
print operation aborts and you receive an appropriate message in your output file.

ARRAY SYNTAX
An array consists of a string of alphanumeric characters that can be used to redefine some
or all of the format channels of the previously specified array. An array for output at 6
lines per inch occupies one line of up to 132 characters plus the terminator for 580
printers, up to 127 characters for 585 printers. An array for 8 lines per inch may occupy
one or two lines. For printing on standard length paper, an array for 8 lines per inch can
consist of up to 176 characters on 580 printers, 127 characters on 585 printers (88 lines
per page). For short paper printers, an array for 8 lines per inch must not exceed 136
characters plus the terminator for 580 printers, 127 characters for 585 printers (68 lines
per page).
Column 1 of an array must contain the carriage control character V. The second character of
the array determines which array is changed and may be one of the following values.
Value

Description

6

6 l i n e s p e r i n c h ; t h e e n t i r e a r r a y s p e c i fi c a t i o n o c c u p i e s o n e l i n e .

8

8 l i n e s p e r i n c h ; t h e e n t i r e a r r a y s p e c i fi c a t i o n o c c u p i e s o n e l i n e .

C

8 lines per inch; the array specification continues onto a second
line. The second line begins in column 3; columns 1 and 2 of the
second line are ignored.

60459680 H

H-7 •

>*^!*V

1-4

60459680

C

JI

NAM/CCP TERMINAL DEFINITION COMMANDS

INTRODUCTION

r

The NAM/CCP network, through which terminals access a host and its applications (like IAF),
can support many types of terminals. All supported terminals are grouped by the network
into 18 standard terminal classes. Each terminal class has specific operating
characteristics, also referred to as terminal characteristics. These terminal
characteristics, taken together, make up a terminal definition and are predefined by the
network to closely match the operating characteristics of actual terminals. The network
accepts changes to any of these terminal definitions through terminal definition commands.
These commands specify one or more parameters, each of which may give a new value to a
t e r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c . Ta b l e s J - l a n d J - 2 l i s t t h e s e t e r m i n a l d e fi n i t i o n s , t h e d e f a u l t
values, and possible values for each of the 18 classes.
The tables use the following abbreviations when identifying the terminal types for each
terminal class:
Abbreviation

Terminal

HASP

Terminals using the Houston Automatic Spooling Program
communication protocol.

HAZ

Hazeltine.

POST

HASP terminals that only support postprint format control.

PRE

HASP terminals that only support preprint format control.

Tek

Te k t r o n i x ( t e l e t y p e w r i t e r e m u l a t i o n ) .

TTY

Te l e t y p e •

UT

User Terminal.

X.25

Terminals connected to a packet switching network (PSN) using the
X.25 communication protocol.

X3.64

Terminals conforming to the ANSI X3.64 standard.

When a terminal logs in to the network, either the network assumes it to be of a certain
terminal class or assigns it a terminal class that resembles the terminal's actual
characteristics. If you do not know the terminal class in use, you can enter the CH command
(described in this appendix) to ascertain the terminal class and some of the characteristics
of your terminal. In either case, if the characteristics of your terminal do not match
those of its assigned terminal class, you can change the values of the terminal
characteristics or even change the terminal class by using the terminal definition commands
described in this appendix. You can enter terminal definition commands any time the
terminal is connected to the network (refer to login/logout procedures in Volume 1,
Introduction to Interactive Usage).

60459680 G

J-l

When you use a terminal definition command to change a value, that change remains in effect
until the terminal is disconnected from the network or another terminal definition command
is used to change the value. Even application switching and logout do not change the values
of the terminal characteristics if the terminal has not been disconnected from the network.
Disconnecting your terminal from the network (that is, disconnecting the phone and redialing
on dial-up terminals or turning a dedicated terminal off and then on again) causes all
t e r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t o b e r e s e t t o s i t e - d e fi n e d d e f a u l t v a l u e s . T h e s i t e d e fi n e s t h e s e
values using the Network Definition Language (NDL).
You can also reset your terminal's characteristics by entering the TC command. The TC
command resets your terminal characteristics to the default values specified by the
Communications Control Program (CCP). Note that CCP-defined values may differ from the
site-defined NDL values.
It is also possible to change terminal definitions using the TRMDEF command or by using
control byte 16 from an interactive job. Section 8 describes the TRMDEF command under
Terminal Definition Commands. Refer to Volume 4, Program Interface, for information on
control bytes.

J-2

60459680

D

/$^\

TERMINAL DEFINITION COMMAND FORMAT
This section describes the general format of a terminal definition command. The specific
format of each command appears later In this appendix.
General formats:
ct keyword=valuet
ct keywordi^valuei ct keyword2=value2...ct keywordn=valuen
Parameter

ct

Description

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined by
the CT terminal definition command. Table J-l gives the default network
control character for your terminal .tt

keyword Represents a mnemonic associated with a terminal characteristic.
v a l u e S p e c i fi e s a p a r t i c u l a r v a l u e a s s o c i a t e d w i t h t h e t e r m i n a l d e fi n i t i o n
mnemonic. Table J-2 gives the range of values for each terminal
definition keyword. On some commands the =value portion of the command
is optional and defaults to =Y.
keyword^. Same as keyword,
value^ Same as value.
The second format allows you to make multiple terminal definitions in one line. If the line
extends beyond character position 54, the results are unpredictable. Also, if you change
the network control character ct in a concatenated group of commands, the CT command does
not take effect until the remaining commands in the group have been processed.
As with all commands described in this manual, you must press the message transmission key
In order for the system to process your command. Appendix K shows the default message
transmission keys for the various terminal classes. This appendix describes how you can
change the message transmission key (refer to the EB and EL commands).
Example:
To change the page width of a 200 User Terminal, enter these characters
%PW=50
and press the SEND key. The % character is the network control character, PW is the keyword
associated with page width, 50 is the new page width for the terminal, and the SEND key is
the message transmission key for a 200 User Terminal.

jtThe spaces shown are for clarity only. Do not include spaces when you enter a terminal
definition command.
ttYou must press the ATTN key on a 2741-compatible terminal before entering this character.

60459680

C

j_3

pj^S^y

RESTRICTIONS
You should not enter terminal definition commands while output is in progress. The network
may not be able to perform such commands immediately.
The network presets all user-adjustable terminal characteristics any time you establish a
connection to the network. The site administrators choose these preset values.
Additionally, when a terminal is disconnected from the network and then reconnected, the
network resets any terminal characteristics you have changed to their preset values.
To enter a terminal definition command at asynchronous terminals from which you can enter
more than one line before transmitting (IN=BK is specified), the terminal definition command
must be the last input line in the transmission. If the input is from paper tape (IN=PT is
specified), the tape reader must stop. Unpredictable results can occur if more input
follows the terminal definition command in the transmission block.
Characters or character codes you specify for the value portion of terminal definition
commands are subject to the following restrictions:
• You cannot use the following ASCII characters (or their character codes) in the
value portion of the AB, CN, BS, Bl, B2, CT, EB, or EL commands:
any lowercase or uppercase alphabetic character
any digit 0 through 9
NUL
SOH
STX
DEL
space

,-^^s

o The ASCII characters or character codes you specify for the AB, BS, Bl, B2, CN, CT,
EB, and EL terminal definitions must all be different, except that AB and CN can
have the same value and EB and EL may have the same value.
• If output flow control is used, do not use DCls and DC3s in the AB, CN, BS, Bl, B2,
CT, EB, or EL commands.

TERMINAL

DEFINITION

COMMANDS

^\

This subsection describes the function and format of each terminal definition command. The
headings consist of the command name (a two-character mnemonic) followed by the terminal
a tt r i b u t e i t d e fi n e s . G e n e r a l l y, t h e f o r m a t d e s c r i p ti o n s d o n o t s h o w th e d e fa u l t v a l u e s o r
ranges of values since they vary with terminal class. Tables J-l and J-2 show this
information. If you are unable to find the key on your keyboard that corresponds to a
particular character given in table J-l, consult the documentation for your terminal.
This section refers to categories of terminal classes to which commands apply. The
categories are as follows:
Category

Te r m i n a l

Classes

Asynchronous 1 through 8
Mode
HASP

4

10,

11 ,

9,

12,

Bisynchronous 16, 17
X.25 PSN 1, 2, 3, 5,

I

3270
J-4

13,

15

14
6,

7,

8

18
60459680

D

(AB) - ABORT OUTPUT BLOCK CHARACTER
The AB command specifies the character used to abort an output block. When you enter this
character from the terminal as the only character in a line, the current transmission block
of output to the terminal is discarded.
Format:
ct AB=ab
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d b y
the CT terminal definition command.
a b S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w a b o r t o u t p u t b l o c k c h a r a c t e r. T h i s c h a r a c t e r m u s t
differ from the characters defined for BS, Bl, B2, CT, EB, and EL.
This command only applies to asynchronous terminals and is not valid for X.25 PSN terminals.

(AR) - AUTOMATIC CHARACTER RECOGNITION

/SjSP^S

The AR command allows you to change the terminal's character set or its line speed, in many
cases, by means of a switch on the terminal or a removable type ball. You can enter this
command any time after the system prompts you for input, even before you enter your user
name during login.
Format:
ct AR
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d b y
the CT terminal definition command.
After entering the AR command, you must select the terminal speed and enter a carriage
return. The system acknowledges the carriage return operation and indicates that the line
speed recognition is complete by returning two line feeds. If your terminal cannot change
its line speed, no line feed responses occur. At this point, enter a closing parenthesis
followed by a carriage return so that the system can recognize the terminal's new character
set. When the system recognizes the new character set, it issues a line feed and the
message AR ACCEPTED., to indicate you can continue. This is also the auto-re cognition
procedure used to connect the terminal to the system (refer to the login/logout procedures
in Volume 1, Introduction to Interactive Usage).
This command only applies to asynchronous terminals and is not valid for X.25 PSN
terminals. X.25 PSN terminals use the ASCII code and character set.

jm^m^Ky

60459680

D

J-5

(BF) - BLOCKING FACTOR
The BF command sets the size of intermediate data blocks that will be delivered to the
■ application.
Format:
ct BF=bf
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

bf

Specifies the blocking factor. You can specify the following values
for bf:
bf

Description

0 Selects a line feed character and a character count of 100
as data-forwarding signals.
1 Selects a character count of 100 as a data-forwarding
signal.
2 Selects a character count of 200 as a data-forwarding
signal.
I Regardless of the blocking factor, an end-of-line character (usually a carriage return)
forwards data to the application.

(BR) - BREAK KEY AS USER BREAK 1
The BR command determines if the BREAK key (interruption key for interactive output) also
functions as the interruption sequence (user break 1 sequence) when entered during output
and as the cancel character when entered during input.
Format;
ct BR=option
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

option

Determines if this feature is enabled or disabled. A value of Y
enables and a value of N disables this feature.

This command only applies to asynchronous terminals. For X.25 PSN terminals, the BREAK key
can only function as the interruption sequence whether entered during input or output.

J-6

60459680 H

(BS) - BACKSPACE CHARACTER

The BS command specifies the character used to delete the previous input character.
Format:
ct BS=bs
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
b s S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w b a c k s p a c e c h a r a c t e r . T h i s c h a r a c t e r m u s t d i f f e r r o m
the characters currently defined for AB, Bl, B2, CN, CT, EB, and EL.
It is possible to backspace only to the
backspaces are disregarded. When a page
width of 100 characters for backspacing.
backspacing into previous physical lines

beginning of the current physical line; additional
width of 0 is selected, the network assumes a page
If the page width is in the range 20 through 56,
is sometimes permitted.

This command only applies to asynchronous terminals only.

(Bl) - INTERRUPTION OR USER BREAK 1 CHARACTER
The Bl command specifies the character that, when entered as the only character in a logical
line (interruption character followed by the message transmission key), causes program
interruption.
Format:
ct Bl=ubl
Parameter
J ^ V

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
u b l S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w u s e r b r e a k 1 c h a r a c t e r . T h i s c h a r a c t e r m u s t d i f f e r
from the characters currently defined for AB, BS, B2, CN, CT, EB, and
EL.
The interruption sequence is discussed in section 16. The BR command determines whether the
BREAK key can also function as the Bl character.
This command does not apply to bisynchronous 2780 and 3780 terminals.

60459680

H

j-7

/rf5St\

(B2) - TERMINATION OR USER BREAK 2 CHARACTER
The B2 command specifies the character that, when entered as the only character in a logical
line (termination character followed by the message transmission key), causes program
termination.
Format:
ct B2=ub2
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
u b 2 S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w u s e r b r e a k 2 c h a r a c t e r . T h i s c h a r a c t e r m u s t d i f f e r
from the characters currently defined for AB, BS, Bl, CN, CT, EB, and
EL.
The termination sequence is discussed in section 16.
This command does not apply to bisynchronous 2780 and 3780 terminals.

(CH) - DISPLAY TERMINAL CHARACTERISTICS
The CH command displays some of the terminal's current characteristics.
Format:
ct CH
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
The CH command produces a display in the following format:
TC=tc,BS=bs,CN=cn,AB=ab,Bl=ubl,B2=ub2,EL=el,EB=eb
where the variable portions appear as ASCII characters if printable, mnemonics (for example,
STX) if nonprintable, or N/A if the attribute is not applicable.

J-8

60459680

F

(Cl) - CARRIAGE RETURN IDLE COUNT
The CI command specifies the number of idle characters to be inserted into the output stream
after a carriage return.

Format;
ct CI=ci
Parameter

yS&^s

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

c i

Specifies the new carriage return idle count. This value can be from
0 to 127 or the string CA. A value of CA restores the carriage return |
idle count to the default value.

When the network produces a carriage return, the network outputs the specified number of
idle characters before outputting the next line. This allows time for the carriage return
function and ensures that characters are not lost because of printing attempts during the
carriage return operation.
This command only applies to asynchronous terminals.

r

(CN) - CANCEL CHARACTER
The CN command specifies the character used to cancel the logical line currently being input.
Format:
ct CN=cn
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

cn

Specifies the new cancel character. This character must differ from
the characters currently defined for BS, Bl, B2, CT, EB, and EL.

When you enter the cancel character as the last character in a line, the entire logical line
in progress is cancelled. The system responds to a cancel line character by printing *DEL*
on the next line and positioning the carriage to the beginning of a new line. The BR
command determines whether the BREAK key can also function as the CN character.
This command does not apply to bisynchronous 2780 and 3780 terminals.

60459680 H

J-9

(CP) - CURSOR POSITIONING AFTER INPUT
The CP command determines whether or not the system sends the terminal a response to the
line feed key, the EL character, and the EB character.
Format:
ct CP=option
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

option

Indicates whether to send a response to the terminal or not
of Y indicates yes and N indicates no.

A value

This command applies only to asynchronous terminals (except 2741s). If CP=Y and IN=KB are
selected, the system responds to the line feed key by sending a carriage return and responds
to an EL or EB character by sending the cursor positioning response specified by the EL or
EB command. If IN=BK is selected or you are at an X.25 PAD terminal, the system responds
only to the EB character by sending the cursor positioning response selected by the EB
command.

(CT) - NETWORK CONTROL CHARACTER
The CT command specifies a network control character for the terminal. When you enter this
c h a r a c t e r a s t h e fi r s t c h a r a c t e r o f a l o g i c a l l i n e , i t s i g n a l s t h a t w h a t f o l l o w s i s a
terminal definition command or a special command that the network forwards to your
application with a preemptive status (refer to the interactive status commands in section 8)
Format:
ct CT=char
Parameter

Description

ct Represents the current network control character for your terminal.
c h a r S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r. T h i s c h a r a c t e r m u s t
differ from the characters currently defined for AB, BS, Bl, B2, CN,
EB, and EL.
If you enter the CT command in a line with multiple terminal definitions, the new value char
does not take effect until the complete line is processed.

J-10

60459680 C

^■tSsV

(DL) - DELIMITERS FOR SINGLE-MESSAGE TRANSPARENT INPUT MODE
The DL command specifies the delimiters that terminate single-message transparent input
mode. When you initiate transparent input mode (IN=X, IN=XK, or IN=XP), the network reads
your input and sends it to the system without translation until it encounters a delimiter.
If your terminal's parity is set to even, odd, or zero (PA=E, 0, or Z), the parity bit is
stripped (set to zero) before the characters are sent to the host, although no translation
o c c u r s . I f y o u r t e r m i n a l ' s p a r i t y i s s e t t o n o n e o r i g n o r e ( PA = N o r I ) , t h e p a r i t y b i t i s
not stripped. See the NAM/CCP Terminal Interfaces Reference Manual for more information on
t r a n s p a r e n t i n p u t a n d p a r i t y. T h e fi r s t d e l i m i t e r e n c o u n t e r e d t e r m i n a t e s t r a n s p a r e n t i n p u t
mode.
Format:
ct DL=Xxx,Ccount,TO
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

Xxx

Specifies the 2-digit hexadecimal code (xx) of the character you want
as a delimiter. The network does not send the character as part of
the input data. When you specify a hexadecimal code above 7F, you
must have previously set your terminal's parity to none (PA=N) or
ignore (PA=I); otherwise the network cannot detect the code when it
occurs in a transparent mode message. If the terminal's parity is set
to none, the 8-bit hexadecimal code input from the terminal is matched
against the 8-bit hexadecimal code specified as the delimiter (xx).
If th e te r m i n al's parity is set to ignore, the bottom 7 bits of the
terminal input are matched against the bottom 7 bits of the specified
delimiter (xx).

Ccount

Specifies a decimal value (count) from 1 to 4095 that functions as a
c h a r a c t e r c o u n t d e l i m i t e r. T h e s e v a l u e s a r e v a l i d w i t h i n t h e
network. However, unless changed during installation, the maximum
logical input line length in IAF (2500 characters) limits you.

TO

Specifies that a timeout of between 200 and 400 milliseconds will be a
transparent mode delimiter.

You can select any of the three types of delimiters: character delimiter (specify Xxx),
character count delimiter (specify Ccount), and timeout delimiter (specify TO).
The parameter values for DL are order-independent and optional. However, you must specify
at least one of the parameter values. You can omit trailing commas if you do not specify
all three types of delimiters.
Entering this command with any number of new delimiters cancels all transparent mode input
delimiters already in effect, including those specified with the XL command.
The DL command applies only to asynchronous and mode 4 terminals. Terminal class 4 is
configured with the RETURN key as the only transparent mode terminator and mode 4 terminals
are configured with the SEND or ETX key as their only transparent mode terminator. For X.25
devices, the PAD forwarding signal always acts as a transparent mode terminator in addition
to any other options selected.

60459680 G

J-ll

/*^&V

(EB) - END-OF-BLOCK CHARACTER
The EB command defines the end-of-block character and defines the cursor-positioning
response to that character. The EB character acts as the message transmission key for
terminals operating in block mode (refer to the IN command).
Format:
ct EB=eb,cpr
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

eb

Specifies the new end-of-block character. You can specify the
following values for eb:
eb

Description

X x x S p e c i fi e s t h e 2 - d i g i t h e x a d e c i m a l c o d e x x o f t h e c h a r a c t e r
you want as the end-of-block delimiter. This character
must differ from the characters currently defined for AB,
BS, Bl, B2, CN, and CT.
EB Selects the default end-of-block character or character
sequence.
E L S e l e c t s t h e c u r r e n t l o g i c a l e n d - o f - l i n e c h a r a c t e r.

cpr

Specifies the cursor-positioning response to the EB character. You
can specify the following values for cpr:
cpr

Description

CR Send a carriage return to the terminal.LF Send a line feed to the terminal.
CL Send a carriage return and a line feed to the terminal.
NO Send no response.
The two EB parameters (EB=eb and cpr) are optional and order-independent. If you omit one,
the system retains its previous value.
| This command is valid only for asynchronous terminals and mode 4 terminals, except for paper
tape devices and 2741 terminals. The end-of-block character for mode 4 terminals is ETX and
I is
if not
i t o cchangeable.
c u r s a s t h e Ifl ayou
s t c hspecify
a r a c t e r the
i n achar
line.form of the eb parameter, it is only effective
The CP command enables or disables the cursor-positioning response specified by the cpr
parameter.

J-12

60459680 H

/p^v

(EL) - END-OF-LINE CHARACTER
The EL command defines the logical end-of-line character (carriage return) and defines the
cursor-positioning response to that character. It also defines the message transmission key
for asynchronous terminals not operating in block mode (refer to the IN command).
Format:
ct EL=el, cpr
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

el

Specifies the new logical end-of-line character. You can specify the
following values for el:
el

Description

X x x S p e c i fi e s t h e 2 - d i g i t h e x a d e c i m a l c o d e x x o f t h e c h a r a c t e r
y o u w a n t a s t h e e n d - o f - l i n e d e l i m i t e r. T h i s c h a r a c t e r
must differ from the characters currently defined for AB,
BS, Bl, B2, CN, and CT.
EB Selects the current end-of-block character or character
sequence.
E L S e l e c t s t h e d e f a u l t l o g i c a l e n d - o f - l i n e c h a r a c t e r.

cpr

Specifies the cursor-positioning response to the EL character. You
can specify the following values for cpr:
cpr

Description

CR Send a carriage return to the terminal.
LF Send a line feed to the terminal.
CL Send a carriage return and a line feed to the terminal.
NO Send no response.
The two EL parameters (el and cpr) are optional and order-independent. If you omit one, the
system retains its previous value.
This command does not apply to 2741, HASP, 3270, and bisynchronous 2780 and 3780 terminals;
the cpr parameter does not apply to mode 4 or X.25 PSN terminals; and the char specification
does not apply to mode 4 terminals.
The CP command enables or disables the cursor-positioning response specified by the cpr
parameter.

0^*1.

60459680 G

J-13

(EP) - ECHOPLEX MODE
The EP command enables or disables the echoing of input characters back to the terminal.
Format:
ct EP=option
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
o p t i o n S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r t o e n a b l e ( Y ) o r d i s a b l e ( N ) i n p u t e c h o i n g .
Some terminals can perform their own character echoing, such as terminals with a HALF/FULL 1
duplex switch. If the switch is in the HALF position, set the EP value to N, and the
terminal echoes the input. If the switch is in the FULL position, set the EP value to Y and
the network echoes the input.
You can use the EP command and full-duplex mode as a security measure. If you are in
full-duplex mode and EP is Y during login, the system echoes all of your input except your
password. This is not true, however, if you enter your user name and password on the same
line.
I

This

command

only

applies

to

asynchronous

terminals

(except

2741s).

^^

(FA) - FULL ASCII INPUT MODE
The FA command enables or disables the full-ASCII input mode.
Format:
ct FA=option
Parameter

Description

/^

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
o p t i o n S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r t o e n a b l e ( Y ) o r d i s a b l e ( N ) t h e f u l l - A S C I I i n p u t
mode.
In full-ASCII input, all 128 ASCII characters, including NUL, DEL, STX, LF, and all BLK and
message-forwarding signals (which are normally discarded), are sent to the host. Exceptions
to this are the following characters:
• NULs, DELs and LFs when encountered as the first character of an input line or as
the character following a message-forwarding signal
• CRs that follow LFs when inputting from paper tape
• DC3s that follow the EL character when inputting from paper tape
• DCls and DC3s when output control (0C=Y) is selected

J-l*

60459680

H

In full-ASCII mode, the network does not recognize the terminal functions associated with
the mnenomics Bl, B2, CN, AB, and BS. The network does recognize terminal definition
commands and other commands beginning with the CT character.
If SE is in effect when you select FA or if FA is in effect when you select SE, FA takes
precedence and SE will not be effective until FA is turned off. If full-ASCII mode is
enabled when you select transparent input mode, the network suspends the full-ASCII mode
until the transparent input mode terminates.
This command only applies to asynchronous and mode 4 terminals.

(HC) - HOST CONNECTION
The HC command disconnects you from your current host and establishes a new host
connection. The new host connection can be selected by an HN command or by the HC command
(HC=hostname). The HC command is equivalent to HS or HN followed by TM.
Format:
ct HC=hostname
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
hostname Specifies the name of the host to which you want your terminal
connected.
The host selected is used until you change it or until your terminal is disconnected from
the host.

(HD) - DISPLAY OF HOST NODES
The HD command causes the host availability display (HAD) to be displayed at your terminal.
The HAD lists all paths you can select to connect your terminal to a host.
Format:
ct HD
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.

60459680

G

j-15

y*E«^5v

The HAD has the following format:
message CONTROL CHARACTER=ct
NPU NODE=npu TERMINAL NAME=terminal
HOST

NODE

hOSt;
host'

node]
node-

hostn
|

prompt

noden

SELECTED/
CONNECTED
conditio^
condition2

STATUS
status^
status2

conditionn

status,

response

The variable items in the display have the following descriptions.
Item

I

J-16

Description

message

A message describing the status of your current host connection.

ct

Network control character currently defined for your terminal.

npu

The node number of the Network Processing Unit (NPU) your terminal
is connected to.

terminal

The name of your terminal.

host^

Represents the 1- to 7-character name of a host. The field may be
blank.

node.}

Represents a node number (1-31).

conditio^

Indicates that you have selected node;} (S), that you are connected
to the host using node.} (C), or that nodejL has been automatically
selected and the connection to the host is in progress (SA).

status^

Represents AVAILABLE or NOT AVAILABLE.

prompt
message

Action to take in response to a host status message.

60459680 H

(HN) - HOST NODE SELECTION
The HN command sets or changes the host
terminal is connected. This command does
connection. You must log out or disconnect
definition command before you can connect

or the path (node) to a host through which your
not disconnect you from your current host
with the Secure Login command or TM terminal
to the new selection.

Format:

ct HN=node
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

node

Specifies a node number. The default is the node the network
processing unit is presently using to access its supervisor (CS).

The host availability display (HAD) lists all nodes your terminal can use. Refer to the HD
command for a description of the HAD.

(HS) - HOST SELECTION
The HS command selects a host which is connected to your terminal. The host availability
display (HAD) shows the available hosts (refer to the HD command).
Format:
ct HS=hostname
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
hostname Specifies the name of the host to which you want your terminal
connected. The valid entries appear in the HAD.
Your terminal uses the path to host with the least traffic. The path selected is used until
either you change it or until your terminal is disconnected from the host.

60459680 D

J-17

/^^Sx

(IC) - FLOW CONTROL FOR INPUT DEVICES
The IC command specifies whether the terminal recognizes DC3s as a stop signal and DCls as a
resume signal for terminal input.
Format:
ct IC=option
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
o p t i o n S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r t o e n a b l e ( Y ) o r d i s a b l e ( N ) i n p u t c o n t r o l .

.^«^K

| Input control applies to asynchronous terminals, including paper tape devices (except 2741s).

(IN) - INPUT DEVICE AND TRANSMISSION MODE
The IN command identifies the input device and the transmission mode of the device. As the
input device, you can specify one of the following:
• A keyboard.
• A p a p e r t a p e r e a d e r.
As the input transmission mode, you can specify either:
• Normalized line mode (one message or logical line per terminal transmission block).
• Normalized block mode (one or more logical lines or messages collected into a block
before it is transmitted).
• Transparent mode (input is not edited or translated by the network).

J"18

60459680

H

Format:
ct IN=»in
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
i n S p e c i fi e s t h e i n p u t d e v i c e a n d t r a n s m i s s i o n m o d e . Yo u c a n s p e c i f y t h e
following values for in:
*n

Description

BK Selects block mode as from a form terminal and normalized
input mode.
KB Selects a keyboard in character or line mode and
normalized input mode.
PT Selects paper tape and normalized input mode.
X Selects the current input device and transparent input
mode.

r

XK Selects the keyboard and transparent input mode.
XP Selects paper tape and transparent input mode.
When the IN value is XK, XP, or X, terminal input is sent to the host in transparent mode
blocks. Transparent mode continues until the system encounters a previously defined
transparent mode terminator.
When the IN value is XK and transparent mode terminates, the IN value automatically reverts
to KB. When the IN value is XP and transparent mode terminates, the IN value automatically
reverts to PT. When the IN value is X and transparent mode terminates, the IN value
automatically reverts to the value that was previously in effect.

\ W h e n t h e I N v a l u e i s P T o r X P, t h e n e t w o r k s e n d s t h e X - O N c o d e t o s t a r t t h e p a p e r t a p e
reader automatically after the end of a message is output to the terminal and the message
empties the terminal's output queue.
The IN command is not applicable to HASP, 3270, or bisynchronous 2780 and 3780 terminals.
2741 terminals can only select IN=KB, IN=X, and IN=XK. Mode 4 terminals, which are always
in block mode, and X.25 PSN terminals cannot select PT or XP mode.

/ps^s
60459680

H

j-19

(Ll) - LINE FEED IDLE COUNT
The LI command specifies the number of idle characters to be inserted into the output stream
following a line feed.
Format:
ct LI=value
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d b y
the CT terminal definition command.
v a l u e S p e c i fi e s t h e n e w l i n e f e e d i d l e c o u n t . T h i s v a l u e c a n b e f r o m 0 t o 1 2 7
or the string CA. A value of CA restores the line feed idle count to
the default value.
The line feed idle count is similar to the carriage return idle count (CI), except that the
idle characters are output after a line feed instead of after the carriage return.
This command only applies to asynchronous terminals.

(LK) - LOCKOUT OF UNSOLICITED MESSAGES
The LK command determines whether unsolicited messages from the network operator appear at
your terminal.
Format:
ct LK=option
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d b y
the CT terminal definition command.
o p t i o n S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r t o l o c k o u t u n s o l i c i t e d m e s s a g e s . A v a l u e o f Y l o c k s
out the messages and a value of N allows the messages to appear.

/tfa^v

J_2°

60459680

H

(MS) - MESSAGE TO NETWORK OPERATOR
The MS command sends a message to the network operator.
Format:
ct MS=message
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

message

Specifies your message to the operator. You can use any string of 50
c h a r a c t e r s or less.

If you are having problems with the network (such as difficulty connecting to IAF), you
communicate these problems to the network operator using the MS command.

(OC) - FLOW CONTROL FOR OUTPUT DEVICES
The OC command specifies whether the terminal generates DC3s as a stop signal to the network
and DCls as a resume signal for terminal output.
Format:
ct 0C=option
Parameter

ct

Description
Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

o p t i o n S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r t o e n a b l e ( Y ) o r d i s a b l e ( N ) o u t p u t c o n t r o l .
If the network receives a DC3 while output control is enabled, it suspends output until it
receives a DC1.
Output control applies to asynchronous terminals, including paper tape devices (except
2741s).

(OP) - OUTPUT DEVICE SELECTION
The OP command specifies the type of output device.
Format:
ct 0P=op
Parameter

ct

60459680 H

Description
Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

J-21

Parameter

Description

o p S p e c i fi e s t h e o u t p u t d e v i c e . Yo u c a n s p e c i f y t h e f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s f o r
op:
op

Description

D I S p e c i fi e s a d i s p l a y d e v i c e .
P R S p e c i fi e s a p r i n t e r .
P T S p e c i fi e s a p a p e r t a p e p u n c h .
You can punch a tape in any mode, but the network does not provide the proper X-OFF
characters unless OP has a value of PT.
If you select OP=PR, the network does line folding and page bounding for asynchronous and
X.25 PSN terminals. If OP=DI, the network assumes the terminal performs these functions
itself.
This command only applies to asynchronous terminals (except 2741s). OP=PT does not apply to
X.25 PSN terminals.

(PA) - PARITY PROCESSING
The PA command specifies the parity processing to be performed by the network.
Format:
ct PA=pa
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
p a S p e c i fi e s t h e t y p e o f p a r i t y p r o c e s s i n g . Yo u c a n s p e c i f y t h e
following values for pa:
pa

Description

E Set parity bit for even parity during output, and check
for even parity (except for X.25 PSN terminals) and set
p a ri ty bit to zero on input.
N In transparent mode, do not set or check the parity bit
because it is part of the input or output data. In
normalized mode, set the parity bit to zero on input and
output.
0 Set parity bit for odd parity during output, and check for
odd parity (except for X.25 PSN terminals) and set parity
bit to zero on input.

J-22

60459680

H

Parameter

Description
Pa

Z

Description
Set parity bit to zero on output and check parity bit
against zero on input.

I In transparent mode, do not set or
because it is part of the input
the parity bit when checking for
delimiters. In normalized mode,
zero on input and output.

check the parity bit
or output data. Ignore
transparent input mode
set the parity bit to

This command only applies to asynchronous terminals (except 2741s). For X.25 PSN terminals,
the parity bit is set to 0 and not checked for input.

(PG) - PAGE WAITING
The PG command enables or disables page waiting at the terminal during output. If you
enable page waiting, the terminal stops at the end of each output page for your
acknowledgement (a null input line) before output continues. (In order for the PG command
to be effective, page length (PL) must be non-zero.)
Format:
ct PG=option
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
o p t i o n S p e c i fi e s w h e t h e r t o e n a b l e ( Y ) o r d i s a b l e ( N ) p a g e w a i t i n g .
When you enter a null input line to get the next page of output, the null input line has no
other meaning.
Page waiting does not apply to bisynchronous 2780 or 3780 terminals or to HASP terminals.

(PL) - PAGE LENGTH
The PL command establishes the maximum number of physical lines that can be printed as one
page. If the output device type is PR, the network automatically positions the carriage to
the top of the form after PL lines have been output.
Format:
ct PL=pl
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
p l S p e c i fi e s t h e p a g e l e n g t h . Yo u c a n s p e c i f y 0 o r a n y v a l u e f r o m 8 t o
2 5 5 . P L = 0 s e l e c t s a n i n fi n i t e l y l o n g p a g e .
The PL value must be nonzero if you want to enable page waiting, since page waiting only
occurs after the number of lines defined by pl-1 are output.
60459680

H

j-23

(PW) - PAGE WIDTH
The PW command establishes the maximum number of characters that the terminal prints on one
■ output line. If the output device type is PR, the system automatically starts a new line
after pw characters have been output.
Format:
ct PW=pw
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

pw

Specifies the page width. You can specify a value of 0 or any value
from 20 to 255. PW=0 selects an infinitely long line.

(RC) - RESET TERMINAL CHARACTERISTICS
The RC command resets your terminal to the NDL-specifled default values. Normally you would
use this command after disconnecting from a host connection for which you had altered one or
more terminal characteristics.
Format:
ct RC
Note that a terminal can also be automatically reconfigured each time the terminal is
disconnected from a host if the terminal is on a line for which automatic reconfiguration
has been specified by the network administrator.

(SE) - SPECIAL EDITING MODE
The SE command enables or disables the special editing variant of normalized input mode.
Format:
ct SE=option
Parameter

Description

ct

Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined
by the CT terminal definition command.

option

Enables (Y) or disables (N) special editing operations.

When special editing Is in effect, any backspace character entered is stored for transmission
to the host. Similarly, a line feed entry produces a normal line feed operation at the
terminal and the network stores the line feed character code for transmission to the host.
A backspace followed by a line feed causes the system to output a bell and to position the
cursor below the last character entered.
This command is only valid for asynchronous terminals but not for X.25 PSN terminals.

J-24

60459680 H

(TC) - TERMINAL CLASS COMMAND
The TC command specifies a terminal class for your terminal. The terminal class associates
y o u r t e r m i n a l w i t h a p r e d e fi n e d s e t o f t e r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . To e ff e c t i v e l y u s e a
terminal class, choose a terminal class whose default terminal definition corresponds to the
characteristics of your terminal.
Format:
ct TC=tc
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d
by the CT terminal definition command.
t c S p e c i fi e s t h e t e r m i n a l c l a s s . T h e v a l u e t c c a n b e f r o m 1 t o 1 8 .
The following list associates terminal class values with terminal types:
tc

Te r m i n a l

Type

tc

Te r m i n a l

Type

1 M33, M35, M37, M38 teletypes

1 0 2 0 0 U s e r Te r m i n a l

2 CDC 713-10, 722, 751-1, 752, 756

11 C D C 7 1 4 - 3 0

3 CDC 721, 722-30

1 2 C D C 7 11 - 1 0

4

IBM

13 CDC 714-10/20

5

M40

6

Hazeltine

2741
teletypes
2000

14 HASP protocol, preprint format
control
15 CDC 734, 731-12

7 Te r m i n a l s c o n f o r m i n g t o t h e
ANSI X3.64 standard (DEC VT100,
TeleVideo 924, 950, 955)

16

IBM

2780

8 Te k t r o n i x 4 0 1 0 , 4 0 1 4

17

IBM

3780

9 HASP protocol, postprint
format control

18

IBM

3270

A terminal that is not shown as belonging to a terminal class may still be operational. The
terminal can be assigned to a terminal class having similar characteristics and the
terminal's definition can be modified as necessary to correctly define the operational
characteristics of the terminal.
If your terminal is on an auto-recognition line and its terminal class is other than 4, 10,
13, or 18, you can use the TC command to change its terminal class to ensure proper
operation.
If you include a TC command in a sequence of terminal definition commands, enter the TC
c o m m a n d fi r s t a s i t r e s e t s a l l o t h e r t e r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s .

/j$pfe\

60459680 H

J-25

(TM) - TERMINATING A TERMINAL-HOST CONNECTION
I The TM command terminates the connection between your terminal and a host.
Format:
ct TM
Parameter

Description

c t R e p r e s e n t s t h e n e t w o r k c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r f o r y o u r t e r m i n a l a s d e fi n e d b y
the CT command.
You can use the TM command if your application does not respond to your input. The system
responds to the TM command in the following manner:
INPUT TO CONNECT
TO HOST
I HOSTENTER
DISCONNECTED
CONTROL
CHARACTER=ct

J-26

60459680

H

(XL) - MULTIMESSAGE TRANSPARENT MODE
The network provides a transparent mode that allows you to remain in transparent input mode
even after message blocks have been forwarded to the application. The XL command specifies
the multimessage-forwarding signal and the terminator for transparent input mode. If your
terminal's parity is set to even, odd, or zero (PA=E, 0 or Z), the parity bit is stripped
(set to zero) before the characters are sent to the host, although no translation occurs.
If your terminal's parity is set to none or ignore (PA=N or I), the parity bit is not
stripped. See the NAM/CCP Terminal Interfaces Reference manual for more information on
t r a n s p a r e n t i n p u t a n d p a r i t y.
Format:
ct XL=Xxx,Ccount,TO,Yyy
Parameter

ct

Description
Represents the network control character for your terminal as defined by
the CT terminal definition command.

Xxx Selects the character with the two-digit hexadecimal representation xx
as the message-forwarding signal. If you do not specify a value yy, the
occurrence of two successive characters defined by xx acts as a
terminator for transparent input mode. When you specify a hexadecimal
code above 7F, you must have previously set your terminal's parity to
none (PA=N) or ignore (PA=I); otherwise the network cannot detect the
code when it occurs in a transparent mode message.
Ccount Selects a decimal value from 1 to 4095 as
functions as a message-forwarding signal.
valid with the network. However, unless
the maximum logical input line length in
you.

a character count that
These values (1 to 4095) are
changed during installation,
IAF (2500 characters) limits

T O S e l e c t s t i m e o u t a s a t r a n s p a r e n t i n p u t m o d e t e r m i n a t o r.
Yyy Selects the character with the two-digit hexadecimal representation yy
as a terminator for transparent input mode when it follows xx. When you
specify a hexadecimal code above 7F, you must have previously set your
terminal's parity to none (PA=N) or ignore (PA=I); otherwise the network
cannot detect the code when it occurs in a transparent mode message.
Yyy, if specified, must follow the Xxx parameter; otherwise, it is ignored. The parameters
are otherwise order-independent. You must specify at least one of Xxx or TO to select a
transparent mode terminator. When it immediately follows the character defined by Xxx on
input, the character defined by yy terminates transparent input mode. The characters
defined by Xxx and Yyy can be identical or you can omit Yyy. In either case, two successive
input characters defined by Xxx are required to terminate transparent mode.
The message-forwarding signals and mode terminators are not sent to the host.
The XL command applies only to asynchronous and mode 4 terminals. Terminal class 4 is
configured with the RETURN key as the only transparent mode delimiter and terminator, and
mode 4 terminals are configured with the SEND or ETX key as their only transparent mode
delimiter and terminator. For devices connected through X.25, the PAD forwarding signal
always acts as a transparent mode delimiter in addition to any other options selected.
This command does not apply to HASP and bisynchronous terminals.

60459680 H

J-27

Table J-l. Default Terminal Definitions
Te r m i n a l Ty p e s
Mne
monic

Description

TC

Te r m i n a l c l a s s

AB

Abort output block

BF

Blocking factor

BS

TTY
M33

CDC
713-10,
722,751-1,
752,756

CDC
IBM
721, 2741
722-30

TTY
M40-2

HAZ X3.64
2000 DEC
VT100

Te k
4000

CAN

CAN

CAN

CAN

none

BS

BS

BS

CAN

CAN

Backspace character

BS

BS

BS

Bl

User break 1

DLE

DLE

DLE

DLE

DLE

DLE

DLE

B2

User break 2

DC4

DC4

DC4

DC4

DC4

DC4

DC4

BR

Break as user break 1
(and cancel character)

CI

Carriage return idles

CN

Cancel character

CP

Cursor positioning

CT

Network control
character

DL

Single-message trans
parent input mode

BS

na

CAN

CAN

CAN

CAN

CAN

ESC

ESC

ESC

ESC

ESC

Character delimiter

CR

CR

CR

Character count
delimiter

2043

2043

2043

NL

CR

CR

na

2043

2043

Ti m e o u t d e l i m i t e r

No

No

No

na

No

Character

EOT

EOT

Cursor positioning

CL

CL

EOT

na

CL

na

Character

CR

CR

Cursor positioning

LF

LF

CR
LF

CAN

CDC
200
UT

CDC
714-30

CDC
7 11 - 1 0

CDC
714-10,
714-20

HASP
PRE

CDC
734

IBM
2780

IBM
3780

IBM
3270

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(I)

na

na

:(6)

(1)

na

na

)(7)

na

na

(1)

na

(1)

na

na
na

na

na

(1)

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(1)

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

CAN

(1)

ESC

(1)

CR

CR

2043

2043

(0
(O

No

No

No

EOT

EOT

EOT

CL

CL

CL

NL

CR

CR

CR

na

LF

LF

LF

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(4)

na

na

(4)

(4)

(4)

na

(4)

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(1)

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

EOT

(2)

CL

No

na

(4)

(4)

(4)

(4)

na

(4)

na

na

na

na

No

No

No

No

na

No

na

na

na

CR
LF

(1)

na

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

na

(5)

na

na

na

No

na

No

No

No

No

na

No

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

End-of-block

EL

End-of-logical line

EP

Echoplex mode

FA

Full ASCII input mode

IC

I n p u t d e v i c e fl o w
control

IN

Input device

LI

Line feed idles

LK

Lockout NOP messages

OC

O u t p u t d e v i c e fl o w
control

OP

Output device

PA

Parity processing

PC

Page waiting

PL

Page length

P
W

Page width

SE

Special editing mode

XL

Multimessage
transparent input mode

(0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

HASP
POST

(0)
CAN

EB

X.25
any

na

na
na
KB

KB

KB

KB

KB

KB

KB

KB

na
P
R

DI

DI

P
R

DI

DI

DI

DI

na

72

No

24

30

80

80

No

No

132

No

na

na

BK
(1)

na
na

na

na

na

na

na

na

BK

na

na

BK

BK

BK

na

BK

na

na

KB

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(1)

No

na

No

No

No

No

No

No

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(1)

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(3)

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

(1)

na

na

na

na

24

27

24

35

(1)

13

16

16

lb

80

74

80

74

(1)

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

120 80

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

na

No

na

No

No

No

No

na

No

na

na

na

No

No

No

No

13

24

Te r m i n a l s b e l o n g t o t e r m i n a l c l a s s e s 1 t h r o u g h 3 o r 5 t h r o u g h 8 .
S a m e a s f o r t h e t e r m i n a l i f i t w e r e n o t c o n n e c t e d v i a 3 packe - s w l t ching rl e t w o r
End-of-packet sequence (M bit is reset to zero).
T h e p a r i t y b i t i s i g n o r e d o n i n p u t a n d i s g e n c r a te d f o r o u t p u a s fo r t h e b a s i c t e r m l il a l t y p e .
ETX (resulting from the SEND key).
ESC A (resulting from the CARRIAGE RETURN key).
Program attention key 1 is a valid user break 1.
Program attention key 2 is a valid user break 2.

J-28

60459680 H

a s 3.3

3

SSS
3

3

O Ci
S3 r*

3

CSC
S

3

S

CCS
C

C

C

C

S

S

C

S

3

C

S

3

<4H

S

O

2

8

9)
Qi
rC

A

4

tn

2

3

3

C

3

C

3

S A

o

C

CM

3

tM

C



y.

C A c
C c c > ; c A 3 ^ >^ C



.;

y»

CJ

«-«

y-N

z-

o
o>
>

r£ A3
z

^

o>

-■> Z .->
C

>t

C

/-.

Z

.-.

c A c c c > ; c a 5 c

60

ta

CM

C A c c c

0)
H

K
O

CSC

C

333CC3

^

C

3

A S

o

S

C

,->

CM

^>.

y^

_
Z

,-.

C A C C C

-z eor>,

>:c AS

•^ CM *-N

o>

~

C

Z

f

A 1,

— J rn rt
wUU
v. .

— J IO c-l

A J,

-I

-Jo

A J.

_
w

J»

tn

_J oo
Cd
U

n
^

«-s

c

~«

J

a

cn

U

w

s s
0)

<-l

J->

—i _) cq cn

-«Jo

cn

«->

C A C C C S 3 A 3 C
gNN

s(0

M
Ri
04

«-. CM «■> .-. /-^
C A C

C

C

-v

,->

.■

z-

oo>t

:£ A3

C A C C
C CC

Z

•

r~i

Z

^

^ >T c

A

3

w

Id

Jm
«n
•^ sa u —.

o «■% z ^-»

f t A3 c >: c

s- u u •_-

wUU

w

S£

8-3
« l

u


^

C A C C C

z

-

J<

W

on

»-*

Z

^

A3 C *- C

w

CJ

W

w

vUH

w

r->

,4

W

0

CJ

C VM

tl

a

" fi
»a

rt

•J X

a
m
C S3

J2

S
c

R°
to

cd

u

a 3

60459680 G

u
«

n ta
v S

p

CQ

w

§2

3 3 St
B G

t
»
CO c o
c a -a
•H kl S
MM
8

32

t o
C >>J

01 M

£3

CO

o—

CM Pl *» t f t i O N

CQ

a.

c/i <

J-29

3§
m

cn

SM

A

in

O

CM

CM LO
• IO
O CM

ca
a

00

eg

a

o

5S
m

CM

cn

BS
H

f .
O

A

o

CM

3

.

3

3

S

3

3

a

3

a

3

CM IO
• iO
O CM

o

tO

ct
cs

IO

3

a
cn
cj t>.

Si..,

£3

9

SH

a

T
▶

SM*

3

S

3

CO U">
« i n
O CM

CM IO
- L O
O CM

< t

o

-»

co

-cf
> i

r^ C-.

BM

s -

O

m
CM

CM IO
- I O
O CM

1
c n

9 -

>?

O

CM

io

CM IO
• I O
O CM

>^

CO to
• I O
O CM

CM LO
• I O
O CM

3

SM

Sm"

tl
4J

S Sa

ti
eo

O

-rf

«
•H
eo

c n

r -

°

ki
£
k i

c n
o

O
cn

cS 3 U- i

kl

S
5
o

m
eo

3 «
»

O

rH

Ot

o

o
CJ -1
r*.

•

z

r n

S 1 1

aU

CO

»-

CM IO
- I O
O CM

!M

O
©
O -4 CM
O

CS
B

o

-a
C3
eg

<»
■a

~1

ki
3

LO

O

N

3 <
>

S

SM

s -

ca io
» i o
O CM

CM IO
« I O
O CM

c n
o

kl
t l
ki
a
eg

eu h

a
ti

33

CM IO
• L O
O CM

CB Cu

11
/_
a
c

M-t
0)

a

CM

,^

>»

CM

li 8

CM

E
£ * 8

•cr

A3

!H

2 u S

S°£

iH

Srf

» i

z

*

z
8*"

A3

3

CQ
*

8>^

o **?
a S JL

>r

R
M C
u Cr »
cM
m

1

Srf"

»
>

sh

„,

»-MO
CM IO

CM

CM CO
—

-

I

N

W

CO IO
P ^

O

CM

jj

LO

t

sm"

SM

A3

Sm"

iri
SM

^^
SM*

>n

8m"

-

Z

N

M

> i

CO IO
• I O
O CM

CM IO
" I O
O CM

t r

oz
N

W

6 -

CO LO

CM LO
• to

O

O

CM

CM

>"-

CM CO
—

Cu

Z

N

Cd

<
>

CO IO
• I O
O CM

CM LO
- L O
O CM

> i

Cu
CU

CM CO
- 1
T
IO

LO
Ot

a
cn
-cm
CJ -* CM "O
N
N
N
r »

S"

Srf*

f

>^

»«

i x

A3

o z

O t
O t

A3

>^

OS M
tk
a

Sm"

Sm"

N

SM

Cd

>h"

o z

O t
O t

A3

SM

!m

C4

6S

s r
Srf

O l
ot

t o
Ot

CO IO
O

CM

CO IO
- I O
O CM

CM IO
- I O
O CM

>?

t n

A

CM LO
C5 CM

CM

SH

Cu
Cu

CM CO
I
—1 IO

CM

ef

^,

-.

A3

Sm

BM

N

Cd

O

Z

N

W

! n

CO LO
- L O
O CM

>^

eo lo
- I O
O CM

CM IO
- I O
O CM

>.

A
CM

IO
• I O
O CM

CM CO
- 1
— IO

8■

< n

t *

t l

H

B

c
o
4J
CL,
•H

cf
O
a

2

t l

8■a
r

K
t l
t
Ck

.8
u

co
z a

CJ (3

J-30

Cd

Cm
cd

3
Ck
T i
M
r t

a

"8
3
o

■fr
t l

s.

cj

t>
o
•O -H
kl

—i

o
eg
t l

LM

kl

5»
t l
t t
t i

CJ
r .

o

H▶

eo

CM CO
•
I
—, IO

cf cf

»
•

t l

01
CJ

(0
to
t l

t l
• a

t l
• a

kl
Ck

ki
kl

o

2
Ck »
kl

t l

cj

kl

c

ss

>,
14

,s
t.

eo
• h
«i

•rf
t l
eo

8,

•C

o■
k l

t l

eo
10
Pu

ft,

•r4

•8

«
a
ri

°

tH
m

•2r f

I O
tl to
00 CM

kl

Ti
ti

s

00

«
tl

a
n

fi

*

£

$

CO

CO

k i
T i
B

I

3

a

a
a
u
n
i.
a

a
a

ti
-o

kl

kl
eg
u
o
a
ki
cd

3B

■far
•o
i i

tl
u

t]
ti
kl

ki
U

cj
tn
IS
eg
•H
O

ki
tl

-i

Cj
5
■r f

O

8

C

o
cj

tl
uo
w
kl

S 3B
o
cj

eg
cj

kl

kl

/-.

8

8

3

o
ki
tl
3
cm
kl

•rf
IH
CJ

«
fc
CJ
9

5
u
tl
TD
eg
K
u
JS

kl
-rf

IM
-rf
CO

IH

-rf

eg

a

CO
•Z,
tl

8% 5 »: 5-8
k i

u

g

ti

O
ep
B

u u

tl
kl

tl
W

25
irf

tj
ti

o
E

.
*o*
Cl
a
3

▶.
Jl

at
u

i:
cj
1
CO

HH

a ri
t i

S.
eg

kl
>>
JO

fc
tw
O
k l

o
&
eg

"2

o

CJ

K

ki
x!
ki

t o
Ot

u
kl
-rf
3
CO

3
o

Ck

9
U
O

kl

k l
C

■lr

(kl

t i

•rfc

i. ao

s
n

t l
e o

• a
• o
t i
t i
LM

u
kl

u

JS

IO
Ot

»o•

S

eg

cn

»•

cf cf

C

u
kl
-H

c

U
o
Ot

u
tl
B

eo
B

2

ti
CO
eg

IO

•»

ki

Xt
cd

eo

°
•
00

s

ki
tl
B

k.

•*
o

•
M
ki

s

ti
Ck
O.

o

c n

m

ki
o

"*
•
M
ki

a

»o■

cf

>%
kl

ti
m
a

IO

c n
O

a
-rf

•3

IO
Ol

cf

47

o
■h
k l
ti
XI
•e
Ck

o

cf

CM CO
•
I
-. IO

a
eo

o

X
ki
O t
O t
X

O

IO
Ot
Cu
Cu

CM CO
- 1
-t
m

CM

CM

tO

I T I N
UHIN
■
-*

SM

O t

s f

_,
W CM

CM

m

•I
c n

A3

^

z
s*

tO

oz
sm"

o t

»•

S"

CM

-

M
o

eg
■£

O t

c n

■
re

jrf"

oO

s°

o

«
0-

CTN

3°

CM

CM

o
-a
ti
kt

•
b£

kl
IM

•

A

H
l<
CJ
i
u
5
cj
o
eg
rH
eg
q

fc
01

•

3

fi

.r

ti
W

fc
tl

Cl

ki
CJ

aa

i

«
uZX
klfc
cj
cj
q
k
>
»
•
fc
is
AOiJMH
o
a
cQikicjcQCuikt
fc
en
fc
o
».«
•cecQ

£ ti
cj -a

Enliilessi^
<->*t
O -» CM

CO

-»

r-N»«-t^>^^
IO M> 1—

60459680 G

/fPffey

DELIMITING AND TRANSMITTING TERMINAL INPUT K

You can transmit input to an application in normalized mode (also called character mode) or
transparent mode (also called binary mode). Appendix J describes how you delimit and
transmit input in transparent mode (refer to the DL and XL commands), however the default
input mode for all supported terminal classes is normalized mode. The remainder of this
appendix describes how to delimit and transmit terminal input in normalized mode under the
default conditions of the various terminal classes. (Appendix J also describes how you can
change these defaults).

PHYSICAL END-OF-LINE (LINE FEED)
In terminal classes 1 through 8, you can terminate a physical line of input (block) with a
line feed key. The network also terminates a physical line of output whenever the page
width of a terminal is reached and OP=PR (refer to the PW and OP command in appendix J).
The network may respond to the line feed key by advancing the cursor or carriage to the
beginning of the next line (refer to the CP command in appendix J).

LOGICAL END-OF-LINE (CARRIAGE RETURN)
Yo u t e r m i n a t e a l o g i c a l l i n e o f i n p u t w i t h a c a r r i a g e r e t u r n k e y. A l o g i c a l l i n e c a n
consist of one or more physical lines but not vice versa. The carriage return key advances
the cursor or carriage to the beginning of the next line.

MESSAGE TRANSMISSION
You transmit your input to the network with the message transmission key. For terminal
classes 1 through 8 operating in character or line mode (IN°KB), the message transmission
k e y i s t h e c a r r i a g e r e t u r n k e y. H e n c e , f o r t h e s e t e r m i n a l c l a s s e s , l o g i c a l l i n e s a r e
t r a n s m i t t e d s e p a r a t e l y. W h e n t h e d e l i m i t e r f o r t h e l o g i c a l e n d - o f - l i n e a n d t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
key are different (as with block mode devices, including PSN and mode 4 terminals), the
terminal stores logical lines until you press the transmission key. The terminal then sends
the single transmission consisting of multiple logical lines to the network. The network in
turn sends each logical line to the application separately. The message transmission key
always acts as a carriage return if not immediately preceded by one.
Table K-l shows the keys used by the various terminal classes to perform the three functions
just described.

60459680

C

K_!

.■^^V

Table K-l. Default Message Delimiters and Transmission Keys

Function
Terminal Class

1
2
3

Physical End-ofline (line feed)

Logical End-of-line
(carriage return)

LINE FEED

RETURN

RETURN

RETURN

RETURN

\

1
1

Message
Transmission Keyt

/KSSSjV

NEXT

NEXT

4

ATTN

RETURN

RETURN

5

NEW LINE

RETURN

RETURN

6

LF

CR

CR

7

LINE FEED

RETURN

RETURN

8

LF

RETURN

RETURN

9

Va r i e s t t

Va r i e s t t

Va r i e s t t

10

None

RETURN

SEND

11

None

RETURN

SEND

12

None

NEW LINE

ETX

13

None

NEW LINE

ETX

14

Va r i e s t t

Va r i e s t t

Va r i e s t t

15

None

NEW LINE

SEND

16

None

EM

EOT

17

None

EM

EOT

18

None

Enter

Enter

tlf in block mode, refer to terminal documentation for tei■minal key equivalences.
Those listed are for character and line modes.
ttTerminals operating under HASP protocol use different keyrs for this purpose.
....

K-2

60459680 D

/f^v

PASSIVE PROCEDURsES

Passive procedures are procedures that do not have the parameter-prompt ing capability. If
the procedure call contains errors, the job step terminates and the procedure is not
executed. In most respects, however, the structure and behavior of passive and
parameter-prompt ing procedures are highly similar. This appendix shows only the areas in
which passive procedures differ from the parameter-prompting varieties. Section 4 contains
a detailed description of parameter-prompting procedures.

.PROC DIRECTIVE
This format of the .PROC directive does not provide for parameter prompting nor will the
system give parameter descriptions or other help.
Format:
PROC,pname,p1,p2,...,pn.
Parameters

Detseription

pname Name of the procedure; one to seven alphanumeric characters. As with
file names, the name of a procedure should begin with a letter.
Pi Optional formal parameters whose keywords are used in the b?dy of the
procedure. Depending on the parameters specified in the procedure call,
keywords in the procedure body can be removed, left as they are,
replaced by a value specified in the procedure call, or replaced by
first or second default values as specified on the procedure header
parameter (refer to keyword substitution in this secticn).
The maxjtaua number of procedure header keywords is defined by the
installation. The default is 50.
The following are the acceptable formats for pj.
Format

Example

keyword
FILE1
keyword^
FILE1=
key wo r d=de fa ul 11
FILEl-LGO
keyword=defaultl/default2
FILE1=LG0/0LD
keyword=/de fa ul t2
FILE WOLD
keyword»#DATA (CDC graphics: keyword= 5 DATA) FILE1=#DATA
keyword=#FILE (CDC graphics: keyword^ = FILE) FILE1=#FILE
keyword

60459680 C

A 1- to 10-character keyword.

L-l

/<«$k

Parameters

Description
d e f a u l t l A 1 - t o 4 0 - c h a r a c t e r fi r s t d e f a u l t v a l u e . I f
defaultl contains special characters, it must be
$-delimited. This default value replaces the
keyword in the procedure body if this parameter is
omitted from the procedure call.
default2 A 1- to 40-character second default value. If
default2 contains special characters, it must be
$-delimited. This default value replaces the
keyword if the procedure call specifies a parameter
value identical to the keyword.

defaultl and default2 could be either of the following special values.
#FILE Special default value used for keyword if an
overriding value is not specified on the procedure
call. If this default value is used, keyword within
the procedure body references the record that
immediately follows the procedure record on the file.
If the procedure resides on a library and is called
by a name call form of the BEGIN command, keyword is
replaced by a null value.
/ / D ATA S p e c i a l d e f a u l t v a l u e u s e d f o r k e y w o r d i f a n
overriding value is not specified on the procedure
call. If this default value is used, keyword within
the procedure body references a data file created
within the procedure by the .DATA directive (refer
to .DATA directive in section 4).

PROCEDURE AND PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
You cannot include the .HELP or .ENDHELP directive in your procedure body. Hence, you
cannot provide the procedure caller with a description of the procedure or any of its
parameters unless the caller has already entered an error-free procedure call.

PARAMETER MATCHING
When a procedure is called, the system must match each parameter on the call command to a
parameter on the procedure header command. The system uses two methods of parameter
matching; order-dependent and order-independent.
ORDER-DEPENDENT PARAMETER MATCHING MODE

Parameter matching always begins in order-dependent mode (refer to Order-Independent
Parameter Matching Mode for information on changing parameter matching modes). The system
compares, in order, each parameter on the BEGIN command with the parameter in that position
on the procedure header directive. The system then substitutes the selected parameters into
the procedure body.
All possible parameter substitutions in order-dependent mode are summarized in table L-l. ySE!?s\
The table shows each parameter format on the BEGIN command, each parameter format on the
procedure header, and the substitution resulting from each combination. In the table the
L-2

60459680

C

jgspP^N

word value indicates that the parameter in the BEGIN command (called value) is different
than the corresponding keyword and/or defaults on the procedure header. Keyword in the
BEGIN Command Parameter Format heading means the keyword in the BEGIN command is identical
to the keyword in the procedure header parameter.
Assuming that all parameter matches between the BEGIN command and the procedure header are
valid for order-dependent mode (table L-l), the system completes parameter matching in
order-dependent mode.
In order-dependent mode, the system ignores excess parameters on the BEGIN command.
Use table L-l with the following examples to clarify the meaning of the table entries
(keyword, defaultl, default.2, value, and null).
Examples: Parameter Matching in Order-Dependent Mode.
Procedure on File
Named MYFILE
.PR0C,SAMPL1,L,M,N=XY.
REWIND, L,A,M,N.

Call and Substitution

Explanation

BEGIN,SAMPL1,MYFILE.
yields
REWIND,L,A,M,XY.

When parameters are omitted on
the BEGIN command, the system
uses the defaults from the
procedure header (L, M, and XY).

BEGIN,SAMPL1,MYFILE,„N.
yields
REWIND,L,A,M,N.

Omitted parameters indicate use
of the procedure header defaults
(L and M). N overrides the pro
cedure header default (XY).

BE GIN,SAMPL1,MYFILE,$*$,C.
yields
REWIND,*,A,C,XY.

Special characters must be
$-delimited. The asterisk (*)
replaces M. The system uses the
procedure header default (XY)
for the omitted parameter.

.PR0C,SAMPL2,LFN1=,LFN2, BEGIN,SAMPL2,MYFILE.
S B F = / S B F.
yields
C O P Y S B F, L F N 1 , L F N 2 . C 0 P Y „ L F N 2 .

BEGIN,SAMPL2,MYFILE,„SBF.
yields
COPYSBF,, LFN2.

Omitted parameters indicate use
of procedure header defaults
(LFN2 and null substitution for
LFNI and SBF).
Omitted parameters indicate use
of procedure header defaults
(null and LFN2). The BEGIN
command parameter, SBF, indi
cates use of the second default
of the SBF procedure header
parameter (SBF). The linking
character ( ) connects COPY
and SBF to make COPYSBF.

BEGIN,SAMPL2,MYFILE,F0RMS,0UTPUT. FORMS replaces LFNI and OUTPUT
yields
replaces LFN2. Since the third
COPY,FORMS,OUTPUT.
parameter is omitted, the system

uses the procedure header de
fault (null).

.PROC,SAMPL3,PFN,
P1=/$M=W$.
ATTACH,PFN/P1.

60459680 C

BEGIN,SAMPL3,MYFILE,TAXES,P1.
yields
ATTACH,TAXES/M=W.

TAXES replaces PFN and the char
acter string M=W replaces Pl.

L-3

Table L-l. Parameter Substitution In Order-Dependent Mode
BEGIN Command Parameter Format

Procedure
Header
Parameter
Format

omitted

keyword

value

$value$

keyword

keyword

keyword

value

value

keyword^

null

keyword

value

value

keyword=defaultl

defaultl

keyword

value

value

keyword=defaultl/default2f

defaultl

default2

error

error

^ Switches keyword substitution to order-independent mode for all subsequent parameters.

Example 1:
The following procedure is on file PROCFIL. It prepares a file for processing. If the file
is local, it is rewound. If it is not local, the system searches for the file in your
permanent file catalog. If the file is not found, the procedure reverts and aborts.
.PROC,PREPARE,FNAME=,M=R.
IF, FILE (FNAME,AS),PREP1.
REWIND, FNAME.
REVERT. FNAME PREPARED.
ENDIF,PREP1.
ATTACH, FNAME/#M=M,NA.
I F, F I L E ( F N A M E , . N 0 T. A S ) , P R E P 2 .
GET,FNAME/NA.
IF, FILE (FNAME,. NOT. AS ),PREP3.
REVERT,ABORT. FNAME NOT FOUND.
ENDIF,PREP3.
ENDIF, PREP 2.
REVERT. FNAME PREPARED.

EXIT.
REVERT,ABORT. PREPARE ERRORS.

Prepare file TEST with the following command.
BEGIN,PREPARE„TEST.

L-4

60459680 C

Since PROCFIL is the default file, it does not have to be specified and is noted by
successive commas.
The following is a segment of the dayfile that results when the BEGIN command is processed
08.26.45. $BEGIN,PREPARE„TEST.
08.26.46.IF,FILE(TEST,AS),PREP1.
08.26.46. ENDIF,PREP1.
08.26.46.ATTACH,TEST/M=R,NA.
08.26.46. TEST IS INDIRECT ACCESS, AT 000121
08.26.46.IF,FILE(TEST,.NOT.AS),PREP2.
08.26.46.GET,TEST/NA.
08.26.47.IF,FILE (TEST,.NOT.AS),PREP3.
08.26.47. ENDIF,PREP3.
08.26.47.ENDIF,PREP2.
08.26.47.REVERT. TEST PREPARED.

Example 2: Parameter Matching in Nested Procedures (Order-Dependent Parameter Matching Mode)
The substitutions made in a procedure that calls a second procedure are shown in figure
L-l. The resultant dayfile is shown on the right side of the figure.
GET,PROGRAM1.
BEGIN,EXECUTE,PFILE1,PR0GRAM1,PRINT.

PFILE1
.PR0C,EXECUTE,NAME,0UT.
FTN5,I=NAME,L=0UT.
LGO.
IF,EF=0,DR0P.
BEGIN,LISTING,PFILE2,0UT.
ENDIF, DROP.

PFILE2
.PROC,LISTING,OUTFILE=0UT.
REWIND,0UTFILE.
C 0PY SB F, OUT F ILE , OUT PUT.

RES ULTANT DAYFILE
16. 01.08. GET,PR0GRM1.
16. 0 1 . 0 8 .BEGIN,EXECUTE,PFILE1,PR0GRM1,PRINT.
16. 01.09. FTN5,I=PR0GRM1,L=PRINT.
16. 01.10.
.043 CP SECONDS COMPILATION TIME
16. 01.10. LGO.
16. 0 1 . 11 .
STOP
16. 0 1 . 11 .
.038 CP SECONDS EXECUTION TIME
16. 01.12. IF,EF=0,DR0P.
16. 01.12. BEGIN,LISTING,PFILE2,PRINT.
16. 01.12. REWIND,PR INT.
16. 01.13. COPYSBF,PRINT,OUTPUT.
16. 01.13. END OF INFORMATION ENCOUNTERED.
16. 01.13. $REVERT.CCL
16. 01.13. ENDIF,DROP.
16. 01.13. $REVERT.CCL

Figure L-l. Keyword Substitution in Two Procedures

60459680 C

L-5

»^^^v

ORDER-INDEPENDENT PARAMETER MATCHING MODE

The system switches to order-indpendent mode to match the remainder of the parameters if in
comparison of a BEGIN command parameter and a procedure header parameter one of the
following occurs.
• A BEGIN command parameter is in the format keyword" or keyword=value.
• A procedure header command parameter is in the format keyword=default/default2.
For each BEGIN command parameter, matching always begins in order-dependent mode. Once in
order-independent mode, the system matches each keyword of the BEGIN command to the
identical keyword in the procedure header command, regardless of order.
The following commands illustrate the parameter combinations that result in switching from
order-dependent mode to order-independent mode.
Procedure on Default
File PROCFIL
.PROC, SALES,TAX,TOTAL=,
FLAG=A.
COPYL, TAX,TOTAL, HOLD,, FLAG.
REPLACE,H0LD=TAX.

Call and Substitution
BEGIN,SALES„TAX,TOTAL=SUM,FLAG.
yields
COPYL,TAX,SUM,HOLD„A.
REPLACE,HOLD=TAX.

,PROC,TAXES,TAX=FED/MN, BEGIN,TAXES„TAX,DEDUCT.
D E D U C T, F L A G = A .
yields
COPYL,TAX,DEDUCT,HOLD„FLAG. COPYL,MN,DEDUCT,HOLD„A.
R E P L A C E , H 0 L D = TA X . R E P L A C E , H 0 L D = M N .

Explanation
Parameter matching starts in
order-dependent mode. The
BEGIN parameter TOTAL=SUM
switches the mode to orderindependent mode. FLAG is
then matched in orderindependent mode, which
yields A.
The TAX=FED/MN procedure
parameter switches the mode
to order-independent mode.
All parameters will be
matched in order-independent
mode.

All possible parameter substitutions in order-independent mode are summarized in table L-2.
The table shows each parameter format on the BEGIN command, each parameter format on the
procedure header command, and the substitution resulting from each combination.
In the table the word value indicates that the parameter in the BEGIN command (called value)
is different than the keyword and/or defaults on the procedure header command. Use table
L-2 with the following examples to clarify the meaning of the table entries (keyword,
defaultl, default2, value, and null).

''*"^\

L-6

60459680 C

Examples of Parameter Matching:
Procedure on Default
File PROCFIL
.PROC,SAMPL1,L,M,N=XY.
REWIND,L,A,M,N.

Call and Substitution
BEGIN, SAM PL1,,L=SW ITCH.
yields
REWIND,SWITCH,A,M,XY.

Explanation
The L=SWITCH BEGIN parameter
switches parameter matching mode
to order-independent mode.
Order-independent mode uses the
procedure header defaults for
omitted BEGIN parameters. Orderdependent and order-independent
modes work identically for
omitted BEGIN parameters.

r

BEGIN,SAMPL1,,L=CHANG,M,N.
or
BEGIN,SAMPL1„L=CHANG,N,M.
yields
REWIND,CHANG,A,M,XY.

The L=CHANG parameter switches
parameter matching to orderindependent mode. In orderindependent mode the order of the
BEGIN parameters does not
matter. M matches with M, and
the N BEGIN keyword indicates
substitution of the procedure
header default (XY).

BEGIN,SAMPL1„L=FLIP,M=B,N=Z.
yields
REWIND,FLIP,A,B,Z.

BEGIN parameters in the form
keyword53value always override
procedure header parameters.
FLIP replaces L, B replaces M,
and Z replaces XY.

.PROC,TRACE,IN,OUT,
TC=E0I,N=1.
COPY,IN,OUT,„TC,N.

BEGIN,TRACE„IN=,OUT=HOLD,N=.
yields
COPY,,HOLD,,,EOI,.

The IN= parameter switches
parameter matching to orderindependent mode. All BEGIN
commands in the form keyword=
use null substitution.

.PR0C,SAMPL4,FILE1,
EC=B6/A6,DC=LP,REP=0.
REWIND,FILE1.
ROUTE,FILE1,#DC=DC,
#EC=EC,#REP=REP.

BEGIN,SAMPL4„C0IN.
yields
REWIND,COIN.
ROUTE,C0IN,DC=LP,EC=B6,REP=0.

COIN is substituted in orderdependent mode. EC=B6/A6
switches the mode to orderindependent mode. The omitted
parameters indicate use of the
procedure header defaults (orderdependent and order-independent
modes work alike for omitted
BEGIN parameters).

BEGIN, SAMPL4„C0IN,EC,DC,REP.
yields
REWIND,COIN.
ROUTE,COIN,DC=LP,EC=A6,REP=0.

EC=B6/A6 switches the mode to
order-independent mode. Specify
ing the keyword on the BEGIN
command produces the same result
as omitting them (refer to pre
vious example) except for the
double default procedure param
eter, EC=B6/A6. If EC is
omitted, B6 is used. If EC is
spec ifled, A6 is used.

60459680 C

L-7

Table L-2. Parameter Substitution In Order-Independent Mode
BEGIN Command Parameter Format

Procedure
Header
Parameter
Format

value
or
$value$t

omitted

keyword

keyword=

keyword=value

keyword

keyword

keyword

null

value

error

keyword=

null

null

null

value

error

keyword=default1

defaultl

defaultl

null

value

error

keyword=default1/
default2

defaultl

default2

null

value

error

t Assumes the parameter is entered under order-independent mode.

Example 1:
The following procedure is the same procedure as Example 2 in Order-Dependent Parameter
Matching Mode. It resides on file PROCFIL. It routes a specified file (FNAME) to the
specified equipment (default is any CDC-graphics line printer).
.PROC,PRINTR,FNAME,REP=0,DC=LP,EC=B6.
REWIND,FNAME.
ROUTE,FNAME,=DC,#REP=REP,#EC=EC.
REVERT. FNAME ROUTED.
EXIT.
REVERT,ABORT. PRINTR PARAMETER ERRORS.
The following command calls the procedure PRINTR. The system matches COLOR in
order-dependent form. DC=SB switches the mode to order-independent mode. SB indicates the
file is to be punched.
BEGIN,PRINTR,,COLOR,DC=SB,EC=SB.
The following is a segment of the dayfile that results when the BEGIN command is processed.
15.27.26.$BEGIN,PRINTR„C0L0R,DC=SB,EC=SB.
15.27.27.REWIND,COLOR.
L5.27.27.R0UTE,COL0R,DC=SB,REP=0,EC=SB.
15.27.27.ROUTE COMPLETE.
15.27.28.REVERT. COLOR ROUTED.

L-8

60459680 H

Example 2: Parameter Matching in Nested Procedures (Order-Dependent and Order-Independent
Parameter Matching Modes)
As shown in figure L-2, procedures ROUT and PREPARE reside on the default file PROCFIL. A
BEGIN command within ROUT calls PREPARE. In procedure ROUT the substitution for the FNAME
parameter (TEST) is passed to procedure PREPARE by the BEGIN command. The resulting dayfile
i s o n t h e r i g h t s i d e o f fi g u r e L - 2 .
BEGIN,R0UT„TEST,EC=A9,SBF.
PROCFIL

.PROC,ROUT,FNAME=L,SBF=/SBF,REP=0,
EC=B6,DC=LP.
BEGIN,PREPARE„ #FNAME=FNAME.
CO PY_SBF, FNAME, HOLD.
REWIND,HOLD.
IF,$EC$.EQ.$A9$,JUMP.
FCOPY,P=HOLD,N=TEMP.
RENAME,HOLD=TEMP.
ENDIF, JUMP.
REWIND,HOLD.
ROUTE,HOLD,#DC=DC,#EC=EC,#REP=REP.
REVERT. FNAME -> PRINTER.
EXIT.
REVERT,ABORT. ROUT ERRORS.
-EOR-

Resultant Dayfi le
15.27.50.$BEGIN,R0UT„TEST,EC=A9,SBF.
15.27.50 .BEGIN,PREPARE„FNAME=TEST.
15.27.51.IF,FILE(TEST,AS),PREP1.
15.27.51.REWIND,TEST.
15.27. 51. REVERT. TEST PREPARED.
15.27.51.COPYSBF,TEST,HOLD.
15.27.52. EOI ENCOUNTERED.
15.27.52.REWIND,H0LD.
15.27.52.IF,$A9$.EQ.$A9$,JUMP.
15.27.52.FCOPY,P=HOLD,N=TEMP.
15.27.52. FCOPY COMPLETE.
15.27.52.RENAME,H0LD=TEMP.
15.27.52.ENDIF,JUMP.
15.27.52.REWIND,H0LD.
15.27.52.R0UTE,H0LD,DC=LP,EC=A9,REP=0.
15.27.53. ROUTE COMPLETE.
15.27. 53. REVERT. TEST -> PRINTER.

-EOR-

.PROC,PREPARE,FNAME=,M=R.
IF,FILE(FNAME,AS),PREP1.
REWIND,FNAME.
REVERT. FNAME PREPARED.
ENDIF,PREP1.
ATTACH,FNAME/#M=M,NA.
IF,FILE (FNAME,.NOT.AS),PREP2.
GET,FNAME/NA.
IF,FILE(FNAME,.N0T.AS),PREP3.
REVERT,ABORT. FNAME NOT FOUND.
ENDIF,PREP3.
ENDIF,PREP2.
REVERT. FNAME PREPARED.
EXIT.
REVERT,ABORT. PREPARE ERRORS.
BEGIN calls procedure ROUT. The SBF=/SBF parameter switches parameter matching to
order-independent mode. The first command of ROUT is a BEGIN command that calls pro
cedure PREPARE. The parameters are matched in order-independent mode. PREPARE readies
a fi l e f o r p r o c e s s i n g . I f t h e fi l e i s l o c a l , i t i s r e w o u n d . I f i t i s n o t l o c a l , t h e
s y s t e m s e a r c h e s f o r t h e fi l e i n y o u r p e r m a n e n t fi l e c a t a l o g . I f t h e fi l e i s n o t f o u n d ,
th e pro ce d u re re ve rts a n d a b orts. If the file is found, processing continues with the
second command in procedure ROUT. The file is prepared for printing. Since the file is
to be printed with the ASCII graphic 95-character set (EC=A9), the file must be changed
to a 12-bit ASCII code file (FCOPY). The procedure then routes the file to the printer
and reverts to the command following the BEGIN command.

C*

Figure L-2. Keyword Substitution in Nested Procedures
60459680 C

L-9

/S^JN

PA P E R

TA P E

O P E R AT I O N S

M

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Paper tape is used for preparing input off-line (when, time is not charged) and entering it
on-line (when time is charged). This ensures accuracy and speed when most needed. An input
tape can include programs, data, and commands. Accordingly, it is possible for the entire
terminal operation, after login, to be run from paper tape.

^

TELETYPEWRITER
This discussion assumes a typical teletypewriter (model 33) with a paper tape punch and a
paper tape reader.
The paper tape punch has four buttons with the following labels and use.
Button
ON
OFF

Turns
Turns

Description
the
the

punch
punch

on.
off.

REL. Releases the feedwheel so you can freely move the tape through the punch
head.
B . S P. B a c k s p a c e s t h e t a p e o n e r o w o f h o l e s e a c h t i m e i t i s p r e s s e d . T h i s i s
used to make corrections when preparing a tape off-line (refer to
Corrections in this sec tion).
The paper tape reader has one switch with four positions. Position labels and use are as
follows:
Position

Pcscript

ion

S TA R T S t a r t s t h e r e a d e r. A f t e r s w i t c h I s m o m e n t a r i l y h e l d i n t h i s p o s i t i o n ,
it snaps back to the AUTO position and reading continues.
STOP Immediately stops reading.
AUTO This position is used in conjunction with the input and processing of
commands and data in tape mode (refer to Tape Mode in this section). It
allows the tape reader to be turned off and on so that processing of
each command or line of data can be completed before additional input is
entered.
FREE Releases the feedwheel so you can freely slide the tape in and out of
the read head.
NOTE

On teletypewriters lacking an AUTO position,
reading must be manually restarted each time
it has been stopped.
60459680

C

M-l

CONTROL CHARACTERS
Each line of input from paper tape must end with a particular sequence of control
characters. These are punched by functional keys on the teletypewriter keyboard. The
control characters used with paper tape are as follows:
Char

ac

ter

De

scr

i

p

t

ion

@ Message terminator. This is the RETURN key on the model 33. It
moves the print head to the beginning of the line and informs IAF
that this line of input is completed.
LF Line feed. This is the LINE FEED key on the keyboard. It advances
the paper roller one line. In normal mode, IAF sends a signal that
initiates this feed; in tape mode, this signal is not sent and is
therefore required on tape.
CTRL/X-OFF X-off. The appearance of this character on the tape during reading
turns the tape reader off. This character is punched by holding
down the CTRL key and pressing the X-OFF key.
RO(n) Rubout. This is
row of
hence
The n
should
NUL

Null.

This

the RUB OUT key on the keyboard. It punches a full
holes. This row is interpreted as null by the system, and
this character is used for spacing and overpunching errors.
parameter specifies the minimum number of times this character
be punched in sequence.

is the ASCII character represented
(blank tape). It may be used as a fill character.

by

a

feed

hole

only

^

INPUT LINES
The following line formats are used to enter programs, data, and commands. The left half of
the page shows an example of the input; the right half of the page shows the control
characters that immediately follow the last input character. Each line is terminated with
three rubouts to provide separation from the next line and to allow time for the carriage to
return to the left margin. While it is possible that adequate separation is provided with
less
than
three
rubouts,
this
is
the
recommended
number.

,<^*\

PROGRAM UNE
100

PROGRAM

TEST

@)

LF

R0(3)

DATA LINE
?

12.44,18.31,29.08

@

LF

CTRL/X-OFF

R0(3)

(The ? is supplied by IAF. The remainder of the line comes from the tape.
X-OFF turns the reader off to allow this data to be processed before the next
line is read.)
COMMAND LINE
C AT L I S T,

L0»F

@

LF

CTRL/X-OFF

R0(3)

(X-OFF turns the reader off to allow processing of the command to be completed '*s^\
before the next line is read.)
M-2

60459680

C

r

PUNCHING TAPE OFF-LINE
The following procedure is used to punch a tape when the teletypewriter terminal is not
logged in.
1. Place the teletypewriter in local mode.
2. Turn the paper tape punch on by pressing the ON button located on the punch.
3. Prepare a tape leader of about 30 rubouts (3 inches) either by simultaneously
pressing the RUB OUT and REPT keys or, if the terminal has the capability by
punching
blank
tape.
'
4. With a pencil, trace the arrow above the punch output onto the tape. This
i d e n t i fi e s t h e s t a r t o f t h e t a p e f o r r e a d i n g . ( I t i s p o s s i b l e t o p u t t h e t a p e i n
the reader backwards.)
5 . Ty p e i n t h e i n p u t l i n e s w i t h t h e i r a p p r o p r i a t e c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r s .
6. Add a 3-inch trailer of rubouts or blank tape and tear the tape off.
7 . Tu r n t h e t e l e t y p e w r i t e r o ff .

TAPE MODE
To read and process data and commands from tape, it is necessary that the tape reader be
turned off, to allow time for processing, then be restarted. By entering tape mode, you
enable IAF to synchronize tape input with its processing.f
You enter tape mode by using the TRMDEF command (section 8) or a terminal definition command
(appendix K) to change the input device to a paper tape reader. To do this with the TRMDEF
command, enter:
TRMDEF,IN=PT
To perform the same operation with a terminal definition command, press the ESC keytt
(assuming a model 33 teletypewriter is being used) and enter
IN=PT
The TRMDEF command can specify the input device to be in character mode (PT or KB) only to
specify the input device is in transparent input mode (XP, XK, or X), a terminal definition
command must be used. For all other paper tape operations, the TRMDEF command and terminal
definition commands can be used interchangeably. The remainder of this section will use the
TRMDEF command in examples.
The network acknowledges entry into tape mode with the response "IN ACCEPTED." If the
reader switch is in the AUTO position, reading begins automatically; if the reader switch is
in the OFF position, reading does not begin until it is manually initiated by momentarily
moving the switch to START.
tYou cannot use paper tape mode from terminals connected to a packet switching network
^ if OVi ) •

ffThe ESC key is the default control character for terminal class 1. It must be pressed to
signal the entry of a terminal definition command. Because the control character differs
for some terminals, refer to appendix J for the default values for all terminal classes.

60459680

C

M_3

/C^^K

You can exit from tape mode by using the TRMDEF command or a terminal definition command to
change the input device back to the keyboard. This can be done with TRMDEF by entering:
TRMDEF, IN=KB
The paper tape punch can also be defined as the output device using the TRMDEF command or a
terminal definition command. This can be done by entering:
TRMDEF, OP»PT
You specify this command to enter tape mode for out put ting information to paper tape. This
mode provides the proper X-OFF characters when punching the tape. You can exits this mode
by using the TRMDEF command or a terminal definition command to change the output device
back to a printer. This can be done by entering:
TRMDEF, OP=PR

PUNCHING A TAPE ON-LINE
To punch a tape with information already contained in a system file, the following procedure
is used.
1. If not logged in, log in.
2. If not in tape mode, enter TRMDEF,OP=PT.
3. Type in LIST if the primary file is to be punched; type in UST,F=lfn if a local
file other than the primary file is to be punched. Do not press @.
4. Turn the punch on.
5. Run a leader of rubouts or blank tape.
6. Press @)» The file is listed and punched simultaneously. The network adds the
appropriate control characters at the end of each line.
7.

Run

a

trailer

of

rubouts

or

blank

tape.

CORRECTIONS
When punching a tape off-line, corrections can be made by backspacing over the incorrect
punch (use the B.SP. button on the punch) and punching a rubout over the error (use the RUB
OUT key on the keyboard). Then punch in the correct character.
It is also possible to make corrections by using the backspace key as in normal, on-line
operation. However, the error and/or any overtyping appear in the printout. When line
numbers are being used, an erroneous line can be retyped (and repunched) with the same line
n\mber. Although the erroneous and correct versions appear in the printout, IAF retains
only the last occurrence of the specific numbered line during processing.

M-4

60459680

C

y<«^

0^\.
Example:
In this example, the input tape contains only program lines,
before and after the tape is read.

Commands and input are typed

The following is the tape as punched. The left half of the page shows the printed copy
produced as the tape is punched; the right half of the page shows the control characters
entered at the end of each line but not printed.
100
110
120
130
140
150
160

LET FACT0R=1
INPUT N
FOR 1=1 TO N
LET FACT0R=FACT0R*I
PRINT FACTOR
NEXT I
END

LF
LF
<£3> LF
@ LF
LF
LF
LF

R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(30)

To demonstrate the use of this tape, you must be logged in under the null subsystem. You
position the tape in the reader and set the reader switch to AUTO. The following is the
printout that results. The right half of the page contains explanations of the action.
basic -^
READY.

By typing this command, you enter
the BASIC subsystem.

new, f act 1 -**■

You type in this line to establish a
new primary file with the name FACT1,

trmdef,in=pt

As soon as this command is typed in
and takes effect, the tape reader
goes on and the entire tape (seven
lines) is read in. The
reader runs through the trailer of
rubouts and then turns itself off.

100 LET FACTORS
110 INPUT N
120 FOR 1=1 TO N
130 LET FACT0R=FACT0R*I
140 PRINT FACTOR
150 NEXT I
160 END
READY.
trmdef,in=kb

You change the input device back to
the keyboard.

READY.

run
ILLEGAL STATEMENT AT 100
ILLEGAL STATEMENT AT 130
ILLEGAL STATEMENT AT 140
BASIC COMPILATION ERRORS

Z^PP^

100 let f=1 —
130 let f=f*i
140 print f

60459680 C

■You type in RUN and receive the
diagnostics
shown. BASIC variables cannot be
more than two characters.

You type in the corrective coding
shown.

M-5

run
? 5
1
2
6
24
120
RUN COMPLETE,
trmdef,op=pt -

READY,
list

You initiate another run with the
RUN command. IAF replies with ?.
You enter a 5 and receive the
desired printout.

-You want to punch a new tape
containing this corrected program.
You select paper tape as your output
mode.
-You type LIST but do not press the
@. You turn on the paper tape
punch and run off a leader of blank
t a p e . Yo u t h e n p r e s s t h e | @ . T h i s
punches a CR on the tape and the
network responds with LF and NUL
punches. These three punches are
not part of the file, and you must
replace them with rubouts if you use
the tape for subsequent input.

100 LET F=1 -*
110 INPUT N
120 FOR 1=1 TO N
130 LET F=F*I
140 PRINT F
150 NEXT I
160 END

IAF begins the listing with a
sequence of CR, NUL(n), LF, and
NUL(m).t BRIEF mode suppresses this
sequence.

READY. -*■

IAF punches READY, after it has
p u n c h e d t h e c o n t e n t s o f t h e fi l e . A
CR-NUL(n)-LF-NUL(m) punch sequence
precedes and follows this message.

IAF punches the tape as it lists the
fi l e . I A F t e r m i n a t e s e a c h l i n e w i t h
CR, NUL(n), LF, NUL(m), DC3, and
NUL(2).ft

flf you enter this tape as input, the CR and LF should be rubbed out, so that the system
does not read them as an empty line. The system ignores all NULs.
.ttRefer to table K-l in appendix K to find n, the carriage return idle count, and m, the
l i n e fe e d i d l e c o u n t, fo r y o u r te r m i nal class.

M-6

60459680 C

Example:
In this example, the input tape contains not only a program but also the commands to
execute, modify, list, and save that program and the input data used by that program.
The following is the complete tape as punched. The left half of the page gives the printed
copy produced as the tape is punched; the right half of the page shows the control
characters entered at the end of each line but not printed.
FORTRAN
NEW,DEMO
100 PROGRAM DEMO
110 DIMENSION 11(5)

120 READ 10, (II(J),J=1,5)
130 10 FORMAT (515)

R0C30)

@ :LF
@LF
@ ,LF
_@LF

@ LF

140 PRINT 20, (II(J),J=1,5)
150 20 F0RMAT(5I10)

@LF
<§). IF

160 END
RUN

® LF
®LF
@ LF
^®LF
@> LF
®LF
@ LF
®LF
@ LF
@)LF
@ LF
©,LF

1111122222333334444455555
SAVE,DEM0=TAPE1
135 DO 1 1=1,5
137 II(I)=11(I)+4444
139 1 CONTINUE
RESEQ,100,5
LIST
RUN
1111122222333334444455555
REPLACE,DEM0=TAPE1

CTRL/X-OFF
CTRL/X-OFF
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
CTRL/X-OFF
CTRL/X-OFF
CTRL/X-OFF
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
CTRL/X-OFF
CTRL/X-OFF
CTRL/X-OFF
CTRL/X-OFF
CTRL/X-OFF

R0(3)
R0(3)

R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)

R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(3)
R0(30)

To execute this tape, you log In to IAF, position the tape in the reader, set the reader
switch to AUTO, type the command TRMDEF,IN=PT and, upon pressing|@ , start the reading of
the tape. You then observe the remainder of the action without intervention.

/»»»

60459680 C

M-7

The following is the printout of the execution of the tape,
contains explanations of the action.

The right half of the page

FORTRAN

When this line is read, the reader
stops. As soon as FORTRAN is
established as the current
subsystem, IAF turns the reader back
on.

NEW,DEMO

When this line is read, the reader
s t o p s . A f t e r a n e w p r i m a r y fi l e
called DEMO is established, IAF
turns the reader back on.

100 PROGRAM DEMO ^e110 DIMENSION 11(5)
120 READ 10, (II(J),J=1,5)
130 10 FORMAT (515)
140 PRINT 20, (II(J),J=1,5)
150 20 FORMAT(5110)
160 END
RUN -^

•The seven lines of the program are
read without interruption.

After the command to run the program
i s r e a d , t h e r e a d e r i s t u r n e d o ff .

? 1111122222333334444455555

After processing reaches the READ
statement (line 120) and after IAF
prints ?, IAF turns the reader on,
and the line of data is read. Then
the reader is turned off to allow
data processing.
Resulting printout:

11111 2 2 2 2 2

33333

44444

55555

SRU 0.130 UNTS.
/*^\

RUN COMPLETE.
SAVE,DEM0=TAPE1 -«

After the SAVE command is read, the
r e a d e r i s t u r n e d o ff . A c o p y o f t h e
program DEMO is made an indirect
access permanent file with the name
TAPE1. Then the reader is turned
back on.

135 DO 1 1=1,5 -«
137 II(I)=II(I)+4444
139 1 CONTINUE

These three lines of modification
are read in from the tape without
interruption.

RESEQ,100,5 -*-

After the RESEQ command is read, the
reader is turned off. When resequencing is accomplished according
t o s p e c i fi c a t i o n s , t h e r e a d e r i s
turned back on.

SRU

0.576 UNTS.

> ^ K

M-8

60459680 C

L I S T- *
00100 PROGRAM DEMO
00105 DIMENSION 11(5)
00110 READ 10, (II(J),J=1,5)
00115 10 F0RMAT(5I5)
00120 DO 1 1=1,5

-After the LIST command is read from
tape, the tape reader is turned
off. Then IAF lists the primary
fi l e w h i c h c o n t a i n s t h e p r e v i o u s
modifications in resequenced
format. When the listing is com
pleted, the reader is turned on
again.

00125 II(I)=II(I)+4444
00130 1 CONTINUE
00135 PRINT 20, (II(J),J=1,5)
00140 20 FORMAT(5110)
00145 END
RUN-*-

-After the RUN command is read in,
the reader is turned off, and the
modified program is executed. IAF
prints the ? and then turns the
reader on. The line of data is read
in from the tape and the reader
t u r n e d o ff . T h e d a t a i s p r o c e s s e d
and results printed.

? 1111122222333334444455555

15555

26666

37777

48888

59999

SRU 1.185 UNTS.
RUN COMPLETE.
REPLACE,DEM0=TAPE1 -*■

-This last command is read in and the
reader turned off. A copy of this
revised version of DEMO replaces the
old one that was made an indirect
access permanent file under the name
TA P E 1 . I t i s n o w t h e i n d i r e c t
access permanent file tha t is
referenced by the name TAPE1.
The reader is turned back on. It
runs through the trailer of rubouts
and then turns itself off.
If, at this point, you have no more
tapes to run, exit tape mode by
entering the TRMDEF,IN=KB command.

60459680 C

M-9

ji.

.

.

;

i

0*%

MASS STORAGE DEVICE STATISTICS

The mass storage devices supported by the system and the size o f b l o c k s a l l o c a t e d f o r d i r e c t
access files are as follows:
Device
Code

Block Size
Device

PRUs

CM Words Characters

DBn 885-42 Disk Storage Subsystem
(full-track; l\
Index-8

60459680 H

/P&>S

/JfSV^

j fl f ? w t r * \

Lockout of messages J-20
Logical device 2-6; C-8
L o g i c a l i d e n t i fi e r o f m a i n f r a m e ( L I D )
7-36; C-8
Logical line 16-3; K-l
Logical record C-8
Logical track 2-6
Login 3-2,5; 8-28; C-8
LOGIN command 8-28
Logout 3-4,5; 8-21,29; C-8
LOGOUT command 3-4; 8-29
Logout display 3-4; 8-20
Loopback 7-38
Loosely coupled network (LCN) C-8
L072 command 9-27

MA (See Monitor address)
MACHINE command 7-39
M a c h i n e i d e n t i fi e r 3 - 1 9 ; 6 - 8 . 1 ; D - 4
Macro C-8
Magnetic tape 1-4
ANSI labels 12-2,9
ANSI standard labeled 2-8,9
Assignment 12-1,5,21
Blank label 12-9
Block size 12-13
Block terminator 2-10
Checkpoint dump 13-2
C h e c k p o i n t fi l e 1 2 - 8 , 1 4
Code set A-12
Command rules 12-2
Conversion mode for 9-track tapes 12-7,14
Copying 2-7
C r e a t i n g fi l e s 1 2 - 5
Data formats 2-5,9; 1-1
Density 2-8; 7-54; 12-6,13
D e n s i t y s p e c i fi c a t i o n 1 2 - 2
Device type 12-6
Error processing 12-3
Error recovery 2-10
Expiration date 12-16
File accessability character 12-10,15
F i l e p o s i t i o n i n g 1 2 - 11
File sequence number 12-15
F i l e s e t c o n fi g u r a t i o n s 2 - 8
Generation number 12-15
Generation version number 12-16
L a b e l 2 - 8 ; 1 2 - 9 , 11 ; G - l
Label standard level 12-10
L a b e l v e r i fi c a t i o n 1 2 - 1 1
Labeled 9-59,64; 12-7,13,21
Load point 12-2
Maximum block size 9-62
M u l t i fi l e s e t 2 - 9 ; 1 2 - 1 1 , 1 5
Multivolume set 12-25
Noise block 9-62

60459680 H

Noise size 12-8,14
Nonstandard labeled 2-8
Obsolete tape formats 1-1
O v e r w r i t i n g l a b e l s 1 2 - 11
Parity 2-7,8,10
Parity Error 12-3
P h y s i c a l fi l e s t r u c t u r e 2 - 5
Processing option 12-3
Recording mode 2-7
Section number 12-15
S e t i d e n t i fi e r 1 2 - 1 5
Ta p e m a r k 2 - 8
Tr a i l e r s e q u e n c e 1 2 - 4
Unlabeled 9-4; 12-7,13
Unloading 12-5
V e r i fi c a t i o n 1 2 - 1 1
Volume name 12-25
Write ring 12-4
7-track 2-7,8
9-track 2-7,8
Magnetic tape activity 3-18
M a g n e t i c t a p e fi l e 9 - 4 3
MAP (See Matrix Array Processor)
Mass storage C-9
Mass storage activity 3-18; D-4
Mass storage, Alternate 2-15,16
Mass storage device 1-4; 2-15; N-l
M a s s s t o r a g e fi l e 2 - 6
Master device C-9
M a s t e r u s e r 1 4 - 11 , 1 2
Matrix Array Processor (MAP) 3-8
Resource usage 3-18
MAXFL (See Field length, maximum)
Memory)
M E R G E fi l e 1 4 - 1 6
Message Control System (MCS) 3-6
Message delimiters K-2
Message lockout, operator J-20
Message to network operator J-21
Message transmission key J-12,13; K-l,2
MFL command 7-39
MFLINK
Directives 10-23
Interactive use 10-27
MFLINK command 3-6,6.1; 10-22
MFQUEUE
D i r e c t i v e p r e fi x c h a r a c t e r 9 - 3 1
Routing directive 9-33
MFQUEUE command 3-6,6.1; 9-31
M i c r o c o m p u t e r fi l e t r a n s f e r s P - l
MODE command 6-22
Mode 4 terminals J-4
MODIFY command 14-5
MODIFY mode 10-8
MODIFY utility 14-8
MOVE command 8-48
MS command J-21
MSF (See Mass Storage Facility)

Index-9

M u l t i fi l e fi l e 2 - 3 , 4 ; C - 9
M u l t i fi l e s e t C - 9
M u l t i m a i n f r a m e c o n fi g u r a t i o n
M33 teletype 16-1; J-25
M35 teletype
16-1; J-25
M37 teletype
16-1; J-25
M38 teletype
16-1; J-25
M40 terminal
16-1; J-25

1-3; 2-15

NAM (See Network Access Method)
NAM/CCP network commands 8-26
NDL (See Network Definition Language)
Network 16-1; C-9; J-l
Applications 3-6; 7-32
C o n fi g u r a t i o n s 7 - 3 6
Processing modes 1-1
Network access device 1-5
Network Access Method (NAM)
1-1; 7-38
Network control character
J-10,21
Network Definition Language (NDL)
J-2,24
Network operator (NOP) C-9
Network processing unit (NPU)
1-5
Network type 6-8.1
NEW command 9-34
NEWPL file 14-16
No abort option 10-3
No-auto-drop status (ND) 8-27; 9-56
.NOCLR directive 4-31
NOEXIT command 3-12; 5-7; 6-24
Noise C-9
Noise size 12-8,14
Nonallocatable device C-9
NOP (See Network operator)
NORERUN command 7-40
Normal mode 8-2,4,7; A-3; E-l
NORMAL mode 8-4; A-3
Normalized input mode J-18; K-l
NOS/VE dual-state system 3-6
NOSORT command 8-29
NOSTEXT file 14-4
NOTE command 7-40
.NOTE directive 4-31
NPC= entry point 5-2; 15-43
NULL command 8-15
Numeric string 6-5
NUM function 6-16

Object code C-9
OC command J-21
OFFSW command 7-41
OLD command 10-28
O L D P L fi l e 1 4 - 1 7
ONEXIT command 5-7; 6-24
Online manuals 8-20.1,26

Index-10

ONSW command 7-42
OP command J-21
O p e r a n d o v e r fl o w e r r o r 6 - 2 3
Operands 6-5
O p e r a n d u n d e r fl o w e r r o r 6 - 2 3
Operating system level 6-7
O p e r a t i n g s y s t e m v a l u e 6 - 11
Operating system version D-2
O P L fi l e 1 4 - 4
OPL record type
15-3,6,15
OPLC record type
15-3,6,15
OPLD directory
15-24,33
OPLD record type
15-3,6,13
OPLEDIT command
14-8
Origin type C-9
OUT command 9-35
Output
Cards punched 3-19
Data E-2
Device selection J-21
Flow control J-21
Lines printed 3-19
L i s t i n g i d e n t i fi c a t i o n 2 - 2
P r i n t fi l e c o d e c o n v e r s i o n A - 3
Printed H-l
Processing 2-12; 7-62
Qu e u e d j o b 2 -1 2
Remote batch 2-12
Suppression of headers 8-4
Suspension 16-5,7
O U T P U T fi l e 2 - 11 ; 3 - 1 9 ; 7 - 6 8 ; 9 - 4 4 , 4 5
Output line
Aborting 16-5
Length 16-3
OVCAP record type 15-4
OVL record type 15-3
OVWRITE command 9-35

PA command J-22
PACK command 9-36
Pack name 10-3,29
Packet-switching network (PSN) 16-1; C-9
PACKNAM command 10-29
Page boundary 16-5
Page density 6-7
. PA G E d i r e c t i v e 4 - 3 2
Page length 6-7; J-23
Page size 6-7
Page wait 16-5; J-23
Page width 6-7; J-24
Panel compilation 14-10
P a n e l d e fi n i t i o n fi l e 1 4 - 1 0
Panel, full screen C-9
PANELIB 8-36
Paper length, line printer H-l
Paper size, line printer H-l

60459680 H

^

\

Paper tape
Control characters M-2
Corrections M-4
Input lines M-2
Operation M-l
Punch M-l
Punching off-line M-3
Punching online M-4
Reader M-l
Parameter C-9
Keyword 5-4
Order-dependent 5-4
Order-independent 5-4
Parity C-10
Magnetic tape 2-7,10
Parity processing J-22
Passive procedure 4-1; C-10; L-l
PASSWOR command 7-42
Password C-10
Batch 7-42
Changing 7-42
Interactive 7-42
Pause bit 7-4,22,44
PAUSE command 7-44
PBC command 11-9
PDU command 14-10
PE tape density 7-54
Peripheral equipment 1-4,5
Peripheral processor library 5-5
Peripheral processor (PP) 1-4; C-10
P e r m a n e n t fi l e 2 - 1 3 , 1 4 ; 1 0 - 1 0 , 1 5 , 4 5 , 4 6 ;
C-10
P e r m a n e n t fi l e a c t i v i t y 3 - 1 8 ; D - 4
P e r m a n e n t fi l e c a t a l o g 2 - 1 2
P e r m a n e n t fi l e d e v i c e C - 1 0
P e r m a n e n t fi l e f a m i l y C - 1 0
Permit category 10-3
PERMIT command 10-30
P e r s o n a l i d e n t i fi e r 3 - 3 , 1 3
| P F C a r r a y, 5 8 0 l i n e p r i n t e r 9 - 4 8 . 2 ; H - l , 6
PFC printer H-l
PFC (See Programmable format control)
PG command J-23
Physical line 16-3; K-l
P h y s i c a l m a i n f r a m e i d e n t i fi e r ( P I D ) 7 - 3 6
Physical record unit (PRU) 2-4; C-10; N-l
PID (See Physical identifier of mainframe)
PL command J-23
P l o t d i s p o s i t i o n 2 - 11 ; 9 - 4 5
Post radix C-10
POST terminal J-l
PP record type 15-3
PP (See Peripheral processor)
PPU record type 15-3
P r e fi x c h a r a c t e r, c o m m a n d 5 - 2
$ Prefix, command 5-2
P r e fi x t a b l e 1 5 - 2 5
P r e fi x t a b l e , r e c o r d 1 5 - 2 , 3 5

60459680 H

PRIMARY command 9-37
P r i m a r y fi l e 2 - 1 3 ; C - 1 0
Changing lines 8-42
Creation 9-34
Editing 8-1,39
Inserting lines 8-42
Line number overlap 8-41
Ty p e 2 - 11
//PRIMARY value 4-14
Print density H-l,7
P r i n t d i s p o s i t i o n 2 - 11 ; 9 - 4 4
Print trains A-3
Printer carriage control H-l
P r i n t i n g fi l e s 9 - 4 6
P r i o r i t y, j o b 3 - 9
P r i o r i t y, s c h e d u l i n g 3 - 7
Private auxiliary device C-10
P r i v a t e fi l e 1 0 - 3
.PROC directive 4-2
I n t e r a c t i v e f o r m a t 4 - 11
Menu format 4-22
PROC record type 15-3
Procedure C-10
Branching directives 4-38
Call 4-41
Checklist entries 4-13
Checklist patterns 4-14,15,16
Command record 4-4
Command section 4-3
Concatenation character 4-8
Data section 4-3,6,34.1
//DATA value 4-14
Default termination sequence 4-51
Directive syntax 4-9
Directives 4-2
Expansion control directives 4-33
Expansion processing 4-4,8
File directives 4-34.1
File search order 4-42
//FILE value 4-14
Formatting and Help directives 4-23
Formatting section 4-2
Help section 4-2
Inhibit character 4-6,7
Interactive help processing 4-25
Interactive parameter entry 4-4
Interactive parameter format 4-12
Menu 4-22
Menu help processing 4-25
Nesting level 4-1,14; 6-9
Noninteractive 4-1; L-l
Order-dependent parameter processing
4-53
Order-independent parameter processing
4-53
Parameter matching modes 4-53; L-2
Parameter substitution L-2
Passive L-l

Index-11

/^Sfev

//PRIMARY value 4-14
Processing 4-3
Prologue (See Prologue)
Requesting help 4-46
Special parameter values 4-14
Structure 4-2
Te r m i n a t i o n 4 - 4 1 , 4 7 , 5 1
P r o c e d u r e fi l e C - l l
Residence 4-2
Search order 4-42
Procedure header directive 4-2
I n t e r a c t i v e f o r m a t 4 - 11
Interactive parameter format 4-12
Menu format 4-22
P R O F I L C fi l e 1 4 - 11
PROFILE command 14-11
PROFILE directives 14-12
Program library 2-17; 14-5,14
Programmable format control (PFC)
I 9-48.2; H-l
Project number 7-4
P r o j e c t p r o fi l e fi l e 1 4 - 1 1
| Prologue 7-4,30,31,73; C-ll
Prologue, project C-ll
.PROMPT directive 4-32
PROTECT command 7-44
Protected command 3-13
PRU device C-ll
PRU (See Physical record unit)
PSN (See Packet-switching network)
Public auxiliary device C-ll
P u b l i c fi l e 1 0 - 4
P u n c h d i s p o s i t i o n 2 - 11 ; 9 - 4 5
P U N C H fi l e 2 - 11 ; 3 - 1 9 ; 9 - 4 5 ; F - 5 , 6
PUNCHB file 2-11; 3-19; 9-45; 11-9; F-6
PURGALL command 10-31
PURGE command 10-32
PW command J-24
P 8 fi l e 2 - 11 ; 3 - 1 9 ; 9 - 4 5 ; F - 7

QGET command 7-45
QTF (See Queued File Transfer Facility)
Queue priority C-ll
Q u e u e d fi l e 2 - 11 ; 7 - 4 5 ; 9 - 3 1 , 3 5 , 4 4 ; C - l l
Q u e u e d F i l e Tr a n s f e r F a c i l i t y ( Q T F ) 3 - 6
Queued job output 2-12
QUEUE7 command 7-46

RA (See Reference address)
RAE (See Extended memory reference address)
Random access 15-1,2; C-ll
Random access directory 15-11,17
R a n d o m a c c e s s fi l e C - l l
RBF (See Remote Batch Facility)

RBR command 11-9
RC command J-24
READ command 8-49
READ mode 10-8.1
Read-only permission C-ll
READAP mode 10-8
READMD mode 10-8
READUP mode 10-8
Real-time clock 7-58
RECLAIM command 10-33
Database 10-33
Directive options 10-39
Directives 10-36
Output listing 10-44
Record C-ll
Checksum 15-6,15
C o m m e n t s fi e l d 1 5 - 6 , 1 5
Copying 15-7
Creation date 15-6,15
File subdivision 2-3
Length 15-6,15
Name 15-15
P r e fi x t a b l e 1 5 - 2 , 2 5
S-type 15-1
Ty p e 2 - 3 ; 1 5 - 3 , 1 5 , 1 6
U-type 15-1
R e c o r d g r o u p i d e n t i fi e r ( G I D ) 1 5 - 2 1
Record splitting 9-9,10
Recording mode
Binary 2-7
Coded 2-7
RECORDING MODE IS BINARY statement, COBOL
2-7
RECORDING MODE IS CODED statement, COBOL
2-7
Records, relocatable 15-7
RECOVER command 8-30
Recoverable job 3-4; 8-30
Recoverable jobs 3-3
Recovery C-ll
Recovery processing 8-30,32
Reel number G-2
Reference address (RA) 1-2
Reference address (RA and RAE) C-ll
R e f e r e n c e r e c o r d i d e n t i fi e r ( R I D ) 1 5 - 2 1
REL record type 15-3,6,15
R e l e a s i n g fi l e s p a c e 9 - 2 2
R e l e a s i n g fi l e s 9 - 5 , 4 2 , 5 6 , 6 4
Relocatable records 15-7
Remote Batch Facility (RBF) 1-1; 3-1,6
Remote batch job 3-6.2; 9-50
Remote host 7-36; 9-31; C-12
Remote Host Facility (RHF) 7-38; C-12
Removable packs 7-57
RENAME command 9-37
REPLACE command 10-45
R e p l a c i n g fi l e s 1 0 - 4 5
REQUEST command 9-38; 12-21

■/*s%

,^^^\
Index-12

60459680 H

00^**-

RERUN command 7-50
RESEQ command 9-40
Reservation block 2-7
I Reserved format channels H-9
RESOURC command 7-51,55
Resource demand 7-14,51,54,56; 9-42
Resource limits 7-29
Resource overcommitment 7-55
I Resource usage 7-16.1,59,64,67; D-4
Resource usage, record of 3-18
Restart 13-1,2
RESTART command 13-2
RETURN command 7-54; 9-42
REVERT command 4-41,51
REWIND command 9-43
R e w i n d i n g fi l e s 9 - 4 3
RFL command 7-40,57
RFL= entry point 15-43
RFL (See Running field length)
RID (See Reference record identifier)
Rolled out C-12
ROLLOUT command 7-58
Rollout control 3-12
ROUTE command 3-6,6.1; 9-44
R o u t i n g fi l e s 9 - 3 1 , 4 4
RTIME command 7-58
Rubout M-2
Rubout characters C-12
RUN command 8-35
R u n n i n g fi e l d l e n g t h ( R F L ) 3 - 9 ; 7 - 4 0

S tape format 2-7,9,10; 9-10; 12-2
S-type record 15-1
Satellite coupler 1-5
SAVE command 10-46
Scheduler 3-9; 7-58
Scheduling priority 2-12; 3-6.2,7,9; C-12
SCOPE 2 Operating System 3-7; 7-46; 8-22
SCOPE 2 Station Facility (SSF) 7-38
SCOPY command 9-51
S c r a t c h fi l e s 2 - 1
SCREEN command 8-7
Screen formatting 8-36; 14-10
Screen mode 8-7; C-12
Scrolling mode 8-6.1
SDM= entry point 15-43
SE command J-24
SECHDR command 9-54
Secure login command 8-36
Secured mode 3-13
Secured system 9-55; 10-48,49; C-12
Security access categories 10-48
Security access level 7-33,61; 9-3,55;
10-2,49; C-l
Security administrator C-12
Security count C-12

60459680 H

Security features 3-13; 8-36; 9-54,55;
10-48,49
Security permissions 7-33
Security unlock status C-12
S e m i - p r i v a t e fi l e 1 0 - 4
Sense switch 6-12; 7-41,42,73
Separator, command 5-2
Sequence number C-12; G-4,8,9
Sequential access 15-1; C-12
S e q u e n t i a l ( S Q ) fi l e C - 1 2
Service class 2-12; 3-6.2,7;
7-5,7,18,23,33; C-13; D-2
SET command 6-25
.SET directive 4-34
S e t i d e n t i fi c a t i o n G - 4 , 8 , 9
S e t i d e n t i fi e r 1 2 - 1 5
SETASL command 7-59
SETCORE command 7-60
SETFAL command 9-55
SETFS command 9-56
SETJAL command 7-61
SETJOB command 7-62
SETJSL command 7-64
SETPFAC command 10-48
SETPFAL command 10-49
SETPR command 7-64
SETTL command 7-64
SHELL command 7-66
SHELL permissions 7-32
Shell program 7-66
Short PRU C-13
SHOW command 8-36
SI format tapes 2-9,10; 9-10,59,64
SKIP command 6-30
SKIPEI command 9-56
SKIPF command 9-57
SKIPFB command 9-57
Skipping commands 6-16,17,18
SKIPR command 9-58
Software, system 1-5
SORT command 9-58
S o r t fl a g 8 - 2 9
S o r t i n g fi l e s 8 - 2 9 ; 9 - 4 0 , 5 8
Source code C-13
Special editing mode 8-2; C-13; J-24
SRU (See System resource unit)
Stack purging 7-39
Standard labeled tape C-13
STIME command 7-67
Store and forward 7-38
S t o r i n g fi l e s 1 0 - 4 5 , 4 6
STR function 6-16.1
STRB function 6-16.2
STRD function 6-16.3
String C-13
SUBMIT command 7-68
Directives 7-68
Transparent submit mode 7-68

Index-13

S u b m i t fi l e 7 - 6 8
S u b s y s t e m 6 - 7 ; 8 - 11 ; 1 0 - 5
Subsystem, default 8-15
S u b s y s t e m fl a g C - 1 3
I Subsystem selection commands 8-1,11
SWITCH command 7-73
Symbolic names, Flow control command

I 6-7,25
Synchronous terminal output 16-5
SYSEDIT, SC directive 5-2
System access category set C-13
System access level C-13
System code G-4,8,9
System error codes 6-9,10
S y s t e m fi l e C - 1 3
SYSTEM File 10-16
System library 5-2; 10-16; 15-43
System monitor 1-3
System origin job 3-6.2
System prologue 7-30
System resource unit (SRU) 3-8;
7-59,64,67; C-13; D-4
L i m i t 3 - 11
Resource usage 3-18
I System resource usage 7-16.1
System resources, accounting of 3-8; 7-4
System security features 3-13; 8-36
System symbols, cross reference listing 14-4
System text 14-4
S Y S T E X T fi l e 1 4 - 5

TAF (See Transaction Facility)
Tape assignment 12-5,21
Ta p e d e n s i t y 7 - 5 4
Ta p e d e n s i t y i d e n t i fi e r 7 - 5 4
Ta p e f o r m a t C - 1 3
Ta p e f o r m a t s 2 - 7 , 9 ; 1 2 - 1 3 ; 1 - 1
Ta p e f o r m a t s , o b s o l e t e 1 - 1
Tape management 12-1
Tape mark C-13
Ta p e m a r k s 2 - 8 ; 1 2 - 2
Ta p e o w n e r i d e n t i fi c a t i o n G - 2
Tape (See also Magnetic tape)
Ta p e Ve r i fi c a t i o n F a c i l i t y ( T V F ) 3 - 6
TA P E n fi l e 11 - 1 0
TC command J-2,25
TCOPY command 2-7; 9-59
TDU command 8-8.1
TDUMP command 9-62
Te k t e r m i n a l J - l
Te k t r o n i x 4 0 1 0 / 4 0 1 4 t e r m i n a l 1 6 - 1 ; J - 2 5
Te l e t y p e w r i t e r ( T T Y ) 1 6 - 1 ; J - l
| Te l e v i d e o t e r m i n a l s 8 - 6 . 2 , 8 ; 1 6 - 1
Te m p o r a r y fi l e C - 1 3
Terminal
Categories J-4

Character conversion E-l
Characteristics 8-9; J-l
Classes 16-1; J-l,24,25
Control 16-9
D e fi n i t i o n c o m m a n d s 1 6 - 2
Display of characteristics J-8
Input/output conventions 16-2
Name C-13
Output 16-5
Session 3-3
Te r m i n a l a t t r i b u t e s 8 - 9
Te r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r s e t - m o d e 6 - 6
Te r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s 3 - 5 ; J - l
Te r m i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , C C P d e f a u l t J - 2
Terminal characteristics, NDL default
J-2,24
Te r m i n a l c l a s s e s J - l
Terminal control commands 8-2
Te r m i n a l d e fi n i t i o n c o m m a n d s 1 6 - 4 ; J - l
Te r m i n a l d e fi n i t i o n fi l e 8 - 6 . 1 , 7 , 8 . 1
Te r m i n a l
display
mode
6-8.1
|
Te r m i n a l i d e n t i fi e r ( T I D ) 2 - 1 2
Terminal messages 7-40
Terminal output
Asynchronous 16-5
Synchronous 16-5
Te r m i n a t i n g a h o s t - t e r m i n a l c o n n e c t i o n J - 2 6
Te r m i n a t i n g i n p u t l i n e s 1 6 - 3
Te r m i n a t i o n c h a r a c t e r 1 6 - 6 ; J - 8
Te r m i n a t i o n s e q u e n c e 1 6 - 4 , 6 ; C - 1 4 ; J - 8
Terminator, command 5-2,3
TERMLIB 8-6.1,7,8.1
TEXT command 8-37
Te x t e d i t o r f a c i l i t y 1 4 - 1
Te x t e d i t o r s 1 4 - 1 , 1 8
Te x t m o d e 8 - 3 7
TEXT record type 15-3
T I D ( S e e Te r m i n a l i d e n t i fi e r )
Time of the week 6-7
Ti m e s l i c e C - 1 4
Ti m e d / E v e n t r o l l o u t C - 1 4
TIMEOUT command 8-9
Ti m e o u t p e r i o d 3 - 5
Ti m e o u t s t a t u s 8 - 9
TM command J-26
Tracks 2-7
T r a n s a c t i o n F a c i l i t y ( TA F ) 1 - 1 ; 3 - 6
Transferring files between mainframes
9-31,49,50; 10-22
Tr a n s m i s s i o n k e y K - l
Transmitting input K-l
Tr a n s p a r e n t i n p u t m o d e C - 1 4 ; J - l 1 , 1 8 , 2 7 ;
K-l
Transparent submit mode 7-68,70; C-14
TRMDEF command 8-9; 16-2; J-2
TTY (See Teletypewriter)
T V F ( S e e Ta p e v e r i fi c a t i o n f a c i l i t y )
Type
of
network
6-8.1
|

S**^$K

/•**™^\

Index-14

60459680 H

/^^V

U-type record 15-1
UCF record type 15-4
UCLP (See Output, Lines printed)
UCLV (See Output, Lines printed)
UCPC (See Output, Cards punched)
UEAC (See Application, Job usage)
UEAD (See Adder activity)
UECP (See Accumulated central processor time)
UEMS (See Mass storage activity)
UEMT (See Magnetic tape activity)
UEPF (See Permanent file activity)
UHLa G-ll
UHLa label G-l
UJN (See User job name)
ULIB command 15-34
ULIB directory 15-32,33
ULIB record type 15-3,6
Unlabeled tape 12-7,13
UNLOAD command 7-54; 9-64
UNLOCK command 9-65
UPDATE command 14-14
UPDATE mode 10-8
UPL record type 15-15
UPLx record type 15-4
UPROC command 7-73
US code A-3
USECPU command 7-74
User break processing 16-4
User break 1 16-6; C-14; J-6,7
U se r b re a k 2 1 6 -6 ; C -1 4 ; J-8
USER command 7-74
User header label G-l
User index 7-30; C-14
User index hash 3-8; 7-14; C-14; D-2
User job name (UJN) 3-8; 7-18,23,62;
C-14; D-2
User label G-ll
User library 2-17; 15-1,32,33,34,43
User name 2-14; C-14
User name, alternate 10-5
User name LIBRARY 8-22,26
User number C-14
User permissions 7-31
User program 1-5
User prologue (See Prologue)
User trailer label G-l
User validation 3-8; 7-28,74
User validation limits 7-5
User volume label G-l
Using XMODEM P-l
UT terminal J-l
UTLa G-ll
UTLa label G-l
UVLa G-ll
UVLa label G-l

60459680 H

V a l i d a t i o n fi l e C - 1 4
Va l i d a t i o n l i m i t s 7 - 2 8
VERIFY command 9-65
V e r i f y i n g fi l e s 9 - 6 5 ; 1 5 - 3 5
VFU
load
procedure
H-2,4.2
|
VFYLIB command 15-3,35
Vo l u m e C - 1 4
Vo l u m e a c c e s s i b i l i t y c h a r a c t e r, t a p e 1 2 - 1 0 . 1 |
Vo l u m e h e a d e r l a b e l G - l , 2
Vo l u m e s e r i a l n u m b e r ( V S N ) 1 2 - 1 , 6 , 11 , 2 5 ; |
C-15; G-2
V0L1 label 2-8,9; 12-1,9; G-l,2
VSN command 12-25
VSN (See Volume serial number)
VSOS (See Virtual Storage Operating System)

W a i t d i s p o s i t i o n 2 - 11 , 1 2 ; 9 - 4 5
Wait-if-busy option 10-6
WBR command 11-10
Weekday 6-7
WHATJSN command 8-37
WHILE command 6-31
Word C-15
WRITE command 8-51
W r i t e i n t e r l o c k 2 - 1 5 ; 9 - 2 6 , 6 5 ; C-15
WRITE mode 10-8.1
Write ring C-15
WRITEF command 9-68
WRITEN command 8-52
WRITER command 9-68

X command 8-38
X format 1-3
X format tapes 9-59,64
X.25 Public data network 7-36,38
X.25 terminals J-4
XEDIT command 14-18
XL command J-27
XMODEM command 8-38; P-l
X3.64 terminal J-l

YA N K s t a t u s 1 5 - 6 , 1 5

Zero byte terminator C-15
Zero length PRU C-15
Z Z Z D U M P fi l e 3 - 1 2 ; 11 - 5 , 6 , 7
Z Z Z Z D M B fi l e 11 - 1 , 3
ZZZZTRM 8-6.1,7
Z Z Z Z Z L D fi l e 1 3 - 1
Z Z Z Z Z x x fi l e s 1 3 - 1

Index-15

026 punch code A-3; F-3
029 punch code A-3; F-3
200 User Terminal 16-1; J-25
2741 terminal, ATTN key 16-8
5/7/9 multipunch F-3,5
533/536 printer 9-48; A-4; H-l,2,4
580 line printer
Carriage control array H-7
Format controls H-l
PFC array H-l
Spacing code 9-48.2
585 line printer 9-48; H-l,2
5870 Non Impact Printer 9-44; H-l
6-bit display code 8-2; 9-23

6/12-bit display code 8-2; 9-23
6/7/8/9 multipunch 2-6; C-15; F-2
6/7/9 multipunch 2-6; C-15; F-2
6PP record type
15-4
63-character set
A-l
64-character set
A-l
7-bit ASCII code
9-23; A-l
7/8/9 multipunch
2-6; 3-1; C-15; F-2
7/9 multipunch
F-5
7PP record type
15-4
7 7 t a b l e ( s e e P r e fi x t a b l e , r e c o r d ) 1 5 - 2
7 7 0 0 t a b l e ( s e e P r e fi x t a b l e , r e c o r d ) 1 5 - 2
9-54,55; 10-48,49
95-character set A-l

/"^^?\

Index-16

60459680 H

COMMENT SHEET
MANUAL TITLE:
PUBLICATION NO.

Control Data NOS Version 2 Reference Set,
Volume 3, System Commands
60459680

REVISION:

NAME:
COMPANY:
STREET ADDRESS:
CITY:

.STATE:

ZIP CODE:

This form i$ net intended to be used as an order blank. Control Data Corporation welcomes your evaluation of
this manual. Please indicate any errors, suggested additions or deletions, or general comments below (please
include page number references).

D Please Reply

D No Reply Necessary

/fP^\

NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN U.S.A.
FOLD ON DOTTED LINES AND TAPE

FOLD

FOLD

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 8241 MINNEAPOLIS. MN
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

CONTRpL DATA
Technology and Publications Division
ARH219
4201 North Lexington Avenue
Saint Paul, MN 55126-6198

FOLD

FOLD



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 818
Creator                         : ScanSnap Manager
Producer                        : Mac OS X 10.5.8 Quartz PDFContext
Create Date                     : 2009:10:21 10:21:55Z
Modify Date                     : 2009:10:21 10:21:55Z